diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18357-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 237742 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18357-h/18357-h.htm | 13217 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18357.txt | 12909 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18357.zip | bin | 0 -> 236386 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
7 files changed, 26142 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/18357-h.zip b/18357-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..339f796 --- /dev/null +++ b/18357-h.zip diff --git a/18357-h/18357-h.htm b/18357-h/18357-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a3e0296 --- /dev/null +++ b/18357-h/18357-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,13217 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of A Jacobite Exile, by G. A. Henty</title> +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + caption { font-weight: bold; letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial"; + text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; } + div {text-align: center} + em {font-style: italic} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h1.pg {text-align: center; text-transform: none; letter-spacing: 0em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3.pg {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0em} + hr {height: 5px} + p {text-indent: 4% } + strong {font-weight: bold} + table {text-align: center} + td { font-family: "Arial";} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right; vertical-align: top } + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} + thead { font-weight: bold;} + p.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 0em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + border: solid black; + height: 5px; } + pre {font-size: 70%;} +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> +<h1 class="pg">The Project Gutenberg eBook, A Jacobite Exile, by G. A. Henty</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p class="noindent">Title: A Jacobite Exile</p> +<p class="noindent"> Being the Adventures of a Young Englishman in the Service of Charles the Twelfth of Sweden</p> +<p class="noindent">Author: G. A. Henty</p> +<p class="noindent">Release Date: May 8, 2006 [eBook #18357]<br /> +Most recently updated: November 9, 2013</p> +<p class="noindent">Language: English</p> +<p class="noindent">Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p class="noindent">***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A JACOBITE EXILE***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3 class="pg">E-text prepared by Martin Robb</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h1>A Jacobite Exile:</h1> +<h2>Being the Adventures of a Young Englishman +in the Service of Charles the Twelfth of Sweden<br /> +<br /> +<br /> +By G. A. Henty.</h2> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<hr /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<center> +<table summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption>Contents</caption> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface</a>.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Spy in the Household.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Denounced.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Rescue.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In Sweden.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Narva.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Prisoner.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Exchanged.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Passage of the Dwina.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In Warsaw.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In Evil Plight.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">With Brigands.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Treed By Wolves.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Rescued Party.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Battle Of Clissow.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">An Old Acquaintance.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In England Again.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch17">Chapter 17</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The North Coach.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch18">Chapter 18</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Confession.</td> +</tr> +</table> +</center> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h2><a id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> + +<p>My Dear Lads,</p> + +<p>Had I attempted to write you an account of the whole of the +adventurous career of Charles the Twelfth of Sweden, it would, in +itself, have filled a bulky volume, to the exclusion of all other +matter; and a youth, who fought at Narva, would have been a +middle-aged man at the death of that warlike monarch, before the +walls of Frederickshall. I have, therefore, been obliged to confine +myself to the first three years of his reign, in which he crushed +the army of Russia at Narva, and laid the then powerful republic of +Poland prostrate at his feet. In this way, only, could I obtain +space for the private adventures and doings of Charlie Carstairs, +the hero of the story. The details of the wars of Charles the Twelfth +were taken from the military history, written at his command by his +chamberlain, Adlerfeld; from a similar narrative by a Scotch +gentleman in his service; and from Voltaire's history. The latter +is responsible for the statement that the trade of Poland was +almost entirely in the hands of Scotch, French, and Jewish +merchants, the Poles themselves being sharply divided into the two +categories of nobles and peasants.</p> + +<p>Yours sincerely,</p> + +<p>G. A. Henty.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: A Spy in the Household.</h2> + +<p>On the borders of Lancashire and Westmoreland, two centuries +since, stood Lynnwood, a picturesque mansion, still retaining +something of the character of a fortified house. It was ever a +matter of regret to its owner, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs, that his +grandfather had so modified its construction, by levelling one side +of the quadrangle, and inserting large mullion windows in that +portion inhabited by the family, that it was in no condition to +stand a siege, in the time of the Civil War.</p> + +<p>Sir Marmaduke was, at that time, only a child, but he still +remembered how the Roundhead soldiers had lorded it there, when his +father was away fighting with the army of the king; how they had +seated themselves at the board, and had ordered his mother about as +if she had been a scullion, jeering her with cruel words as to what +would have been the fate of her husband, if they had caught him +there, until, though but eight years old, he had smitten one of the +troopers, as he sat, with all his force. What had happened after +that, he did not recollect, for it was not until a week after the +Roundheads had ridden away that he found himself in his bed, with +his mother sitting beside him, and his head bandaged with cloths +dipped in water. He always maintained that, had the house been +fortified, it could have held out until help arrived, although, in +later years, his father assured him that it was well it was not in +a position to offer a defence.</p> + +<p>"We were away down south, Marmaduke, and the Roundheads were +masters of this district, at the time. They would have battered the +place around your mother's ears, and, likely as not, have burnt it +to the ground. As it was, I came back here to find it whole and +safe, except that the crop-eared scoundrels had, from pure +wantonness, destroyed the pictures and hacked most of the furniture +to pieces. I took no part in the later risings, seeing that they +were hopeless, and therefore preserved my property, when many +others were ruined.</p> + +<p>"No, Marmaduke, it is just as well that the house was not +fortified. I believe in fighting, when there is some chance, even a +slight one, of success, but I regard it as an act of folly, to +throw away a life when no good can come of it."</p> + +<p>Still, Sir Marmaduke never ceased to regret that Lynnwood was +not one of the houses that had been defended, to the last, against +the enemies of the king. At the Restoration he went, for the first +time in his life, to London, to pay his respects to Charles the +Second. He was well received, and although he tired, in a very short +time, of the gaieties of the court, he returned to Lynnwood with +his feelings of loyalty to the Stuarts as strong as ever. He +rejoiced heartily when the news came of the defeat of Monmouth at +Sedgemoor, and was filled with rage and indignation when James +weakly fled, and left his throne to be occupied by Dutch +William.</p> + +<p>From that time, he became a strong Jacobite, and emptied his +glass nightly "to the king over the water." In the north the +Jacobites were numerous, and at their gatherings treason was freely +talked, while arms were prepared, and hidden away for the time when +the lawful king should return to claim his own. Sir Marmaduke was +deeply concerned in the plot of 1696, when preparations had been +made for a great Jacobite rising throughout the country. Nothing +came of it, for the Duke of Berwick, who was to have led it, failed +in getting the two parties who were concerned to come to an +agreement. The Jacobites were ready to rise, directly a French army +landed. The French king, on the other hand, would not send an army +until the Jacobites had risen, and the matter therefore fell +through, to Sir Marmaduke's indignation and grief. But he had no +words strong enough to express his anger and disgust when he found +that, side by side with the general scheme for a rising, a plot had +been formed by Sir George Barclay, a Scottish refugee, to +assassinate the king, on his return from hunting in Richmond +Forest.</p> + +<p>"It is enough to drive one to become a Whig," he exclaimed. "I +am ready to fight Dutch William, for he occupies the place of my +rightful sovereign, but I have no private feud with him, and, if I +had, I would run any man through who ventured to propose to me a +plot to assassinate him. Such scoundrels as Barclay would bring +disgrace on the best cause in the world. Had I heard as much as a +whisper of it, I would have buckled on my sword, and ridden to +London to warn the Dutchman of his danger. However, as it seems +that Barclay had but some forty men with him, most of them foreign +desperadoes, the Dutchman must see that English gentlemen, however +ready to fight against him fairly, would have no hand in so +dastardly a plot as this.</p> + +<p>"Look you, Charlie, keep always in mind that you bear the name +of our martyred king, and be ready ever to draw your sword in the +cause of the Stuarts, whether it be ten years hence, or forty, that +their banner is hoisted again; but keep yourself free from all +plots, except those that deal with fair and open warfare. Have no +faith whatever in politicians, who are ever ready to use the +country gentry as an instrument for gaining their own ends. Deal +with your neighbours, but mistrust strangers, from whomsoever they +may say they come."</p> + +<p>Which advice Charlie, at that time thirteen years old, gravely +promised to follow. He had naturally inherited his father's +sentiments, and believed the Jacobite cause to be a sacred one. He +had fought and vanquished Alured Dormay, his second cousin, and two +years his senior, for speaking of King James' son as the Pretender, +and was ready, at any time, to do battle with any boy of his own +age, in the same cause. Alured's father, John Dormay, had ridden +over to Lynnwood, to complain of the violence of which his son had +been the victim, but he obtained no redress from Sir Marmaduke.</p> + +<p>"The boy is a chip of the old block, cousin, and he did right. I +myself struck a blow at the king's enemies, when I was but eight +years old, and got my skull well-nigh cracked for my pains. It is +well that the lads were not four years older, for then, instead of +taking to fisticuffs, their swords would have been out, and as my +boy has, for the last four years, been exercised daily in the use +of his weapon, it might happen that, instead of Alured coming home +with a black eye, and, as you say, a missing tooth, he might have +been carried home with a sword thrust through his body.</p> + +<p>"It was, to my mind, entirely the fault of your son. I should +have blamed Charlie, had he called the king at Westminster Dutch +William, for, although each man has a right to his own opinions, he +has no right to offend those of others--besides, at present it is +as well to keep a quiet tongue as to a matter that words cannot set +right. In the same way, your son had no right to offend others by +calling James Stuart the Pretender.</p> + +<p>"Certainly, of the twelve boys who go over to learn what the +Rector of Apsley can teach them, more than half are sons of +gentlemen whose opinions are similar to my own.</p> + +<p>"It would be much better, John Dormay, if, instead of +complaining of my boy, you were to look somewhat to your own. I +marked, the last time he came over here, that he was growing +loutish in his manners, and that he bore himself with less respect +to his elders than is seemly in a lad of that age. He needs +curbing, and would carry himself all the better if, like Charlie, +he had an hour a day at sword exercise. I speak for the boy's good. +It is true that you yourself, being a bitter Whig, mix but little +with your neighbours, who are for the most part the other way of +thinking; but this may not go on for ever, and you would, I +suppose, like Alured, when he grows up, to mix with others of his +rank in the county; and it would be well, therefore, that he should +have the accomplishments and manners of young men of his own +age."</p> + +<p>John Dormay did not reply hastily--it was his policy to keep on +good terms with his wife's cousin, for the knight was a man of far +higher consideration, in the county, than himself. His smile, +however, was not a pleasant one, as he rose and said:</p> + +<p>"My mission has hardly terminated as I expected, Sir Marmaduke. +I came to complain, and I go away advised somewhat sharply."</p> + +<p>"Tut, tut, man!" the knight said. "I speak only for the lad's +good, and I am sure that you cannot but feel the truth of what I +have said. What does Alured want to make enemies for? It may be +that it was only my son who openly resented his ill-timed remarks, +but you may be sure that others were equally displeased, and maybe +their resentment will last much longer than that which was quenched +in a fair stand-up fight. Certainly, there need be no malice +between the boys. Alured's defeat may even do him good, for he +cannot but feel that it is somewhat disgraceful to be beaten by one +nearly a head shorter than he."</p> + +<p>"There is, no doubt, something in what you say, Sir Marmaduke," +John Dormay said blandly, "and I will make it my business that, +should the boys meet again as antagonists, Alured shall be able to +give a better account of himself."</p> + +<p>"He is a disagreeable fellow," Sir Marmaduke said to himself, as +he watched John Dormay ride slowly away through the park, "and, if +it were not that he is husband to my cousin Celia, I would have +nought to do with him. She is my only kinswoman, and, were aught to +happen to Charlie, that lout, her son, would be the heir of +Lynnwood. I should never rest quiet in my grave, were a Whig master +here.</p> + +<p>"I would much rather that he had spoken wrathfully, when I +straightly gave him my opinion of the boy, who is growing up an +ill-conditioned cub. It would have been more honest. I hate to see +a man smile, when I know that he would fain swear. I like my cousin +Celia, and I like her little daughter Ciceley, who takes after her, +and not after John Dormay; but I would that the fellow lived on the +other side of England. He is out of his place here, and, though men +do not speak against him in my presence, knowing that he is a sort +of kinsman, I have never heard one say a good word for him.</p> + +<p>"It is not only because he is a Whig. There are other Whig +gentry in the neighbourhood, against whom I bear no ill will, and +can meet at a social board in friendship. It would be hard if +politics were to stand between neighbours. It is Dormay's manner +that is against him. If he were anyone but Celia's husband, I would +say that he is a smooth-faced knave, though I altogether lack proof +of my words, beyond that he has added half a dozen farms to his +estate, and, in each case, there were complaints that, although +there was nothing contrary to the law, it was by sharp practice +that he obtained possession, lending money freely in order to build +houses and fences and drains, and then, directly a pinch came, +demanding the return of his advance.</p> + +<p>"Such ways may pass in a London usurer, but they don't do for us +country folk; and each farm that he has taken has closed the doors +of a dozen good houses to John Dormay. I fear that Celia has a bad +time with him, though she is not one to complain. I let Charlie go +over to Rockley, much oftener than I otherwise should do, for her +sake and Ciceley's, though I would rather, a hundred times, that +they should come here. Not that the visits are pleasant, when they +do come, for I can see that Celia is always in fear, lest I should +ask her questions about her life at home; which is the last thing +that I should think of doing, for no good ever comes of +interference between man and wife, and, whatever I learned, I could +not quarrel with John Dormay without being altogether separated +from Celia and the girl.</p> + +<p>"I am heartily glad that Charlie has given Alured a sound +thrashing. The boy is too modest. He only said a few words, last +evening, about the affair, and I thought that only a blow or two +had been exchanged. It was as much as I could do, not to rub my +hands and chuckle, when his father told me all about it. However, I +must speak gravely to Charlie. If he takes it up, every time a Whig +speaks scornfully of the king, he will be always in hot water, and, +were he a few years older, would become a marked man. We have got +to bide our time, and, except among friends, it is best to keep a +quiet tongue until that time comes."</p> + +<p>To Sir Marmaduke's disappointment, three more years went on +without the position changing in any way. Messengers went and came +between France and the English Jacobites, but no movement was made. +The failure of the assassination plot had strengthened William's +hold on the country, for Englishmen love fair play and hate +assassination, so that many who had, hitherto, been opponents of +William of Orange, now ranged themselves on his side, declaring +they could no longer support a cause that used assassination as one +of its weapons. More zealous Jacobites, although they regretted the +assassination plot, and were as vehement of their denunciations of +its authors as were the Whigs, remained staunch in their fidelity +to "the king over the water," maintaining stoutly that his majesty +knew nothing whatever of this foul plot, and that his cause was in +no way affected by the misconduct of a few men, who happened to be +among its adherents.</p> + +<p>At Lynnwood things went on as usual. Charlie continued his +studies, in a somewhat desultory way, having but small affection +for books; kept up his fencing lesson diligently and learned to +dance; quarrelled occasionally with his cousin Alured, spent a good +deal of his time on horseback, and rode over, not unfrequently, to +Rockley, choosing, as far as possible, the days and hours when he +knew that Alured and his father were likely to be away. He went +over partly for his own pleasure, but more in compliance with his +father's wishes.</p> + +<p>"My cousin seldom comes over, herself," the latter said. "I +know, right well, that it is from no slackness of her own, but that +her husband likes not her intimacy here. It is well, then, that you +should go over and see them, for it is only when you bring her that +I see Ciceley. I would she were your sister, lad, for she is a +bright little maid, and would make the old house lively."</p> + +<p>Therefore, once a week or so, Charlie rode over early to +Rockley, which was some five miles distant, and brought back +Ciceley, cantering on her pony by his side, escorting her home +again before nightfall. Ciceley's mother wondered, sometimes, that +her husband, who in most matters set his will in opposition to +hers, never offered any objection to the girl's visits to Lynnwood. +She thought that, perhaps, he was pleased that there should be an +intimacy between some member, at least, of his family, and Sir +Marmaduke's. There were so few houses at which he or his were +welcome, it was pleasant to him to be able to refer to the close +friendship of his daughter with their cousins at Lynnwood. Beyond +this, Celia, who often, as she sat alone, turned the matter over in +her mind, could see no reason he could have for permitting the +intimacy. That he would permit it without some reason was, as her +experience had taught her, out of the question.</p> + +<p>Ciceley never troubled her head about the matter. Her visits to +Lynnwood were very pleasant to her. She was two years younger than +Charlie Carstairs; and although, when he had once brought her to +the house, he considered that his duties were over until the hour +arrived for her return, he was sometimes ready to play with her, +escort her round the garden, or climb the trees for fruit or birds' +eggs for her.</p> + +<p>Such little courtesies she never received from Alured, who was +four years her senior, and who never interested himself in the +slightest degree in her. He was now past eighteen, and was +beginning to regard himself as a man, and had, to Ciceley's +satisfaction, gone a few weeks before, to London, to stay with an +uncle who had a place at court, and was said to be much in the +confidence of some of the Whig lords.</p> + +<p>Sir Marmaduke was, about this time, more convinced than ever +that, ere long, the heir of the Stuarts would come over from +France, with men, arms, and money, and would rally round him the +Jacobites of England and Scotland. Charlie saw but little of him, +for he was frequently absent, from early morning until late at +night, riding to visit friends in Westmoreland and Yorkshire, +sometimes being away two or three days at a time. Of an evening, +there were meetings at Lynnwood, and at these strangers, who +arrived after nightfall, were often present. Charlie was not +admitted to any of these gatherings.</p> + +<p>"You will know all about it in time, lad," his father said. "You +are too young to bother your head with politics, and you would lose +patience in a very short time. I do myself, occasionally. Many who +are the foremost in talk, when there is no prospect of doing +anything, draw back when the time approaches for action, and it is +sickening to listen to the timorous objections and paltry arguments +that are brought forward. Here am I, a man of sixty, ready to risk +life and fortune in the good cause, and there are many, not half my +age, who speak with as much caution as if they were graybeards. +Still, lad, I have no doubt that the matter will straighten itself +out, and come right in the end. It is always the most trying time, +for timorous hearts, before the first shot of a battle is fired. +Once the engagement commences, there is no time for fear. The +battle has to be fought out, and the best way to safety is to win a +victory. I have not the least doubt that, as soon as it is known +that the king has landed, there will be no more shilly-shallying or +hesitation. Every loyal man will mount his horse, and call out his +tenants, and, in a few days, England will be in a blaze from end to +end."</p> + +<p>Charlie troubled himself but little with what was going on. His +father had promised him that, when the time did come, he should +ride by his side, and with that promise he was content to wait, +knowing that, at present, his strength would be of but little +avail, and that every week added somewhat to his weight and +sinew.</p> + +<p>One day he was in the garden with Ciceley. The weather was hot, +and the girl was sitting, in a swing, under a shady tree, +occasionally starting herself by a push with her foot on the +ground, and then swaying gently backward and forward, until the +swing was again at rest. Charlie was seated on the ground, near +her, pulling the ears of his favourite dog, and occasionally +talking to her, when a servant came out, with a message that his +father wanted to speak to him.</p> + +<p>"I expect I shall be back in a few minutes, Ciceley, so don't +you wander away till I come. It is too hot today to be hunting for +you, all over the garden, as I did when you hid yourself last +week."</p> + +<p>It was indeed but a short time until he returned.</p> + +<p>"My father only wanted to tell me that he is just starting for +Bristowe's, and, as it is over twenty miles away, he may not return +until tomorrow."</p> + +<p>"I don't like that man's face who brought the message to you, +Charlie."</p> + +<p>"Don't you?" the boy said carelessly. "I have not noticed him +much. He has not been many months with us.</p> + +<p>"What are you thinking of?" he asked, a minute later, seeing +that his cousin looked troubled.</p> + +<p>"I don't know that I ought to tell you, Charlie. You know my +father does not think the same way as yours about things."</p> + +<p>"I should rather think he doesn't," Charlie laughed. "There is +no secret about that, Ciceley; but they don't quarrel over it. Last +time your father and mother came over here, I dined with them for +the first time, and I noticed there was not a single word said +about politics. They chatted over the crops, and the chances of a +war in Europe, and of the quarrel between Holstein and Denmark, and +whether the young king of Sweden would aid the duke, who seems to +be threatened by Saxony as well as by Denmark. I did not know +anything about it, and thought it was rather stupid; but my father +and yours both seemed of one mind, and were as good friends as if +they were in equal agreement on all other points. But what has that +to do with Nicholson, for that is the man's name who came out just +now?"</p> + +<p>"It does not seem to have much to do with it," she said +doubtfully, "and yet, perhaps it does. You know my mother is not +quite of the same opinion as my father, although she never says so +to him; but, when we are alone together, sometimes she shakes her +head and says she fears that trouble is coming, and it makes her +very unhappy. One day I was in the garden, and they were talking +loudly in the dining room--at least, he was talking loudly. Well, +he said--But I don't know whether I ought to tell you, +Charlie."</p> + +<p>"Certainly you ought not, Ciceley. If you heard what you were +not meant to hear, you ought never to say a word about it to +anyone."</p> + +<p>"But it concerns you and Sir Marmaduke."</p> + +<p>"I cannot help that," he said stoutly. "People often say things +of each other, in private, especially if they are out of temper, +that they don't quite mean, and it would make terrible mischief if +such things were repeated. Whatever your father said, I do not want +to hear it, and it would be very wrong of you to repeat it."</p> + +<p>"I am not going to repeat it, Charlie. I only want to say that I +do not think my father and yours are very friendly together, which +is natural, when my father is all for King William, and your father +for King James. He makes no secret of that, you know."</p> + +<p>Charlie nodded.</p> + +<p>"That is right enough, Ciceley, but still, I don't understand in +the least what it has to do with the servant."</p> + +<p>"It has to do with it," she said pettishly, starting the swing +afresh, and then relapsing into silence until it again came to a +standstill.</p> + +<p>"I think you ought to know," she said suddenly. "You see, +Charlie, Sir Marmaduke is very kind to me, and I love him dearly, +and so I do you, and I think you ought to know, although it may be +nothing at all."</p> + +<p>"Well, fire away then, Ciceley. There is one thing you may be +quite sure of, whatever you tell me, it is like telling a brother, +and I shall never repeat it to anyone."</p> + +<p>"Well, it is this. That man comes over sometimes to see my +father. I have seen him pass my window, three or four times, and go +in by the garden door into father's study. I did not know who he +was, but it did seem funny his entering by that door, as if he did +not want to be seen by anyone in the house. I did not think +anything more about it, till I saw him just now, then I knew him +directly. If I had seen him before, I should have told you at once, +but I don't think I have."</p> + +<p>"I daresay not, Ciceley. He does not wait at table, but is under +the steward, and helps clean the silver. He waits when we have +several friends to dinner. At other times he does not often come +into the room.</p> + +<p>"What you tell me is certainly curious. What can he have to say +to your father?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know, Charlie. I don't know anything about it. I do +think you ought to know."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I think it is a good thing that I should know," Charlie +agreed thoughtfully. "I daresay it is all right, but, at any rate, +I am glad you told me."</p> + +<p>"You won't tell your father?" she asked eagerly. "Because, if +you were to speak of it--"</p> + +<p>"I shall not tell him. You need not be afraid that what you have +told me will come out. It is curious, and that is all, and I will +look after the fellow a bit. Don't think anything more about it. It +is just the sort of thing it is well to know, but I expect there is +no harm in it, one way or the other. Of course, he must have known +your father before he came to us, and may have business of some +sort with him. He may have a brother, or some other relation, who +wants to take one of your father's farms. Indeed, there are a +hundred things he might want to see him about. But still, I am glad +you have told me."</p> + +<p>In his own mind, Charlie thought much more seriously of it than +he pretended. He knew that, at present, his father was engaged +heart and soul in a projected Jacobite rising. He knew that John +Dormay was a bitter Whig. He believed that he had a grudge against +his father, and the general opinion of him was that he was wholly +unscrupulous.</p> + +<p>That he should, then, be in secret communication with a servant +at Lynnwood, struck him as a very serious matter, indeed. Charlie +was not yet sixteen, but his close companionship with his father +had rendered him older than most lads of his age. He was as warm a +Jacobite as his father, but the manner in which William, with his +Dutch troops, had crushed the great Jacobite rebellion in Ireland, +seemed to him a lesson that the prospects of success, in England, +were much less certain than his father believed them to be.</p> + +<p>John Dormay, as an adherent of William, would be interested in +thwarting the proposed movement, with the satisfaction of, at the +same time, bringing Sir Marmaduke into disgrace. Charlie could +hardly believe that his cousin would be guilty of setting a spy to +watch his father, but it was certainly possible, and as he thought +the matter over, as he rode back after escorting Ciceley to her +home, he resolved to keep a sharp watch over the doings of this man +Nicholson.</p> + +<p>"It would never do to tell my father what Ciceley said. He would +bundle the fellow out, neck and crop, and perhaps break some of his +bones, and then it would be traced to her. She has not a happy +home, as it is, and it would be far worse if her father knew that +it was she who had put us on our guard. I must find out something +myself, and then we can turn him out, without there being the least +suspicion that Ciceley is mixed up in it."</p> + +<p>The next evening several Jacobite gentlemen rode in, and, as +usual, had a long talk with Sir Marmaduke after supper.</p> + +<p>"If this fellow is a spy," Charlie said to himself, "he will be +wanting to hear what is said, and to do so he must either hide +himself in the room, or listen at the door, or at one of the +windows. It is not likely that he will get into the room, for to do +that he must have hidden himself before supper began. I don't think +he would dare to listen at the door, for anyone passing through the +hall would catch him at it. It must be at one of the windows."</p> + +<p>The room was at an angle of the house. Three windows looked out +on to the lawn in front; that at the side into a large shrubbery, +where the bushes grew up close to it; and Charlie decided that +here, if anywhere, the man would take up his post. As soon, then, +as he knew that the servants were clearing away the supper, he took +a heavy cudgel and went out. He walked straight away from the +house, and then, when he knew that his figure could no longer be +seen in the twilight, he made a circuit, and, entering the +shrubbery, crept along close to the wall of the Muse, until within +two or three yards of the window. Having made sure that at present, +at any rate, no one was near, he moved out a step or two to look at +the window.</p> + +<p>His suspicions were at once confirmed. The inside curtains were +drawn, but the casement was open two or three inches. Charlie again +took up his post, behind a bush, and waited.</p> + +<p>In five minutes he heard a twig snap, and then a figure came +along, noiselessly, and placed itself at the window. Charlie gave +him but a moment to listen, then he sprang forward, and, with his +whole strength, brought his cudgel down upon the man's head. He +fell like a stone. Charlie threw open the window, and, as he did +so, the curtain was torn back by his father, the sound of the blow +and the fall having reached the ears of those within.</p> + +<p>Sir Marmaduke had drawn his sword, and was about to leap through +the window, when Charlie exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"It is I, father. I have caught a fellow listening at the +window, and have just knocked him down."</p> + +<p>"Well done, my boy!</p> + +<p>"Bring lights, please, gentlemen. Let us see what villain we +have got here."</p> + +<p>But, as he spoke, Charlie's head suddenly disappeared, and a +sharp exclamation broke from him, as he felt his ankles grasped and +his feet pulled from under him. He came down with such a crash +that, for a moment, he was unable to rise. He heard a rustling in +the bushes, and then his father leapt down beside him.</p> + +<p>"Where are you, my boy? Has the scoundrel hurt you?"</p> + +<p>"He has given me a shake," Charlie said as he sat up; "and, what +is worse, I am afraid he has got away."</p> + +<p>"Follow me, gentlemen, and scatter through the gardens," Sir +Marmaduke roared. "The villain has escaped!"</p> + +<p>For a few minutes, there was a hot pursuit through the shrubbery +and gardens, but nothing was discovered. Charlie had been so shaken +that he was unable to join the pursuit, but, having got on to his +feet, remained leaning against the wall until his father came +back.</p> + +<p>"He has got away, Charlie. Have you any idea who he was?"</p> + +<p>"It was Nicholson, father. At least, I am almost certain that it +was him. It was too dark to see his face. I could see the outline +of his head against the window, and he had on a cap with a cock's +feather which I had noticed the man wore."</p> + +<p>"But how came you here, Charlie?"</p> + +<p>"I will tell you that afterwards, father. Don't ask me now."</p> + +<p>For, at this moment, some of the others were coming up. Several +of them had torches, and, as they approached, Sir Marmaduke saw +something lying on the ground under the window. He picked it +up.</p> + +<p>"Here is the fellow's cap," he said. "You must have hit him a +shrewd blow, Charlie, for here is a clean cut through the cloth, +and a patch of fresh blood on the white lining. How did he get you +down, lad?"</p> + +<p>"He fell so suddenly, when I hit him, that I thought I had +either killed or stunned him; but of course I had not, for it was +but a moment after, when I was speaking to you, that I felt my +ankles seized, and I went down with a crash. I heard him make off +through the bushes; but I was, for the moment, almost dazed, and +could do nothing to stop him."</p> + +<p>"Was the window open when he came?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir, two or three inches."</p> + +<p>"Then it was evidently a planned thing.</p> + +<p>"Well, gentlemen, we may as well go indoors. The fellow is well +out of our reach now, and we may be pretty sure he will never again +show his face here. Fortunately he heard nothing, for the serving +men had but just left the room, and we had not yet begun to +talk."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough, Sir Marmaduke," one of the others said. +"The question is: how long has this been going on?"</p> + +<p>Sir Marmaduke looked at Charlie.</p> + +<p>"I know nothing about it, sir. Till now, I have not had the +slightest suspicion of this man. It occurred to me, this afternoon, +that it might be possible for anyone to hear what was said inside +the room, by listening at the windows; and that this shrubbery +would form a very good shelter for an eavesdropper. So I thought, +this evening I would take up my place here, to assure myself that +there was no traitor in the household. I had been here but five +minutes when the fellow stole quietly up, and placed his ear at the +opening of the casement, and you may be sure that I gave him no +time to listen to what was being said."</p> + +<p>"Well, we had better go in," Sir Marmaduke said. "There is no +fear of our being overheard this evening.</p> + +<p>"Charlie, do you take old Banks aside, and tell him what has +happened, and then go with him to the room where that fellow slept, +and make a thorough search of any clothes he may have left behind, +and of the room itself. Should you find any papers or documents, +you will, of course, bring them down to me."</p> + +<p>But the closest search, by Charlie and the old butler, produced +no results. Not a scrap of paper of any kind was found, and Banks +said that he knew the man could neither read nor write.</p> + +<p>The party below soon broke up, considerable uneasiness being +felt, by all, at the incident of the evening. When the last of them +had left, Charlie was sent for.</p> + +<p>"Now, then, Charlie, let me hear how all this came about. I know +that all you said about what took place at the window is perfectly +true; but, even had you not said so, I should have felt there was +something else. What was it brought you to that window? Your story +was straight-forward enough, but it was certainly singular your +happening to be there, and I fancy some of our friends thought that +you had gone round to listen, yourself. One hinted as much; but I +said that was absurd, for you were completely in my confidence, and +that, whatever peril and danger there might be in the enterprise, +you would share them with me."</p> + +<p>"It is not pleasant that they should have thought so, father, +but that is better than that the truth should be known. This is how +it happened;" and he repeated what Ciceley had told him in the +garden.</p> + +<p>"So the worthy Master John Dormay has set a spy upon me," Sir +Marmaduke said, bitterly. "I knew the man was a knave--that is +public property--but I did not think that he was capable of this. +Well, I am glad that, at any rate, no suspicion can fall upon +Ciceley in the matter; but it is serious, lad, very serious. We do +not know how long this fellow has been prying and listening, or how +much he may have learnt. I don't think it can be much. We talked it +over, and my friends all agreed with me that they do not remember +those curtains having been drawn before. To begin with, the +evenings are shortening fast, and, at our meeting last week, we +finished our supper by daylight; and, had the curtains been drawn, +it would have been noticed, for we had need of light before we +finished. Two of the gentlemen, who were sitting facing the window, +declared that they remembered distinctly that it was open. Mr. +Jervoise says that he thought to himself that, if it was his place, +he would have the trees cut away there, for they shut out the +light.</p> + +<p>"Therefore, although it is uncomfortable to think that there has +been a spy in the house, for some months, we have every reason to +hope that our councils have not been overheard. Were it otherwise, +I should lose no time in making for the coast, and taking ship to +France, to wait quietly there until the king comes over."</p> + +<p>"You have no documents, father, that the man could have +found?"</p> + +<p>"None, Charlie. We have doubtless made lists of those who could +be relied upon, and of the number of men they could bring with +them, but these have always been burned before we separated. Such +letters as I have had from France, I have always destroyed as soon +as I have read them. Perilous stuff of that sort should never be +left about. No; they may ransack the place from top to bottom, and +nothing will be found that could not be read aloud, without harm, +in the marketplace of Lancaster.</p> + +<p>"So now, to bed, Charlie. It is long past your usual hour."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: Denounced.</h2> + +<p>"Charlie," Sir Marmaduke said on the following morning, at +breakfast, "it is quite possible that that villain who acted as +spy, and that other villain who employed him--I need not mention +names--may swear an information against me, and I may be arrested, +on the charge of being concerned in a plot. I am not much afraid of +it, if they do. The most they could say is that I was prepared to +take up arms, if his majesty crossed from France; but, as there are +thousands and thousands of men ready to do the same, they may fine +me, perhaps, but I should say that is all. However, what I want to +say to you is, keep out of the way, if they come. I shall make +light of the affair, while you, being pretty hot tempered, might +say things that would irritate them, while they could be of no +assistance to me. Therefore, I would rather that you were kept out +of it, altogether. I shall want you here. In my absence, there must +be somebody to look after things.</p> + +<p>"Mind that rascal John Dormay does not put his foot inside the +house, while I am away. That fellow is playing some deep game, +though I don't quite know what it is. I suppose he wants to win the +goodwill of the authorities, by showing his activity and zeal; and, +of course, he will imagine that no one has any idea that he has +been in communication with this spy. We have got a hold over him, +and, when I come back, I will have it out with him. He is not +popular now, and, if it were known that he had been working against +me, his wife's kinsman, behind my back, my friends about here would +make the country too hot to hold him."</p> + +<p>"Yes, father; but please do not let him guess that we have +learnt it from Ciceley. You see, that is the only way we know about +it."</p> + +<p>"Yes, you are right there. I will be careful that he shall not +know the little maid has anything to do with it. But we will think +of that, afterwards; maybe nothing will come of it, after all. But, +if anything does, mind, my orders are that you keep away from the +house, while they are in it. When you come back, Banks will tell +you what has happened.</p> + +<p>"You had better take your horse, and go for a ride now. Not over +there, Charlie. I know, if you happened to meet that fellow, he +would read in your face that you knew the part he had been playing, +and, should nothing come of the business, I don't want him to know +that, at present. The fellow can henceforth do us no harm, for we +shall be on our guard against eavesdroppers; and, for the sake of +cousin Celia and the child, I do not want an open breach. I do not +see the man often, myself, and I will take good care I don't put +myself in the way of meeting him, for the present, at any rate. +Don't ride over there today."</p> + +<p>"Very well, father. I will ride over and see Harry Jervoise. I +promised him that I would come over one day this week."</p> + +<p>It was a ten-mile ride, and, as he entered the courtyard of Mr. +Jervoise's fine old mansion, he leapt off his horse, and threw the +reins over a post. A servant came out.</p> + +<p>"The master wishes to speak to you, Master Carstairs."</p> + +<p>"No ill news, I hope, Charlie?" Mr. Jervoise asked anxiously, as +the lad was shown into the room, where his host was standing beside +the carved chimney piece.</p> + +<p>"No, sir, there is nothing new. My father thought that I had +better be away today, in case any trouble should arise out of what +took place yesterday, so I rode over to see Harry. I promised to do +so, one day this week."</p> + +<p>"That is right. Does Sir Marmaduke think, then, that he will be +arrested?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know that he expects it, sir, but he says that it is +possible."</p> + +<p>"I do not see that they have anything to go upon, Charlie. As we +agreed last night, that spy never had any opportunity of +overhearing us before, and, certainly, he can have heard nothing +yesterday. The fellow can only say what many people know, or could +know, if they liked; that half a dozen of Sir Marmaduke's friends +rode over to take supper with him. They can make nothing out of +that."</p> + +<p>"No, sir; and my father said that, at the worst, it could be but +the matter of a fine."</p> + +<p>"Quite so, lad; but I don't even see how it could amount to +that. You will find Harry somewhere about the house. He has said +nothing to me about going out."</p> + +<p>Harry Jervoise was just the same age as Charlie, and was his +greatest friend. They were both enthusiastic in the cause of the +Stuarts, equally vehement in their expressions of contempt for the +Dutch king, equally anxious for the coming of him whom they +regarded as their lawful monarch. They spent the morning together, +as usual; went first to the stables and patted and talked to their +horses; then they played at bowls on the lawn; after which, they +had a bout of sword play; and, having thus let off some of their +animal spirits, sat down and talked of the glorious times to come, +when the king was to have his own again.</p> + +<p>Late in the afternoon, Charlie mounted his horse and rode for +home. When within half a mile of the house, a man stepped out into +the road in front of him.</p> + +<p>"Hullo, Banks, what is it? No bad news, I hope?"</p> + +<p>And he leapt from his horse, alarmed at the pallor of the old +butler's face.</p> + +<p>"Yes, Master Charles, I have some very bad news, and have been +waiting for the last two hours here, so as to stop you going to the +house."</p> + +<p>"Why shouldn't I go to the house?"</p> + +<p>"Because there are a dozen soldiers, and three or four +constables there."</p> + +<p>"And my father?"</p> + +<p>"They have taken him away."</p> + +<p>"This is bad news, Banks; but I know that he thought that it +might be so. But it will not be very serious; it is only a question +of a fine," he said.</p> + +<p>The butler shook his head, sadly.</p> + +<p>"It is worse than that, Master Charles. It is worse than you +think."</p> + +<p>"Well, tell me all about it, Banks," Charlie said, feeling much +alarmed at the old man's manner.</p> + +<p>"Well, sir, at three this afternoon, two magistrates, John +Cockshaw and William Peters--"</p> + +<p>("Both bitter Whigs," Charlie put in.)</p> + +<p>"--Rode up to the door. They had with them six constables, and +twenty troopers."</p> + +<p>"There were enough of them, then," Charlie said. "Did they think +my father was going to arm you all, and defend the place?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know, sir, but that is the number that came. The +magistrates, and the constables, and four of the soldiers came into +the house. Sir Marmaduke met them in the hall.</p> + +<p>"'To what do I owe the honour of this visit?' he said, quite +cold and haughty.</p> + +<p>"'We have come, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs, to arrest you, on the +charge of being concerned in a treasonable plot against the king's +life.'</p> + +<p>"Sir Marmaduke laughed out loud.</p> + +<p>"'I have no design on the life of William of Orange, or of any +other man,' he said. 'I do not pretend to love him; in that matter +there are thousands in this realm with me; but, as for a design +against his life, I should say, gentlemen, there are few who know +me, even among men like yourselves, whose politics are opposed to +mine, who would for a moment credit such a foul insinuation.'</p> + +<p>"'We have nothing to do with that matter, Sir Marmaduke,' John +Cockshaw said. 'We are acting upon a sworn information to that +effect.'</p> + +<p>"Sir Marmaduke was angry, now.</p> + +<p>"'I can guess the name of the dog who signed it,' he said, 'and, +kinsman though he is by marriage, I will force the lie down his +throat.'</p> + +<p>"Then he cooled down again.</p> + +<p>"'Well, gentlemen, you have to do your duty. What do you desire +next?'</p> + +<p>"'Our duty is, next, to search the house, for any treasonable +documents that may be concealed here.'</p> + +<p>"'Search away, gentlemen,' Sir Marmaduke said, seating himself +in one of the settles. 'The house is open to you. My butler, James +Banks, will go round with you, and will open for you any cupboard +or chest that may be locked.'</p> + +<p>"The magistrates nodded to the four soldiers. Two of them took +their post near the chair, one at the outside door, and one at the +other end of the room. Sir Marmaduke said nothing, but shrugged his +shoulders, and then began to play with the ears of the little +spaniel, Fido, that had jumped up on his knees.</p> + +<p>"'We will first go into the study,' John Cockshaw said; and I +led them there.</p> + +<p>"They went straight to the cabinet with the pull-down desk, +where Sir Marmaduke writes when he does write, which is not often. +It was locked, and I went to Sir Marmaduke for the key.</p> + +<p>"'You will find it in that French vase on the mantel,' he said. +'I don't open the desk once in three months, and should lose the +key, if I carried it with me.'</p> + +<p>"I went to the mantel, turned the vase over, and the key dropped +out.</p> + +<p>"'Sir Marmaduke has nothing to hide, gentlemen,' I said, 'so, +you see, he keeps the key here.'</p> + +<p>"I went to the cabinet, and put the key in. As I did so I +said:</p> + +<p>"'Look, gentlemen, someone has opened, or tried to open, this +desk. Here is a mark, as if a knife had been thrust in to shoot the +bolt.'</p> + +<p>"They looked where I pointed, and William Peters said to +Cockshaw, 'It is as the man says. Someone has been trying to force +the lock--one of the varlets, probably, who thought the knight +might keep his money here.'</p> + +<p>"'It can be of no importance, one way or the other,' Cockshaw +said roughly.</p> + +<p>"'Probably not, Mr. Cockshaw, but, at the same time I will make +a note of it.'</p> + +<p>"I turned the key, and pulled down the door that makes a desk. +They seemed to know all about it, for, without looking at the +papers in the pigeonholes, they pulled open the lower drawer, and +took two foreign-looking letters out from it. I will do them the +justice to say that they both looked sorry, as they opened them, +and looked at the writing.</p> + +<p>"'It is too true,' Peters said. 'Here is enough to hang a dozen +men.'</p> + +<p>"They tumbled all the other papers into a sack, that one of the +constables had brought with him. Then they searched all the other +furniture, but they evidently did not expect to find anything. Then +they went back into the hall.</p> + +<p>"'Well, gentlemen,' Sir Marmaduke said, 'have you found anything +of a terrible kind?'</p> + +<p>"'We have found, I regret to say,' John Cockshaw said, 'the +letters of which we were in search, in your private +cabinet--letters that prove, beyond all doubt, that you are +concerned in a plot similar to that discovered three years ago, to +assassinate his majesty the king.'</p> + +<p>"Sir Marmaduke sprang to his feet.</p> + +<p>"'You have found letters of that kind in my cabinet?' he said, +in a dazed sort of way.</p> + +<p>"The magistrate bowed, but did not speak.</p> + +<p>"'Then, sir,' Sir Marmaduke exclaimed, 'you have found letters +that I have never seen. You have found letters that must have been +placed there by some scoundrel, who plotted my ruin. I assert to +you, on the honour of a gentleman, that no such letters have ever +met my eye, and that, if such a proposition had been made to me, I +care not by whom, I would have struck to the ground the man who +offered me such an insult.'</p> + +<p>"'We are sorry, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs,' Mr. Peters said, 'most +sorry, both of us, that it should have fallen to our duty to take +so painful a proceeding against a neighbour; but, you see, the +matter is beyond us. We have received a sworn information that you +are engaged in such a plot. We are told that you are in the habit +of locking up papers of importance in a certain cabinet, and there +we find papers of a most damnatory kind. We most sincerely trust +that you may be able to prove your innocence in the matter, but we +have nothing to do but to take you with us, as a prisoner, to +Lancaster.'</p> + +<p>"Sir Marmaduke unbuckled his sword, and laid it by. He was +quieter than I thought he could be, in such a strait, for he has +always been by nature, as you know, choleric.</p> + +<p>"'I am ready, gentlemen,' he said.</p> + +<p>"Peters whispered in Cockshaw's ear.</p> + +<p>"'Ah yes,' the other said, 'I had well-nigh forgotten,' and he +turned to me. 'Where is Master Charles Carstairs?'</p> + +<p>"'He is not in the house,' I said. 'He rode away this morning, +and did not tell me where he was going.'</p> + +<p>"'When do you expect him back?'</p> + +<p>"'I do not expect him at all,' I said. 'When Master Charles +rides out to visit his friends, he sometimes stays away for a day +or two.'</p> + +<p>"'Is it supposed,' Sir Marmaduke asked coldly, 'that my son is +also mixed up in this precious scheme?'</p> + +<p>"'It is sworn that he was privy to it,' John Cockshaw said, 'and +is, therefore, included in the orders for arrest.'</p> + +<p>"Sir Marmaduke did not speak, but he shut his lips tight, and +his hand went to where the hilt of his sword would have been. Two +of the constables went out and questioned the grooms, and found +that you had, as I said, ridden off. When they came back, there was +some talk between the magistrates, and then, as I said, four +constables and some soldiers were left in the house. Sir +Marmaduke's horse was brought round, and he rode away, with the +magistrates and the other soldiers."</p> + +<p>"I am quite sure, Banks, that my father could have known nothing +of those letters, or of any plot against William's life. I have +heard him speak so often of the assassination plot, and how +disgraceful it was, and how, apart from its wickedness, it had +damaged the cause, that I am certain he would not have listened to +a word about another such business."</p> + +<p>"I am sure of that, too," the old butler said; "but that is not +the question, Master Charles. There are the papers. We know that +Sir Marmaduke did not put them there, and that he did not know that +they were there. But how is it to be proved, sir? Everyone knows +that Sir Marmaduke is a Jacobite, and is regarded as the head of +the party in this part of the country. He has enemies, and one of +them, no doubt, has played this evil trick upon him, and the +putting of your name in shows what the motive is."</p> + +<p>"But it is ridiculous, Banks. Who could believe that such a +matter as this would be confided to a lad of my age?"</p> + +<p>"They might not believe it in their hearts, but people often +believe what suits their interest. This accusation touches Sir +Marmaduke's life; and his estate, even if his life were spared, +would be confiscated. In such a case, it might be granted to +anyone, and possibly even to the son of him they would call the +traitor. But the accusation that the son was concerned, or was, at +any rate, privy to the crime intended by the father, would set all +against him, and public opinion would approve of the estates +passing away from him altogether.</p> + +<p>"But now, sir, what do you think you had best do?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I shall go on, Banks, and let them take me to join my +father in Lancaster jail. Do you think I would run away?"</p> + +<p>"No, sir, I don't think you would run away. I am sure you would +not run away from fear, but I would not let them lay hands on me, +until I had thought the matter well over. You might be able to do +more good to Sir Marmaduke were you free, than you could do if you +were caged up with him. He has enemies, we know, who are doing +their best to ruin him, and, as you see, they are anxious that you, +too, should be shut up within four walls."</p> + +<p>"You are right, Banks. At any rate, I will ride back and consult +Mr. Jervoise. Besides, he ought to be warned, for he, too, may be +arrested on the same charge. How did you get away without being +noticed?"</p> + +<p>"I said that I felt ill--and I was not speaking falsely--at Sir +Marmaduke's arrest, and would lie down. They are keeping a sharp +lookout at the stables, and have a soldier at each door, to see +that no one leaves the house, but I went out by that old passage +that comes out among the ruins of the monastery."</p> + +<p>"I know, Banks. My father showed it to me, three years ago."</p> + +<p>"I shall go back that way again, sir, and no one will know that +I have left the house. You know the trick of the sliding panel, +Master Charles?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I know it, and if I should want to come into the house +again, I will come that way, Banks."</p> + +<p>"Here is a purse," the butler said. "You may want money, sir. +Should you want more, there is a store hidden away, in the hiding +place under the floor of the Priest's Chamber, at the other end of +the passage. Do you know that?"</p> + +<p>"I know the Priest's Chamber of course, because you go through +that to get to the long passage, but I don't know of any special +hiding place there."</p> + +<p>"Doubtless, Sir Marmaduke did not think it necessary to show it +you then, sir, but he would have done it later on, so I do not +consider that I am breaking my oath of secrecy in telling you. You +know the little narrow loophole in the corner?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, of course. There is no other that gives light to the room. +It is hidden from view outside by the ivy."</p> + +<p>"Well, sir, you count four bricks below that, and you press hard +on the next, that is the fifth, then you will hear a click, then +you press hard with your heel at the corner, in the angle of the +flag below, and you will find the other corner rise. Then you get +hold of it and lift it up, and below there is a stone chamber, two +feet long and about eighteen inches wide and deep. It was made to +conceal papers in the old days, and I believe food was always kept +there, in case the chamber had to be used in haste.</p> + +<p>"Sir Marmaduke uses it as a store place for his money. He has +laid by a good deal every year, knowing that money would be wanted +when troops had to be raised. I was with him about three weeks ago, +when he put in there half the rents that had been paid in. So, if +you want money for any purpose, you will know where to find +it."</p> + +<p>"Thank you, Banks. It may be very useful to have such a store, +now."</p> + +<p>"Where shall I send to you, sir, if I have any news that it is +urgent you should know of?"</p> + +<p>"Send to Mr. Jervoise, Banks. If I am not there, he will know +where I am to be found."</p> + +<p>"I will send Will Ticehurst, Master Charles. He is a stout lad, +and a shrewd one, and I know there is nothing that he would not do +for you. But you had best stop no longer. Should they find out that +I am not in the house, they will guess that I have come to warn +you, and may send out a party to search."</p> + +<p>Charlie at once mounted, and rode back to Mr. Jervoise's.</p> + +<p>"I expected you back," that gentleman said, as he entered. "Bad +news travels apace, and, an hour since, a man brought in the news +that Sir Marmaduke had been seen riding, evidently a prisoner, +surrounded by soldiers, on the road towards Lancaster. So that +villain we chased last night must have learnt something. I suppose +they will be here tomorrow, but I do not see what serious charge +they can have against us. We have neither collected arms, nor taken +any steps towards a rising. We have talked over what we might do, +if there were a landing made from France, but, as there may be no +landing, that is a very vague charge."</p> + +<p>"Unfortunately, that is not the charge against my father. It is +a much more serious business."</p> + +<p>And Charlie repeated the substance of what Banks had told him, +interrupted occasionally by indignant ejaculations from Mr. +Jervoise.</p> + +<p>"It is an infamous plot," he said, when the lad had concluded +his story. "Infamous! There was never a word said of such a scheme, +and no one who knows your father would believe it for an +instant."</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir, but the judges, who do not know him, may believe it. +No doubt those who put those papers there, will bring forward +evidence to back it up."</p> + +<p>"I am afraid that will be the case. It is serious for us all," +Mr. Jervoise said thoughtfully. "That man will be prepared to swear +that he heard the plot discussed by us all. They seized your +father, today, as being the principal and most important of those +concerned in it, but we may all find ourselves in the same case +tomorrow. I must think it over.</p> + +<p>"It is well that your man warned you. You had best not stay here +tonight, for the house may be surrounded at daybreak. Harry shall +go over, with you, to one of my tenants, and you can both sleep +there. It will not be necessary for you to leave for another two or +three hours. You had better go to him now; supper will be served in +half an hour. I will talk with you again, afterwards."</p> + +<p>Harry was waiting outside the door, having also heard the news +of Sir Marmaduke's arrest.</p> + +<p>"It is villainous!" he exclaimed, when he heard the whole story. +"No doubt you are right, and that John Dormay is at the bottom of +it all. The villain ought to be slain."</p> + +<p>"He deserves it, Harry; and, if I thought it would do good, I +would gladly fight him, but I fear that it would do harm. Such a +scoundrel must needs be a coward, and he might call for aid, and I +might be dragged off to Lancaster. Moreover, he is Ciceley's +father, and my cousin Celia's husband, and, were I to kill him, it +would separate me altogether from them. However, I shall in all +things be guided by your father. He will know what best ought to be +done.</p> + +<p>"It is likely that he, too, may be arrested. This is evidently a +deep plot, and your father thinks that, although the papers alone +may not be sufficient to convict my father, the spy we had in our +house will be ready to swear that he heard your father, and mine, +and the others, making arrangements for the murder of William of +Orange; and their own word to the contrary would count but little +against such evidence, backed by those papers."</p> + +<p>They talked together for half an hour, and were then summoned to +supper. Nothing was said, upon the subject, until the servitors had +retired, and the meal was cleared away. Mr. Jervoise was, like Sir +Marmaduke, a widower.</p> + +<p>"I have been thinking it all over," he said, when they were +alone. "I have determined to ride, at once, to consult some of my +friends, and to warn them of what has taken place. That is clearly +my duty. I shall not return until I learn whether warrants are out +for my apprehension. Of course, the evidence is not so strong +against me as it is against Sir Marmaduke; still, the spy's +evidence would tell as much against me as against him.</p> + +<p>"You will go up, Harry, with your friend, to Pincot's farm. It +lies so far in the hills that it would probably be one of the last +to be searched, and, if a very sharp lookout is kept there, a body +of men riding up the valley would be seen over a mile away, and +there would be plenty of time to take to the hills. There Charlie +had better remain, until he hears from me.</p> + +<p>"You can return here, Harry, in the morning, for there is no +probability whatever of your being included in any warrant of +arrest. It could only relate to us, who were in the habit of +meeting at Sir Marmaduke's. You will ride over to the farm each +day, and tell Charlie any news you may have learnt, or take any +message I may send you for him.</p> + +<p>"We must do nothing hastily. The first thing to learn, if +possible, is whether any of us are included in the charge of being +concerned in a plot against William's life. In the next place, who +are the witnesses, and what evidence they intend to give. No doubt +the most important is the man who was placed as a spy at Sir +Marmaduke's."</p> + +<p>"As I know his face, sir," Charlie said eagerly, "could I not +find him, and either force him to acknowledge that it is all false, +or else kill him? I should be in my right in doing that, surely, +since he is trying to swear away my father's life by false +evidence."</p> + +<p>"I should say nothing against that, lad. If ever a fellow +deserved killing he does; that is, next to his rascally employer. +But his death would harm rather than benefit us. It would be +assumed, of course, that we had removed him to prevent his giving +evidence against us. No doubt his depositions have been taken down, +and they would then be assumed to be true, and we should be worse +off than if he could be confronted with us, face to face, in the +court. We must let the matter rest, at present."</p> + +<p>"Would it be possible to get my father out of prison, sir? I am +sure I can get a dozen men, from among the tenants and grooms, who +would gladly risk their lives for him."</p> + +<p>"Lancaster jail is a very strong place," Mr. Jervoise said, "and +I fear there is no possibility of rescuing him from it. Of course, +at present we cannot say where the trial will take place. A +commission may be sent down, to hold a special assizes at +Lancaster, or the trial may take place in London. At any rate, +nothing whatever can be done, until we know more. I have means of +learning what takes place at Lancaster, for we have friends there, +as well as at most other places. When I hear from them the exact +nature of the charge, the evidence that will be given, and the +names of those accused of being mixed up in this pretended plot, I +shall be better able to say what is to be done.</p> + +<p>"Now, I must mount and ride without further delay. I have to +visit all our friends who met at Lynnwood, and it will take me +until tomorrow morning to see and confer with them."</p> + +<p>A few minutes after Mr. Jervoise had ridden off, his son and +Charlie also mounted. A man went with them, with a supply of +torches, for, although Harry knew the road--which was little better +than a sheep track--well enough during the day, his father thought +he might find it difficult, if not impossible, to follow it on a +dark night.</p> + +<p>They congratulated themselves upon the precaution taken, before +they had gone very far, for there was no moon, the sky was +overcast, and a drizzling rain had begun to come down. They could +hardly see their horses' heads, and had proceeded but a short +distance, when it became necessary for their guide to light a +torch. It took them, therefore, over two hours to reach the +mountain farm.</p> + +<p>They were expected, otherwise the household would have been +asleep. Mr. Jervoise had, as soon as he determined upon their going +there, sent off a man on horseback, who, riding fast, had arrived +before night set in. There was, therefore, a great turf fire +glowing on the hearth when they arrived, and a hearty welcome +awaiting them from the farmer, his wife, and daughters. Harry had, +by his father's advice, brought two changes of clothes in a valise, +but they were so completely soaked to the skin that they decided +they would, after drinking a horn of hot-spiced ale that had been +prepared for them, go at once to bed, where, in spite of the +stirring events of the day, both went off to sleep, as soon as +their heads touched the pillows.</p> + +<p>The sun was shining brightly, when they woke. The mists had +cleared off, although they still hung round the head of +Ingleborough, six miles away, and on some of the other hilltops. +The change of weather had an inspiriting effect, and they went down +to breakfast in a brighter and more hopeful frame of mind. As soon +as the meal was over, Harry started for home.</p> + +<p>"I hope it won't be long before I can see you again, Harry," +Charlie said, as he stood by the horse.</p> + +<p>"I hope not, indeed; but there is no saying. My father's orders +are that I am to stay at home, if people come and take possession, +and send a man off to you with the news privately, but that, if no +one comes, I may myself bring you over any news there is; so I may +be back here this afternoon."</p> + +<p>"I shall be looking out for you, Harry. Remember, it will be +horribly dull for me up here, wondering and fretting as to what is +going on."</p> + +<p>"I know, Charlie; and you shall hear, as soon as I get the +smallest scrap of news. If I were you, I would go for a good walk +among the hills. It will be much better for you than moping here. +At any rate, you are not likely to get any news for some hours to +come."</p> + +<p>Charlie took the advice, and started among the hills, not +returning until the midday meal was ready. Before he had finished +his dinner there was a tap at the door, and then a young fellow, +whom he knew to be employed in Mr. Jervoise's stables, looked in. +Charlie sprang to his feet.</p> + +<p>"What's the news?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Master Harry bade me tell you, sir, that a magistrate, and four +constables, and ten soldier men came today, at nine o'clock. He had +returned but a half-hour when they rode up. They had an order for +the arrest of Mr. Jervoise, and have been searching the house, high +and low, for papers. No one is allowed to leave the place, but +Master Harry came out to the stables and gave me his orders, and I +did not find much difficulty in slipping out without their noticing +me. Mr. Harry said that he had no news of Mr. Jervoise, nor any +other news, save what I have told you. He bade me return at once +as, later on, he may want to send me again. I was to be most +careful that no one should see me when I got back, and, if I was +caught, I was on no account to say where I had been to."</p> + +<p>The farmer insisted upon the young fellow sitting down at the +table, and taking some food, before he started to go back. He +required no pressing, but, as soon as his hunger was satisfied, he +started again at a brisk run, which he kept up as long as Charlie's +eye could follow him down the valley.</p> + +<p>Although the boy by no means wished Mr. Jervoise to be involved +in his father's trouble, Charlie could not help feeling a certain +amount of pleasure at the news. He thought it certain that, if his +father escaped, he would have to leave the country, and that he +would, in that case, take him as companion in his flight. If Mr. +Jervoise and Harry also left the country, it would be vastly more +pleasant for both his father and himself. Where they would go to, +or what they would do, he had no idea, but it seemed to him that +exile among strangers would be bearable, if he had his friend with +him. It would not last many years, for surely the often talked-of +landing could not be very much longer delayed; then they would +return, share in the triumph of the Stuart cause, and resume their +life at Lynnwood, and reckon with those who had brought this foul +charge against them.</p> + +<p>That the Jacobite cause could fail to triumph was a contingency +to which Charlie did not give even a thought. He had been taught +that it was a just and holy cause. All his school friends, as well +as the gentlemen who visited his father, were firm adherents of it, +and he believed that the same sentiments must everywhere prevail. +There was, then, nothing but the troops of William to reckon with, +and these could hardly oppose a rising of the English people, +backed by aid from France.</p> + +<p>It was not until after dark that the messenger returned.</p> + +<p>"Master Harry bade me tell you, sir, that a gipsy boy he had +never seen before has brought him a little note from his father. He +will not return at present, but, if Mr. Harry can manage to slip +away unnoticed in the afternoon, tomorrow, he is to come here. He +is not to come direct, but to make a circuit, lest he should be +watched and followed, and it may be that the master will meet him +here."</p> + +<p>Charlie was very glad to hear this. Harry could, of course, give +him little news of what was going on outside the house, but Mr. +Jervoise might be able to tell him something about his father, +especially as he had said he had means of learning what went on in +Lancaster jail.</p> + +<p>He was longing to be doing something. It seemed intolerable to +him that he should be wandering aimlessly among the hills, while +his father was lying in Lancaster, with a charge affecting his life +hanging over him. What he could do he knew not, but anything would +be better than doing nothing. Mr. Jervoise had seemed to think that +it was out of the question to attempt a rescue from Lancaster; but +surely, if he could get together forty or fifty determined fellows, +a sudden assault upon the place might be successful.</p> + +<p>Then he set to work reckoning up the grooms, the younger +tenants, and the sons of the older ones, and jotted down the names +of twenty-seven who he thought might join in the attempt.</p> + +<p>"If Harry could get twenty-three from his people, that would +make it up to the number," he said. "Of course, I don't know what +the difficulties to be encountered may be. I have ridden there with +my father, and I know that the castle is a strong one, but I did +not notice it very particularly. The first thing to do will be to +go and examine it closely. No doubt ladders will be required, but +we could make rope ladders, and take them into the town in a cart, +hidden under faggots, or something of that sort.</p> + +<p>"I do hope Mr. Jervoise will come tomorrow. It is horrible +waiting here in suspense."</p> + +<p>The next morning, the hours seemed endless. Half a dozen times +he went restlessly in and out, walking a little distance up the +hill rising from the valley, and returning again, with the vain +idea that Mr. Jervoise might have arrived.</p> + +<p>Still more slowly did the time appear to go, after dinner. He +was getting into a fever of impatience and anxiety, when, about +five o'clock, he saw a figure coming down the hillside from the +right. It was too far away to recognize with certainty, but, by the +rapid pace at which he descended the hill, he had little doubt that +it was Harry, and he at once started, at the top of his speed, to +meet him.</p> + +<p>The doubt was soon changed into a certainty. When, a few hundred +yards up the hill, he met his friend, both were almost breathless. +Harry was the first to gasp out:</p> + +<p>"Has my father arrived?"</p> + +<p>"Not yet."</p> + +<p>Harry threw himself down on the short grass, with an exclamation +of thankfulness.</p> + +<p>"I have run nearly every foot of the way," he said, as soon as +he got his breath a little. "I had awful difficulty in getting out. +One of the constables kept in the same room with me, and followed +me wherever I went. They evidently thought I might hear from my +father, or try to send him a message. At last, I got desperate, and +ran upstairs to that room next mine, and closed and locked the door +after me. You know the ivy grows high up the wall there, and +directly I got in, I threw open the casement and climbed down by +it. It gave way two or three times, and I thought I was gone, but I +stuck to it, and managed each time to get a fresh hold. The moment +I was down, I ran along by the foot of the wall until I got round +behind, made a dash into that clump of fir trees, crawled along in +a ditch till I thought I was safe, and then made a run for it. I +was so afraid of being followed that I have been at least three +miles round, but I don't mind, now that my father hasn't arrived. I +was in such a fright that he might come and go before I got +here."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: A Rescue.</h2> + +<p>The two lads walked slowly down the hill together. Harry had +heard no more than Charlie had done, of what was going on. The +messenger from his father was a young fellow, of seventeen or +eighteen, with a gipsy face and appearance. How he had managed to +elude the vigilance of the men on watch, Harry did not know. He, +himself, had only learnt his presence when, as he passed some +bushes in the garden, a sharp whisper made him stop, and a moment +later a hand was thrust through the foliage. He took the little +note held out, and caught sight of the lad's face, through the +leaves, as he leant forward and said:</p> + +<p>"Go on, sir, without stopping. They may be watching you."</p> + +<p>Harry had thrust the note into his pocket, and sauntered on for +some time. He then returned to the house, and there read the +letter, with whose contents Charlie was already acquainted. +Eagerly, they talked over what each had been thinking of since they +had parted, early on the previous day; and discussed Charlie's idea +of an attack on Lancaster jail.</p> + +<p>"I don't know whether I could get as many men as you say, +Charlie. I don't think I could. If my father were in prison, as +well as yours, I am sure that most of the young fellows on the +estate would gladly help to rescue him, but it would be a different +thing when it came to risking their lives for anyone else. Of +course I don't know, but it does not seem to me that fifty men +would be of any use, at all, towards taking Lancaster Castle. It +always seemed to me a tremendously strong place."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it does look so, Harry; but perhaps, on examining it +closely, one would find that it is not so strong as it looks, by a +long way. It seems to me there must be some way or other of getting +father out, and, if there seems even the least bit of a chance, I +shall try it."</p> + +<p>"And you may be sure I will stand by you, Charlie, whatever it +is," Harry said heartily. "We have been just like brothers, and, of +course, brothers ought to stick to each other like anything. If +they don't, what is the use of being brothers? I daresay we shall +know more, when we hear what my father has to say; and then we may +see our way better."</p> + +<p>"Thank you, Harry. I knew you would stick by me. Of course, I +don't want to do any mad sort of thing. There is no hurry, anyhow, +and, as you say, when we know more about it, we may be able to hit +upon some sort of plan."</p> + +<p>It was not until eight o'clock that Mr. Jervoise arrived. He +looked grievously tired and worn out, but he spoke cheerfully as he +came in.</p> + +<p>"I have had a busy two days of it, boys, as you may guess. I +have no particularly good news to tell you, but, on the other hand, +I have no bad news. I was in time to warn all our friends, and when +the soldiers came for them in the morning, it was only to find that +their nests were empty.</p> + +<p>"They have been searching the houses of all Sir Marmaduke's +tenants, Charlie, and questioning man, woman, and child as to +whether they have seen you.</p> + +<p>"Ah! Here is supper, and I am nearly famished. However, I can go +on talking while I eat. I should have been here sooner, but I have +been waiting for the return of the messenger I sent to +Lancaster.</p> + +<p>"Yesterday morning there was an examination of your father, +Charlie, or rather, an examination of the testimony against him. +First the two letters that were discovered were put in. Without +having got them word for word, my informer was able to give me the +substance of them. Both were unsigned, and professed to have been +written in France. The first is dated three months back. It alludes +to a conversation that somebody is supposed to have had with Sir +Marmaduke, and states that the agent who had visited him, and who +is spoken of as Mr. H, had assured them that your father was +perfectly ready to join, in any well-conceived design for putting a +stop to the sufferings that afflicted the country, through the wars +into which the foreign intruder had plunged it, even though the +plan entailed the removal of the usurper. The writer assured Sir +Marmaduke of the satisfaction that such an agreement on his part +had caused at Saint Germains, and had heightened the high esteem in +which Sir Marmaduke was held, for his long fidelity to the cause of +his majesty. It then went on to state that a plan had been already +formed, and that several gentlemen in the south were deeply pledged +to carry it out, but that it was thought specially advisable that +some from the north should also take part in it, as, from their +persons being unknown near the court, they could act with more +surety and safety. They would, therefore, be glad if he would take +counsel, with the friends he had mentioned, as to what might seem +to them the best course of proceeding. There was no occasion for +any great haste and, indeed, some weeks must elapse before the blow +was struck, in order that preparations should be made, in France, +for taking instant advantage of it.</p> + +<p>"The rest of the letter was to the same purpose, but was really +a repetition of it. The second letter was dated some time later, +and was, as before, an answer to one the knight was supposed to +have written. It highly approved of the suggestions therein made; +that Sir Marmaduke and his friends should travel, separately and at +a few days' interval, to London, and should take lodgings there in +different parts of the town, and await the signal to assemble, near +Richmond, when it was known that the king would go hunting there. +It said that special note had been made of the offer of Sir +Marmaduke's son, to mingle among the king's attendants and to fire +the first shot, as, in the confusion, he would be able to escape +and, being but a boy, as he said, none would be able to recognize +him afterwards.</p> + +<p>"In the event, of course, of the first shot failing, the rest of +the party, gathered in a body, would rush forward, despatch the +usurper, cut their way, sword in hand, through any who barred their +path to the point where their horses were concealed, and then at +once scatter in various directions. For this great service, his +majesty would not fail to evince the deepest gratitude, upon his +restoration to his rightful throne, and pledged his royal word that +each of the party should receive rank and dignity, together with +ample estates, from the lands of which the chief supporters of the +usurper would be deprived.</p> + +<p>"So you see, Charlie, you were to have the honour of playing the +chief part in this tragedy."</p> + +<p>"Honour indeed!" Charlie exclaimed passionately. "Dishonour, +sir. Was there ever so infamous a plot!"</p> + +<p>"It is a well-laid plot, Charlie, and does credit to the +scoundrel who planned it. You see, he made certain that Sir +Marmaduke would be attainted, and his estates forfeited, but there +existed just a possibility that, as you are but a boy, though a +good big one, it might be thought that, as you were innocent of the +business, a portion at least of the estate might be handed to you. +To prevent this, it was necessary that you also should be mixed up +in the affair."</p> + +<p>"Has John Dormay appeared in the matter so far, Mr. +Jervoise?"</p> + +<p>"Not openly, Charlie. My informant knows that there have been +two or three meetings of Whig magistrates, with closed doors, and +that at these he has been present, and he has no doubt, whatever, +that it is he who has set the ball rolling. Still, there is no +proof of this, and he did not appear yesterday. The man who did +appear was the rascal who tried to overhear us the other night. He +stated that he had been instigated by a gentleman of great +loyalty--here one of the magistrates broke in, and said no name +must be mentioned--to enter the household of Sir Marmaduke, a +gentleman who, as he believed, was trafficking with the king's +enemies. He had agreed to do this, in spite of the danger of such +employment, moved thereto not so much by the hope of a reward as +from his great loyalty to his majesty, and a desire to avert from +him his great danger from popish plots. Having succeeded in +entering Sir Marmaduke's service, he soon discovered that six +gentlemen, to wit, myself and five friends, were in the habit of +meeting at Lynnwood, where they had long and secret talks. Knowing +the deep enmity and hostility these men bore towards his gracious +majesty, he determined to run any hazard, even to the loss of his +life, to learn the purport of such gatherings, and did, therefore, +conceal himself, on one occasion behind the hangings of a window, +and on another listened at an open casement, and did hear much +conversation regarding the best manner in which the taking of the +king's life could be accomplished. This, it was agreed, should be +done in the forest at Richmond, where all should lie in wait, the +said Sir Marmaduke Carstairs undertaking that he and his son would, +in the first place, fire with pistol or musquetoon, and that, only +if they should fail, the rest should charge forward on horse, +overthrow the king's companions, and despatch him, Mr. William +Jervoise undertaking the management of this part of the enterprise. +No date was settled for this wicked business, it being, however, +agreed that all should journey separately to London, and take up +their lodging there under feigned names; lying hid until they heard +from a friend at court, whose name was not mentioned, a day on +which the king would hunt at Richmond. He further testified that, +making another attempt to overhear the conspirators in order that +he might gather fuller details as to the manner of the plot, he was +seen by Master Charles Carstairs, who, taking him by surprise, +grievously assaulted him, and that he and the others would have +slain him, had he not overthrown Master Carstairs and effected his +escape before the others, rushing out sword in hand, had time to +assail him.</p> + +<p>"During his stay at Lynnwood he had, several times, watched at +the window of the room where Sir Marmaduke Carstairs sits when +alone, and where he writes his letters and transacts business, and +that he observed him, more than once, peruse attentively papers +that seemed to be of importance, for, after reading them, he would +lay them down and walk, as if disturbed or doubtful in mind, up and +down the room; and these papers he placed, when he had done with +them, in the bottom drawer of a desk in his cabinet, the said desk +being always carefully locked by him.</p> + +<p>"That is all that I learnt from Lancaster, save that +instructions have been given that no pains should be spared to +secure the persons of those engaged in the plot, and that a special +watch was to be set at the northern ports, lest they should, +finding their guilt discovered, try to escape from the kingdom. So +you see that your good father, Sir Marmaduke, is in a state of sore +peril, and that the rest of us, including yourself, will be in a +like strait if they can lay hands on us."</p> + +<p>"But it is all false!" Charlie exclaimed. "It is a lie from +beginning to end."</p> + +<p>"That is so, but we cannot prove it. The matter is so cunningly +laid, I see no way to pick a hole in it. We are Jacobites, and as +such long regarded as objects of suspicion by the Whig magistrates +and others. There have been other plots against William's life, in +which men of seeming reputation have been concerned. This man's +story will be confirmed by the man who set him on, and by other +hidden papers, if necessary. As to the discovery of the documents, +we may know well enough that the fellow himself put them there, but +we have no manner of proof of it. It is evident that there is +nothing for us but to leave the country, and to await the time when +the king shall have his own again. My other friends, who were with +me this afternoon when the news came from Lancaster, all agreed +that it would be throwing away our lives to stay here. We all have +money by us, for each has, for years, laid by something for the +time when money will be required to aid the king on his +arrival.</p> + +<p>"Having agreed to take this course, we drew up a document, which +we all signed, and which will be sent in when we have got clear +away. In it we declare that being informed that accusations of +being concerned in a plot against the life of William of Orange +have been brought against us, we declare solemnly before God that +we, and also Sir Marmaduke Carstairs and his son, are wholly +innocent of the charge, and that, although we do not hesitate to +declare that we consider the title of the said William to be king +of this realm to be wholly unfounded and without reason, and should +therefore take up arms openly against it on behalf of our sovereign +did occasion offer, yet that we hold assassination in abhorrence, +and that the crime with which we are charged is as hateful in our +sight as in that of any Whig gentleman. As, however, we are +charged, as we learn, by evilly disposed and wicked persons, of +this design, and have no means of proving our innocence, we are +forced to leave the realm until such time shall arrive when we can +rely on a fair trial, when our reputation and honour will weigh +against the word of suborned perjurers and knaves.</p> + +<p>"We were not forgetful of your father's case, and we debated +long as to whether our remaining here could do him service. We even +discussed the possibility of raising a force, and attacking +Lancaster Castle. We agreed, however, that this would be nothing +short of madness. The country is wholly unprepared at present. The +Whigs are on the alert, and such an attempt would cost the lives of +most of those concerned in it. Besides, we are all sure that Sir +Marmaduke would be the first to object to numbers of persons +risking their lives in an attempt which, even if, for the moment, +successful, must bring ruin upon all concerned in it. Nor do we see +that, were we to remain and to stand in the dock beside him, it +would aid him. Our word would count for no more than would this +protest and denial that we have signed together. A prisoner's plea +of not guilty has but a feather's weight against sworn +evidence.</p> + +<p>"At the same time, Charlie, I do not intend to leave the country +until I am sure that nothing can be done. As force is out of the +question, I have advised the others to lose not an hour in trying +to escape and, by this time, they are all on the road. Two are +making for Bristol, one for Southampton, and two for London. It +would be too dangerous to attempt to escape by one of the northern +ports. But, though force cannot succeed, we may be able to effect +your father's escape by other means, and it is for this purpose +that I am determined to stay, and I shall do so until all hope is +gone. Alone you could effect nothing; but I, knowing who are our +secret friends, may be able to use them to advantage.</p> + +<p>"We will stay here tonight, but tomorrow we must change our +quarters, for the search will be a close one. During the day we +will go far up over the hills, but tomorrow night we will make for +Lancaster. I have warned friends there to expect us, and it is the +last place where they would think of searching for us."</p> + +<p>"You will take me with you, too, father?" Harry exclaimed +eagerly; while Charlie expressed his gratitude to Mr. Jervoise, for +thus determining to risk his own life in the endeavour to effect +the escape of Sir Marmaduke.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I intend to take you with me, Harry. They will pretend, of +course, that, in spite of our assertions of innocence, our flight +is a confession of guilt, and you may be sure that we shall be +condemned in our absence, and our estates declared confiscated, and +bestowed upon some of William's minions. There will be no place for +you here.</p> + +<p>"My own plans are laid. As you know, your mother came from the +other side of the border, and a cousin of hers, with whom I am well +acquainted, has gone over to Sweden, and holds a commission in the +army that the young king is raising to withstand Russia and Saxony; +for both are thinking of taking goodly slices of his domains. I +could not sit down quietly in exile, and, being but forty, I am not +too old for service, and shall take a commission if I can obtain +it. There are many Scottish Jacobites who, having fled rather than +acknowledge Dutch William as their king, have taken service in +Sweden, where their fathers fought under the great Gustavus +Adolphus; and, even if I cannot myself take service, it may be that +I shall be able to obtain a commission for you. You are nearly +sixteen, and there are many officers no older.</p> + +<p>"Should evil befall your father, Charlie, which I earnestly hope +will not be the case, I shall regard you as my son, and shall do +the same for you as for Harry.</p> + +<p>"And now, I will to rest, for I have scarce slept the last two +nights, and we must be in the saddle long before daybreak."</p> + +<p>The little bedroom, that Charlie had used the two previous +nights, was given up to Mr. Jervoise; while Harry and Charlie slept +on some sheep skins, in front of the kitchen fire. Two hours before +daybreak they mounted and, guided by the farmer, rode to a +shepherd's hut far up among the hills. Late in the afternoon, a boy +came up from the farm, with the news that the place had been +searched by a party of troopers. They had ridden away without +discovering that the fugitives had been at the farm, but four of +the party had been left, in case Mr. Jervoise should come there. +The farmer, therefore, warned them against coming back that way, as +had been intended, naming another place where he would meet +them.</p> + +<p>As soon as the sun was setting they mounted and, accompanied by +the shepherd on a rough pony, started for Lancaster. After riding +for three hours, they stopped at a lonely farm house, at which Mr. +Jervoise and his friends had held their meeting on the previous +day. Here they changed their clothes for others that had been sent +for their use from Lancaster. Mr. Jervoise was attired as a small +trader, and the lads in garb suitable to boys in the same rank of +life. They still, however, retained their swords, and the pistols +in their holsters.</p> + +<p>Three miles farther they met their host, as arranged, at some +crossroads, and rode on until within three miles of Lancaster. They +then dismounted, placed their pistols in their belts, and handed +their horses to the two men, who would take them back to the hut in +the hills, where they would remain until required.</p> + +<p>It was two o'clock in the morning when they entered Lancaster +and, going up to a small house, standing in a garden in the +outskirts of the town, Mr. Jervoise gave three low knocks in quick +succession. The door was opened almost immediately. No light was +shown, and they entered in the dark, but as soon as the door was +closed behind them, a woman came out with a candle from an inner +room.</p> + +<p>"I am glad to see you safe, Mr. Jervoise," a man said. "My wife +and I were beginning to be anxious, fearing that you might have +fallen into the hands of your enemies."</p> + +<p>"No, all has gone well, Herries; but it is a long ride from the +hills here, and we walked the last three miles, as we wanted to get +the horses back again before daylight. We are deeply grateful to +you for giving us shelter."</p> + +<p>"I would be ready to do more than that," the man said, "for the +sake of the good cause. My wife's father and mine both fell at +Naseby, and we are as loyal to the Stuarts as they were. You are +heartily welcome, sir, and, as we keep no servant, there will be +none to gossip. You can either remain in the house, in which case +none will know of your presence here; or, if you wish to go abroad +in the town, I will accompany you, and will introduce you to any +acquaintance I may meet as a cousin of my wife who, with his two +sons, has come over from Preston to pay us a visit. I don't think +that anyone would know you, in that attire."</p> + +<p>"I will run no more risks than are necessary, Herries. Those I +wish to see will visit me here, and, if I go out at all, it will +not be until after dark."</p> + +<p>For a fortnight they remained at the house. After dark each day, +a man paid Mr. Jervoise a visit. He was the magistrates' clerk, and +had an apartment in the castle. From him they learned that a +messenger had been despatched to London, with an account of the +evidence taken in Sir Marmaduke's case; and that, at the end of +twelve days, he had returned with orders that all prisoners and +witnesses were to be sent to town, where they would be examined, in +the first place, by his majesty's council; and where Sir +Marmaduke's trial for high treason would take place. They were to +be escorted by a party of twelve troopers, under the command of a +lieutenant.</p> + +<p>The fugitives had, before, learned that the search for Mr. +Jervoise had been given up; it being supposed that he, with his son +and young Carstairs had, with their accomplices, all ridden for the +coast at the first alarm, and had probably taken ship for France +before the orders had arrived that all outgoing vessels should be +searched.</p> + +<p>Harry and Charlie had both been away for two or three days, and +had been occupied in getting together ten young fellows, from the +two estates, who would be willing and ready to attempt to rescue +Sir Marmaduke from his captors' hands. They were able to judge, +with tolerable accuracy, when the messenger would return from +London and, two days previously, the men had been directed to ride, +singly and by different roads, and to put up at various small inns +in Manchester, each giving out that he was a farmer in from the +country, either to purchase supplies, or to meet with a customer +likely to buy some cattle he wished to dispose of. Charlie had paid +a visit to Lynnwood, and had gone by the long passage into the +Priest's Chamber, and had carried off the gold hidden there.</p> + +<p>As soon as it was known that the messenger had returned, Herries +had borrowed a horse, and had ridden with a note to the farmer, +telling him to go up to the hills and bring the horses down, with +one of his own, to the place where he had parted from them, when +they entered Lancaster. There he was met by Mr. Jervoise and the +lads and, mounting, they started with the spare horse for +Blackburn, choosing that line in preference to the road through +Preston, as there were troops stationed at the latter town.</p> + +<p>The next day they rode on to Manchester. They went round, that +evening, to the various inns where the men had put up, and directed +them to discover whether, as was probable, the escort was to arrive +that night. If so, they were to mount at daybreak, and assemble +where the road crossed the moor, three miles north of Chapel le +Frith, where they would find Mr. Jervoise awaiting them.</p> + +<p>At nine o'clock that evening the troop rode in and, at daybreak, +Mr. Jervoise and the boys started. Two of the men were already at +the spot indicated, and, half an hour later, the whole of them had +arrived.</p> + +<p>Mr. Jervoise led them back to a spot that he had selected, where +the road dipped into a deep valley, in which, sheltered from the +winds, was a small wood. Leaving one at the edge, to give warning +directly the escort appeared on the road over the brow, he told the +rest to dismount. Most of them were armed with pistols. All had +swords.</p> + +<p>"Do you," he said, "who are good shots with your pistols, fire +at the men when I give the word--let the rest aim at the horses. +The moment you have opened fire, dash forward and fall on them. We +are already as numerous as they are, and we ought to be able to +dismount or disable four or five of them, with our first fire. I +shall give the order as Sir Marmaduke arrives opposite me. Probably +the officer will be riding. I shall make the officer my special +mark, for it may be that he has orders to shoot the prisoner, if +any rescue is attempted.</p> + +<p>"I don't suppose they will be at all prepared for an attack. +They were vigilant, no doubt, for the first two days but, once out +of Lancashire, they will think that there is no longer any fear of +an attempt at rescue. Pursue those that escape for half a mile or +so, and then draw rein, and, as soon as they are out of sight, +strike due north across the fells. Keep to the east of Glossop, and +then make your way singly to your homes. It will be better for you +to travel up through Yorkshire, till you are north of Ingleborough, +so as to come down from the north to your farms.</p> + +<p>"I know that you have all engaged in this affair for love of Sir +Marmaduke or myself, and because you hate to see a loyal gentleman +made the victim of lying knaves; but when we come back with the +king, you may be sure that Sir Marmaduke and I will well reward the +services you have rendered."</p> + +<p>It was an hour before the man on the lookout warned them that +the troop had just appeared over the hill. They mounted now, and, +pistol in hand, awaited the arrival of the party. Two troopers came +first, trotting carelessly along, laughing and smoking. A hundred +yards behind came the main body, four troopers first, then the +lieutenant and Sir Marmaduke, followed by the other six +troopers.</p> + +<p>With outstretched arm, and pistol pointed through the +undergrowth, Mr. Jervoise waited till the officer, who was riding +on his side of the road, came abreast of him. He had already told +the boys that he intended to aim at his shoulder.</p> + +<p>"They are the enemies of the king," he said, "but I cannot, in +cold blood, shoot down a man with whom I have no cause for quarrel. +I can depend upon my aim, and he will not be twelve paces from the +muzzle of my pistol."</p> + +<p>He fired. The officer gave a sudden start, and reeled on his +horse, and, before he could recover himself, the band, who had +fired at the flash of the first pistol, dashed out through the +bushes and fell upon the troopers. Four men had dropped, one horse +had fallen, and two others were plunging wildly as, with a shout, +their assailants dashed upon them. All who could turn their horse's +head rode furiously off, some along the road forward, others back +towards Manchester. The lieutenant's horse had rolled over with +him, as that of Mr. Jervoise struck it on the shoulder, with the +full impetus of its spring.</p> + +<p>"It is all over, Sir Marmaduke, and you are a free man. We have +nothing to do now but to ride for it."</p> + +<p>And, before the knight had fairly recovered from his +astonishment, he found himself riding south across the moor, with +his son on one side of him, and Mr. Jervoise and Harry on the +other.</p> + +<p>"You have saved my life, Jervoise," he said, holding out his +hand to his friend. "They had got me so firmly in their clutches, +that I thought my chances were at an end.</p> + +<p>"How are you, Charlie? I am right glad to see you, safe and +sound, for they had managed to include you in their pretended plot, +and, for aught I knew, you had been all this time lying in a cell +next mine in Lancaster Castle.</p> + +<p>"But who are the good fellows who helped you?"</p> + +<p>Mr. Jervoise briefly gave an account of the affair.</p> + +<p>"They are only keeping up a sham pursuit of the soldiers, so as +to send them well on their way. I told them not to overtake them, +as there was no occasion for any further bloodshed, when you were +once out of their hands. By tomorrow morning they will all be at +work on their farms again, and, if they keep their own counsel, +need not fear."</p> + +<p>Suddenly Sir Marmaduke reined in his horse.</p> + +<p>"We are riding south," he said.</p> + +<p>"Certainly we are," Mr. Jervoise said. "Why not? That is our +only chance of safety. They will, in the first place, suspect us of +having doubled back to the hills, and will search every farmhouse +and cottage. Our only hope of escape is to ride either for Bristol, +or one of the southern ports."</p> + +<p>"I must go back," Sir Marmaduke said doggedly. "I must kill that +scoundrel John Dormay, before I do anything else. It is he who has +wound this precious skein, in order to entrap us, expecting, the +scoundrel, to have my estates bestowed on him as a reward."</p> + +<p>"It were madness to ride back now, Sir Marmaduke. It would cost +you your life, and you would leave Charlie here fatherless, and +with but little chance of ever regaining the estate. You have but +to wait for a time, and everything will right itself. As soon as +the king comes to his own, your estates will be restored, and then +I would not seek to stay your hand, if you sought vengeance upon +this cunning knave."</p> + +<p>"Besides, father," Charlie put in, "much as he deserves any +punishment you can give him, you would not kill cousin Celia's +husband and Ciceley's father. When the truth is all made known, his +punishment will be bitter enough, for no honest man would offer him +a hand, or sit down to a meal with him.</p> + +<p>"Ciceley has been as a young sister to me, and her mother has +ever been as kind as if she had been my aunt. I would not see them +grieved, even if that rogue came off scot free from punishment; +but, at any rate, father, I pray you to let it pass at present. +This time we have happily got you out of the clutches of the Whigs, +but, if you fell into them again, you may be sure they would never +give us another chance."</p> + +<p>Sir Marmaduke still sat irresolute, and Charlie went on:</p> + +<p>"Besides, father, Mr. Jervoise has risked his life in lingering +in Lancashire to save you, and the brave fellows who aided us to +rescue you have risked theirs, both in the fray and afterwards, if +their share in it should ever be known; and it would not be fair to +risk failure, after all they have done. I pray you, father, be +guided by the opinion of your good friend, Mr. Jervoise."</p> + +<p>Sir Marmaduke touched his horse's flank with his heel.</p> + +<p>"You have prevailed, Charlie. Your last argument decided me. I +have no right to risk my life, after my good friends have done so +much to save me. John Dormay may enjoy his triumph for a while, but +a day of reckoning will surely come.</p> + +<p>"Now, tell me of the others, Jervoise. Have all escaped in +safety?"</p> + +<p>"All. Your boy brought me the news of your arrest, and that we +were charged with plotting William's assassination. I rode that +night with the news, and next day all were on the road to the +coast, and were happily on board and away before the news of their +escape could be sent to the ports."</p> + +<p>"And now, what are your plans, Jervoise--that is, if you have +any plans, beyond reaching a port and taking ship for France?"</p> + +<p>"I am going to Sweden," Mr. Jervoise said, and then repeated the +reasons that he had given Charlie for taking this step.</p> + +<p>"I am too old for the wars," Sir Marmaduke said. "I was sixty +last birthday, and though I am still strong and active, and could +strike a shrewd blow in case of need, I am too old for the fatigues +and hardships of campaigning. I could not hope, at my age, to +obtain a commission in the Swedish service."</p> + +<p>"No, I did not think of your joining the army, Sir Marmaduke, +though I warrant you would do as well as most; but I thought that +you might take up your residence at Stockholm, as well as at Saint +Germains. You will find many Scottish gentlemen there, and not a +few Jacobites who, like yourself, have been forced to fly. Besides, +both the life and air would suit you better than at Saint Germains, +where, by all accounts the life is a gay one, and men come to think +more of pleasure than of duty. Moreover, your money will go much +further in Sweden than in France."</p> + +<p>Sir Marmaduke, checking the horse's speed, said, "I have not so +much as a penny in my pocket, and methinks I am like to have some +trouble in getting at the hoard I have been collecting, ever since +Dutch William came to the throne, for the benefit of His Majesty +when he arrives."</p> + +<p>"You will have no trouble in getting at that, father," Charlie +said laughing, "seeing that you have nothing to do but to lean +over, and put your hand into my holsters, which are so full, as you +see, that I am forced to carry my pistols in my belt."</p> + +<p>"What mean you, lad?"</p> + +<p>"I mean, father, that I have the whole of the hoard, that was +stowed away in the priest's hiding place;" and he then related how +Banks had revealed to him the secret of the hiding place, and how +he had, the night before Sir Marmaduke was removed from Lancaster +Castle, visited the place and carried away the money.</p> + +<p>"I could not see Banks," he said, "but I left a few words on a +scrap of paper, saying that it was I who had taken the money. +Otherwise he would have been in a terrible taking, when he +discovered that it was gone."</p> + +<p>"That is right good news, indeed, lad. For twelve years I have +set aside half my rents, so that in those bags in your holsters +there are six years' income, and the interest of that money, laid +out in good mortgages, will suffice amply for my wants in a country +like Sweden, where life is simple and living cheap. The money +itself shall remain untouched, for your use, should our hopes fail +and the estates be lost for all time. That is indeed a weight off +my mind.</p> + +<p>"And you are, I hope, in equally good case, Jervoise, for if +not, you know that I would gladly share with you?"</p> + +<p>"I am in very good case, Sir Marmaduke, though I none the less +thank you for your offer. I too have, as you know, put aside half +my income. My estates are not so large as those of Lynnwood. Their +acreage may be as large, but a good deal of it is mountain land, +worth but little. My fund, therefore, is not as large as yours, but +it amounts to a good round sum; and as I hope, either in the army +or in some other way, to earn an income for myself, it is ample. I +shall be sorry to divert it from the use for which I intended it, +but that cannot now be helped. I have had the pleasure, year by +year, of putting it by for the king's use, and, now that +circumstances have changed, it will be equally useful to +myself."</p> + +<p>"Do you know this country well, Jervoise?"</p> + +<p>"Personally I know nothing about it, save that the sun tells me +that, at present, I am travelling south, Sir Marmaduke. But, for +the last few days I have been so closely studying a map, that I +know the name of every town and village on the various routes."</p> + +<p>"And whither think you of going?"</p> + +<p>"To London or Southampton. Strangers are far less noticed in +large towns than in small, and we could hardly hope to find a ship, +bound for Sweden, in any of the Dorset or Devon ports."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: In Sweden.</h2> + +<p>After much discussion, the party agreed that it would be best to +make for Southampton. The road thither was less frequented than +that leading to London, and there were fewer towns to be passed, +and less chance of interruption. Mr. Jervoise had brought with him +a valise and suit of clothes for Sir Marmaduke, of sober cut and +fashion. They avoided all large towns and, at the places where they +put up, represented themselves as traders travelling from the +Midlands to the southern coast, and they arrived at Southampton +without having excited the smallest suspicion. Indeed, throughout +the journey, they had heard no word of the affray near Chapel le +Frith, and knew, therefore, that the news had not travelled as fast +as they had.</p> + +<p>At Southampton, however, they had scarcely put up at an inn when +the landlord said:</p> + +<p>"I suppose, gentlemen, they are talking of nothing else, in +London, but the rescue of a desperate Jacobite by his friends. The +news only reached here yesterday."</p> + +<p>"It has occasioned a good deal of scare," Mr. Jervoise replied. +"I suppose there is no word of the arrest of the man, or his +accomplices? We have travelled but slowly, and the news may have +passed us on the way."</p> + +<p>"Not as yet," the landlord replied. "They say that all the +northern and eastern ports are watched, and they make sure of +catching him, if he presents himself there. The general opinion is +that he will, for a time, go into hiding with his friends, in the +hills of Cumberland or Westmoreland, or perhaps on the Yorkshire +moors; but they are sure to catch him sooner or later."</p> + +<p>"It is a bad business altogether," Mr. Jervoise said, "and we +can only hope that all guilty persons will in time get the +punishment they so well deserve. How can trade be carried on, if +the country is to be disturbed by plots, and conspiracies?"</p> + +<p>"How, indeed?" the landlord repeated heartily. "I do not meddle +in politics, being content to earn my living by my business, and to +receive all who can pay their reckoning, without caring a jot +whether they be Whigs or Tories."</p> + +<p>The next morning Mr. Jervoise and Sir Marmaduke went down to the +port, leaving the lads to wander about the town at their pleasure, +as two persons were likely to attract less attention than four. +They found that there were two vessels in port, loading with +munitions of war for Sweden, and that one of them would sail +shortly. They at once went on board her, and saw the captain.</p> + +<p>"Do you carry any passengers?"</p> + +<p>"None have applied so far," the captain said; "but, if they were +to offer, I should not say no to them."</p> + +<p>"We want to take passage for Sweden," Mr. Jervoise said. "The +King of that country is, as they say, fitting out an army. Clothes +are as necessary for troops as swords and guns, and we think we +could obtain a contract for these goods. There is no hope of doing +so, unless we ourselves go over, and, though sorely loath to do so, +for neither of us have ever before set foot on board a ship, we +determined on making the journey, together with our two clerks, for +whom we will take passage at the same rate as for ourselves, seeing +that they are both related to us."</p> + +<p>"Have you any goods with you?"</p> + +<p>"We shall take over but a bale or two of cloth, as samples of +the goods we can supply; but, beyond that, we have but little +luggage, seeing that our stay may be a very short one."</p> + +<p>There was a little haggling for terms, as the two gentlemen did +not wish to appear eager to go; but the matter was finally settled +to the satisfaction of both parties.</p> + +<p>On their return to the inn, Mr. Jervoise took the host +aside.</p> + +<p>"We have business connected with our trade in cloth in Sweden, +where we hope to obtain a large contract. The matter may occupy us +a week, or a month or two for aught we know, and we do not want our +horses to be eating their heads off, here, while we are away. +Besides, we may be able, on our return, to take a passage to one of +the Devonshire ports, which would suit us much better. But we +should not be able to do so, if there were need for returning here +for our horses. Therefore, we would fain dispose of them, and, if +you can find us a purchaser by tomorrow night, we will pay you a +fair commission on the money we receive."</p> + +<p>"I doubt not that I can do that readily enough," the landlord +said. "Three of them are fine animals, fit for any gentleman's +riding. The other is a stout hackney. Trust me, I will get the best +price I can for them."</p> + +<p>The next day he came up to their room.</p> + +<p>"I have had a good offer for the horses," he said. "Two +gentlemen, who arrived yesterday from France, and are staying at +the inn of a friend of mine, are requiring horses for themselves +and their servants, and I have promised my friend a slice of my +commission, if he will bring them round hither. Will you name your +price for them?"</p> + +<p>"No, I would rather not," Mr. Jervoise said cautiously. "If we +asked too high a figure, we might frighten the purchasers away. If +we should ask too little, we should be the losers. I daresay they +have named, to your friend, the price they are willing to give. You +had better ask from them a good bit above that, then you can come +down little by little, and maybe, seeing the horses are really good +ones, they may advance a bit. I am not used to a horse deal, and +will leave it to you to make the bargain. We are sorry to part with +the animals, but they might die on the voyage, or get so injured as +to be worthless; and, moreover, we shall have no use for them +there. Therefore, as we must sell, we are ready to take the best +terms we can get."</p> + +<p>When they returned to the inn, after an absence of two hours, +they found that the landlord had sold the horses, for a sum nearly +approaching their value, the gentlemen being as anxious to purchase +them as they were to sell. The next day, they bought three or four +rolls of west country cloth, and a supply of clothes suitable to +their condition, together with trunks for their carriage. All these +were sent down to the ship, in the course of the afternoon, and +they themselves embarked late in the evening, as she was to set +sail at daybreak.</p> + +<p>The lads, accustomed to spacious and airy rooms, were quite +taken aback at the small and stuffy cabin allotted to their joint +use, and slept but badly, for the loading of the ship continued by +torchlight, until within an hour of the time of their departure. +After tossing about for some hours in their narrow beds, they were +glad to go on deck, and to plunge their heads into a pail of water, +and were then, after combing their long hair, able to take an +interest in what was passing round them.</p> + +<p>The sailors were busy; stowing away the cargo last received, +tidying the decks, and coiling down the ropes. There were but few +persons on the quay, for those who had been engaged in loading the +cargo had gone off to bed, as soon as the last bale was on +board.</p> + +<p>In half an hour the sailors began to hoist the sails, the +hawsers were thrown off, and, with a gentle wind blowing aft, the +ship glided along past the shore, being helped by the tide, which +had begun to ebb half an hour before. The lads were greatly +interested in watching the well-wooded slope on the left, with the +stately ruins of Tintern Abbey rising above the trees. Then they +passed the round fort, at the water's edge, on their right, and +issued out from Southampton Water into the broad sheet between the +island and the mainland.</p> + +<p>It was dotted with sails; fishing craft and coasters for the +most part, but with some larger ships bound from the east to +Southampton, and others that had come in through the Solent. This +was very entertaining to the boys, and they were still more pleased +when they saw the fortifications of Portsmouth, with cannon +pointing seaward, and with many vessels riding in the strait by the +side of the town.</p> + +<p>"That fort would give the French or the Dutch a hot reception, +were they at any time to think to capture the dockyard and +shipping," Sir Marmaduke said.</p> + +<p>"The Dutch have already captured the place, and that without +shedding a drop of blood," Mr. Jervoise remarked.</p> + +<p>"'That is true enough," the knight said, stamping his foot +angrily on the deck, "but what has been won so easily may be lost +as quickly. I have seen several changes since I can first remember, +and I hope I may live to see another. However, we need not talk of +that now."</p> + +<p>"No, indeed," Mr. Jervoise agreed. "It may be, Sir Marmaduke, +that it would be better if we had talked and thought less of it, +during the last twelve years; better for ourselves, and for these +lads. We might still have been ready to join His Majesty as soon as +he landed, but as, till then, we could do nothing, it seems to me +now that it would have been wiser had we gone about our business +without worrying our heads, to say nothing of risking them, about a +matter that may not take place during our lives; as we know, well +enough, the King of France uses the Stuarts only for his own +convenience, and at heart cares nothing for them or their cause. It +is convenient to have the means of creating trouble here, and of so +weakening William; and it may be that, some day or other, it may +suit him to send over an army here to fight William, with the aid +of the Stuarts' friends, instead of fighting him in Holland or +elsewhere. But whether he may think fit to do so in one year, or in +twenty years hence, who can say? It is a question solely of +military policy.</p> + +<p>"The Stuarts are simply used, by the French king, to pull +English chestnuts out of the fire. I would that they had +established themselves anywhere rather than in France. It does them +harm with vast numbers who would otherwise be their friends, at any +rate in England. In Scotland it is otherwise, for Scotland has +always been in alliance with France; but in England it is +different. France has always been the national foe; and, had not +Charles and James proved themselves so subservient to Louis, +William of Orange would never have been crowned king. There are +vast numbers in England who would rather see a Stuart than a +Dutchman on the throne, but who will never strike a blow to replace +them there, and that because they will come over backed up by +French bayonets.</p> + +<p>"Well, let us talk of something else. If the time ever comes to +act, we shall be ready, but till then we can let the matter sleep, +the more so as we have a new life before us, and plenty of other +things to occupy our thoughts."</p> + +<p>"What is it, father," Harry asked, "that the Swedes and Danes +are going to fight about?"</p> + +<p>"It is a difficult question, Harry; but there can be little +doubt that Denmark is in the wrong. The King of Sweden died in +April, 1697. His death was unfortunate, for the powers contending +in Europe had all agreed to refer their quarrels to his mediation. +At his death, Denmark endeavoured to obtain the honour, but failed; +and by the mediation, chiefly, of the Swedish regency, peace was +concluded between France, England, and Holland, in the autumn of +that year; and, shortly afterwards, the struggle between the German +Emperor, France, and Spain was also concluded, but not at all to +the satisfaction of the Swedish mediators.</p> + +<p>"While Sweden was occupied in this matter of the pacification of +Europe, the King of Denmark thought to take advantage of the fact +that Charles of Sweden was but a minor, to press Frederick, Duke of +Holstein, who was in close alliance with him.</p> + +<p>"There had long been serious differences between the rulers of +Denmark and Holstein, both of whom were branches of the Oldenburg +family, and this in reference to the Duchy of Schleswig. The +quarrel had arisen from the act of Christian the Third, of Denmark, +who decreed that the descendants of his brother Adolphus should +govern Holstein, jointly with the King of Denmark, and that +Holstein and Schleswig should belong to them in common, neither +making any change in Holstein without the consent of the other A +more foolish arrangement could not have been conceived, for anyone +might have foreseen that it would lead to disputes and troubles. In +fact, quarrels continually arose, until, at the Peace of Rosahild, +in 1658, the duchy was adjudged to Denmark.</p> + +<p>"Holstein, however, never acquiesced in this, and in 1675 there +was war, when, Holstein being defeated, the Danes imprisoned its +duke, Christian Albertus, until he signed a renunciation of all his +rights.</p> + +<p>"His troops were disarmed, and all his towns and fortresses +garrisoned by Danish troops. On his release, the duke went to +Hamburg, where he remained till, at the Peace of Fontainebleau, +four years later, he was replaced in possession of his estates and +rights of sovereignty.</p> + +<p>"But this did not last long. New troubles arose, but Sweden, +England, and Holland interested themselves in favour of the duke, +and a peace was concluded in 1689, by which he was confirmed in the +rights given him, ten years before, with full liberty to raise a +certain number of troops, and of building fortresses, on the +condition that he should raise none to the prejudice of +Denmark.</p> + +<p>"This was another of those stipulations which inevitably lead to +trouble, for it afforded to Denmark a pretext for continual +complaint and interference. When Frederick the Fourth succeeded his +father as Duke of Holstein, in 1694, the quarrel grew so hot that +Denmark would have invaded Holstein, had not the parties to the +Treaty of '89 interfered, and brought about a conference. This +lasted all through the year 1696, but the negotiators appointed to +settle the matter were unable to arrive at any conclusion.</p> + +<p>"The following year, Charles of Sweden, who had just succeeded +his father, furnished the duke with some troops, to help him to +build some forts that were intended to protect the frontier, in +case of invasion by Denmark. Christian of Denmark at once attacked +and captured these forts, and levelled them to the ground. The +duke, being too weak to engage in a war with his powerful +neighbour, did not resent this attack, and the negotiations were +continued as before. In view of the danger of the situation, and +the necessity for a monarch at the head of affairs, the Swedish +Diet met, at Stockholm, to take part in the funeral of the late +king, which was to be performed on the 24th of November, and to +deliberate upon the situation.</p> + +<p>"By the will of the late king, Charles was not to ascend the +throne until he reached the age of eighteen, but the diet passed a +vote overruling this, and, as the regency concurred, he was at once +crowned, and the alliance with Holstein was cemented by the +marriage, that had been previously arranged between Charles's +eldest sister and the Duke of Holstein, being celebrated at +Stockholm. Charles the Twelfth at once concluded treaties with France, +England, and Holland; while Denmark is reported to have prepared +for war by making a secret alliance with Augustus of Saxony, King +of Poland, and the Czar of Russia. Both these monarchs were +doubtless desirous of extending their dominions, at the cost of +Sweden, whose continental possessions are considerable.</p> + +<p>"Augustus is not yet very firmly seated on the throne of Poland. +There are several parties opposed to him, and these united in +obtaining, from the diet, a refusal to pay the Saxon troops +Augustus had brought with him. The king, no doubt, considered that +these could be employed for the conquest of Livonia, and that the +addition of so large a territory to Poland would so add to his +popularity, that he would have no further troubles in his +kingdom.</p> + +<p>"Charles the Twelfth, being in ignorance of this secret agreement, +sent an embassy to Russia, to announce his accession to the throne. +The ambassadors were kept a long time waiting for an audience, as +the czar was bringing a war with the Turks to a conclusion, and did +not wish to throw off the mask until he was free to use his whole +force against Sweden. The ambassadors were, at last, received +civilly, but the czar evaded taking the usual oaths of friendship, +and, after long delays, the embassy returned to Sweden, feeling +somewhat disquieted as to the intentions of the czar, but having no +sure knowledge of them.</p> + +<p>"The King of Poland was more successful in disguising his +leaning towards Denmark, sending the warmest assurances to Charles, +requesting him to act as mediator in the quarrel between himself +and the Duke of Brandenburg, and signing a treaty of alliance with +Sweden. But, while Sweden had no idea of the triple alliance that +had been formed against her, the intention of Denmark to make war +was evident enough, for King Christian was gathering a great naval +armament.</p> + +<p>"The Duke of Holstein, becoming much alarmed at these +preparations, hastened on the fortifications of Tonningen, on the +Eider, three leagues from its mouth. The garrison of the place was +a weak one, and a thousand Swedish troops were thrown in to +strengthen it. The King of Denmark complained that this was a +breach of the treaty, but, as his own preparations for war were +unmistakable, no one could blame the Duke of Holstein for taking +steps to defend his territories.</p> + +<p>"As you know, Christian of Denmark died about this time, and was +succeeded by his son Frederick the Fourth.</p> + +<p>"Last August, he commenced the war, by sending a naval squadron +to cover the passage of four regiments into Pomerania. Charles of +Sweden, seeing that Holstein must be crushed by its powerful +neighbour, called upon Holland and the Duke of Lunenburg, who were +with Sweden guarantors of the treaty, to enforce its provisions; +and a joint protest was sent to the King of Denmark, who was +informed that, if he invaded Holstein, they should consider it a +breach of the Treaty of Altena, and treat him as a common enemy. +Frederick replied by sending some troops into the duchy.</p> + +<p>"No active operations took place, until the beginning of this +year. Up to that time, Sweden had not doubted the friendship of the +King of Poland, and Charles, at first, could hardly believe the +reports he received from the governor of Livonia, that the Saxon +troops were approaching the frontier.</p> + +<p>"A few days later, however, came the news that they were +advancing against Riga. The governor prepared for defence, and +hastily mounted cannon on the walls. His powers of resistance, +however, were lessened by the fact that the river Duna was frozen +over. Fleming, who commanded the Saxon troops, arrived before the +town, early in February, with four thousand men. The governor had +set fire to the suburbs on the previous day; and Fleming was +surprised to find that, instead of taking it by surprise, as he had +hoped, the place was in a position to offer a stout resistance. +However, he attacked the fort of Cobrun, on the opposite side of +the river, and carried it by assault.</p> + +<p>"The news was brought to young Charles the Twelfth when he was out +hunting, a sport of which he is passionately fond. By all accounts, +he is an extraordinary young fellow. He is not content with hunting +bears and shooting them, but he and his followers engage them armed +only with forked sticks. With these they attack the bears, pushing +and hustling the great creatures, with the forks of their sticks, +until they are completely exhausted, when they are bound and sent +away. In this hunt Charles took fourteen alive, one of which nearly +killed him before it was captured. He did not break up the hunting +party, but continued his sport to the end, sending off, however, +orders for the concentration of all the troops, in Livonia and +Finland, to act against the Saxons.</p> + +<p>"As soon as the King of Denmark heard of the siege of Riga, he +ordered the Duke of Wurtemberg-Neustadt, his commander-in-chief, to +enter Holstein with his army, sixteen thousand strong. All of that +country was at once overrun, the ducal domains seized, and great +contributions exacted from Schleswig and Holstein. Fleming and the +Saxons, after one severe repulse, forced the garrison of the fort +of Dunamund, commanding the mouth of the Duna, to surrender. +Tonningen is the only fortress that now holds out in Holstein. So +you see, lads, there is every chance of there being brisk fighting, +and I warrant the young King of Sweden will not be backward in the +fray. A man who is fond of engaging with bears, armed with nothing +but a forked stick, is not likely to hang back in the day of +battle.</p> + +<p>"But, at present, we will say no more on the matter. Now that we +have got beyond the shelter of the island, the waves are getting +up, and the vessel is beginning to toss and roll. I see that Sir +Marmaduke has retired to his cabin. I mean to remain here as long +as I can, and I should advise you both to do the same. I have +always heard that it is better to fight with this sickness of the +sea, as long as possible, and that it is easier to do so in fresh +air than in a close cabin."</p> + +<p>The lads quite agreed with this opinion, but were, in spite of +their efforts, presently prostrate. They remained on deck for some +hours, and then crawled to their cabin, where they remained for the +next three days, at the end of which time they came on deck again, +feeling better, but as weak as if they had suffered from a long +illness.</p> + +<p>Mr. Jervoise had been in frequently to see them, having escaped +the malady, from which, as he told them, Sir Marmaduke was +suffering to the full as severely as they were.</p> + +<p>"So you have found your feet again," the captain said, when they +appeared on deck. "You will be all right now."</p> + +<p>"We feel much better," Harry said, "now that the storm is +over."</p> + +<p>"Storm! What storm? The weather has been splendid. We cannot +wish for anything better. It has been just as you see it now--a +bright sun, and just enough wind for her to carry whole sail."</p> + +<p>The lads both looked astonished.</p> + +<p>"Then why should we roll and toss about so much?" Harry +asked.</p> + +<p>"Roll and toss! Nonsense, lad! There has been a little movement, +of course, as there always must be when there is a brisk wind; but +as for rolling and tossing, you must wait till you see a storm, +then you will begin to have an idea of what the sea is."</p> + +<p>The boys both felt rather crestfallen, for they had flattered +themselves that their sufferings were caused by something quite out +of the ordinary way, and it was mortifying to know that the weather +had been really fine, and there had been nothing even approaching a +storm.</p> + +<p>The rest of the voyage was a pleasant one. They found they had +regained their appetites, and were able to enjoy their meals; still +they were not sorry when they saw the coast of Sweden, and, a few +hours later, entered the port of Gottenburg, where Sir Marmaduke, +for the first time, came on deck--looking a mere shadow of his +former jovial self.</p> + +<p>"Well, lads," he said, "I was glad to hear that you got through +this business quicker than I did. Here we are in Sweden, and here +I, at least, am likely to stay, unless I can pass by land through +Holland, France, and across from Calais, for never again will I +venture upon a long voyage. I have been feeling very ungrateful, +for, over and over again, I wished that you had not rescued me, as +death on Tower Hill would have been nothing to the agonies that I +have been enduring!"</p> + +<p>As soon as the vessel was warped alongside the quay, they +landed, and put up at an hotel, Sir Marmaduke insisting that the +ground was as bad as the sea, as it kept on rising and falling +beneath his feet. Mr. Jervoise agreed to return on board the +following day, to fetch the luggage, which would by that time have +been got up from the hold.</p> + +<p>At the hotel, they met several persons able to speak English, +and from them learnt how matters had been going on since they had +last heard. The town and fortress of Tonningen had fallen, after a +vigorous defence; it had been bombarded for eight days, and had +repulsed one assault, but had been captured at the second attack. +England and Holland had agreed to furnish fleets, and an army of +twelve thousand Swedes were in readiness to march, at once, while +other armies were being formed. The king had, the week before, +reviewed the army gathered at Malmoe; and had, on the previous day, +arrived at Gottenburg, accompanied by the Duke of Holstein.</p> + +<p>Mr. Jervoise went, the same afternoon, to find out some of his +friends who resided at Gottenburg. He was fortunate enough to find +one of them, who was able to inform him that his wife's cousin was +now a major, in one of the newly-raised regiments stationed at +Gottenburg.</p> + +<p>He found him without difficulty. Major Jamieson was delighted at +the coming of his former friend.</p> + +<p>"You are the last person I expected to see here, Jervoise. It is +true that, when we met last, you said that if matters went wrong in +England you should come out here, instead of taking refuge in +France; but, as everything is quiet, I had little hope of seeing +you again, until I paid another visit to Scotland, of which at +present there is but little prospect. Have you grown tired of doing +nothing, and is it a desire to see something of a stirring life +that has brought you over here?"</p> + +<p>Mr. Jervoise related, shortly, the events by which he had been +driven into exile, and expressed his desire to serve in the army of +Sweden, and that his son and young Carstairs should also enter the +army.</p> + +<p>"They are but sixteen yet," he said, "but are stout, active +fellows, and could hold their own in a day's march or in a stout +fight with many men. Of course, if I could obtain commissions for +them, all the better, but if not they are ready to enlist in the +ranks. Roughing it will do them no harm."</p> + +<p>"Their age is no drawback," Major Jamieson said. "There are many +no older, both in the ranks and as officers. Men in Sweden of all +ages and of all ranks are joining, for this unprovoked attack, on +the part of Poland, has raised the national spirit to boiling heat. +The chief difficulty is their and your ignorance of the language. +Were it not for that, I could obtain, from the minister of war, +commissions for you at once."</p> + +<p>He sat thinking for some minutes, in silence.</p> + +<p>"I think I see how it can be managed, Jervoise. I have some +twenty or thirty Scotchmen in my regiment, and I know a colonel who +has as many in his, and these I could manage to get, in exchange +for an equal number of my Swedes. Ships are coming daily from +Scotland, and most of them bring young fellows who have come out to +join the army.</p> + +<p>"You know how the Scots fought, under Gustavus Adolphus, and +there is scarce a glen in Scotland where there are not traditions +of fathers, or grandfathers, who fought in Hepburn's Green Brigade. +Therefore, it is natural that, seeing there is no chance of +military service at home, there should be many young fellows coming +out to join.</p> + +<p>"I can go across this evening to the minister of war, who is a +personal friend of mine, and get him to give you permission to +raise a company of Scotchmen for service. I shall, of course, point +out to him that you will enlist them here. I shall show him the +advantage of these men being gathered together, as their ignorance +of the language makes them, for some time, useless as soldiers if +enrolled in a Swedish regiment. I shall mention that I have twenty +in my own corps, who are at present positively useless, and in fact +a source of great trouble, owing to their understanding nothing +that is said to them, and shall propose that they be at once handed +over to you. As to the exchange, we can manage that quietly between +ourselves. You would have no difficulty with fresh-landed men, as +these will naturally be delighted at joining a company of their own +countrymen."</p> + +<p>"Thank you very heartily, Jamieson. This altogether exceeds my +hopes, but I fear that I know nothing of drilling them."</p> + +<p>"Two of my men are sergeants, and, having been in the army for +some years, speak Swedish well. They will do the drilling at first. +The manoeuvres are not complicated, and, for a pound or two, they +will be glad to teach you all the orders necessary. I don't know +how you are situated as to money, but I can assure you my purse is +at your service."</p> + +<p>"Thank you; I am, in that respect, excellently well provided, as +is my friend Sir Marmaduke. We have both made provision for +unexpected contingencies."</p> + +<p>"Then, if you will call tomorrow after breakfast, I shall +probably have your commission ready. As a matter of course, you +will have the appointment of your own officers, and will only have +to send in their names. Each company is from a hundred and forty to +a hundred and fifty strong, and has a captain, two lieutenants, and +two ensigns."</p> + +<p>Mr. Jervoise's news was, on his return to the inn, received with +delight by the two lads; and Sir Marmaduke said:</p> + +<p>"I wish I could shake off twenty of my years, Jervoise, and join +also. Well, well, I daresay I shall get on comfortably enough. I +know there are a good many English and Scotch Jacobites settled in +the town or neighbourhood, and I shall not be long before I meet +someone I know.</p> + +<p>"As the matter seems settled, I should advise you lads to go +down, the first thing in the morning, to the wharves. There is no +saying when ships may come in. Moreover, it is likely enough that +you may light upon young fellows who have landed within the last +few weeks, and who have been kept so far, by their ignorance of the +language, from enlisting."</p> + +<p>"That is a very good idea," Mr. Jervoise said. "They will be +delighted to hear a friendly voice, and be only too glad to enlist +in a Scottish company. You can say that each man will have a free +outfit given him."</p> + +<p>Accordingly, the next morning early, the two lads went down to +the wharf. Presently they saw three young fellows, who were +evidently Scotch by their dress and caps, talking together. They +strolled up near enough to catch what they were saying.</p> + +<p>"It is hard," one said, "that, now we are here, we can make no +one understand us, and it seems to me we had far better have stayed +at home."</p> + +<p>"We shall find some one who speaks our language presently, +Jock," another said more cheerfully. "The old man, where we lodged +last night, said in his broken tongue, that we had but to go over +to Malmoe, or some such place as that, where there is a big camp, +and walk up to an officer and say we wish to enlist."</p> + +<p>"Oh, that is all very well," the other grumbled; "but, if he did +not understand us, we should be no better off than before."</p> + +<p>"Are you wanting to enlist?" Harry said, going up to them.</p> + +<p>The men gave an exclamation of pleasure, at being addressed in +their own tongue.</p> + +<p>"That we do, sir. If you can put us in the way, we shall be +grateful."</p> + +<p>"That I can do easily," Harry said. "My father is raising a +company of Scotch and Englishmen, for the regiment commanded by +Colonel Jamieson. This will be far better than joining a Swedish +company, where no one will understand your language, and you will +not be able to make out the orders given. My father will give each +man who joins a free outfit."</p> + +<p>"That is the very thing for us, sir. We expected to find Scotch +regiments here, as there were in the old times, and we had hoped to +join them; but whether it is a company or regiment, it makes but +little difference, so that we are with those who speak our +tongue."</p> + +<p>"Very well, then. If you come to the Lion Inn, at nine o'clock, +you will see my father there. If you know of any others in the same +mind as yourselves, and willing to join, bring them with you."</p> + +<p>"There are ten or twelve others who came over in the ship with +us, two days since, and I have no doubt they will be fine and glad +to join."</p> + +<p>"Well, see if you can hunt them up, and bring them with +you."</p> + +<p>On returning to the inn, they found that Mr. Jervoise had +already received his commission as captain, and, by ten o'clock, +fifteen young Scotchmen had been sworn in. All of them had brought +broadswords and dirks, and Captain Jervoise at once set to work +buying, at various shops, iron head pieces, muskets, and other +accoutrements.</p> + +<p>During the next three days ten other English and Scotchmen had +joined, and then a ship came in, from which they gathered another +four-and-twenty recruits. Arms had already been purchased for them, +and, on the following day, Captain Jervoise marched off to Malmoe +with his forty-nine recruits. Harry accompanied them, Charlie being +left behind, with his father, to gather another fifty men as the +ships arrived.</p> + +<p>A week later this number was obtained, and Charlie started with +them for the camp, Sir Marmaduke accompanying them on horseback, in +order to aid Charlie in maintaining order among his recruits. He +had already fixed upon a small house, just outside the town, and, +having met two or three old friends, who had been obliged to leave +England at William's accession, he already began to feel at +home.</p> + +<p>"Don't you fidget about me, Charlie," he said. "Ferrers tells me +that there are at least a score of Jacobites here, and that they +form quite a society among themselves. Living is very cheap, and he +will introduce me to a man of business, who will see that my money +is well invested."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: Narva.</h2> + +<p>For the next fortnight, drilling went on from morning till +night, the officers receiving instructions privately from the +sergeants, and further learning the words of command by standing by +while the men were being drilled. At the end of that time, both +officers and men were sufficiently instructed to carry out the +simple movements which were, alone, in use in those days.</p> + +<p>It was not, however, until two months later that they were +called upon to act. The English and Dutch fleets had arrived, and +effected a junction with that of Sweden, and the Danish fleet had +shut themselves up in the port of Copenhagen, which was closely +blockaded. A large army had crossed to Zeeland, and repulsed the +Danes, who had endeavoured to prevent their landing, and had then +marched up to within sight of the walls of Copenhagen, which they +were preparing to besiege; when the King of Denmark, alarmed at +this unexpected result of his aggression on Holstein, conceded +every point demanded, and peace was signed.</p> + +<p>The negotiations were carried on in Holland, and the Swedes were +extremely angry, when they found that they were baulked of their +expected vengeance on their troublesome neighbours. The peace, +however, left Charles the Twelfth at liberty to turn his attention to +his other foes, and to hurry to the assistance of Riga, which was +beleaguered by the Saxons and Poles; and of Narva, against which +city the Russians had made several unsuccessful assaults.</p> + +<p>Without losing an hour, the king crossed to Malmoe. The troops +there were ordered to embark, immediately, in the vessels in the +harbour. They then sailed to Revel, where the Swedish commander, +Welling, had retired from the neighbourhood of Riga, his force +being too small to meet the enemy in the open field.</p> + +<p>No sooner had the troops landed than the king reviewed them, and +General Welling was ordered, at once, to march so as to place +himself between the enemy and Wesenberg, where a large amount of +provisions and stores for the use of the army had been +collected.</p> + +<p>The two lieutenants, in the company of Captain Jervoise, were +young Scotchmen of good family, who had three months before come +over and obtained commissions, and both had, at the colonel's +request, been transferred to his regiment, and promoted to the rank +of lieutenants. Captain Jervoise and his four officers messed +together, and were a very cheerful party; indeed, their commander, +to the surprise both of his son and Charlie, had quite shaken off +his quiet and somewhat gloomy manner, and seemed to have become +quite another man, in the active and bracing life in which he was +now embarked. Cunningham and Forbes were both active young men, +full of life and energy, while the boys thoroughly enjoyed roughing +it, and the excitement and animation of their daily work.</p> + +<p>Sometimes they slept in the open air, sometimes on the floor of +a cottage. Their meals were rough but plentiful. The king's orders +against plundering were very severe, and, even when in Denmark, the +country people, having nothing to complain of, had brought in +supplies regularly. Here in Linovia they were in Swedish dominions, +but there was little to be purchased, for the peasantry had been +brought to ruin by the foraging parties of the Russians and +Poles.</p> + +<p>There was some disappointment, that the enemy had fallen back at +the approach of Welling's force, but all felt sure that it would +not be long before they met them, for the king would assuredly lose +no time in advancing against them, as soon as his army could be +brought over. They were not, however, to wait for the arrival of +the main force, although the cavalry only took part in the first +affair. General Welling heard that a force of three thousand +Circassians had taken up their quarters in a village, some fifteen +miles away, and sent six hundred horse, under Majors Patkul and +Tisenbausen, to surprise them. They were, at first, successful and, +attacking the Circassians, set fire to the village, and were +engaged in slaughtering the defenders, when twenty-one squadrons of +Russian cavalry came up and fell upon them, attacking them on all +sides, and posting themselves so as to cut off their retreat. The +Swedes, however, gathered in a body, and charged the Russians so +furiously that they cut a way through their ranks, losing, however, +many of their men, while Major Patkul and another officer were made +prisoners.</p> + +<p>The king was at Revel when this engagement took place, and, +although but few of the troops had arrived, he was too impatient +for action to wait until the coming of the fleet. He therefore +marched to Wesenberg, with his bodyguard and a few troops from +Revel. He at once despatched a thousand men, to cover the frontier, +and issued orders for the rest of the troops to leave the whole of +their baggage behind them, to take three days' provision in their +haversacks, and to prepare to march the next morning.</p> + +<p>Major Jamieson came into the cottage, occupied by Captain +Jervoise and his officers, late in the evening. They had a blazing +fire, for it was now the middle of November, and the nights were +very sharp.</p> + +<p>"Well, Jervoise, what do you think of the orders?" he asked, as +he seated himself on a log that had been brought in for the +fire.</p> + +<p>"I have not thought much about them, except that we are going to +do a long and quick march somewhere."</p> + +<p>"And where is that somewhere, do you think?"</p> + +<p>"That, I have not the slightest idea."</p> + +<p>"You would not say that it was to Narva?"</p> + +<p>"I certainly should not, considering that we have but five +thousand infantry, and three thousand cavalry, and of these a large +number have been so weakened, by fever, as to be unfit for +fighting; while at Narva, report says there are eighty thousand +Russians, in a strongly intrenched camp."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is where we are going, Jervoise, nevertheless. At +least, that is what the colonel has told me."</p> + +<p>"He must have been surely jesting, major. We may be going to +push forward in that direction, and occupy some strong position +until the army comes up, but it would be the height of madness to +attack an enemy, in a strong position, and just tenfold our +force."</p> + +<p>"Well, we shall see," Jamieson said coolly. "It is certain that +Narva cannot hold out much longer, and I know that the king has set +his heart on relieving it; but it does seem somewhat too dangerous +an enterprise to attack the Russians. At any rate, that is the +direction in which we are going, tomorrow. It is a good seventy +miles distant, and, as they say that the whole country has been +devastated, and the villagers have all fled, it is evident that +when the three days' bread and meat we carry are exhausted we shall +have to get some food, out of the Russian camp, if nowhere +else."</p> + +<p>Captain Jervoise laughed, as did the others.</p> + +<p>"We can live for a short time on the horses, Jamieson, if we are +hard pushed for it, though most of them are little beyond skin and +bone."</p> + +<p>"That is true. The cavalry are certainly scarcely fit for +service. Welling's troops have had a very hard time of it, and we +may thank our stars, though we did not think so at the time, that +we were kept nearly three months at Malmoe, instead of being here +with Welling."</p> + +<p>"But do you seriously think, major, that the king means to +attack the Russians?" Cunningham asked.</p> + +<p>"My own idea is that he does, Cunningham. I cannot see what else +there is for us to do. At any rate, if he does, you may be sure +that we shall make a tough fight for it. The cavalry showed, the +other day, that they can stand up against many times their number +of the Russians, and if they can do it, I fancy we can. There is +one thing, the very audacity of such an attempt is in its +favour."</p> + +<p>"Well, we will all do our best, you may be sure; but since +Thermopylae, I doubt if men have fought against longer odds."</p> + +<p>The next morning the men fell in. Captain Jervoise, who, like +all of his rank, was mounted, took his place at the head of his +company, and the little army marched away from Wesenberg. It was a +dreary march to Purts, but the sight of the ruined villages, and +devastated fields, aroused a feeling of indignation and fury among +the troops, and a fierce longing to attack men who had so +ruthlessly spread ruin through a fertile country. Orders were +issued, that evening, that the men were to husband their provisions +as much as possible, and the order was more strictly obeyed than +such orders usually are, for the men saw, for themselves, that +there was no possibility of obtaining fresh supplies in the wasted +country, and were well aware that there existed no train of waggons +and horses capable of bringing up stores from Wesenberg.</p> + +<p>There were a few aged men and women remaining at Purts, and from +these they learned that their next day's march would take them to a +very difficult pass, which was held by six hundred of the Russian +cavalry, together with a force of infantry and some guns. It was +the intention of the king to encamp that evening near the pass, +and, when within three or four miles of it, General Meidel, who had +with him the quartermaster of the army, and four hundred cavalry, +rode on ahead to choose a site for the camp. He presently saw a +large body of Russian foragers in front of him, and sent back to +the king for permission to attack them. Charles ordered the army to +continue its march, and, hurrying forward with some of his +officers, joined General Meidel and charged the foragers, killing +many, taking others prisoners, and putting the rest to flight. He +followed close upon their heels, and rode right up to the mouth of +the pass, in spite of the heavy fire of artillery and musketry +opened by the Russians.</p> + +<p>He at once determined to take advantage of the alarm produced by +the defeat of the Russian cavalry, and, although darkness was now +drawing on, brought up some of his infantry and artillery, and +attacked with such vigour that the Russians fled, after offering a +very feeble resistance.</p> + +<p>A battalion of foot were ordered to occupy the pass, while the +rest of the army piled their arms, and lay down where they stood. +In the morning, they were astonished at the strength of the +position that had been gained so easily. The defile was deep and +narrow, a rapid stream ran through it, and the ground was soft and +marshy. A few determined men should have been able to bar the +advance of an army.</p> + +<p>The troops were in high spirits at the result of this, their +first action against the enemy, and were the more pleased that they +found, in the Russian camp, sufficient provisions to replace those +they had used. After a hearty meal, they again advanced at a brisk +march. The defile was captured on the evening of the 17th November, +and, early in the morning of the 20th, the army reached Lagena, a +league and a half from Narva, and, ordering the troops to follow, +the king rode forward to reconnoitre the Russian position.</p> + +<p>The troops were weary with their long marches, and many of those +who had, but recently, recovered from fever were scarce able to +drag themselves along, while great numbers were unfit to take part +in a battle, until after two or three days of rest. The officers of +the Malmoe Regiment, for it had taken its name from the camp where +it had been formed, were gathered in a group at its head, +discussing the situation. Most of the officers were of opinion +that, to attack at once, with men and horses worn out with fatigue, +was to ensure destruction; but there were others who thought that, +in face of so great an army as that gathered in front of them, the +only hope was in an immediate attack. Major Jamieson was one of +these.</p> + +<p>"The king is right," he said. "If the Russian army have time to +form, and to advance against us in order of battle, we must be +annihilated. At present, their camp is an extensive one, for, as I +hear, it extends in a great semi-circle four or five miles long, +with the ends resting on the river. They cannot believe that we +intend to attack them, and, if we go straight at them, we may +possibly gain a footing in their intrenchments, before the whole +army can gather to aid those at the point of attack. It will be +almost a surprise, and I think the king is right to attempt it, for +it is only by a quick and sudden stroke that we can gain a success +over so great an army."</p> + +<p>The halt was but a short one and, as soon as the regiments had +arrived at the positions assigned to them, they advanced. As soon +as they appeared, on a rise of ground facing the intrenchments, the +enemy opened fire. The king had already reconnoitred a portion of +their position, exposing himself recklessly to their shot, and, as +soon as the troops came up, he issued orders for them to prepare to +attack in two columns. First, however, several of the regiments +were ordered to fall out, and to cut down bushes and make fascines, +to enable the troops to cross the ditches.</p> + +<p>The intrenchment was a formidable one, being provided with +parapets armed with <em>chevaux de frise</em>, and flanked by +strong exterior works, while several batteries had been placed to +sweep the ground across which an enemy must advance.</p> + +<p>The right column, under General Welling, was to march to a point +nearly in the centre of the great semicircle; while the left, under +General Rhenschild, was to assault a point about halfway between +the centre and the river, where one of the largest and most +powerful of the enemy's batteries was placed. The king himself was +with this wing, with his bodyguard, and he hoped that here he might +meet the czar commanding in person. The Russian emperor had, +however, left the camp that morning, to fetch up forty thousand men +who were advancing from Plescow, and the command of the army had +been assumed by the Duke of Croy.</p> + +<p>The Swedish left wing had with it a battery of twenty-one guns, +while sixteen guns covered the attack on the right. It was two +o'clock in the afternoon when two guns gave the signal for the +advance. Hitherto the weather had been fine, but it had become +gradually overcast, and, just as the signal was given, a tremendous +storm of snow and hail began. It set right in the face of the +Russians, and concealed from them the movement of the Swedes, for +which, indeed, they were wholly unprepared, believing that the +small force they saw was but the advance guard of a great Swedish +army, and that no attack need be expected until the main body +arrived. The consequence was, the Swedes were almost at the edge of +the ditch before they were perceived, and both columns attacked +with such vigour and courage that, in a quarter of an hour, they +had gained a footing in the intrenchments, and had so filled up the +ditch with the fascines that the cavalry were able to follow +them.</p> + +<p>The Russians were so astounded at this sudden attack that they +lost heart altogether. The Swedish left, as soon as it entered the +intrenchments, swept along them, the Russians abandoning their guns +and batteries, and making for their bridge across the river. +Unfortunately for them, their huts were built close behind the +works, and in rear was another intrenchment, designed to repel +assaults from the town; and the terrified crowd, unable to make +their way rapidly along, over ground encumbered by their huts, +crossed the interior intrenchments, thinking to make their way +faster through the fields to the bridge.</p> + +<p>The Swedish king, however, placed himself at the head of his +bodyguard, and, followed by the rest of his horse, charged right +upon them, cutting down great numbers, and driving the rest before +them towards the river, while the infantry kept up a heavy fire +upon the fugitives in the intrenchments.</p> + +<p>The panic had spread quickly, and the Russian troops nearest to +the bridge were already pouring over, when the mass of the +fugitives arrived. These pressed upon the bridge in such numbers +that it speedily gave way, cutting off the retreat of their +comrades behind. Ignorant of the result, the terrified crowd pushed +on, pressing those in front of them into the river, and the number +of drowned was no less than that of those who fell beneath the +bullets, pikes, and sabres of the Swedes.</p> + +<p>In their despair the Russians, rallied by some of their +generals, now attempted to defend themselves, and, by occupying +some houses and barracks, and barricading the passages between +these with overturned waggons, they fought bravely, and repulsed, +for some time, every effort of the Swedes.</p> + +<p>Darkness was now falling, and the king hastened to the spot +where the battle was fiercely raging. As he ran towards it, he fell +into a morass, from which he was rescued with some difficulty, +leaving his sword and one boot behind him. However, he at once +pushed on, and placed himself at the head of the infantry engaged +in the assault. But even his presence and example did not avail. +The Russians maintained their position with desperate courage, and, +when it became quite dark, the assault ceased.</p> + +<p>The right column had met with equal success. It had penetrated +the intrenchments, defeated all the Russians who opposed it, and +now moved to assist the left wing.</p> + +<p>The king, however, seeing that the Russian defences could not be +carried, by a direct assault, without great loss, gathered the army +in the space between the town and the Russian intrenchments, and +placed them in a position to repel an attack, should the Russians +take the offensive; giving orders that, at daylight, the hill on +which the enemy had their principal battery should be assaulted. +The guns here commanded all the intrenchments, and the capture of +that position would render it impossible for the Russians to +continue their defence, or for the now separated wings of the army +to combine.</p> + +<p>The officers in command of the Russian right wing, finding +themselves unable to cross the river on their broken bridge, and +surrounded by the Swedes, sent in to surrender in the course of the +evening, and two battalions of the Swedish Guards took possession +of the post that had been so gallantly defended. The king granted +them permission to retire with their arms, the colours and +standards being given up, and the superior officers being retained +as prisoners of war.</p> + +<p>The broken bridge was repaired and, early the next morning, the +Russian troops passed over. Their left wing was, after the +surrender of their right, in a hopeless position, for on that side +no bridge had been thrown over the river, and their retreat was +wholly cut off. On learning, before daybreak, that the right wing +had surrendered, they too sent in to ask for terms. The king +granted them freedom to return to their country, but without their +standards or arms. They filed off before him, officers and soldiers +bareheaded, and passed over the bridge, their numbers being so +great that all had not crossed until next morning.</p> + +<p>The Russians lost over 18,000 men killed or drowned, a hundred +and forty-five cannon, and twenty-eight mortars, all of which were +new, besides vast quantities of military stores and provisions. A +hundred and fifty-one colours, and twenty standards, and the +greater proportion of their muskets, together with the military +chest, the Duke of Croy, their commander-in-chief, and the whole of +their generals, colonels, majors, and captains, fell into the hands +of the Swedes, as prisoners of war. The total loss in killed and +wounded of the Swedes was under two thousand, the chief loss being +due to the desperate resistance of the Russians, after the battle +was irretrievably lost. It may be doubted whether so complete and +surprising a victory, between armies so disproportionate in force, +was ever before gained.</p> + +<p>The king had exposed himself, throughout the day, most +recklessly, and was everywhere in the thick of the Russian bullets, +and yet he escaped without so much as a scratch. The Malmoe +Regiment had been with the left wing, but suffered comparatively +little loss, as they were one of the last to enter the +intrenchments, and it was only when darkness was closing in that +they were called up to take a part in the attack on the position +held by the Russians.</p> + +<p>"Never was the saying, that fortune favours the brave, more +signally verified, Jervoise," Major Jamieson said, as he sat down +to a rough breakfast with the officers of the Scottish company, on +the morning after the Russian surrender.</p> + +<p>"That's true enough, but Russians are brave, too, as they showed +at the end of the day. I fancy you have a scotch proverb to the +effect that 'fou folk come to no harm.' I think that is more +applicable in the present case."</p> + +<p>The major laughed.</p> + +<p>"The fou folk relates rather to drunkenness than madness, +Jervoise. But, of course, it would do for both. I own that the +whole enterprise did seem, to me, to be absolute madness, but the +result has justified it. That sudden snowstorm was the real cause +of our victory, and, had it not been for that, I still think that +we could not have succeeded. The Russian cannon certainly continued +to fire, but it was wholly at random, and they were taken by +surprise when we suddenly appeared at the side of the ditch, while +we were across before they could gather any force sufficient to +defend it.</p> + +<p>"After that, panic did the rest. The commander in chief fell +early into our hands. There was no one to give orders, no one to +rally them, and I expect the Russian soldiers gave us credit for +having brought on that storm, to cover our assault, by the aid of +malign spirits.</p> + +<p>"Well, lads, and how did you feel when the shots were whistling +about?"</p> + +<p>"I did not like it at all, major," Charlie said. "It seemed such +a strange thing, marching along in the thick of that snowstorm, +hearing the rush of cannonballs overhead, and the boom of guns, and +yet be unable to see anything but the rear files of the company in +front."</p> + +<p>"It was an uncanny feeling, Charlie. I felt it myself, and was +very grateful that we were hidden from the enemy, who, of course, +were blazing away in the direction in which they had last seen us. +We only lost three killed and twelve wounded, altogether, and I +think those were, for the most part, hit by random shots.</p> + +<p>"Well, if this is the way the king means to carry on war, we +shall have enough of it before we are done."</p> + +<p>The sick and wounded were sent into the town, the first thing, +but it was not until the Russians had all crossed the river that +the king, himself, rode triumphantly into the place, surrounded by +his staff, amid the wild enthusiasm of the inhabitants, whom his +victory had saved from ruin and massacre.</p> + +<p>The town, although strongly fortified, was not a large one, and +its houses were so dilapidated, from the effects of the Russian +bombardment, that but few of the troops could be accommodated +there. The rest were quartered in the Russian huts. On the 26th, a +solemn service of thanksgiving for the victory was celebrated, with +a salute from all the cannon of the town and camp, and by salvos of +musketry from the troops.</p> + +<p>The question of provisions was the most important now. It was +true that large quantities had been captured in the Russian camp, +but, beyond a magazine of corn, abandoned by the fugitives at Tama +and brought in, there was no prospect of replenishing the store +when exhausted, for the whole country, for a great distance round, +had been completely devastated by the Russians. These had not +retreated far, having been rallied by the czar at Plescow, and +quartered in the towns of the frontier of Livonia, whence they made +incursions into such districts as had not been previously +wasted.</p> + +<p>"This is dull work," Archie Cunningham said, one day. "The +sooner we are busy again, the better. There is nothing to do, and +very little to eat. The cold is bitter, and fuel scarce. One wants +something to warm one's blood."</p> + +<p>"You are not likely to have anything of that kind, for some +months to come," Major Jamieson replied dryly. "You don't suppose +we are going to have a battle of Narva once a week, do you? No +doubt there will be a few skirmishes, and outpost encounters, but +beyond that there will be little doing until next spring. You can +make up your mind, for at least five months, of the worst side of a +soldier's life--dull quarters, and probably bad ones, scanty food, +cold, and disease."</p> + +<p>"Not a very bright lookout, major," Forbes laughed. "I hope it +won't be as bad as that."</p> + +<p>"Then I advise you to give up hoping, and to make up your mind +to realities, Forbes. There is a good deal of illness in the camp +now, and there will be more and more as the time goes on. There is +nothing like inaction to tell upon the health of troops. However, +we certainly shall not stay here. It would be impossible to victual +the army, and I expect that, before long, we shall march away and +take up quarters for the winter.</p> + +<p>"As to operations on a great scale, they are out of the +question. After the thrashing they have had, the Russians will be +months before they are in a condition to take the offensive again; +while we are equally unable to move because, in the first place, we +are not strong enough to do so, and in the second we have no +baggage train to carry provisions with us, and no provisions to +carry if we had it."</p> + +<p>On the 13th of December, the king quitted Narva with the army, +and on the 19th arrived at Lais, an old castle six miles from +Derpt, and here established his headquarters. A few of the troops +were stationed in villages, but the greater part in rough huts in +the neighbourhood, and along the frontier.</p> + +<p>It was not long before Major Jamieson's predictions were +verified. A low fever, occasioned by the fatiguing marches and the +hardships they had endured, added to the misery from the cold and +wet that penetrated the wretched huts, spread rapidly through the +army. Many died, and great numbers were absolutely prostrated.</p> + +<p>The king was indefatigable in his efforts to keep up the spirits +of the troops. He constantly rode about from camp to camp, entering +the huts, chatting cheerfully with the soldiers, and encouraging +them by kind words and assurances that, when the spring came, they +would soon gain strength again.</p> + +<p>At Narva the four young officers had all purchased horses. Most +of the Swedish officers were mounted; and the king encouraged this, +as, on occasion, he could thereby collect at once a body of mounted +men ready for any enterprise; but their own colonel preferred that, +on the march, the lieutenants and ensigns should be on foot with +their men, in order to set them an example of cheerful endurance. +Those who wished it, however, were permitted to have horses, which +were, on such occasions, led in the rear of the regiment.</p> + +<p>Captain Jervoise had approved of the purchase of the horses, +which were got very cheaply, as great numbers had been +captured.</p> + +<p>"If we can get over the difficulty of the forage," he said, "you +will find them very useful for preserving your health during the +winter. A ride will set your blood in motion, and, wherever we are +quartered, there are sure to be camps within riding distance. The +king approves of officers taking part in dashing expeditions, so +you may be able to take a share in affairs that will break the +monotony of camp life."</p> + +<p>They found great benefit from being able to ride about. Forage +was indeed very scarce. They had no means of spending their pay on +luxuries of any kind, their only outlay being in the purchase of +black bread, and an occasional load of forage from the peasants. +Their regiment was with the force under the command of Colonel +Schlippenbach, which was not very far from Marienburg, a place open +to the incursions of the Russians. Baron Spens was at Signiz, and +Colonel Alvedyhl at Rounenberg, and to both these places they +occasionally paid a visit.</p> + +<p>In order to keep the company in health, Captain Jervoise +encouraged the men to get up games, in which the four young +officers took part. Sometimes it was a snowball match in the open; +at other times a snow fort was built, garrisoned, and attacked. +Occasionally there were matches at hockey, while putting the stone, +throwing the caber, running and wrestling matches, were all tried +in turn; and the company suffered comparatively little from the +illness which rendered so large a proportion of the Swedish army +inefficient.</p> + +<p>Colonel Schlippenbach was an energetic officer, and had, several +times, ridden past when the men were engaged in these exercises. He +expressed to Captain Jervoise his approval of the manner in which +he kept his men in strength and vigour.</p> + +<p>"I shall not forget it," he said, one day, "and if there is +service to be done, I see that I can depend upon your company to do +it."</p> + +<p>In January, he took a party of horse, and reconnoitred along the +River Aa, to observe the motions of the Saxons on the other side; +and, hearing that a party of them had entered Marienburg, he +determined to take possession of that place, as, were they to +fortify it, they would be able greatly to harass the Swedes. +Sending word to the king of his intention, and asking for an +approval of his plan of fortifying the town, he took three +companies of infantry and four hundred horse, made a rapid march to +Marienburg, and occupied it without opposition.</p> + +<p>He had not forgotten his promise, and the company of Captain +Jervoise was one of those selected for the work. Its officers were +delighted at the prospect of a change, and, when the party started, +Captain Jervoise was proud of the show made by his men, whose +active and vigorous condition contrasted strongly with the debility +and feebleness evident, so generally, among the Swedish +soldiers.</p> + +<p>As soon as Marienburg was entered, the men were set to work, to +raise and strengthen the rampart and to erect bastions; and they +were aided, a few days later, by a reinforcement of two hundred +infantry, sent by the king, with some cannon, from the garrison of +Derpt. As the place was surrounded by a morass, it was, ere long, +put into a position to offer a formidable defence against any force +that the Russians or Saxons might bring against it.</p> + +<p>The Swedes engaged on the work gained strength rapidly, and, by +the time the fortifications were finished, they had completely +shaken off the effects of the fever.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: A Prisoner.</h2> + +<p>A fortnight after the fortifications of Marienburg were +completed, Colonel Schlippenbach sent off Lieutenant Colonel +Brandt, with four hundred horse, to capture a magazine at +Seffwegen, to which the Saxons had forced the inhabitants of the +country round to bring in their corn, intending later to convey it +to the headquarters of their army. The expedition was completely +successful. The Saxon guard were overpowered, and a thousand tons +of corn were brought, in triumph, into Marienburg. Some of it was +sent on to the army, abundance being retained for the use of the +town and garrison, in case of siege.</p> + +<p>It was now resolved to surprise and burn Pitschur, a town on the +frontier from which the enemy constantly made incursions. It was +held by a strong body of Russians.</p> + +<p>Baron Spens was in command of the expedition. He had with him +both the regiments of Horse Guards. Much excitement was caused, in +Marienburg, by the issue of an order that the cavalry, and a +portion of the infantry, were to be ready to march at daylight; and +by the arrival of a large number of peasants, brought in by small +parties of the cavalry. Many were the surmises as to the operation +to be undertaken, its object being kept a strict secret.</p> + +<p>Captain Jervoise's company was one of those in orders, and +paraded at daybreak, and, after a march of some distance, the force +joined that of Baron Spens. The troops were halted in a wood, and +ordered to light fires to cook food, and to prepare for a halt of +some hours. Great fires were soon blazing and, after eating their +meal, most of the troops wrapped themselves in the blankets that +they carried, in addition to their greatcoats, and lay down by the +fires.</p> + +<p>They slept until midnight, and were then called to arms again. +They marched all night, and at daybreak the next morning, the 13th +of February, were near Pitschur, and at once attacked the Russian +camp outside the town. Taken completely by surprise, the Russians +fought feebly, and more than five hundred were killed before they +entered the town, hotly pursued by the Swedes. Shutting themselves +up in the houses, and barricading the doors and windows, they +defended themselves desperately, refusing all offers of +surrender.</p> + +<p>The Livonian peasants were, however, at work, and set fire to +the town in many places. The flames spread rapidly. Great stores of +hides and leather, and a huge magazine filled with hemp, added to +the fury of the conflagration, and the whole town was burned to the +ground; numbers of the Russians preferring death by fire, in the +houses, to coming out and surrendering themselves.</p> + +<p>Many of the fugitives had succeeded in reaching a strong +position on the hill commanding the town. This consisted of a +convent, surrounded by strong walls mounted with cannon, which +played upon the town while the fight there was going on. As Baron +Spens had no guns with him, he was unable to follow up his +advantage by taking this position, and he therefore gave orders to +the force to retire, the peasants being loaded with booty that they +had gathered before the fire spread.</p> + +<p>The loss of the Swedes was thirty killed and sixty wounded, this +being a small amount of loss compared with what they had inflicted +upon the enemy.</p> + +<p>"I call that a horrible business, Captain Jervoise," Charlie +said, when the troops had returned to Marienburg. "There was no +real fighting in it."</p> + +<p>"It was a surprise, Charlie. But they fought desperately after +they gained the town."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but we did nothing there beyond firing away at the +windows. Of course, I had my sword in my hand; but it might as well +have been in its sheath, for I never struck a blow, and I think it +was the same with most of our men. One could not cut down those +poor wretches, who were scarce awake enough to use their arms. I +was glad you held our company in rear of the others."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I asked the colonel before attacking to put us in reserve, +in case the enemy should rally. I did it on purpose, for I knew +that our men, not having, like the Swedes, any personal animosity +against the Russians, would not like the work. If it had come to +storming the convent, I would have volunteered to lead the assault. +At any rate, I am glad that, although a few of the men are wounded, +no lives are lost in our company."</p> + +<p>Harry cordially agreed with his friend. "I like an expedition, +Charlie, if there is fighting to be done; but I don't want to have +anything more to do with surprises. However, the cavalry had a good +deal more to do with it than we had; but, as you say, it was a +ghastly business. The only comfort is they began it, and have been +robbing the peasants and destroying their homes for months."</p> + +<p>Many small expeditions were sent out with equally favourable +results; but Captain Jervoise's company took no part in these +excursions.</p> + +<p>Charles the Twelfth was passionately fond of hunting and, in spite +of his many occupations, found time occasionally to spend a day or +two in the chase. A few days after the attack upon Pitschur, he +came to Marienburg to learn all particulars of the Russian position +from Colonel Schlippenbach, as he intended, in the spring, to +attack the triangle formed by three fortresses, in order to drive +the Russians farther back from the frontier.</p> + +<p>"I hear that there are many wolves and bears in the forest, five +leagues to the north. I want a party of about fifty footmen to +drive the game, and as many horse, in case we come across one of +the parties of Russians. I want some hearty, active men for the +march. I will send the foot on this afternoon, and ride with the +horse so as to get there by daybreak. Which is your best company of +infantry?"</p> + +<p>"My best company is one composed chiefly of Scotchmen, though +there are some English among them. It belongs to the Malmoe +Regiment, and is commanded by Captain Jervoise, an Englishman. I do +not say that they are braver than our Swedes; they have not been +tested in any desperate service; but they are healthier and more +hardy, for their officers, since the battle of Narva, have kept +them engaged in sports of all kinds--mimic battles, foot races, and +other friendly contests. I have marked them at it several times, +and wondered sometimes at the rough play. But it has had its +effect. While the rest of Suborn's regiment suffered as much from +fever as the other troops, scarce a man in this company was sick, +and they have, all the winter, been fit for arduous service at any +moment."</p> + +<p>"That is good indeed, and I will remember it, and will see that, +another winter, similar games are carried on throughout the army. +Let the company be paraded at once. I will, myself, inspect +them."</p> + +<p>The company's call was sounded, and, surprised at a summons just +as they were cooking their dinners, the troops fell in, in front of +their quarters, and the officers took their places in front of +them, and waited for orders.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what is up now," Nigel Forbes said to Harry. "You have +not heard anything, from your father, of our being wanted, have +you?"</p> + +<p>"No; he was just as much surprised as I was, when a sergeant ran +up with Schlippenbach's order that the company were to fall +in."</p> + +<p>Five minutes after they had formed up, three officers were seen +approaching on foot.</p> + +<p>"It is the colonel himself," Forbes muttered, as Captain +Jervoise gave the word to the men to stand to attention.</p> + +<p>A minute later, Captain Jervoise gave the order for the salute, +and Harry saw that the tall young officer, walking with the +colonel, was the king. Without speaking a word, Charles walked up +and down the line, narrowly inspecting the men, then he returned to +the front.</p> + +<p>"A fine set of fellows, Schlippenbach. I wish that, like my +grandfather, I had some fifteen thousand of such troops under my +orders. Present the captain to me."</p> + +<p>The officers were called up, and Captain Jervoise was +presented.</p> + +<p>"Your company does you great credit, Captain Jervoise," the king +said. "I would that all my troops looked in as good health and +condition. Colonel Schlippenbach tells me that you have kept your +men in good health, all through the winter, by means of sports and +games. It is a good plan. I will try to get all my officers to +adopt it another winter. Do the men join in them willingly?"</p> + +<p>Captain Jervoise and his officers had all, during the nine +months that had passed since they landed in Sweden, done their best +to acquire the language, and could now speak and understand it +thoroughly.</p> + +<p>"They like it, your majesty. Our people are fond of games of +this kind. My four officers take part in them with the men."</p> + +<p>The king nodded.</p> + +<p>"That is as it should be. It must create a good feeling on both +sides. Present your officers to me, Captain Jervoise."</p> + +<p>This was done, and the king spoke a few words to each. Charlie +had often seen the king at a distance, but never before so close as +to be able to notice his face particularly. He was a tall young +fellow, thin and bony. His face was long, and his forehead +singularly high and somewhat projecting. This was the most +noticeable feature of his face. His eyes were quick and keen, his +face clean-shaven, and, had it not been for the forehead and eyes, +would have attracted no attention. His movements were quick and +energetic, and, after speaking to the officers, he strode a step or +two forward and, raising his voice, said:</p> + +<p>"I am pleased with you, men. Your appearance does credit to +yourselves and your officers. Scottish troops did grand service +under my grandfather, Gustavus Adolphus, and I would that I had +twenty battalions of such soldiers with me. I am going hunting +tomorrow, and I asked Colonel Schlippenbach for half a company of +men who could stand cold and fatigue. He told me that I could not +do better than take them from among this company, and I see that he +could not have made a better choice. But I will not separate you, +and will therefore take you all. You will march in an hour, and I +will see that there is a good supper ready for you, at the end of +your journey."</p> + +<p>Colonel Schlippenbach gave Captain Jervoise directions as to the +road they were to follow, and the village, at the edge of the +forest, where they were to halt for the night. He then walked away +with the king. Highly pleased with the praise Charles had given +them, the company fell out.</p> + +<p>"Get your dinners as soon as you can, men," Captain Jervoise +said. "The king gave us an hour. We must be in readiness to march +by that time."</p> + +<p>On arriving at the village, which consisted of a few small +houses only, they found two waggons awaiting them, one with tents +and the other with a plentiful supply of provisions, and a barrel +of wine. The tents were erected, and then the men went into the +forest, and soon returned with large quantities of wood, and great +fires were speedily lighted. Meat was cut up and roasted over them, +and, regarding the expedition as a holiday, the men sat down to +their supper in high spirits.</p> + +<p>After it was eaten there were songs round the fires, and, at +nine o'clock, all turned into their tents, as it was known that the +king would arrive at daylight. Sentries were posted, for there was +never any saying when marauding parties of Russians, who were +constantly on the move, might come along.</p> + +<p>Half an hour before daybreak, the men were aroused. Tents were +struck and packed in the waggon, and the men then fell in, and +remained until the king, with three or four of his officers and +fifty cavalry, rode up. Fresh wood had been thrown on the fires, +and some of the men told off as cooks.</p> + +<p>"That looks cheerful for hungry men," the king said, as he +leaped from his horse.</p> + +<p>"I did not know whether your majesty would wish to breakfast at +once," Captain Jervoise said; "but I thought it well to be +prepared."</p> + +<p>"We will breakfast by all means. We are all sharp set already. +Have your own men had food yet?"</p> + +<p>"No, sir. I thought perhaps they would carry it with them."</p> + +<p>"No, no. Let them all have a hearty meal before they move, then +they can hold on as long as may be necessary."</p> + +<p>The company fell out again, and, in a quarter of an hour, they +and the troopers breakfasted. A joint of meat was placed, for the +use of the king and the officers who had come with him, and Captain +Jervoise and those with him prepared to take their meal a short +distance away, but Charles said:</p> + +<p>"Bring that joint here, Captain Jervoise, and we will all take +breakfast together. We are all hunters and comrades."</p> + +<p>In a short time, they were all seated round a fire, with their +meat on wooden platters on their knees, and with mugs of wine +beside them; Captain Jervoise, by the king's orders, taking his +seat beside him. During the meal, he asked him many questions as to +his reasons for leaving England, and taking service with him.</p> + +<p>"So you have meddled in politics, eh?" the king laughed, when he +heard a brief account of Captain Jervoise's reason for leaving +home. "Your quarrels, in England and Scotland, have added many a +thousand good soldiers to the armies of France and Sweden, and, I +may say, of every country in Europe. I believe there are some of +your compatriots, or at any rate Scotchmen, in the czar's camp. I +suppose that, at William's death, these troubles will cease."</p> + +<p>"I do not know, sir. Anne was James' favourite daughter, and it +may be she will resign in favour of her brother, the lawful king. +If she does so, there is an end of trouble; but, should she mount +the throne, she would be a usurper, as Mary was up to her death in +'94. As Anne has been on good terms with William, since her +sister's death, I fear she will act as unnatural a part as Mary +did, and, in that case, assuredly we shall not recognize her as our +queen."</p> + +<p>"You have heard the news, I suppose, of the action of the +parliament last month?"</p> + +<p>"No, sir, we have heard nothing for some weeks of what is doing +in England."</p> + +<p>"They have been making an Act of Settlement of the succession. +Anne is to succeed William, and, as she has no children by George +of Denmark, the succession is to pass from her to the Elector of +Hanover, in right of his wife Sophia, as the rest of the children +of the Elector of the Palatinate have abjured Protestantism, and +are therefore excluded. How will that meet the views of the English +and Scotch Jacobites?"</p> + +<p>"It is some distance to look forward to, sire. If Anne comes to +the throne at William's death, it will, I think, postpone our +hopes, for Anne is a Stuart, and is a favourite with the nation, in +spite of her undutiful conduct to her father. Still, it will be +felt that for Stuart to fight against Stuart, brother against +sister, would be contrary to nature. Foreigners are always +unpopular, and, as against William, every Jacobite is ready to take +up arms. But I think that nothing will be done during Anne's reign. +The Elector of Hanover would be as unpopular, among Englishmen in +general, as is William of Orange, and, should he come to the +throne, there will assuredly ere long be a rising to bring back the +Stuarts."</p> + +<p>Charles shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I don't want to ruffle your spirit of loyalty to the Stuarts, +Captain Jervoise, but they have showed themselves weak monarchs for +a great country. They want fibre. William of Orange may be, as you +call him, a foreigner and a usurper, but England has greater weight +in the councils of Europe, in his hands, than it has had since the +death of Elizabeth."</p> + +<p>This was rather a sore point with Captain Jervoise, who, +thorough Jacobite as he was, had smarted under the subservience of +England to France during the reigns of the two previous +monarchs.</p> + +<p>"You Englishmen and Scotchmen are fighting people," the king +went on, "and should have a military monarch. I do not mean a king +like myself, who likes to fight in the front ranks of his soldiers; +but one like William, who has certainly lofty aims, and is a +statesman, and can join in European combinations."</p> + +<p>"William thinks and plans more for Holland than for England, +sire. He would join a league against France and Spain, not so much +for the benefit of England, which has not much to fear from these +powers, but of Holland, whose existence now, as of old is +threatened by them."</p> + +<p>"England's interest is similar to that of Holland," the king +said. "I began this war, nominally, in the interest of the Duke of +Holstein, but really because it was Sweden's interest that Denmark +should not become too powerful.</p> + +<p>"But we must not waste time in talking politics. I see the men +have finished their breakfast, and we are here to hunt. I shall +keep twenty horse with me; the rest will enter the forest with you. +I have arranged for the peasants here to guide you. You will march +two miles along by the edge of the forest, and then enter it and +make a wide semicircle, leaving men as you go, until you come down +to the edge of the forest again, a mile to our left.</p> + +<p>"As soon as you do so, you will sound a trumpet, and the men +will then move forward, shouting so as to drive the game before +them. As the peasants tell me there are many wolves and bears in +the forest, I hope that you will inclose some of them in your +cordon, which will be about five miles from end to end. With the +horse you will have a hundred and thirty men, so that there will be +a man every sixty or seventy yards. That is too wide a space at +first, but, as you close in, the distances will rapidly lessen, and +they must make up, by noise, for the scantiness of their numbers. +If they find the animals are trying to break through, they can +discharge their pieces; but do not let them do so otherwise, as it +would frighten the animals too soon, and send them flying out all +along the open side of the semicircle."</p> + +<p>It was more than two hours before the whole of the beaters were +in position. Just before they had started, the king had requested +Captain Jervoise to remain with him and the officers who had +accompanied him, five in number. They had been posted, a hundred +yards apart, at the edge of the forest. Charlie was the first +officer left behind as the troop moved through the forest, and it +seemed to him an endless time before he heard a faint shout, +followed by another and another, until, at last, the man stationed +next to him repeated the signal. Then they moved forward, each +trying to obey the orders to march straight ahead.</p> + +<p>For some time, nothing was heard save the shouts of the men, and +then Charlie made out some distant shots, far in the wood, and +guessed that some animals were trying to break through the lines. +Then he heard the sound of firing directly in front of him. This +continued for some time, occasionally single shots being heard, but +more often shots in close succession. Louder and louder grew the +shouting, as the men closed in towards a common point, and, in half +an hour after the signal had been given, all met.</p> + +<p>"What sport have you had, father?" Harry asked, as he came up to +Captain Jervoise.</p> + +<p>"We killed seventeen wolves and four bears, with, what is more +important, six stags. I do not know whether we are going to have +another beat."</p> + +<p>It soon turned out that this was the king's intention, and the +troops marched along the edge of the forest. Charlie was in the +front of his company, the king with the cavalry a few hundred yards +ahead, when, from a dip of ground on the right, a large body of +horsemen suddenly appeared.</p> + +<p>"Russians!" Captain Jervoise exclaimed, and shouted to the men, +who were marching at ease, to close up.</p> + +<p>The king did not hesitate a moment, but, at the head of his +fifty cavalry, charged right down upon the Russians, who were at +least five hundred strong. The little body disappeared in the +melee, and then seemed to be swallowed up.</p> + +<p>"Keep together, shoulder to shoulder, men. Double!" and the +company set off at a run.</p> + +<p>When they came close to the mass of horsemen, they poured in a +volley, and then rushed forward, hastily fitting the short pikes +they carried into their musket barrels; for, as yet, the modern +form of bayonets was not used. The Russians fought obstinately, but +the infantry pressed their way step by step through them, until +they reached the spot where the king, with his little troop of +cavalry, were defending themselves desperately from the attacks of +the Russians.</p> + +<p>The arrival of the infantry decided the contest, and the +Russians began to draw off, the king hastening the movement by +plunging into the midst of them with his horsemen.</p> + +<p>Charlie was on the flank of the company as it advanced, and, +after running through a Russian horseman with the short pike that +was carried by officers, he received a tremendous blow on his steel +cap, that stretched him insensible on the ground. When he +recovered, he felt that he was being carried, and soon awoke to the +fact that he was a prisoner.</p> + +<p>After a long ride, the Russians arrived at Plescow. They had +lost some sixty men in the fight. Charlie was the only prisoner +taken. He was, on dismounting, too weak to stand, but he was half +carried and half dragged to the quarters of the Russian officer in +command. The latter addressed him, but, finding that he was not +understood, sent for an officer who spoke Swedish.</p> + +<p>"What were the party you were with doing in the wood?"</p> + +<p>"We were hunting wolves and bears."</p> + +<p>"Where did you come from?"</p> + +<p>"From Marienburg."</p> + +<p>"How strong were you?"</p> + +<p>"Fifty horse and a hundred and forty foot," Charlie replied, +knowing there could be no harm in stating the truth.</p> + +<p>"But it was a long way to march, merely to hunt, and your +officers must have been mad to come out, with so small a party, to +a point where they were likely to meet with us."</p> + +<p>"It was not too small a party, sir, as they managed to beat off +the attack made upon them."</p> + +<p>The Russian was silent for a moment, then he asked:</p> + +<p>"Who was the officer in command?"</p> + +<p>"The officer in command was the King of Sweden," Charlie +replied.</p> + +<p>An exclamation of surprise and anger broke from the Russian +general, when the answer was translated to him.</p> + +<p>"You missed a good chance of distinguishing yourself," he said +to the officer in command of the troops. "Here has this mad King of +Sweden been actually putting himself in your hands, and you have +let him slip through your fingers. It would have got you two steps +in rank, and the favour of the czar, had you captured him, and now +he will be in a rage, indeed, when he hears that five hundred +cavalry could do nothing against a force only a third of their +number."</p> + +<p>"I had no idea that the King of Sweden was there himself," the +officer said humbly.</p> + +<p>"Bah, that is no excuse. There were officers, and you ought to +have captured them, instead of allowing yourself to be put to +flight by a hundred and fifty men."</p> + +<p>"We must have killed half the horsemen before the infantry came +up."</p> + +<p>"All the worse, colonel, that you did not complete the business. +The infantry would not have been formidable, after they discharged +their pieces. However, it is your own affair, and I wash my hands +of it. What the czar will say when he hears of it, I know not, but +I would not be in your shoes for all my estates."</p> + +<p>As Charlie learned afterwards, the colonel was degraded from his +rank by the angry czar, and ordered to serve as a private in the +regiment he commanded. The officer who acted as translator said +something in his own tongue to the general, who then, through him, +said:</p> + +<p>"This officer tells me that by your language you are not a +Swede."</p> + +<p>"I am not. I am English, and I am an ensign in the Malmoe +Regiment."</p> + +<p>"All the worse for you," the general said. "The czar has +declared that he will exchange no foreign officers who may be taken +prisoners."</p> + +<p>"Very well, sir," Charlie said, fearlessly. "He will be only +punishing his own officers. There are plenty of them in the King of +Sweden's hands."</p> + +<p>The general, when this reply was translated to him, angrily +ordered Charlie to be taken away, and he was soon lodged in a cell +in the castle. His head was still swimming from the effects of the +blow that had stricken him down, and, without even trying to think +over his position, he threw himself down on the straw pallet, and +was soon asleep.</p> + +<p>It was morning when he woke and, for a short time, he was unable +to imagine where he was, but soon recalled what had happened. He +had been visited by someone after he had lain down, for a platter +of bread and meat stood on the table, and a jug of water. He was +also covered with two thick blankets. These had not been there when +he lay down, for he had wondered vaguely as to how he should pass +the night without some covering.</p> + +<p>He took a long draught of water, then ate some food. His head +throbbed with the pain of the wound. It had been roughly bandaged +by his captors, but needed surgical dressing.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how long I am likely to be, before I am exchanged," he +said to himself. "A long time, I am afraid; for there are scores of +Russian officers prisoners with us, and I don't think there are +half a dozen of ours captured by the Russians. Of course, no +exchange can take place until there are a good batch to send over, +and, it may be, months may pass before they happen to lay hands on +enough Swedish officers to make it worth while to trouble about +exchanging them."</p> + +<p>An hour later the door opened, and an officer entered, followed +by a soldier with a large bowl of broth and some bread.</p> + +<p>"I am a doctor," he said in Swedish. "I came in to see you +yesterday evening, but you were sound asleep, and that was a better +medicine than any I can give; so I told the man to throw those two +barrack rugs over you, and leave your food in case you should wake, +which did not seem to me likely. I see, however, that you did +wake," and he pointed to the plate.</p> + +<p>"That was not till this morning, doctor. It is not an hour since +I ate it."</p> + +<p>"This broth will be better for you, and I daresay you can manage +another breakfast. Sit down and take it, at once, while it is hot. +I am in no hurry."</p> + +<p>He gave an order in Russian to the soldier, who went out, and +returned in a few minutes with a small wooden tub, filled with hot +water. By this time Charlie had finished the broth. The doctor then +bathed his head for some time in hot water, but was obliged to cut +off some of his hair, in order to remove the bandage. As he +examined the wound, Charlie was astounded to hear him mutter to +himself:</p> + +<p>"It is a mighty nate clip you have got, my boy; and, if your +skull had not been a thick one, it is lying out there on the turf +you would be."</p> + +<p>Charlie burst into a fit of laughter.</p> + +<p>"So you are English, too," he exclaimed, as he looked up into +the surgeon's face.</p> + +<p>"At laste Irish, my boy," the doctor said, as surprised as +Charlie had been. "To think we should have been talking Swedish to +each other, instead of our native tongue. And what is your name? +And what is it you are doing here, as a Swede, at all?"</p> + +<p>"My name is Charles Carstairs. I come from Lancashire, just on +the borders of Westmoreland. My father is a Jacobite, and so had to +leave the country. He went over to Sweden, and I, with some friends +of his, got commissions."</p> + +<p>"Then our cases are pretty much alike," the doctor said. "I had +gone through Dublin University, and had just passed as a surgeon, +when King James landed. It didn't much matter to me who was king, +but I thought it was a fine opportunity to study gunshot wounds, so +I joined the royal army, and was at the battle of the Boyne. I had +plenty of work with wounds, early in the day, but when, after the +Irish had fairly beat the Dutchman back all day, they made up their +minds to march away at night, I had to lave my patients and be off +too. Then I was shut up in Limerick; and I was not idle there, as +you may guess. When at last the surrender came, I managed to slip +away, having no fancy for going over with the regiments that were +to enter the service of France. I thought I could have gone back to +Dublin, and that no one would trouble about me; but someone put +them up to it, and I had to go without stopping to ask leave. I +landed at Bristol, and there, for a time, was nearly starving.</p> + +<p>"I was well nigh my wits' end as to what to do for a living, and +had just spent my last shilling, when I met an English captain, who +told me that across at Gottenburg there were a good many Irish and +Scotchmen who had, like myself, been in trouble at home. He gave me +a passage across, and took me to the house of a man he knew. Of +course, it was no use my trying to doctor people, when they could +not tell me what was the matter with them, and I worked at one +thing and another, doing anything I could turn my hands to, for +four or five months. That is how I got to pick up Swedish. Then +some people told me that Russia was a place where a doctor might +get on, for that they had got no doctors for their army who knew +anything of surgery, and the czar was always ready to take on +foreigners who could teach them anything. I had got my diploma with +me, and some of my friends came forward and subscribed enough to +rig me out in clothes and pay my passage. What was better, one of +them happened to have made the acquaintance of Le Ford, who was, as +you may have heard, the czar's most intimate friend.</p> + +<p>"I wished myself back a hundred times before I reached Moscow, +but when I did, everything was easy for me. Le Ford introduced me +to the czar, and I was appointed surgeon of a newly-raised +regiment, of which Le Ford was colonel. That was eight years ago, +and I am now a sort of surgeon general of a division, and am at the +head of the hospitals about here. Till the war began I had not, for +five years, done any military work, but had been at the head of a +college the czar has established for training surgeons for the +army. I was only sent down here after that business at Narva.</p> + +<p>"So, you see, I have fallen on my feet. The czar's is a good +service, and we employ a score or two of Scotchmen, most of them in +good posts. He took to them because a Scotchman, General Gordon, +and other foreign officers, rescued him from his sister Sophia, who +intended to assassinate him, and established him firmly on the +throne of his father.</p> + +<p>"It is a pity you are not on this side. Perhaps it isn't too +late to change, eh?"</p> + +<p>Charlie laughed.</p> + +<p>"My father is in Sweden, and my company is commanded by a man +who is as good as a father to me, and his son is like my brother. +If there were no other reason, I could not change. Why, it was only +yesterday I was sitting round a bivouac fire with King Charles, and +nothing would induce me to fight against him."</p> + +<p>"I am not going to try to persuade you. The czar has treated me +well, and I love him. By the way, I have not given you my name +after all. It's Terence Kelly."</p> + +<p>"Is not the czar very fierce and cruel?"</p> + +<p>"Bedad, I would be much more cruel and fierce if I were in his +place. Just think of one man, with all Russia on his shoulders. +There is he trying to improve the country, working like a horse +himself, knowing that, like every other Russian, he is as ignorant +as a pig, and setting to improve himself--working in the dockyards +of Holland and England, attending lectures, and all kinds of +subjects. Why, man, he learnt anatomy, and can take off a leg as +quickly as I can. He is building a fleet and getting together an +army. It is not much good yet, you will say, but it will be some +day. You can turn a peasant into a soldier in six months, but it +takes a long time to turn out generals and officers who are fit for +their work.</p> + +<p>"Then, while he is trying everywhere to improve his country, +every man jack of them objects to being improved, and wants to go +along in his old ways. Didn't they get up an insurrection, only +because he wanted them to cut off their beards? Any other man would +have lost heart, and given it up years ago. It looks as hopeless a +task as for a mouse to drag a mountain, but he is doing it.</p> + +<p>"I don't say that he is perfect. He gets into passions, and it +is mighty hard for anyone he gets into a passion with. But who +would not get into passions, when there is so much work to be done, +and everyone tries to hinder instead of to help? It would break the +heart of Saint Patrick! Why, that affair at Narva would have broken +down most men. Here, for years, has he been working to make an +army, and the first time they meet an enemy worthy of the name, +what do they do? Why, they are beaten by a tenth of their number of +half-starved men, led by a mad-brained young fellow who had never +heard a shot fired before, and lose all their cannon, guns, +ammunition, and stores. Why, I was heartbroken, myself, when I +heard of it; but Peter, instead of blowing out his brains, or +drowning himself, set to work, an hour after the news reached him, +to bring up fresh troops, to re-arm the men, and to prepare to meet +the Swedes again, as soon as the snow is off the ground.</p> + +<p>"If James of England had been Peter of Russia, he would be +ruling over Ireland now, and England and Scotland, too.</p> + +<p>"But now, I must be off. Don't you worry about your head. I have +seen as bad a clip given by a blackthorn. I have got to go round +now and see the wounded, and watch some operations being done, but +I will come in again this evening. Don't eat any more of their +messes, if they bring them in. You and I will have a snug little +dinner together. I might get you put into a more dacent chamber, +but the general is one of the old pig-headed sort. We don't pull +together, so I would rather not ask any favours from him.</p> + +<p>"The czar may come any day--he is always flying about. I will +speak to him when he comes, and see that you have better +entertainment."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: Exchanged.</h2> + +<p>Late in the afternoon, Doctor Kelly came in again to the cell.</p> + +<p>"Come along," he said; "I have got lave for you to have supper +with me, and have given my pledge that you won't try to escape till +it is over, or make any onslaught on the garrison, but will behave +like a quiet and peaceable man."</p> + +<p>"You are quite safe in giving the pledge, doctor," Charlie +laughed.</p> + +<p>"Come along then, me boy, for they were just dishing up when I +came to fetch you. It is cold enough outside, and there is no sinse +in putting cold victuals into one in such weather as this."</p> + +<p>They were not long in reaching a snugly-furnished room, where a +big fire was burning. Another gentleman was standing, with his back +to it. He was a man of some seven or eight and twenty, with large +features, dark brown hair falling in natural curls over his ears, +and large and powerful in build.</p> + +<p>"This is my friend, Charlie Carstairs," the doctor said.</p> + +<p>"This, Carstairs, is Peter Michaeloff, a better doctor than most +of those who mangle the czar's soldiers."</p> + +<p>"Things will better in time," the other said, "when your pupils +begin to take their places in the army."</p> + +<p>"I hope so," the doctor said, shrugging his shoulders. "There is +one comfort, they can't be much worse."</p> + +<p>At this moment a servant entered, bearing a bowl of soup and +three basins. They at once seated themselves at the table.</p> + +<p>"So you managed to get yourself captured yesterday," Doctor +Michaeloff said to Charlie. "I have not had the pleasure of seeing +many of you gentlemen here."</p> + +<p>"We don't come if we can help it," Charlie laughed. "But the +Cossacks were so pressing, that I could not resist. In fact, I did +not know anything about it, until I was well on the way."</p> + +<p>"I hope they have made you comfortable," the other said, +sharply.</p> + +<p>"I can't say much for the food," Charlie said, "and still less +for the cell, which was bitterly cold. Still, as the doctor gave me +two rugs to wrap myself up in, I need not grumble."</p> + +<p>"That is not right," the other said angrily. "I hear that the +King of Sweden treats our prisoners well.</p> + +<p>"You should have remonstrated, Kelly."</p> + +<p>The Irishman shrugged his shoulders.</p> + +<p>"I ventured to hint to the general that I thought an officer had +a right to better treatment, even if he were a prisoner, but I was +told sharply to mind my own business, which was with the sick and +wounded. I said, as the prisoner was wounded, I thought it was a +matter that did come to some extent under my control."</p> + +<p>"What did the pig say?"</p> + +<p>"He grumbled something between his teeth, that I did not catch, +and, as I thought the prisoner would not be kept there long, and +was not unaccustomed to roughing it, it was not worthwhile pressing +the matter further."</p> + +<p>"Have you heard that an officer has been here this afternoon, +with a flag of truce, to treat for your exchange?" Doctor Michaeloff +said, turning suddenly to Charlie.</p> + +<p>"No, I have not heard anything about it," Charlie said.</p> + +<p>"He offered a captain for you, which you may consider a high +honour."</p> + +<p>"It is, no doubt," Charlie said, with a smile. "I suppose his +majesty thought, as it was in his special service I was caught, he +was bound to get me released, if he could."</p> + +<p>"It was a hunting party, was it not?"</p> + +<p>"Yes. There was only the king with four of his officers there, +and my company of foot, and fifty horse. I don't think I can call +it an escort, for we went principally as beaters."</p> + +<p>"Rustoff missed a grand chance there, Kelly.</p> + +<p>"What regiment do you belong to?"</p> + +<p>And he again turned to Charlie.</p> + +<p>"The Malmoe Regiment. The company is commanded by an English +gentleman, who is a neighbour and great friend of my father. His +son is an ensign, and my greatest friend. The men are all either +Scotch or English, but most of them Scotch."</p> + +<p>"They are good soldiers, the Scotch; none better. There are a +good many in the Russian service, also in that of Austria and +France. They are always faithful, and to be relied upon, even when +native troops prove treacherous. And you like Charles of +Sweden?"</p> + +<p>"There is not a soldier in his army but likes him," Charlie said +enthusiastically. "He expects us to do much, but he does more +himself. All through the winter, he did everything in his power for +us, riding long distances from camp to camp, to visit the sick and +to keep up the spirits of the men. If we live roughly, so does he, +and, on the march, he will take his meals among the soldiers, and +wrap himself up in his cloak, and sleep on the bare ground, just as +they do. And as for his bravery, he exposes his life +recklessly--too recklessly, we all think--and it seemed a miracle +that, always in the front as he was, he should have got through +Narva without a scratch."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that was a bad bit of business, that Narva," the other +said thoughtfully. "Why do you think we were beaten in the horrible +way we were?--because the Russians are no cowards."</p> + +<p>"No; they made a gallant stand when they recovered from their +surprise," Charlie agreed. "But in the first place, they were taken +by surprise."</p> + +<p>"They ought not to have been," the doctor said angrily. "They +had news, two days before, brought by the cavalry, who ought to +have defended that pass, but didn't."</p> + +<p>"Still, it was a surprise when we attacked," Charlie said, "for +they could not suppose that the small body they saw were going to +assail them. Then, we had the cover of that snowstorm, and they did +not see us, until we reached the edge of the ditch. Of course, your +general ought to have made proper dispositions, and to have +collected the greater part of his troops at the spot facing us, +instead of having them strung out round that big semicircle, so +that, when we made an entry they were separated, and each half was +ignorant of what the other was doing. Still, even then they might +have concentrated between the trenches and the town. But no orders +had been given. The general was one of the first we captured. The +others waited for the orders that never came, until it was too +late. If the general who commanded on the left had massed his +troops, and marched against us as we were attacking the position +they held on their right, we should have been caught between two +fires."</p> + +<p>"It was a badly managed business, altogether," Doctor Michaeloff +growled; "but we shall do better next time. We shall understand +Charles's tactics better. We reckoned on his troops, but we did not +reckon on him.</p> + +<p>"Kelly tells me that you would not care to change service."</p> + +<p>"My friends are in the Swedish army, and I am well satisfied +with the service. I daresay, if Russia had been nearer England than +Sweden is, and we had landed there first, we should have been as +glad to enter the service of the czar as we were to join that of +King Charles. Everyone says that the czar makes strangers welcome, +and that he is a liberal master to those who serve him well. As to +the quarrel between them, I am not old enough to be able to give my +opinion on it, though, as far as I am concerned, it seems to me +that it was not a fair thing for Russia to take advantage of +Sweden's being at war with Denmark and Augustus of Saxony, to fall +upon her without any cause of quarrel."</p> + +<p>"Nations move less by morality than interest," Doctor Michaeloff +said calmly. "Russia wants a way to the sea--the Turks cut her off +to the south, and the Swedes from the Baltic. She is smothered +between them, and when she saw her chance, she took it. That is not +good morality. I admit that it is the excuse of the poor man who +robs the rich, but it is human nature, and nations act, in the long +run, a good deal like individuals."</p> + +<p>"But you have not told me yet, doctor," Charlie said, turning +the conversation, "whether the proposal for an exchange was +accepted."</p> + +<p>"The general had no power to accept it, Carstairs. It had to be +referred to the czar himself."</p> + +<p>"I wish his majesty could see me, then," Charlie laughed. "He +would see that I am but a lad, and that my release would not +greatly strengthen the Swedish army."</p> + +<p>"But then the czar may be of opinion that none of his officers, +who allowed themselves to be captured by a handful of men at Narva, +would be of any use to him," Doctor Michaeloff laughed.</p> + +<p>"That may, doubtless, be said of a good many among them," +Charlie said, "but, individually, none of the captains could be +blamed for the mess they made of it."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps not, but if all the men had been panic stricken, there +were officers enough to have gathered together and cut their way +through the Swedes."</p> + +<p>"No doubt there were; but you must remember, Doctor Michaeloff, +that an officer's place is with his company, and that it is his +duty to think of his men, before thinking of himself. Supposing all +the officers of the left wing, as you say, had gathered together +and cut their way out, the czar would have had a right to blame +them for the capture of the whole of the men. How could they tell +that, at daybreak, the general would not have given orders for the +left wing to attack the Swedes? They were strong enough still to +have eaten us up, had they made the effort, and had the czar been +there in person, I will warrant he would have tried it."</p> + +<p>"That he would," Doctor Michaeloff said warmly. "You are right +there, young sir. The czar may not be a soldier, but at least he is +a man, which is more than can be said for the officer who ordered +sixty thousand men to lay down their arms to eight thousand."</p> + +<p>"I am sure of that," Charlie said. "A man who would do as he has +done, leave his kingdom, and work like a common man in dockyards, +to learn how to build ships, and who rules his people as he does, +must be a great man. I don't suppose he would do for us in England, +because a king has no real power with us, and Peter would never put +up with being thwarted in all his plans by parliament, as William +is. But for a country like Russia, he is wonderful. Of course, our +company being composed of Scotchmen and Englishmen, we have no +prejudices against him. We think him wrong for entering upon this +war against Sweden, but we all consider him a wonderful fellow, +just the sort of fellow one would be proud to serve under, if we +did not serve under Charles of Sweden.</p> + +<p>"Well, Doctor Kelly, when do you think the czar will be here?"</p> + +<p>The doctor did not reply, but Michaeloff said quietly:</p> + +<p>"He arrived this afternoon."</p> + +<p>"He did!" Charlie exclaimed excitedly.</p> + +<p>"Why did you not tell me before, Doctor Kelly? Has he been asked +about my exchange, and is the Swedish officer still here?"</p> + +<p>"He is here, and you will be exchanged in the morning.</p> + +<p>"I have other things to see about now, and must say goodnight; +and if you should ever fall into the hands of our people again, and +Doctor Kelly does not happen to be near, ask for Peter Michaeloff, and +he will do all he can for you."</p> + +<p>"Then I am really to be exchanged tomorrow, doctor?" Charlie +said, as Doctor Michaeloff left the room.</p> + +<p>"It seems like it."</p> + +<p>"But did not you know?"</p> + +<p>"No, I had heard nothing for certain. I knew the czar had come, +but I had not heard of his decision. I congratulate you."</p> + +<p>"It is a piece of luck," Charlie said. "I thought it might be +months before there was an exchange. It is very good of the king to +send over so quickly."</p> + +<p>"Yes; and of the czar to let you go."</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't see much in that, doctor, considering that he +gets a captain in exchange for me; still, of course, he might have +refused. It would not have been civil, but he might have done +it."</p> + +<p>"What did you think of my friend, Charlie?"</p> + +<p>"I like him. He has a pleasant face, though I should think he +has got a temper of his own. He has a splendid figure, and looks +more like a fighting man than a doctor. I will write down his name, +so as not to forget it, as he says he might be able to help me if I +am ever taken prisoner again, and you did not happen to be with the +army. It is always nice having a friend. Look at the difference it +has made to me, finding a countryman here."</p> + +<p>"Yes, you may find it useful, Carstairs; and he has a good deal +of influence. Still, I think it probable that if you ever should +get into a scrape again, you will be able to get tidings of me, for +I am likely to be with the advanced division of our army, wherever +it is, as I am in charge of its hospitals.</p> + +<p>"You had better turn in now, for I suppose you will be starting +early, and I have two or three patients I must visit again before I +go to bed. This is your room, next to mine. I managed, after all, +to get it changed."</p> + +<p>"That is very good of you, doctor, but it really would not have +mattered a bit for one night. It does look snug and warm, with that +great fire."</p> + +<p>"Yes, the stoves are the one thing I don't like in Russia. I +like to see a blazing fire, and the first thing I do, when I get +into fresh quarters, is to have the stove opened so that I can see +one. This is a second room of mine. There were three together, you +see, and as my rank is that of a colonel, I was able to get them, +and it is handy, if a friend comes to see me, to have a room for +him."</p> + +<p>An hour later, just as Charlie was dozing off to sleep, the +doctor put his head in to the door.</p> + +<p>"You are to start at daybreak, Carstairs. My servant will call +you an hour before that. I shall be up. I must put a fresh bandage +on your head before you start."</p> + +<p>"Thank you very much, doctor. I am sorry to get you up so +early."</p> + +<p>"That is nothing. I am accustomed to work at all hours. Good +night."</p> + +<p>At eight o'clock, having had a bowl of broth, Charlie descended +to the courtyard in charge of an officer and two soldiers, the +doctor accompanying him. Here he found a Swedish officer belonging +to the king's personal staff. The Russian handed the lad formally +over to his charge, saying:</p> + +<p>"By the orders of the czar, I now exchange Ensign Carstairs for +Captain Potoff, whom you, on your part, engage to send off at +once."</p> + +<p>"I do," the Swede said; "that is, I engage that he shall be sent +off, as soon as he can be fetched from Revel, where he is now +interned, and shall be safely delivered under an escort; and that +if, either by death, illness, or escape, I should not be able to +hand him over, I will return another officer of the same rank."</p> + +<p>"I have the czar's commands," the Russian went on, "to express +his regret that, owing to a mistake on the part of the officer +commanding here, Ensign Carstairs has not received such worthy +treatment as the czar would have desired for him, but he has given +stringent orders that, in future, any Swedish officers who may be +taken prisoners shall receive every comfort and hospitality that +can be shown them."</p> + +<p>"Goodbye, Doctor Kelly," Charlie said, as he mounted his horse, +which had been saddled in readiness for him. "I am greatly obliged +to you for your very great kindness to me, and hope that I may some +day have an opportunity of repaying it."</p> + +<p>"I hope not, Carstairs. I trust that we may meet again, but hope +that I sha'n't be in the position of a prisoner. However, strange +things have happened already in this war, and there is no saying +how fortune may go. Goodbye, and a pleasant journey."</p> + +<p>A Russian officer took his place by the side of the Swede, and +an escort of twenty troopers rode behind them, as they trotted out +through the gate of the convent.</p> + +<p>"It was very kind of the king to send for me," Charlie said to +the Swede, "and I am really sorry that you should have had so long +a ride on my account, Captain Pradovich."</p> + +<p>"As to that, it is a trifle," the officer said. "If I had not +been riding here, I should be riding with the king elsewhere, so +that I am none the worse. But, in truth, I am glad I came, for +yesterday evening I saw the czar himself. I conversed with him for +some time. He expressed himself very courteously with respect to +the king, and to our army, against whom he seems to bear no sort of +malice for the defeat we inflicted on him at Narva. He spoke of it +himself, and said, 'you will see that, some day, we shall turn the +tables upon you.'</p> + +<p>"The king will be pleased when I return with you, for we all +feared that you might be very badly hurt. All that we knew was that +some of your men had seen you cut down. After the battle was over, +a search was made for your body. When it could not be found, +questions were asked of some of our own men, and some wounded +Russians, who were lying near the spot where you had been seen to +fall.</p> + +<p>"Our men had seen nothing, for, as the Russians closed in behind +your company as it advanced, they had shut their eyes and lay as if +dead, fearing that they might be run through, as they lay, by the +Cossack lances. The Russians, however, told us that they had seen +two of the Cossacks dismount, by the orders of one of their +officers, lift you on to a horse, and ride off with you. There was +therefore a certainty that you were still living, for the Russians +would assuredly not have troubled to carry off a dead body. His +majesty interested himself very much in the matter, and yesterday +morning sent me off to inquire if you were alive, and if so, to +propose an exchange.</p> + +<p>"I was much pleased, when I reached Plescow yesterday, to learn +that your wound is not a serious one. I saw the doctor, who, I +found, was a countryman of yours, and he assured me that it was +nothing, and made some joke that I did not understand about the +thickness of North Country skulls.</p> + +<p>"The czar arrived in the afternoon, but I did not see him until +late in the evening, when I was sent for. I found him with the +general in command, and several other officers, among whom was your +friend the doctor. The czar was, at first, in a furious passion. He +abused the general right and left, and I almost thought, at one +time, that he would have struck him. He told him that he had +disgraced the Russian name, by not treating you with proper +hospitality, and especially by placing you in a miserable cell +without a fire.</p> + +<p>"'What will the King of Sweden think?' he said. 'He treats his +prisoners with kindness and courtesy, and after Narva gave them a +banquet, at which he himself was present. The Duke of Croy writes +to me, to say he is treated as an honoured guest rather than as a +prisoner, and here you disgrace us by shutting your prisoner in a +cheerless cell, although he is wounded, and giving him food such as +you might give to a common soldier. The Swedes will think that we +are barbarians. You are released from your command, and will at +once proceed to Moscow and report yourself there, when a post will +be assigned to you where you will have no opportunity of showing +yourself ignorant of the laws of courtesy.</p> + +<p>"'Doctor,' he went on, 'you will remember that all prisoners, +officers and men, will be henceforth under the charge of the +medical department, and that you have full authority to make such +arrangements as you may think necessary for their comfort and +honourable treatment. I will not have Russia made a byword among +civilized peoples.'</p> + +<p>"Then he dismissed the rest of them, and afterwards sat down and +chatted with me, just as if we had been of the same rank, puffing a +pipe furiously, and drinking amazing quantities of wine. Indeed, my +head feels the effects of it this morning, although I was quite +unable to drink cup for cup with him, for, had I done so, I should +have been under the table long before he rose from it, seemingly +quite unmoved by the quantity he had drank. I have no doubt he +summoned me especially to hear his rebuke to the general, so that I +could take word to the king how earnest he was, in his regrets for +your treatment."</p> + +<p>"There was nothing much to complain of," Charlie said; "and, +indeed, the cell was a palace after the miserable huts in which we +have passed the winter. I am glad, however, the czar gave the +general a wigging, for he spoke brutally to me on my arrival. You +may be sure, now, that any prisoners that may be taken will be well +treated; for Doctor Kelly, who has been extremely kind to me, will +certainly take good care of them. As to my wound, it is of little +consequence. It fell on my steel cap, and I think I was stunned by +its force, rather than rendered insensible by the cut itself."</p> + +<p>After three hours' riding they came to a village. As soon as +they were seen approaching, there was a stir there. A man riding +ahead waved the white flag that he carried, and, when they entered +the village, they found a party of fifty Swedish cavalry in the +saddle.</p> + +<p>The Russian escort, as soon as the Swedish officer and Charlie +had joined their friends, turned and rode off. A meal was in +readiness, and when Charlie, who was still feeling somewhat weak +from the effects of his wound, had partaken of it, the party +proceeded on their way, and rode into Marienburg before +nightfall.</p> + +<p>Two or three miles outside the town, they met Harry Jervoise. +Two soldiers had been sent on at full speed, directly Charlie +reached the village, to report that he had arrived there and was +not seriously wounded, and, knowing about the time they would +arrive, Harry had ridden out to meet his friend.</p> + +<p>"You are looking white," he said, after the first hearty +greeting.</p> + +<p>"I am feeling desperately tired, Harry. The wound is of no +consequence, but I lost a good deal of blood, and it is as much as +I can do to keep my saddle, though we have been coming on quietly +on purpose. However, I shall soon be all right again, and I need +hardly say that I am heartily glad to be back."</p> + +<p>"We have all been in a great way about you, Charlie, for we made +sure that you were very badly wounded. I can tell you, it was a +relief when the men rode in three hours ago, with the news that you +had arrived, and were not badly hurt. The men seemed as pleased as +we were, and there was a loud burst of cheering when we told them +the news. Cunningham and Forbes would have ridden out with me; but +Cunningham is on duty, and Forbes thought that we should like to +have a chat together."</p> + +<p>On his arrival, Charlie was heartily welcomed by Captain +Jervoise and the men of the company, who cheered lustily as he rode +up.</p> + +<p>"You are to go and see the king at once," Captain Jervoise said +as he dismounted. "I believe he wants to hear, especially, how you +were treated. Make the best of it you can, lad. There is no +occasion for the feeling of Charles against the Russians being +embittered."</p> + +<p>"I understand," Charlie said. "I will make things as smooth as I +can."</p> + +<p>He walked quickly to the little house where the king had taken +up his quarters. There was no sentry at the door, or other sign +that the house contained an occupant of special rank. He knocked at +the door, and hearing a shout of "Enter," opened it and went +in.</p> + +<p>"Ah, my young ensign; is it you?" the king said, rising from a +low settle on which he was sitting by the fire, talking with +Colonel Schlippenbach.</p> + +<p>"Hurt somewhat, I see, but not badly, I hope. I was sure that +you would not have been taken prisoner, unless you had been +injured."</p> + +<p>"I was cut down by a blow that clove my helmet, your majesty, +and stunned me for some time; but, beyond making a somewhat long +gash on my skull, it did me no great harm."</p> + +<p>"That speaks well for the thickness of your skull, lad, and I am +heartily glad it is no worse. Now, tell me, how did they treat +you?"</p> + +<p>"It was a somewhat rough cell into which I was thrown, sir, but +I was most kindly tended by an Irish doctor high in the czar's +service, and, when the czar himself arrived, and learned that I had +not been lodged as well as he thought necessary, I hear he was so +angered that he disgraced the general, deprived him of his command, +and sent him to take charge of some fortress in the interior of +Russia; and I was, by his orders, allowed to occupy the doctor's +quarters, and a bedroom was assigned to me next to his. I heard +that the czar spoke in terms of the warmest appreciation of your +treatment of your prisoners, and said that any of your officers who +fell into his hands should be treated with equal courtesy."</p> + +<p>Charles looked gratified.</p> + +<p>"I am glad to hear it," he said. "In the field, if necessary, +blood must flow like water, but there is no reason why we should +not behave towards each other with courtesy, when the fighting is +over. You know nothing of the force there, at present?"</p> + +<p>"No, sir, I heard nothing. I did not exchange a word with +anyone, save the doctor and another medical man; and as the former +treated me as a friend, rather than as an enemy, I did not deem it +right to question him, and, had I done so, I am sure that he would +have given me no answer."</p> + +<p>"Well, you can return to your quarters, sir. Your company did me +good service in that fight, and Colonel Schlippenbach did not speak +in any way too warmly in their favour. I would that I had more of +these brave Englishmen and Scotchmen in my service."</p> + +<p>Charlie's head, however, was not as hard as he had believed it +to be; and the long ride brought on inflammation of the wound, so +that, on the following morning, he was in a high state of fever. It +was a fortnight before he was convalescent, and the surgeon then +recommended that he should have rest and quiet for a time, as he +was sorely pulled down, and unfit to bear the hardships of a +campaign; and it was settled that he should go down with the next +convoy to Revel, and thence take ship for Sweden.</p> + +<p>He was so weak, that although very sorry to leave the army just +as spring was commencing, he himself felt that he should be unable +to support the fatigues of the campaign, until he had had entire +rest and change. A few hours after the decision of the surgeon had +been given, Major Jamieson and Captain Jervoise entered the room +where he was sitting, propped up by pillows.</p> + +<p>"I have a bit of news that will please you, Charlie. The king +sent for the major this morning, and told him that he intended to +increase our company to a regiment, if he could do so. He had heard +that a considerable number of Scotchmen and Englishmen had come +over, and were desirous of enlisting, but, from their ignorance of +the language, their services had been declined. He said that he was +so pleased, not only with the conduct of the company in that fight, +but with its discipline, physique, and power of endurance, that he +had decided to convert it into a regiment. He said he was sorry to +lose its services for a time; but, as we lost twenty men in the +fight, and have some fifteen still too disabled to take their +places in the ranks, this was of the less importance.</p> + +<p>"So we are all going to march down to Revel with you. Major +Jamieson is appointed colonel, and I am promoted to be major. The +king himself directed that Cunningham and Forbes shall have +commissions as captains, and you and Harry as lieutenants. The +colonel has authority given him to nominate Scotch and English +gentlemen of good name to make up the quota of officers, while most +of our own men will be appointed non-commissioned officers, to +drill the new recruits. The king has been good enough, at Colonel +Jamieson's request, to say that, as soon as the regiment is raised +and organized, it shall be sent up to the front."</p> + +<p>"That is good news, indeed," Charlie said, with more animation +than he had evinced since his illness. "I have been so accustomed +to be attended to, in every way, that I was quite looking forward +with dread to the journey among strangers. Still, if you are all +going, it will be a different thing altogether. I don't think you +will be long in raising the regiment. We only were a week in +getting the company together, and, if they have been refusing to +accept the services of our people, there must be numbers of them at +Gottenburg."</p> + +<p>Early on the following morning, Charlie and the men unable to +march were placed in waggons, and the company started on its march +to Revel. It was a heavy journey, for the frost had broken up, and +the roads were in a terrible state from the heavy traffic passing. +There was no delay when they reached the port, as they at once +marched on board a ship, which was the next day to start for +Sweden. Orders from the king had already been received that the +company was to be conveyed direct to Gottenburg, and they entered +the port on the fifth day after sailing.</p> + +<p>The change, the sea air, and the prospect of seeing his father +again greatly benefited Charlie, and, while the company was marched +to a large building assigned to their use, he was able to make his +way on foot to his father's, assisted by his soldier servant, Jock +Armstrong.</p> + +<p>"Why, Charlie," Sir Marmaduke Carstairs exclaimed as he entered, +"who would have thought of seeing you? You are looking ill, lad; +ill and weak. What has happened to you?"</p> + +<p>Charlie briefly related the events that had brought about his +return to Gottenburg, of which Sir Marmaduke was entirely ignorant. +Postal communications were rare and uncertain, and Captain Jervoise +had not taken advantage of the one opportunity that offered, after +Charlie had been wounded, thinking it better to delay till the lad +could write and give a good account of himself.</p> + +<p>"So Jervoise, and his son, and that good fellow Jamieson are all +back again? That is good news, Charlie; and you have been promoted? +That is capital too, after only a year in the service. And you have +been wounded, and a prisoner among the Russians? You have had +adventures, indeed! I was terribly uneasy when the first news of +that wonderful victory at Narva came, for we generally have to wait +for the arrival of the despatches giving the lists of the killed +and wounded. I saw that the regiment had not been in the thick of +it, as the lists contained none of your names. I would have given a +limb to have taken part in that wonderful battle. When you get as +old as I am, my boy, you will feel a pride in telling how you +fought at Narva, and helped to destroy an entire Russian army with +the odds ten to one against you.</p> + +<p>"Of course, you will stay here with me. I suppose you have leave +at present?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, father, Colonel Jamieson told me that my first duty was to +get strong and well again, and that I was to think of no other +until I had performed that. And how have you been getting on, +father?"</p> + +<p>"Very well, lad. I don't pretend that it is not a great change +from Lynnwood, but I get along very well, and thank heaven, daily, +that for so many years I had set aside a portion of my rents, +little thinking that the time would come when they would prove my +means of existence. My friends here have invested the money for me, +and it bears good interest, which is punctually paid. With the +English and Scotch exiles, I have as much society as I care for, +and as I find I am able to keep a horse--for living here is not +more than half the cost that it would be in England--I am well +enough contented with my lot.</p> + +<p>"There is but one thing that pricks me. That villain John Dormay +has, as he schemed for, obtained possession of my estates, and has +been knighted for his distinguished services to the king. I heard +of this some time since, by a letter from one of our Jacobite +friends to whom I wrote, asking for news. He says that the new +knight has no great cause for enjoyment in his dignity and +possessions, because, not only do the Jacobite gentry turn their +backs upon him, when they meet him in the town, but the better +class of Whigs hold altogether aloof from him, regarding his +elevation, at the expense of his wife's kinsman, to be disgraceful, +although of course they have no idea of the evil plot by which he +brought about my ruin. There is great pity expressed for his wife, +who has not once stirred beyond the grounds at Lynnwood since he +took her there, and who is, they say, a shadow of her former self. +Ciceley, he hears, is well. That cub of a son is in London, and +there are reports that he is very wild, and puts his father to much +cost. As to the man himself, they say he is surrounded by the +lowest knaves, and it is rumoured that he has taken to drink for +want of better company. It is some comfort to me to think that, +although the villain has my estates, he is getting no enjoyment out +of them.</p> + +<p>"However, I hope some day to have a reckoning with him. The +Stuarts must come to their own, sooner or later. Until then I am +content to rest quietly here in Sweden."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: The Passage of the Dwina.</h2> + +<p>A few hours after Charlie's arrival home, Major Jervoise and +Harry came round to the house.</p> + +<p>"I congratulate you, Jervoise, on your new rank," Sir Marmaduke +said heartily, as he entered; "and you, too, Harry. It has been a +great comfort to me, to know that you and Charlie have been +together always. At present you have the advantage of him in looks. +My lad has no more strength than a girl, not half the strength, +indeed, of many of these sturdy Swedish maidens."</p> + +<p>"Yes, Charlie has had a bad bout of it, Carstairs," Major +Jervoise said cheerfully; "but he has picked up wonderfully in the +last ten days, and, in as many more, I shall look to see him at +work again. I only wish that you could have been with us, old +friend."</p> + +<p>"It is of no use wishing, Jervoise. We have heard enough here, +of what the troops have been suffering through the winter, for me +to know that, if I had had my wish and gone with you, my bones +would now be lying somewhere under the soil of Livonia."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it was a hard time," Major Jervoise agreed, "but we all +got through it well, thanks principally to our turning to at sports +of all kinds. These kept the men in health, and prevented them from +moping. The king was struck with the condition of our company, and +he has ordered that, in future, all the Swedish troops shall take +part in such games and amusements when in winter quarters. Of +course, Charlie has told you we are going to have a regiment +entirely composed of Scots and Englishmen. I put the Scots first, +since they will be by far the most numerous. There are always +plenty of active spirits, who find but small opening for their +energy at home, and are ready to take foreign service whenever the +chance opens. Besides, there are always feuds there. In the old +days, it was chief against chief. Now it is religion against +religion; and now, as then, there are numbers of young fellows glad +to exchange the troubles at home for service abroad. There have +been quite a crowd of men round our quarters, for, directly the +news spread that the company was landing, our countrymen flocked +round, each eager to learn how many vacancies there were in the +ranks, and whether we would receive recruits. Their joy was extreme +when it became known that Jamieson had authority to raise a whole +regiment. I doubt not that many of the poor fellows are in great +straits."</p> + +<p>"That I can tell you they are," Sir Marmaduke broke in. "We have +been doing what we can for them, for it was grievous that so many +men should be wandering, without means or employment, in a strange +country. But the number was too great for our money to go far among +them, and I know that many of them are destitute and well-nigh +starving. We had hoped to ship some of them back to Scotland, and +have been treating with the captain of a vessel sailing, in two or +three days, to carry them home."</p> + +<p>"It is unfortunate, but they have none to blame but themselves. +They should have waited until an invitation for foreigners to +enlist was issued by the Swedish government, or until gentlemen of +birth raised companies and regiments for service here. However, we +are the gainers, for I see that we shall not have to wait here many +weeks. Already, as far as I can judge from what I hear, there must +be well-nigh four hundred men here, all eager to serve.</p> + +<p>"We will send the news by the next ship that sails, both to +Scotland and to our own country, that men, active and fit for +service, can be received into a regiment, specially formed of +English-speaking soldiers. I will warrant that, when it is known in +the Fells that I am a major in the regiment, and that your son and +mine are lieutenants, we shall have two or three score of stout +young fellows coming over."</p> + +<p>The next day, indeed, nearly four hundred men were enlisted into +the service, and were divided into eight companies. Each of these, +when complete, was to be two hundred strong. Six Scottish officers +were transferred, from Swedish regiments, to fill up the list of +captains, and commissions were given to several gentlemen of family +as lieutenants and ensigns. Most of these, however, were held over, +as the colonel wrote to many gentlemen of his acquaintance in +Scotland, offering them commissions if they would raise and bring +over men. Major Jervoise did the same to half a dozen young +Jacobite gentlemen in the north of England, and so successful were +the appeals that, within two months of the return of the company to +Gottenburg, the regiment had been raised to its full strength.</p> + +<p>A fortnight was spent in drilling the last batch of recruits, +from morning till night, so that they should be able to take their +places in the ranks; and then, with drums beating and colours +flying, the corps embarked at Gottenburg, and sailed to join the +army.</p> + +<p>They arrived at Revel in the beginning of May. The port was full +of ships, for twelve thousand men had embarked, at Stockholm and +other ports, to reinforce the army and enable the king to take the +field in force; and, by the end of the month, the greater portion +of the force was concentrated at Dorpt.</p> + +<p>Charlie had long since regained his full strength. As soon as he +was fit for duty, he had rejoined, and had been engaged, early and +late, in the work of drilling the recruits, and in the general +organization of the regiment. He and Harry, however, found time to +take part in any amusement that was going on. They were made +welcome in the houses of the principal merchants and other +residents of Gottenburg, and much enjoyed their stay in the town, +in spite of their longing to be back in time to take part in the +early operations of the campaign.</p> + +<p>When they sailed into the port of Revel, they found that the +campaign had but just commenced, and they marched with all haste to +join the force with which the king was advancing against the +Saxons, who were still besieging Riga. Their army was commanded by +Marshal Steinau, and was posted on the other side of the river +Dwina, a broad stream. Charles the Twelfth had ridden up to Colonel +Jamieson's regiment upon its arrival, and expressed warm +gratification at its appearance, when it was paraded for his +inspection.</p> + +<p>"You have done well, indeed, colonel," he said. "I had hardly +hoped you could have collected so fine a body of men in so short a +time."</p> + +<p>At his request, the officers were brought up and introduced. He +spoke a few words to those he had known before, saying to +Charlie:</p> + +<p>"I am glad to see you back again, lieutenant. You have quite +recovered from that crack on your crown, I hope. But I need not +ask, your looks speak for themselves. You have just got back in +time to pay my enemies back for it."</p> + +<p>The prospect was not a cheerful one, when the Swedes arrived on +the banks of the Dwina. The Saxons were somewhat superior in force, +and it would be a desperate enterprise to cross the river, in the +teeth of their cannon and musketry. Already the king had caused a +number of large flat boats to be constructed. The sides were made +very high, so as to completely cover the troops from musketry, and +were hinged so as to let down and act as gangways, and facilitate a +landing.</p> + +<p>Charlie was standing on the bank, looking at the movements of +the Saxon troops across the river, and wondering how the passage +was to be effected, when a hand was placed on his shoulder. Looking +round, he saw it was the king, who, as was his custom, was moving +about on foot, unattended by any of his officers.</p> + +<p>"Wondering how we are to get across, lieutenant?"</p> + +<p>"That is just what I was thinking over, your majesty."</p> + +<p>"We want another snowstorm, as we had at Narva," the king said. +"The wind is blowing the right way, but there is no chance of such +another stroke of luck, at this time of year."</p> + +<p>"No, sir; but I was thinking that one might make an artificial +fog."</p> + +<p>"How do you mean?" the king asked quickly.</p> + +<p>"Your majesty has great stacks of straw here, collected for +forage for the cattle. No doubt a good deal of it is damp, or if +not, it could be easily wetted. If we were to build great piles of +it, all along on the banks here, and set it alight so as to burn +very slowly, but to give out a great deal of smoke, this light wind +would blow it across the river into the faces of the Saxons, and +completely cover our movements."</p> + +<p>"You are right!" the king exclaimed. "Nothing could be better. +We will make a smoke that will blind and half smother them;" and he +hurried away.</p> + +<p>An hour later, orders were sent out to all the regiments that, +as soon as it became dusk, the men should assemble at the great +forage stores for fatigue duty. As soon as they did so, they were +ordered to pull down the stacks, and to carry the straw to the bank +of the river, and there pile it in heavy masses, twenty yards +apart. The whole was to be damped, with the exception of only a +small quantity on the windward side of the heaps, which was to be +used for starting the fire.</p> + +<p>In two hours, the work was completed. The men were then ordered +to return to their camps, have their suppers, and lie down at once. +Then they were to form up, half an hour before daybreak, in +readiness to take their places in the boats, and were then to lie +down, in order, until the word was given to move forward.</p> + +<p>This was done, and just as the daylight appeared the heaps of +straw were lighted, and dense volumes of smoke rolled across the +river, entirely obscuring the opposite shore from view. The Saxons, +enveloped in the smoke, were unable to understand its meaning. +Those on the watch had seen no sign of troops on the bank, before +the smoke began to roll across the water, and the general was +uncertain whether a great fire had broken out in the forage stores +of the Swedes, or whether the fire had been purposely raised, +either to cover the movements of the army and enable them to march +away and cross at some undefended point, or whether to cover their +passage.</p> + +<p>The Swedish regiments, which were the first to cross, took their +places at once in the boats, the king himself accompanying them. In +a quarter of an hour the opposite bank was gained. Marshal Steinau, +an able general, had called the Saxons under arms, and was marching +towards the river, when the wind, freshening, lifted the thick veil +of smoke, and he saw that the Swedes had already gained the bank of +the river, and at once hurled his cavalry against them.</p> + +<p>The Swedish formation was not complete and, for a moment, they +were driven back in disorder, and forced into the river. The water +was shallow, and the king, going about among them, quickly restored +order and discipline, and, charging in solid formation, they drove +the cavalry back and advanced across the plain. Steinau recalled +his troops and posted them in a strong position, one flank being +covered by a marsh and the other by a wood. He had time to effect +his arrangements, as Charles was compelled to wait until the whole +of his troops were across. As soon as they were so, he led them +against the enemy.</p> + +<p>The battle was a severe one, for the Swedes were unprovided with +artillery, and the Saxons, with the advantages of position and a +powerful artillery, fought steadily. Three times Marshal Steinau +led his cavalry in desperate charges, and each time almost +penetrated to the point where Charles was directing the movements +of his troops; but, at last, he was struck from his horse by a blow +from the butt end of a musket; and his cuirassiers, with +difficulty, carried him from the field. As soon as his fall became +known, disorder spread among the ranks of the Saxons. Some +regiments gave way, and, the Swedes rushing forward with loud +shouts, the whole army was speedily in full flight.</p> + +<p>This victory laid the whole of Courland at the mercy of the +Swedes, all the towns opening their gates at their approach.</p> + +<p>They were now on the confines of Poland, and the king, brave to +rashness as he was, hesitated to attack a nation so powerful. +Poland, at that time, was a country a little larger than France, +though with a somewhat smaller population, but in this respect +exceeding Sweden. With the Poles themselves he had no quarrel, for +they had taken no part in the struggle, which had been carried on +solely by their king, with his Saxon troops.</p> + +<p>The authority of the kings of Poland was much smaller than that +of other European monarchs. The office was not a hereditary one; +the king being elected at a diet, composed of the whole of the +nobles of the country, the nobility embracing practically every +free man; and, as it was necessary, according to the constitution +of the country, that the vote should be unanimous, the difficulties +in the way of election were very great, and civil wars of constant +occurrence.</p> + +<p>Charles was determined that he would drive Augustus, who was the +author of the league against him, from the throne; but he desired +to do this by means of the Poles themselves, rather than to unite +the whole nation against him by invading the country. Poland was +divided into two parts, the larger of which was Poland proper, +which could at once place thirty thousand men in the field. The +other was Lithuania, with an army of twelve thousand. These forces +were entirely independent of each other. The troops were for the +most part cavalry, and the small force, permanently kept up, was +composed almost entirely of horsemen. They rarely drew pay, and +subsisted entirely on plunder, being as formidable to their own +people as to an enemy.</p> + +<p>Lithuania, on whose borders the king had taken post with his +army, was, as usual, harassed by two factions, that of the Prince +Sapieha and the Prince of Oginski, between whom a civil war was +going on.</p> + +<p>The King of Sweden took the part of the former, and, furnishing +him with assistance, speedily enabled him to overcome the Oginski +party, who received but slight aid from the Saxons. Oginski's +forces were speedily dispersed, and roamed about the country in +scattered parties, subsisting on pillage, thereby exciting among +the people a lively feeling of hatred against the King of Poland, +who was regarded as the author of the misfortunes that had befallen +the country.</p> + +<p>From the day when Charlie's suggestion, of burning damp straw to +conceal the passage of the river, had been attended with such +success, the king had held him in high favour. There was but a few +years' difference between their ages, and the suggestion, so +promptly made, seemed to show the king that the young Englishman +was a kindred spirit, and he frequently requested him to accompany +him in his rides, and chatted familiarly with him.</p> + +<p>"I hate this inactive life," he said one day, "and would, a +thousand times, rather be fighting the Russians than setting the +Poles by the ears; but I dare not move against them, for, were +Augustus of Saxony left alone, he would ere long set all Poland +against me. At present, the Poles refuse to allow him to bring in +reinforcements from his own country; but if he cannot get men he +can get gold, and with gold he can buy over his chief opponents, +and regain his power. If it costs me a year's delay, I must wait +until he is forced to fly the kingdom, and I can place on the +throne someone who will owe his election entirely to me, and in +whose good faith I can be secure.</p> + +<p>"That done, I can turn my attention to Russia, which, by all +accounts, daily becomes more formidable. Narva is besieged by them, +and will ere long fall; but I can retake Narva when once I can +depend upon the neutrality of the Poles. Would I were king of +Poland as well as of Sweden. With eighty thousand Polish horse, and +my own Swedish infantry, I could conquer Europe if I wished to do +so.</p> + +<p>"I know that you are as fond of adventure as I am, and I am +thinking of sending you with an envoy I am despatching to +Warsaw.</p> + +<p>"You know that the Poles are adverse to business of all kinds. +The poorest noble, who can scarcely pay for the cloak he wears, and +who is ready enough to sell his vote and his sword to the highest +bidder, will turn up his nose at honest trade; and the consequence +is, as there is no class between the noble and the peasant, the +trade of the country is wholly in the hands of Jews and foreigners, +among the latter being, I hear, many Scotchmen, who, while they +make excellent soldiers, are also keen traders. This class must +have considerable power, in fact, although it be exercised quietly. +The Jews are, of course, money lenders as well as traders. Large +numbers of these petty nobles must be in their debt, either for +money lent or goods supplied.</p> + +<p>"My agent goes specially charged to deal with the archbishop, +who is quite open to sell his services to me, although he poses as +one of the strongest adherents of the Saxons. With him, it is not a +question so much of money, as of power. Being a wise man, he sees +that Augustus can never retain his position, in the face of the +enmity of the great body of the Poles, and of my hostility. But, +while my agent deals with him and such nobles as he indicates as +being likely to take my part against Augustus, you could ascertain +the feeling of the trading class, and endeavour to induce them, not +only to favour me, but to exert all the influence they possess on +my behalf. As there are many Scotch merchants in the city, you +could begin by making yourself known to them, taking with you +letters of introduction from your colonel, and any other Scotch +gentleman whom you may find to have acquaintanceship, if not with +the men themselves, with their families in Scotland. I do not, of +course, say that the mission will be without danger, but that will, +I know, be an advantage in your eyes. What do you think of the +proposal?"</p> + +<p>"I do not know, sire," Charlie said doubtfully. "I have no +experience whatever in matters of that kind."</p> + +<p>"This will be a good opportunity for you to serve an +apprenticeship," the king said decidedly. "There is no chance of +anything being done here, for months, and as you will have no +opportunity of using your sword, you cannot be better employed than +in polishing up your wits. I will speak to Colonel Jamieson about +it this evening. Count Piper will give you full instructions, and +will obtain for you, from some of our friends, lists of the names +of the men who would be likely to be most useful to us. You will +please to remember that the brain does a great deal more than the +sword, in enabling a man to rise above his fellows. You are a brave +young officer, but I have many a score of brave young officers, and +it was your quick wit, in suggesting the strategy by which we +crossed the Dwina without loss, that has marked you out from among +others, and made me see that you are fit for something better than +getting your throat cut."</p> + +<p>The king then changed the subject with his usual abruptness, and +dismissed Charlie, at the end of his ride, without any further +allusion to the subject. The young fellow, however, knew enough of +the king's headstrong disposition to be aware that the matter was +settled, and that he could not, without incurring the king's +serious displeasure, decline to accept the commission. He walked +back, with a serious face, to the hut that the officers of the +company occupied, and asked Harry Jervoise to come out to him.</p> + +<p>"What is it, Charlie?" his friend said. "Has his gracious +majesty been blowing you up, or has your horse broken its +knees?"</p> + +<p>"A much worse thing than either, Harry. The king appears to have +taken into his head that I am cut out for a diplomatist;" and he +then repeated to his friend the conversation the king had had with +him.</p> + +<p>Harry burst into a shout of laughter.</p> + +<p>"Don't be angry, Charlie, but I cannot help it. The idea of your +going, in disguise, I suppose, and trying to talk over the Jewish +clothiers and cannie Scotch traders, is one of the funniest things +I ever heard. And do you think the king was really in earnest?"</p> + +<p>"The king is always in earnest," Charlie said in a vexed tone; +"and, when he once takes a thing into his head, there is no +gainsaying him."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough, Charlie," Harry said, becoming serious. +"Well, I have no doubt you will do it just as well as another, and +after all, there will be some fun in it, and you will be in a big +city, and likely to have a deal more excitement than will fall to +our lot here."</p> + +<p>"I don't think it will be at all the sort of excitement I should +care for, Harry. However, my hope is, that the colonel will be able +to dissuade him from the idea."</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't know that I should wish that if I were in your +place, Charlie. Undoubtedly, it is an honour being chosen for such +a mission, and it is possible you may get a great deal of credit +for it, as the king is always ready to push forward those who do +good service. Look how much he thinks of you, because you made that +suggestion about getting up a smoke to cover our passage."</p> + +<p>"I wish I had never made it," Charlie said heartily.</p> + +<p>"Well, in that case, Charlie, it is likely enough we should not +be talking together here, for our loss in crossing the river under +fire would have been terrible."</p> + +<p>"Well, perhaps it is as well as it is," Charlie agreed. "But I +did not want to attract his attention. I was very happy as I was, +with you all. As for my suggestion about the straw, anyone might +have thought of it. I should never have given the matter another +moment's consideration, and I should be much better pleased if the +king had not done so, either, instead of telling the colonel about +it, and the colonel speaking to the officers, and such a ridiculous +fuss being made about nothing."</p> + +<p>"My dear Charlie," Harry said seriously, "you seem to be +forgetting that we all came out here, together, to make our +fortune, or at any rate to do as well as we could till the Stuarts +come to the throne again, and our fathers regain their estates, a +matter concerning which, let me tell you, I do not feel by any +means so certain as I did in the old days. Then, you know, all our +friends were of our way of thinking, and the faith that the Stuarts +would return was like a matter of religion, which it was heresy to +doubt for an instant. Well, you see, in the year that we have been +out here one's eyes have got opened a bit, and I don't feel by any +means sanguine that the Stuarts will ever come to the throne of +England again, or that our fathers will recover their estates.</p> + +<p>"You have seen here what good soldiers can do, and how powerless +men possessing but little discipline, though perhaps as brave as +themselves, are against them. William of Orange has got good +soldiers. His Dutch troops are probably quite as good as our best +Swedish regiments. They have had plenty of fighting in Ireland and +elsewhere, and I doubt whether the Jacobite gentlemen, however +numerous, but without training or discipline, could any more make +head against them than the masses of Muscovites could against the +Swedish battalions at Narva. All this means that it is necessary +that we should, if possible, carve out a fortune here. So far, I +certainly have no reason to grumble. On the contrary, I have had +great luck. I am a lieutenant at seventeen, and, if I am not shot +or carried off by fever, I may, suppose the war goes on and the +army is not reduced, be a colonel at the age of forty.</p> + +<p>"Now you, on the other hand, have, by that happy suggestion of +yours, attracted the notice of the king, and he is pleased to +nominate you to a mission in which there is a chance of your +distinguishing yourself in another way, and of being employed in +other and more important business. All this will place you much +farther on the road towards making a fortune, than marching and +fighting with your company would be likely to do in the course of +twenty years, and I think it would be foolish in the extreme for +you to exhibit any disinclination to undertake the duty."</p> + +<p>"I suppose you are right, Harry, and I am much obliged to you +for your advice, which certainly puts the matter in a light in +which I had not before seen it. If I thought that I could do it +well, I should not so much mind, for, as you say, there will be +some fun to be got out of it, and some excitement, and there seems +little chance of doing anything here for a long time. But what am I +to say to the fellows? How can I argue with them? Besides, I don't +talk Polish."</p> + +<p>"I don't suppose there are ten men in the army who do so, +probably not five. As to what to say, Count Piper will no doubt +give you full instructions as to the line you are to take, the +arguments you are to use, and the inducements you are to hold out. +That is sure to be all right."</p> + +<p>"Well, do not say anything about it, Harry, when you get back. I +still hope the colonel will dissuade the king."</p> + +<p>"Then you are singularly hopeful, Charlie, that is all I can +say. You might persuade a brick wall to move out of your way, as +easily as induce the King of Sweden to give up a plan he has once +formed. However, I will say nothing about it."</p> + +<p>At nine o'clock, an orderly came to the hut with a message that +the colonel wished to speak to Lieutenant Carstairs. Harry gave his +friend a comical look, as the latter rose and buckled on his +sword.</p> + +<p>"What is the joke, Harry?" his father asked, when Charlie had +left. "Do you know what the colonel can want him for, at this time +of the evening? It is not his turn for duty."</p> + +<p>"I know, father; but I must not say."</p> + +<p>"The lad has not been getting into a scrape, I hope?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing serious, I can assure you; but really, I must not say +anything until he comes back."</p> + +<p>Harry's positive assurance, as to the impossibility of changing +the king's decision, had pretty well dispelled any hopes Charlie +might before have entertained, and he entered the colonel's room +with a grave face.</p> + +<p>"You know why I have sent for you, Carstairs?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir; I am afraid that I do."</p> + +<p>"Afraid? That is to say, you don't like it."</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir; I own that I don't like it."</p> + +<p>"Nor do I, lad, and I told his majesty so. I said you were too +young for so risky a business. The king scoffed at the idea. He +said, 'He is not much more than two years younger than I am, and if +I am old enough to command an army, he is old enough to carry out +this mission. We know that he is courageous. He is cool, sharp, and +intelligent. Why do I choose him? Has he not saved me from the loss +of about four or five thousand men, and probably a total defeat? A +young fellow who can do that, ought to be able to cope with Jewish +traders, and to throw dust in the eyes of the Poles.</p> + +<p>"I have chosen him for this service for two reasons. In the +first place, because I know he will do it well, and even those who +consider that I am rash and headstrong, admit that I have the knack +of picking out good men. In the next place, I want to reward him +for the service he has done for us. I cannot, at his age, make a +colonel of him, but I can give him a chance of distinguishing +himself in a service in which age does not count for so much, and +Count Piper, knowing my wishes in the matter, will push him +forward. Moreover, in such a mission as this, his youth will be an +advantage, for he is very much less likely to excite suspicion than +if he were an older man.'</p> + +<p>"The king's manner did not admit of argument, and I had only to +wait and ask what were his commands. These were simply that you are +to call upon his minister tomorrow, and that you would then receive +full instructions.</p> + +<p>"The king means well by you, lad, and on turning it over, I +think better of the plan than I did before. I am convinced, at any +rate, that you will do credit to the king's choice."</p> + +<p>"I will do my best, sir," Charlie said. "At present, it all +seems so vague to me that I can form no idea whatever as to what it +will be like. I am sure that the king's intentions are, at any +rate, kind. I am glad to hear you say that, on consideration, you +think better of the plan. Then I may mention the matter to Major +Jervoise?"</p> + +<p>"Certainly, Carstairs, and to his son, but it must go no +farther. I shall put your name in orders, as relieved from duty, +and shall mention that you have been despatched on service, which +might mean anything. Come and see me tomorrow, lad, after you have +received Count Piper's instructions. As the king reminded me, there +are many Scotchmen at Warsaw, and it is likely that some of them +passed through Sweden on the way to establish themselves there, and +I may very well have made their acquaintance at Gottenburg or +Stockholm.</p> + +<p>"Once established in the house of one of my countrymen, your +position would be fairly safe and not altogether unpleasant, and +you would be certainly far better off than a Swede would be engaged +on this mission. The Swedes are, of course, regarded by the Poles +as enemies, but, as there is no feeling against Englishmen or +Scotchmen, you might pass about unnoticed as one of the family of a +Scottish trader there, or as his assistant."</p> + +<p>"I don't fear its being unpleasant in the least, colonel. Nor do +I think anything one way or the other about my safety. I only fear +that I shall not be able to carry out properly the mission +intrusted to me."</p> + +<p>"You will do your best, lad, and that is all that can be +expected. You have not solicited the post, and as it is none of +your choosing, your failure would be the fault of those who have +sent you, and not of yourself; but in a matter of this kind there +is no such thing as complete failure. When you have to deal with +one man you may succeed or you may fail in endeavouring to induce +him to act in a certain manner, but when you have to deal with a +considerable number of men, some will be willing to accept your +proposals, some will not, and the question of success will probably +depend upon outside influences and circumstances over which you +have no control whatever. I have no fear that it will be a failure. +If our party in Poland triumph, or if our army here advances, or if +Augustus, finding his position hopeless, leaves the country, the +good people of Warsaw will join their voices to those of the +majority. If matters go the other way, you may be sure that they +will not risk imprisonment, confiscation, and perhaps death, by +getting up a revolt on their own account. The king will be +perfectly aware of this, and will not expect impossibilities, and +there is really no occasion whatever for you to worry yourself on +that ground."</p> + +<p>Upon calling upon Count Piper the next morning, Charlie found +that, as the colonel had told him, his mission was a general +one.</p> + +<p>"It will be your duty," the minister said, "to have interviews +with as many of the foreign traders and Jews in Warsaw as you can, +only going to those to whom you have some sort of introduction from +the persons you may first meet, or who are, as far as you can learn +from the report of others, ill disposed towards the Saxon party. +Here is a letter, stating to all whom it may concern, that you are +in the confidence of the King of Sweden, and are authorized to +represent him.</p> + +<p>"In the first place, you can point out to those you see that, +should the present situation continue, it will bring grievous evils +upon Poland. Proclamations have already been spread broadcast over +the country, saying that the king has no quarrel with the people of +Poland, but, as their sovereign has, without the slightest +provocation, embarked on a war, he must fight against him and his +Saxon troops, until they are driven from the country. This you will +repeat, and will urge that it will be infinitely better that Poland +herself should cast out the man who has embroiled her with Sweden, +than that the country should be the scene of a long and sanguinary +struggle, in which large districts will necessarily be laid waste, +all trade be arrested, and grievous suffering inflicted upon the +people at large.</p> + +<p>"You can say that King Charles has already received promises of +support from a large number of nobles, and is most desirous that +the people of the large towns, and especially of the capital, +should use their influence in his favour. That he has himself no +ambition, and no end to serve save to obtain peace and tranquillity +for his country, and that it will be free for the people of Poland +to elect their own monarch, when once Augustus of Saxony has +disappeared from the scene.</p> + +<p>"In this sealed packet you will find a list of influential +citizens. It has been furnished me by one well acquainted with the +place. The Jews are to be assured that, in case of a friendly +monarch being placed on the throne, Charles will make a treaty with +him, insuring freedom of commerce to the two countries, and will +also use his friendly endeavours to obtain, from the king and Diet, +an enlargement of the privileges that the Jews enjoy. To the +foreign merchants you will hold the same language, somewhat +altered, to suit their condition and wants.</p> + +<p>"You are not asking them to organize any public movement, the +time has not yet come for that; but simply to throw the weight of +their example and influence against the party of the Saxons. Of +course our friends in Warsaw have been doing their best to bring +round public opinion in the capital to this direction, but the +country is so torn by perpetual intrigues, that the trading classes +hold aloof altogether from quarrels in which they have no personal +interest, and are slow to believe that they can be seriously +affected by any changes which will take place.</p> + +<p>"Our envoy will start tomorrow morning. His mission is an open +one. He goes to lay certain complaints, to propose an exchange of +prisoners, and to open negotiations for peace. All these are but +pretences. His real object is to enter into personal communication +with two or three powerful personages, well disposed towards +us.</p> + +<p>"Come again to me this evening, when you have thought the matter +over. I shall then be glad to hear any suggestion you may like to +make."</p> + +<p>"There is one thing, sir, that I should like to ask you. It will +evidently be of great advantage to me, if I can obtain private +letters of introduction to Scotch traders in the city. This I +cannot do, unless by mentioning the fact that I am bound for +Warsaw. Have I your permission to do so, or is it to be kept a +close secret?"</p> + +<p>"No. I see no objection to your naming it to anyone you can +implicitly trust, and who may, as you think, be able to give you +such introductions, but you must impress upon them that the matter +must be kept a secret. Doubtless the Saxons have in their pay +people in our camp, just as we have in theirs, and were word of +your going sent, you would find yourself watched, and perhaps +arrested. We should, of course wish you to be zealous in your +mission, but I would say, do not be over anxious. We are not trying +to get up a revolution in Warsaw, but seeking to ensure that the +feeling in the city should be in our favour; and this, we think, +may be brought about, to some extent, by such assurances as you can +give of the king's friendship, and by such expressions of a belief +in the justice of our cause, and in the advantages there would be +in getting rid of this foreign prince, as might be said openly by +one trader to another, when men meet in their exchanges or upon the +street. So that the ball is once set rolling, it may be trusted to +keep in motion, and there can be little doubt that such expressions +of feeling, among the mercantile community of the capital, will +have some effect even upon nobles who pretend to despise trade, but +who are not unfrequently in debt to traders, and who hold their +views in a certain respect."</p> + +<p>"Thank you, sir. At what time shall I come this evening?"</p> + +<p>"At eight o'clock. By that time, I may have thought out farther +details for your guidance."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: In Warsaw.</h2> + +<p>Upon leaving the quarters of Count Piper, Charlie returned to +the camp, and, after discussing the matter with Major Jervoise, +proceeded with him to the colonel's hut.</p> + +<p>"Well, you look brighter this morning, Carstairs. Are you better +pleased, now you have thought the matter over?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir. What you said last night has been quite confirmed by +Count Piper, and the matter does not really seem so difficult. I am +merely, as a foreigner in the employment of the King of Sweden, to +talk with foreigners in Warsaw, to assure them that the king is +sincere in his desire to avoid war with Poland, and will gladly +make a lasting peace between the two countries, to urge upon them +to show themselves favourable to his project for securing such a +peace, by forcing Augustus to resign the crown, and to use what +influence they can in that direction, both upon their fellow +traders and upon the Poles."</p> + +<p>"There is nothing very difficult about that," Colonel Jamieson +said cheerfully, "as it happens to be quite true; and there can be +no real question as to the true interest of Poland, and especially +of the trading classes in the great towns, from whom heavy +contributions towards the expenses of war are always exacted by +their own rulers, and who have to pay a ruinous ransom in case of +their city being captured by the enemy. The traders of Warsaw will +need no reminder of such well-known facts, and will be only too +glad to be assured that, unless as a last resource, our king has no +intention of making war upon Poland, and they will certainly be +inclined to bestir themselves to avert such a possibility. You +have, I suppose, a list of names of the people with whom you had +best put yourself into communication?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir. Here is a list. There are, I see, ten Scotchmen, +fifteen Frenchmen, and about as many Jews."</p> + +<p>"I know nothing of the Frenchmen, and less of the Jews," the +colonel said, taking the list; "but I ought to know some of the +Scotchmen. They will hail from Dundee and Glasgow, and, it may be, +Dumfries."</p> + +<p>He ran his eye down the list.</p> + +<p>"Aha! Here is one, and we need go no further. Allan Ramsay; we +were lads together at the High School of Glasgow, and were +classmates at the College. His father was a member of the city +council, and was one of the leading traders in the city. Allan was +a wild lad, as I was myself, and many a scrape did we get into +together, and had many a skirmish with the watch. Allan had two or +three half brothers, men from ten to twenty years older than +himself, and, a year or two after I came out to Sweden and entered +the army as an ensign, who should I meet in the streets of +Gottenburg, but Allan Ramsay.</p> + +<p>"We were delighted to see each other, and he stopped with me +nearly a week. He had, after leaving the College, gone into his +father's business, but when the old man died he could not get on +with his half brothers, who were dour men, and had little patience +with Allan's restlessness and love of pleasure. So, after a final +quarrel, they had given him so much money for his share of the +business, and a letter of introduction to a trader in Poland, who +had written to them saying that he wanted a partner with some +capital; and Allan was willing enough to try the life in a strange +country, for he was a shrewd fellow, with all his love of fun.</p> + +<p>"Five years afterwards, he came through Gottenburg again. I did +not see him, for my regiment was at Stockholm at the time, but he +wrote me a letter saying that he had been in Scotland to marry and +bring back one Janet Black, the daughter of a mercer, whom I +remember well enough as an old flame of his.</p> + +<p>"He reported that he was doing well, and that the Poles were not +bad fellows to live among, though less punctual in their payments +than might be wished. He said he did not suppose that, as a Swedish +officer, I should ever be in Poland, unless Sweden produced another +Gustavus Adolphus; but if I was, he would be delighted to welcome +me, and that anyone I asked in Warsaw would direct me to his shop. +I wonder that I did not think of him before; but that is ten years +ago, and it had altogether passed out of my mind, till I saw his +name here. Unless he is greatly changed, you may be sure of a +hearty welcome from Allan Ramsay, for my sake. We need not trouble +about the other names. He will know all about them, and will be +able to put you in the way of getting at them."</p> + +<p>This was a great relief to Charlie, who felt that it would be an +immense advantage to have the house of someone, from whom he might +expect a welcome, to go to on his arrival in Warsaw; and he was +able, during the day, to talk over the prospects of the journey, +with Harry Jervoise, with a real sense of interest and excitement +in his mission.</p> + +<p>In the evening, he again went to the house of the minister. The +latter, a close observer of men, saw at once that the young officer +was in much better spirits than he had been in the morning.</p> + +<p>"Have you obtained information respecting any of the persons +whose names I gave you?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir. It seems that, most fortunately, the trader named +Allan Ramsay is an old friend of Colonel Jamieson, and the colonel +has given me a letter to him which will, he assures me, procure me +a hearty welcome."</p> + +<p>"And have you thought anything more of your best plan of +action?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir. It seems to me that I had better dress myself in an +attire such as might be worn by a young Scotchman, journeying +through the country to place himself with a relation established in +business. I could ride behind the royal envoy, as if I had received +permission to journey under the protection of his escort, and could +drop behind a few miles from the capital, and make my way in alone. +I could not, of course, inquire for Allan Ramsay in Polish, but I +know enough French to ask for him at any shop having a French name +over it, if I did not happen to light upon one kept by a +Scotchman."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that plan will do very well. But you will have no +difficulty in finding the house, as I have arranged that a man +shall accompany you as servant. He is a Lithuanian, and is the +grandson of a soldier of Gustavus Adolphus, who married and settled +there. His grandfather kept up his connection with his native +country, and the young fellow speaks Swedish fairly, and, of +course, Polish. For the last three weeks I have employed him in +various matters, and find him shrewd and, I believe, faithful. Such +a fellow would be of great use to you, and could, if necessary, act +as your interpreter in any interviews you may have with Polish +Jews, although you will find that most of these men speak other +languages besides their own."</p> + +<p>He touched a bell, and on a servant entering, said:</p> + +<p>"Bring Stanislas Bistron here."</p> + +<p>An active, well-built young fellow of some four and twenty years +of age entered the room a minute later. His fair hair and blue eyes +showed that he took after his Swedish ancestors.</p> + +<p>"This is the gentleman, Stanislas, that you are to accompany to +Warsaw, as his servant. You will obey him, in all respects, as if +he had hired you in his service, and, should he arrive at any +situation of danger or difficulty, I trust that you will not be +found wanting."</p> + +<p>The man had looked closely at Charlie.</p> + +<p>"I will do my best, sir, and I doubt not that the gentleman's +service will suit me. He has the look of one who would be kind to +his servants."</p> + +<p>"Wait at the outside door," the count said. "Captain Carstairs +will speak to you as he leaves."</p> + +<p>The man bowed and went out, and the count then said, with a +smile at the look of surprise on Charlie's face:</p> + +<p>"It was not a slip of the tongue. Here is a commission, signed +by his majesty, appointing you to the rank of captain, as he has +long considered that you had well won your promotion, by your +suggestion which enabled him to cross the Dwina without loss; but +he thought there would be a difficulty in placing you over the +heads of so many officers senior to yourself. This inconvenience no +longer exists, now that you have what may be considered a staff +appointment, and the rank may, moreover, add to your weight and +influence in your interviews with persons at Warsaw.</p> + +<p>"You will need money. Here is a purse for your expenses. You may +meet with some of these men, especially among the Jewish traders, +who may need a bribe. Bribery is common, from the highest to the +lowest, in Poland. You will find, in this letter of instructions, +that you are authorized to promise sums of money to men whose +assistance may be valuable. It is impossible to fix the sums. These +must depend upon the position of the men, and the value of their +services; and I can only say do not be lavish, but at the same time +do not hesitate to promise a sum that will secure the services of +useful men. Your best plan will be to find out, if you are able, +what each man expects, and to make what abatement you can. The only +limit placed is that you must not commit the royal treasury to a +total sum exceeding ten thousand crowns. You will, I hope, find a +smaller sum suffice.</p> + +<p>"The envoy will start at six tomorrow morning. I do not know +that there are any further instructions to give you. You will find +details, in these written instructions, as to the manner in which +you are to communicate, from time to time, the result of your +mission, and you will receive orders when to return."</p> + +<p>Outside the house, Charlie saw his new servant waiting him.</p> + +<p>"You have a horse, Stanislas?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir, I have been provided with one. I have also a brace of +pistols, and a sword."</p> + +<p>"I hope you will not have to use them, but in these disturbed +times they are necessaries."</p> + +<p>"I have better clothes than these, sir, if you wish me to look +gay."</p> + +<p>"By no means," Charlie replied. "I am going in the character of +a young Scotchman, on my way to join a relative in business in +Warsaw, and you accompany me in the capacity of guide and servant. +As I should not be in a position to pay high wages, the more humble +your appearance, the better. We start at six in the morning. The +envoy will leave the royal quarters at that hour, and we travel +with his escort. Join me a quarter of an hour before that at my +hut. You had better accompany me there now, so that you may know +the spot. I shall not require your services before we start, as my +soldier servant will saddle my horse, and have all in +readiness."</p> + +<p>Harry came to the door of the hut, as he saw his friend +approaching.</p> + +<p>"Well, Charlie, is all satisfactorily settled?</p> + +<p>"Yes, quite satisfactorily, I think. That is my new servant. +Count Piper has appointed him. He speaks Swedish and Polish."</p> + +<p>"That will be a great comfort to you, Charlie. Jock Armstrong, +who has not picked up ten words of Swedish since he joined, would +have been worse than useless."</p> + +<p>"I have another piece of news, Harry, that I am in one way very +glad of, and in another sorry for. I had always hoped that we +should keep together, and that, just as we joined together, and +were made lieutenants at the same time, it would always be so."</p> + +<p>"You have got another step?" Harry exclaimed. "I am heartily +glad of it. I thought very likely you might get it. Indeed, I was +surprised that you did not get it, at once, after our fight with +the Saxons. I am sure you deserved it, if ever a fellow did, +considering what it saved us all."</p> + +<p>"Of course it is for that," Charlie replied, "though I think it +is very absurd. Count Piper said the king would have given it to me +at once, only it would have taken me over the heads of so many men +older than myself; but he considered that, now I am going on a sort +of staff work, away from the regiment, I could be promoted, and he +thought, too, that the title of Captain would assist me in my +mission."</p> + +<p>"Of course it will," Harry said, warmly. "That is just what I +told you, you know. This business was not quite to your liking, but +it was a good long step towards making your fortune. Don't you +think that I shall be jealous of your going ahead, for I am not in +the least. I am sorry you are going away, for I shall miss you +terribly; but I am quite content to be with the regiment, and to +work my way up gradually. As it is, I am senior lieutenant in the +regiment, and the first battle may give me my company; though I +don't expect it, for I do not think my father would wish the +colonel to give me the step, if it occurred, for all the other +lieutenants are older than we are, though they are junior to us in +the regiment, and I feel sure that he would prefer me to remain for +another two or three years as lieutenant. In fact, he said as much +to me, a short time ago. Still, when I am fit to command a company, +there is no doubt I shall get it.</p> + +<p>"Of course, I am sorry you are going, very sorry, Charlie; but, +even if you go altogether on to the staff, I shall see a good deal +of you, for, as the king is always with the army, this must be your +headquarters still.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how long you will be away. I like the look of the +fellow who is going with you. It was an honest, open sort of face, +as far as I saw it. At any rate, it is a comfort to think that you +won't be absolutely alone, especially among people whose language +you don't know. Mind, if you are sending letters to Count Piper, be +sure you send a few lines, by the same messenger, to let me know +how you are going on. Not long letters, you know; I expect you will +have your hands pretty well full; but just enough to give me an +idea of how you are, and what you are doing."</p> + +<p>The following morning, Charlie started. He had said goodbye to +no one, except the colonel, Major Jervoise, and Harry, as it was +not considered advisable that his departure with the envoy for +Warsaw should be talked about. He only joined the party, indeed, +after they had ridden out of the camp. He had laid aside his +uniform, and was dressed in clothes which Major Jervoise had +procured for him, from one of the last-joined recruits who had but +just received his uniform. The lieutenant commanding the escort of +twenty troopers rode up to him, as he joined the party.</p> + +<p>"Baron Seckers informs me that he has given permission to a +young Scotchman and his servant, travelling to Warsaw, to ride +under his protection. Are you the person in question, sir?"</p> + +<p>"It is all right, Lieutenant Eberstein," Charlie said, with a +smile. "Don't you recognize me?"</p> + +<p>"Of course--Lieutenant Carstairs. I was at the hunt where you +were taken prisoner; but I did not expect to see you in this +garb."</p> + +<p>"I am going on duty," Charlie said, "and am dressed according to +orders. Do not address me by my name. I am at present Sandy +Anderson, going to join a relation in Warsaw."</p> + +<p>"Ah, ah! Is that so? Going to put your head into the den of the +Lion Augustus. Well, I rather envy you, for it is likely, by all +accounts, to be dull work here for some time. It is hard to be +sitting idle, while the Russian guns are thundering round Narva. +Now, I must join the baron again. Where would you rather +ride--after us, or behind the escort?"</p> + +<p>"Behind the escort. I think it will be more natural, and I can +chat more freely with my servant. He is a Lithuanian, but speaks +Swedish, and I hope to get some information from him."</p> + +<p>The lieutenant rode on, and, as he passed the troopers, he told +them that the two men behind had the baron's permission to ride +with them, in order that they might have protection from the bands +of pillagers who were roaming through the country.</p> + +<p>"Now, Stanislas," Charlie said. "We can talk freely together. Do +you know Warsaw?"</p> + +<p>"I have been there several times, sir, but I never stopped there +long. Still, I can find my way about the town."</p> + +<p>"When were you there last?"</p> + +<p>"Some two months ago. It was just before I entered the Swedish +service."</p> + +<p>"And what do the people say about the war?"</p> + +<p>"They are bitterly opposed to it. The king entered upon it +without consulting the diet, which was altogether contrary to the +constitution. It is true that the king may do so, in cases of +emergency, and obtain the sanction of the diet afterwards. There +was no urgency here, and the king made his agreement with the czar +and the king of Denmark without anyone knowing of it. He certainly +obtained a sort of sanction from the diet afterwards, but everyone +knows how these things are worked. He has a strong party, of +course, because it is the interest of a great many people to retain +him in power, as no one can say who would be chosen to succeed him. +But among the people in general, the traders and the peasants, he +is hated, and so are his Saxon soldiers.</p> + +<p>"Suppose he had gained a slice of Swedish territory. It would +not have benefited them; while, as it is, all sorts of misfortunes +and troubles have come upon the country, and none can say how much +greater may ensue.</p> + +<p>"Poland is always split up into parties. They used to unite +against the Turk, and they would unite again against the Swedes, if +their country was invaded; but as long as King Charles keeps his +army beyond the frontier, they are too deeply engaged in their own +quarrels to think of anything else."</p> + +<p>"Then, even if I were known, in the city, to be in the Swedish +service, there would be little danger, Stanislas?"</p> + +<p>"I do not say that, at all," the man said gravely. "In the first +place, Warsaw is held by Saxon soldiers, who would show you but +scant mercy, were you known to be a Swedish officer; and, in the +second place, the lower classes are ever ready to make tumults; +and, if worked upon by the archbishop, or the nobles of the king's +party, they would readily enough tear a stranger to pieces.</p> + +<p>"Going as you do as a Scotchman, there is, I hope, little +danger, especially if you are received into a Scottish +household."</p> + +<p>The journey passed without incident, until they were within a +few miles of Warsaw, when Charlie, after formally thanking Baron +Seckers for the protection his escort had afforded him, fell behind +with his servant. Several parties of armed men had been met with, +but they knew better than to interfere with the little body of +Swedish cavalry; while, in the towns through which they passed, the +baron was respectfully received as the envoy of the dreaded King of +Sweden.</p> + +<p>"Is there another gate to the city, on this side of the town, +beside that by which the Swedes will enter? If so, it would be as +well to use it, so that there should seem to be no connection +between us and them," said Charlie.</p> + +<p>There was another gate, and by this they rode into Warsaw, at +that time a city of far greater importance than it is at present. +The gate was unguarded, and they passed through without question. +The citizens were talking excitedly in groups, evidently discussing +the question of the arrival of the Swedish envoy, and the chances +of peace; and no attention was paid to the travellers, whose +appearance denoted them to be persons of no importance. +Richly-attired nobles, in costumes of almost oriental magnificence, +galloped through the streets on splendid horses, scattering the +groups of citizens, and paying no attention whatever to the angry +murmurs that followed them.</p> + +<p>Charlie stopped at a small inn, and there the horses were put +up. Stanislas made inquiries for the shop of Allan Ramsay, +mentioning that his employer was a relation of the Scottish +merchant, and had come out to be with him, until he had learned the +language.</p> + +<p>"The Scots know their business," the landlord grumbled. "They +and the French and the Jews, together, have their hand in +everyone's pocket. They buy the cattle and grain of the peasants, +for what they choose to give for them, and send them out of the +country, getting all the profits of the transaction; while, as to +the nobles, there is scarce one who is not deep in their +books."</p> + +<p>"Still, you could not do without them," Stanislas said. "There +must be somebody to buy and to sell, and as the nobles won't do it, +and the peasants can't, I don't see that the foreigners are to be +blamed for coming in and taking the trade."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough," the landlord admitted reluctantly. +"Still, there is no doubt the country is kept poor, while, between +them, these men gather up the harvest."</p> + +<p>"Better that than let it rot upon the ground," Stanislas said +unconcernedly; and then, having obtained the name of the street +where several of the Scottish traders had places of business, he +and Charlie started on foot. They were not long in finding the shop +with the sign of the merchant swinging over the door.</p> + +<p>"You had better wait outside, Stanislas, while I go in and see +the master. No; if he is not in the shop, his men will not +understand me, so come in with me till you see that I have met him, +and then go back to the inn for the night. Whether I join you there +will depend upon the warmth of my welcome."</p> + +<p>Two or three young Poles were in the shop. Stanislas asked them +for Allan Ramsay, and they replied that he was taking his evening +meal upstairs, whereupon Charlie produced the letter from Colonel +Jamieson, and Stanislas requested one of them to take it up to the +merchant. Three minutes later the inner door opened, and a tall man +with a ruddy face and blue eyes entered, holding the open letter in +his hand. Charlie took a step forward to meet him.</p> + +<p>"So you are Sandy Anderson," he said heartily, with a merry +twinkle in his eye, "my connection, it seems, and the friend of my +dear classmate Jamieson? Come upstairs. Who is this Scotch-looking +lad with you?"</p> + +<p>"He is my servant and interpreter. His grandfather was a Swede, +and to him he owes his fair hair and complexion. He is a +Lithuanian. He is to be trusted, I hope, thoroughly. He was sent +with me by--"</p> + +<p>"Never mind names," the Scotchman said hastily. "We will talk +about him afterwards. Now come upstairs. Your letter has thrown me +quite into a flutter.</p> + +<p>"Never say anything in English before those Poles," he said, as +he left the shop; "the fellows pick up languages as easily as I can +drink whisky, when I get the chance. One of them has been with me +two years, and it is quite likely he understands, at any rate, +something of what is said.</p> + +<p>"Here we are."</p> + +<p>He opened a door, and ushered Charlie into a large room, +comfortably furnished. His wife, a boy eight years of age, and a +girl a year older, were seated at the table.</p> + +<p>"Janet," the merchant said, "this is Captain Carstairs, alias +Sandy Anderson, a connection of ours, though I cannot say, for +certain, of what degree."</p> + +<p>"What are you talking of, Allan?" she asked in surprise; for her +husband, after opening and partly reading the letter, had jumped up +and run off without saying a word.</p> + +<p>"What I say, wife. This gentleman is, for the present, Sandy +Anderson, who has come out to learn the business and language, with +the intent of some day entering into partnership with me; also, +which is more to the point, he is a friend of my good friend Jock +Jamieson, whom you remember well in the old days."</p> + +<p>"I am very glad, indeed, to see any friend of Jock Jamieson," +Janet Ramsay said warmly, holding out her hand to Charlie, "though +I do not in the least understand what my husband is talking about, +or what your name really is."</p> + +<p>"My name is Carstairs, madam. I am a captain in the Swedish +service, and am here on a mission for King Charles. Colonel +Jamieson, for he is now colonel of the regiment to which I +belong--"</p> + +<p>"What!" the merchant exclaimed. "Do you mean to say that our +Jock Jamieson is a colonel? Well, well, who would have thought he +would have climbed the tree so quickly?"</p> + +<p>"It is a regiment entirely of Scotch and Englishmen," Charlie +said; "and he was promoted, to take its command, only a short time +since."</p> + +<p>"Well, please to sit down and join us," Mrs. Ramsay said. "It is +bad manners, indeed, to keep you talking while the meat is getting +cold on the table. When you have finished, it will be time enough +to question you."</p> + +<p>While the meal was going on, however, many questions were asked +as to Colonel Jamieson, the regiment, and its officers.</p> + +<p>"As soon as matters are more settled," the merchant said, "I +will give myself a holiday, and Janet and I will go and spend a few +days with Jock. Many of the names of the officers are well known to +me, and two or three of the captains were at Glasgow College with +Jock and myself. It will be like old times, to have four or five of +us talking over the wild doings we had together."</p> + +<p>The supper over, the children were sent off to bed. Allan Ramsay +lit a long pipe. A bottle of wine and two glasses were placed on +the table, and Mrs. Ramsay withdrew, to see after domestic matters, +and prepare a room for Charlie.</p> + +<p>"Now, lad, tell me all about it," Allan Ramsay said. "Jock tells +me you are here on a mission, which he would leave it to yourself +to explain; but it is no business of mine, and, if you would rather +keep it to yourself, I will ask no questions."</p> + +<p>"There is no secret about it, as far as you are concerned, Mr. +Ramsay, for it is to you and to other merchants here that I have +come to talk it over;" and he then went fully into the subject.</p> + +<p>The Scotchman sat, smoking his pipe in silence, for some minutes +after he had concluded.</p> + +<p>"We do not much meddle with politics here. We have neither voice +nor part in the making of kings or of laws, and, beyond that we +like to have a peace-loving king, it matters little to us whom the +diet may set up over us. If we were once to put the tips of our +fingers into Polish affairs, we might give up all thought of trade. +They are forever intriguing and plotting, except when they are +fighting; and it would be weary work to keep touch with it all, +much less to take part in it. It is our business to buy and to +sell, and so that both parties come to us, it matters little; one's +money is as good as the other. If I had one set of creditors deeper +in my books than another, I might wish their party to gain the day, +for it would, maybe, set them up in funds, and I might get my +money; but, as it is, it matters little. There is not a customer I +have but is in my debt. Money is always scarce with them; for they +are reckless and extravagant, keeping a horde of idle loons about +them, spending as much money on their own attire and that of their +wives as would keep a whole Scotch clan in victuals. But, if they +cannot pay in money, they can pay in corn or in cattle, in wine or +in hides.</p> + +<p>"I do not know which they are fondest of--plotting, or fighting, +or feasting; and yet, reckless as they are, they are people to +like. If they do sell their votes for money, it is not a Scotchman +that should throw it in their teeth; for there is scarce a Scotch +noble, since the days of Bruce, who has not been ready to sell +himself for English gold. Our own Highlanders are as fond of +fighting as the Poles, and their chiefs are as profuse in +hospitality, and as reckless and spendthrift.</p> + +<p>"But the Poles have their virtues. They love their country, and +are ready to die for her. They are courteous, and even chivalrous, +they are hospitable to an excess, they are good husbands and kindly +masters, they are recklessly brave; and, if they are unduly fond of +finery, I, who supply so many of them, should be the last to find +fault with them on that score. They are proud, and look down upon +us traders, but that does not hurt us; and, if they were to take to +trading themselves, there would be no place for us here. But this +has nothing to do with our present purpose.</p> + +<p>"Certainly, if it was a question of Polish affairs, neither the +foreign nor the Jewish merchants here would move a finger one way +or the other. We have everything to lose, and nothing to gain. +Suppose we took sides with one of the parties, and the other got +the upper hand. Why, they might make ordinances hampering us in +every way, laying heavy taxes on us, forbidding the export of +cattle or horses, and making our lives burdensome. True, if they +drove us out they would soon have to repeal the law, for all trade +would be at an end. But that would be too late for many of us.</p> + +<p>"However, I do not say that, at the present time, many would not +be disposed to do what they could against Augustus of Saxony. We +are accustomed to civil wars; and, though these may cause misery +and ruin, in the districts where they take place, they do not touch +us here in the capital. But this is a different affair. Augustus +has, without reason or provocation, brought down your fiery King of +Sweden upon us; and, if he continues on the throne, we may hear the +Swedish cannon thundering outside our walls, and may have the city +taken and sacked. Therefore, for once, politics become our natural +business.</p> + +<p>"But, though you may find many well wishers, I doubt if you can +obtain any substantial aid. With Saxon troops in the town, and the +nobles divided, there is no hope of a successful rising in +Warsaw."</p> + +<p>"The king did not think of that," Charlie said. "His opinion +was, that were it evident that the citizens of Warsaw were strongly +opposed to Augustus of Saxony, it would have a great moral effect, +and that, perhaps, they might influence some of the nobles who, as +you say, are deeply in their books, or upon whose estates they may +hold mortgages, to join the party against the king."</p> + +<p>"They might do something that way," Allan Ramsay agreed. "Of +course, I have no money out on mortgages. I want badly enough all +the money I can lay hands on in my own business. Giving credit, as +we have to, and often very long credit, it requires a large capital +to carry on trade. But the Jews, who no doubt do hold large +mortgages on the land, cannot exert much power. They cannot hold +land themselves, and, were one of them to venture to sell the +property of any noble of influence, he would be ruined. The whole +class would shrink from him, and, like enough, there would be a +tumult got up, his house would be burned over his head, and he and +his family murdered.</p> + +<p>"Still, as far as popular opinion goes, something might be done. +At any rate, I will get some of my friends here tomorrow, and +introduce you to them and talk it over. But we must be careful, for +Augustus has a strong party here, and, were it suspected that you +are a Swedish officer, it would go very hard with you.</p> + +<p>"Tomorrow you must fetch your servant here. I have already sent +round to the inn, and you will find your valises in your room. You +said you could rely thoroughly upon him?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, he was handed over to me by Count Piper himself; and +moreover, from what I have seen of him, I am myself confident that +he can be trusted. He is of Swedish descent, and is, I think, a +very honest fellow."</p> + +<p>For a fortnight, Charlie remained at Allan Ramsay's, and then, +in spite of the pressing entreaties of his host and hostess, took a +lodging near them. He had, by this time, seen a good many of the +leading traders of the town. The Scotch and Frenchmen had all +heartily agreed with his argument, that it was for the benefit of +Poland, and especially for that of Warsaw, that Augustus of Saxony +should be replaced by another king, who would be acceptable to +Charles of Sweden; but all were of opinion that but little could be +done, by them, towards bringing about this result.</p> + +<p>With the Jewish traders his success was less decided. They +admitted that it would be a great misfortune, were Warsaw taken by +the Swedes, but, as Poles, they retained their confidence in the +national army, and were altogether sceptical that a few thousand +Swedes could withstand the host that could be put in the field +against them.</p> + +<p>Several of them pointedly asked what interest they had in the +matter, and, to some of these, Charlie was obliged to use his power +of promising sums of money, in case of success.</p> + +<p>There were one or two, however, of whom he felt doubtful. Chief +among these was Ben Soloman Muller, a man of great influence in the +Jewish community. This man had placed so large a value upon his +services, that Charlie did not feel justified in promising him such +a sum. He did not like the man's face, and did not rely upon the +promises of silence he had given, before the mission was revealed +to him. It was for this reason, principally, that he determined to +go into lodgings. Should he be denounced, serious trouble might +fall upon Allan Ramsay, and it would at least minimize this risk, +were he not living at his house when he was arrested. Ramsay +himself was disposed to make light of the danger.</p> + +<p>"I believe myself that Ben Soloman is an old rogue, but he is +not a fool. He cannot help seeing that the position of the king is +precarious, and, were he to cause your arrest, he might get little +thanks and no profit, while he would be incurring the risk of the +vengeance of Charles, should he ever become master of the town. Did +he have you arrested, he himself would be forced to appear as a +witness against you, and this he could hardly do without the matter +becoming publicly known.</p> + +<p>"I do not say, however, that, if he could curry favour with the +king's party by doing you harm, without appearing in the matter, he +would hesitate for a moment.</p> + +<p>"Even if you were arrested here, I doubt whether any great harm +would befall me, for all the Scotch merchants would make common +cause with me, and, although we have no political power, we have a +good deal of influence one way or another, and Augustus, at this +time, would not care to make fresh enemies. However, lad, I will +not further dispute your decision. Were I quite alone, I would not +let you leave me, so long as you stop in this city, without taking +great offence; but, with a wife and two children, a man is more +timid than if he had but himself to think of."</p> + +<p>Charlie therefore moved into the lodging, but every day he went +for three or four hours to the shop, where he kept up his assumed +character by aiding to keep the ledgers, and in learning from the +Polish assistants the value of the various goods in the shop.</p> + +<p>One evening, he was returning after supper to his lodging, when +Stanislas met him.</p> + +<p>"I observed three or four evil-looking rascals casting glances +at the house today, and there are several rough-looking fellows +hanging about the house this evening. I do not know if it means +anything, but I thought I would let you know."</p> + +<p>"I think it must be only your fancy, Stanislas. I might be +arrested by the troops, were I denounced, but I apprehend no danger +from men of the class you speak of. However, if we should be +interfered with, I fancy we could deal with several rascals of that +sort."</p> + +<p>At the corner of his street, three or four men were standing. +One of them moved, as he passed, and pushed rudely against him, +sending his hat into the gutter. Then, as his face was exposed, the +fellow exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"It is he, death to the Swedish spy!"</p> + +<p>They were the last words he uttered. Charlie's sword flew from +its scabbard, and, with a rapid pass, he ran the man through the +body. The others drew instantly, and fell upon Charlie with fury, +keeping up the shout of, "Death to the Swedish spy!" It was +evidently a signal--for men darted out of doorways, and came +running down the street, repeating the cry.</p> + +<p>"Go, Stanislas!" Charlie shouted, as he defended himself against +a dozen assailants. "Tell Ramsay what has happened; you can do no +good here."</p> + +<p>A moment later, he received a tremendous blow on the back of the +head, from an iron-bound cudgel, and fell senseless to the ground.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: In Evil Plight.</h2> + +<p>When Charlie recovered his senses, he found himself lying bound +in a room lighted by a dim lamp, which sufficed only to show that +the beams were blackened by smoke and age, and the walls +constructed of rough stone work. There was, so far as he could see, +no furniture whatever in it, and he imagined that it was an +underground cellar, used perhaps, at some time or other, as a +storeroom. It was some time before his brain was clear enough to +understand what had happened, or how he had got into his present +position. Gradually the facts came back to him, and he was able to +think coherently, in spite of a splitting headache, and a dull, +throbbing pain at the back of his head.</p> + +<p>"I was knocked down and stunned," he said to himself, at last. +"I wonder what became of Stanislas. I hope he got away.</p> + +<p>"This does not look like a prison. I should say that it was a +cellar, in the house of one of the gang that set upon me. It is +evident that someone has betrayed me, probably that Jew, Ben +Soloman. What have they brought me here for? I wonder what are they +going to do with me."</p> + +<p>His head, however, hurt him too much for him to continue the +strain of thought, and, after a while, he dozed off to sleep. When +he awoke, a faint light was streaming in through a slit, two or +three inches wide, high up on the wall. He still felt faint and +dizzy, from the effects of the blow. Parched with thirst, he tried +to call out for water, but scarce a sound came from his lips.</p> + +<p>Gradually, the room seemed to darken and become indistinct, and +he again lapsed into insensibility. When he again became conscious, +someone was pouring water between his lips, and he heard a voice +speaking loudly and angrily. He had picked up a few words of Polish +from Stanislas--the names of common things, the words to use in +case he lost his way, how to ask for food and for stabling for a +horse, but he was unable to understand what was said. He judged, +however, that someone was furiously upbraiding the man who was +giving him water, for the latter now and then muttered excuses.</p> + +<p>"He is blowing the fellow up, for having so nearly let me slip +through their fingers," he said to himself. "Probably they want to +question me, and find out who I have been in communication with. +They shall get nothing, at present, anyhow."</p> + +<p>He kept his eyes resolutely closed. Presently, he heard a door +open, and another man come in. A few words were exchanged, and, +this time, wine instead of water was poured down his throat. Then +he was partly lifted up, and felt a cooling sensation at the back +of his head. Some bandages were passed round it, and he was laid +down again. There was some more conversation, then a door opened +and two of the men went out; the third walked back to him, +muttering angrily to himself.</p> + +<p>Charlie felt sure that he had been moved from the place in which +he had been the evening before. His bonds had been loosed, and he +was lying on straw, and not on the bare ground. Opening his eyelids +the slightest possible degree, he was confirmed in his belief, by +seeing that there was much more light than could have entered the +cellar. He dared not look farther, and, in a short time, fell into +a far more refreshing sleep than that he before had.</p> + +<p>The next time he woke his brain was clearer, though there was +still a dull sense of pain where he had been struck. Without +opening his eyes, he listened attentively. There was some sound of +movement in the room, and, presently, he heard a faint regular +breathing. This continued for some time, and he then heard a sort +of grunt.</p> + +<p>"He is asleep," he said to himself, and, opening his eyes +slightly looked round. He was in another chamber. It was grimy with +dirt, and almost as unfurnished as the cellar, but there was a +window through which the sun was streaming brightly. He, himself, +lay upon a heap of straw. At the opposite side of the room was a +similar heap, and upon this a man was sitting, leaning against the +wall, with his chin dropped on his chest.</p> + +<p>The thought of escape at once occurred to Charlie. Could he +reach the window, which was without glass and a mere opening in the +wall, without awakening his guard, he could drop out and make for +Allan Ramsay's. As soon as he tried to move, however, he found that +this idea was for the present impracticable. He felt too weak to +lift his head, and, at the slight rustle of straw caused by the +attempt, the man opposite roused himself with a start.</p> + +<p>He gave another slight movement, and then again lay quiet with +his eyes closed. The man came across and spoke, but he made no +sign. Some more wine was poured between his lips, then the man +returned to his former position, and all was quiet.</p> + +<p>As he lay thinking his position over, Charlie thought that those +who had set his assailants to their work must have had two +objects--the one to put a stop to his efforts to organize an +agitation against the king, the second to find out, by questioning +him, who were those with whom he had been in communication, in +order that they might be arrested, and their property confiscated. +He could see no other reason why his life should be spared by his +assailants, for it would have been easier, and far less +troublesome, to run him through as he lay senseless on the ground, +than to carry him off and keep him a prisoner.</p> + +<p>This idea confirmed the suspicion he had first entertained, that +the assault had been organized by Ben Soloman. He could have no +real interest in the king, for he was ready to join in the +organization against him, could he have obtained his own terms. He +might intend to gain credit with the royal party, by claiming to +have stopped a dangerous plot, and at the same time to benefit +himself, by bringing about the expulsion or death of many of his +foreign trade rivals. For this end, the Jew would desire that he +should be taken alive, in order to serve as a witness against the +others.</p> + +<p>"He will not get any names from me," he said. "Besides, none of +them have promised to take any active measures against Augustus. I +did not ask them to do so. There is no high treason in trying to +influence public opinion. Still, it is likely enough that the Jew +wants to get me to acknowledge that an insurrection was intended, +and will offer me my freedom, if I will give such testimony. As I +am altogether in his power, the only thing to do is to pretend to +be a great deal worse than I am, and so to gain time, till I am +strong enough to try to get away from this place."</p> + +<p>All this was not arrived at, at once, but was the result of +half-dreamy cogitation extending over hours, and interrupted by +short snatches of sleep. He was conscious that, from time to time, +someone came into the room and spoke to his guard; and that, three +or four times, wine was poured between his lips. Once he was raised +up, and fresh cloths, dipped in water, and bandages applied to his +head.</p> + +<p>In the evening, two or three men came in, and he believed that +he recognized the voice of one of them as that of Ben Soloman. One +of the men addressed him suddenly and sharply in Swedish.</p> + +<p>"How are you feeling? Are you in pain? We have come here to give +you your freedom."</p> + +<p>Charlie was on his guard, and remained silent, with his eyes +closed.</p> + +<p>"It is of no use," Ben Soloman said in his own language. "The +fellow is still insensible. The clumsy fool who hit him would fare +badly, if I knew who he was. I said that he was to be knocked down, +silenced, and brought here; and here he is, of no more use than if +he were dead."</p> + +<p>"He will doubtless come round, in time," another said in an +apologetic tone. "We will bring him round, if you will have +patience, Ben Soloman."</p> + +<p>"Well, well," the other replied, "a few days will make no +difference; but mind that he is well guarded, directly he begins to +gain strength. I will get him out of the town, as soon as I can. +Allan Ramsay has laid a complaint, before the mayor, that his +countryman has been attacked by a band of ruffians, and has been +either killed or carried off by them. It is a pity that servant of +his was not killed."</p> + +<p>"We thought he was dead. Two or three of us looked at him, and I +could have sworn that life was out of him."</p> + +<p>"Well, then, you would have sworn what was not true, for he +managed to crawl to Ramsay's, where he lies, I am told, dangerously +ill, and an official has been to him, to obtain his account of the +fray. It was a bungled business, from beginning to end."</p> + +<p>"We could not have calculated on the fellows making such a +resistance," the other grumbled. "This one seemed but a lad, and +yet he killed three of our party, and the other killed one. A nice +business that; and you will have to pay their friends well, Ben +Soloman, for I can tell you there is grumbling at the price, which +they say was not enough for the work, which you told them would be +easy."</p> + +<p>"It ought to have been," the Jew said sullenly. "Fifteen or +twenty men to overpower a lad. What could have been more easy? +However, I will do something for the friends of the men who were +fools enough to get themselves killed, but if I hear any grumbling +from the others, it will be worse for them; there is not one I +could not lay by the heels in jail.</p> + +<p>"Well, as to this young fellow, I shall not come again. I do not +want to be noticed coming here. Keep a shrewd lookout after +him."</p> + +<p>"There is no fear about that," the man said. "It will be long +ere he is strong enough to walk."</p> + +<p>"When he gets better, we will have him taken away to a safe +place outside the town. Once there, I can make him say what I +like."</p> + +<p>"And if he does not get well?"</p> + +<p>"In that case, we will take away his body and bury it outside. I +will see to that myself."</p> + +<p>"I understand," the other sneered. "You don't want anyone to +know where it is buried, so as to be able to bring it up against +you."</p> + +<p>"You attend to your own business," the Jew said angrily. "Why +should I care about what they say? At any rate, there are some +matters between you and me, and there is no fear of your +speaking."</p> + +<p>"Not until the time comes when I may think it worth my while to +throw away my life, in order to secure your death, Ben +Soloman."</p> + +<p>"It is of no use talking like that," the Jew said quietly. "We +are useful to each other. I have saved your life from the gibbet, +you have done the work I required. Between us, it is worse than +childish to threaten in the present matter. I do not doubt that you +will do your business well, and you know that you will be well paid +for it; what can either of us require more?"</p> + +<p>Charlie would have given a good deal to understand the +conversation, and he would have been specially glad to learn that +Stanislas had escaped with his life; for he had taken a great fancy +to the young Lithuanian, and was grieved by the thought that he had +probably lost his life in his defence.</p> + +<p>Three days passed. His head was now clear, and his appetite +returning, and he found, by quietly moving at night, when his guard +was asleep, that he was gaining strength. The third day, there was +some talking among several men who entered the room; then he was +lifted, wrapt up in some cloths, and put into a large box. He felt +this being hoisted up, it was carried downstairs, and then placed +on something. A minute afterwards he felt a vibration, followed by +a swaying and bumping, and guessed at once that he was on a cart, +and was being removed, either to prison or to some other place of +confinement. The latter he considered more probable.</p> + +<p>The journey was a long one. He had no means of judging time, but +he thought that it must have lasted two or three hours. Then the +rumbling ceased, the box was lifted down, and carried a short +distance, then the lid was opened and he was again laid down on +some straw. He heard the sound of cart wheels, and knew that the +vehicle on which he had been brought was being driven away.</p> + +<p>He was now so hungry that he felt he could no longer maintain +the appearance of insensibility. Two men were talking in the room, +and when, for a moment, their conversation ceased, he gave a low +groan, and then opened his eyes. They came at once to his bedside, +with exclamations of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>"How do you feel?" one asked in Swedish.</p> + +<p>"I do not know," he said in a low tone. "Where am I, how did I +get here?"</p> + +<p>"You are with friends. Never mind how you got here. You have +been ill, but you will soon get well again. Someone hit you on the +head, and we picked you up and brought you here."</p> + +<p>"I am weak and faint," Charlie murmured. "Have you any +food?"</p> + +<p>"You shall have some food, directly it is prepared. Take a drink +of wine, and see if you can eat a bit of bread while the broth is +preparing."</p> + +<p>Charlie drank a little of the wine that was put to his lips, and +then broke up the bread, and ate it crumb by crumb, as if it were a +great effort to do so, although he had difficulty in restraining +himself from eating it voraciously. When he had finished it, he +closed his eyes again, as if sleep had overpowered him. An hour +later, there was a touch on his shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Here is some broth, young fellow. Wake up and drink that, it +will do you good."</p> + +<p>Charlie, as before, slowly sipped down the broth, and then +really fell asleep, for the jolting had fatigued him terribly.</p> + +<p>It was evening when he awoke. Two men were sitting at a blazing +fire. When he moved, one of them brought him another basin of +broth, and fed him with a spoon.</p> + +<p>Charlie had been long enough in the country to know, by the +appearance of the room, that he was in a peasant's hut. He wondered +why he had been brought there, and concluded that it must be +because Allan Ramsay had set so stringent a search on foot in the +city, that they considered it necessary to take him away.</p> + +<p>"They will not keep me here long," he said to himself. "I am +sure that I could walk now, and, in another two or three days, I +shall be strong enough to go some distance. That soup has done me a +deal of good. I believe half my weakness is from hunger."</p> + +<p>He no longer kept up the appearance of unconsciousness, and, in +the morning, put various questions, to the man who spoke Swedish, +as to what had happened and how he came to be there. This man was +evidently, from his dress and appearance, a Jew, while the other +was as unmistakably a peasant, a rough powerfully-built man with an +evil face. The Jew gave him but little information, but told him +that in a day or two, when he was strong enough to listen, a friend +would come who would tell him all about it.</p> + +<p>On the third day, he heard the sound of an approaching horse, +and was not surprised when, after a conversation in a low tone +outside, Ben Soloman entered. Charlie was now much stronger, but he +had carefully abstained from showing any marked improvement, +speaking always in a voice a little above a whisper, and allowing +the men to feed him, after making one or two pretended attempts to +convey the spoon to his mouth.</p> + +<p>"Well, Master Englishman," Ben Soloman said, as he came up to +his bedside, "what do you think of things?"</p> + +<p>"I do not know what to think," Charlie said feebly. "I do not +know where I am, or why I am here. I remember that there was a fray +in the street, and I suppose I was hurt. But why was I brought +here, instead of being taken to my lodgings?"</p> + +<p>"Because you would be no use to me in your lodging, and you may +be a great deal of use to me here," Ben Soloman said. "You know you +endeavoured to entrap me into a plot against the king's life."</p> + +<p>Charlie shook his head, and looked wonderingly at the +speaker.</p> + +<p>"No, no," he said, "there was no plot against the king's life. I +only asked if you would use your influence among your friends to +turn popular feeling against Augustus."</p> + +<p>"Nothing of the kind," the Jew said harshly. "You wanted him +removed by poison or the knife. There is no mistake about that, and +that is what I am going to swear, and what, if you want to save +your life, you will have to swear too; and you will have to give +the names of all concerned in the plot, and to swear that they were +all agreed to bring about the death of the king. Now you understand +why you were brought here. You are miles away from another house, +and you may shout and scream as loud as you like. You are in my +power."</p> + +<p>"I would die rather than make a false accusation."</p> + +<p>"Listen to me," the Jew said sternly. "You are weak now, too +weak to suffer much. This day week I will return, and then you had +best change your mind, and sign a document I shall bring with me, +with the full particulars of the plot to murder the king, and the +names of those concerned in it. This you will sign. I shall take it +to the proper authorities, and obtain a promise that your life +shall be spared, on condition of your giving evidence against these +persons."</p> + +<p>"I would never sign such a villainous document," Charlie +said.</p> + +<p>"You will sign it," Ben Soloman said calmly. "When you find +yourself roasting over a slow charcoal fire, you will be ready to +sign anything I wish you to."</p> + +<p>So saying, he turned and left the room. He talked for some time +to the men outside, then Charlie heard him ride off.</p> + +<p>"You villain," he said to himself. "When you come, at the end of +a week, you will not find me here; but, if I get a chance of having +a reckoning with you, it will be bad for you."</p> + +<p>Charlie's progress was apparently slow. The next day he was able +to sit up and feed himself. Two days later he could totter across +the room, and lie down before the fire. The men were completely +deceived by his acting, and, considering any attempt to escape, in +his present weak state, altogether impossible, paid but little heed +to him, the peasant frequently absenting himself for hours +together.</p> + +<p>Looking from his window, Charlie saw that the hut was situated +in a thick wood, and, from the blackened appearance of the +peasant's face and garments, he guessed him to be a charcoal +burner, and therefore judged that the trees he saw must form part +of a forest of considerable extent.</p> + +<p>The weather was warm, and his other guard often sat, for a +while, outside the door. During his absence, Charlie lifted the +logs of wood piled beside the hearth, and was able to test his +returning strength, assuring himself that, although not yet fully +recovered, he was gaining ground daily. He resolved not to wait +until the seventh day; for Ben Soloman might change his mind, and +return before the day he had named. He determined, therefore, that +on the sixth day he would make the attempt.</p> + +<p>He had no fear of being unable to overcome his Jewish guard, as +he would have the advantage of a surprise. He only delayed as long +as possible, because he doubted his powers of walking any great +distance, and of evading the charcoal burner, who would, on his +return, certainly set out in pursuit of him. Moreover, he wished to +remain in the hut nearly up to the time of the Jew's return, as he +was determined to wait in the forest, and revenge himself for the +suffering he had caused him, and for the torture to which he +intended to put him.</p> + +<p>The evening before the day on which he decided to make the +attempt, the charcoal burner and the Jew were in earnest +conversation. The word signifying brigand was frequently repeated, +and, although he could not understand much more than this, he +concluded, from the peasant's talk and gestures, that he had either +come across some of these men in the forest, or had gathered from +signs he had observed, perhaps from their fires, that they were +there.</p> + +<p>The Jew shrugged his shoulders when the narration was finished. +The presence of brigands was a matter of indifference to him. The +next day, the charcoal burner went off at noon.</p> + +<p>"Where does he go to?" Charlie asked his guard.</p> + +<p>"He has got some charcoal fires alight, and is obliged to go and +see to them. They have to be kept covered up with wet leaves and +earth, so that the wood shall only smoulder," the man said, as he +lounged out of the hut to his usual seat.</p> + +<p>Charlie waited a short time, then went to the pile of logs, and +picked out a straight stick about a yard long and two inches in +diameter. With one of the heavier ones he could have killed the +man, but the fellow was only acting under the orders of his +employer, and, although he would doubtless, at Ben Soloman's +commands, have roasted him alive without compunction, he had not +behaved with any unkindness, and had, indeed, seemed to do his best +for him.</p> + +<p>Taking the stick, he went to the door. He trod lightly, but in +the stillness of the forest the man heard him, and glanced round as +he came out.</p> + +<p>Seeing the stick in his hand he leaped up, exclaiming, "You +young fool!" and sprang towards him.</p> + +<p>He had scarce time to feel surprise, as Charlie quickly raised +the club. It described a swift sweep, fell full on his head, and he +dropped to the ground as if shot.</p> + +<p>Charlie ran in again, seized a coil of rope, bound his hands and +feet securely, and dragged him into the hut. Then he dashed some +cold water on his face. The man opened his eyes, and tried to +move.</p> + +<p>"You are too tightly bound to move, Pauloff," he said. "I could +have killed you if I had chosen, but I did not wish to. You have +not been unkind to me, and I owe you no grudge; but tell your +rascally employer that I will be even with him, someday, for the +evil he has done me."</p> + +<p>"You might as well have killed me," the man said, "for he will +do so when he finds I let you escape."</p> + +<p>"Then my advice to you is, be beforehand with him. You are as +strong a man as he is, and if I were in your place, and a man who +meant to kill me came into a lonely hut like this, I would take +precious good care that he had no chance of carrying out his +intentions."</p> + +<p>Charlie then took two loaves of black bread and a portion of +goat's flesh from the cupboard; found a bottle about a quarter full +of coarse spirits, filled it up with water and put it in his +pocket, and then, after taking possession of the long knife his +captive wore in his belt, went out of the hut and closed the door +behind him.</p> + +<p>He had purposely moved slowly about the hut, as he made these +preparations, in order that the Jew should believe that he was +still weak; but, indeed, the effort of dragging the man into the +hut had severely taxed his strength, and he found that he was much +weaker than he had supposed.</p> + +<p>The hut stood in a very small clearing, and Charlie had no +difficulty in seeing the track by which the cart had come, for the +marks of the wheels were still visible in the soft soil. He +followed this until, after about two miles' walking, he came to the +edge of the wood. Then he retraced his steps for a quarter of a +mile, turned off, and with some difficulty made his way into a +patch of thick undergrowth, where, after first cutting a formidable +cudgel, he lay down, completely exhausted.</p> + +<p>Late in the afternoon he was aroused from a doze by the sound of +footsteps, and, looking through the screen of leaves, he saw his +late jailers hurrying along the path. The charcoal burner carried a +heavy axe, while the Jew, whose head was bound up with a cloth, had +a long knife in his girdle. They went as far as the end of the +forest, and then retraced their steps slowly. They were talking +loudly, and Charlie could gather, from the few words he understood, +and by their gestures, something of the purport of their +conversation.</p> + +<p>"I told you it was of no use your coming on as far as this," the +Jew said. "Why, he was hardly strong enough to walk."</p> + +<p>"He managed to knock you down, and afterwards to drag you into +the house," the other said.</p> + +<p>"It does not require much strength to knock a man down with a +heavy club, when he is not expecting it, Conrad. He certainly did +drag me in, but he was obliged to sit down afterwards, and I +watched him out of one eye as he was making his preparations, and +he could only just totter about. I would wager you anything he +cannot have gone two hundred yards from the house. That is where we +must search for him. I warrant we shall find him hidden in a +thicket thereabouts."</p> + +<p>"We shall have to take a lantern then, for it will be dark +before we get back."</p> + +<p>"Our best plan will be to leave it alone till morning. If we sit +outside the hut, and take it in turns to watch, we shall hear him +when he moves, which he is sure to do when it gets dark. It will be +a still night, and we should hear a stick break half a mile away. +We shall catch him, safe enough, before he has gone far."</p> + +<p>"Well, I hope we shall have him back before Ben Soloman comes," +the charcoal burner said, "or it will be worse for both of us. You +know as well as I do he has got my neck in a noose, and he has got +his thumb on you."</p> + +<p>"If we can't find this Swede, I would not wait here for any +money. I would fly at once."</p> + +<p>"You would need to fly, in truth, to get beyond Ben Soloman's +clutches," the charcoal burner said gruffly. "He has got agents all +over the country."</p> + +<p>"Then what would you do?"</p> + +<p>"There is only one thing to do. It is our lives or his. When he +rides up tomorrow, we will meet him at the door as if nothing had +happened, and, with my axe, I will cleave his head asunder as he +comes in. If he sees me in time to retreat, you shall stab him in +the back. Then we will dig a big hole in the wood, and throw him +in, and we will kill his horse and bury it with him.</p> + +<p>"Who would ever be the wiser? I was going to propose it last +time, only I was not sure of you then; but, now that you are in it +as deep as I am--deeper, indeed, for he put you here specially to +look after this youngster--your interest in the matter is as great +as mine."</p> + +<p>The Jew was silent for some time, then he said:</p> + +<p>"He has got papers at home which would bring me to the +gallows."</p> + +<p>"Pooh!" the other said. "You do not suppose that, when it is +found that he does not return, and his heirs open his coffers, they +will take any trouble about what there may be in the papers there, +except such as relate to his money. I will warrant there are papers +there which concern scores of men besides you, for I know that Ben +Soloman likes to work with agents he has got under his thumb. But, +even if all the papers should be put into the hands of the +authorities, what would come of it? They have got their hands full +of other matters, for the present, and with the Swedes on their +frontier, and the whole country divided into factions, who do you +think is going to trouble to hunt up men for affairs that occurred +years ago? Even if they did, they would not catch you. They have +not got the means of running you down that Ben Soloman has.</p> + +<p>"I tell you, man, it must be done. There is no other way out of +it."</p> + +<p>"Well, Conrad, if we cannot find this fellow before Ben Soloman +comes, I am with you in the business. I have been working for him +on starvation pay for the last three years, and hate him as much as +you can."</p> + +<p>When they reached the hut they cooked a meal, and then prepared +to keep alternate watch.</p> + +<p>Charlie slept quietly all night, and, in the morning, remained +in his hiding place until he heard, in the distance, the sound of a +horse's tread. Then he went out and sat down, leaning against a +tree by the side of the path, in an attitude of exhaustion.</p> + +<p>Presently he saw Ben Soloman approaching. He got up feebly, and +staggered a few paces to another tree, farther from the path. He +heard an angry shout, and then Ben Soloman rode up, and, with a +torrent of execrations at the carelessness of the watchers, leapt +from his horse and sprang to seize the fugitive, whom he regarded +as incapable of offering the slightest resistance.</p> + +<p>Charlie straightened himself up, as if with an effort, and +raised his cudgel.</p> + +<p>"I will not be taken alive," he said.</p> + +<p>Ben Soloman drew his long knife from his girdle. "Drop that +stick," he said, "or it will be worse for you."</p> + +<p>"It cannot be worse than being tortured to death, as you +said."</p> + +<p>The Jew, with an angry snarl, sprang forward so suddenly and +unexpectedly that he was within the swing of Charlie's cudgel +before the latter could strike. He dropped the weapon at once, and +caught the wrist of the uplifted hand that held the knife.</p> + +<p>The Jew gave a cry of astonishment and rage, as they clasped +each other, and he found that, instead of an unresisting victim, he +was in a powerful grasp. For a moment there was a desperate +struggle.</p> + +<p>The Jew would, at ordinary times, have been no match for +Charlie, but the latter was far from having regained his normal +strength. His fury at the treatment he had received at the man's +hands, however, enabled him, for the moment, to exert himself to +the utmost, and, after swaying backwards and forwards in desperate +strife for a minute, they went to the ground with a crash, Ben +Soloman being undermost.</p> + +<p>The Jew's grasp instantly relaxed, and Charlie, springing to his +feet and seizing his cudgel, stood over his fallen antagonist. The +latter, however, did not move. His eyes were open in a fixed stare. +Charlie looked at him in surprise for a moment, thinking he was +stunned, then he saw that his right arm was twisted under him in +the fall, and at once understanding what had happened, turned him +half over. He had fallen on the knife, which had penetrated to the +haft, killing him instantly.</p> + +<p>"I didn't mean to kill you," Charlie said aloud, "much as you +deserve it, and surely as you would have killed me, if I had +refused to act as a traitor. I would have broken your head for you, +but that was all. However, it is as well as it is. It adds to my +chance of getting away, and I have no doubt there will be many who +will rejoice when you are found to be missing.</p> + +<p>"Now," he went on, "as your agents emptied my pockets, it is no +robbery to empty yours. Money will be useful, and so will your +horse."</p> + +<p>He stooped over the dead man, and took the purse from his +girdle, when suddenly there was a rush of feet, and in a moment he +was seized. The thought flashed through his mind that he had fallen +into the power of his late guardians, but a glance showed that the +men standing round were strangers.</p> + +<p>"Well, comrade, and who are you?" the man who was evidently the +leader asked. "You have saved us some trouble. We were sleeping a +hundred yards or two away, when we heard the horseman, and saw, as +he passed, he was the Jew of Warsaw, to whom two or three of us owe +our ruin, and it did not need more than a word for us to agree to +wait for him till he came back. We were surprised when we saw you, +still more so when the Jew jumped from his horse and attacked you. +We did not interfere, because, if he had got the best of you, he +might have jumped on his horse and ridden off, but directly he fell +we ran out, but you were so busy in taking the spoil that you did +not hear us.</p> + +<p>"I see the Jew is dead; fell on his own knife. It is just as +well for him, for we should have tied him to a tree, and made a +bonfire of him, if we had caught him."</p> + +<p>Charlie understood but little of this, but said when the other +finished:</p> + +<p>"I understand but little Polish."</p> + +<p>"What are you then--a Russian? You do not look like one."</p> + +<p>"I am an Englishman, and am working in the house of Allan +Ramsay, a Scotch trader in Warsaw."</p> + +<p>"Well, you are a bold fellow anyhow, and after the smart way in +which you disposed of this Jew, and possessed yourself of his +purse, you will do honour to our trade."</p> + +<p>"I hope you will let me go," Charlie said. "My friends in Warsaw +will pay a ransom for me, if you will let me return there."</p> + +<p>"No, no, young fellow. You would of course put down this Jew's +death to our doing, and we have weight enough on our backs already. +He is a man of great influence, and all his tribe would be pressing +on the government to hunt us down. You shall go with us, and the +purse you took from Ben Soloman will pay your footing."</p> + +<p>Charlie saw that it would be useless to try and alter the man's +decision, especially as he knew so little of the language. He +therefore shrugged his shoulders, and said that he was ready to go +with them, if it must be so.</p> + +<p>The Jew's body was now thoroughly searched. Various papers were +found upon him, but, as these proved useless to the brigands, they +were torn up.</p> + +<p>"Shall we take the horse with us?" one of the men asked the +leader.</p> + +<p>"No, it would be worse than useless in the forest. Leave it +standing here. It will find its way back in time. Then there will +be a search, and there will be rejoicing in many a mansion +throughout the country, when it is known that Ben Soloman is dead. +They say he has mortgages on a score of estates, and, though I +suppose these will pass to others of his tribe, they can hardly be +as hard and mercenary as this man was.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what he was doing in this forest alone? Let us follow +the path, and see where he is going.</p> + +<p>"Honred, you have a smattering of several languages, try then if +you can make our new comrade understand."</p> + +<p>The man tried in Russian without success, then he spoke in +Swedish, in which language Charlie at once replied.</p> + +<p>"Where does this pathway lead to?"</p> + +<p>"To a hut where a charcoal burner lives. I have been imprisoned +there for the last fortnight. It was all the Jew's doing. It was +through him that I got this knock here;" and he pointed to the +unhealed wound at the back of his head.</p> + +<p>"Well, we may as well pay them a visit," the chief said, when +this was translated to him. "We are short of flour, and they may +have some there, and maybe something else that will be useful."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: With Brigands.</h2> + +<p>The man who had spoken to Charlie drew the long knife from the +back of the Jew, wiped it on the grass, and handed it to him.</p> + +<p>"That ought to be your property," he said. "It has done you good +service."</p> + +<p>Not sorry to have a weapon in addition to his cudgel, Charlie +placed it in his belt, and then started with the bandits. He would +not have cared to face the charcoal burner alone; but now that the +band regarded him as enrolled among their number, he felt no +uneasiness respecting him.</p> + +<p>When they issued from the trees, the Jew was seen standing at +the door of the hut. He at once ran in on seeing them, and came out +again, accompanied by the charcoal burner, who carried his axe on +his shoulder. The Jew started, on catching sight of Charlie among +the ranks of the brigands, and said a word or two to his +companion.</p> + +<p>"Well, Master Charcoal Burner," the leader of the party said, +"how is it that honest woodmen consort with rogues of the +town?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know that they do so, willingly," the man said gruffly. +"But some of us, to our cost, have put our heads into nooses, and +the rogues of the town have got hold of the other end of the ropes, +and we must just walk as we are told to."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is true enough," the brigand said.</p> + +<p>"And you, Jew, what are you doing here?"</p> + +<p>"I am like Conrad," he replied, sulkily. "It is not only +countrymen who have their necks in a noose, and I have to do what I +am ordered."</p> + +<p>"By a bigger rogue than yourself?"</p> + +<p>"That is so; bigger and cleverer."</p> + +<p>"You are expecting him here now, our new comrade tells us. Well, +you need expect him no longer. He will not come. If you will go +along the path, you will come upon his body, and may bury him if +you like to take the trouble."</p> + +<p>An exclamation of satisfaction broke from the two men.</p> + +<p>"You have done us a service, indeed," the charcoal burner said. +"We had thought to do it for ourselves, this morning, for after the +escape of him you call your new comrade, he would have shown us no +mercy."</p> + +<p>"You may thank our new comrade, and not us," the brigand said. +"We only arrived on the spot when it was all over."</p> + +<p>The Jew looked at Charlie in astonishment.</p> + +<p>"What! Did he kill Ben Soloman?"</p> + +<p>"That did he; or rather, the Jew killed himself. There was a +grapple hand to hand, and a wrestle. The Jew fell undermost, and +was pierced with his own knife."</p> + +<p>"But the lad is but just out of a sickbed, and has no strength +for a struggle, and Ben Soloman, though past middle life, was +strong and active."</p> + +<p>"Neither strong enough nor active enough," the man laughed. "You +have been nicely taken in. Who would have thought that two Jews and +a Pole would have been cheated by an English lad? His face shows +that he has been ill, and doubtless he has not yet recovered his +full strength, but he was strong enough, anyhow, to overthrow Ben +Soloman.</p> + +<p>"Now, what have you in the hut? We are in need of +provisions."</p> + +<p>The hut was ransacked; the flour, two bottles of spirits, and a +skin of wine seized, and the meat cut up and roasted over the fire. +After the meal was eaten, the captain called upon Charlie to tell +his story more fully, and this he did, with the aid of the man who +spoke Swedish; starting, however, only at the point when he was +attacked in the street, as he felt it better to remain silent as to +his connection with the Swedish army.</p> + +<p>"But what was the cause of Ben Soloman's hostility to you?"</p> + +<p>"There are some in Warsaw who are of opinion that Augustus of +Saxony has done much harm to Poland, in engaging without cause in +the war against Charles of Sweden, and who think that it would be +well that he should be dethroned, and some other prince made king +in his place. To this party many of the traders belong, and the Jew +had reason to think that I was acquainted with the design, and +could give the names of those concerned in it. There was really no +plot against Augustus, but it was only intended that a popular +demonstration against his rule should be made. But Soloman wanted +me to give evidence that there was a conspiracy against the king's +life, so that he might gain great credit by exposing it, and might +at the same time rid himself of many of his rivals in the +trade."</p> + +<p>"He was an artful fox," the leader of the brigands said, when +this had been translated to him. "But where is the Jew he put over +you?"</p> + +<p>Three or four of the men sprang to their feet and ran out, but +the Jew was nowhere to be seen. The captain was furious, and abused +his men right and left, while his anger was in no way mitigated +when one of them told him that, if he had wanted the Jew kept, he +should have given one of them orders to look after him. This was so +evident that the chief was silenced for a moment.</p> + +<p>"How long is it since any of you saw him last?"</p> + +<p>"He went round with the wineskin, and filled our cups just as we +sat down to breakfast," one of the men said. "I have not noticed +him since."</p> + +<p>Nor had any of the others.</p> + +<p>"Then it will be no use to pursue. He has had more than half an +hour's start, and long before this he will have mounted Ben +Soloman's horse, and have ridden off.</p> + +<p>"Well, comrade," he said, turning to Charlie, "this settles your +movements. I was but half in earnest before as to your joining us; +but it is clear now that there's nothing else for you to do, for +the present. This fellow will, directly he gets to Warsaw, denounce +you as the murderer of his master. That he is sure to do to avert +suspicion from himself, and, if you were to return there, it would +go hard with you. So, for a time, you must throw in your lot with +us."</p> + +<p>When this was translated to Charlie, he saw at once the force of +the argument. He could not have denied that the Jew had fallen in a +hand-to-hand struggle with himself, and, were he to appear in +Warsaw, he might be killed by the co-religionists of Ben Soloman; +or, if he escaped this, might lie in a dungeon for months awaiting +his trial, and perhaps be finally executed. There was nothing for +him now but to rejoin the Swedes, and it would be some time, yet, +before he would be sufficiently recovered to undertake such a +journey.</p> + +<p>"I should not mind, if I could send a letter to Allan Ramsay, to +tell him what has befallen me. He will be thinking I am dead, and +will, at any rate, be in great anxiety about me."</p> + +<p>"I have taken a liking to you, young fellow," the leader said, +"and will send in one of my men to Warsaw with a letter; that is, +if you can write one."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I can write. Fortunately there are paper, pen, and an ink +horn on that shelf. Ben Soloman brought them the last time he came, +to write down the lies he wanted me to testify to. I am greatly +obliged to you, and will do it at once."</p> + +<p>As he had, only the day before he was attacked, sent off a +messenger to Count Piper, telling him all he had done the previous +week, there was no occasion to repeat this, and he had only to give +an account of his capture, and the events that had since +occurred.</p> + +<p>"You see," he said, "I cannot return to Warsaw. The Jew who was +here unfortunately heard that it was in a struggle with me Ben +Soloman was killed, and he will, of course, denounce me as his +murderer, though the deed was done in fair fight. I should have all +his tribe against me, and might be imprisoned for months awaiting +trial. I am still very weak, and could not attempt the journey to +the frontier. I am, however, gaining strength, and, as soon as I am +quite recovered, I shall take the first opportunity of leaving the +men I am with, and making for the Swedish camp. Please forward this +news by a sure hand to Count Piper, and express my sorrow that my +mission has not been completed, although, indeed, I do not think +that my further stay at Warsaw would have been any great service, +for it is clear that the great majority of the traders will not +move in the matter until the Swedes advance, and, from their point +of view, it is not to their interest to do so.</p> + +<p>"I know but little of the men I am with at present, beyond the +fact that they are bandits, nor can I say whether they are +disbanded soldiers, or criminals who have escaped from justice; but +at any rate they show me no ill will. I have no doubt I shall be +able to get on fairly with them, until I am able to make my escape. +I wish I had poor Stanislas with me. Only one of the men here +speaks Swedish, and he does not know very much of the language. I +cannot say, at present, whether the twenty men here are the whole +of the band, or whether they are only a portion of it. Nor do I +know whether the men subsist by plundering the peasants, or venture +on more serious crimes. Thanking you for your great kindness during +my stay at Warsaw, I remain, yours gratefully--</p> + +<p>"Charlie Carstairs."</p> + +<p>While he was occupied in writing this letter, an animated +conversation was going on between the bandits. Charlie gathered +that this related to their future operations, but more than this he +could not learn. In a postscript to the letter, he requested Allan +Ramsay to hand over to the bearer some of the clothes left in his +lodgings, and to pay him for his trouble.</p> + +<p>"As to the money I left in your hands, I do not think it worth +while for you to send it. However much these men may consider me a +comrade, I have not sufficient faith in their honesty to believe +that money would reach me safely; but, if you send me a suit of +clothes, two or three gold pieces might be wrapped up in a piece of +cloth and shoved into the toe of a shoe. The parcel must be a small +one, or there would be little chance of the man carrying it far. I +will ask him, however, to bring me a sword, if you will buy one for +me, and my pistols."</p> + +<p>He folded up the letter and gave it to the captain. There was no +means of fastening it, but this mattered little, because, being +written in English, there was no chance of its being read. The +captain handed it to one of the men, with instructions for its +delivery. The messenger started at once. The others, after +remaining a short time in the hut, set out through the forest.</p> + +<p>After an hour's walking, Charlie was unable to go further. The +captain, seeing this, ordered four of the men to stop with him, and +to follow the next morning. As soon as he had gone on with the rest +of the band, the men set about collecting sticks and making a fire. +Charlie, who was utterly exhausted, threw himself on the ground, +and was not long before he fell sound asleep.</p> + +<p>When he awoke, the shades of evening were already falling, and +the men were sitting over the fire, roasting a portion of a goat, +one of a flock they had fallen in with in the wood, where large +numbers roamed about in a semi-wild state.</p> + +<p>The man who could speak Swedish was one of those who had +remained with him, and, from him, he learnt that the present +headquarters of the band were some six miles farther away. This +distance was performed next morning, frequent halts being made to +enable him to sit down and rest; and it was not till five hours +after the start that they arrived.</p> + +<p>Overgrown as it now was, with trees and undergrowth, he could +see that a village once stood there. It must, however, have been +abandoned a very long time, as trees of considerable size grew +among the low walls and piles of stones that marked where cottages +had stood. The place occupied by the brigands had, in former times, +been a castellated building of some strength, standing on a knoll +in the middle of the village, which had probably been inhabited by +the retainers of its owner. Part of the wall had fallen, but a +large arched room, that had doubtless been the banqueting hall of +the castle, remained almost intact, and here the brigands had +established themselves. Several fires burned on the flagged floors, +the smoke finding its way out through holes and crevices in the +roof. Some fifty men were gathered round these, and were occupied +in cooking their midday meal.</p> + +<p>"I am glad to see that you have arrived," the captain said, +coming across to Charlie. "I expected you two hours ago, and +intended, as soon as we had finished our meal, to send out another +four men to meet you and help to carry you in."</p> + +<p>"Thank you," Charlie said. "It is not the men's fault we are +late, but the last part of the way we came on very slowly. I was +getting so exhausted that I had to stop every few hundred +yards."</p> + +<p>"Well, you had better eat something, and then lie down for a +sleep. Meat is plentiful with us, for there are thousands of goats +in the forest, and occasionally we get a deer or wild boar. If we +had but bread and wine we should live like nobles. Our supplies, +however, are low at present, and we shall have to make an +expedition, tomorrow or next day, to replenish them."</p> + +<p>Charlie ate a few mouthfuls of meat, and then lay down and +slept, for some hours, on a bed of leaves. He was awoke by loud and +excited talking among the men, and learnt from Honred that one of +the men, who had been left on watch at the mouth of the path by +which he had entered the forest, had just brought in the news that +a party of a hundred infantry, led by the Jew, had arrived with a +cart. In this the body of Ben Soloman had been sent off, while the +troops had established themselves in the little clearing round the +hut.</p> + +<p>"This comes of letting that Jew escape," the captain said. "No +doubt he told the story his own way, and the Jewish traders went to +the governor and asked that troops should be sent to root us out. +Well, they are far enough away at present, and I have sent off to +have their movements watched. It is a good nine miles, from here to +the hut, and they may look for a week before they find this place, +unless that rascally Jew has heard of it from the woodman, or they +get hold of the fellow himself, though I should think they will +hardly do that. I fancy he has some cause of quarrel with the +authorities, and will not put himself in the way of being +questioned closely, if he can help it."</p> + +<p>The next morning when Charlie awoke, two men were standing +beside him. His eyes first fell on the one who had been to the +town, and who held a large bundle in his hand. Then he turned his +eyes to the other, and gave an exclamation of pleasure, as he saw +that it was Stanislas. He looked pale and weak, and was evidently +just recovering from a severe illness.</p> + +<p>"Why, Stanislas!" he exclaimed. "This is a pleasure, indeed. I +never for a moment dreamt of seeing you. I heard from the Jew who +guarded me that you got away, but I was afraid that you had been +badly wounded. Why, my brave fellow, what brings you here?"</p> + +<p>"I have come to be with your honour," the man said. "It was, of +course, my duty to be by your side. I was very ill for a week, for +I had half a dozen wounds, but I managed, after the assailants left +me, to crawl back to Mr. Ramsay's to tell him what had happened. I +don't remember much about the next few days. Since then I have been +mending rapidly. None of the wounds were very serious, and it was +more loss of blood, than anything else, that ailed me. Mr. Ramsay +searched high and low for you, and we had all given you up for +dead, till a few hours before this man arrived with your +letter.</p> + +<p>"We heard you had killed Ben Soloman. I had a long talk with +your messenger, who received a handsome present from Mr. Ramsay, +and he agreed to conduct me here, upon my solemn promise that, if +the captain would not receive me, I would not give any information, +on my return, as to the whereabouts of the band. Mr. Ramsay hired a +light cart, and that brought us yesterday far into the forest. We +camped there, and I had not more than a couple of miles to walk to +get here this morning."</p> + +<p>"Have you seen the captain?" Charlie asked eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Yes. I was stopped by some sentries, a quarter of a mile away, +and was kept there while my guide came on and got permission of the +captain for me to be brought in. When I met him, I had no great +difficulty in persuading him to let me stop, for Mr. Ramsay had +given me fifty rix-dollars to give him; and so, your honour, here I +am, and here is a letter from Mr. Ramsay himself."</p> + +<p>"I cannot tell you how glad I am to have you, Stanislas. I am +getting better, but I am so weak that I took five hours, yesterday, +to get six miles. Now I have got you to talk to, I shall pick up +strength faster than I have been doing, for it has been very dull +work having no one who could understand me. There is only one man +here who understands a word of Swedish."</p> + +<p>"We will soon get you round, sir, never fear. I have brought +with me four casks of wine. They were left at the place where the +cart stopped last night, but the captain has sent off men already +to bring them in. You will be all the better for a suit of clean +clothes."</p> + +<p>"That I shall. It is a month now since I had a change, and my +jerkin is all stained with blood. I want a wash more than anything; +for there was no water near the hut, and the charcoal burner used +to bring in a small keg from a spring he passed on his way to his +work. That was enough for drinking, but not enough for washing--a +matter which never seemed to have entered into his head, or that of +the Jew, as being in the slightest degree necessary."</p> + +<p>"There is a well just outside," Stanislas said. "I saw them +drawing water in buckets as we came in. I suppose it was the well +of this castle, in the old time."</p> + +<p>"I will go and have a wash, and change my clothes the first +thing," Charlie said. "Mr. Ramsay's letter will keep till after +that."</p> + +<p>They went out to the well together.</p> + +<p>"So you heard the story, that I had killed Ben Soloman, before +you left?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; before your letter arrived, Mr. Ramsay sent for me, and +told me a Jewish trader had just informed him that news had come +that Ben Soloman had been murdered, and the deed had been done by +the young Scotchman who had been with him. Mr. Ramsay did not +believe the story in the slightest. He admitted that Ben Soloman +might have been murdered, and even said frankly that, hated as he +was, it was the most natural end for him to come to; but that you +should have done so was, he said, absurd. In the first place, he +did not think that you were alive; and in the second, it was far +more probable that you had been murdered by Ben Soloman, than that +he should have been murdered by you.</p> + +<p>"However, even before your letter came, three or four hours +later, there seemed no longer any doubt that you had killed the +Jew. By that time, there was quite an uproar among his people. He +was the leader of their community, and had dealings with so many +nobles that his influence was great; and, although he was little +liked, he was regarded as an important person, and his loss was a +very heavy one to the Jewish community. A deputation went to the +governor, and we heard that troops would be at once sent out to +capture you, and the band of brigands you had joined. Mr. Ramsay +told me that it was fortunate, indeed, that you had not returned to +the city. But, no doubt, he has told you all that in the +letter."</p> + +<p>"I feel quite another man, Stanislas," Charlie said, when he had +changed his garments. "Now I can read the letter you brought +me."</p> + +<p>After expressing the great satisfaction he felt, at the news +that Charlie was alive, Mr. Ramsay went on to say that, even were +he well, he could not return to Warsaw in the present state of +public feeling.</p> + +<p>"Your story that you were attacked, grievously wounded, and, +after being confined here for some days, carried away and confined +in the wood, by order of Ben Soloman, and that he visited you +there, would be treated with derision. The version given by the man +who brought in the story of the Jew's death was that he himself was +staying in the cottage of a charcoal burner, an acquaintance of +his, and that a party of brigands, of whom you were one, arrived +there, and that they were boasting of having caused the death of +Ben Soloman, who had fallen by your hand. He managed to escape from +the brigands, and on the road found the dead body of his employer, +who was, he knew, that morning coming out to give him some +instructions. My opinion, and that of my friends who knew you, was +that the fellow had himself killed and robbed his master; but your +letter, of course, showed that his account was true to some +extent--that Ben Soloman had fallen in a struggle with you, and +that you yourself were a prisoner in the hands of these bandits. +Still, as it would be next to impossible for you to prove the truth +of your story, and as the Jews of the place, who are numerous and +influential, are dead against you, your life would certainly be +forfeited were you to be captured.</p> + +<p>"I know your story to be true, but it would appear wildly +improbable, to others, that this wealthy Jew should have conspired, +in the first place, to cause an attack to be made upon an unknown +young stranger, still less that he should have had him carried off +to the forest, and should have gone to visit him there. The +explanation that you were a Swedish officer in disguise would not +benefit you in any way, while it would involve us who knew you in +your danger, and would cause the Jew to be regarded as a man who +had lost his life in endeavouring to unmask a plot against Poland. +Therefore, I think it is extremely fortunate that you are, for the +present, safe in the hands of these brigands, and should certainly +advise you to make no attempt to leave them, until you are +perfectly well and strong.</p> + +<p>"I have, as you directed me, hidden a few pieces of gold in your +shoe, and have handed the rest of your money to your man, who is +starting to join you. He will conceal it about him. I have just +heard that a body of troops are starting at once for the forest, +and that orders have been sent to other towns, to send detachments +into it at different points, so it is evident the authorities are +determined to catch you, if possible. If you had killed half a +dozen traders in a smaller way, they would have cared little about +it; but just at present, pressed as the king is by want of money, +he is bound to do everything he can to please the Jewish traders, +as it is upon them that he must rely for loans for the payment of +his troops.</p> + +<p>"In this matter, then, he will leave no stone unturned to +gratify them, and I should strongly advise your band to move away +from the neighbourhood, at any rate for a time. They may plunder +whole villages with impunity, but what is regarded as the murder of +the richest citizen of Warsaw, a man mixed up in business and +politics with half the principal nobles of the land, is a different +matter altogether. Do not think of trying to traverse the country +until you are perfectly strong. It will be a dangerous business at +the best, but with your man with you, to bear the brunt of replying +to questions, I have every confidence that you will succeed in +making your way through. As to this, I can give no advice, as there +is no saying as to the point from which you may start, or the +directions in which you may travel.</p> + +<p>"Should you, at any time, find yourself in a town in which there +are any of my countrymen established in trade, and you will find +them nearly everywhere, use my name. I think it is pretty generally +known to Scotchmen in Poland. You will see I have inclosed a note +that will be useful to you."</p> + +<p>The inclosure contained only a few words:</p> + +<p>"I, Allan Ramsay, merchant of Warsaw, do declare the bearer of +this note to be my friend, and beg any countrymen of mine, to whom +he may present himself, to assist him in every way, and, should he +require money, to furnish him with it, I undertaking to make myself +responsible for the same, and to pay all monies and other charges +that he may incur."</p> + +<p>"The first thing to do," Charlie said, as he placed the letters +in his doublet, "is to let the leader of our band know that other +bodies of troops, besides that at the hut, are about to enter the +forest. He may decide that it is necessary to march away at +once."</p> + +<p>As soon, indeed, as the outlaw received the tidings, he issued +orders for the band to prepare for instant departure.</p> + +<p>"A party of five or six men together," he said to Charlie, +"might hide in this forest for years. But a band of fifty is too +large to be long concealed. To begin with, they must get food, and +must either buy it or hunt for it; and in the second, there are a +considerable number of men living in the forest, charcoal burners +and herders of goats and swine, and any of these, if questioned by +the troops, might mention that they had seen a considerable number +of men passing. As it is, we will break up into parties of seven or +eight, and appoint a rendezvous where we may meet again."</p> + +<p>The band was speedily mustered, for, with the exception of those +who were watching the forest through which the troops at the hut +must march to reach them, the whole were close at hand. A messenger +was sent off to call in the scouts. Then the booty that had been +taken during their late excursions was brought out, and emptied on +the ground. It consisted of money and jewellery. It was divided +into equal portions, of which each member took one, the lieutenants +of the band two, and the captain three.</p> + +<p>"You don't share this time," the latter said to Charlie; "but +next time, of course, you and your comrade will each have your +portion."</p> + +<p>When this was done, the men were told off in parties of six or +seven, and instructions given as to the point of rendezvous. Each +band chose its own leader, and, in an hour from the reception of +the news, the place was deserted, and the parties were making their +way in different directions through the forest.</p> + +<p>Charlie and Stanislas formed part of the captain's own force, +which numbered ten in all.</p> + +<p>"Do you think they will all turn up at the meeting place?" +Charlie asked the leader, whose name he now ascertained was +Ladislas Koffski.</p> + +<p>"They may," he said. "But it is seldom that bands, when they +once disperse like this, ever come together again. It is impossible +to content everyone, and any man who is chosen leader of a party +may, if he is dissatisfied, persuade those with him to join some +other band. Even if they do not go in a body, many are sure to +break off and make for their homes, to enjoy the booty they have +gathered.</p> + +<p>"But, upon the other hand, as we go we shall gather up fresh +recruits. With so many disbanded soldiers and discontented men +roaming the country, there is no difficulty in getting as many men +as one cares to keep together.</p> + +<p>"Fifty is the outside that is advisable, for with more, even if +one makes a good haul, it comes to so little, a head, that the men +are dissatisfied. Of course they work in small parties, but this +does not succeed so well as when a small band are under a single +leader."</p> + +<p>"How long have you been at this work?"</p> + +<p>"Since last autumn."</p> + +<p>"And you find it pay?"</p> + +<p>"We do not get much in money. As you saw, there were but four +rix dollars a head, and that is the result of a month's work. +Still, that is not bad for men who might otherwise starve. +Sometimes we do worse and sometimes better, but that is about the +average. Still, the life is a pleasant one, and unless we disbanded +soldiers took to it, what would there be for us to do? If +government would keep us on regular pay, there would soon be no +brigands left, except the men who have escaped from justice. But +the treasury is empty, and, even at the best of times, the troops +are badly and irregularly paid, and are forced to plunder to keep +life together. They are almost in rags, and though we Poles do not +mind fighting, there is generally a difficulty in getting +sufficient infantry. As for the cavalry, they are nobles, and draw +no pay.</p> + +<p>"How do you feel today?"</p> + +<p>"Better. The night's rest, and a wash and change of clothes this +morning, have made me feel another man. How far do you intend to +march?"</p> + +<p>"We shall go slowly for a day or two. The other parties have all +pushed on ahead fast, but by taking matters quietly, and by keeping +a sharp lookout, we need have no great fear of being surprised. I +know the forest well, and its thickest hiding places, so we can +afford to travel slowly, and as you become accustomed to it you +will be able to make longer journeys."</p> + +<p>For ten days they travelled through the forest, increasing their +distance daily, as Charlie regained his strength. The last day or +two they did not make less than twenty miles a day. Their faces +were turned steadily east. Occasionally they passed large tracts of +cleared land, villages, and cultivated fields. At some of these +they stopped and replenished their stock of flour, which they took +without paying for it, but did no farther damage.</p> + +<p>Of meat they had abundance. Two or three men started each day as +soon as they halted, and, in a short time, returned with a goat or +young pig.</p> + +<p>"We are now close to the Bug River," Ladislas said at their last +halting place. "Tomorrow we shall meet some, at least, of our +comrades. I do not expect a great many, for we were pretty equally +divided as to the direction we should travel in. Practically, we +were safe from pursuit when we had gone fifteen miles, for the +forest there spreads out greatly, and those in search of us would +know that further pursuit would be useless. Many of my men did not +care about going farther, but all this part of the country has been +so harried, for the last two or three years, that we thought it +best to try altogether new ground. When we have crossed the Bug we +shall be beyond the forest, but there are great swamps and +morasses, and hills with patches of wood. Many streams take their +rise there, all meeting farther on, and forming the Dnieper. We +must keep north of that river, for to the south the country is +thinly populated, and we should have difficulty in maintaining +ourselves."</p> + +<p>Charlie made no comment, but he was glad to hear that the band +intended to keep to the north of the Dnieper, for that river would +have formed a serious obstacle to his making his way to rejoin the +Swedes. The next day, they reached the bank of the Bug, and, +following the river down, came after an hour's walking upon a great +fire, round which fifteen men were stretched. These, as the +captain's party approached, rose to their feet with a shout of +welcome.</p> + +<p>"That is better than I expected," Ladislas said, as they came up +to them. "Five and twenty is quite enough for work here. In the +forests one can do with more, but, moving steadily on, as we mean +to do, till we get pretty near the eastern frontier, five and +twenty is ample. It is enough, when together, to surprise a +village; and it is not too many, travelling in twos and threes, to +attract attention. Things always go on better, too, after a +dispersal. Many who are discontented, or who want to command a band +of their own, break off, and one starts fresh, with just the men +one likes best to keep."</p> + +<p>"We had begun to give you up, captain," one of the men said, as +he joined the other party. "We have been here six days."</p> + +<p>"We travelled but slowly, at first, and it is only the last two +days we have really made fair journeys; but there was no reason for +any great haste. The world is all our own, and, at any rate, as +long as we were in the forest, there was no fear of wanting +food.</p> + +<p>"So I see some of our comrades have left us."</p> + +<p>"We can do very well without them, captain. There were thirty of +us here two days ago. Essos and Polinski quarrelled, and Essos was +killed. Then Polinski wanted us to elect him captain, and to move +away at once. Four or five, who have always been grumblers, joined +him at once, and persuaded some of the others, till we were about +equally divided. It came pretty nearly to a fight; but neither +liked to begin, and they moved away."</p> + +<p>"There are quite enough of us left," Ladislas said. "As to Essos +and Polinski, I am heartily glad that they have gone. I know they +have both been scheming for the leadership for some time. Most of +the others can be very well spared, too. There are plenty of us +here for travel. There is no doubt, as we agreed before starting, +that there is not much more to be done in this part of the country. +What with the civil wars, and the bands of soldiers without a +leader, and others like ourselves who do not mean to starve, the +peasants have been wrought up into a state of desperation. They +have little left to lose, but what they have got they are ready to +fight to the death for, and, lately, at the first alarm they have +sounded the bells and assembled for miles round, and, equipped with +scythes and flails, routed those who meddled with them. We had more +than one hot fight, and lost many good men. Besides, many of the +nobles who have suffered have turned out, with their followers, and +struck heavy blows at some of the bands; so that the sooner we get +out of this country, which is becoming a nest of hornets, the +better, for there is little booty and plenty of hard blows to be +got.</p> + +<p>"We will go on, as we agreed, till near the eastern frontier. +The country is well covered with forest there, and we can sally out +on which side we like, for, if there is not much gold to be had in +the Russian villages, there is plenty of vodka, and sometimes +things worth taking in their churches. The priests and headmen, +too, have generally got a little store, which can be got at with +the aid of a few hot coals, or a string twisted tight enough round +a thumb. At any rate we sha'n't starve; but we must move on pretty +fast, for we shall have to get up a warm hut in the forest, and to +lay in a stock of provisions before the winter sets in. So we must +only stop to gather a little plunder when a good opportunity +offers."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: Treed By Wolves.</h2> + +<p>Charlie and Stanislas were, that evening, sitting apart from the +rest, at a short distance from the fire, talking over the future. +They agreed that it would be comparatively easy to withdraw from +the band as they journeyed forward, if, as seemed likely, they +travelled in very small parties. If, indeed, they found themselves +with two others, they could leave openly, for these would scarcely +care to enter upon a desperate struggle, merely for the sake of +retaining two unwilling companions in the band.</p> + +<p>The difficulties would only begin when they started alone. As +they were talking, the captain came across to them.</p> + +<p>"I can guess," he said, "that you are talking together as to the +future. I like you, young Englishman, and I like your companion, +who seems an honest fellow, but I would not keep you with me by +force. I understand that you are not placed as we are. We have to +live. Most of us would live honestly if we could, but at present it +is the choice of doing as we do, or starving. We occasionally take +a few crowns, if we come across a fat trader, or may ease a rich +farmer of his hoard, but it is but seldom such a chance comes in +our way. As a rule, we simply plunder because we must live. It is +different with you. Your friends may be far away, but if you can +get to them you would have all that you need. Therefore, this life, +which is hard and rough, to say nothing of its danger, does not +suit you; but for all that, you must stay with us, for it would be +madness for you to attempt to escape.</p> + +<p>"As I told you, the peasants are maddened, and would kill any +passing stranger as they would a wild beast. They would regard him +as a spy of some band like ours, or of a company of disbanded +soldiers, sent forward to discover which houses and villages are +best worth plundering. In your case, you have other dangers to +fear. You may be sure that news has been sent from Warsaw to all +the different governors, with orders for your arrest for killing +Ben Soloman, and these orders will be transmitted to every town and +village. Your hair and eyes would at once betray you as strangers, +and your ignorance of the language would be fatal to you. If, +therefore, you escaped being killed as a robber by the peasants, +you would run the risk of arrest at the first town or village you +entered.</p> + +<p>"Translate that to him, Stanislas. He is learning our language +fast, but he cannot understand all that."</p> + +<p>"That is just what we were talking about," Charlie said, when +Stanislas had repeated the captain's speech, "and the danger seems +too great to be risked. Think you, that when we get farther to the +east, we shall be able to make our way more easily up into +Livonia?"</p> + +<p>"Much more easily, because the forest is more extensive there; +but not until the winter is over. The cold will be terrible, and it +would be death to sleep without shelter. Besides, the forests are +infested with wolves, who roam about in packs, and would scent and +follow and devour you. But when spring comes, you can turn your +faces to the north, and leave us if you think fit, and I promise +you that no hindrance shall be thrown in your way. I only ask you +not to risk your lives by trying now to pass through Poland +alone."</p> + +<p>"I think you are right, Ladislas, and I promise you that we will +not attempt to leave you during our journey east. As you say, it +would be impossible for us to travel after winter had once set in. +It is now the end of September."</p> + +<p>"And it will be November before we reach our destination. We +shall not travel fast. We have no motive for doing so. We have to +live by the way, and to gather a little money to help us through +the winter. We may shoot a bear or an elk sometimes, a few deer, +and hares, but we shall want two or three sacks of flour, and some +spirits. For these we must either get money, or take the goods. The +first is the best, for we have no means of dragging heavy weights +with us, and it would not do to infuriate the peasants by +plundering any of them within twenty miles of the place where we +mean to winter. That would set them all against us."</p> + +<p>"I tell you frankly, Ladislas, that we shall not be willing to +aid in any acts of robbery. Of course, when one is with an army one +has to plunder on a large scale, and it has often gone terribly +against the grain, when I have had to join parties sent out to +forage. But it has to be done. I would rather not join men in +taking food, yet I understand that it may be necessary. But as to +taking money, I will have nothing to do with it. At the same time, +I understand that we cannot share your food, and be with you, +without doing something. Stanislas has brought me a little money +from Warsaw, and I shall be ready to pay into the common treasury a +sum sufficient to pay for our share of the food. As to money taken, +we shall not expect any share of it. If you are attacked, we shall +of course fight, and shall be ready to do our full share in all +work. So, at any rate, you will not be losers by taking us with +you."</p> + +<p>"That is fair enough," the captain said, when Stanislas had +translated what Charlie said, suppressing, however, his remarks +about foraging with the army, as the brigands were ignorant that +Charlie and he had any connection with the Swedes, or that he was +not, as he had given out, a young Englishman come out to set up as +a trader.</p> + +<p>The band now journeyed slowly on, keeping near the north bank of +the Dnieper. They went by twos and threes, uniting sometimes and +entering a village or surrounding a farmhouse at night, and taking +what they wanted. The people were, however, terribly poor, and they +were able to obtain but little beyond scanty supplies of flour, and +occasionally a few gold or silver trinkets. Many other bands of +plunderers had passed along, in the course of the summer, and the +robbers themselves were often moved to pity by the misery that they +everywhere met with.</p> + +<p>When in small parties they were obliged to avoid entering any +villages, for once or twice furious attacks were made upon those +who did so, the women joining the men in arming themselves with any +weapon that came to hand, and in falling upon the strangers.</p> + +<p>Only once did they succeed in obtaining plunder of value. They +had visited a village, but found it contained nothing worth taking. +One of the women said:</p> + +<p>"Why do you trouble poor people like us? There is the count's +chateau three miles away. They have every luxury there, while we +are starving."</p> + +<p>After leaving the village, the man to whom she had spoken +repeated what she had said, and it was agreed to make the attempt. +At the first cottage they came to they made further inquiries, and +found that the lord of the soil was very unpopular; for, in spite +of the badness of the times, he insisted on receiving his rents +without abatement, and where money was not forthcoming, had seized +cattle and horses, assessing them at a price far below what they +would have fetched at the nearest market.</p> + +<p>They therefore marched to the house. It was a very large one. +The captain thoughtfully placed Charlie and Stanislas among the six +men who were to remain without, to prevent any of the inmates +leaving the chateau. With the rest, he made a sudden attack on the +great door of the house, and beat it down with a heavy sledge +hammer. Just as it gave way, some shots were fired from the inside, +but they rushed in, overpowered the servants, and were soon masters +of the place.</p> + +<p>In half an hour they came out again, laden with booty. Each man +carried half a dozen bottles of choice wine, from the count's +cellar, slung at his belt. On their shoulders they carried bundles +containing silver cups and other valuables; while six of them had +bags of silver money, that had been extracted from the count by +threats of setting fire to the chateau, and burning him and his +family.</p> + +<p>A halt was made two or three miles away, when the silver was +divided into shares as usual, the men being well satisfied when +they learned that Charlie and his companion claimed no part of it. +Some of the provisions they had also taken were eaten. Each man had +a flask of wine, with which the count's health was derisively +drunk.</p> + +<p>"This has been a good night's work," the leader said, "and you +have each sixty rix dollars in your pockets, which is more than you +have had for months past. That will keep us in provisions and +spirits all through the winter; but mind, although we took it +without much trouble, we have not heard the last of the business. +No doubt, by this time, the count has sent off a messenger to the +nearest town where there are troops, and, for a day or two, we +shall have to march fast and far. It is one thing to plunder +villages, and another to meddle with a rich nobleman."</p> + +<p>For the next forty-eight hours they marched by night instead of +by day, keeping always together, and prepared to resist an attack. +One morning they saw, from their hiding place among some high reeds +near the river, a body of about sixty horsemen ride past at a +distance. They were evidently searching for something, for parties +could be seen to break off several times, and to enter woods and +copses, the rest halting till they came out again.</p> + +<p>As the band had with them enough food for another three days, +they remained for thirty-six hours in their hiding place, and then, +thinking the search would by that time be discontinued, went on +again. The next day they killed two or three goats from a herd, the +boy in charge of them making off with such speed that, though hotly +pursued and fired at several times, he made his escape. They +carried the carcasses to a wood, lit a fire, and feasted upon them. +Then, having cooked the rest of the flesh, they divided it among +the band.</p> + +<p>By this time the wine was finished. The next day they again saw +horsemen in the distance, but remained in hiding till they had +disappeared in the afternoon. They then went into a village, but +scarcely had they proceeded up the street when the doors were +opened, and from every house men rushed out armed with flails, +clubs, and axes, and fell upon them furiously, shouting "Death to +the robbers!"</p> + +<p>They had evidently received warning that a band of plunderers +were approaching, and everything had been prepared for them. The +band fought stoutly, but they were greatly outnumbered, and, as but +few of them carried firearms, they had no great advantage in +weapons. Charlie and Stanislas, finding that their lives were at +stake, were forced to take part in the fray, and both were with the +survivors of the band, who at last succeeded in fighting their way +out of the village, leaving half their number behind them, while +some twenty of the peasants had fallen.</p> + +<p>Reduced now to twelve men and the captain, they thought only of +pushing forward, avoiding all villages, and only occasionally +visiting detached houses for the sake of obtaining flour. The +country became more thinly populated as they went on, and there was +a deep feeling of satisfaction when, at length, their leader +pointed to a belt of trees in the distance, and said:</p> + +<p>"That is the beginning of the forest. A few miles farther, and +we shall be well within it."</p> + +<p>By nightfall they felt, for the first time since they had set +out on their journey, that they could sleep in safety. A huge fire +was lit, for the nights were now becoming very cold, and snow had +fallen occasionally for the last four or five days, and in the open +country was lying some inches deep. The next day they journeyed a +few miles farther, and then chose a spot for the erection of a hut. +It was close to a stream, and the men at once set to work, with +axes, to fell trees and clear a space.</p> + +<p>It was agreed that the captain and two of the men, of the most +pacific demeanour, should go to the nearest town, some forty miles +away, to lay in stores. They were away five days, and then returned +with the welcome news that a cart, laden with flour and a couple of +barrels of spirits, was on a country track through the forest a +mile and a half away.</p> + +<p>"How did you manage, captain?" Charlie asked.</p> + +<p>"We went to the house of a well-to-do peasant, about a mile from +the borders of the wood. I told him frankly that we belonged to a +band who were going to winter in the forest, that we would do him +no harm if he would give us his aid, but that if he refused he +would soon have his place burnt over his head. As we said we were +ready to pay a fair sum for the hire of his cart, he did not +hesitate a moment about making the choice. The other two remained +at his cottage, so as to keep his family as hostages for his good +faith, and I went with him to the town, where we bought six sacks +of good flour and the two barrels of spirits. We got a few other +things--cooking pots and horns, and a lot of coarse blankets, and a +thick sheepskin coat for each man. They are all in the car. I see +that you have got the hut pretty nearly roofed in, so, in a day or +two, we shall be comfortable."</p> + +<p>They went in a body to the place where the cart had been left, +but it required two journeys before its contents were all +transported to the hut. Another three days and this was completed. +It was roughly built of logs, the interstices being filled in with +moss. There was no attempt at a door, an opening being left four +feet high and eighteen inches wide for the purpose of an entry. The +skin of a deer they had shot, since they arrived, was hung up +outside; and a folded rug inside. There was no occasion for +windows. A certain amount of light made its way in by an orifice, a +foot square, that had been left in the roof for the escape of +smoke. The hut itself consisted of one room only, about eighteen +feet square.</p> + +<p>When this was finished, all hands set to work to pile up a great +stack of firewood, close to the door, so as to save them from the +necessity of going far, until snow had ceased falling, and winter +had set in in earnest.</p> + +<p>The cart had brought six carcasses of sheep, that had been +purchased from a peasant; these were hung up outside the hut to +freeze hard, and the meat was eaten only once a day, as it would be +impossible to obtain a fresh supply, until the weather became +settled enough to admit of their hunting.</p> + +<p>The preparations were but just finished when the snow began to +fall heavily. For a week it came down without intermission, the +wind howled among the trees, and even Charlie, half stifled as he +was by the smoke, felt no inclination to stir out, except for half +an hour's work to clear away the snow from the entrance, and to +carry in wood from the pile.</p> + +<p>The time passed more cheerfully than might have been expected. +He had by this time begun to talk Polish with some facility, and +was able to understand the stories that the men told, as they sat +round the fire; sometimes tales of adventures they themselves had +gone through, sometimes stories of the history of Poland, its +frequent internal wars, and its struggles with the Turks.</p> + +<p>Making bread and cooking occupied some portion of the time, and +much was spent in sleep. At the end of a week the snow ceased +falling and the sun came out, and all were glad to leave the hut +and enjoy the clear sky and the keen air.</p> + +<p>While they had been confined to the hut, two of the men had made +a large number of snares for hares, and they at once started into +the forest, to set these in spots where they saw traces of the +animals' passage over the snow. The rest went off in parties of +twos and threes in search of other game.</p> + +<p>With the exception of Charlie, all were accustomed to the woods; +but, as Stanislas had much less experience than the others, the +captain decided to go with them.</p> + +<p>"It is easy for anyone to lose his way here," he said. "In fact, +except to one accustomed to the woods, it would be dangerous to go +far away from the hut. As long as it is fine, you will find your +way back by following your own tracks, but if the weather changed +suddenly, and it came on to snow, your case would be hopeless. One +of the advantages of placing our hut on a stream is that it forms a +great aid to finding one's way back. If you strike it above, you +follow it down; if below, upwards, until you reach the hut. Of +course you might wander for days and never hit it, still it is much +more easy to find than a small object like the hut, though even +when found, it would be difficult to decide whether it had been +struck above or below the hut.</p> + +<p>"Now, there is one rule if, at any time, you get lost. Don't +begin to wander wildly about, for, if you did, you would certainly +walk in a circle, and might never be found again. Sit down quietly +and think matters over, eat if you have got any food with you; then +examine the sky, and try to find out from the position of the sun, +or the direction in which the clouds are going, which way the hut +ought to lie. Always take with you one of your pistols; if you fire +it three times, at regular intervals, it will be a signal that you +want help, and any of us who are within hearing will come to aid +you."</p> + +<p>With the exception of hares, of which a good many were snared, +the hunting was not productive. Tracks of deer were seen not +unfrequently, but it was extremely difficult, even when the animals +were sighted, to get across the surface of the snow to within range +of the clumsy arquebuses that two or three of the men carried. They +did, however, manage to shoot a few by erecting a shelter, just +high enough for one man to lie down under, and leaving it until the +next snowstorm so covered it that it seemed but a knoll in the +ground, or a low shrub bent down and buried under the weight of the +snow. These shelters were erected close to paths taken by the deer, +and, by lying patiently all day in them, the men occasionally +managed to get a close shot.</p> + +<p>Several bears were killed, and two elks. These afforded food for +a long time, as the frozen flesh would keep until the return of +spring. Holes were made in the ice on the stream, and baited hooks +being set every night, it was seldom that two or three fish were +not found fast on them in the morning.</p> + +<p>Altogether, therefore, there was no lack of food; and as, under +the teaching of the captain, Charlie in time learnt to be able to +keep his direction through the woods, he was often able to go out, +either with Stanislas or alone, thus keeping clear of the close +smoky hut during the hours of daylight. Upon the whole he found the +life by no means an unpleasant one.</p> + +<p>Among the articles purchased by the captain were high boots, +lined with sheepskin, coming up to the thigh. With these and the +coats, which had hoods to pull over the head, Charlie felt the cold +but little during the day; while at night he found the hut often +uncomfortably warm, sleeping, as they all did, in the same attire +in which they went out.</p> + +<p>In February the weather became excessively severe, more so, the +peasants and charcoal burners they occasionally met with declared, +than they ever remembered. The wild animals became tamer, and in +the morning when they went out, they frequently found tracks of +bears that had been prowling round the hut in search of offal, or +bones thrown out. They were now obliged to hang their supply of +meat, by ropes, from boughs at some distance from the ground, by +which means they were enabled to prevent the bears getting at +it.</p> + +<p>They no longer dared to venture far from the hut, for large +packs of wolves ranged through the forest, and, driven by hunger, +even entered villages, where they attacked and killed many women +and children, made their entrance into sheds, and tore dogs, +horses, and cattle to pieces, and became at last so dangerous that +the villagers were obliged to keep great fires burning in the +streets at night, to frighten them away. Several times the +occupants of the hut were awakened by the whining and snarling of +wolves outside. But the walls and roof were alike built of solid +timber, and a roughly-made door of thick wood was now fastened, +every night, against the opening, and so stoutly supported by beams +behind it as to defy assault. Beyond, therefore, a passing grumble +at being awakened by the noise, the men gave themselves no trouble +as to the savage animals outside.</p> + +<p>"If these brutes grow much bolder," the captain said one day, +"we shall be prisoners here altogether. They must have come down +from the great forest that extends over a large part of Russia. The +villages are scarce there, and the peasants take good care to keep +all their beasts in shelter, so no doubt they are able to pick up +more at the edge of the forest here."</p> + +<p>"How far are we from the Russian frontier?"</p> + +<p>"I do not think anyone could tell you. For aught I know, we may +be in Russia now. These forests are a sort of no man's land, and I +don't suppose any line of frontier has ever been marked. It is +Russia to the east of this forest, some thirty miles away, and it +is Poland to the west of it. The forest is no good to anyone except +the charcoal burners. I have met both Russians and Poles in the +wood, and, as there is plenty of room for all--ay, and would be +were there a thousand to every one now working in it--they are on +friendly terms with each other, especially as the two nations are, +at present, allied against Sweden."</p> + +<p>In spite of the wolves, Charlie continued his walks in the +forest, accompanied always by Stanislas. Both carried axes and +pistols, and, although Charlie had heard many tales of solitary +men, and even of vehicles, being attacked by the wolves in broad +daylight, he believed that most of the stories were exaggerations, +and that the chances of two men being attacked in daylight were +small, indeed.</p> + +<p>He had found that the track, by which the cart had brought the +stores, was a good deal used, the snow being swept away or levelled +by the runners of sledges, either those of peasants who came into +the forest for wood or charcoal, or of travellers journeying +between Russia and Poland. He generally selected this road for his +walk, both because it was less laborious than wading through the +untrodden snow, and because there was here no fear of losing his +way, and he was spared the incessant watchfulness for signs that +was necessary among the trees. At first he had frequently met +peasants' carts on the road, but, since the cold became more severe +and the wolves more numerous and daring, he no longer encountered +them. He had indeed heard, from some of the last he saw, that they +should come no more, for that the charcoal burners were all +abandoning their huts, and going into the villages.</p> + +<p>One afternoon, when they had, on their return, nearly reached +the spot where they left the road to strike across the forest to +the hut, they heard a noise behind them.</p> + +<p>"That is a pack of wolves, in full cry!" Stanislas exclaimed. +"You had better get up into a tree. They are after something."</p> + +<p>They hastily clambered into a tree, whose lower branches were +but six or seven feet from the ground. A moment later two horses, +wild with fright, dashed past, while some twenty yards behind them +came a pack of fifty or sixty wolves. They were almost silent now, +with their red tongues hanging out.</p> + +<p>"The brutes have been attacking a sledge," Stanislas said in a +low tone. "You saw the horses were harnessed, and their broken +traces were hanging by their side. It is easy to read the story. +The sledge was attacked; the horses, mad with fear, broke their +traces and rushed off, or perhaps the driver, seeing at the last +moment that escape was impossible, slashed the ropes with his +knife, so as to give the horses a chance. I expect they got a +start, for the wolves would be detained a little at the +sledge."</p> + +<p>"Do you think the poor beasts will get safe out of the forest, +Stanislas?"</p> + +<p>"I don't think so, but they may. The chase has evidently been a +long one, and the wolves have tired themselves with their first +efforts to come up to them. It did not seem to me that they were +gaining when they passed us. It is simply a question of endurance, +but I fancy the wolves will last longest.</p> + +<p>"See, here is a party of stragglers. I suppose they stopped +longer at the sledge."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me they are on our scent, Stanislas. Do you see, +they are coming along at the side of the road where we walked, with +their heads down."</p> + +<p>"I am afraid they are. Well, we shall soon see. Yes, they are +leaving the road where we did."</p> + +<p>A moment later a dozen wolves ran up to the trunk of the tree, +and there gathered snuffing and whining. Presently one caught sight +of the two figures above them, and with an angry yelp sprang up in +the air, and immediately all were growling, snarling, and leaping. +Charlie laughed out loud at their impotent efforts.</p> + +<p>"It is no laughing matter, sir," Stanislas said gravely.</p> + +<p>"They cannot climb up here, Stanislas."</p> + +<p>"No, but they can keep us here. It will be dark in an hour, and +likely enough they will watch us all night."</p> + +<p>"Then we had better shoot two of them, and jump down with our +hatchets. Keeping back to back, we ought to be able to face ten +wolves."</p> + +<p>"Yes, if that were all; but see, here come three or four more, +and the dozen will soon swell to a score. No, we shall have to wait +here all night, and probably for some time tomorrow, for the men +are not likely to find us very early, and they will hardly hear our +pistols unless some of them happen to come in this direction."</p> + +<p>"Do you think, if we shoot two or three of them, the rest will +go?"</p> + +<p>"Certainly not. It will be all the worse. Their comrades would +at once tear them to pieces and devour them, and the scent of blood +would very soon bring others to the spot."</p> + +<p>"Well, if we have got to wait here all night, Stanislas, we had +better choose the most comfortable place we can, at once, before it +gets dark. We must mind we don't go to sleep and tumble off."</p> + +<p>"There will be no fear of our sleeping," Stanislas said. "The +cold will be too great for that. We shall have to keep on swinging +our hands and feet, and rubbing our noses, to prevent ourselves +from getting frostbitten."</p> + +<p>"Well, I have never felt the cold in these clothes," Charlie +said.</p> + +<p>"No, sir, but you have never been out at night, sitting cramped +on a tree."</p> + +<p>Hour after hour passed. Even in the darkness they could see the +wolves lying in the snow below them, occasionally changing their +position, keeping close together for warmth, and often snarling or +growling angrily, as one or two shifted their position, and tried +to squeeze in so as to get into a warm spot.</p> + +<p>The cold was intense and, in spite of swinging his legs and +arms, Charlie felt that his vital heat was decreasing.</p> + +<p>"This is awful, Stanislas. I do not think we can last on till +morning."</p> + +<p>"I begin to have doubts myself, sir. Perhaps it would be better +to leap down and make a fight of it."</p> + +<p>"We might shoot some of them first," Charlie said. "How many +charges have you?"</p> + +<p>"I have only two, besides one in the barrel."</p> + +<p>"And I have only three," Charlie said. "Powder has run very +short. The captain was saying, yesterday, that we must send to the +village and try to get some more. Still, six shots will help +us."</p> + +<p>"Not much, sir. There must be thirty or forty of them now. I +have seen some come from the other way. I suppose they were part of +the pack that followed the horses."</p> + +<p>Charlie sat for some time thinking. Then he exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"I think this is a dead tree."</p> + +<p>"It is, sir. I noticed it when we climbed up. The head has gone, +and I think it must have been struck with lightning last +summer."</p> + +<p>"Then I think we can manage."</p> + +<p>"Manage what, sir?" the man asked in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Manage to make a fire, Stanislas. First of all, we will crawl +out towards the ends of the branches as far as we can get, and +break off twigs and small boughs. If we can't get enough, we can +cut chips off, and we will pile them all where these three big +boughs branch off from the trunk. We have both our tinderboxes with +us, and I see no reason why we should not be able to light a fire +up here."</p> + +<p>"So we might," Stanislas said eagerly. "But if we did, we might +set the whole tree on fire."</p> + +<p>"No bad thing, either," Charlie rejoined. "You may be sure the +fire will keep the wolves at a respectful distance, and we could +get down and enjoy the heat without fear."</p> + +<p>"I believe your idea will save our lives, sir. Ten minutes ago I +would not have given a crown for our chances."</p> + +<p>They at once crawled out upon two of the great branches, and a +renewed chorus of snarls from below showed that their foes were +watchful. The snapping of the small branches excited a certain +amount of uneasiness among them, and they drew off a short +distance. In ten minutes Charlie and his companion worked +themselves back to the main trunk, each carrying an armful of +twigs. They first cut off a number of small dry chips, and made a +pile of these at the junction of one of the branches with the +trunk. They then got out their tinderboxes and bunches of rags, +shook a few grains of powder from one of the horns among the chips, +and then got the tinder alight. A shred of rag, that had been +rubbed with damp powder, was applied to the spark and then placed +among the shavings. A flash of light sprang up, followed by a +steady blaze, as the dried chips caught. One by one at first, and +then, as the fire gained strength, several sticks at a time were +laid over the burning splinters, and in five minutes a large fire +was blazing.</p> + +<p>Charlie and his companion took their seats where the other two +big branches shot out from the trunk. These were two or three feet +higher than that on which the fire had been lighted, and, ere long, +a sensation of genial warmth began to steal over them. Fresh sticks +were lighted as the first were consumed, and before long the trunk, +where the flames played on it, began to glow. Light tongues of +flame rose higher and higher, until the trunk was alight ten or +twelve feet up.</p> + +<p>"The wolves are all gone," Charlie said, looking down.</p> + +<p>"I don't suppose they have gone very far, sir. But when the tree +once gets fairly alight, you may be sure they won't venture +anywhere near it."</p> + +<p>They had already been forced to move some little distance away +from the trunk, by the heat, and as the flames rose higher and +higher, embracing in the course of half an hour the whole of the +trunk and upper branches, they felt that it was perfectly safe to +drop off into the snow beneath them.</p> + +<p>Blazing brands soon began to fall. They stood a short distance +away, so as to be beyond the risk of accident, but, at Charlie's +suggestion, they ran in from time to time, gathered up the brands +and laid them at the foot of the trunk, and in a short time a +second fire was kindled here.</p> + +<p>The tree was now a pyramid of fire, lighting up the snow for a +long distance round. Outside this circle the wolves could be heard +whining and whimpering, occasionally uttering a long-drawn +howl.</p> + +<p>"They know that they are baulked of their prey," Stanislas said. +"We shall have some of the big branches falling soon, and shall be +able to keep up a roaring fire, that will last until daylight. I +should think by that time the wolves will be tired of it, and will +make off; but if not, the captain will be sure to send men out to +search for us. He will guess we have been treed by wolves, and we +have only to get into another tree, and fire our pistols, to bring +them in this direction."</p> + +<p>"But they may be attacked, too," Charlie remarked.</p> + +<p>"There are ten of them, and they are sure to come armed with +axes and swords. They ought to be able to fight their way through a +good-sized pack. Besides, the wolves will be so cowed by this great +fire, that I don't think they will have the courage to meddle with +so strong a party."</p> + +<p>One by one the arms of the tree fell, burnt through at the point +where they touched the trunk. They would have been far too heavy to +be dragged, but three or four of them fell across the lower fire, +and there lay blazing. Not knowing which way the tree itself would +fall, Charlie and his companion were obliged to remain at some +distance off, but the heat there was amply sufficient for them. At +last the trunk fell with a crash, and they at once established +themselves as near the fire as they could sit, without being +scorched, and there chatted until morning began to break.</p> + +<p>They felt sure that some, at least, of the wolves were around +them, as they occasionally caught sight of what looked like two +sparks among the undergrowth; these being, as they knew, the +reflection of the fire in the eyes of a wolf. There was a tree hard +by in which they could, if necessary, take refuge, and they +therefore resolved to stay near the fire.</p> + +<p>Fortunately the night had been perfectly still, and, as the tree +they had fired was a detached one, the flames had not spread, as +Charlie had at one time been afraid they would do.</p> + +<p>Half an hour after daylight had fairly broken, they discharged +three shots at regular intervals with their pistols, then they +waited half an hour.</p> + +<p>"Shall we fire again?"</p> + +<p>"No. Not until we hear shots from them," Charlie replied. "We +have but four charges left, and if the wolves made a sudden rush, +we might want to use them."</p> + +<p>After a time, both thought they heard the distant report of a +musket. Stanislas looked at Charlie inquiringly. The latter shook +his head.</p> + +<p>"No, no! Stanislas. That gun would be heard twice as far as one +of these pistols. Let us wait until we are pretty sure that they +are near. I don't like leaving ourselves without other protection +than our axes."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: A Rescued Party.</h2> + +<p>After a considerable pause, a gun was again fired, this time +much nearer to them. Charlie drew out his pistol and was about to +reply, when his companion touched his arm.</p> + +<p>"Look!" he said.</p> + +<p>Charlie turned in time to see several gray forms flit rapidly +between the bushes. He stepped to the edge of the road, and saw +some wolves spring out through the bushes, and go straight along +the road.</p> + +<p>"What can have scared them?" he asked, in surprise. "The gun was +not near enough for that."</p> + +<p>"No, besides they would have fled deeper into the forest, +instead of taking to the road. Perhaps they hear something +coming."</p> + +<p>Almost at the same moment, two shots were heard in the direction +towards which the wolves were making.</p> + +<p>"That is it!" Charlie excitedly exclaimed. "Another body of +wolves have attacked a passing traveller. Heap the wood on, +Stanislas. If we make a great fire, and they get as far as this, +possibly they could spring off and take refuge here. At any rate, +the brands will be better weapons even than our axes."</p> + +<p>The ends of such branches as they were able to move were brought +together, and a few blows with their axes speedily broke off +several of the outer ends of charred wood. These were thrown on, +and the fire soon blazed up high again.</p> + +<p>Two more shots were heard, this time close at hand.</p> + +<p>They ran into the road. A sledge, with several figures in it, +was coming along at full speed. It was almost surrounded by wolves, +and, as they looked, two of them sprang at the horses' heads; but +two shots again rung out, and they dropped backwards among their +companions, many of whom threw themselves at once upon their +bodies, while the sledge continued on its headlong course.</p> + +<p>"Here! here!" Charlie shouted at the top of his voice, waving +his hands to show the direction which they were to take.</p> + +<p>A moment later the sledge dashed past them, and swept up to the +fire.</p> + +<p>"Seize the blazing brands!" Charlie shouted, as those in the +sledge threw themselves out.</p> + +<p>He and Stanislas rolled the two first wolves over with their +pistols, and then joined the others.</p> + +<p>The driver had run at once to the horses, and had muffled them, +by throwing his coat over the head of one, and a rug over the head +of the other, and, though snorting and trembling in every limb, +they stood quiet until he had thrown a head rope round each of +their necks, and fastened them to the heaviest of the branches. +Then he seized a handful of fallen leaves, which were exposed by +the melting of the snow above them, and threw them into the fire, +whence a dense smoke poured out.</p> + +<p>The wolves had again stopped to devour the two animals that had +been shot, and this gave time to the men, by their united efforts, +to move a heavy branch and place it across two others, whose ends +lay in the fire, so as to form with them a sort of triangular +breastwork, the face of which, next to them, was manned by the two +travellers, their servants, Charlie, and Stanislas, with blazing +brands.</p> + +<p>Charlie and his companion hastily loaded their pistols again. +The two gentlemen had each rifles and a brace of pistols, as had +their servants. A lady and child had been lifted from the sledge, +and these crouched down at the angle by the fire. The sledge and +the two horses protected one of the faces of the position, and the +driver, at his master's orders, took his position on the front seat +again, so as to shoot down any wolf that might try to attack the +flank of the outside horse.</p> + +<p>The wolves looked doubtful at the appearance of the dense smoke +rising up, but, after a little hesitation, they rushed to the +attack. Four were rolled over by bullets from the rifles, and, as +they came within a few yards, the pistols cracked out in rapid +succession. As soon as these were all emptied, the six men caught +up the blazing brands, and struck full in the faces of the wolves, +shouting loudly as they did so.</p> + +<p>Seized with a momentary panic, the animals turned and fled, and +then a fierce fight took place between the injured wolves and their +companions. There was but just time to recharge the rifles and +pistols, when they came on again. Although the fire of the +defenders was as deadly as before, the wolves seemed this time +determined to get at their victims. In vain were blows showered on +their heads, while those who first sprang on the tree were stabbed +with the knives the defenders held in their left hands.</p> + +<p>The contest could have had but one termination, when suddenly +two shots were heard, and then, with loud shouts, a party of men +burst through the forest, and with pistol and axe fell on the +wolves. This unexpected onslaught had a decisive effect, and, with +loud howls and yelps, the wolves turned and fled.</p> + +<p>Up to this time, not a word had been exchanged by the defenders, +beyond Charlie's first shout of "Lay this branch across those two," +and the order of one of the gentlemen to the coachman to take his +place in the sledge--where he had done his work well, for four +wolves lay dead by the flank of the outside horse. Several of those +that had sprung at the heads of the horses had been shot or cut +down by the master, who had placed himself close to them, and the +horses' thick mufflings had saved them from any serious injury.</p> + +<p>As soon as the wolves fled, the gentleman turned to Charlie, +and, flinging down his weapons, threw his arms round his neck.</p> + +<p>"You have preserved us from death, sir. You have saved my wife +and child from being torn to pieces. How can I express my thanks to +you?"</p> + +<p>"It was fortunate that we happened to be here," Charlie said, +"and that we had this fire handy."</p> + +<p>A cry from the child called off the gentleman's attention, and +he ran to his wife, who had sunk fainting on the ground; and +Charlie, not a little pleased at this diversion, turned to Ladislas +and his men, who were looking on with the most intense astonishment +at the scene. Charlie leapt over the branch, and grasped Ladislas +by the hand.</p> + +<p>"You have arrived at the nick of time, Ladislas. Another three +minutes, and it would have been all over with us."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I could see it was a close thing as soon as I caught sight +of you. We have been wondering all night what became of you, and +set out as soon as it was light. We fired a shot occasionally, but +we listened in vain for your three shots."</p> + +<p>"We fired them half an hour after daylight," Charlie said; "but, +as we had then only five charges left between us, and there were +wolves all round, we dared not waste them."</p> + +<p>"We heard firing at last," the captain went on. "First two shots +faintly, then two nearer, and a minute later two others. We knew +then that you must be engaged with wolves, and we were running as +hard as we could in the direction of the shots, when we heard a +number fired close together. Of course we could make nothing of it, +but on we ran. Then there was another outbreak of firing, this time +quite close. A moment later we caught sight of a confused mass. +There was a fire, and a sledge with two horses, and a man standing +up in it shooting; and we could see a desperate fight going on with +the wolves in front, so Alexander and Hugo fired their pieces into +the thick of them. We set up a yell, and went at them with our +axes, yet I did not feel by any means sure that they would not be +too many for us.</p> + +<p>"But what on earth does it all mean? And how is it that you have +lived through the night? We had no expectation of finding you +alive. However, that fire tells its own tale, as though nothing +less than burning up a big tree would content you."</p> + +<p>"I will tell you all, presently. It is too long a story now. Let +us help these travellers to go their way, before the wolves rally +again."</p> + +<p>"They will not do that," the captain said confidently. "If it +was night, they might hang about the neighbourhood, but they are +cowardly beasts in the daytime, and easily scared. They are still +going away at their best pace, I will be bound."</p> + +<p>While Charlie was speaking to Ladislas, one of the travellers +had been talking to Stanislas, who, in answer to his question, had +informed him that he was in Charlie's service, and that the latter +was an English gentleman, who had, from a variety of circumstances, +especially the suspicion with which all strangers were regarded, +been unable to travel through the country, and had therefore been +passing the winter hunting, with this company of disbanded soldiers +who had so opportunely arrived to their assistance.</p> + +<p>The other traveller had, by this time, carried his wife beyond +the heat of the fire, and had applied some snow to her forehead, +pouring a little brandy from the flask between her lips. She had +now begun to revive, and, leaving her, he approached the party. His +brother met him, and in a few words told him what he had learned +from Stanislas.</p> + +<p>"My friends," he said, "my brother tells me that you are a party +of discharged soldiers, who are passing the winter in a hut here in +the forest, supporting yourselves by shooting and fishing. I have +to thank Providence for the thought that sent you here. I have to +thank you for your prompt assistance, to which we are indebted for +our lives.</p> + +<p>"I am Count Nicholas Staroski, and can at least make a +substantial return for the service you have done me. My estates lie +some sixty miles to the north. You will have no difficulty in +finding me. Present yourselves there at Easter. I shall certainly +be at my chateau then. I will then talk over what can be done for +you. Those who like to settle down on land shall have land, those +who would like employment in my household shall have it, those who +would prefer money to go their own way and settle in their own +villages shall each have a heavy purse."</p> + +<p>Then he turned to Charlie.</p> + +<p>"You, sir, as my brother has learned from your brave follower +here, are an English gentleman. To you I owe far heavier obligation +than to these soldiers, for you and your man incurred a terrible +risk, and well-nigh sacrificed your lives for ours. I pray you come +with us, and stay with us for a time. I shall then hear your plans, +and your object in visiting this country, and if I can in any way +further them, you may be sure I will do so to the utmost; for the +present, I can promise you at least excellent hunting, and the +heartiest welcome."</p> + +<p>"I thank you very heartily, Count Staroski, and accept gladly +your invitation; but I must first speak to the captain of these +men, to whom I am much beholden for the kindness he has shown +me."</p> + +<p>He went across to Ladislas, who had heard what was said.</p> + +<p>"You will not think it ungrateful for me to quit you so +suddenly, Ladislas," he said in a low voice.</p> + +<p>"Assuredly not. You have done us a service, indeed, in thus +enabling us to obtain favour with the count. He is one of our +richest and most powerful nobles, and our fortunes are as good as +made."</p> + +<p>"I will introduce you to him personally," Charlie said.</p> + +<p>"This, count, is the leader of the party. He has shown me very +great kindness, and has proved a true friend. From what I have seen +of him, I have no doubt whatever that, in spite of certain acts of +lawlessness to which he and his friends have been driven of late, +you will find him, in any position you may be good enough to give +him, an honest and thoroughly trustworthy man."</p> + +<p>"I will bear it in mind," the count said. "Now, the sooner we +are off, the better. How far is it to the next village?"</p> + +<p>"About seven miles, count."</p> + +<p>The count gave orders for the sledge to be taken on to the road +again.</p> + +<p>"One moment," the captain said, taking Charlie aside. "Pray tell +us, in a few words, what has happened. The burning of the tree is a +mystery to us, and we shall die of curiosity if we have to remain +here for another two months with the matter unexplained."</p> + +<p>In as few words as possible, Charlie related to the men the +story of the preceding night, which was greeted with exclamations +of surprise and admiration.</p> + +<p>"Truly, you have your wits about you," the captain said. "I +should have been frozen to death, if I had been in your position, +for I should certainly never have thought of lighting a fire up in +a tree.</p> + +<p>"Well, goodbye, if we do not see you again, may all good fortune +attend you, and may the saints protect you from all danger."</p> + +<p>Charlie shook hands with the men all round, and then hurried +down to the sledge. The coachman was already in the front seat, the +countess and her child had taken their places, and the two armed +servants and Stanislas were standing behind, in readiness to jump +on to a board fastened above the runners.</p> + +<p>"I must apologize for keeping you waiting, countess," Charlie +said as he ran up. "I had to explain to my friends, in a few words, +how this had all come about."</p> + +<p>"We are also longing to know," the count said. "But I have not +yet introduced you to my wife, nor have I learned the name of the +gentleman to whom I owe so much."</p> + +<p>"Ah, sir," the young countess said, holding out her hand after +Charlie had given his name, "what do we not owe you? I shall never +forget it all, never."</p> + +<p>"We will talk when we have started, Feodora. Let us get out of +this forest as soon as we can."</p> + +<p>He took his place beside his wife, and set the child on his +knees; his brother and Charlie sitting opposite to him. The +servants spread a bearskin rug over their knees, and then jumped +into their places, as the driver cracked his whip, and the horses +started.</p> + +<p>"You must think us almost mad to be driving through the forest, +at this time of the year," the count said to Charlie. "But the +countess is a Russian. We have been staying two months at her +father's place, a hundred miles to the east. My two youngest +children are at home, and two days since a message arrived, saying +that one of them was dangerously ill. We had heard, of course, many +tales of the numbers and fierceness of the wolves, but we hoped +that, by travelling only by day and with excellent horses, there +was not much to fear, especially as we were five armed men.</p> + +<p>"We fell in with a few wolves yesterday, but beat them off +easily enough. Last night, we stopped at a little village in the +forest. They certainly made me feel uneasy there, with their tales +about the wolves, but there was no help for it. We started as soon +as day broke, and had driven some fifteen miles, before we came up +to you. We had not gone five when the wolves began to show +themselves.</p> + +<p>"At first, they kept well behind us, but presently we came upon +a large number, who joined in near where we saw an overturned +sledge, with the snow stained with blood all round it. From there +we kept up a running fight, and must have killed a score; but their +numbers increased, rather than diminished, and when a fresh pack +came up from ahead, a quarter of a mile before we saw you, it +looked as if our case was hopeless; for the horses, which had been +going at the top of their speed from the time we started, were +beginning to flag, while the wolves were fast closing in upon us, +and were just beginning to attack the horses, when I saw you in the +road.</p> + +<p>"And now, pray tell us how you came to be there so opportunely, +and how it was that you had that great fire blazing."</p> + +<p>Charlie gave the full history of the previous night's +adventure.</p> + +<p>"Wonderful!" the count and his brother exclaimed; and the former +went on: "I have heard many stories of escapes from wolves, but +never one like yours. It was an admirable thought, indeed, that of +at once obtaining heat and frightening the wolves away, by setting +the tree on fire. That thought saved our lives as well as your own, +for our fate would have been the same as those unfortunate +travellers, whose horses you saw, and who brought the wolves upon +you.</p> + +<p>"And now, sir, would it be impertinent to ask for what purpose +you have come to Poland? Believe me, I only put the question in +order to see if I can in any way be of assistance to you."</p> + +<p>"I do not know, count, whether my avowal will affect you +unfavourably, but I know that it will make no difference in your +conduct towards me. I am, as my servant told you, an Englishman by +birth; but I and my father were obliged, in consequence of +political opinions, to leave the country, and I am now a captain in +the service of Charles of Sweden."</p> + +<p>Exclamations of surprise broke from his hearers.</p> + +<p>"Well, sir," the count said, smiling, "as his majesty King +Charles, although not yet one-and-twenty, is one of the greatest +generals in Europe, I cannot consider it strange that you, who +appear to me to be no older, should be a captain in his service. +But I own that I pictured, to myself, that the officers of these +wonderful soldiers were fierce-looking men, regular iron +veterans."</p> + +<p>"I am but eighteen," Charlie said, "and I myself feel it absurd +that I should be a captain. It is but two years since I was +appointed an ensign, and the king happening to be with my company, +when we had a sharp fight with the Russians, he rewarded us by +having us made into a regiment; so each of us got promotion. I was +appointed captain last May, as a reward for a suggestion that +turned out useful."</p> + +<p>"May I ask what it was, Captain Carstairs, for it seems to me +that you are full of happy ideas?"</p> + +<p>"King Charles, as you may have heard, speaks freely to officers +and soldiers as he moves about the camp. I was standing on the edge +of the river, looking across at the Saxons, on the day before we +made the passage, when the king came up and spoke to me. He said +there was no hope of our passage being covered--as our advance +against the Russians at Narva had been--by a snowstorm; and I said +that, as the wind was at our backs, if we were to set fire to the +great straw stacks the smoke would hide our movements from the +Saxons. The idea was a very simple one, and would no doubt have +occurred to the king himself; however, he put it into execution +with success, and was good enough, afterwards, to promote me to the +rank of captain."</p> + +<p>"So it was owing to you that our army--or rather the Saxon army, +for but few Poles were engaged in the battle--was defeated," the +count said, smiling. "Well, sir, it will do you no harm with us, +for personally we are entirely opposed to Augustus of Saxony. But +you have not yet explained how you, an officer in the Swedish +service, came to be here."</p> + +<p>"I was sent by King Charles to Warsaw, to ascertain the feeling +of the trading classes there. I had an introduction to a Scottish +merchant, and I passed as a countryman of his, who had come out to +enter his business. One of the objects of my mission was to +endeavour to induce the foreign merchants in Warsaw to do what they +could to promote a feeling in favour of peace with the Swedes, and +the substitution of another king in place of Augustus."</p> + +<p>"It is not very clear, Captain Carstairs, how you can be +fulfilling that object by passing your winter with a party of +robbers--for I suppose your disbanded soldiers were little +better--in a forest on the confines of Russia."</p> + +<p>Charlie laughed.</p> + +<p>"It is rather a long story, count. Perhaps you will kindly tell +me the news about public affairs, first."</p> + +<p>"By no means," the count said. "That is a long story, too, and +my wife would much rather hear yours than listen to it. She has not +yet recovered from the events of this morning. But we will wait +until we are at the village. We have left the forest behind us, and +another half hour will take us to Stromoff, where we can get pretty +good accommodation."</p> + +<p>The horses, a splendid pair of animals, had, during their +passage through the forest, shown every sign of fear; starting +nervously, swerving, and going in sharp, sudden rushes, and always +needing a constant strain on the reins to keep them from bolting. +Once away from the trees, however, they settled down into a fast +trot, and the seven miles to Stromoff were done in less than half +an hour.</p> + +<p>No sooner did the landlord of the inn learn the name of his +guest, than he, his wife, and sons bustled about in the greatest +haste to make things comfortable for them. Huge fires were lighted +in the guest rooms, and the common room was cleared of the other +customers, until the chamber should be sufficiently warmed for +occupation; while in the kitchen preparations were made for a meal, +to which, in half an hour from their arrival, the party in the +sledge sat down. When this was over, settles were placed round the +fire, and Charlie then gave a full account of his adventures, from +the time he was attacked in the streets of Warsaw.</p> + +<p>"So it was you, Captain Carstairs, after whom there was so keen +a search in September. The death of Ben Soloman made a great stir, +and I can assure you that there are a great many people who owe you +a debt of gratitude. The man had no sons, and all his property +passed to his widow, whom he had, it seems, treated harshly during +his lifetime. She was from Holland, and wished to return to her +people, so, as his means were very large, she made the easiest +terms with all those on whose estates her husband had held +mortgages, in order to wind up her affairs as soon as possible. +Thus, his death was the subject of wide rejoicings. However, if you +had been caught at the time, I fear it would have gone hard with +you; for the Jews were all very keen about it--as the man, rascal +though he was, was one of the chief heads of their religion--and +were you to fall into their hands in any of the towns, they would +either kill you or send you to Warsaw."</p> + +<p>"And now, sir, will you tell me what has taken place since +September?"</p> + +<p>"Things have moved slowly. Augustus endeavoured, after his +defeat on the Dwina, to make peace with Charles on his own account, +and without the knowledge of the diet, but Charles refused to give +audience to any of his agents, and would not even see the beautiful +Countess of Konigsmark, who is, you know, herself a Swede, and whom +Augustus sent, thinking that her blandishments might win over the +young king. It was useless. Charles maintained the ground that he +took up from the first--namely, that he would treat with the diet, +but would have nothing whatever to say to Augustus. So the diet +sent an embassy of four senators.</p> + +<p>"Instead of receiving them with every pomp and ceremony, as they +expected, the king met them on horseback. He demanded that, as a +first condition, they should dethrone Augustus. Parties in the diet +were pretty equally divided; but the proposal was rejected, for +even those most hostile to Augustus resented the proposal that we, +a free and unconquered people, should be ordered by a foreign +prince to change our king. So nothing came of it.</p> + +<p>"The Swedish army advanced a certain distance into Poland, and +there were a great number of skirmishes, but there has been no +serious fighting, nor is there much chance of any, until the snow +has gone and the country dried up in the spring. At present, +Augustus is quarrelling with the diet, who still set themselves +against the importation of more Saxon troops. But doubtless, before +the campaign begins in earnest, he will have settled matters with +the senators, and will have his own way in that respect. There is, +however, little chance of the diet agreeing to call out the whole +forces of the country, and the next battle will, like the last, be +between the Swedes and the Saxons, who may have with them perhaps a +few thousand Poles, belonging to the king's party."</p> + +<p>"You don't belong to the king's party, count?"</p> + +<p>"No. I, like the majority of our nobles, have no interest +whatever in the war, for we were never consulted before it began. +It is an affair between Saxony and the Swedes. Let them fight it +out. It would be a bad day for Poland, if Augustus and the Russians +were to overcome and despoil Sweden. We want no addition of +territory, for that would be to strengthen our kings against us. We +see the trouble caused by Augustus having Saxony at his command, +and if he had other territory, the country would be divided into +two parts, one of which would have nothing in common with the +other.</p> + +<p>"Still less do we wish to see Russia gain territory to the north +of us. Hitherto we have thought but little of the Muscovites, but +this war has shown that they can put great armies into the field, +and the czar is making them into a nation which may some day be +formidable to us.</p> + +<p>"Charles has sent every assurance that he has no ill will +towards Poland, and is an enemy not of the country but of its +king--who had formed a coalition against him in a time of profound +peace--and that his hostility will altogether cease with the +overthrow and expulsion of Augustus. So you see, we who live at a +distance from the capital, and hold ourselves altogether aloof from +the intrigues of court, look on at the fray as if it were one in +which we have no part or lot. If Augustus drives out the Swedes, we +shall probably have trouble with him afterwards. If Charles drives +out Augustus, we shall have a fresh king, and shall no doubt choose +one upon the recommendation of Charles, who will then march away +again, leaving us to manage our own affairs. Therefore, we have no +animosity whatever against you as a Swedish officer, but for +comfort's sake it is better that nothing should be said of this, +and that I should introduce you to my friends simply as an English +gentleman, who has rendered me the greatest possible service."</p> + +<p>The countess retired to bed, a short time after they had +finished their meal, and the others sat up talking until late in +the evening. Charlie learnt that the country was still in a greatly +disturbed state. Parties of disbanded soldiers and others, rendered +desperate by cold and hardship, were everywhere plundering the +peasantry, and many encounters had taken place between them and the +nobles, who, with their retainers, had marched against them. Travel +would be dangerous for a long time to come.</p> + +<p>"Therefore, until the spring, you must not think of moving," the +count said. "Indeed, I think that your best plan, when you start, +will be to work due north, and join the Swedish forces near Narva. +It will be shorter as well as less dangerous. Still, we can talk of +that later on."</p> + +<p>The next morning they started early, and arrived in the +afternoon at the chateau of the count. It was not a fortified +building, for the Poles differed from the western nations, +abstaining from fortifying their towns and residences, upon the +ground that they were a free people, capable of defending their +country from foreign invasion, and therefore requiring no fortified +towns, and that such places added to the risks of civil war, and +enabled factions to set the will of the nation at defiance.</p> + +<p>The building was a large one, but it struck Charlie as being +singularly plain and barn-like in comparison with the residences of +country gentlemen in England. A number of retainers ran out as they +drove up into the courtyard, and exclamations of surprise and +dismay rose, as the wounds on the horses' flanks and legs were +visible; and when, in a few words, the count told them that they +had been attacked by wolves, and had been saved principally by the +English gentleman and his follower, the men crowded round Charlie, +kissed his hands, and in other ways tried to show their gratitude +for his rescue of their master and mistress.</p> + +<p>"Come along," the count said, taking his arm and leading him +into the house. "The poor fellows mean well, and you must not be +vexed with them."</p> + +<p>The countess's first question had been for her child, and with +an exclamation of thankfulness, when she heard that it was better, +she had at once hurried into the house. As soon as they had +entered, the count left Charlie in charge of his brother, and also +hurried away. He was not long before he returned.</p> + +<p>"The child is doing well," he said, "and now that it has got its +mother again, it will, I think, improve rapidly. The doctor said +this morning that he considered it out of danger, but that it +needed its mother sorely, to cheer and pet it."</p> + +<p>In a very short time the tables were laid. The count, his +brother, and Charlie sat at an upper table, and the hall was filled +with the various officers and retainers. The count's arrival was +expected, for a horseman had been sent forward on their arrival at +the inn the evening before. The dinner had therefore been cooked in +readiness, and Charlie was astonished at the profusion with which +it was served. Fish, joints, great pies, and game of many kinds +were placed on the table in unlimited quantities; the drink being a +species of beer, although excellent wine was served at the high +table. He could now understand how often the Polish nobles +impoverished themselves by their unbounded hospitality and love of +display.</p> + +<p>"I suppose, for tomorrow, you will like to remain quiet," the +count said, "but after that we will try to amuse you. There is game +of all sorts to be shot, or if you have had enough sport, lately, +there will be a sledge and horses at your disposal, whenever you +choose to ride or drive, and in a few days we will give an +entertainment, in honour at once of our return, your visit, and the +child's restoration to health. Then you will have an opportunity of +seeing our national dances."</p> + +<p>Charlie had had enough shooting, but he greatly enjoyed the +drives in the sledges, behind the spirited horses. The +entertainment came off a fortnight after his arrival at the +chateau. The guests, for the most part, arrived early in the +afternoon, many having driven in from great distances. The +preparations had been on an immense scale, and the scene at night +was a brilliant one.</p> + +<p>Never had Charlie seen anything like the magnificence of the +dresses, not of the ladies only, but also of the gentlemen; the +Poles having the true oriental love for rich costumes, a taste that +their national dress permitted them to gratify to the utmost. Next +to the splendour of the dresses, Charlie was surprised at the grace +and spirit of the dancing, which was far more vivacious than that +of western nations. The Poles were long considered to be the best +dancers in the world. It was their great national amusement; and +all danced, from noble to peasant, entering into it with spirit and +enthusiasm, and uniting the perfection of rhythmical motion with +the grace and ease peculiar to them, and to their kinsmen the +Hungarians.</p> + +<p>The dancing was kept up, with unflagging energy, during the +whole night; and then, after a substantial breakfast, the men and +women were muffled up in furs, and took their places in the +sledges.</p> + +<p>The count would gladly have had Charlie remain with him until +spring began, but he was anxious to rejoin the army; and, seeing +that this was so, the count did everything in his power to +facilitate his journey, which, after talking it over, had been +decided should be direct towards the royal camp. The count's +brother insisted upon accompanying him on the journey, as in this +way many of the difficulties would be avoided. Two sledges were +prepared, the one for the use of Charlie and Count John, and the +other for the two servants and baggage. Both were horsed by the +fastest animals in the count's stables.</p> + +<p>Charlie himself had been loaded with presents, which he had been +obliged somewhat reluctantly to accept, as he saw that a refusal +would hurt and mortify his kind hosts. He had, on his arrival, been +provided with an ample wardrobe of clothes of all kinds, and to +these were now added dolmans, cloaks, rugs, and most costly furs. A +splendid gun, pistols, and a sword, with the hilt studded with +gems, completed his outfit; while Stanislas had been presented with +a heavy purse of money.</p> + +<p>The whole of the retainers of the castle were assembled to see +them start, and the count and countess, at parting, made him +promise to come and pay them another visit, if the fortune of war +should bring him within the possibility of reaching them.</p> + +<p>The journey was a delightful one. Each night they put up at the +chateau of some nobleman. To many of these Count John Staroski was +personally known; at the others, his name secured at once a hearty +welcome for himself and his companion. Travelling only by day, and +at the full speed of the horses, they escaped interruption by the +marauding bands, and in fourteen days after starting they drove +into the town where Charles of Sweden had his headquarters, after +being twice stopped and questioned by bodies of Swedish horse.</p> + +<p>The town was crowded with troops, and they had some difficulty +in finding a lodging for themselves, and stabling for the horses. +As soon as this was done, Charlie proceeded alone to the quarters +of Count Piper.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: The Battle Of Clissow.</h2> + +<p>Charlie sent in his name, and was shown in at once.</p> + +<p>"I am glad, indeed, to see you, Captain Carstairs," the minister +said, as he entered. "We had given you up for lost. We heard first +that you had been murdered in the streets of Warsaw. A month later, +a man brought a letter to me from your Scotch friend Ramsay, to say +that you were accused of the murder of a Jew trader, a man, it +seems, of some importance in Warsaw. Ramsay said that you were in +the company of a band of brigands, and that the man who went with +you as your servant had joined you, and had taken you some money. +He forwarded the letter you had sent him explaining your position, +and said he thought that, upon the whole, it was the best thing you +could have done, as a vigorous search had been set on foot, at the +instance of the Jews, and there would have been but little chance +of your making your way through the country alone. He added that he +felt confident that, if alive, you would manage somehow to rejoin +us before the campaign opened in the spring.</p> + +<p>"I am glad that you have been able to do so, but your +appearance, at present, is rather that of a wealthy Polish noble, +than of a companion of brigands."</p> + +<p>"I was able to do some service to Count Staroski, as, when +travelling with his wife and child, and his brother, Count John, he +was attacked by a pack of wolves. I have been staying with him for +some weeks, and his brother has now had the kindness to accompany +me here. He has thereby made my passage through the country easy, +as we have travelled with fast horses in his sledge, and have +always put up at the chateaux of nobles of his acquaintance. I +have, therefore, avoided all risk of arrest at towns. In the letter +forwarded to you I explained the real circumstances of the death of +the Jew."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we quite understood that, Captain Carstairs. You had a +very narrow escape from death at his hands, and, as the danger was +incurred purely in the king's service, it will not be forgotten. Up +to the time when the Jew organized the attack upon you in Warsaw, I +was well satisfied with your reports of your work. So far nothing +has come of it, as Augustus has been too strong for any movement +against him, but we hope, ere long, to defeat him so decisively +that our friends will be able to declare against him. I will inform +the king of your return, and I have no doubt he will be glad to +hear your story from your own lips. He loves tales of adventure, +and time hangs somewhat heavily on hand, as, until the frost +breaks, nothing can be done in the field."</p> + +<p>On the following day, indeed, Charlie was sent for to the royal +quarters, and had to recount the story of his adventures in full to +the king, who was highly interested in them, and at the conclusion +requested him to introduce Count John Staroski, in order that he +might express to him his obligation for the service he had rendered +to one of his officers. This done, Charlie drove out with the count +to the village where Colonel Jamieson's regiment was quartered, and +where his return was received with delight by Harry, and with great +pleasure by Major Jervoise and his fellow officers. He was obliged +to give a short outline of what he had been doing since he left, +but put off going into details for a future occasion.</p> + +<p>"And are you coming back to us now, Charlie?" Harry asked.</p> + +<p>"Certainly. My success in the diplomatic way was not +sufficiently marked for them to be likely to employ me in that line +again. We must return this afternoon, as the king has invited us +both to sup with him tonight."</p> + +<p>Two days later, Count John Staroski started upon his return +journey, much pleased with the reception he had met with from the +King of Sweden, and determined to work vigorously, among the nobles +of his acquaintance, to bring about the dethronement of Augustus of +Saxony. Charlie had already seen Count Piper, who had told him +that, although the king and himself were both well satisfied with +the work he had done, there was not at present any mission of the +same sort on which he could be employed. Indeed, it was evident +that, until the Saxons had been decisively defeated, political +action would be useless, and that, therefore, for the present he +could either remain at headquarters, or rejoin his regiment. +Charlie at once chose the latter alternative.</p> + +<p>"Very well, Captain Carstairs, you can rejoin when you like, but +remember I may claim your services again. You see, now that you +have acquired a knowledge of Polish, your value for this sort of +work is largely increased."</p> + +<p>As soon as the frost had broken, the Swedish army commenced its +advance. Skirmishes frequently took place, but Augustus had, as +yet, no army with which he could meet them in the field, and he +summoned a diet at Warsaw, in hopes of persuading the Poles to +decide upon calling out the whole national force.</p> + +<p>In this he failed altogether. The citizens, led by the foreign +traders, were already openly opposed to him, and their attitude so +encouraged his opponents in the diet, that many of these rose and +openly denounced the government, and the conduct of the king, that +had brought the country into its present difficulties.</p> + +<p>As the Swedish army advanced, they were joined by the Duke of +Holstein, and, in spite of the efforts of a considerable body of +the enemy, under Prince Wisniowiski, progressed steadily, crossed +the river Memel, and, when near Grodno, were met by an embassy sent +by the diet, to endeavour to persuade Charles not to advance +further.</p> + +<p>An interview took place between the king, the Poles, and his +ministers, the conversation on both sides being in Latin. But as +the ambassadors had no definite plans to propose, and their leaders +were wholly devoted to Augustus, the king refused to allow his +advance to be arrested, and continued his march. When near Praga +they crossed the plain where Charles Gustavus, King of Sweden, had +defeated the Polish army in a great battle, that had lasted for +three days. The city was occupied, and a contribution of 20,000 +crowns imposed upon it, in addition to food for the army while it +remained there. Plundering, however, was strictly forbidden, and, +as the king issued a proclamation declaring that he was no enemy of +the Polish Republic, but simply of their king, the inhabitants +were, on the whole, well satisfied with the conduct of the +invaders.</p> + +<p>A halt was made here for some time, and a bridge was thrown +across the Vistula, while the army rested after the long and +fatiguing marches it had made. A fresh attempt was made to arrest +the advance of the Swedes, and the Cardinal Primate, himself, met +the king; but nothing came of the negotiations, and the army +entered Warsaw. Here they were warmly received, and great +entertainments were given to the king.</p> + +<p>Towards the end of June, they again advanced to meet the force +that Augustus had gathered, and on the 6th of July the Swedes +arrived within a few miles of Clissow. The next day some +reinforcements arrived, and the king decided to give battle on the +following day, which was the anniversary of the victory on the +Dwina, the previous year.</p> + +<p>His army was twelve thousand strong, while that of Augustus was +nearly double that strength, and was very strongly posted, his camp +being surrounded by morasses, although situated on rising ground +which commanded the whole of the country round it. The bogs in the +front were found to be so impassable, that the Swedes were forced +to make a circuit to the left, where the ground was firmer. This +movement obliged the enemy also to change front, a movement that +caused considerable confusion, as they themselves were forced to +traverse boggy ground, to take up a new position facing that by +which the Swedes would now advance.</p> + +<p>The attack was commenced by the division commanded by the Duke +of Holstein, but, scarcely had he set his troops in motion than he +was mortally wounded, by a ball from a falconet. His troops, +however, pushed forward vigorously. The Polish division opposed to +them resisted the two first assaults bravely, but gave way at the +third attack, and were driven from the ground, in such confusion +that they took no further part in the engagement.</p> + +<p>While this was going on, the Saxon cavalry had been repulsed by +that of Charles, and, passing in their retreat under the fire of +three infantry regiments, suffered so heavily that they left the +field. The Swedish foot now advanced all along the line, and in the +centre destroyed several battalions of Saxons.</p> + +<p>But the Swedish right was attacked so vigorously by the Saxon +left, under Field Marshal Steinau, that for a time the conflict was +doubtful. The Swedish horse guards and other cavalry, however, +charged with such determination that the Saxon horse on this flank +were also defeated, and driven off the field, while the Swedish +infantry, advancing without firing, drove several battalions of +Saxon foot into a village, where, being surrounded, almost all were +killed or taken prisoners.</p> + +<p>The Saxon horse, gathering once more, attempted bravely to +retrieve the fate of the day, and engaged the Swedish horse with +such desperate valour, that a considerable portion of the Saxon +infantry were enabled, under cover of the conflict, to draw off, +cross the morasses, and make their escape.</p> + +<p>The battle lasted four hours, and had been, throughout, severely +contested. The Saxons lost four thousand killed and wounded, and +three thousand taken prisoners, while the Swedes had eleven hundred +killed and wounded. Forty-eight cannon were captured by the +victors, together with all the baggage and waggons. The death of +the Duke of Holstein, a gallant prince who was exceedingly popular +with the army, and beloved by the king, cast a gloom over this +great victory, which virtually laid Poland at the feet of the +victors, and insured the fulfilment of the object for which Charles +had persisted in the war.</p> + +<p>Jamieson's regiment had been on the left wing, but, as it had +been held in reserve, to strengthen the line at any point at which +it might give way, the Scotch had taken but a small share in the +fighting, and had but thirty men killed and wounded by the shot and +bullets that passed over the heads of the fighting line.</p> + +<p>The captain of one of the companies was among those killed, and +Charlie, who had, since he rejoined the regiment, been doing duty +as lieutenant, now took the vacant place.</p> + +<p>The army still advanced. Augustus sent in several proposals for +peace, but these were all rejected. The Saxons had speedily rallied +after the battle, but were not in a position to oppose the advance +of the victorious Swedes, who occupied Cracow without meeting with +any resistance. Seeing that Augustus would not be strong enough to +hazard another pitched battle, Charles had, on the morning after +the victory, ordered three of his regiments, of which Jamieson's +was one, to march with all speed to reinforce Major General +Schlippenbach, who had sent an urgent request for aid, as he heard +that the Russian army, fifty thousand strong, was preparing to +cross the frontier; and as he had but six thousand, he could not +hope to oppose their advance successfully.</p> + +<p>As the king's orders enjoined the troops to march with the +greatest possible speed, they performed the journey back to Warsaw +in four days, although the distance exceeded a hundred miles. +Mounted messengers had been sent on before them, and, on reaching +the town, they found boats already prepared to take them down the +river to Danzic, where orders had already been sent for ships to be +in readiness to convey them to Revel. The fatigues since the +campaign opened had been severe, and the troops all enjoyed the +long days of rest, while the craft that conveyed them dropped +quietly down the Vistula. Then came the short sea passage.</p> + +<p>On their arrival at Revel, bad news met them. They had come too +late. On the 16th of July the Russian army had passed the frontier, +and the Swedes had tried to oppose them at the passage of the river +Embach; but the water was low, from the effects of a long drought, +and the Russians were enabled to ford it at several points. The +Swedes fell upon those who first crossed, and for two hours +repulsed their attacks, obtaining at some points considerable +advantage, and capturing some guns, but, as fresh reinforcements +poured across the river, the tide of battle turned. The Russian +cavalry drove back the Swedish horse, who, as they retreated, rode +through the infantry and threw them into disorder. These were +attacked by the Russians before they could recover from their +confusion, and were almost entirely destroyed or taken +prisoners.</p> + +<p>The general, and many of the mounted officers, effected their +escape, rallied the broken cavalry, and fell back towards Revel. +The Russians spread over the country and plundered it, burning the +little town of Valk, murdering its inhabitants, and carrying off +into slavery the whole of the population who fell into their +hands.</p> + +<p>The arrival of the three regiments was hailed with much +satisfaction by the people of Revel, who feared that the Russians +might besiege the town. They did not, however, approach within many +miles, but, after completely wasting the country, retired across +the frontier.</p> + +<p>The victory that had been gained over the Swedes at Embach, and +the destruction of the greater part of General Schlippenbach's +force, enabled the czar to turn his arms against Ingria, the +extreme eastern province of Sweden, which included the shores of +Lake Ladoga and the whole of the coast of the Baltic between Narva +and Finland. Urgent messages were sent by the governor of that +province to General Schlippenbach, requesting him to send him aid, +as he had not even sufficient men to garrison the walled towns. The +general was, however, afraid that Narva would be again besieged, +and he therefore dared not reduce his small force to any +considerable degree, but drew one company from each of the three +regiments, and embarked them on board a ship for the mouth of the +Neva.</p> + +<p>As there seemed little prospect of service, for a time, near +Revel, all the officers were eager that their company should be +chosen for the service in Ingria. Colonel Jamieson therefore +said:</p> + +<p>"I do not wish to choose one company more than another; all can +equally be depended upon. Therefore, I think the fairest way will +be to draw lots as to which shall go."</p> + +<p>The lot fell upon Charlie's company, which therefore formed part +of the expedition. On reaching the mouth of the Neva, they heard +that the town of Notteburg, situated at the point where the Neva +issues from the lake, was already besieged by the Russians, and +that the Swedish vessels on the lake had been obliged to come down +the river. A fort had been raised by the Russians on the bank, to +prevent succour being conveyed into the town, and two thousand men +had crossed the river and occupied a small redoubt on the northern +side, so that the town was completely invested.</p> + +<p>The newly-arrived force was ordered to march, at once, with a +hundred horse and four field pieces, the whole under the command of +Major Sion, who was well acquainted with the country.</p> + +<p>"What do you think of this expedition, Captain Carstairs?" his +lieutenant, John Bowyer, asked him.</p> + +<p>"I would rather be back with King Charles," Charlie replied. "Of +course, I don't know the geography of the place, but if the +Russians keep their eyes at all open, I don't see how a force like +ours, with cavalry and guns, can hope to enter the town unnoticed. +The addition of the horsemen seems to me altogether ridiculous, as +they could be no good whatever, if they did enter the town. As for +those four field pieces, they will hamper our march; and as they +say the Russians have already some forty cannon in position about +the town, those little pieces would be useless.</p> + +<p>"Four hundred infantry, making the attempt at night under good +guidance, might manage to slip into the place, but this procession +of ours is, to my mind, tempting destruction, for we certainly +cannot hope to cut our way, by force, through the whole Russian +army.</p> + +<p>"But even if we do get inside the town, our plight can be no +better. The Russians' cannon are bombarding it, night and day, and +more batteries are in course of erection, and Schlippenbach the +governor, who is, I believe, a brother of the general, has but a +few pieces to reply to them.</p> + +<p>"Were there an army advancing to the relief of the place, it +would be different altogether, for our reinforcement might be of +vital importance in repelling assaults, until aid arrived. But +there is no hope of aid. The king's army is some nine hundred miles +away, and his hands are full. General Schlippenbach has sent as +many men as he could spare. They say there are at least twenty +thousand Russians round the town, and where is an army to come from +that can compel them to raise the siege? To my mind, we shall +either be destroyed making our way into the town, or, if we do get +in, shall be made prisoners of war, if not massacred--for the +Russians have but vague ideas as to giving quarter--when the town +falls, which may be a fortnight hence."</p> + +<p>"It seems a bad lookout, altogether," the lieutenant +remarked.</p> + +<p>"Very much so. The best possible thing that could befall us +would be for the Russians to make us out, before we get too far +into their lines, in which case we may be able to fall back before +they can gather in overwhelming strength, and may thus draw off +without any very great loss."</p> + +<p>Major Sion called the captains of the infantry companies, and +the troop of horse, to a sort of council of war, when the little +force halted for an hour at three o'clock in the afternoon.</p> + +<p>"We have another ten miles to march, gentlemen, and I should +like to ask your opinion as to whether it would be best to try to +force our way in as soon as we get there, or to halt at a distance +of three or four miles from the Russians, and make our effort at +daybreak before they are fairly afoot."</p> + +<p>The other three officers gave their opinion in order of +seniority, and all advocated the plan of falling upon the +Muscovites at daybreak.</p> + +<p>"And what do you think, Captain Carstairs?" Major Sion asked +Charlie.</p> + +<p>"I regret to say, major, that my opinion differs from that of +the other gentlemen, and this for several reasons. In the first +place, if we halt so near the Russians, our presence in their +neighbourhood may be betrayed by a peasant, and we may be surprised +in the night. If no such mishap should take place, we should have +to be on foot two hours before sunrise. I in no way doubt your +knowledge of the road, but it is at all times difficult to make out +a mere track, like that we are following, at night, and in the +morning we might well find ourselves involved in the Russian +intrenchments, from which we could not extricate ourselves before a +large force had gathered round us, in which case we must be all +either killed or taken prisoners. My own suggestion would be that +we should remain here another two hours, and then continue our +march so as to reach the spot, where we are to endeavour to break +through their line, about sunset. Should we be observed, as we most +likely should be, we might at that hour be taken for a +freshly-arrived body of Russian troops. There would be no risk of +losing our way, and we might hope to be close upon them before we +were discovered to be enemies. If we succeed, as I trust we shall, +in breaking our way through and reaching the town, well and good. +If, on the other hand, we find greater obstacles than we expect, +and are forced to fall back fighting, we shall have the advantage +that darkness will be setting in. The Russians, the greater part of +whom will be ignorant of our strength, will lose time before they +move, fearing they may be assaulted in other quarters, and in the +darkness we might be able to make good our escape, which it is +certain none of us would do, should we meet with a repulse at +daybreak."</p> + +<p>"Your reasons are very just, Captain Carstairs. Though certainly +my opinion was in accordance with that given by your fellow +officers, I am bound to say that your argument seems +unanswerable.</p> + +<p>"What say you, gentlemen? I have two objects in view--the first +to reinforce the garrison of Notteburg, the second to save the +troops under my command, if I should fail in doing so. I know the +country well, but its features will be considerably altered. Trees +will have been cut down, houses levelled, intrenchments thrown up, +camps scattered here and there, and I own that in the dark, I +might, as Captain Carstairs says, very easily miss my way. I think +his proposal therefore unites the greatest chances of getting +through their line and entering the town, with a possibility of +drawing off the troops without great loss, in case of failure."</p> + +<p>The other three officers at once agreed, and orders were issued +for the men to lie down until five o'clock and rest themselves +before pursuing their march.</p> + +<p>It was past that hour before they were in motion again. Major +Sion, with a peasant from the neighbourhood of Notteburg, rode +ahead. Then came the troop of cavalry, with the guns close behind +them, followed by the infantry. As they approached the Russian +lines, the peasant several times went on in advance, and presently +a trooper rode down the line, with the order that the troops with +firearms were to light their matches, and the spearmen to keep in a +compact body.</p> + +<p>They were now not far from the Russian lines, and the +destruction that had been wrought during the last ten days was +visible to them. Every tree and bush had been felled, for use in +the intrenchments or for the erection of shelters. A few blackened +walls alone showed where houses had stood. Gardens had been +destroyed, and orchards levelled.</p> + +<p>Light smoke could be seen rising at many points from the Russian +fires, and, when the troops were halted, they were but half a mile +from the intrenchments.</p> + +<p>Word was passed down that the rapid Swedish march was to be +moderated, and that they were to move carelessly and at a slow +rate, as if fatigued by a long march, and that the spears were to +be carried at the trail, as they were so much longer than those +used by the Russians that their length would, if carried erect, at +once betray the nationality of the troops. There was no attempt at +concealment, for the cavalry would be visible for a considerable +distance across the flat country. Considerable bodies of men could +be seen, gathered round fires at a distance of not more than a +quarter of a mile on either hand, but, as the column passed between +them, there was no sign of any stir.</p> + +<p>In a short time, the order was passed for the troops to form +from column into line, and the cavalry officer who brought it said +that there was a Russian battery erected right across the road, a +little more than a quarter of a mile ahead.</p> + +<p>"Things look better, Captain Carstairs," the lieutenant said, as +the company, which happened to be leading, fell into line.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have no doubt we shall take their battery, coming down, +as we do, upon its rear. The question is, are there any +intrenchments ahead? Major Sion told us, when we halted, that the +peasant assured him that there were no works beyond it, and that it +was the weakest point of the line; but it is three days since he +came out from Notteburg, and, working hard as the Russians +evidently do, they may have pushed on their intrenchments far in +advance of the battery by this time."</p> + +<p>The force halted for a moment. The guns were unlimbered, turned +round, and loaded. Then the line of cavalry opened right and left, +the four pieces poured a discharge of grape into the Russians, +clustered thickly in the battery four hundred yards away, and then, +with a shout, the Swedish cavalry charged, the infantry coming on +at a run behind them.</p> + +<p>The surprise was complete. With cries of terror, the Russians +for the most part leapt from the battery and fled, and the few who +attempted to defend their guns were sabred by the cavalry.</p> + +<p>"There are other works ahead!" Major Sion exclaimed, as, sitting +on his horse, he looked over the parapet, "and bodies of troops +scattered all about. Push forward, men, at a double, and do you, +Captain Sherlbach, cut a way for us with your cavalry."</p> + +<p>The sun had set a few minutes before the guns were fired, and +Charlie, as he led his men over the earthwork, and saw the Russian +lines in front, congratulated himself upon the fact that, in +another half hour, it would be quite dark. As they approached the +next line of works, a scattering fire of musketry opened upon them, +but the aim was wide, and without loss they reached the work. The +Russians, though inferior in numbers, defended themselves +obstinately, and continually received reinforcements of bodies of +men, running up from all sides. In five minutes the Swedes cleared +the works of them, but, as they prepared to advance again, they saw +a large body of horse riding down to bar their advance, while +numbers of footmen were running to occupy some intrenchments ahead +of them. Trumpets were sounding to the right, left, and rear.</p> + +<p>"We cannot force our way farther," the major said to Charlie. +"We knew nothing of these works, and they are fatal to our +enterprise. We must retreat while we can. Do you not think so?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir, I think the enterprise is quite hopeless."</p> + +<p>The order was given. The troops faced about, formed into closer +order, and at the double retraced their steps, the spearmen of each +company forming its front line, and the musketeers the second.</p> + +<p>Already it was growing dusk. The cavalry, riding ahead, +scattered the small bodies of men who threw themselves in their +way, and the battery they had first taken was entered without loss. +There was a momentary halt here, for the men to recover their wind. +Then the musketeers poured a volley into a dark line advancing upon +them, the horsemen charged in among them, the long pikes of the +front line cleared the way, and, with a shout, the Swedes passed +through their foes and pressed forward.</p> + +<p>But more troops were gathering to bar their way, and the major +changed the line of march sharply to the right, sweeping along by +the side of the force through which they had just cut their way, +the musketeers on the flank firing into them as they passed. The +movement was an adroit one, for in the gathering darkness the enemy +in front would not be able to distinguish friends from foes, or to +perceive the nature of the movement. For a few minutes they were +unmolested, then the course was again changed, and Charlie was +beginning to think that, in the darkness, they would yet make their +escape, when a dull heavy sound was heard in their rear.</p> + +<p>"That's the Russian cavalry, Bowyer. Take the musketeers on with +you, and keep close to the company ahead. I will break them up with +the pikemen. If they do come up to you, give them a volley and then +continue your retreat with the rest."</p> + +<p>While the captains of the other two companies had placed their +pikemen in the front line, Charlie had placed his in the rear, in +order to repel any attack of cavalry from that direction. He now +formed them in a close clump, taking his place among them. The +Russian squadrons came along with a deep roll like that of thunder. +They were but thirty yards away when they perceived the little +cluster of men with levelled lances. A few, unable to check their +horses, rushed upon the points, but most of them reined in their +little steeds in time. In a moment, the Swedes were surrounded by a +wall of yelling horsemen, some of whom tried to break through the +hedge of spears, while others discharged their pistols.</p> + +<p>Charlie listened anxiously for the roll of a volley of musketry, +but no sound came, and he felt sure that the whole body of cavalry +had halted round him, and that his movement had saved the rest, who +would now, if fortunate, be able to make their way off in the +darkness. But the men were falling now from the pistol fire of the +Cossacks, and, feeling that the work had been done, he determined +to make one effort to save the men with him.</p> + +<p>"Level your spears, and charge through them shoulder to +shoulder," he said. "It is your only chance. Once through, throw +away your spears, and break up in the darkness. Most of you may +escape.</p> + +<p>"Now!"</p> + +<p>With a shout, the Swedes rushed forward in a body. Horses and +riders went down before them. There was a rush from behind. Charlie +shouted to the rear rank, to face about, but in the confusion and +din his words were unheard. There was a brief struggle in the +darkness. Charlie emptied his pistols, and cut down more than one +of his opponents, then a sword fell on his shoulder, while at the +same moment he was ridden over by a Cossack, and was stunned by the +force of his fall.</p> + +<p>When he recovered consciousness, several men with torches were +moving about him, and, at the orders of an officer, were examining +the bodies of the fallen. He saw them pass their swords through the +bodies of three of his own men, who were lying near him, and as +they came up to him he closed his eyes, expecting a similar +fate.</p> + +<p>"This is an officer, captain," one of the torch bearers said in +Russian.</p> + +<p>"Very well. Carry him to the camp, then. If he is alive, the +general may want to question him."</p> + +<p>Seeing that he breathed, four of the Russian soldiers took him +upon their shoulders, and carried him away. The pain of his wound, +caused by the movement, was acute, but he retained consciousness +until, after what seemed to him a journey of immense length, he was +again laid down on the ground, close to a large fire. Several +officers stood round him, and he asked, first in Polish and then in +Swedish, for water, and at the orders of one who seemed of superior +rank to the others, some was at once brought to him.</p> + +<p>"Your king treats his prisoners well," the officer said. "We +will do everything we can for you."</p> + +<p>Half an hour later, a doctor came to his side, and cutting open +his coat, applied a bandage to his shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Is it a serious wound?" Charlie asked in Swedish.</p> + +<p>"It might be worse, but it will be a troublesome one; it is a +sabre cut, and has cleft right through your shoulder bone. Are you +hurt anywhere else?"</p> + +<p>"No, I do not think so. I was knocked down in the dark, and I +believe stunned, though I have a sort of recollection of being +trampled on, and I feel sore all over."</p> + +<p>The surgeon felt his ribs and limbs, repeatedly asking him if it +hurt him. When he finished the examination, he said:</p> + +<p>"You are doubtless badly bruised, but I don't think anything is +broken. Our Cossack horses are little more than ponies. Had they +been heavy horse, they would have trod your life out."</p> + +<p>A few moments later there was a sound of trampling horses. They +halted close by. The officers drew back, and a moment later Marshal +Scheremetof, the commander of the Russian army, came up to +Charlie's side.</p> + +<p>"Which of you speaks Swedish?" he asked the officers, and one of +them stepped forward.</p> + +<p>"Ask him what force was this that attacked us, and with what +object."</p> + +<p>As Charlie saw no reason for concealment, he replied that it was +a body of four hundred Swedish infantry, and a troop of horse, with +four guns, and that their object was to enter the town.</p> + +<p>"They must have been mad to attempt to cut their way through our +whole army," the general said, when the answer was translated to +him; "but, by Saint Paul, they nearly succeeded. The Swedes are +mad, but this was too much even for madmen. Ask him whence the +force came. It may be that a large reinforcement has reached +Vyburg, without our knowing it."</p> + +<p>"We arrived two days since," Charlie replied, when the question +was put to him. "We came in a ship together from Revel."</p> + +<p>"Did others come with you?" was next asked, at the general's +dictation.</p> + +<p>"No other ship but ours has arrived."</p> + +<p>"But others are coming?"</p> + +<p>As Charlie had no doubt that great efforts would be made to send +further reinforcements, he replied:</p> + +<p>"Many more troops are coming, but I cannot say when they will +arrive."</p> + +<p>"Will it be soon?"</p> + +<p>"That I cannot say, but I don't think they will come from Revel. +There was a talk of large reinforcements, but whether from Sweden +or from the king's army, I cannot say."</p> + +<p>"Are you a Swede?" the general asked.</p> + +<p>"I am an Englishman in the Swedish service, general."</p> + +<p>"We have many of your countrymen with us," the general said. "It +would have been better for you, had you come to the czar.</p> + +<p>"See that he is well treated," he said to the officers, and then +mounted and rode away.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: An Old Acquaintance.</h2> + +<p>The next morning Charlie was placed in a tent, in which lay +several officers who had been wounded, either the night before or +by shots from the town. He learned with great pleasure, upon +questioning the doctor, that the Swedes had got off safely in the +darkness. Some eight or ten men only had straggled and been made +prisoners, and not more than twenty had been left dead on the +field. He had the satisfaction, therefore, of knowing that the +defence made by his own pikemen had been the means of saving the +whole force. In other respects he had nothing to complain of, for +he was well attended to, and received the same treatment as the +Russians.</p> + +<p>For another ten days the roar of the cannon continued, some +seventy guns keeping up an incessant fire on the town. At the end +of that time the governor capitulated, and was allowed to march out +with the honours of war.</p> + +<p>Only forty out of the brave garrison remained unwounded at the +end of the siege. They, as well as such of their comrades as were +strong enough to travel, passed through the lines of the Russians, +and marched to Vyburg.</p> + +<p>Three weeks after being made a prisoner, Charlie's wound was so +far healed that the surgeon pronounced him able to sit a horse, +and, under the escort of an officer and four Cossacks, he was taken +by easy stages to Bercov, a prison fortress a short distance from +Moscow. He had inquired from the surgeon who attended him for Doctor +Kelly. The doctor knew him, but said that he was not with the army, +but was, he believed, away visiting some towns on the Volga, where +a serious pestilence was raging.</p> + +<p>Charlie remained but a short time at Bercov. His wound was +healing rapidly, and the surgeon who attended him assured him that +there was every prospect of his making a complete cure, if he would +but keep his arm, for some weeks, in a sling.</p> + +<p>He had nothing to complain of, either as to his comfort or food. +The governor, who spoke a little Polish, visited him every day, and +asked many questions as to his native country. On one of these +visits he said to him:</p> + +<p>"You asked me yesterday if I knew Doctor Kelly, one of the chief +surgeons of the army, who, as you had heard, was at present on the +Volga. You mentioned that he was a friend of yours, and that you +had made his acquaintance, when you were unlucky enough before to +be a prisoner in our hands. I am sorry to say that I have today +seen an official report, in which his name appears among the list +of those who have fallen victims to the pestilence."</p> + +<p>"I am sorry to hear that," Charlie exclaimed; "both because he +was very kind to me, and I liked him much, and because, in the +second place, I was sure that he would have used his influence, +with the czar, to obtain my exchange as soon as possible."</p> + +<p>"It is very unfortunate," the governor said, "especially as +these exchanges are of rare occurrence. A few officers may be taken +prisoners on each side in the skirmishes, but the numbers are too +small to make the loss of any importance, either to Russia or +Sweden, and it is months since either have taken any steps to bring +about exchanges. I myself have no influence. My appointment here is +a sort of punishment, for having offended the czar by not having +brought up my regiment in time to take part in the fight, when you +attacked us at Narva. I saved the regiment, but that was not +regarded as any excuse for having been three days longer on the +march than the czar expected; so I was sent here, as a sort of +dismissal from active service.</p> + +<p>"You know no one else who could move in your matter?"</p> + +<p>"No one. The governor of the castle at Plescow was a surly +fellow, and was reprimanded by the czar, at least so I heard, for +not having treated me sufficiently well. I was only three or four +days there, and the only officer I saw besides Doctor Kelly was a +friend of his, another doctor. He was at the table when I dined +with Kelly. He seemed to me to be a fine fellow, and, by the by, he +did say jokingly that, if I was ever made prisoner again, I was to +ask for him, and that he would do anything he could for me."</p> + +<p>"What was his name?" the governor asked.</p> + +<p>"Peter Michaeloff.</p> + +<p>"Do you know him?" he added, as he saw a look of surprise in the +governor's face.</p> + +<p>"I know one of that name," the governor said doubtfully, "I +don't know that he is a doctor; though he may be, for he knows +something of many things."</p> + +<p>"Oh, he was a doctor," Charlie said confidently. "I know Kelly +said he could take off a limb as well as he could do it, +himself."</p> + +<p>"What sort of man was he?"</p> + +<p>"He was a tall, strong man, with black hair and gray eyes. He +has rather a positive way of talking, and seemed to have very +strong opinions about things. He looked good tempered, but I should +say that he could be passionate enough, if he were put out."</p> + +<p>"That might be the Peter Michaeloff I know," the governor said. +"You are sure he said that you were to ask for him, if you were a +second time taken prisoner?"</p> + +<p>"I am quite certain he said so, though I don't know whether the +promise meant much. But he certainly spoke as if he thought he +might be able to help me, and, though it did not seem likely that I +could have such bad luck twice, I think he meant at the time what +he said, and I should think he was the sort of man who would keep +his word."</p> + +<p>"I will make some inquiries," the governor said, "and find out, +if I can, where he is at present. Yes, I should think that he would +be able to assist you, if he chose to interest himself in the +matter."</p> + +<p>Ten days later, the governor came into Charlie's room.</p> + +<p>"An officer has arrived, with an order for your removal," he +said. "You are to be taken up again to Notteburg."</p> + +<p>"I am very sorry," Charlie said. "I have been very comfortable +here. You have been very kind to me, and I feel sure the change +will not be for the better. Besides, we are nearly into September +now, and in that marshy country round the lake and river, the +winter will be even more severe than it is here. The only thing I +can think of is that the Swedes at Vyburg may have taken a Russian +captain prisoner, and that they are going to exchange us."</p> + +<p>The governor shook his head.</p> + +<p>"There are no longer any Swedes at Vyburg. All Ingria is in our +hands and the Swedes have retired into Finland. It may be that it +is the work of your friend. I sent a message to Peter Michaeloff, +should he be found in that neighbourhood, by an officer who was +going there, telling him that you were here, and that, having met +him when a prisoner at Plescow, you relied on his good offices. +Should the officer have found him there, and have given him my +message, he may probably have begged the field marshal to order you +to be taken to the prison there, where he could be near you, and +visit you sometimes."</p> + +<p>"Your doctors must have a good deal more influence in your army +than they have among the Swedes," Charlie remarked, "if that is how +it has come about."</p> + +<p>"It would be a matter of favour," the governor said. "If +Michaeloff is acquainted with the field marshal, or had attended +him when unwell, he could ask a little favour of that sort. If the +field marshal sent you here, he could send for you again without +more trouble than signing his name to the order."</p> + +<p>"Well, if it is Michaeloff who has done this," Charlie grumbled; +"no doubt he meant it kindly, but I would much rather that he left +me here. A ride of two hundred and fifty miles, in August, is not +pleasant to begin with, and the thought of winter in those swamps +is enough to make one shiver."</p> + +<p>"With a comfortable room and a warm stove, you will not find +much to complain of, Captain Carstairs," the governor said with a +smile; "and, no doubt, Michaeloff may be enabled to obtain leave +for you to go out with him on parole. I was about myself to ask +you, now that you are strong and well again, whether you would like +to give your parole, and offer you the use of my horse for a ride, +when inclined for it."</p> + +<p>"Thank you, governor. If Michaeloff can do that, it will +certainly be a boon, but I am not disposed to agree that the change +can be his work. In the first place, we don't know that he is +there. In the second, I can hardly think that he could have managed +it; and, most of all, I do not see he could possibly have had a +hand in the matter, for, even supposing the officer had found him +directly he arrived, and then given him the message, and he had +acted upon it at once, there would have been no time for the order +to get here. It would have needed a messenger riding night and day, +with frequent relays of horses, to have got to Notteburg and back +since the day I spoke to you about the matter.</p> + +<p>"When am I to start?"</p> + +<p>"As soon as you have eaten your breakfast. The order says 'send +at once,' and field marshals expect their orders to be attended to +promptly."</p> + +<p>On descending to the courtyard after breakfast, Charlie was +surprised to see that, instead of a horse as he had expected, a +well-appointed carriage, with an ample supply of rugs, was standing +there. The governor was there to see him off.</p> + +<p>"Well, sir," Charlie said. "If this is the way in which you +convey prisoners from one place to another in Russia, I shall +certainly be able, when I meet King Charles, to report to him most +favourably as to the treatment of his officers who have fallen into +the czar's hands. This will make the journey a very much more +pleasant one than I had expected."</p> + +<p>"I am glad you are pleased," the governor said, "and that you +have no unpleasant recollection of your stay here."</p> + +<p>A minute later, the carriage dashed out through the gate of the +prison. An officer was seated by Charlie's side, two Cossacks +galloping in front, while two others rode behind.</p> + +<p>"It was worth making the change, if only for this drive," +Charlie thought cheerfully, as the dust flew up in a cloud before +the horses' hoofs, and he felt a sense of exhilaration from the +keen air that blew in his face.</p> + +<p>The journey was performed with great rapidity. One of the +Cossacks galloped ahead, as soon as they arrived at the station +where they changed horses, and had fresh ones in readiness at the +next post house. The Cossacks themselves were changed at every +other station, fresh relays from the men stationed there taking +their place. Excellent meals were served three times a day, and +each night a comfortable bed was provided, at the last post house +where they stopped.</p> + +<p>The officer was a pleasant fellow, but he spoke nothing except +Russian, and, although Charlie fancied he understood him to some +extent when he spoke to him in Polish, he shook his head and gave +no answers in that language.</p> + +<p>Late in the evening of the third day, they arrived at Notteburg. +The building at which the carriage stopped was of considerable +size. It stood in the heart of the town, and had no outward +appearance of a prison. It was apparently at a side entrance at +which they stopped. On the officer knocking at the door, it was +opened by two Cossacks, who, after exchanging a few words in +Russian with the officer, led Charlie along a passage and up a +narrow staircase, which led into a somewhat spacious corridor. They +opened a door, and he found himself in a comfortable room. A table +laid for dinner with handsome silver and appointments stood in the +middle of the room, which was carpeted with tartar rugs. One of the +Cossacks opened an inner door, which led into a bedroom, snugly +furnished.</p> + +<p>"It must be the doctor, after all," Charlie murmured to himself, +in great surprise. "I see now that there was plenty of time for a +letter to come up here and have gone back again, and I suppose the +good fellow has got leave for me to stay for a night in his +quarters, before I am handed over to the prison. Well, for the last +three days I have travelled like a prince, and this is the closing +act of it."</p> + +<p>He enjoyed a good wash, then returned to the other room, and sat +down in a comfortable chair to wait for his host. He was on the +point of dozing off, when the door opened, and Peter Michaeloff +entered. Charlie sprang to his feet.</p> + +<p>"Well, Captain Carstairs," the Russian said, holding out his +hand, "so it seems you had bad luck again. You must have quite an +affection for our prisons."</p> + +<p>"I shall have, at least, a pleasant remembrance of the kindness +shown to me as a prisoner," Charlie said; "and I am sure it is you +that I have to thank for my transfer here, and for the pleasant +journey I have had. I could not have travelled more comfortably, if +I had been a Russian grandee."</p> + +<p>"Well, I am glad to meet you again," the doctor said heartily. +"Let me see, it is some twenty months since we supped together last +at Kelly's quarters. Poor fellow! I shall miss him greatly. You +have heard of his death?"</p> + +<p>"The governor of Bercov told me of it, a fortnight ago. I was +indeed sorry to hear it. I shall never forget his kindness to +me."</p> + +<p>"Yes, he was a good man, skilful in his profession, and full of +zeal and energy. The blood runs faster somehow, in the veins of you +islanders, than of us sluggish Muscovites. If we could but at one +sweep banish every Russian official, from the highest to the +lowest, and fill their places with men from your islands, what +progress we should make, what work could we get done, what reforms +could be carried out!</p> + +<p>"However, at present," he went on, changing the subject +abruptly, "the point is supper. I am as hungry as a bear, for I +have been at work since daylight, and have eaten nothing since I +broke my fast."</p> + +<p>He rang a handbell placed on the table. Two Cossacks entered +bearing dishes, and the doctor and his guest at once fell to on the +supper, which was excellent.</p> + +<p>"Hard work deserves good food," the Russian said, in reply to a +remark of Charlie's as to the excellence both of the food and wine. +"Your Charles does not think so, I hear, and lives on the roughest +of food. What will be the consequence? He will wear himself out. +His restless activity will exhaust his powers, and weaken his +judgment. I can eat rough food if I can get no better, but I take +the best, when opportunity offers.</p> + +<p>"What have you been doing ever since you left Plescow? I +inquired after you the other day, when our troops broke up +Schlippenbach's force on the Embach. I found you were not among the +prisoners, and I wondered if you were among the killed."</p> + +<p>"I was not in Livonia at the time. I was with the king's army at +Warsaw. Three regiments were sent off, the day after the battle of +Clissow, by boats down the Vistula, and then by ship to Revel. Mine +was one of them, but we arrived a fortnight too late."</p> + +<p>"Then you were present at Charles' third victory? How that young +fellow handles his troops, and what wonderful troops they are! Now +we will get into our easy chairs again, and you shall tell me +something about what you have been doing, since we last met."</p> + +<p>Charlie gave a sketch of his adventures.</p> + +<p>"So you fought at the Dwina, too? You have had luck in going +through three battles without a wound."</p> + +<p>When Charlie stated that he had gone to Warsaw on a private +mission, whose nature was immaterial to the story, the doctor broke +in:</p> + +<p>"You need not tell me what it was, it was of course something to +do with Augustus. The way Charles is hunting down that unfortunate +king is shocking, it is downright malignity. Why, he has wasted +fifteen months over it already, and it has cost him Ingria. He +could have made any terms with Poland he liked, after his victory +on the Dwina, and would then have been free to use all his forces +against us. As it is, he has wasted two summers, and is likely to +waste another, and that not for any material advantage, but simply +to gratify his hatred against Augustus; and he has left us to take +Ingria almost without a blow, and to gain what Russia has wanted +for the last hundred years, a foothold on the Baltic. He may be a +great general, but he is no politician. No real statesman would +throw away solid advantages in order to gratify personal +pique."</p> + +<p>"He considers Augustus the author of this league against him," +Charlie said. "He and the czar had no grounds at all of quarrel +against him."</p> + +<p>"We talked over that, the last time we met," the doctor said +with a laugh, "and I told you then that a foothold on the Baltic +was so necessary to Russia, that she would have accepted the +alliance of the Prince of Darkness himself to get it. As to +Augustus, I don't defend him. He was ambitious, as I suppose most +of us are. He thought he saw an opportunity of gaining territory. +He has found that he has made a mistake, and will of course lose a +province. But Charles' persecution of him goes beyond all bounds. +Never before did a sovereign insist upon a nation consenting to +dethrone its king at his dictation.</p> + +<p>"But go on with your story."</p> + +<p>He listened without remark, until Charlie concluded.</p> + +<p>"I wish you had been in our service," he said, "instead of that +of Sweden. You would have mounted fast. You have all the requisites +for success, above all, promptitude of decision and quickness of +invention. You did well in getting away from that Jewish scoundrel +in the hut, and in killing his master, but it was your adventure +with the wolves that showed your quality. That idea of setting fire +to the tree in which you were sitting, in order at once to warm +yourself and to frighten away the wolves, would never have occurred +to a Russian, and the quickness with which you formed, with three +logs, a redoubt against the wolves, showed a quick military eye, +and the ability to think and act in a moment of danger.</p> + +<p>"Now tell me how it was that you were the only officer captured +the other day."</p> + +<p>Charlie briefly related how he, with the pikemen of his company, +had stayed behind to check the pursuit of the Russian horse, and to +gain time for the main body to lose themselves in the darkness. The +Russian struck his fist on the arm of his chair.</p> + +<p>"It was well done," he said. "There is the difference. A Russian +captain would have done it, if he had been ordered, and he and his +men would, without a question, have sacrificed themselves to cover +the retreat of the rest, but he would never have done it on his own +initiative. The idea would never have struck him. He would have +plodded along until the enemy's cavalry came up and annihilated +them all. By the way, why did you not ask for me at once?"</p> + +<p>"I had asked for Doctor Kelly the day after I was taken prisoner, +and was told that he had gone to the Volga. I thought that he would +be back before long, and it was only when I heard of his death that +it occurred to me to endeavour to find one who had kindly promised, +after a few hours' acquaintance only, to befriend me should I ever +find myself in a similar scrape."</p> + +<p>"It would have saved you the journey down to Moscow. I heard, of +course, that a Swedish captain had been made prisoner that night, +but I was myself at Moscow at the time, and did not happen to +notice the name of the officer taken. Were you well treated at +Bercov?"</p> + +<p>"The governor there was most kind, and all the arrangements of +the prison seem excellent. I had no reason whatever to complain. +The governor was good enough to come frequently himself to talk to +me. He is a fine soldierly man, and though he did not say much, I +think he is eating his heart out at being laid on the shelf there, +instead of aiding to fight the battles of his country."</p> + +<p>The Russian took out a pocketbook and made a note, then he +rose.</p> + +<p>"It is time for bed," he said. "I am up at daybreak."</p> + +<p>"I hope I shall see you often in the prison," Charlie said. "I +suppose I shall go in there tomorrow morning. I am indebted to you, +indeed, for the very great kindness you have shown me."</p> + +<p>"No, you will not go in early. I have got leave for you for +another day, and I am going to take you for a drive in the morning. +You will be called an hour before sunrise. Take your breakfast as +soon as you are dressed. Do not wait for me. I have work to do +before I start, and shall breakfast elsewhere."</p> + +<p>As soon as Charlie had breakfasted the next morning, a Cossack +told him that the carriage was below, and he followed him to the +door where he had entered on the previous evening. The carriage was +a simple one, but the three horses harnessed abreast to it were +magnificent animals. Charlie stood admiring them for some little +time.</p> + +<p>"I should think," he said to himself, "the doctor must be a man +of large property, and most likely of noble family, who has taken +up his profession from pure love of it. He is evidently full of +energy, and has an intense desire to see Russia greater and higher +in the rank of nations. I suppose that, like Kelly, he is one of +the principal medical officers in the army. Certainly he must be a +man of considerable influence to obtain my transfer here so easily, +and to see that I travelled so comfortably. I wonder where he is +going to take me this morning."</p> + +<p>Four or five minutes later Charlie's friend appeared at the +door. He was evidently out of temper. He sprung hastily into the +vehicle, as if he had altogether forgotten that he had asked +Charlie to accompany him.</p> + +<p>Then, as his eye fell on him, he nodded and said briefly, "Jump +in."</p> + +<p>A little surprised at the unceremonious address, Charlie sprang +into the seat beside him without hesitation, seeing that his +companion was evidently so much out of temper that he was not +thinking of what he was doing at the moment. The coachman cracked +his whip, and the spirited horses went off, at a rate of speed that +threatened danger to persons traversing the narrow streets of the +town. The cracking of the coachman's whip, and an occasional loud +shout and the jangling of the bells, gave, however, sufficient +warning of their approach.</p> + +<p>Charlie smiled at the alacrity with which every one sprang out +of the way, and either leapt into doorways or squeezed themselves +against the wall. He was surprised, however, to see that not only +did the townspeople show no resentment, at the reckless pace at +which the carriage was driven, but that the soldiers, officers as +well as men, cleared out as quickly, and without any expression of +indignation or anger.</p> + +<p>Indeed, most of them, as soon as they gained a place of safety, +saluted his companion.</p> + +<p>"These Russians have evidently a higher respect for their +doctors than have the Swedes," he said to himself. "I am sure that +not even the chief surgeon of the army would be treated with +anything like the same respect, and, indeed, no one would recognize +him at all, if he were not in uniform."</p> + +<p>The doctor seemed to pay no attention to what was passing round +him, but was muttering angrily to himself. It was not until they +dashed out into the open country that he seemed to remember +Charlie's presence at his side.</p> + +<p>"These people are enough to vex one of the saints, by their +stupidity," he said. "Unless they have some one standing behind +them with a whip, they cannot be trusted to do what they are told. +It is not that they are not willing, but that they are stupid. No +one would believe that people could be so stupid. They drive me +well nigh to madness sometimes, and it is the more irritating +because, against stupidity, one is powerless. Beating a man or +knocking him down may do him good if he is obstinate, or if he is +careless, but when he is simply stupid it only makes him more +stupid than before. You might as well batter a stone wall.</p> + +<p>"You slept well and breakfasted well, Captain Carstairs?"</p> + +<p>"Excellently well, thank you. What superb horses you have, +doctor."</p> + +<p>"Yes. I like travelling fast. Life is too short to throw away +time in travelling. A busy man should always keep good horses."</p> + +<p>"If he can afford to do so," Charlie said with a laugh. "I +should say that every one, busy or not, would like to sit behind +such horses as these, and, as you say, it would save a good deal of +time to one who travelled much. But three such horses as these +would only be in the reach of one with a very long purse."</p> + +<p>"They were bred here. Their sire was one of three given by the +king of England to the czar. The dams were from the imperial +stables at Vienna. So they ought to be good."</p> + +<p>Charlie guessed that the team must have been a present from the +czar, and, remembering what Doctor Kelly had said of the czar's +personal communications with him, he thought that the ruler of +Russia must have a particular liking for doctors, and that the +medical profession must be a more honoured and profitable one in +Russia than elsewhere.</p> + +<p>After driving with great rapidity for upwards of an hour along +the banks of the Neva, Charlie saw a great number of people at work +on an island in the middle of the river, some distance ahead, and +soon afterwards, to his surprise, observed a multitude on the flat, +low ground ahead.</p> + +<p>"This is what I have brought you to see," his companion said. +"Do you know what they are doing?"</p> + +<p>"It seems to me that they are building a fortress on that +island."</p> + +<p>"You are right. We have got a footing on the sea, and we are +going to keep it. While Charles of Sweden is fooling away his time +in Poland, in order to gratify his spite against Augustus, we are +strengthening ourselves here, and never again will Sweden wrest +Ingria from our hands."</p> + +<p>"It is marvellous how much has been done already," Charlie said, +as he looked at the crowd of workmen.</p> + +<p>"Everything was prepared," his companion said. "While the army +was invading Livonia, and driving the remnant of the Swedes into +Revel, thousands of carts laden with piles of wood, stone, and +cement were moving towards Ingria. Tens of thousands of workmen and +peasants were in motion from every part of Russia towards this +point, and, the day after Notteburg surrendered, they began their +work here. It was the opportunity in the lifetime of a nation, and +we have seized it. The engineers who had, in disguise, examined it +months ago, had reported that the island was covered at high tides, +and was unfit to bear the foundations of even the slightest +buildings. Piles are being driven in, as close as they will stand, +over every foot of ground in it. Over this a coating of concrete +many feet thick will be laid, and on this the fortress, which is to +be the centre and heart of Russia, will rise. In the fort will +stand a pile, which will be the tomb of the future czars of Russia, +and there in front of us, where you see fifty thousand peasants at +work, shall be the future capital of the empire."</p> + +<p>"But it is a swamp," Charlie said in astonishment, alike at the +vastness of the scheme, and the energy with which it was being +prosecuted.</p> + +<p>"Nature has made it a swamp," his companion said calmly, "but +man is stronger than nature. The river will be embanked, the morass +drained, and piles driven everywhere, as has been done in the +island, and the capital will rise here. The fort has already been +named the Fortress of Saint Peter and Saint Paul. The capital will +be named alike after the patron saint and its +founder--Petersburg."</p> + +<p>They had now reached the spot. The carriage stopped and they +alighted. Charlie saw, with astonishment, that a wide deep cut had +been driven, between the road and the river, in a straight line. +Looking down into it, he saw that it was paved with the heads of +piles, and that carts were already emptying loads of concrete down +upon it.</p> + +<p>"Every bag of cement, every stone that you see, has been brought +from a great distance," his companion said. "There is not a stone +to be had within fifty miles of this spot. The work would seem +well-nigh impossible, but it is the work of a nation. In another +month, there will be a hundred and fifty thousand peasants at work +here, and well nigh as many carts, bringing materials for the work +and provisions for the workers."</p> + +<p>"It is stupendous! But it will take years to complete, and it +will surely be terribly unhealthy here?"</p> + +<p>"I calculate the work will occupy ten years, and will cost a +hundred thousand, maybe two hundred thousand lives," the other said +calmly; "but what is that to the making of a nation? Before, Russia +was stifled, she could not grow. Now we have a communication with +the world. The island that lies at the mouth of the Neva will be +fortified, and become a great naval arsenal and fort. Along the +walls which will rise here will be unloaded the merchandise of +Europe, and in exchange the ships will carry away our products. +Some day we shall have another port on the south, but for the +present this must suffice. You will say that this is dangerously +near our frontier, but that will soon be remedied. As we have +pushed the Swedes out of Ingria, so in time shall we drive them +from Livonia on the west, and from Finland on the north.</p> + +<p>"But I must to work."</p> + +<p>And he motioned to a group of five or six officers, who had been +standing a short distance away, to approach him.</p> + +<p>Charlie was struck with the air of humility with which they +saluted his companion, who at once asked a number of questions as +to the supplies that had arrived, the progress that had been made, +at a point where they had met with a deep slough into which the +piles had penetrated without meeting with any firm ground, the +number of huts that had been erected during the past three days for +the reception of labourers, the state of stocks of meat and flour, +and other particulars. To each he gave short, sharp orders. When +they had left, he turned to Charlie.</p> + +<p>"You guess who I am, I suppose?"</p> + +<p>"I guess now, your majesty," Charlie said respectfully, "but +until now the idea that my kind friend was the czar himself never +entered my mind. I understood, from Doctor Kelly, that you were a +surgeon."</p> + +<p>"I don't think he said so," the czar replied. "He simply said +that I could perform an amputation as well as he could, which was +not quite true. But I studied surgery for a time in Holland, and +performed several operations under the eyes of the surgeons +there.</p> + +<p>"I saw that you did not recognize my name. It is known to every +Russian, but doubtless you never heard of me save as Peter the +Czar. Directly you mentioned it to the commandant at Bercov, and +described my appearance, he knew who it was you were speaking of, +and despatched a messenger at once to me. He will be here in the +course of a week or so. Upon your report of the state of the +prison, I at once despatched an order for him to hand over his +command to the officer next in rank, and to proceed hither at once. +He is evidently a good administrator, and heaven knows I have need +of such men here.</p> + +<p>"I was pleased with you, when I saw you with my friend Doctor +Kelly. It was pleasant not to be known, and hear a frank opinion +such as you gave me, and as you know, I sent you back on the +following morning. I certainly told Kelly, at the time, not to +mention who I was, but I did not intend that he should keep you in +ignorance of it after I had left, and it was not until I heard, +from your jailer at Bercov, that you were ignorant that Peter +Michaeloff was the czar, that I knew that he had kept you in +ignorance of it until the end.</p> + +<p>"I should have liked to have kept you as my guest for a time, +but winter comes on early and suddenly, and if you did not go now +you might be detained here until the spring. I have therefore given +orders that one of the Swedish vessels we captured on the lake +should be got in readiness, and its crew placed on board again. You +shall embark in an hour, and it shall carry you to any port in +Sweden you may choose. The wind is from the east, and you have +every chance of a quick run thither."</p> + +<p>Charlie expressed his warm thanks to the czar for his thoughtful +kindness.</p> + +<p>"I have much to do now," the czar said, "and must hand you over +to the care of one of my officers. He will accompany you, in my +carriage, to the spot where the vessel is lying, near the mouth of +the river, and will there see you on board. Should the fortune of +war again throw you into our hands, do not lose an hour in sending +a message to Peter Michaeloff."</p> + +<p>So saying, the czar shook hands with Charlie, beckoned an +officer to him and gave him instructions, and then moved away among +the workmen, while Charlie, with his conductor, took their places +in the vehicle and drove rapidly off.</p> + +<p>An hour later, he was on board the Swedish vessel, whose master +and crew were delighted at their sudden and unlooked for release. +The former was overjoyed, for the vessel was his own property.</p> + +<p>"You will find your things in your cabin, sir," he said. "They +were sent on board this morning, together with food and wine +sufficient for a month's voyage, whereas, with this wind, we ought +not to be more than four days. At which port will you land?"</p> + +<p>"I would rather go to Gottenburg, captain, though it is farther +for you than Stockholm."</p> + +<p>"It shall be Gottenburg, sir. It is thanks to you that I have +got my liberty and my ship, and a day or two can make no difference +to me."</p> + +<p>Charlie, indeed, had thought the matter over as he drove along. +He would not be able to rejoin the army until it had gone into +winter quarters, and therefore decided that he would go to +Gottenburg, apply for six months' leave, and spend the winter with +his father. Somewhat puzzled at the mention of his things having +gone on board, he went into the cabin, and found there a handsome +pelisse trimmed with costly furs, two robes composed of valuable +skins, and a change of clothes.</p> + +<p>The wind held fair, blowing strongly, and four days later he +arrived at Gottenburg.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: In England Again.</h2> + +<p>Charlie was received with delight by his father, whom he had not +seen since the spring of the previous year.</p> + +<p>"Then you got my letter, Charlie?" Sir Marmaduke asked, when the +first greetings were over. "And yet, I do not see how you could +have done so. It is little over a fortnight since I wrote, and I +had not looked for you for another month yet."</p> + +<p>"I have certainly received no letter, father. A fortnight ago I +was in a Russian prison, and my arrival here, in so short a time, +seems to me almost miraculous;" and he then briefly related his +singular experiences.</p> + +<p>"Now about the letter, father," he said, as he concluded. "I +suppose you must have written to ask me to get leave for a time, as +it seems that you were expecting me shortly. I suppose you felt +that you would like me with you, for a time."</p> + +<p>"So I should, lad, of that you may be sure, but I should not +have called you away for that. No, I had this letter the other day +from old Banks. You know he writes to me once a year. His letters +have been only gossip so far, for you know my precious cousin +kicked him out of the house, as soon as he took possession; but +this is a different matter. Read it for yourself."</p> + +<p>Charlie took the letter, and with some trouble spelt through the +crabbed handwriting.</p> + +<p>It began:</p> + +<p>"Honoured sir and master, I hope that this finds you and Captain +Charles both well in health. I have been laid up with rhematis in +the bones, having less comfort in my lodgings than I used to have +at Lynnwood. Your honour will have heard that King William has +fallen from his horse, and broken his collarbone, and died. May the +Lord forgive him for taking the place of better men. Anne has come +to the throne, and there were some hopes that she would, of +herself, step aside and let him to whom the throne rightly belongs +come to it. Such, however, has not been the case, and those who +know best think that things are no forwarder for William's death, +rather indeed the reverse, since the Princess Anne is better liked +by the people than was her sister's husband.</p> + +<p>"There is no sure news from Lynnwood. None of the old servants +are there; and I have no one from whom I can learn anything for +certain. Things however are, I hear, much worse since young Mr. +Dormay was killed in the duel in London, of which I told you in my +last letter.</p> + +<p>"Dame Celia and Mistress Ciceley go but seldom abroad, and when +seen they smile but little, but seem sad and downcast. The usurper +has but small dealing with any of the gentry. There are always men +staying there, fellows of a kind with whom no gentleman would +consort, and they say there is much drinking and wild going on. As +Captain Charles specially bade me, I have done all that I could to +gather news of Nicholson. Till of late I have heard nothing of him. +He disappeared altogether from these parts, just after your honour +went away. News once came here from one who knew him, and who had +gone up to London on a visit to a kinsman, that he had met him +there, dressed up in a garb in no way according with his former +position, but ruffling it at a tavern frequented by loose blades, +spending his money freely, and drinking and dicing with the best of +them.</p> + +<p>"A week since he was seen down here, in a very sorry state, +looking as if luck had gone altogether against him. Benjamin +Haddock, who lives, as you know, close to the gate of Lynnwood, +told me that he saw one pass along the road, just as it was dusk, +whom he could swear was that varlet Nicholson. He went to the door +and looked after him to make sure, and saw him enter the gate. Next +day Nicholson was in Lancaster. He was spending money freely there, +and rode off on a good horse, which looked ill assorted with his +garments, though he purchased some of better fashion in the town. +It seemed to me likely that he must have got money from the +usurper. I do not know whether your honour will deem this news of +importance, but I thought it well to write to you at once. Any +further news I may gather, I will send without fail.</p> + +<p>"Your humble servant,</p> + +<p>"John Banks."</p> + +<p>"There is no doubt that this is of importance," Charlie said, +when he had read the letter through. "It is only by getting hold of +this villain that there is any chance of our obtaining proof of the +foul treachery of which you were the victim. Hitherto, we have had +no clue whatever as to where he was to be looked for. Now, there +can be little doubt that he has returned to his haunts in London. I +understand now, father, why you wanted me to get leave. You mean +that I shall undertake this business."</p> + +<p>"That was my thought, Charlie. You are now well-nigh twenty, and +would scarce be recognized as the boy who left four years ago. The +fellow would know me at once, and I might be laid by the heels +again under the old warrant; besides being charged with breaking +away from the custody of the soldiers. Besides, in this business +youth and strength and vigour are requisite. I would gladly take +the matter in my own hands, but methinks you would have a better +chance of bringing it to a favourable issue. Now that Anne is on +the throne, she and her advisers will look leniently upon the men +whose only fault was devotion to her father; and if we can once get +this foul charge of assassination lifted from our shoulders, I and +Jervoise and the others who had to fly at the same time, may all be +permitted to return, and obtain a reversal of the decree of the Act +of Confiscation of our estates.</p> + +<p>"I have no friends at court, but I know that Jervoise was a +close acquaintance, years ago, of John Churchill, who is now Duke +of Marlborough, and they say high in favour with Anne. I did not +think of it when I wrote to you, but a week later it came to my +mind that his intervention might be very useful, and I took +advantage of an officer, leaving here for the army, to send by him +a letter to Jervoise, telling him that there was now some hope of +getting at the traitor who served as John Dormay's instrument in +his plot against us. I said that I had sent for you, and thought it +probable you would take the matter in hand; and I prayed him to +send me a letter of introduction for you to the duke, so that, if +you could by any means obtain the proof of our innocence of this +pretended plot, he might help you to obtain a reversal of the Act +of Confiscation against us all. I have asked him to write at once, +and I will send the letter after you, as soon as I get it.</p> + +<p>"I know nothing of London, but I have heard of the Bull's Head, +in Fenchurch Street, as being one frequented by travellers from the +country. You had best put up there, and thither I will forward the +note from Jervoise."</p> + +<p>"The letter will be a useful one, indeed, father, when I have +once wrung the truth from that villain Nicholson. It will be an +expedition after my own heart. There is first the chance of +punishing the villain, and then the hope of restoring you to your +place at dear old Lynnwood."</p> + +<p>"You must be careful, Charlie. Remember it would never do to +kill the rascal. That would be the greatest of misfortunes; for, +with his death, any chance of unmasking the greater villain would +disappear."</p> + +<p>"I will be careful, father. I cannot say how I shall set about +the matter, yet. That must depend upon circumstances; but, as you +say, above all things I must be careful of the fellow's life. When +is there a ship sailing, father?"</p> + +<p>"The day after tomorrow, Charlie. You will want that time for +getting clothes, suitable to a young gentleman of moderate +condition, up from the country on a visit to London. You must make +up your mind that it will be a long search before you light on the +fellow, for we have no clue as to the tavern he frequents. As a +roistering young squire, wanting to see London life, you could go +into taverns frequented by doubtful characters, for it is probably +in such a place that you will find him.</p> + +<p>"However, all this I must leave to you. You showed yourself, in +that Polish business, well able to help yourself out of a scrape, +and if you could do that among people of whose tongues you were +ignorant, you ought to be able to manage on English soil."</p> + +<p>"At any rate, I will do my best, father, of that you may be +sure. I have the advantage of knowing the fellow, and am pretty +certain that he will not know me."</p> + +<p>"Not he, Charlie," his father said confidently. "Even in the +last two years, since you were here with Jervoise and the others, +you have changed so much that I, myself, might have passed you in +the street without knowing you.</p> + +<p>"Now, you had better go off and see about your things. There is +no time to be lost. I have drawn out a hundred guineas of my money, +which will, I should say, serve you while you are away; but don't +stint it, lad. Let me know if it runs short, and I will send you +more."</p> + +<p>"I have money, too, father. I have four months' pay due, besides +money I have in hand, for there was but little need for us to put +our hands in our pockets."</p> + +<p>Ten days later, Charlie arrived in the Port of London, and took +up his abode at the Bull's Head, where he found the quarters +comfortable, indeed, after the rough work of campaigning. The next +morning he took a waiter into his confidence.</p> + +<p>"I have come to London to see a little life," he said, "and I +want to be put into the way of doing it. I don't want to go to +places where young gallants assemble. My purse is not deep enough +to stand such society. I should like to go to places where I shall +meet hearty young fellows, and could have a throw of the dice, or +see a main fought by good cocks, or even sally out and have a +little fun with the watch. My purse is fairly lined, and I want +some amusement--something to look back upon when I go home again. +What is the best way to set about it?"</p> + +<p>"Well, sir, if that is your humour, I have a brother who is one +of the mayor's tipstaffs. He knows the city well, ay, and +Westminster, too, and the purlieus of Saint James's, and whether +you want to meet young gallants or roistering blades, or to have a +look in at places where you can hire a man to cut another's throat +for a few crowns, he can show you them. He will be on duty now, but +I will send him a message to come round this evening, and I warrant +me he will be here. He has showed young squires from the country +over the town before this, and will guess what is on hand when he +gets my message."</p> + +<p>Having nothing to do, Charlie sauntered about the town during +the day, looking into the shops, and keeping a keen eye on passers +by, with the vague hope that he might be lucky enough to come +across his man.</p> + +<p>After he had finished his supper, the waiter came up and told +him that his brother was outside.</p> + +<p>"I have spoken to him, sir, and he warrants that he can take you +into the sort of society you want to meet, whatever it may be."</p> + +<p>Charlie followed him out. A man was standing under the lamp that +swung before the door.</p> + +<p>"This is the gentleman I was speaking to you of, Tony."</p> + +<p>As the man took off his cap, Charlie had a good view of his +face. It was shrewd and intelligent.</p> + +<p>"You understand what I want?" he asked, as the waiter ran into +the house again, to attend to his duties.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir. So far as I understood him, you wish to go to taverns +of somewhat inferior reputations, and to see something of that side +of London life. If you will pardon my boldness, it is somewhat of a +dangerous venture. In such places brawls are frequent, and rapiers +soon out.</p> + +<p>"You look to me like one who could hold his own in a fray," he +added, as his eye ran over the athletic figure before him, "but it +is not always fair fighting. These fellows hang together, and while +engaged with one, half a dozen might fall upon you. As to your +purse, sir, it is your own affair. You will assuredly lose your +money, if you play or wager with them. But that is no concern of +mine. Neither, you may say, is your life; but it seems to me that +it is. One young gentleman from the country, who wanted, like you, +to see life, was killed in a brawl, and I have never forgiven +myself for having taken him to the tavern where he lost his life. +Thus, I say that, though willing enough to earn a crown or two +outside my own work, I must decline to take you to places where, as +it seems to me, you are likely to get into trouble."</p> + +<p>"You are an honest fellow, and I like you all the more, for +speaking out frankly to me," Charlie said, "and were I, as I told +your brother, thinking of going to such places solely for +amusement, what you say would have weight with me. But, as I see +that you are to be trusted, I will tell you more. I want to find a +man who did me and mine a grievous ill turn. I have no intention of +killing him, or anything of that sort, but it is a matter of great +importance to lay hand on him. All I know of him is that he is a +frequenter of taverns here, and those not of the first character. +Just at present he is, I have reason to believe, provided with +funds, and may push himself into places where he would not show +himself when he is out of luck. Still, it is more likely he is to +be found in the lowest dens, among rascals of his own kidney. I may +lose a little money, but I shall do so with my eyes open, and +solely to obtain a footing at the places where I am most likely to +meet him."</p> + +<p>"That alters the affair," the man said gravely. "It will add to +your danger; for as you know him, I suppose he knows you, +also."</p> + +<p>"No. It is four years since we met, and I have so greatly +changed, in that time, that I have no fear he would recognize me. +At any rate, not here in London, which is the last place he would +suspect me of being in."</p> + +<p>"That is better. Well, sir, if that be your object, I will do my +best to help you. What is the fellow's name and description?"</p> + +<p>"He called himself Nicholson, when we last met; but like enough +that is not his real name, and if it is, he may be known by another +here. He is a lanky knave, of middle height; but more than that, +except that he has a shifty look about his eyes, I cannot tell +you."</p> + +<p>"And his condition, you say, is changeable?"</p> + +<p>"Very much so, I should say. I should fancy that, when in funds, +he would frequent places where he could prey on careless young +fellows from the country, like myself. When his pockets are empty, +I should say he would herd with the lowest rascals."</p> + +<p>"Well, sir, as you say he is in funds at present, we will this +evening visit a tavern or two, frequented by young blades, some of +whom have more money than wit; and by men who live by their wits +and nothing else. But you must not be disappointed, if the search +prove a long one before you run your hare down, for the indications +you have given me are very doubtful. He may be living in Alsatia, +hard by the Temple, which, though not so bad as it used to be, is +still an abode of dangerous rogues. But more likely you may meet +him at the taverns in Westminster, or near Whitehall; for, if he +has means to dress himself bravely, it is there he will most +readily pick up gulls.</p> + +<p>"I will, with your permission, take you to the better sort to +begin with, and then, when you have got more accustomed to the ways +of these places, you can go to those a step lower, where, I should +think, he is more likely to be found; for such fellows spend their +money freely, when they get it, and unless they manage to fleece +some young lamb from the country, they soon find themselves unable +to keep pace with the society of places where play runs high, and +men call for their bottles freely. Besides, in such places, when +they become unable to spend money freely, they soon get the cold +shoulder from the host, who cares not to see the money that should +be spent on feasting and wine diverted into the pockets of +others.</p> + +<p>"I shall leave you at the door of these places. I am too well +known to enter. I put my hand on the shoulder of too many men, +during the year, for me to go into any society without the risk of +someone knowing me again."</p> + +<p>They accordingly made their way down to Westminster, and Charlie +visited several taverns. At each he called for wine, and was +speedily accosted by one or more men, who perceived that he was a +stranger, and scented booty. He stated freely that he had just come +up to town, and intended to stay some short time there. He allowed +himself to be persuaded to enter the room where play was going on, +but declined to join, saying that, as yet, he was ignorant of the +ways of town, and must see a little more of them before he ventured +his money, but that, when he felt more at home, he should be ready +enough to join in a game of dice or cards, being considered a good +hand at both.</p> + +<p>After staying at each place about half an hour, he made his way +out, getting rid of his would-be friends with some little +difficulty, and with a promise that he would come again, ere +long.</p> + +<p>For six days he continued his inquiries, going out every evening +with his guide, and taking his meals, for the most part, at one or +other of the taverns, in hopes that he might happen upon the man of +whom he was in search. At the end of that time, he had a great +surprise. As he entered the hotel to take supper, the waiter said +to him:</p> + +<p>"There is a gentleman who has been asking for you, in the public +room. He arrived an hour ago, and has hired a chamber."</p> + +<p>"Asking for me?" Charlie repeated in astonishment. "You must be +mistaken."</p> + +<p>"Not at all, sir. He asked for Mr. Charles Conway, and that is +the name you wrote down in the hotel book, when you came."</p> + +<p>"That must be me, sure enough, but who can be asking for me I +cannot imagine. However, I shall soon know."</p> + +<p>And, in a state of utter bewilderment as to who could have +learnt his name and address, he went into the coffee room. There +happened, at the moment, to be but one person there, and as he rose +and turned towards him, Charlie exclaimed in astonishment and +delight:</p> + +<p>"Why, Harry, what on earth brings you here? I am glad to see +you, indeed, but you are the last person in the world I should have +thought of meeting here in London."</p> + +<p>"You thought I was in a hut, made as wind tight as possible, +before the cold set in, in earnest. So I should have been, with six +months of a dull life before me, if it had not been for Sir +Marmaduke's letter. Directly my father read it through to me he +said:</p> + +<p>"'Get your valises packed at once, Harry. I will go to the +colonel and get your leave granted. Charlie may have to go into all +sorts of dens, in search of this scoundrel, and it is better to +have two swords than one in such places. Besides, as you know the +fellow's face you can aid in the search, and are as likely to run +against him as he is. His discovery is as important to us as it is +to him, and it may be the duke will be more disposed to interest +himself, when he sees the son of his old friend, than upon the +strength of a letter only.'</p> + +<p>"You may imagine I did not lose much time. But I did not start, +after all, until the next morning, for when the colonel talked it +over with my father, he said:</p> + +<p>"'Let Harry wait till tomorrow. I shall be seeing the king this +evening. He is always interested in adventure, and I will tell him +the whole story, and ask him to write a few lines, saying that +Harry and Carstairs are young officers who have borne themselves +bravely, and to his satisfaction. It may help with the duke, and +will show, at any rate, that you have both been out here, and not +intriguing at Saint Germains.'</p> + +<p>"The colonel came in, late in the evening, with a paper, which +the king had told Count Piper to write and sign, and had himself +put his signature to it. I have got it sewn up in my doublet, with +my father's letter to Marlborough. They are too precious to lose, +but I can tell you what it is, word for word:</p> + +<p>"'By order of King Charles the Twelfth of Sweden. This is to +testify, to all whom it may concern, that Captain Charles +Carstairs, and Captain Harry Jervoise--'"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I am glad, Harry!" Charlie interrupted. "It was horrid that +I should have been a captain, for the last year, and you a +lieutenant. I am glad, indeed."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is grand, isn't it, and very good of the king to do it +like that. Now, I will go on--</p> + +<p>"'Have both served me well and faithfully during the war, +showing great valour, and proving themselves to be brave and +honourable gentlemen, as may be seen, indeed, from the rank that +they, though young in years, have both attained, and which is due +solely to their deserts.'</p> + +<p>"What do you think of that?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing could be better, Harry. Did you see my father at +Gottenburg?"</p> + +<p>"Yes. The ship I sailed by went to Stockholm, and I was lucky +enough to find there another, starting for England in a few hours. +She touched at Gottenburg to take in some cargo, and I had time to +see Sir Marmaduke, who was good enough to express himself as +greatly pleased that I was coming over to join you."</p> + +<p>"Well, Harry, I am glad, indeed. Before we talk, let us go in +and have supper, that is, if you have not already had yours. If you +have, I can wait a bit."</p> + +<p>"No; they told me you had ordered your supper at six, so I told +them I would take mine at the same time; and, indeed, I can tell +you that I am ready for it."</p> + +<p>After the meal, Charlie told his friend the steps he was taking +to discover Nicholson.</p> + +<p>"Do you feel sure that you would know him again, Harry?"</p> + +<p>"Quite sure. Why, I saw him dozens of times at Lynnwood."</p> + +<p>"Then we shall now be able to hunt for him separately, Harry. +Going to two or three places, of an evening, I always fear that he +may come in after I have gone away. Now one of us can wait till the +hour for closing, while the other goes elsewhere."</p> + +<p>For another fortnight, they frequented all the places where they +thought Nicholson would be most likely to show himself; then, after +a consultation with their guide, they agreed that they must look +for him at lower places.</p> + +<p>"Like enough," the tipstaff said, "he may have run through his +money the first night or two after coming up to town. That is the +way with these fellows. As long as they have money they gamble. +When they have none, they cheat or turn to other evil courses. Now +that there are two of you together, there is less danger in going +to such places; for, though these rascals may be ready to pick a +quarrel with a single man, they know that it is a dangerous game to +play with two, who look perfectly capable of defending +themselves."</p> + +<p>For a month, they frequented low taverns. They dressed +themselves plainly now, and assumed the character of young fellows +who had come up to town, and had fallen into bad company, and lost +what little money they had brought with them, and were now ready +for any desperate enterprise. Still, no success attended their +search.</p> + +<p>"I can do no more for you," their guide said. "I have taken you +to every house that such a man would be likely to use. Of course, +there are many houses near the river frequented by bad characters. +But here you would chiefly meet men connected, in some way, with +the sea, and you would be hardly likely to find your man +there."</p> + +<p>"We shall keep on searching," Charlie said. "He may have gone +out of town for some reason, and may return any day. We shall not +give it up till spring."</p> + +<p>"Well, at any rate, sirs, I will take your money no longer. You +know your way thoroughly about now, and, if at any time you should +want me, you know where to find me. It might be worth your while to +pay a visit to Islington, or even to go as far as Barnet. The +fellow may have done something, and may think it safer to keep in +hiding, and in that case Islington and Barnet are as likely to suit +him as anywhere."</p> + +<p>The young men had, some time before, left the inn and taken a +lodging. This they found much cheaper, and, as they were away from +breakfast until midnight, it mattered little where they slept. They +took the advice of their guide, stayed a couple of nights at +Islington, and then went to Barnet. In these places there was no +occasion to visit the taverns, as, being comparatively small, they +would, either in the daytime or after dark, have an opportunity of +meeting most of those living there.</p> + +<p>Finding the search ineffectual, Charlie proposed that they +should go for a long walk along the north road.</p> + +<p>"I am tired of staring every man I meet in the face, Harry. And +I should like, for once, to be able to throw it all off and take a +good walk together, as we used to do in the old days. We will go +eight or ten miles out, stop at some wayside inn for refreshments, +and then come back here for the night, and start back again for +town tomorrow."</p> + +<p>Harry at once agreed, and, taking their hats, they started.</p> + +<p>They did not hurry themselves, and, carefully avoiding all +mention of the subject that had occupied their thoughts for weeks, +they chatted over their last campaign, their friends in the Swedish +camp, and the course that affairs were likely to take. After four +hours' walking they came to a small wayside inn, standing back +twenty or thirty yards from the road.</p> + +<p>"It is a quiet-looking little place," Charlie said, "and does +but a small trade, I should say. However, no doubt they can give us +some bread and cheese, and a mug of ale, which will last us well +enough till we get back to Barnet."</p> + +<p>The landlord placed what they demanded before them, and then +left the room again, replying by a short word or two to their +remarks on the weather.</p> + +<p>"A surly ill-conditioned sort of fellow," Harry said.</p> + +<p>"It may be, Harry, that badness of trade has spoiled his temper. +However, so long as his beer is good, it matters little about his +mood."</p> + +<p>They had finished their bread and cheese, and were sitting idly, +being in no hurry to start on their way back, when a man on +horseback turned off from the road and came up the narrow lane in +which the house stood. As Charlie, who was facing that way, looked +at him he started, and grasped Harry's arm.</p> + +<p>"It is our man," he said. "It is Nicholson himself! To think of +our searching all London, these weeks past, and stumbling upon him +here."</p> + +<p>The man stopped at the door, which was at once opened by the +landlord.</p> + +<p>"All right, I suppose, landlord?" the man said, as he swung +himself from his horse.</p> + +<p>"There is no one here except two young fellows, who look to me +as if they had spent their last penny in London, and were +travelling down home again."</p> + +<p>He spoke in a lowered voice, but the words came plainly enough +to the ears of the listeners within. Another word or two was +spoken, and then the landlord took the horse and led it round to a +stable behind, while its rider entered the room. He stopped for a +moment at the open door of the taproom, and stared at the two young +men, who had just put on their hats again. They looked up +carelessly, and Harry said:</p> + +<p>"Fine weather for this time of year."</p> + +<p>The man replied by a grunt, and then passed on into the +landlord's private room.</p> + +<p>"That is the fellow, sure enough, Charlie," Harry said, in a low +tone. "I thought your eyes might have deceived you, but I remember +his face well. Now what is to be done?"</p> + +<p>"We won't lose sight of him again," Charlie said. "Though, if we +do, we shall know where to pick up his traces, for he evidently +frequents this place. I should say he has taken to the road. There +were a brace of pistols in the holsters. That is how it is that we +have not found him before. Well, at any rate, there is no use +trying to make his acquaintance here. The first question is, will +he stay here for the night or not--and if he does not, which way +will he go?"</p> + +<p>"He came from the north," Harry said. "So if he goes, it will be +towards town."</p> + +<p>"That is so. Our best plan will be to pay our reckoning and +start. We will go a hundred yards or so down the road, and then lie +down behind a hedge, so as to see if he passes. If he does not +leave before nightfall, we will come up to the house and +reconnoitre. If he does not leave by ten, he is here for the night, +and we must make ourselves as snug as we can under a stack. The +nights are getting cold, but we have slept out in a deal colder +weather than this. However, I fancy he will go on. It is early for +a man to finish a journey. If he does, we must follow him, and keep +him in sight, if possible."</p> + +<p>Two hours later they saw, from their hiding place, Nicholson +ride out from the lane. He turned his horse's head in their +direction.</p> + +<p>"That is good," Charlie said. "If he is bound for London, we +shall be able to get into his company somehow; but if he had gone +up to some quiet place north, we might have had a lot of difficulty +in getting acquainted with him."</p> + +<p>As soon as the man had ridden past they leapt to their feet, +and, at a run, kept along the hedge. He had started at a brisk +trot, but when, a quarter of a mile on, they reached a gate, and +looked up the road after him, they saw to their satisfaction that +the horse had already fallen into a walk.</p> + +<p>"He does not mean to go far from Barnet," Charlie exclaimed. "If +he had been bound farther, he would have kept on at a trot. We will +keep on behind the hedges as long as we can. If he were to look +back and see us always behind him, he might become suspicious."</p> + +<p>They had no difficulty in keeping up with the horseman. +Sometimes, when they looked out, he was a considerable distance +ahead, having quickened his pace; but he never kept that up long, +and by brisk running, and dashing recklessly through the hedges +running at right angles to that they were following, they soon came +up to him again.</p> + +<p>Once, he had gone so far ahead that they took to the road, and +followed it until he again slackened his speed. They thus kept him +in sight till they neared Barnet.</p> + +<p>"We can take to the road now," Harry said. "Even if he should +look round, he will think nothing of seeing two men behind him. We +might have turned into it from some by-lane. At any rate, we must +chance it. We must find where he puts up for the night."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch17">Chapter 17</a>: The North Coach.</h2> + +<p>Barnet was then, as now, a somewhat straggling place. Soon after +entering it, the horseman turned off from the main road. His +pursuers were but fifty yards behind him, and they kept him in +sight until, after proceeding a quarter of a mile, he stopped at a +small tavern, where he dismounted, and a boy took his horse and led +it round by the side of the house.</p> + +<p>"Run to earth!" Harry said exultantly. "He is not likely to move +from there tonight."</p> + +<p>"At any rate, he is safe for a couple of hours," Charlie said. +"So we will go to our inn, and have a good meal. By that time it +will be quite dark, and we will have a look at the place he has +gone into; and if we can't learn anything, we must watch it by +turns till midnight. We will arrange, at the inn, to hire a horse. +One will be enough. He only caught a glimpse of us at that inn, and +certainly would not recognize one of us, if he saw him alone. The +other can walk."</p> + +<p>"But which way, Charlie? He may go back again." "It is hardly +likely he came here merely for the pleasure of stopping the night +at that little tavern. I have no doubt he is bound for London. You +shall take the horse, Harry, and watch until he starts, and then +follow him, just managing to come up close to him as he gets into +town. I will start early, and wait at the beginning of the houses, +and it is hard if one or other of us does not manage to find out +where he hides."</p> + +<p>They had no difficulty in arranging with the landlord for a +horse, which was to be left in a stable he named in town. They gave +him a deposit, for which he handed them a note, by which the money +was to be returned to them by the stable keeper, on their handing +over the horse in good condition.</p> + +<p>After the meal they sallied out again, and walked to the tavern, +which was a small place standing apart from other houses. There was +a light in the taproom, but they guessed that here, as at the other +stopping place, the man they wanted would be in a private +apartment. Passing the house, they saw a light in a side window, +and, noiselessly opening a little wicket gate, they stole into the +garden. Going a short distance back from the window, so that the +light should not show their faces, they looked in, and saw the man +they sought sitting by the fire, with a table on which stood a +bottle and two glasses beside him, and another man facing him.</p> + +<p>"Stay where you are, Harry. I will steal up to the window, and +find out whether I can hear what they are saying."</p> + +<p>Stooping close under the window, he could hear the murmur of +voices, but could distinguish no words. He rejoined his +companion.</p> + +<p>"I am going to make a trial to overhear them, Harry, and it is +better that only one of us should be here. You go back to the inn, +and wait for me there."</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do, Charlie?"</p> + +<p>"I am going to throw a stone through the lower part of the +window. Then I shall hide. They will rush out, and when they can +find no one, they will conclude that the stone was thrown by some +mischievous boy going along the road. When all is quiet again I +will creep up to the window, and it will be hard if I don't manage +to learn something of what they are saying."</p> + +<p>The plan was carried out, and Charlie, getting close up to the +window, threw a stone through one of the lowest of the little +diamond-shaped panes. He heard a loud exclamation of anger inside, +and then sprang away and hid himself at the other end of the +garden. A moment later he heard loud talking in the road, and a man +with a lantern came round to the window; but in a few minutes all +was quiet again, and Charlie cautiously made his way back to the +window, and crouched beneath it. He could hear plainly enough, now, +the talk going on within.</p> + +<p>"What was I saying when that confounded stone interrupted +us?"</p> + +<p>"You were saying, captain, that you intended to have a week in +London, and then to stop the North coach."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have done well lately, and can afford a week's pleasure. +Besides, Jerry Skinlow got a bullet in his shoulder, last week, in +trying to stop a carriage on his own account, and Jack Mercer's +mare is laid up lame, and it wants four to stop a coach neatly. +Jack Ponsford is in town. I shall bring him out with me."</p> + +<p>"I heard that you were out of luck a short time ago."</p> + +<p>"Yes, everything seemed against me. My horse was shot, and, just +at the time, I had been having a bad run at the tables and had lost +my last stiver. I was in hiding for a fortnight at one of the +cribs; for they had got a description of me from an old gentleman, +who, with his wife and daughter, I had eased of their money and +watches. It was a stupid business. I dropped a valuable diamond +ring on the ground, and in groping about for it my mask came off, +and, like a fool, I stood up in the full light of the carriage +lamp. So I thought it better, for all reasons, to get away for a +month or so, until things quieted down. I wanted to visit my +banker, and it was a good many miles to tramp."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you have got a banker, captain?"</p> + +<p>"I have one who is just as good, though I cannot say he shells +out his money willingly--in fact he was rude enough to say, when I +called this time, that if I ever showed my face to him again he +would shoot me, even if he were hung for it. Bad taste, wasn't it? +At any rate, I mustn't call on him again too soon."</p> + +<p>"You haven't settled on the night yet, I suppose, captain?"</p> + +<p>"About the end of next week. Friday will be a full moon, I +think, and I like a moon for the work. It gives light enough to see +what you are doing, and not light enough for them to see much of +you. So I suppose I may as well fix Friday. I will send up a +message for Jack Mercer and Jerry Skinlow to be here on Thursday +evening. I will be here that afternoon, and settle matters with +them as to where they shall meet me, and what each man shall do. +Then I will ride back to town, and come out again just as it gets +dark, with Jack Ponsford."</p> + +<p>"I suppose you will do it north of here?"</p> + +<p>"No, I will do it a mile or two out of town. The road north of +this is getting rather a bad reputation, and in going out of Barnet +the guard now looks to his blunderbuss, and the passengers get +their pistols ready. It isn't once in a hundred times they have +pluck enough to use them, but they always think they will, until +the time comes. Near town we shall take them by surprise, and stop +them before they have time to think of getting out their arms.</p> + +<p>"Confound that window. Shove something into the hole, Johnson. I +can feel the cold right down my back."</p> + +<p>A cloth was pushed into the broken pane, and Charlie could hear +no more of what was said inside. He had heard, indeed, enough for +his purpose, but he had hoped to gather the name of the place at +which the man would put up in London. However, he was well +satisfied with his success, and at once made his way back to the +inn.</p> + +<p>"Well, Charlie, how have you succeeded?" Harry asked, as he sat +down at the table.</p> + +<p>"Could not be better, Harry, though I did not find out where he +puts up in London. However, that is of small consequence. In the +first place, I found out that our suspicions were right, and that +the fellow is a highwayman, and seems to be captain of a gang +consisting anyhow of three, and perhaps of more, fellows like +himself. In the second place, he intends, with his three comrades, +to attack the coach on Friday week, two or three miles out of town. +Nothing could better suit our purpose, even if we had planned the +affair ourselves. Of course, we will be there. If we can capture +him while engaged in that work, we can get anything out of him. He +has either got to confess or be hanged."</p> + +<p>"That is a stroke of good luck, indeed," Harry exclaimed. "It +will be rather difficult to manage, though. The fellows will be +sure to be masked; and, if we were to shoot him instead of one of +the others, it would be fatal."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that would be awkward. Besides," Charlie said, "even if we +did recognize him and shot his horse, he might jump up behind one +of the other men, or might make off across the country, and we +might lose sight of him before we could get down from the top of +the coach to pursue."</p> + +<p>"It might be better if we were mounted, instead of being on the +coach."</p> + +<p>"Better in some ways, Harry; but if they heard two mounted men +coming along beside the coach, they would probably take the alarm +and not attack at all; while, if we were to keep a bit behind, and +ride up as soon as we heard the firing--for they generally shoot +one of the horses to bring the coach to a standstill--they might +ride off as soon as they heard the sound of the horses on the road. +Those fellows are splendidly mounted. Their lives depend upon it, +and nothing we should be able to hire would be likely to have a +chance with them."</p> + +<p>"Well, we shall have plenty of time to think this over, Charlie. +I suppose we shall carry out our plan tomorrow, as we +arranged."</p> + +<p>"Certainly. It is as important to find out where he lives in +London as it was before, for if he gets away, we can then look him +up there. We may as well go to bed at once, for I shall start at +four, so as to get to town before him, however early he may be off. +But as we know, now, he is going up on pleasure and not on +business, I don't suppose he will be in any hurry in the +morning."</p> + +<p>Charlie arrived in town about eight o'clock, and, having +breakfasted at the first tavern he came to, walked along for some +distance, to decide upon the spot where he should take up his +position. As Nicholson was going up, as he said, to enjoy himself, +it was not likely that he would put up at Islington, but would take +up his quarters in the centre of the town. He therefore decided to +walk on, until he came to some junction of important roads; and +there wait, as the man might make either for the city or +Westminster, though the latter appeared the more probable +direction.</p> + +<p>Here he walked up and down for an hour, and then, entering a +tavern, took his place at the window, where he could see up the +street, called for a stoup of wine, and prepared for a long +wait.</p> + +<p>It was not, indeed, until three o'clock that he saw Nicholson +coming along. He was more gaily dressed than he had been on the +previous day. He had on a green cloth coat with gold braid round +the cuffs, an embroidered waistcoat, yellow breeches, top boots, +and three-cornered hat. He was riding at foot pace.</p> + +<p>Charlie went to the door as soon as he passed, and saw that, as +he expected, he took the road to Westminster. Looking round, he saw +Harry riding about a hundred yards behind. Charlie had no +difficulty in keeping up with Nicholson, and traced him to a house +in a quiet street lying behind the Abbey. A boy came out and held +the horse, while its rider dismounted, and then led it away to the +stable of an inn a short distance away. Charlie turned at once, and +joined Harry.</p> + +<p>"I need not have taken all the trouble I have, Harry, still +there was no knowing. Evidently the fellow has no fear of being +detected, and is going to pass, for a week, as a gentleman from the +country. I suppose he is in the habit of stopping at that house +whenever he comes up with his pockets lined, and is regarded there +as a respectable gentleman by the landlord. Now you had better take +your horse to the stable, where you agreed to hand it over, and we +will meet at our lodgings and plan what to do next."</p> + +<p>The discussion did not lead to much. There did not seem, to +them, anything to do until the day when the coach was to be +attacked, but they agreed it would be well to take the advice of +their friend the tipstaff. Hitherto, they had not told him more of +their motive for desiring to find Nicholson, than Charlie had said +at his first interview with him. They thought it would be better, +now, to make him more fully acquainted with the facts, for they had +found him shrewd, and eager to assist them to the best of his +power. They therefore sent a boy with a note to him, at the court, +and at seven o'clock he came to their lodgings.</p> + +<p>"We have found our man," Charlie said as he entered.</p> + +<p>"I am very glad to hear it, gentlemen. I had quite given up all +hopes that you would be able to do so, and thought he must have +left town altogether for a time."</p> + +<p>"Sit down and take a glass of wine. We want your advice in this +matter, and unless you know how much there is at stake, you will +not be able to enter fully into the affair.</p> + +<p>"Some four years ago, this fellow was concerned in a plot by +which six gentlemen, among whom were our friends, were brought to +ruin. They were in the habit of meeting together, being all of +similar political opinions, and advantage was taken of this by a +man, who hoped to profit largely by their ruin, especially by that +of my father. In order to bring this about, he recommended this +fellow we are in search of to my father, who happened, at the time, +to be in want of a servant.</p> + +<p>"The fellow undoubtedly acted as a spy, for I once caught him at +it. But spying alone would have been of no use, for there was +nothing at any time said that would have brought harm upon them. +They simply discussed what thousands of other people have +discussed, the measures that should be taken on behalf of the +Stuarts, if one of them came over from France supported by a French +force. The fellow, however, swore that the object of these meetings +was to arrange for an assassination of William. He gave full +details of the supposed plot, and in order to give substance to his +statements, he hid, in a cabinet of my father's, a number of +compromising papers, professing to be letters from abroad.</p> + +<p>"These were found by the officers sent to arrest my father. He +and his five friends managed to escape, but their estates were +forfeited. Of course, what we want to prove is the connection +between this spy and his employer, who, for his services in +bringing this supposed plot to light, received as a reward my +father's estates. There is no way of doing this, unless this man +can be brought to confess his own villainy in the matter of the +letters, and to denounce the scoundrel whose agent he was. +Probably, by this time, he has got nearly all he can expect from +his employer, and will at least feel no scruples in exposing him, +if by so doing he can save his own neck.</p> + +<p>"Now, we have not only discovered the man, but have found out +that he is a notorious highwayman, and the leader of a gang; but +more, I have found out the day and hour on which he proposes to +stop and rob the North coach."</p> + +<p>"Well, Mr. Carstairs, if you have done that," the man said, "you +have done marvels. That you should find the man might be a piece of +good luck, but that you should have learned all this about him +seems to me wonderful."</p> + +<p>"It was a lucky accident, altogether. We saw him, watched him, +and managed to overhear a conversation from which we gathered these +facts. It was all simple enough. Of course, our idea is that we +should, if possible, catch him in the act of robbing the coach, +bind and take charge of him, saying that we should hand him over to +justice, when the coachman and passengers would, of course, appear +to testify against him. Instead of doing this, we should take him +somewhere, and then give him the option of either making a clean +breast of the whole story, and remaining in our custody until +called upon to testify to his statement in a court of justice, +whenever required; or of being handed over to the authorities, to +be tried and hung as a highwayman.</p> + +<p>"One of our greatest difficulties is how to effect his capture. +The attack will be made at night on the coach, and in the darkness +we might shoot him, or he might get away. He is at present in +London, at a lodging in a street behind the Abbey, where, +doubtless, his real profession is altogether unsuspected by the +people of the house.</p> + +<p>"Now you know the whole affair. Let us have your opinion as to +the manner in which we had best set about the business."</p> + +<p>The man sat for some time, in silence.</p> + +<p>"I can think of no better plan than yours, sir, and yet it seems +to me that there is scarcely any chance of your catching him at the +coach. Of course, it would be easy enough if you did not care +whether you killed or caught him. All you would have to do would be +to get half a dozen stout fellows, armed with pistols, on the coach +with you instead of passengers, and then you would be pretty +certain to kill some of them, perhaps all; but, as you can't do +that, and are afraid to shoot lest you should kill him, it seems to +me that you have a very small chance of catching him that way."</p> + +<p>Charlie and his friend so thoroughly saw this, that they sat +silent when he ceased speaking.</p> + +<p>"We could not arrest him now, I suppose?" Harry said at +last.</p> + +<p>"Well, you see, you have got nothing against him. He may have +been a Knight of the Road for the last five years, but you have no +witnesses to prove it, and it is not much use to accuse him of +intending to rob the North mail. You have no proofs, even of that. +It is only your word against his.</p> + +<p>"There is no doubt that, after they have robbed the coach, they +will separate. They may go away in twos, or singly. Now, you see, +we know three of this fellow's hiding places. He would hardly +choose the one at Barnet. It is too close. It is more likely he +would choose the next place, the little inn in which you saw him +first; but I think it more likely still that he and his mates will +divide the plunder, half a mile or so from the place where they +stopped the coach, and will then separate, and I am inclined to +think his most likely course is to strike off from the main road, +make a long round, and come down before morning to where he is now. +He may take his horse into its stable, or, more likely, he may +leave it at some place he may know of on the road leading out +through Putney, and then arrive at his lodgings just about +daybreak. He would explain he had been at a supper, and had kept it +up all night, and no one would even have a suspicion he had been +engaged in the affair with the coach. I am sure that is his most +likely plan."</p> + +<p>"Then, what would you do?" Harry asked.</p> + +<p>"What I should do is this. I will get two sharp active boys. I +know of two who would just do, they have done jobs for us before +now. I will give them the exact description of those two taverns, +and send them down the day before the coach is to be attacked, and +tell them that, that night, they are each to keep watch over one of +them, see who goes in, watch till they come out, and then follow +them, for days if necessary, and track them down. Then they can +send word up by the guard of the coach, each day; so that, if we +find our man does not come back here by Saturday morning, we shall +have news that will put us on his track again, before long.</p> + +<p>"However, I think he is sure to come back here. You had better +point out to me, this evening, where he lodges, and I shall be able +to find out, before long, whether they are respectable people, or +whether they are likely to be pals of his.</p> + +<p>"If they are respectable, I will see them on Friday evening, +show them my badge, and tell them that the man who has been lodging +here is a notorious highwayman, and that I am going to arrest him. +To prevent any chance of a mistake, I will put three or four of my +mates round the house, to see that no one goes out to give him the +alarm. I will come down and open the door for you, at two o'clock +in the morning. You can then come up with me into his bedroom, and +as he comes in, I will nab him.</p> + +<p>"If, on the other hand, I find the people of the house have a +doubtful reputation in the neighbourhood, we must simply hide in +doorways, make a rush upon him as he goes up to the house, and +overpower him there. If one stands in his doorway, and leaps out on +him as he comes up, he won't have much chance of using a pistol. I +will have a cart ready, close by. We will truss him up tightly, gag +him and put him into it, and I will have some place ready for us to +drive him to, if you think that plan is as good as any other."</p> + +<p>"I think it is an excellent plan, and could not be better," +Charlie exclaimed, and his friend heartily agreed with him.</p> + +<p>"I think you will be able to get anything out of him, when you +get him there," said the tipstaff. "He is sure to have some of the +swag about him, and, even if none of the passengers of the coach +are able to swear to him, that and the talk you overheard would be +sufficient to hang him."</p> + +<p>"Can those boys you speak of write?"</p> + +<p>"Not they, sir."</p> + +<p>"There might be a difficulty about a verbal message."</p> + +<p>"The guard will give it, all right, if he gets half a crown with +it. You need not trouble about that, sir. I will have a man to meet +each coach, as it comes in.</p> + +<p>"And now we have arranged matters, sir, I will go with you to +see the house, and will send a sharp fellow down tomorrow, to make +inquiries about the people of the place."</p> + +<p>When they returned, the friends sat for a long time, talking +together. The suggested plan looked so hopeful that they felt +confident of its success.</p> + +<p>"I think, Charlie," Harry said, "it would be a good thing for us +to present ourselves to the Duke of Marlborough. Then we shall see +if he is disposed to take an interest in us, and help us. If he is, +he will tell us what had best be done towards getting Nicholson's +statement made in the presence of some sort of official who will +act on it. If he gives us the cold shoulder, we shall have to do as +best we can in some other direction, and it will be well to have +the matter settled, if possible, before we catch the fellow."</p> + +<p>"I think that will be a very good plan, Harry. I know where he +lives. I inquired directly I came over. Tomorrow morning we can go +there and inquire, at the door, at what hour he receives +callers."</p> + +<p>The next day at eleven o'clock the young men, dressed in their +best attire, called at the duke's. They were informed that the +great man was at home, and would be as likely to see them then as +at any other hour. Accordingly they entered, and were shown into an +anteroom, and sent their names in by a footman. He returned with a +request that they would follow him, and were shown into a library, +where a singularly handsome man, in the prime of life, was sitting +at a desk. He looked at them in some surprise.</p> + +<p>"Is there not some mistake, young gentlemen?" he asked. "My +servant gave the names as Captain Jervoise, and Captain Carstairs. +I do not recall the names as those of officers in her majesty's +service."</p> + +<p>"No, my lord, we have the honour to be captains in the service +of King Charles of Sweden, as this document, signed both by his +minister, Count Piper, and by the king himself, will testify."</p> + +<p>The duke took the paper, and read it.</p> + +<p>"The king of Sweden speaks very highly of you both, gentlemen," +he said cordially. "It is no mean credit to have gained such warm +praise from the greatest general of his time. What can I do for +you? Do you wish to be transferred from the service of Sweden to +that of her majesty? We have need of good officers, and I can +promise that you shall receive the same rank that you now hold, and +it is likely that, before long, you will have an opportunity of +seeing some service under your national flag."</p> + +<p>"I thank you warmly for your kindness, my lord, but it is not +with that view that we have now come to you, though I am sure that +we both should prefer to fight under our own flag, rather than +under that of a foreign king, however kindly he may be disposed to +us, personally. We have called upon a private matter, and I am the +bearer of this letter from my father, who had once the honour of +your lordship's friendship."</p> + +<p>"Jervoise," the duke repeated, as he took the letter. "Not Mat +Jervoise, surely?"</p> + +<p>"That is my father's name, sir."</p> + +<p>"Do I remember him? Why, he was one of my closest friends when I +was a lad, and I once stayed with him at his father's place, for a +fortnight, on a journey I took to the north. But I will read his +letter--</p> + +<p>"What changes happen," he said, as he laid it down. "To think +that Mat Jervoise should be an exile, his old home in the hands of +strangers, and he a major in the Swedish service; and that I should +never have heard a word about it!</p> + +<p>"Well, young sir," and he held out his hand to Harry, "I can +promise you my aid and protection, to the utmost, in whatever +matter you may be concerned. I seem to remember the name of your +companion, too."</p> + +<p>"His father, Sir Marmaduke, was a neighbour of ours. There has +always been great friendship between the two families."</p> + +<p>"Of course, I remember him now. He was some fifteen or twenty +years older than your father. I remember that I went over with your +father and grandfather, and dined at his place. He is still alive +and well, I hope?"</p> + +<p>"He is both, sir," Charlie said; "but, like Major Jervoise, an +exile."</p> + +<p>"You amaze me, but I will not ask you to tell me more, now. I +have to be at Saint James's at twelve.</p> + +<p>"Let me see, this evening I shall be engaged. Come tomorrow +morning, at half past eight, and I shall then be able to give you +an hour, or maybe two, if necessary, and will then hear the whole +story fully."</p> + +<p>The young men, on presenting themselves the next morning, at the +hour named, were at once ushered in.</p> + +<p>"Now, let us lose no time," the duke said, after shaking hands +heartily. "Which of you will tell the story?"</p> + +<p>"Carstairs will do so, my lord," Harry replied. "The mischief +was hatched in his house, and my father, and six other gentlemen, +were the victims of the treachery of a kinsman of his."</p> + +<p>Charlie told the story of the events that had brought about the +ruin of his father and friends.</p> + +<p>"It is monstrous!" the duke exclaimed indignantly, when he had +brought this part of his story to a conclusion. "That my old +friend, Mat Jervoise, should be concerned in a plot for +assassination, is, I would pledge my life, untrue; and Sir +Marmaduke Carstairs was, I know, an honourable gentleman, who would +be equally incapable of such an act. That they were both Jacobites, +I can well believe, for the Jacobites are strong everywhere in the +north, but, as half of us are or have been Jacobites, that can +scarcely be counted as an offence. At any rate, a Stuart is upon +the throne now, and, as long as she reigns, there is no fear that a +civil war will be set up by another of the race. The story, as you +have told it, sir, is, I doubt not for a moment, true, but at +present it is unsupported; and though, on my assurance of their +loyalty, I think I can promise that her majesty would extend a +pardon to the gentlemen who have been so unjustly accused, I fear +that she could not, by her own act, restore the estates that have +been confiscated, unless you can bring some proof that this fellow +you speak of was suborned to get up false evidence against +them."</p> + +<p>"That, sir, is what I shall have the honour to inform you +now."</p> + +<p>And Charlie then related the story of their quest for the man +Nicholson, and its result.</p> + +<p>"Rarely devised and carried out," the duke said warmly. "Do you +lay the knave by the heels, and frighten him into confessing the +truth, and I will see to the rest of the matter. I do not know that +I ought to let the North coach be robbed, after the information you +have given me, but, as we will hunt down all the other fellows, and +shall probably recover the booty they carry off, the passengers +will have no reason to grumble.</p> + +<p>"Well, young sirs, the king of Sweden has given you a +testimonial as to your bravery and conduct. If necessary, I will +give you one for your ingenuity in planning and carrying out a +difficult scheme.</p> + +<p>"So you have both been with the Swedes through their campaign +against the Russians and Poles. I envy you. King Charles' service +is a grand school for soldiers, and that victory of Narva is the +most extraordinary one ever seen. Had you the honour of any +personal intercourse with the king?"</p> + +<p>"Only during three days, when our company formed part of his +escort at a hunting expedition," Harry, whom he addressed, replied. +"But Carstairs spoke to him more frequently. He has been a captain +nearly two years, while I only had my promotion two months ago. We +were in the same regiment, and of the same rank, but Carstairs was +promoted by the king, after the battle at the passage of the Dwina, +as a reward for the suggestion he made in conversation with him, +that the passage might be made under the screen of smoke caused by +the lighting of the forage stacks."</p> + +<p>"I must have a long talk with you both. It is certain that, next +spring, the campaign with France will re-open, and your experience +in the field will be very useful to me. The Swedes are wonderful +soldiers. The Muscovites, at present, are little better than +barbarians carrying European arms, but the Saxons are good troops, +and the Swedes have twice beaten them heavily, and they evidently +retain the fighting qualities that, under Gustavus Adolphus, shook +the imperial power to its centre.</p> + +<p>"The trouble is to find time. I am pestered with men desirous of +employment in the army, with persons who want favours at court, +with politicians of both parties, with people with schemes and +intrigues of all kinds. I have to be in attendance at the palace, +and to see into the whole details of the organization of the army. +I have no doubt that, at present, my antechamber is crowded with +people who want to see me."</p> + +<p>He looked at his tablets.</p> + +<p>"Next Wednesday evening I am free, except for a reception at +Lord Godolphin's, but I can look in there late. I will not ask you +here, because I want you to myself. I will have a private room at +Parker's coffee house in Covent Garden. We will sup at seven. When +you go there, ask for Mr. Church's room, and make yourself +comfortable there until I come, for I can never answer for my own +hours. In that way, we shall be free from all chance of +interruption, and I can pick your brains undisturbed. You will +remember the day and hour. Should there be any change in this +private matter of yours, do not hesitate to come to me here."</p> + +<p>Tony Peters, their guide and adviser, reported favourably as to +the people with whom the highwayman was lodging.</p> + +<p>"The house is kept by the widow of an usher at the palace. She +entertains gentlemen from the country, who come up on business at +the courts of justice, or with people of influence at court. I have +ascertained that our man passes as a well-to-do trader of +Salisbury, who comes up, two or three times a year, to transact +business, and to enjoy for a short time the pleasures of town. He +is liberal in his payments, and is held in high respect by the +woman, whose only objection to him, as a lodger, is the late hours +he keeps. He is a crafty fellow this, for by always going to the +same house, and comporting himself with moderation, he secures a +place of retirement, where, however close the quest after him, +there will be no suspicion whatever, as to his profession, on the +part of the people he is with.</p> + +<p>"My man found out all these matters from the servant wench. We +shall have no difficulty in taking him quietly. The woman will be +so terrified, when I tell her what he is wanted for, that she will +do anything rather than have a scandal that would damage the +reputation of the house."</p> + +<p>He assured Charlie that he need give the matter no further +thought. All the arrangements would be made, and, unless he heard +farther from him, he and Harry would only have to present +themselves, at the door of the house in question, at two o'clock on +the morning of Saturday.</p> + +<p>The evening with the duke passed off pleasantly. The general's +questions turned, not so much upon the actual fighting, as upon the +organization of the Swedes, their methods of campaigning, of +victualling the army, of hutting themselves in winter, the +maintenance of discipline in camp, and other military points that +would be of service to him in his next campaign.</p> + +<p>"Your king is very wise, in so strictly repressing all +plundering and violence," he said. "Only so can a general maintain +an army in an enemy's country. If the peasantry have confidence in +him, and know that they will get a fair price for their produce, +they will bring it into the market gladly, in spite of any orders +their own government may issue to the contrary. I am determined +that, if I again lead an English army in the field, I will follow +King Charles' example; though I shall find it more difficult to +enforce my orders than he does, for he is king as well as general, +and his Swedes are quiet, honest fellows, while my army will be +composed of ne'er-do-wells--of men who prefer to wear the queen's +uniform to a prison garment, of debtors who wish to escape their +creditors, and of men who find village life too quiet for them, and +prefer to see the world, even at the risk of being shot, to honest +labour on the farms. It requires a stern hand to make a disciplined +army out of such materials, but when the time of fighting comes, +one need wish for no better."</p> + +<p>Before parting with them, the duke inquired farther into their +arrangements for the arrest of the highwayman, and said he should +expect to see them on Saturday, and that, if he heard that all had +gone well, he would at once take steps for bringing the matter +before a court that would deal with it.</p> + +<p>The young men felt restless, as the day approached. They had +seen no more of Tony, but they felt complete confidence in him, and +were sure that they would hear if any difficulties arose; but +though, throughout Friday, they did not quit their lodging, no +message reached them.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch18">Chapter 18</a>: A Confession.</h2> + +<p>At the appointed hour, as the clock of the Abbey was striking, +they gave three gentle knocks at the door of the house. It was +immediately opened by Tony, who held a candle in his hand, closed +the door quietly behind them, and then led them into a parlour.</p> + +<p>"Well, Tony, I suppose all has gone well, as we have not heard +from you."</p> + +<p>"There was nothing to tell you, sir, and, indeed, I have been +mightily busy. In the first place, I got two days' leave from the +courts, and went down myself, in a light cart, with the boys and +two men. That way I made sure that there should be no mistake as to +the houses the boys were to watch. The two men I sent on, ten miles +beyond the farthest tavern there to watch the road, and if any +horseman goes by tonight, to track him down.</p> + +<p>"This evening I came here. I brought with me one of my comrades +from the courts, and we told the good woman the character of the +lodger we had seen leave the house a quarter of an hour before. She +almost fainted when we showed her our badges, and said we must +arrest him, on his return, as a notorious highwayman and breaker of +the laws. She exclaimed that her house would be ruined, and it took +some time to pacify her, by saying that we would manage the job so +quietly that no one in the house need know of it, and that we +would, if possible, arrange it so that the place of his arrest +should not be made public.</p> + +<p>"At that, she at once consented to do all that we wished her. We +searched his room carefully, and found some watches, rings, and +other matters, that answered to the description of those stolen +from a coach that was stopped near Dorking, three weeks ago. My +mate has taken them away. As she was afraid that a scuffle in the +bedroom might attract the attention of the four other gentlemen who +are lodging here, I arranged that it should be done at the door. In +that case, if there was any inquiry in the morning, she could say +that it was some drunken fellow, who had come to the house by +mistake, and had tried to force his way in.</p> + +<p>"So she put this parlour at our disposal, and, as I have got the +shutters up and the curtains drawn, there is no fear of his +noticing the light, for, as we may have some hours to wait, it is +more pleasant to have a candle, than to sit in the dark."</p> + +<p>"Does she come down to let him in?" Harry asked.</p> + +<p>"No, sir, the door is left on the latch. She says he finds his +way up to his room, in the dark, and the candle and a tinderbox are +always placed handy for him there. We will take our shoes off +presently, and, when we hear footsteps come up to the door and +stop, we will blow out the candle and steal out into the passage, +so as to catch him directly he closes the door. I have got +handcuffs here, some rope, and a gag."</p> + +<p>"Very well, then. I will undertake the actual seizing of him," +Charlie said. "You slip on the handcuffs, and you, Harry, if you +can find his throat in the dark, grip it pretty tightly, till Tony +can slip the gag into his mouth. Then he can light the candle +again, and we can then disarm and search him, fasten his legs, and +get him ready to put in the cart."</p> + +<p>The hours passed slowly, although Tony did his best to divert +them, by telling stories of various arrests and captures in which +he had been concerned. The clock had just struck five, when they +heard a step coming up the quiet street.</p> + +<p>"That is likely to be the man," Tony said. "It is about the hour +we expected him."</p> + +<p>He blew out the candle and opened the door quietly, and they +went out into the passage. A moment later the step stopped at the +door, the latch clicked, and it was opened. A man entered, and +closed the door behind him. As he did so Charlie, who had marked +his exact position, made a step forward and threw his arms round +him.</p> + +<p>The man gave an exclamation of surprise and alarm, and then +struggled fiercely, but he was in the hands of one far stronger +than himself. A moment later, he felt that his assailant was not +alone, for he was grasped by the throat, and at the same time he +felt something cold close round his wrists. There was a sharp +click, and he knew that he was handcuffed.</p> + +<p>Then a low voice said, "I arrest you, in the name of the queen, +for being concerned in the robbery of the Portsmouth coach at +Dorking."</p> + +<p>Then a gag was forced between his teeth. Bewildered at the +suddenness of the attack, he ceased to struggle, and remained +quiet, in the grasp of his captors, till there was the sound of the +striking of flint and steel hard by. Then Tony came out of the +parlour with a lighted candle, the highwayman was lifted into the +room, and the door was shut.</p> + +<p>He then saw that his captors were three in number. There were +two young gentlemen, and a smaller man, who, as he looked at him, +held out a badge, and showed that he was an officer of the law. His +pistols and sword were removed, then his pockets were searched, and +two watches and three purses, with some rings and bracelets, were +taken out and laid on the table.</p> + +<p>"It came off, you see," Tony said to Charlie.</p> + +<p>"Well, Master Nicholson, to use one of your aliases, of which +you have, no doubt, a score or more, you may consider yourself +under arrest, not only for the robbery of the Portsmouth coach +three weeks ago, but of the North coach last evening."</p> + +<p>The prisoner started. It seemed impossible to him that that +affair should be known yet, still less his connection with it.</p> + +<p>"You know what that means?" Tony went on grimly. "Tyburn. Now I +am going to make you a little safer still. You have been a hard +bird to catch, and we don't mean to let you slip through our +fingers again."</p> + +<p>So saying, he bound his arms closely to his side with a rope, +and then, with a shorter piece, fastened his ankles securely +together.</p> + +<p>"Now I will fetch the cart."</p> + +<p>He had been gone but five minutes, when they heard a vehicle +stop at the door. The others lifted the highwayman by his shoulders +and feet, carried him out, and laid him in the cart. Tony closed +the door quietly behind them, and then jumped up by the side of the +driver, who at once started the horse at a brisk trot. They crossed +Westminster Bridge, and, after another ten minutes' drive, stopped +at a small house standing back from the road, in a garden of its +own.</p> + +<p>"We will carry him in, Tony," Charlie said, "if you will get the +door open."</p> + +<p>They carried him in through the door, at which a woman was +standing, into a room, where they saw, to their satisfaction, a +blazing fire. The prisoner was laid down on the ground. Leaving him +to himself, Charlie and his friends sat down to the table, which +was laid in readiness. Two cold chickens, and ham, and bread had +been placed on it.</p> + +<p>"Now, Tony, sit down. You must be as hungry as we are."</p> + +<p>"Thank you, gentlemen. I am going to have my breakfast in the +kitchen, with my wife."</p> + +<p>As he spoke, the woman came in with two large tankards full of +steaming liquid, whose odour at once proclaimed it to be spiced +ale.</p> + +<p>"Well, wife, we have done a good night's work," Tony said.</p> + +<p>"A good night's work for all of us," Charlie put in. "Your +husband has done us an immense service, Mrs. Peters, and, when our +fathers come to their own again, they will not forget the service +he has rendered us."</p> + +<p>When they had made a hearty meal, Tony was called in again.</p> + +<p>"Now, Tony, we will proceed to business. You have got pen and +ink and paper, I suppose?"</p> + +<p>"I have everything ready, sir. I will clear away this table, so +as to have all in order."</p> + +<p>When this was done, the highwayman was lifted up and placed in a +chair, and the gag removed from his mouth.</p> + +<p>"You don't remember us, I suppose, my man?" Charlie began. "The +last time I saw you was when I brought my stick down on your head, +when you were listening outside a window at Lynnwood."</p> + +<p>An exclamation of surprise broke from the prisoner.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I am Charlie Carstairs, and this gentleman is Harry +Jervoise. By the way, I have made a mistake. I have seen you twice +since then. The first time was in a wayside tavern, some twelve +miles beyond Barnet, nine days ago. The second time was at another +tavern in Barnet. You will remember that a mischievous boy threw a +stone, and broke one of the lattice panes of the window, where you +were sitting talking over this little affair of the North +coach."</p> + +<p>A deep execration broke from the lips of the highwayman.</p> + +<p>"Now you see how we know all about it," Charlie went on. "Now, +it entirely depends on yourself whether, in the course of another +hour, we shall hand you over to a magistrate, as the leader of the +gang who robbed the North coach, and took part in the robbery near +Dorking--we have found some of the watches and other plunder in +your bedroom--or whether you escape trial for these offences. You +may be wanted for other, similar affairs."</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir," Tony put in. "Now I see him, he answers exactly to +the description of a man the officers have been in search of, for a +long time. He goes by the name of Dick Cureton, and has been +engaged in at least a dozen highway robberies, to my +knowledge."</p> + +<p>"You see," Charlie went on, "there is no doubt whatever what +will happen, if we hand you over to the officers. You will be hung +at Tyburn, to a moral certainty. There is no getting out of +that.</p> + +<p>"Now, on the other hand, you have the alternative of making a +clean breast of your dealings with John Dormay, of how he put you +at Lynnwood to act as a spy, how you hid those two letters he gave +you in my father's cabinet, and how he taught you the lying story +you afterwards told before the magistrates at Lancaster. After +having this story written down, you will sign it in the presence of +this officer and his wife, and you will also repeat that story +before any tribunal before which you may be brought.</p> + +<p>"I don't know whether this is a hanging matter, but, at any +rate, I can promise that you shall not be hung for it. The Duke of +Marlborough has taken the matter in hand, and will, I have no +doubt, be able to obtain for you some lesser punishment, if you +make a clean breast of it. I don't say that you will be let free. +You are too dangerous a man for that. But, at any rate, your +punishment will not be a heavy one--perhaps nothing worse than +agreeing to serve in the army. You understand that, in that case, +nothing whatever will be said as to your being Dick Cureton, or of +your connection with these last coach robberies. You will appear +before the court simply as Robert Nicholson, who, having met +Captain Jervoise and myself, felt constrained to confess the +grievous wrong he did to our fathers, and other gentlemen, at the +bidding of, and for money received from, John Dormay."</p> + +<p>"I do not need any time to make up my mind," the highwayman +said. "I am certainly not going to be hung for the advantage of +John Dormay, who has paid me poorly enough, considering that it was +through me that he came into a fine estate. I take it that you give +me your word of honour, that if I make a clean breast of it, and +stick to my story afterwards, this other business shall not be +brought up against me."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we both promise that on our word of honour."</p> + +<p>"Very well then; here goes."</p> + +<p>The story he told was in precise accordance with the suspicions +that his hearers had entertained. He had been tramping through the +country, sometimes pilfering, sometimes taking money as a footpad. +He had, one day, met John Dormay and demanded his money. He was +armed only with a heavy cudgel, and thought Dormay was +defenceless.</p> + +<p>The latter, however, produced a pistol from his pocket, and +compelled him to drop his stick; and then, taking him by the +collar, made him walk to his house. He had asked him questions as +to his previous life, and had then given him the choice of going to +jail, or of acting under his instructions, in which case he would +be well rewarded. Naturally, he had chosen the second alternative. +And, having him completely under his thumb, John Dormay had made +him sign a paper, acknowledging his attempt at highway robbery upon +him.</p> + +<p>The rest of the story was already known to his hearers. He had, +several times, overheard the conversations in the dining room, but +had gathered nothing beyond talk of what would be done, if the +Pretender came over. John Dormay had taught him the story of the +assassination plot, and had given him the letters to hide. He now +swore that the whole story was false, and had been told entirely at +the dictation of John Dormay, and from fear of the consequence to +himself, if he refused to obey his orders.</p> + +<p>When he had finished, Tony's wife was called in, and she made +her mark, and her husband signed his name, as witnesses to the +signature of Robert Nicholson.</p> + +<p>"Now, I hope I may have something to eat," the man said, +recklessly. "I am ready to tell my story to whomsoever you like, +but am not ready to be starved."</p> + +<p>"Give him food, Tony," Charlie said, "and keep a sharp lookout +after him. We will go across, and show this paper to the duke."</p> + +<p>"I will bring the matter, at once, before the council," the +general said, when Charlie gave him the document, and briefly +stated its contents. "There is a meeting at three o'clock today. I +shall see the queen previously, and will get her to interest +herself in the matter, and to urge that justice shall be done +without any delay. I will arrange that the man shall be brought +before the council, at the earliest date possible. If you will come +here this evening, I may be able to tell you more. Come at eight. I +shall be in then to dress, as I take supper at the palace, at +nine."</p> + +<p>"I have ventured to promise the man that he shall not be hung, +my lord."</p> + +<p>"You were safe in doing so. The rogue deserves the pillory or +branding, but, as he was almost forced into it, and was the mere +instrument in the hands of another, it is not a case for hanging +him. He might be shipped off to the plantations as a rogue and a +vagabond.</p> + +<p>"What are you smiling at?"</p> + +<p>"I was thinking, sir, that, as you said there were a good many +of that class in the army, the man might have the option of +enlisting given him."</p> + +<p>"And so of getting shot in the Netherlands, instead of getting +hung at Tyburn, eh? Well, I will see what I can do."</p> + +<p>At eight o'clock, they again presented themselves. The duke +looked at them critically.</p> + +<p>"You will do," he said. "Put your cloaks on again, and come with +me. Where do you suppose that you are going?"</p> + +<p>"Before the council, sir," Harry suggested.</p> + +<p>"Bless me, you don't suppose that your business is so pressing, +that ministers have been summoned in haste to sit upon it. No, you +are going to sup with the queen. I told her your story this +afternoon. She was much interested in it, and when I informed her +that, young as you both were, you had fought behind Charles of +Sweden, in all his desperate battles, and that he had not only +promoted you to the rank of captain, but that he had, under his own +hand, given you a document expressing his satisfaction at your +conduct and bravery, she said that I must bring you to supper at +the palace. I told her that, being soldiers, you had brought with +you no clothes fit for appearance at court; but, as at little +gatherings there is no ceremony, she insisted that I should bring +you as you are.</p> + +<p>"My wife Sarah went on half an hour ago, in her chair. There will +probably be two others, possibly Godolphin and Harley, but more +likely some courtier and his wife.</p> + +<p>"You do not feel nervous, I hope? After being accustomed to chat +with Charles of Sweden, to say nothing of the Czar of Russia, +Carstairs, you need not feel afraid of Queen Anne, who is good +nature itself."</p> + +<p>Nevertheless, both the young men felt nervous. After being +conducted up some private stairs, the duke led them into an +oak-panelled room, of comparatively small size, lighted by numerous +tapers, which displayed the rich hangings and furniture. A lady was +sitting by the fire. A tall, handsome woman, with a somewhat +imperious face, stood on the rug before her, talking to her, while +a pleasant-looking man, who by his appearance and manner might have +been taken for a country squire, was sitting opposite, playing with +the ears of a spaniel lying on his knee.</p> + +<p>The tall lady moved aside, as they entered, and Charlie noticed +a little glance of affectionate welcome pass between her and the +duke--for the pair were devotedly attached to each other--then he +bowed to the seated lady.</p> + +<p>"Madam," he said, "allow me to present to you the two young +officers, of whose bravery Charles of Sweden has written so +strongly, and whose parents have, with other gentlemen, been driven +from the land by villainy."</p> + +<p>The young men bowed deeply. Anne held out her hand, and each in +turn, bending on one knee, raised it to his lips.</p> + +<p>"There," she said, "let that be the beginning and end of +ceremony. This is not a court gathering, but a family meeting. I +want to hear your stories, and I want you, for the time, to forget +that I am Anne of England. I know that your fathers have always +been faithful to our house, and I hope that their sons will, ere +long, do as good service for me as they have done for a foreign +prince.</p> + +<p>"You have not seen these gentlemen yet, Sarah?"</p> + +<p>"No, my husband has kept them to himself."</p> + +<p>"I have had but little time to give them, Sarah, and wanted it +all, to question them on the Swedish modes of warfare."</p> + +<p>"And you thought I should be an interruption?</p> + +<p>"I am glad to meet you both, nevertheless. Since my husband +likes you, I am sure to do so;" and she smiled pleasantly, as she +gave a hand to each.</p> + +<p>They were then introduced to the Prince Consort, George of +Denmark.</p> + +<p>At this moment, supper was announced. The queen and the duchess +went in together, followed by the four gentlemen.</p> + +<p>"Lord Godolphin and Mr. Harley were to have been of the party +tonight," the queen said, as she took her seat at table, "but I put +them off till tomorrow, as I wanted to hear these gentlemen's +story."</p> + +<p>During the meal, the conversation was gay. As soon as the last +dish was removed, the party returned to the other room. Then the +queen called upon the young men to tell their story.</p> + +<p>Charlie began, and related up to the time when he had aided in +the rescue of his father from the hands of his escort. Harry told +the story of their military experiences, and then Charlie related +his narrow escape at Warsaw, his adventure with the brigands, and +the fight with the wolves.</p> + +<p>"That is the most exciting of all," the queen said.</p> + +<p>"I think that even you, general, would rather have gone through +the battle of Narva, than have spent that night among the +wolves."</p> + +<p>"That would I, indeed, madam, and I doubt if I should have got +as well through it as Captain Carstairs did. I am sure, madam, you +will agree with me, that these young gentlemen ought to be fighting +under our flag, rather than that of Sweden. There is no blame to +them, for they were most unjustly driven from the country; but I +hope that, by Monday at this time, I shall have the pleasure of +presenting a document for your majesty's signature, stating that, +in the opinion of the council, a very grave miscarriage of justice +has taken place; and that the gentlemen, whose estates were four +years ago confiscated, are proved to be innocent of the crime of +which they were accused, and are true and faithful subjects of your +majesty; and that the proceedings against them are hereby quashed, +and their estates restored to them.</p> + +<p>"I had the honour of relating to you, this afternoon, the manner +in which these gentlemen have succeeded in bringing the truth to +light."</p> + +<p>Shortly afterwards, the party broke up, the queen speaking most +graciously to each of the young men.</p> + +<p>On Monday morning, they received a summons to appear before the +council, at two o'clock in the afternoon, and to produce one Robert +Nicholson, whose evidence was required in a matter of moment. They +hired a carriage, and took the highwayman with them to Saint +James's, and were conducted to the council chamber; where they +found Lord Godolphin, the Marquis of Normanby, Mr. Harley, and the +Duke of Marlborough, together with two judges, before whom the +depositions, in the case of Sir Marmaduke Carstairs and his +friends, had been laid.</p> + +<p>Lord Normanby, as privy seal, took the chair, and briefly said +that, having heard there had been a grievous miscarriage of +justice, he had summoned them to hear important evidence which was +produced by Captains Carstairs and Jervoise, officers in the +service of the king of Sweden.</p> + +<p>"What have you to say, Captain Carstairs?"</p> + +<p>"I have, sir, only to testify that this man, who stands beside +me, is Robert Nicholson, who was in my father's employment for two +years, and was, I believe, the principal witness against him. +Captain Jervoise can also testify to his identity. I now produce +the confession, voluntarily made by this man, and signed in the +presence of witnesses."</p> + +<p>He handed in the confession, which was read aloud by a clerk +standing at the lower end of the table. A murmur of indignation +arose from the council, as he concluded.</p> + +<p>"You have acted the part of a base villain," Lord Normanby said +to Nicholson. "Hanging would be too good for such a caitiff. What +induced you to make this confession?"</p> + +<p>"I have long repented my conduct," the man said. "I was forced +into acting as I did, by John Dormay, who might have had me hung +for highway robbery. I would long ago have told the truth, had I +known where to find the gentlemen I have injured; and, meeting them +by chance the other day, I resolved upon making a clean breast of +it, and to take what punishment your lordships may think proper; +hoping, however, for your clemency, on account of the fact that I +was driven to act in the way I did."</p> + +<p>One of the judges, who had the former depositions before him, +asked him several questions as to the manner in which he had put +the papers into Sir Marmaduke's cabinet.</p> + +<p>He replied that he found the key in a vase on the mantel, and +after trying several locks with it, found that it fitted the +cabinet.</p> + +<p>"His statement agrees, my lords," the judge said, "with that +made by Sir Marmaduke Carstairs in his examinations. He then said +that he could not account for the papers being in his cabinet, for +it was never unlocked, and that he kept the key in a vase on the +mantel, where none would be likely to look for it."</p> + +<p>In a short time, all present were requested to withdraw, but in +less than five minutes they were again called in.</p> + +<p>"Gentlemen," Lord Normanby said to the young officers, "I have +pleasure in informing you, that the council are of opinion that the +innocence of your fathers and friends, of the foul offence of which +they were charged, is clearly proven; and that they have decided +that the sentence passed against them, in their absence, shall be +quashed. They will also recommend, to her majesty, that the +sentence of confiscation against them all shall be reversed.</p> + +<p>"As to you, sir, seeing that you have, however tardily, +endeavoured to undo the evil you have caused, we are disposed to +deal leniently, and, at the request of the Duke of Marlborough, we +have agreed, if you are ready to leave the country and enlist at +once, as a soldier in the army of Flanders, and there to expiate +your fault by fighting in the service of your country, we will not +recommend that any proceedings shall be taken against you. But if, +at any time, you return hither, save as a soldier with a report of +good conduct, this affair will be revived, and you will receive the +full punishment you deserve.</p> + +<p>"For the present you will be lodged in prison, as you will be +needed to give evidence, when the matter of John Dormay comes up +for hearing."</p> + +<p>Nicholson was at once removed in custody. The two young officers +retired, an usher bringing them a whispered message, from +Marlborough, that they had better not wait to see him, as the +council might sit for some time longer; but that, if they would +call at his house at five o'clock, after his official reception, he +would see them.</p> + +<p>"This is more than we could have hoped for," Harry said, as they +left Saint James's. "A fortnight ago, although I had no intention +of giving up the search, I began to think that our chances of ever +setting eyes on that rascal were of the slightest; and now +everything has come right. The man has been found. He has been made +to confess the whole matter. The case has been heard by the +council. Our fathers are free to return to England, and their +estates are restored to them; at least, the council recommends the +queen, and we know the queen is ready to sign. So that it is as +good as done."</p> + +<p>"It seems too good to be true."</p> + +<p>"It does, indeed, Charlie. They will be delighted across the +water. I don't think my father counted, at all, upon our finding +Nicholson, or of our getting him to confess; but I think he had +hoped that the duke would interest himself to get an order, that no +further proceedings should be taken in the matter of the alleged +plot. That would have permitted them to return to England. He spoke +to me, several times, of his knowledge of the duke when he was a +young man; but Churchill, he said, was a time server, and has +certainly changed his politics several times; and, if a man is +fickle in politics, he may be so in his friendships. It was a great +many years since they had met, and Marlborough might not have been +inclined to acknowledge one charged with so serious a crime.</p> + +<p>"But, as he said to me before I started, matters have changed +since the death of William. Marlborough stands far higher, with +Anne, than he did with William. His leanings have certainly been, +all along, Jacobite, and, now that he and the Tories are in power, +and the Whigs are out of favour, Marlborough could, if he chose, do +very much for us. It is no longer a crime to be a Jacobite, and +indeed, they say that the Tories are intending to upset the act of +succession, and bring in a fresh one, making James Stuart the +successor to Anne.</p> + +<p>"Still, even if we had succeeded so far, by Marlborough's +influence, that our fathers could have returned to England without +fear of being tried for their lives, I do not think that either of +them would have come, so long as the charge of having been +concerned in an assassination plot was hanging over them.</p> + +<p>"Now that they are cleared, and can come back with honour, it +will be different, altogether. It will be glorious news for them. +Of course, we shall start as soon as we get the official +communication that the estates are restored. We shall only have to +go back to them, for, as you know, yours is the only estate that +has been granted to anyone else. The others were put up for sale, +but no one would bid for them, as the title deeds would have been +worth nothing if King James came over. So they have only been let +to farmers, and we can walk straight in again, without +dispossessing anyone."</p> + +<p>"I don't know what to do about John Dormay," Charlie said. +"There is no doubt that, from what the judge said, they will +prosecute him."</p> + +<p>"So they ought to," Harry broke in. "He has striven, by false +swearing, to bring innocent men to the scaffold. Why, it is worse +than murder."</p> + +<p>"I quite agree with you, Harry, and, if I were in your place, I +would say just as strongly as you do that he ought to be hung. But +you see, I am differently situated. The man is a kinsman of ours by +marriage. My cousin Celia has been always most kind to me, and is +my nearest relative after my father. She has been like an aunt, +and, indeed, did all she could to supply the place of a mother to +me; and I am sure my little sweetheart Ciceley has been like a +sister. This must have been a most terrible trial to them. It was a +bad day for cousin Celia when she married that scoundrel, and I am +sure that he has made her life a most unhappy one. Still, for their +sake, I would not see his villainy punished as it deserves, nor +indeed for our own, since the man is, to a certain extent, our +kinsman.</p> + +<p>"Besides, Harry, as you must remember well enough, Ciceley and +I, in boy and girl fashion, used to say we should be some day +husband and wife, and I have never since seen anyone whom I would +so soon marry as my bonny little cousin; and if Ciceley is of the +same mind, maybe some day or other she may come to Lynnwood as its +mistress; but that could hardly be, if her father were hung for +attempting to swear away the life of mine."</p> + +<p>"No, indeed, Charlie. I know how fond you were of your +cousin."</p> + +<p>"Indeed, Harry, there was a talk between my father and cousin +Celia, a few months before the troubles came, of a formal betrothal +between us, and, had it not been for the coolness between our +fathers, it would have taken place."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I remember now your telling me about it, Charlie.</p> + +<p>"Well, what is to be done? for I agree with you that, if +possible, John Dormay must escape from the punishment he deserves. +But how is it to be done?"</p> + +<p>"Well, Harry, a week or two will make no difference to our +fathers. They will have no expectation of hearing from us, for a +long time to come. I should say it were best that I should go down +and warn him, and I shall be glad if you will go with me."</p> + +<p>"Of course I will go," Harry said. "Indeed, it were best that +the warning came from me. The man is a villain, and a reckless one; +and in his passion, when he hears that his rascality is known, the +prize for which he schemed snatched from him, and his very life in +danger, might even seek to vent his rage and spite upon you. Now it +is clear, Charlie, that you could not very well kill a man, and +afterwards marry his daughter. The thing would be scarce seemly. +But the fellow is no kinsman of mine. He has grievously injured us, +and I could kill him without the smallest compunction, and thereby +rid the world of a scoundrel, and you of a prospective +father-in-law of the most objectionable kind."</p> + +<p>Charlie laughed.</p> + +<p>"No, Harry; we will have no killing. We will go down and see him +together. We will let him know that the orders are probably already +on the road for his arrest, and that he had best lose not an hour, +but at once cross the water. I should not think that he would wish +to encumber himself with women, for I never thought he showed the +least affection to either his wife or daughter. At any rate, we +will see that he does not take them with him. I will tell him that, +if he goes, and goes alone, I will do my best to hush up the +matter; and that, so long as he remains abroad, the tale of his +villainy shall never be told; but that, if he returns, the +confession of Nicholson shall be published throughout the country, +even if no prosecution is brought against him."</p> + +<p>When they called upon the duke, he shook them warmly by the +hand.</p> + +<p>"This parchment is the royal assent to the decision of the +council, that the estates of those inculpated in the alleged plot +for the assassination of the late king should be forthwith restored +to them, it having been clearly proved that they have been falsely +accused of the said crime, and that her majesty is satisfied that +these gentlemen are her true and loyal subjects.</p> + +<p>"I think I may say," the duke continued with a smile, "that no +affair of state has ever been so promptly conducted and carried +through."</p> + +<p>"We feel how deeply indebted we are, for our good fortune, to +your kindness, your grace," Charlie said. "We know that, but for +you, months might have elapsed, even years, before we could have +obtained such a result, even after we had the confession of +Nicholson in our hands."</p> + +<p>"I am glad, in every way, to have been able to bring this +about," the duke said. "In the first place, because I have been +able to right a villainous piece of injustice; in the second, +because those injured were loyal gentlemen, with no fault save +their steadfast adherence to the cause of the Stuarts; and lastly, +because one of these gentlemen was my own good friend, Mat +Jervoise, of whose company I have so many pleasant +recollections.</p> + +<p>"I hope that, as soon as you have informed your fathers that +their names are cleared, and their property restored, you will +think of what I said, and will decide to quit the service of +Sweden, and enter that of your queen.</p> + +<p>"An officer fighting for a foreign monarch is, after all, but a +soldier of fortune, however valiantly he fights. He is fighting for +a cause that is not his own, and, though he may win rewards and +honours, he has not the satisfaction that all must feel who have +risked their lives, not for gold, but in the service of their +country. But I do not want any answer from you on that head now. It +is a matter for you to decide upon after due thought. I only say +that I shall go out, early in the spring, to take command of the +army; and that, if you present yourselves to me before I leave, I +shall be glad to appoint you on my personal staff, with the same +rank you now hold.</p> + +<p>"You can now leave the country without any farther trouble. As +to the affair of the man Dormay, a messenger has been sent off, +this afternoon, with an order to the magistrates at Lancaster, to +arrest him on the charge of suborning false evidence, by which the +lives of some of her majesty's subjects were endangered; and of +forging letters whereby such evil designs might be furthered. I do +not suppose I shall see you again before you sail, for tomorrow we +go down to our country place, and may remain there some weeks. I +may say that it was the desire to get your affair finished, before +we left town, that conduced somewhat to the speed with which it has +been carried through."</p> + +<p>After again thanking the duke most warmly for his kindness, and +saying that they would lay his offer before their fathers, and that +their own inclinations were altogether in favour of accepting it, +the young men took their leave.</p> + +<p>"It is unfortunate about Dormay."</p> + +<p>"Most unfortunate," Harry said.</p> + +<p>"I think, if we start tomorrow morning, Harry, we shall be in +time. There is no reason why the messenger should travel at any +extraordinary speed, and, as he may be detained at Lancaster, and +some delay may arise before officers are sent up to Lynnwood to +make the arrest, we may be in time.</p> + +<p>"We must take a note of the date. It is one we shall remember +all our lives. It is the 25th of November, and we will keep it up +as a day of festivity and rejoicing, as long as we live."</p> + +<p>"That will we," Harry agreed. "It shall be the occasion of an +annual gathering of those who got into trouble from those suppers +at Sir Marmaduke's. I fancy the others are all in France, but their +friends will surely be able to let them know, as soon as they hear +the good news.</p> + +<p>"I think we shall have a stormy ride tomorrow. The sky looks +very wild and threatening."</p> + +<p>"It does, indeed; and the wind has got up very much, in the last +hour.''</p> + +<p>"Yes, we are going to have a storm, beyond all doubt."</p> + +<p>The wind got up hourly, and when, before going to bed, they went +to pass an hour at a tavern, they had difficulty in making their +way against it. Several times in the night they were awoke by the +gusts, which shook the whole house, and they heard the crashing of +falling chimney pots above the din of the gale.</p> + +<p>They had arranged to start as soon as it was light, and had, the +evening before, been to a posting inn, and engaged a carriage with +four horses for the journey down to Lancashire.</p> + +<p>"There is no starting today, gentlemen," the landlord said, as +they went down to breakfast by candlelight. "I have looked out, and +the street is strewn with chimney pots and tiles. Never do I +remember such a gale, and hour by hour it seems to get worse. Why, +it is dangerous to go across the street."</p> + +<p>"Well, we must try," Charlie said, "whatever the weather. It is +a matter of almost life and death."</p> + +<p>"Well, gentlemen, you must please yourselves, but I am mistaken +if any horse keeper will let his animals out, on such a day as +this."</p> + +<p>As soon as they had eaten their breakfasts, they wrapped +themselves up in their cloaks, pressed their hats over their heads, +and sallied out. It was not until they were in the streets that +they realized how great was the force of the gale. Not only were +the streets strewn with tiles and fragments of chimney pots, but +there was light enough for them to see that many of the upper +windows of the houses had been blown in by the force of the wind. +Tiles flew about like leaves in autumn, and occasionally gutters +and sheets of lead, stripped from the roofs, flew along with +prodigious swiftness.</p> + +<p>"This is as bad as a pitched battle, Charlie. I would as lief be +struck by a cannonball as by one of those strips of lead."</p> + +<p>"Well, we must risk it, Harry. We must make the attempt, +anyhow."</p> + +<p>It was with the greatest difficulty that they made their way +along. Although powerful young fellows, they were frequently +obliged to cling to the railings, to prevent themselves from being +swept away by the gusts, and they had more than one narrow escape +from falling chimneys. Although the distance they had to traverse +was not more than a quarter of a mile, it took them half an hour to +accomplish it.</p> + +<p>The post master looked at them in surprise, as they entered his +office flushed and disordered.</p> + +<p>"Why, gentlemen, you are not thinking of going on such a day as +this? It would be a sheer impossibility. Why, the carriage would be +blown over, and if it wasn't, no horses would face this wind."</p> + +<p>"We would be willing to pay anything you may like to ask," +Charlie said.</p> + +<p>"It ain't a question of money, sir. If you were to buy the four +horses and the carriage, you would be no nearer, for no post boy +would be mad enough to ride them; and, even supposing you got one +stage, which you never would do, you would have to buy horses +again, for no one would be fool enough to send his animals out. You +could not do it, sir. Why, I hear there are half a dozen houses, +within a dozen yards of this, that have been altogether unroofed, +and it is getting worse instead of better. If it goes on like this, +I doubt if there will be a steeple standing in London tomorrow.</p> + +<p>"Listen to that!"</p> + +<p>There was a tremendous crash, and, running out into the street, +they saw a mass of beams and tiles lying in the roadway--a house +two doors away had been completely unroofed. They felt that, in +such a storm, it was really impossible to proceed, and accordingly +returned to their lodgings, performing the distance in a fraction +of the time it had before taken them.</p> + +<p>For some hours the gale continued to increase in fury. Not a +soul was to be seen in the streets. Occasional heavy crashes told +of the damage that was being wrought, and, at times, the house +shook so that it seemed as if it would fall.</p> + +<p>Never was such a storm known in England. The damage done was +enormous. The shores were strewn with wrecks. Twelve ships of the +royal navy, with fifteen hundred men, were lost; and an enormous +number of merchant vessels. Many steeples, houses, and buildings of +all kinds were overthrown, and the damage, in London alone, was +estimated at a million pounds.</p> + +<p>There were few who went to bed that night. Many thought that the +whole city would be destroyed. Towards morning, however, the fury +of the gale somewhat abated, and by nightfall the danger had +passed.</p> + +<p>The next morning the two friends started, and posted down to +Lancashire. The journey was a long one. In many places the road was +completely blocked by fallen trees, and sometimes by the ruins of +houses and barns. In the former case, long detours had often to be +made through villainous roads, where the wheels sank almost to +their axles, and, in spite of the most liberal bribes to post boys +and post masters, the journey occupied four days longer than the +usual time.</p> + +<p>At last, they reached the lodge gate of Lynnwood. A man came out +from the cottage. He was the same who had been there in Sir +Marmaduke's time.</p> + +<p>Charlie jumped out of the post chaise.</p> + +<p>"Why, Norman, don't you know me?"</p> + +<p>The man looked hard at him.</p> + +<p>"No, sir, I can't say as I do."</p> + +<p>"What, not Charlie Carstairs?"</p> + +<p>"Bless me, it is the young master!" the man said. "To think of +my not knowing you. But you have changed wonderful. Why, sir, I +have been thinking of you often and often, and most of all the last +three days, but I never thought of you like this."</p> + +<p>"Why the last three days, Norman?"</p> + +<p>"Haven't you heard the news, sir?"</p> + +<p>"No, I have heard nothing. Captain Jervoise and I--my old +friend, you know, Norman--have posted all the way from London, and +should have been here six days ago, if it had not been for the +storm."</p> + +<p>"Well, sir, there is bad news; at least, I don't know whether +you will consider it bad. Most of the folk about here looks at it +the other way. But the man in there shot hisself, three days ago. A +magistrate, with some men from Lancaster, came over here. They say +it was to arrest him, but I don't know the rights of the case. +Anyhow, it is said they read some paper over to him, and then he +opened a drawer at the table where he was sitting, and pulled out a +pistol, and shot hisself before anyone could stop him.</p> + +<p>"There have been bad goings here of late, Mr. Charles, very bad, +especially for the last year. He was not friends with his son, they +say, but the news of his death drove him to drink, worse than +before; and besides, there have been dicing, and all sorts of +goings on, and I doubt not but that the ladies have had a terrible +time of it. There were several men staying in the house, but they +all took themselves off, as soon as it was over, and there are only +the ladies there now. They will be glad enough to see you, I will +be bound."</p> + +<p>Charlie was shocked; but at the same time, he could not but feel +that it was the best thing that could happen, and Harry freely +expressed himself to that effect.</p> + +<p>"We won't take the carriage up to the house," Charlie said, +after a long pause. "Take the valises out, and bring them up to the +house presently, Norman."</p> + +<p>He paid the postilion who had brought them from Lancaster, and +stood quiet until the carriage had driven off.</p> + +<p>"I hope Sir Marmaduke is well, sir. We have missed him sorely +here."</p> + +<p>"He was quite well when I saw him, ten weeks ago. I hope he will +be here before long. I am happy to say that his innocence of the +charge brought against him has been proved, and his estates, and +those of Mr. Jervoise and the other gentlemen, have been restored +by the queen."</p> + +<p>"That is good news, indeed, sir," the man exclaimed. "The best I +have heard for many a long year. Everyone about here will go wild +with joy."</p> + +<p>"Then don't mention it at present, Norman. Any rejoicings would +be unseemly, while John Dormay is lying dead there."</p> + +<p>"Shall I go up with you, Charlie, or will you go alone?" Harry +asked. "Of course, there are some horses here, and you could lend +me one to drive over to our own place."</p> + +<p>"You shall do that presently, Harry, and tell them the news. But +come in now. You know my cousin and Ciceley. It will be all the +better that you should go in with me."</p> + +<p>His cousin received Charlie with a quiet pleasure. She was +greatly changed since he had seen her last, and her face showed +that she had suffered greatly. Ciceley had grown into a young +woman, and met him with delight. Both were pleased to see +Harry.</p> + +<p>"We were talking of you but now, Charlie," Mrs. Dormay said. +"Ciceley and I agreed that we would remove at once to our old +place, and that this should be kept up for you, should you at any +time be able to return. Now that Queen Anne is on the throne, and +the Tories are in power, we hoped that you, at least, would ere +long be permitted to return. How is your dear father?"</p> + +<p>"He is well, cousin, and will, I trust, be here ere long. Our +innocence of the charge has been proved, the proceedings against us +quashed, and the Act of Confiscation against my father, Mr. +Jervoise, and the others reversed."</p> + +<p>"Thank God for that," Mrs. Dormay said earnestly, and Ciceley +gave an exclamation of pleasure. "That accounts, then, for what has +happened here.</p> + +<p>"I do not want to talk about it, Charlie. You may imagine how +Ciceley and I have suffered. But he was my husband, spare him for +my sake."</p> + +<p>"I will never allude to the subject again, cousin," Charlie +said. "But I must tell you that Harry and I have posted down from +London, in hopes of being in time to warn him, and enable him to +escape. I need not say we did so because he was your husband, and +Ciceley's father."</p> + +<p>Harry then turned the subject, by a remark as to the effects of +the storm. Then Ciceley asked questions as to their life abroad, +and there was so much to tell, and to listen to, that even Mrs. +Dormay's face brightened. Harry willingly allowed himself to be +persuaded to remain for the night, and to ride over to his place in +the morning.</p> + +<p>The funeral took place two days later. Charlie went as sole +mourner.</p> + +<p>"He was my kinsman," he said to Harry, "and, though I can +pretend no sorrow at his death, my attendance at the funeral will +do something towards stopping talk, and will make it easier for my +cousin."</p> + +<p>The next day, Mrs. Dormay and Ciceley returned to Rockley, whose +tenant had fortunately left a few weeks before. Charlie and Harry +both went over with them, and stayed for three or four days, and +they were glad to see that Mrs. Dormay seemed to be shaking off the +weight of her trouble, and was looking more like her old self.</p> + +<p>They then rode to Lancaster, and returned to London by coach. +They crossed to Gottenburg by the first vessel that was sailing, +and Sir Marmaduke was delighted to hear the success of their +mission, and that he was at liberty to return at once, as master of +Lynnwood.</p> + +<p>"Luck favoured you somewhat, Charlie, in throwing that vagabond +in your way, but for all else we have to thank you both, for the +manner in which you have carried the affair out, and captured your +fox. As for John Dormay, 'tis the best thing that could have +happened. I have often thought it over, while you have been away, +and have said to myself that the best settlement of the business +would be that you, Harry, when you obtained proofs, should go down, +confront him publicly, and charge him with his treachery, force him +to draw, and then run him through the body. Charlie would, of +course, have been the proper person, in my absence, so to settle +the matter, but he could not well have killed my cousin's husband, +and it would have added to the scandal.</p> + +<p>"However, the way it has turned out is better altogether. It +will be only a nine days' wonder. The man has been cut by all the +gentry, and when it is known that he shot himself to escape arrest, +many will say that it was a fit ending, and will trouble themselves +no more concerning him.</p> + +<p>"You are coming back with me, I hope, Charlie. I have seen but +little of you for the last four years, and if you are, as you say, +going with the Duke of Marlborough to the war in the spring, I +don't want to lose sight of you again till then. You can surely +resign your commission here without going back to the army, +especially as you have leave of absence until the end of +March."</p> + +<p>Charlie hesitated.</p> + +<p>"I think so, too," Harry said. "I know that the colonel told the +king the whole story, when he asked for leave for me and obtained +that paper. He told my father that the king was greatly interested, +and said: 'I hope the young fellows will succeed, though I suppose, +if they do, I shall lose two promising young officers.' So he will +not be surprised when he hears that we have resigned.</p> + +<p>"As for me, I shall, of course, go on at once. My father will, I +am sure, be delighted to return home. The hardships have told upon +him a good deal, and he has said several times, of late, how much +he wished he could see his way to retiring. I think, too, he will +gladly consent to my entering our own service, instead of that of +Sweden. He would not have done so, I am sure, had William been +still on the throne. Now it is altogether different."</p> + +<p>"Well, Harry, if you do see the king, as it is possible you may +do, or if you do not, you might speak to the colonel, and ask him, +in my name, to express to Charles my regret at leaving his service, +in which I have been so well treated, and say how much I feel the +kindly interest that his majesty has been pleased to take in me. If +there had been any chance of the war coming to an end shortly, I +should have remained to see it out; but, now that the Polish +business may be considered finished, it will be continued with +Russia, and may go on for years, for the czar is just as obstinate +and determined as Charles himself."</p> + +<p>Accordingly, the next morning, Charlie sent in the formal +resignation of his commission to the war minister at Stockholm, and +Harry left by ship for Revel. Sir Marmaduke placed his business +affairs in the hands of a Scotch merchant at Gottenburg, with +instructions to call in the money he had lent on mortgage, and, two +days later, took passage with Charlie for Hull, whence they posted +across the country to Lancaster, and then drove to Lynnwood.</p> + +<p>As soon as the news spread that Sir Marmaduke had returned, the +church bells rang a joyous peal, bonfires were lighted, the tenants +flocked in to greet him, and the gentry for miles round rode over +to welcome and congratulate him.</p> + +<p>The next morning he and Charlie rode over to Rockley.</p> + +<p>"Oh, Marmaduke," cried Celia, "I am happy indeed to know that +you are back again. I have never known a day's happiness since you +went."</p> + +<p>"Well, don't let us think any more about it, Celia," Sir +Marmaduke said, as he kissed her tenderly. "Let us look on it all +as an ugly dream. It has not been without its advantages, as far as +we are concerned. It has taken me out of myself, and broadened my +view of things. I have not had at all an unpleasant time of it in +Sweden, and shall enjoy my home all the more, now that I have been +away from it for a while. As to Charlie, it has made a man of him. +He has gained a great deal of credit, and had opportunities of +showing that he is made of good stuff; and now he enters upon life +with every advantage, and has a start, indeed, such as very few +young fellows can have. He enters our army as a captain, under the +eye of Marlborough himself, with a reputation gained under that of +the greatest soldier in Europe.</p> + +<p>"So we have no reason to regret the past, cousin, and on that +score you have no cause for grief. As to the future, I trust that +it will be bright for both of us, and I think," he added meaningly, +"our former plans for our children are likely to be some day +realized."</p> + +<p>Four years later, indeed, the union that both parents had at +heart took place, during one of the pauses of the fierce struggle +between the British forces under Marlborough, and the French. At +Blenheim, Ramillies, and Oudenarde, and in several long and +toilsome sieges, Charlie had distinguished himself greatly, and was +regarded by Marlborough as one of the most energetic and +trustworthy of his officers. He had been twice severely wounded, +and had gained the rank of colonel. Harry Jervoise--who had had a +leg shot away, below the knee, by a cannonball at Ramillies, and +had then left the army with the rank of major--was, on the same day +as his friend, married to the daughter of one of the gentlemen who +had been driven into exile with his father.</p> + +<p>In the spring Charlie again joined the army, and commanded a +brigade in the desperate struggle on the hill of Malplaquet, one of +the hardest fought battles in the history of war. Peace was made +shortly afterwards, and, at the reduction of the army that +followed, he went on half pay, and settled down for life at +Lynnwood, where Tony Peters and his wife had, at the death of the +former occupant of the lodge, been established.</p> + +<p>When Harry Jervoise returned to the Swedish headquarters, with +the news that his father was cleared, he was the bearer of a very +handsome present from Charlie to his faithful servant Stanislas, +who had, on their return from Poland, been at once employed by +Count Piper on other service.</p> + +<p>When, years afterwards, the young Pretender marched south with +the Highland clans, neither Charlie nor Harry were among the +gentlemen who joined him. He had their good wishes, but, having +served in the British army, they felt that they could not join the +movement in arms against the British crown; and indeed, the strong +Jacobite feelings of their youth had been greatly softened down by +their contact with the world, and they had learned to doubt much +whether the restoration of the Stuarts would tend, in any way, to +the benefit or prosperity of Britain.</p> + +<p>They felt all the more obliged to stand aloof from the struggle, +inasmuch as both had sons, in the army, that had fought valiantly +against the French at Dettingen and Fontenoy. The families always +remained united in the closest friendship, and more than one +marriage took place between the children of Charlie Carstairs and +Harry Jervoise.</p> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A JACOBITE EXILE***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 18357-h.txt or 18357-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/8/3/5/18357">http://www.gutenberg.org/1/8/3/5/18357</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/18357.txt b/18357.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f2de09 --- /dev/null +++ b/18357.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12909 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, A Jacobite Exile, by G. A. Henty + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: A Jacobite Exile + Being the Adventures of a Young Englishman in the Service of Charles the Twelfth of Sweden + + +Author: G. A. Henty + + + +Release Date: May 8, 2006 [eBook #18357] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A JACOBITE EXILE*** + + +E-text prepared by Martin Robb + + + +A JACOBITE EXILE: + +Being the Adventures of a Young Englishman +in the Service of Charles the Twelfth of Sweden + +by + +G. A. Henty. + + + + + + + +Contents + + Preface. + Chapter 1: A Spy in the Household. + Chapter 2: Denounced. + Chapter 3: A Rescue. + Chapter 4: In Sweden. + Chapter 5: Narva. + Chapter 6: A Prisoner. + Chapter 7: Exchanged. + Chapter 8: The Passage of the Dwina. + Chapter 9: In Warsaw. + Chapter 10: In Evil Plight. + Chapter 11: With Brigands. + Chapter 12: Treed By Wolves. + Chapter 13: A Rescued Party. + Chapter 14: The Battle Of Clissow. + Chapter 15: An Old Acquaintance. + Chapter 16: In England Again. + Chapter 17: The North Coach. + Chapter 18: A Confession. + + + + +Preface. + + +My Dear Lads, + +Had I attempted to write you an account of the whole of the +adventurous career of Charles the Twelfth of Sweden, it would, in +itself, have filled a bulky volume, to the exclusion of all other +matter; and a youth, who fought at Narva, would have been a +middle-aged man at the death of that warlike monarch, before the +walls of Frederickshall. I have, therefore, been obliged to confine +myself to the first three years of his reign, in which he crushed +the army of Russia at Narva, and laid the then powerful republic of +Poland prostrate at his feet. In this way, only, could I obtain +space for the private adventures and doings of Charlie Carstairs, +the hero of the story. The details of the wars of Charles the +Twelfth were taken from the military history, written at his +command by his chamberlain, Adlerfeld; from a similar narrative by +a Scotch gentleman in his service; and from Voltaire's history. The +latter is responsible for the statement that the trade of Poland +was almost entirely in the hands of Scotch, French, and Jewish +merchants, the Poles themselves being sharply divided into the two +categories of nobles and peasants. + +Yours sincerely, + +G. A. Henty. + + + +Chapter 1: A Spy in the Household. + + +On the borders of Lancashire and Westmoreland, two centuries since, +stood Lynnwood, a picturesque mansion, still retaining something of +the character of a fortified house. It was ever a matter of regret +to its owner, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs, that his grandfather had so +modified its construction, by levelling one side of the quadrangle, +and inserting large mullion windows in that portion inhabited by +the family, that it was in no condition to stand a siege, in the +time of the Civil War. + +Sir Marmaduke was, at that time, only a child, but he still +remembered how the Roundhead soldiers had lorded it there, when his +father was away fighting with the army of the king; how they had +seated themselves at the board, and had ordered his mother about as +if she had been a scullion, jeering her with cruel words as to what +would have been the fate of her husband, if they had caught him +there, until, though but eight years old, he had smitten one of the +troopers, as he sat, with all his force. What had happened after +that, he did not recollect, for it was not until a week after the +Roundheads had ridden away that he found himself in his bed, with +his mother sitting beside him, and his head bandaged with cloths +dipped in water. He always maintained that, had the house been +fortified, it could have held out until help arrived, although, in +later years, his father assured him that it was well it was not in +a position to offer a defence. + +"We were away down south, Marmaduke, and the Roundheads were +masters of this district, at the time. They would have battered the +place around your mother's ears, and, likely as not, have burnt it +to the ground. As it was, I came back here to find it whole and +safe, except that the crop-eared scoundrels had, from pure +wantonness, destroyed the pictures and hacked most of the furniture +to pieces. I took no part in the later risings, seeing that they +were hopeless, and therefore preserved my property, when many +others were ruined. + +"No, Marmaduke, it is just as well that the house was not +fortified. I believe in fighting, when there is some chance, even a +slight one, of success, but I regard it as an act of folly, to +throw away a life when no good can come of it." + +Still, Sir Marmaduke never ceased to regret that Lynnwood was not +one of the houses that had been defended, to the last, against the +enemies of the king. At the Restoration he went, for the first time +in his life, to London, to pay his respects to Charles the Second. +He was well received, and although he tired, in a very short time, +of the gaieties of the court, he returned to Lynnwood with his +feelings of loyalty to the Stuarts as strong as ever. He rejoiced +heartily when the news came of the defeat of Monmouth at Sedgemoor, +and was filled with rage and indignation when James weakly fled, +and left his throne to be occupied by Dutch William. + +From that time, he became a strong Jacobite, and emptied his glass +nightly "to the king over the water." In the north the Jacobites +were numerous, and at their gatherings treason was freely talked, +while arms were prepared, and hidden away for the time when the +lawful king should return to claim his own. Sir Marmaduke was +deeply concerned in the plot of 1696, when preparations had been +made for a great Jacobite rising throughout the country. Nothing +came of it, for the Duke of Berwick, who was to have led it, failed +in getting the two parties who were concerned to come to an +agreement. The Jacobites were ready to rise, directly a French army +landed. The French king, on the other hand, would not send an army +until the Jacobites had risen, and the matter therefore fell +through, to Sir Marmaduke's indignation and grief. But he had no +words strong enough to express his anger and disgust when he found +that, side by side with the general scheme for a rising, a plot had +been formed by Sir George Barclay, a Scottish refugee, to +assassinate the king, on his return from hunting in Richmond +Forest. + +"It is enough to drive one to become a Whig," he exclaimed. "I am +ready to fight Dutch William, for he occupies the place of my +rightful sovereign, but I have no private feud with him, and, if I +had, I would run any man through who ventured to propose to me a +plot to assassinate him. Such scoundrels as Barclay would bring +disgrace on the best cause in the world. Had I heard as much as a +whisper of it, I would have buckled on my sword, and ridden to +London to warn the Dutchman of his danger. However, as it seems +that Barclay had but some forty men with him, most of them foreign +desperadoes, the Dutchman must see that English gentlemen, however +ready to fight against him fairly, would have no hand in so +dastardly a plot as this. + +"Look you, Charlie, keep always in mind that you bear the name of +our martyred king, and be ready ever to draw your sword in the +cause of the Stuarts, whether it be ten years hence, or forty, that +their banner is hoisted again; but keep yourself free from all +plots, except those that deal with fair and open warfare. Have no +faith whatever in politicians, who are ever ready to use the +country gentry as an instrument for gaining their own ends. Deal +with your neighbours, but mistrust strangers, from whomsoever they +may say they come." + +Which advice Charlie, at that time thirteen years old, gravely +promised to follow. He had naturally inherited his father's +sentiments, and believed the Jacobite cause to be a sacred one. He +had fought and vanquished Alured Dormay, his second cousin, and two +years his senior, for speaking of King James' son as the Pretender, +and was ready, at any time, to do battle with any boy of his own +age, in the same cause. Alured's father, John Dormay, had ridden +over to Lynnwood, to complain of the violence of which his son had +been the victim, but he obtained no redress from Sir Marmaduke. + +"The boy is a chip of the old block, cousin, and he did right. I +myself struck a blow at the king's enemies, when I was but eight +years old, and got my skull well-nigh cracked for my pains. It is +well that the lads were not four years older, for then, instead of +taking to fisticuffs, their swords would have been out, and as my +boy has, for the last four years, been exercised daily in the use +of his weapon, it might happen that, instead of Alured coming home +with a black eye, and, as you say, a missing tooth, he might have +been carried home with a sword thrust through his body. + +"It was, to my mind, entirely the fault of your son. I should have +blamed Charlie, had he called the king at Westminster Dutch +William, for, although each man has a right to his own opinions, he +has no right to offend those of others--besides, at present it is +as well to keep a quiet tongue as to a matter that words cannot set +right. In the same way, your son had no right to offend others by +calling James Stuart the Pretender. + +"Certainly, of the twelve boys who go over to learn what the Rector +of Apsley can teach them, more than half are sons of gentlemen +whose opinions are similar to my own. + +"It would be much better, John Dormay, if, instead of complaining +of my boy, you were to look somewhat to your own. I marked, the +last time he came over here, that he was growing loutish in his +manners, and that he bore himself with less respect to his elders +than is seemly in a lad of that age. He needs curbing, and would +carry himself all the better if, like Charlie, he had an hour a day +at sword exercise. I speak for the boy's good. It is true that you +yourself, being a bitter Whig, mix but little with your neighbours, +who are for the most part the other way of thinking; but this may +not go on for ever, and you would, I suppose, like Alured, when he +grows up, to mix with others of his rank in the county; and it +would be well, therefore, that he should have the accomplishments +and manners of young men of his own age." + +John Dormay did not reply hastily--it was his policy to keep on +good terms with his wife's cousin, for the knight was a man of far +higher consideration, in the county, than himself. His smile, +however, was not a pleasant one, as he rose and said: + +"My mission has hardly terminated as I expected, Sir Marmaduke. I +came to complain, and I go away advised somewhat sharply." + +"Tut, tut, man!" the knight said. "I speak only for the lad's good, +and I am sure that you cannot but feel the truth of what I have +said. What does Alured want to make enemies for? It may be that it +was only my son who openly resented his ill-timed remarks, but you +may be sure that others were equally displeased, and maybe their +resentment will last much longer than that which was quenched in a +fair stand-up fight. Certainly, there need be no malice between the +boys. Alured's defeat may even do him good, for he cannot but feel +that it is somewhat disgraceful to be beaten by one nearly a head +shorter than he." + +"There is, no doubt, something in what you say, Sir Marmaduke," +John Dormay said blandly, "and I will make it my business that, +should the boys meet again as antagonists, Alured shall be able to +give a better account of himself." + +"He is a disagreeable fellow," Sir Marmaduke said to himself, as he +watched John Dormay ride slowly away through the park, "and, if it +were not that he is husband to my cousin Celia, I would have nought +to do with him. She is my only kinswoman, and, were aught to happen +to Charlie, that lout, her son, would be the heir of Lynnwood. I +should never rest quiet in my grave, were a Whig master here. + +"I would much rather that he had spoken wrathfully, when I +straightly gave him my opinion of the boy, who is growing up an +ill-conditioned cub. It would have been more honest. I hate to see +a man smile, when I know that he would fain swear. I like my cousin +Celia, and I like her little daughter Ciceley, who takes after her, +and not after John Dormay; but I would that the fellow lived on the +other side of England. He is out of his place here, and, though men +do not speak against him in my presence, knowing that he is a sort +of kinsman, I have never heard one say a good word for him. + +"It is not only because he is a Whig. There are other Whig gentry +in the neighbourhood, against whom I bear no ill will, and can meet +at a social board in friendship. It would be hard if politics were +to stand between neighbours. It is Dormay's manner that is against +him. If he were anyone but Celia's husband, I would say that he is +a smooth-faced knave, though I altogether lack proof of my words, +beyond that he has added half a dozen farms to his estate, and, in +each case, there were complaints that, although there was nothing +contrary to the law, it was by sharp practice that he obtained +possession, lending money freely in order to build houses and +fences and drains, and then, directly a pinch came, demanding the +return of his advance. + +"Such ways may pass in a London usurer, but they don't do for us +country folk; and each farm that he has taken has closed the doors +of a dozen good houses to John Dormay. I fear that Celia has a bad +time with him, though she is not one to complain. I let Charlie go +over to Rockley, much oftener than I otherwise should do, for her +sake and Ciceley's, though I would rather, a hundred times, that +they should come here. Not that the visits are pleasant, when they +do come, for I can see that Celia is always in fear, lest I should +ask her questions about her life at home; which is the last thing +that I should think of doing, for no good ever comes of +interference between man and wife, and, whatever I learned, I could +not quarrel with John Dormay without being altogether separated +from Celia and the girl. + +"I am heartily glad that Charlie has given Alured a sound +thrashing. The boy is too modest. He only said a few words, last +evening, about the affair, and I thought that only a blow or two +had been exchanged. It was as much as I could do, not to rub my +hands and chuckle, when his father told me all about it. However, I +must speak gravely to Charlie. If he takes it up, every time a Whig +speaks scornfully of the king, he will be always in hot water, and, +were he a few years older, would become a marked man. We have got +to bide our time, and, except among friends, it is best to keep a +quiet tongue until that time comes." + +To Sir Marmaduke's disappointment, three more years went on without +the position changing in any way. Messengers went and came between +France and the English Jacobites, but no movement was made. The +failure of the assassination plot had strengthened William's hold +on the country, for Englishmen love fair play and hate assassination, +so that many who had, hitherto, been opponents of William of Orange, +now ranged themselves on his side, declaring they could no longer +support a cause that used assassination as one of its weapons. More +zealous Jacobites, although they regretted the assassination plot, +and were as vehement of their denunciations of its authors as were +the Whigs, remained staunch in their fidelity to "the king over the +water," maintaining stoutly that his majesty knew nothing whatever +of this foul plot, and that his cause was in no way affected by the +misconduct of a few men, who happened to be among its adherents. + +At Lynnwood things went on as usual. Charlie continued his studies, +in a somewhat desultory way, having but small affection for books; +kept up his fencing lesson diligently and learned to dance; +quarrelled occasionally with his cousin Alured, spent a good deal +of his time on horseback, and rode over, not unfrequently, to +Rockley, choosing, as far as possible, the days and hours when he +knew that Alured and his father were likely to be away. He went +over partly for his own pleasure, but more in compliance with his +father's wishes. + +"My cousin seldom comes over, herself," the latter said. "I know, +right well, that it is from no slackness of her own, but that her +husband likes not her intimacy here. It is well, then, that you +should go over and see them, for it is only when you bring her that +I see Ciceley. I would she were your sister, lad, for she is a +bright little maid, and would make the old house lively." + +Therefore, once a week or so, Charlie rode over early to Rockley, +which was some five miles distant, and brought back Ciceley, +cantering on her pony by his side, escorting her home again before +nightfall. Ciceley's mother wondered, sometimes, that her husband, +who in most matters set his will in opposition to hers, never +offered any objection to the girl's visits to Lynnwood. She thought +that, perhaps, he was pleased that there should be an intimacy +between some member, at least, of his family, and Sir Marmaduke's. +There were so few houses at which he or his were welcome, it was +pleasant to him to be able to refer to the close friendship of his +daughter with their cousins at Lynnwood. Beyond this, Celia, who +often, as she sat alone, turned the matter over in her mind, could +see no reason he could have for permitting the intimacy. That he +would permit it without some reason was, as her experience had +taught her, out of the question. + +Ciceley never troubled her head about the matter. Her visits to +Lynnwood were very pleasant to her. She was two years younger than +Charlie Carstairs; and although, when he had once brought her to +the house, he considered that his duties were over until the hour +arrived for her return, he was sometimes ready to play with her, +escort her round the garden, or climb the trees for fruit or birds' +eggs for her. + +Such little courtesies she never received from Alured, who was four +years her senior, and who never interested himself in the slightest +degree in her. He was now past eighteen, and was beginning to +regard himself as a man, and had, to Ciceley's satisfaction, gone a +few weeks before, to London, to stay with an uncle who had a place +at court, and was said to be much in the confidence of some of the +Whig lords. + +Sir Marmaduke was, about this time, more convinced than ever that, +ere long, the heir of the Stuarts would come over from France, with +men, arms, and money, and would rally round him the Jacobites of +England and Scotland. Charlie saw but little of him, for he was +frequently absent, from early morning until late at night, riding +to visit friends in Westmoreland and Yorkshire, sometimes being +away two or three days at a time. Of an evening, there were +meetings at Lynnwood, and at these strangers, who arrived after +nightfall, were often present. Charlie was not admitted to any of +these gatherings. + +"You will know all about it in time, lad," his father said. "You +are too young to bother your head with politics, and you would lose +patience in a very short time. I do myself, occasionally. Many who +are the foremost in talk, when there is no prospect of doing +anything, draw back when the time approaches for action, and it is +sickening to listen to the timorous objections and paltry arguments +that are brought forward. Here am I, a man of sixty, ready to risk +life and fortune in the good cause, and there are many, not half my +age, who speak with as much caution as if they were graybeards. +Still, lad, I have no doubt that the matter will straighten itself +out, and come right in the end. It is always the most trying time, +for timorous hearts, before the first shot of a battle is fired. +Once the engagement commences, there is no time for fear. The +battle has to be fought out, and the best way to safety is to win a +victory. I have not the least doubt that, as soon as it is known +that the king has landed, there will be no more shilly-shallying or +hesitation. Every loyal man will mount his horse, and call out his +tenants, and, in a few days, England will be in a blaze from end to +end." + +Charlie troubled himself but little with what was going on. His +father had promised him that, when the time did come, he should +ride by his side, and with that promise he was content to wait, +knowing that, at present, his strength would be of but little +avail, and that every week added somewhat to his weight and sinew. + +One day he was in the garden with Ciceley. The weather was hot, and +the girl was sitting, in a swing, under a shady tree, occasionally +starting herself by a push with her foot on the ground, and then +swaying gently backward and forward, until the swing was again at +rest. Charlie was seated on the ground, near her, pulling the ears +of his favourite dog, and occasionally talking to her, when a +servant came out, with a message that his father wanted to speak to +him. + +"I expect I shall be back in a few minutes, Ciceley, so don't you +wander away till I come. It is too hot today to be hunting for you, +all over the garden, as I did when you hid yourself last week." + +It was indeed but a short time until he returned. + +"My father only wanted to tell me that he is just starting for +Bristowe's, and, as it is over twenty miles away, he may not return +until tomorrow." + +"I don't like that man's face who brought the message to you, +Charlie." + +"Don't you?" the boy said carelessly. "I have not noticed him much. +He has not been many months with us. + +"What are you thinking of?" he asked, a minute later, seeing that +his cousin looked troubled. + +"I don't know that I ought to tell you, Charlie. You know my father +does not think the same way as yours about things." + +"I should rather think he doesn't," Charlie laughed. "There is no +secret about that, Ciceley; but they don't quarrel over it. Last +time your father and mother came over here, I dined with them for +the first time, and I noticed there was not a single word said +about politics. They chatted over the crops, and the chances of a +war in Europe, and of the quarrel between Holstein and Denmark, and +whether the young king of Sweden would aid the duke, who seems to +be threatened by Saxony as well as by Denmark. I did not know +anything about it, and thought it was rather stupid; but my father +and yours both seemed of one mind, and were as good friends as if +they were in equal agreement on all other points. But what has that +to do with Nicholson, for that is the man's name who came out just +now?" + +"It does not seem to have much to do with it," she said doubtfully, +"and yet, perhaps it does. You know my mother is not quite of the +same opinion as my father, although she never says so to him; but, +when we are alone together, sometimes she shakes her head and says +she fears that trouble is coming, and it makes her very unhappy. +One day I was in the garden, and they were talking loudly in the +dining room--at least, he was talking loudly. Well, he said--But I +don't know whether I ought to tell you, Charlie." + +"Certainly you ought not, Ciceley. If you heard what you were not +meant to hear, you ought never to say a word about it to anyone." + +"But it concerns you and Sir Marmaduke." + +"I cannot help that," he said stoutly. "People often say things of +each other, in private, especially if they are out of temper, that +they don't quite mean, and it would make terrible mischief if such +things were repeated. Whatever your father said, I do not want to +hear it, and it would be very wrong of you to repeat it." + +"I am not going to repeat it, Charlie. I only want to say that I do +not think my father and yours are very friendly together, which is +natural, when my father is all for King William, and your father +for King James. He makes no secret of that, you know." + +Charlie nodded. + +"That is right enough, Ciceley, but still, I don't understand in +the least what it has to do with the servant." + +"It has to do with it," she said pettishly, starting the swing +afresh, and then relapsing into silence until it again came to a +standstill. + +"I think you ought to know," she said suddenly. "You see, Charlie, +Sir Marmaduke is very kind to me, and I love him dearly, and so I +do you, and I think you ought to know, although it may be nothing +at all." + +"Well, fire away then, Ciceley. There is one thing you may be quite +sure of, whatever you tell me, it is like telling a brother, and I +shall never repeat it to anyone." + +"Well, it is this. That man comes over sometimes to see my father. +I have seen him pass my window, three or four times, and go in by +the garden door into father's study. I did not know who he was, but +it did seem funny his entering by that door, as if he did not want +to be seen by anyone in the house. I did not think anything more +about it, till I saw him just now, then I knew him directly. If I +had seen him before, I should have told you at once, but I don't +think I have." + +"I daresay not, Ciceley. He does not wait at table, but is under +the steward, and helps clean the silver. He waits when we have +several friends to dinner. At other times he does not often come +into the room. + +"What you tell me is certainly curious. What can he have to say to +your father?" + +"I don't know, Charlie. I don't know anything about it. I do think +you ought to know." + +"Yes, I think it is a good thing that I should know," Charlie +agreed thoughtfully. "I daresay it is all right, but, at any rate, +I am glad you told me." + +"You won't tell your father?" she asked eagerly. "Because, if you +were to speak of it--" + +"I shall not tell him. You need not be afraid that what you have +told me will come out. It is curious, and that is all, and I will +look after the fellow a bit. Don't think anything more about it. It +is just the sort of thing it is well to know, but I expect there is +no harm in it, one way or the other. Of course, he must have known +your father before he came to us, and may have business of some +sort with him. He may have a brother, or some other relation, who +wants to take one of your father's farms. Indeed, there are a +hundred things he might want to see him about. But still, I am glad +you have told me." + +In his own mind, Charlie thought much more seriously of it than he +pretended. He knew that, at present, his father was engaged heart +and soul in a projected Jacobite rising. He knew that John Dormay +was a bitter Whig. He believed that he had a grudge against his +father, and the general opinion of him was that he was wholly +unscrupulous. + +That he should, then, be in secret communication with a servant at +Lynnwood, struck him as a very serious matter, indeed. Charlie was +not yet sixteen, but his close companionship with his father had +rendered him older than most lads of his age. He was as warm a +Jacobite as his father, but the manner in which William, with his +Dutch troops, had crushed the great Jacobite rebellion in Ireland, +seemed to him a lesson that the prospects of success, in England, +were much less certain than his father believed them to be. + +John Dormay, as an adherent of William, would be interested in +thwarting the proposed movement, with the satisfaction of, at the +same time, bringing Sir Marmaduke into disgrace. Charlie could +hardly believe that his cousin would be guilty of setting a spy to +watch his father, but it was certainly possible, and as he thought +the matter over, as he rode back after escorting Ciceley to her +home, he resolved to keep a sharp watch over the doings of this man +Nicholson. + +"It would never do to tell my father what Ciceley said. He would +bundle the fellow out, neck and crop, and perhaps break some of his +bones, and then it would be traced to her. She has not a happy +home, as it is, and it would be far worse if her father knew that +it was she who had put us on our guard. I must find out something +myself, and then we can turn him out, without there being the least +suspicion that Ciceley is mixed up in it." + +The next evening several Jacobite gentlemen rode in, and, as usual, +had a long talk with Sir Marmaduke after supper. + +"If this fellow is a spy," Charlie said to himself, "he will be +wanting to hear what is said, and to do so he must either hide +himself in the room, or listen at the door, or at one of the +windows. It is not likely that he will get into the room, for to do +that he must have hidden himself before supper began. I don't think +he would dare to listen at the door, for anyone passing through the +hall would catch him at it. It must be at one of the windows." + +The room was at an angle of the house. Three windows looked out on +to the lawn in front; that at the side into a large shrubbery, +where the bushes grew up close to it; and Charlie decided that +here, if anywhere, the man would take up his post. As soon, then, +as he knew that the servants were clearing away the supper, he took +a heavy cudgel and went out. He walked straight away from the +house, and then, when he knew that his figure could no longer be +seen in the twilight, he made a circuit, and, entering the +shrubbery, crept along close to the wall of the Muse, until within +two or three yards of the window. Having made sure that at present, +at any rate, no one was near, he moved out a step or two to look at +the window. + +His suspicions were at once confirmed. The inside curtains were +drawn, but the casement was open two or three inches. Charlie again +took up his post, behind a bush, and waited. + +In five minutes he heard a twig snap, and then a figure came along, +noiselessly, and placed itself at the window. Charlie gave him but +a moment to listen, then he sprang forward, and, with his whole +strength, brought his cudgel down upon the man's head. He fell like +a stone. Charlie threw open the window, and, as he did so, the +curtain was torn back by his father, the sound of the blow and the +fall having reached the ears of those within. + +Sir Marmaduke had drawn his sword, and was about to leap through +the window, when Charlie exclaimed: + +"It is I, father. I have caught a fellow listening at the window, +and have just knocked him down." + +"Well done, my boy! + +"Bring lights, please, gentlemen. Let us see what villain we have +got here." + +But, as he spoke, Charlie's head suddenly disappeared, and a sharp +exclamation broke from him, as he felt his ankles grasped and his +feet pulled from under him. He came down with such a crash that, +for a moment, he was unable to rise. He heard a rustling in the +bushes, and then his father leapt down beside him. + +"Where are you, my boy? Has the scoundrel hurt you?" + +"He has given me a shake," Charlie said as he sat up; "and, what is +worse, I am afraid he has got away." + +"Follow me, gentlemen, and scatter through the gardens," Sir +Marmaduke roared. "The villain has escaped!" + +For a few minutes, there was a hot pursuit through the shrubbery +and gardens, but nothing was discovered. Charlie had been so shaken +that he was unable to join the pursuit, but, having got on to his +feet, remained leaning against the wall until his father came back. + +"He has got away, Charlie. Have you any idea who he was?" + +"It was Nicholson, father. At least, I am almost certain that it +was him. It was too dark to see his face. I could see the outline +of his head against the window, and he had on a cap with a cock's +feather which I had noticed the man wore." + +"But how came you here, Charlie?" + +"I will tell you that afterwards, father. Don't ask me now." + +For, at this moment, some of the others were coming up. Several of +them had torches, and, as they approached, Sir Marmaduke saw +something lying on the ground under the window. He picked it up. + +"Here is the fellow's cap," he said. "You must have hit him a +shrewd blow, Charlie, for here is a clean cut through the cloth, +and a patch of fresh blood on the white lining. How did he get you +down, lad?" + +"He fell so suddenly, when I hit him, that I thought I had either +killed or stunned him; but of course I had not, for it was but a +moment after, when I was speaking to you, that I felt my ankles +seized, and I went down with a crash. I heard him make off through +the bushes; but I was, for the moment, almost dazed, and could do +nothing to stop him." + +"Was the window open when he came?" + +"Yes, sir, two or three inches." + +"Then it was evidently a planned thing. + +"Well, gentlemen, we may as well go indoors. The fellow is well out +of our reach now, and we may be pretty sure he will never again +show his face here. Fortunately he heard nothing, for the serving +men had but just left the room, and we had not yet begun to talk." + +"That is true enough, Sir Marmaduke," one of the others said. "The +question is: how long has this been going on?" + +Sir Marmaduke looked at Charlie. + +"I know nothing about it, sir. Till now, I have not had the +slightest suspicion of this man. It occurred to me, this afternoon, +that it might be possible for anyone to hear what was said inside +the room, by listening at the windows; and that this shrubbery +would form a very good shelter for an eavesdropper. So I thought, +this evening I would take up my place here, to assure myself that +there was no traitor in the household. I had been here but five +minutes when the fellow stole quietly up, and placed his ear at the +opening of the casement, and you may be sure that I gave him no +time to listen to what was being said." + +"Well, we had better go in," Sir Marmaduke said. "There is no fear +of our being overheard this evening. + +"Charlie, do you take old Banks aside, and tell him what has +happened, and then go with him to the room where that fellow slept, +and make a thorough search of any clothes he may have left behind, +and of the room itself. Should you find any papers or documents, +you will, of course, bring them down to me." + +But the closest search, by Charlie and the old butler, produced no +results. Not a scrap of paper of any kind was found, and Banks said +that he knew the man could neither read nor write. + +The party below soon broke up, considerable uneasiness being felt, +by all, at the incident of the evening. When the last of them had +left, Charlie was sent for. + +"Now, then, Charlie, let me hear how all this came about. I know +that all you said about what took place at the window is perfectly +true; but, even had you not said so, I should have felt there was +something else. What was it brought you to that window? Your story +was straight-forward enough, but it was certainly singular your +happening to be there, and I fancy some of our friends thought that +you had gone round to listen, yourself. One hinted as much; but I +said that was absurd, for you were completely in my confidence, and +that, whatever peril and danger there might be in the enterprise, +you would share them with me." + +"It is not pleasant that they should have thought so, father, but +that is better than that the truth should be known. This is how it +happened;" and he repeated what Ciceley had told him in the garden. + +"So the worthy Master John Dormay has set a spy upon me," Sir +Marmaduke said, bitterly. "I knew the man was a knave--that is +public property--but I did not think that he was capable of this. +Well, I am glad that, at any rate, no suspicion can fall upon +Ciceley in the matter; but it is serious, lad, very serious. We do +not know how long this fellow has been prying and listening, or how +much he may have learnt. I don't think it can be much. We talked it +over, and my friends all agreed with me that they do not remember +those curtains having been drawn before. To begin with, the +evenings are shortening fast, and, at our meeting last week, we +finished our supper by daylight; and, had the curtains been drawn, +it would have been noticed, for we had need of light before we +finished. Two of the gentlemen, who were sitting facing the window, +declared that they remembered distinctly that it was open. Mr. +Jervoise says that he thought to himself that, if it was his place, +he would have the trees cut away there, for they shut out the +light. + +"Therefore, although it is uncomfortable to think that there has +been a spy in the house, for some months, we have every reason to +hope that our councils have not been overheard. Were it otherwise, +I should lose no time in making for the coast, and taking ship to +France, to wait quietly there until the king comes over." + +"You have no documents, father, that the man could have found?" + +"None, Charlie. We have doubtless made lists of those who could be +relied upon, and of the number of men they could bring with them, +but these have always been burned before we separated. Such letters +as I have had from France, I have always destroyed as soon as I +have read them. Perilous stuff of that sort should never be left +about. No; they may ransack the place from top to bottom, and +nothing will be found that could not be read aloud, without harm, +in the marketplace of Lancaster. + +"So now, to bed, Charlie. It is long past your usual hour." + + + +Chapter 2: Denounced. + + +"Charlie," Sir Marmaduke said on the following morning, at +breakfast, "it is quite possible that that villain who acted as +spy, and that other villain who employed him--I need not mention +names--may swear an information against me, and I may be arrested, +on the charge of being concerned in a plot. I am not much afraid of +it, if they do. The most they could say is that I was prepared to +take up arms, if his majesty crossed from France; but, as there are +thousands and thousands of men ready to do the same, they may fine +me, perhaps, but I should say that is all. However, what I want to +say to you is, keep out of the way, if they come. I shall make +light of the affair, while you, being pretty hot tempered, might +say things that would irritate them, while they could be of no +assistance to me. Therefore, I would rather that you were kept out +of it, altogether. I shall want you here. In my absence, there must +be somebody to look after things. + +"Mind that rascal John Dormay does not put his foot inside the +house, while I am away. That fellow is playing some deep game, +though I don't quite know what it is. I suppose he wants to win the +goodwill of the authorities, by showing his activity and zeal; and, +of course, he will imagine that no one has any idea that he has +been in communication with this spy. We have got a hold over him, +and, when I come back, I will have it out with him. He is not +popular now, and, if it were known that he had been working against +me, his wife's kinsman, behind my back, my friends about here would +make the country too hot to hold him." + +"Yes, father; but please do not let him guess that we have learnt +it from Ciceley. You see, that is the only way we know about it." + +"Yes, you are right there. I will be careful that he shall not know +the little maid has anything to do with it. But we will think of +that, afterwards; maybe nothing will come of it, after all. But, if +anything does, mind, my orders are that you keep away from the +house, while they are in it. When you come back, Banks will tell +you what has happened. + +"You had better take your horse, and go for a ride now. Not over +there, Charlie. I know, if you happened to meet that fellow, he +would read in your face that you knew the part he had been playing, +and, should nothing come of the business, I don't want him to know +that, at present. The fellow can henceforth do us no harm, for we +shall be on our guard against eavesdroppers; and, for the sake of +cousin Celia and the child, I do not want an open breach. I do not +see the man often, myself, and I will take good care I don't put +myself in the way of meeting him, for the present, at any rate. +Don't ride over there today." + +"Very well, father. I will ride over and see Harry Jervoise. I +promised him that I would come over one day this week." + +It was a ten-mile ride, and, as he entered the courtyard of Mr. +Jervoise's fine old mansion, he leapt off his horse, and threw the +reins over a post. A servant came out. + +"The master wishes to speak to you, Master Carstairs." + +"No ill news, I hope, Charlie?" Mr. Jervoise asked anxiously, as +the lad was shown into the room, where his host was standing beside +the carved chimney piece. + +"No, sir, there is nothing new. My father thought that I had better +be away today, in case any trouble should arise out of what took +place yesterday, so I rode over to see Harry. I promised to do so, +one day this week." + +"That is right. Does Sir Marmaduke think, then, that he will be +arrested?" + +"I don't know that he expects it, sir, but he says that it is +possible." + +"I do not see that they have anything to go upon, Charlie. As we +agreed last night, that spy never had any opportunity of +overhearing us before, and, certainly, he can have heard nothing +yesterday. The fellow can only say what many people know, or could +know, if they liked; that half a dozen of Sir Marmaduke's friends +rode over to take supper with him. They can make nothing out of +that." + +"No, sir; and my father said that, at the worst, it could be but +the matter of a fine." + +"Quite so, lad; but I don't even see how it could amount to that. +You will find Harry somewhere about the house. He has said nothing +to me about going out." + +Harry Jervoise was just the same age as Charlie, and was his +greatest friend. They were both enthusiastic in the cause of the +Stuarts, equally vehement in their expressions of contempt for the +Dutch king, equally anxious for the coming of him whom they +regarded as their lawful monarch. They spent the morning together, +as usual; went first to the stables and patted and talked to their +horses; then they played at bowls on the lawn; after which, they +had a bout of sword play; and, having thus let off some of their +animal spirits, sat down and talked of the glorious times to come, +when the king was to have his own again. + +Late in the afternoon, Charlie mounted his horse and rode for home. +When within half a mile of the house, a man stepped out into the +road in front of him. + +"Hullo, Banks, what is it? No bad news, I hope?" + +And he leapt from his horse, alarmed at the pallor of the old +butler's face. + +"Yes, Master Charles, I have some very bad news, and have been +waiting for the last two hours here, so as to stop you going to the +house." + +"Why shouldn't I go to the house?" + +"Because there are a dozen soldiers, and three or four constables +there." + +"And my father?" + +"They have taken him away." + +"This is bad news, Banks; but I know that he thought that it might +be so. But it will not be very serious; it is only a question of a +fine," he said. + +The butler shook his head, sadly. + +"It is worse than that, Master Charles. It is worse than you +think." + +"Well, tell me all about it, Banks," Charlie said, feeling much +alarmed at the old man's manner. + +"Well, sir, at three this afternoon, two magistrates, John Cockshaw +and William Peters--" + +("Both bitter Whigs," Charlie put in.) + +"--Rode up to the door. They had with them six constables, and +twenty troopers." + +"There were enough of them, then," Charlie said. "Did they think my +father was going to arm you all, and defend the place?" + +"I don't know, sir, but that is the number that came. The +magistrates, and the constables, and four of the soldiers came into +the house. Sir Marmaduke met them in the hall. + +"'To what do I owe the honour of this visit?' he said, quite cold +and haughty. + +"'We have come, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs, to arrest you, on the +charge of being concerned in a treasonable plot against the king's +life.' + +"Sir Marmaduke laughed out loud. + +"'I have no design on the life of William of Orange, or of any +other man,' he said. 'I do not pretend to love him; in that matter +there are thousands in this realm with me; but, as for a design +against his life, I should say, gentlemen, there are few who know +me, even among men like yourselves, whose politics are opposed to +mine, who would for a moment credit such a foul insinuation.' + +"'We have nothing to do with that matter, Sir Marmaduke,' John +Cockshaw said. 'We are acting upon a sworn information to that +effect.' + +"Sir Marmaduke was angry, now. + +"'I can guess the name of the dog who signed it,' he said, 'and, +kinsman though he is by marriage, I will force the lie down his +throat.' + +"Then he cooled down again. + +"'Well, gentlemen, you have to do your duty. What do you desire +next?' + +"'Our duty is, next, to search the house, for any treasonable +documents that may be concealed here.' + +"'Search away, gentlemen,' Sir Marmaduke said, seating himself in +one of the settles. 'The house is open to you. My butler, James +Banks, will go round with you, and will open for you any cupboard +or chest that may be locked.' + +"The magistrates nodded to the four soldiers. Two of them took +their post near the chair, one at the outside door, and one at the +other end of the room. Sir Marmaduke said nothing, but shrugged his +shoulders, and then began to play with the ears of the little +spaniel, Fido, that had jumped up on his knees. + +"'We will first go into the study,' John Cockshaw said; and I led +them there. + +"They went straight to the cabinet with the pull-down desk, where +Sir Marmaduke writes when he does write, which is not often. It was +locked, and I went to Sir Marmaduke for the key. + +"'You will find it in that French vase on the mantel,' he said. 'I +don't open the desk once in three months, and should lose the key, +if I carried it with me.' + +"I went to the mantel, turned the vase over, and the key dropped +out. + +"'Sir Marmaduke has nothing to hide, gentlemen,' I said, 'so, you +see, he keeps the key here.' + +"I went to the cabinet, and put the key in. As I did so I said: + +"'Look, gentlemen, someone has opened, or tried to open, this desk. +Here is a mark, as if a knife had been thrust in to shoot the +bolt.' + +"They looked where I pointed, and William Peters said to Cockshaw, +'It is as the man says. Someone has been trying to force the +lock--one of the varlets, probably, who thought the knight might +keep his money here.' + +"'It can be of no importance, one way or the other,' Cockshaw said +roughly. + +"'Probably not, Mr. Cockshaw, but, at the same time I will make a +note of it.' + +"I turned the key, and pulled down the door that makes a desk. They +seemed to know all about it, for, without looking at the papers in +the pigeonholes, they pulled open the lower drawer, and took two +foreign-looking letters out from it. I will do them the justice to +say that they both looked sorry, as they opened them, and looked at +the writing. + +"'It is too true,' Peters said. 'Here is enough to hang a dozen +men.' + +"They tumbled all the other papers into a sack, that one of the +constables had brought with him. Then they searched all the other +furniture, but they evidently did not expect to find anything. Then +they went back into the hall. + +"'Well, gentlemen,' Sir Marmaduke said, 'have you found anything of +a terrible kind?' + +"'We have found, I regret to say,' John Cockshaw said, 'the letters +of which we were in search, in your private cabinet--letters that +prove, beyond all doubt, that you are concerned in a plot similar +to that discovered three years ago, to assassinate his majesty the +king.' + +"Sir Marmaduke sprang to his feet. + +"'You have found letters of that kind in my cabinet?' he said, in a +dazed sort of way. + +"The magistrate bowed, but did not speak. + +"'Then, sir,' Sir Marmaduke exclaimed, 'you have found letters that +I have never seen. You have found letters that must have been +placed there by some scoundrel, who plotted my ruin. I assert to +you, on the honour of a gentleman, that no such letters have ever +met my eye, and that, if such a proposition had been made to me, I +care not by whom, I would have struck to the ground the man who +offered me such an insult.' + +"'We are sorry, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs,' Mr. Peters said, 'most +sorry, both of us, that it should have fallen to our duty to take +so painful a proceeding against a neighbour; but, you see, the +matter is beyond us. We have received a sworn information that you +are engaged in such a plot. We are told that you are in the habit +of locking up papers of importance in a certain cabinet, and there +we find papers of a most damnatory kind. We most sincerely trust +that you may be able to prove your innocence in the matter, but we +have nothing to do but to take you with us, as a prisoner, to +Lancaster.' + +"Sir Marmaduke unbuckled his sword, and laid it by. He was quieter +than I thought he could be, in such a strait, for he has always +been by nature, as you know, choleric. + +"'I am ready, gentlemen,' he said. + +"Peters whispered in Cockshaw's ear. + +"'Ah yes,' the other said, 'I had well-nigh forgotten,' and he +turned to me. 'Where is Master Charles Carstairs?' + +"'He is not in the house,' I said. 'He rode away this morning, and +did not tell me where he was going.' + +"'When do you expect him back?' + +"'I do not expect him at all,' I said. 'When Master Charles rides +out to visit his friends, he sometimes stays away for a day or +two.' + +"'Is it supposed,' Sir Marmaduke asked coldly, 'that my son is also +mixed up in this precious scheme?' + +"'It is sworn that he was privy to it,' John Cockshaw said, 'and +is, therefore, included in the orders for arrest.' + +"Sir Marmaduke did not speak, but he shut his lips tight, and his +hand went to where the hilt of his sword would have been. Two of +the constables went out and questioned the grooms, and found that +you had, as I said, ridden off. When they came back, there was some +talk between the magistrates, and then, as I said, four constables +and some soldiers were left in the house. Sir Marmaduke's horse was +brought round, and he rode away, with the magistrates and the other +soldiers." + +"I am quite sure, Banks, that my father could have known nothing of +those letters, or of any plot against William's life. I have heard +him speak so often of the assassination plot, and how disgraceful +it was, and how, apart from its wickedness, it had damaged the +cause, that I am certain he would not have listened to a word about +another such business." + +"I am sure of that, too," the old butler said; "but that is not the +question, Master Charles. There are the papers. We know that Sir +Marmaduke did not put them there, and that he did not know that +they were there. But how is it to be proved, sir? Everyone knows +that Sir Marmaduke is a Jacobite, and is regarded as the head of +the party in this part of the country. He has enemies, and one of +them, no doubt, has played this evil trick upon him, and the +putting of your name in shows what the motive is." + +"But it is ridiculous, Banks. Who could believe that such a matter +as this would be confided to a lad of my age?" + +"They might not believe it in their hearts, but people often +believe what suits their interest. This accusation touches Sir +Marmaduke's life; and his estate, even if his life were spared, +would be confiscated. In such a case, it might be granted to +anyone, and possibly even to the son of him they would call the +traitor. But the accusation that the son was concerned, or was, at +any rate, privy to the crime intended by the father, would set all +against him, and public opinion would approve of the estates +passing away from him altogether. + +"But now, sir, what do you think you had best do?" + +"Of course I shall go on, Banks, and let them take me to join my +father in Lancaster jail. Do you think I would run away?" + +"No, sir, I don't think you would run away. I am sure you would not +run away from fear, but I would not let them lay hands on me, until +I had thought the matter well over. You might be able to do more +good to Sir Marmaduke were you free, than you could do if you were +caged up with him. He has enemies, we know, who are doing their +best to ruin him, and, as you see, they are anxious that you, too, +should be shut up within four walls." + +"You are right, Banks. At any rate, I will ride back and consult +Mr. Jervoise. Besides, he ought to be warned, for he, too, may be +arrested on the same charge. How did you get away without being +noticed?" + +"I said that I felt ill--and I was not speaking falsely--at Sir +Marmaduke's arrest, and would lie down. They are keeping a sharp +lookout at the stables, and have a soldier at each door, to see +that no one leaves the house, but I went out by that old passage +that comes out among the ruins of the monastery." + +"I know, Banks. My father showed it to me, three years ago." + +"I shall go back that way again, sir, and no one will know that I +have left the house. You know the trick of the sliding panel, +Master Charles?" + +"Yes, I know it, and if I should want to come into the house again, +I will come that way, Banks." + +"Here is a purse," the butler said. "You may want money, sir. +Should you want more, there is a store hidden away, in the hiding +place under the floor of the Priest's Chamber, at the other end of +the passage. Do you know that?" + +"I know the Priest's Chamber of course, because you go through that +to get to the long passage, but I don't know of any special hiding +place there." + +"Doubtless, Sir Marmaduke did not think it necessary to show it you +then, sir, but he would have done it later on, so I do not consider +that I am breaking my oath of secrecy in telling you. You know the +little narrow loophole in the corner?" + +"Yes, of course. There is no other that gives light to the room. It +is hidden from view outside by the ivy." + +"Well, sir, you count four bricks below that, and you press hard on +the next, that is the fifth, then you will hear a click, then you +press hard with your heel at the corner, in the angle of the flag +below, and you will find the other corner rise. Then you get hold +of it and lift it up, and below there is a stone chamber, two feet +long and about eighteen inches wide and deep. It was made to +conceal papers in the old days, and I believe food was always kept +there, in case the chamber had to be used in haste. + +"Sir Marmaduke uses it as a store place for his money. He has laid +by a good deal every year, knowing that money would be wanted when +troops had to be raised. I was with him about three weeks ago, when +he put in there half the rents that had been paid in. So, if you +want money for any purpose, you will know where to find it." + +"Thank you, Banks. It may be very useful to have such a store, +now." + +"Where shall I send to you, sir, if I have any news that it is +urgent you should know of?" + +"Send to Mr. Jervoise, Banks. If I am not there, he will know where +I am to be found." + +"I will send Will Ticehurst, Master Charles. He is a stout lad, and +a shrewd one, and I know there is nothing that he would not do for +you. But you had best stop no longer. Should they find out that I +am not in the house, they will guess that I have come to warn you, +and may send out a party to search." + +Charlie at once mounted, and rode back to Mr. Jervoise's. + +"I expected you back," that gentleman said, as he entered. "Bad +news travels apace, and, an hour since, a man brought in the news +that Sir Marmaduke had been seen riding, evidently a prisoner, +surrounded by soldiers, on the road towards Lancaster. So that +villain we chased last night must have learnt something. I suppose +they will be here tomorrow, but I do not see what serious charge +they can have against us. We have neither collected arms, nor taken +any steps towards a rising. We have talked over what we might do, +if there were a landing made from France, but, as there may be no +landing, that is a very vague charge." + +"Unfortunately, that is not the charge against my father. It is a +much more serious business." + +And Charlie repeated the substance of what Banks had told him, +interrupted occasionally by indignant ejaculations from Mr. +Jervoise. + +"It is an infamous plot," he said, when the lad had concluded his +story. "Infamous! There was never a word said of such a scheme, and +no one who knows your father would believe it for an instant." + +"Yes, sir, but the judges, who do not know him, may believe it. No +doubt those who put those papers there, will bring forward evidence +to back it up." + +"I am afraid that will be the case. It is serious for us all," Mr. +Jervoise said thoughtfully. "That man will be prepared to swear +that he heard the plot discussed by us all. They seized your +father, today, as being the principal and most important of those +concerned in it, but we may all find ourselves in the same case +tomorrow. I must think it over. + +"It is well that your man warned you. You had best not stay here +tonight, for the house may be surrounded at daybreak. Harry shall +go over, with you, to one of my tenants, and you can both sleep +there. It will not be necessary for you to leave for another two or +three hours. You had better go to him now; supper will be served in +half an hour. I will talk with you again, afterwards." + +Harry was waiting outside the door, having also heard the news of +Sir Marmaduke's arrest. + +"It is villainous!" he exclaimed, when he heard the whole story. +"No doubt you are right, and that John Dormay is at the bottom of +it all. The villain ought to be slain." + +"He deserves it, Harry; and, if I thought it would do good, I would +gladly fight him, but I fear that it would do harm. Such a +scoundrel must needs be a coward, and he might call for aid, and I +might be dragged off to Lancaster. Moreover, he is Ciceley's +father, and my cousin Celia's husband, and, were I to kill him, it +would separate me altogether from them. However, I shall in all +things be guided by your father. He will know what best ought to be +done. + +"It is likely that he, too, may be arrested. This is evidently a +deep plot, and your father thinks that, although the papers alone +may not be sufficient to convict my father, the spy we had in our +house will be ready to swear that he heard your father, and mine, +and the others, making arrangements for the murder of William of +Orange; and their own word to the contrary would count but little +against such evidence, backed by those papers." + +They talked together for half an hour, and were then summoned to +supper. Nothing was said, upon the subject, until the servitors had +retired, and the meal was cleared away. Mr. Jervoise was, like Sir +Marmaduke, a widower. + +"I have been thinking it all over," he said, when they were alone. +"I have determined to ride, at once, to consult some of my friends, +and to warn them of what has taken place. That is clearly my duty. +I shall not return until I learn whether warrants are out for my +apprehension. Of course, the evidence is not so strong against me +as it is against Sir Marmaduke; still, the spy's evidence would +tell as much against me as against him. + +"You will go up, Harry, with your friend, to Pincot's farm. It lies +so far in the hills that it would probably be one of the last to be +searched, and, if a very sharp lookout is kept there, a body of men +riding up the valley would be seen over a mile away, and there +would be plenty of time to take to the hills. There Charlie had +better remain, until he hears from me. + +"You can return here, Harry, in the morning, for there is no +probability whatever of your being included in any warrant of +arrest. It could only relate to us, who were in the habit of +meeting at Sir Marmaduke's. You will ride over to the farm each +day, and tell Charlie any news you may have learnt, or take any +message I may send you for him. + +"We must do nothing hastily. The first thing to learn, if possible, +is whether any of us are included in the charge of being concerned +in a plot against William's life. In the next place, who are the +witnesses, and what evidence they intend to give. No doubt the most +important is the man who was placed as a spy at Sir Marmaduke's." + +"As I know his face, sir," Charlie said eagerly, "could I not find +him, and either force him to acknowledge that it is all false, or +else kill him? I should be in my right in doing that, surely, since +he is trying to swear away my father's life by false evidence." + +"I should say nothing against that, lad. If ever a fellow deserved +killing he does; that is, next to his rascally employer. But his +death would harm rather than benefit us. It would be assumed, of +course, that we had removed him to prevent his giving evidence +against us. No doubt his depositions have been taken down, and they +would then be assumed to be true, and we should be worse off than +if he could be confronted with us, face to face, in the court. We +must let the matter rest, at present." + +"Would it be possible to get my father out of prison, sir? I am +sure I can get a dozen men, from among the tenants and grooms, who +would gladly risk their lives for him." + +"Lancaster jail is a very strong place," Mr. Jervoise said, "and I +fear there is no possibility of rescuing him from it. Of course, at +present we cannot say where the trial will take place. A commission +may be sent down, to hold a special assizes at Lancaster, or the +trial may take place in London. At any rate, nothing whatever can +be done, until we know more. I have means of learning what takes +place at Lancaster, for we have friends there, as well as at most +other places. When I hear from them the exact nature of the charge, +the evidence that will be given, and the names of those accused of +being mixed up in this pretended plot, I shall be better able to +say what is to be done. + +"Now, I must mount and ride without further delay. I have to visit +all our friends who met at Lynnwood, and it will take me until +tomorrow morning to see and confer with them." + +A few minutes after Mr. Jervoise had ridden off, his son and +Charlie also mounted. A man went with them, with a supply of +torches, for, although Harry knew the road--which was little better +than a sheep track--well enough during the day, his father thought +he might find it difficult, if not impossible, to follow it on a +dark night. + +They congratulated themselves upon the precaution taken, before +they had gone very far, for there was no moon, the sky was +overcast, and a drizzling rain had begun to come down. They could +hardly see their horses' heads, and had proceeded but a short +distance, when it became necessary for their guide to light a +torch. It took them, therefore, over two hours to reach the +mountain farm. + +They were expected, otherwise the household would have been asleep. +Mr. Jervoise had, as soon as he determined upon their going there, +sent off a man on horseback, who, riding fast, had arrived before +night set in. There was, therefore, a great turf fire glowing on +the hearth when they arrived, and a hearty welcome awaiting them +from the farmer, his wife, and daughters. Harry had, by his +father's advice, brought two changes of clothes in a valise, but +they were so completely soaked to the skin that they decided they +would, after drinking a horn of hot-spiced ale that had been +prepared for them, go at once to bed, where, in spite of the +stirring events of the day, both went off to sleep, as soon as +their heads touched the pillows. + +The sun was shining brightly, when they woke. The mists had cleared +off, although they still hung round the head of Ingleborough, six +miles away, and on some of the other hilltops. The change of +weather had an inspiriting effect, and they went down to breakfast +in a brighter and more hopeful frame of mind. As soon as the meal +was over, Harry started for home. + +"I hope it won't be long before I can see you again, Harry," +Charlie said, as he stood by the horse. + +"I hope not, indeed; but there is no saying. My father's orders are +that I am to stay at home, if people come and take possession, and +send a man off to you with the news privately, but that, if no one +comes, I may myself bring you over any news there is; so I may be +back here this afternoon." + +"I shall be looking out for you, Harry. Remember, it will be +horribly dull for me up here, wondering and fretting as to what is +going on." + +"I know, Charlie; and you shall hear, as soon as I get the smallest +scrap of news. If I were you, I would go for a good walk among the +hills. It will be much better for you than moping here. At any +rate, you are not likely to get any news for some hours to come." + +Charlie took the advice, and started among the hills, not returning +until the midday meal was ready. Before he had finished his dinner +there was a tap at the door, and then a young fellow, whom he knew +to be employed in Mr. Jervoise's stables, looked in. Charlie sprang +to his feet. + +"What's the news?" he asked. + +"Master Harry bade me tell you, sir, that a magistrate, and four +constables, and ten soldier men came today, at nine o'clock. He had +returned but a half-hour when they rode up. They had an order for +the arrest of Mr. Jervoise, and have been searching the house, high +and low, for papers. No one is allowed to leave the place, but +Master Harry came out to the stables and gave me his orders, and I +did not find much difficulty in slipping out without their noticing +me. Mr. Harry said that he had no news of Mr. Jervoise, nor any +other news, save what I have told you. He bade me return at once +as, later on, he may want to send me again. I was to be most +careful that no one should see me when I got back, and, if I was +caught, I was on no account to say where I had been to." + +The farmer insisted upon the young fellow sitting down at the +table, and taking some food, before he started to go back. He +required no pressing, but, as soon as his hunger was satisfied, he +started again at a brisk run, which he kept up as long as Charlie's +eye could follow him down the valley. + +Although the boy by no means wished Mr. Jervoise to be involved in +his father's trouble, Charlie could not help feeling a certain +amount of pleasure at the news. He thought it certain that, if his +father escaped, he would have to leave the country, and that he +would, in that case, take him as companion in his flight. If Mr. +Jervoise and Harry also left the country, it would be vastly more +pleasant for both his father and himself. Where they would go to, +or what they would do, he had no idea, but it seemed to him that +exile among strangers would be bearable, if he had his friend with +him. It would not last many years, for surely the often talked-of +landing could not be very much longer delayed; then they would +return, share in the triumph of the Stuart cause, and resume their +life at Lynnwood, and reckon with those who had brought this foul +charge against them. + +That the Jacobite cause could fail to triumph was a contingency to +which Charlie did not give even a thought. He had been taught that +it was a just and holy cause. All his school friends, as well as +the gentlemen who visited his father, were firm adherents of it, +and he believed that the same sentiments must everywhere prevail. +There was, then, nothing but the troops of William to reckon with, +and these could hardly oppose a rising of the English people, +backed by aid from France. + +It was not until after dark that the messenger returned. + +"Master Harry bade me tell you, sir, that a gipsy boy he had never +seen before has brought him a little note from his father. He will +not return at present, but, if Mr. Harry can manage to slip away +unnoticed in the afternoon, tomorrow, he is to come here. He is not +to come direct, but to make a circuit, lest he should be watched +and followed, and it may be that the master will meet him here." + +Charlie was very glad to hear this. Harry could, of course, give +him little news of what was going on outside the house, but Mr. +Jervoise might be able to tell him something about his father, +especially as he had said he had means of learning what went on in +Lancaster jail. + +He was longing to be doing something. It seemed intolerable to him +that he should be wandering aimlessly among the hills, while his +father was lying in Lancaster, with a charge affecting his life +hanging over him. What he could do he knew not, but anything would +be better than doing nothing. Mr. Jervoise had seemed to think that +it was out of the question to attempt a rescue from Lancaster; but +surely, if he could get together forty or fifty determined fellows, +a sudden assault upon the place might be successful. + +Then he set to work reckoning up the grooms, the younger tenants, +and the sons of the older ones, and jotted down the names of +twenty-seven who he thought might join in the attempt. + +"If Harry could get twenty-three from his people, that would make +it up to the number," he said. "Of course, I don't know what the +difficulties to be encountered may be. I have ridden there with my +father, and I know that the castle is a strong one, but I did not +notice it very particularly. The first thing to do will be to go +and examine it closely. No doubt ladders will be required, but we +could make rope ladders, and take them into the town in a cart, +hidden under faggots, or something of that sort. + +"I do hope Mr. Jervoise will come tomorrow. It is horrible waiting +here in suspense." + +The next morning, the hours seemed endless. Half a dozen times he +went restlessly in and out, walking a little distance up the hill +rising from the valley, and returning again, with the vain idea +that Mr. Jervoise might have arrived. + +Still more slowly did the time appear to go, after dinner. He was +getting into a fever of impatience and anxiety, when, about five +o'clock, he saw a figure coming down the hillside from the right. +It was too far away to recognize with certainty, but, by the rapid +pace at which he descended the hill, he had little doubt that it +was Harry, and he at once started, at the top of his speed, to meet +him. + +The doubt was soon changed into a certainty. When, a few hundred +yards up the hill, he met his friend, both were almost breathless. +Harry was the first to gasp out: + +"Has my father arrived?" + +"Not yet." + +Harry threw himself down on the short grass, with an exclamation of +thankfulness. + +"I have run nearly every foot of the way," he said, as soon as he +got his breath a little. "I had awful difficulty in getting out. +One of the constables kept in the same room with me, and followed +me wherever I went. They evidently thought I might hear from my +father, or try to send him a message. At last, I got desperate, and +ran upstairs to that room next mine, and closed and locked the door +after me. You know the ivy grows high up the wall there, and +directly I got in, I threw open the casement and climbed down by +it. It gave way two or three times, and I thought I was gone, but I +stuck to it, and managed each time to get a fresh hold. The moment +I was down, I ran along by the foot of the wall until I got round +behind, made a dash into that clump of fir trees, crawled along in +a ditch till I thought I was safe, and then made a run for it. I +was so afraid of being followed that I have been at least three +miles round, but I don't mind, now that my father hasn't arrived. I +was in such a fright that he might come and go before I got here." + + + +Chapter 3: A Rescue. + + +The two lads walked slowly down the hill together. Harry had heard +no more than Charlie had done, of what was going on. The messenger +from his father was a young fellow, of seventeen or eighteen, with +a gipsy face and appearance. How he had managed to elude the +vigilance of the men on watch, Harry did not know. He, himself, had +only learnt his presence when, as he passed some bushes in the +garden, a sharp whisper made him stop, and a moment later a hand +was thrust through the foliage. He took the little note held out, +and caught sight of the lad's face, through the leaves, as he leant +forward and said: + +"Go on, sir, without stopping. They may be watching you." + +Harry had thrust the note into his pocket, and sauntered on for +some time. He then returned to the house, and there read the +letter, with whose contents Charlie was already acquainted. +Eagerly, they talked over what each had been thinking of since they +had parted, early on the previous day; and discussed Charlie's idea +of an attack on Lancaster jail. + +"I don't know whether I could get as many men as you say, Charlie. +I don't think I could. If my father were in prison, as well as +yours, I am sure that most of the young fellows on the estate would +gladly help to rescue him, but it would be a different thing when +it came to risking their lives for anyone else. Of course I don't +know, but it does not seem to me that fifty men would be of any +use, at all, towards taking Lancaster Castle. It always seemed to +me a tremendously strong place." + +"Yes, it does look so, Harry; but perhaps, on examining it closely, +one would find that it is not so strong as it looks, by a long way. +It seems to me there must be some way or other of getting father +out, and, if there seems even the least bit of a chance, I shall +try it." + +"And you may be sure I will stand by you, Charlie, whatever it is," +Harry said heartily. "We have been just like brothers, and, of +course, brothers ought to stick to each other like anything. If +they don't, what is the use of being brothers? I daresay we shall +know more, when we hear what my father has to say; and then we may +see our way better." + +"Thank you, Harry. I knew you would stick by me. Of course, I don't +want to do any mad sort of thing. There is no hurry, anyhow, and, +as you say, when we know more about it, we may be able to hit upon +some sort of plan." + +It was not until eight o'clock that Mr. Jervoise arrived. He looked +grievously tired and worn out, but he spoke cheerfully as he came +in. + +"I have had a busy two days of it, boys, as you may guess. I have +no particularly good news to tell you, but, on the other hand, I +have no bad news. I was in time to warn all our friends, and when +the soldiers came for them in the morning, it was only to find that +their nests were empty. + +"They have been searching the houses of all Sir Marmaduke's +tenants, Charlie, and questioning man, woman, and child as to +whether they have seen you. + +"Ah! Here is supper, and I am nearly famished. However, I can go on +talking while I eat. I should have been here sooner, but I have +been waiting for the return of the messenger I sent to Lancaster. + +"Yesterday morning there was an examination of your father, +Charlie, or rather, an examination of the testimony against him. +First the two letters that were discovered were put in. Without +having got them word for word, my informer was able to give me the +substance of them. Both were unsigned, and professed to have been +written in France. The first is dated three months back. It alludes +to a conversation that somebody is supposed to have had with Sir +Marmaduke, and states that the agent who had visited him, and who +is spoken of as Mr. H, had assured them that your father was +perfectly ready to join, in any well-conceived design for putting a +stop to the sufferings that afflicted the country, through the wars +into which the foreign intruder had plunged it, even though the +plan entailed the removal of the usurper. The writer assured Sir +Marmaduke of the satisfaction that such an agreement on his part +had caused at Saint Germains, and had heightened the high esteem in +which Sir Marmaduke was held, for his long fidelity to the cause of +his majesty. It then went on to state that a plan had been already +formed, and that several gentlemen in the south were deeply pledged +to carry it out, but that it was thought specially advisable that +some from the north should also take part in it, as, from their +persons being unknown near the court, they could act with more +surety and safety. They would, therefore, be glad if he would take +counsel, with the friends he had mentioned, as to what might seem +to them the best course of proceeding. There was no occasion for +any great haste and, indeed, some weeks must elapse before the blow +was struck, in order that preparations should be made, in France, +for taking instant advantage of it. + +"The rest of the letter was to the same purpose, but was really a +repetition of it. The second letter was dated some time later, and +was, as before, an answer to one the knight was supposed to have +written. It highly approved of the suggestions therein made; that +Sir Marmaduke and his friends should travel, separately and at a +few days' interval, to London, and should take lodgings there in +different parts of the town, and await the signal to assemble, near +Richmond, when it was known that the king would go hunting there. +It said that special note had been made of the offer of Sir +Marmaduke's son, to mingle among the king's attendants and to fire +the first shot, as, in the confusion, he would be able to escape +and, being but a boy, as he said, none would be able to recognize +him afterwards. + +"In the event, of course, of the first shot failing, the rest of +the party, gathered in a body, would rush forward, despatch the +usurper, cut their way, sword in hand, through any who barred their +path to the point where their horses were concealed, and then at +once scatter in various directions. For this great service, his +majesty would not fail to evince the deepest gratitude, upon his +restoration to his rightful throne, and pledged his royal word that +each of the party should receive rank and dignity, together with +ample estates, from the lands of which the chief supporters of the +usurper would be deprived. + +"So you see, Charlie, you were to have the honour of playing the +chief part in this tragedy." + +"Honour indeed!" Charlie exclaimed passionately. "Dishonour, sir. +Was there ever so infamous a plot!" + +"It is a well-laid plot, Charlie, and does credit to the scoundrel +who planned it. You see, he made certain that Sir Marmaduke would +be attainted, and his estates forfeited, but there existed just a +possibility that, as you are but a boy, though a good big one, it +might be thought that, as you were innocent of the business, a +portion at least of the estate might be handed to you. To prevent +this, it was necessary that you also should be mixed up in the +affair." + +"Has John Dormay appeared in the matter so far, Mr. Jervoise?" + +"Not openly, Charlie. My informant knows that there have been two +or three meetings of Whig magistrates, with closed doors, and that +at these he has been present, and he has no doubt, whatever, that +it is he who has set the ball rolling. Still, there is no proof of +this, and he did not appear yesterday. The man who did appear was +the rascal who tried to overhear us the other night. He stated that +he had been instigated by a gentleman of great loyalty--here one of +the magistrates broke in, and said no name must be mentioned--to +enter the household of Sir Marmaduke, a gentleman who, as he +believed, was trafficking with the king's enemies. He had agreed to +do this, in spite of the danger of such employment, moved thereto +not so much by the hope of a reward as from his great loyalty to +his majesty, and a desire to avert from him his great danger from +popish plots. Having succeeded in entering Sir Marmaduke's service, +he soon discovered that six gentlemen, to wit, myself and five +friends, were in the habit of meeting at Lynnwood, where they had +long and secret talks. Knowing the deep enmity and hostility these +men bore towards his gracious majesty, he determined to run any +hazard, even to the loss of his life, to learn the purport of such +gatherings, and did, therefore, conceal himself, on one occasion +behind the hangings of a window, and on another listened at an open +casement, and did hear much conversation regarding the best manner +in which the taking of the king's life could be accomplished. This, +it was agreed, should be done in the forest at Richmond, where all +should lie in wait, the said Sir Marmaduke Carstairs undertaking +that he and his son would, in the first place, fire with pistol or +musquetoon, and that, only if they should fail, the rest should +charge forward on horse, overthrow the king's companions, and +despatch him, Mr. William Jervoise undertaking the management of +this part of the enterprise. No date was settled for this wicked +business, it being, however, agreed that all should journey +separately to London, and take up their lodging there under feigned +names; lying hid until they heard from a friend at court, whose +name was not mentioned, a day on which the king would hunt at +Richmond. He further testified that, making another attempt to +overhear the conspirators in order that he might gather fuller +details as to the manner of the plot, he was seen by Master Charles +Carstairs, who, taking him by surprise, grievously assaulted him, +and that he and the others would have slain him, had he not +overthrown Master Carstairs and effected his escape before the +others, rushing out sword in hand, had time to assail him. + +"During his stay at Lynnwood he had, several times, watched at the +window of the room where Sir Marmaduke Carstairs sits when alone, +and where he writes his letters and transacts business, and that he +observed him, more than once, peruse attentively papers that seemed +to be of importance, for, after reading them, he would lay them +down and walk, as if disturbed or doubtful in mind, up and down the +room; and these papers he placed, when he had done with them, in +the bottom drawer of a desk in his cabinet, the said desk being +always carefully locked by him. + +"That is all that I learnt from Lancaster, save that instructions +have been given that no pains should be spared to secure the +persons of those engaged in the plot, and that a special watch was +to be set at the northern ports, lest they should, finding their +guilt discovered, try to escape from the kingdom. So you see that +your good father, Sir Marmaduke, is in a state of sore peril, and +that the rest of us, including yourself, will be in a like strait +if they can lay hands on us." + +"But it is all false!" Charlie exclaimed. "It is a lie from +beginning to end." + +"That is so, but we cannot prove it. The matter is so cunningly +laid, I see no way to pick a hole in it. We are Jacobites, and as +such long regarded as objects of suspicion by the Whig magistrates +and others. There have been other plots against William's life, in +which men of seeming reputation have been concerned. This man's +story will be confirmed by the man who set him on, and by other +hidden papers, if necessary. As to the discovery of the documents, +we may know well enough that the fellow himself put them there, but +we have no manner of proof of it. It is evident that there is +nothing for us but to leave the country, and to await the time when +the king shall have his own again. My other friends, who were with +me this afternoon when the news came from Lancaster, all agreed +that it would be throwing away our lives to stay here. We all have +money by us, for each has, for years, laid by something for the +time when money will be required to aid the king on his arrival. + +"Having agreed to take this course, we drew up a document, which we +all signed, and which will be sent in when we have got clear away. +In it we declare that being informed that accusations of being +concerned in a plot against the life of William of Orange have been +brought against us, we declare solemnly before God that we, and +also Sir Marmaduke Carstairs and his son, are wholly innocent of +the charge, and that, although we do not hesitate to declare that +we consider the title of the said William to be king of this realm +to be wholly unfounded and without reason, and should therefore +take up arms openly against it on behalf of our sovereign did +occasion offer, yet that we hold assassination in abhorrence, and +that the crime with which we are charged is as hateful in our sight +as in that of any Whig gentleman. As, however, we are charged, as +we learn, by evilly disposed and wicked persons, of this design, +and have no means of proving our innocence, we are forced to leave +the realm until such time shall arrive when we can rely on a fair +trial, when our reputation and honour will weigh against the word +of suborned perjurers and knaves. + +"We were not forgetful of your father's case, and we debated long +as to whether our remaining here could do him service. We even +discussed the possibility of raising a force, and attacking +Lancaster Castle. We agreed, however, that this would be nothing +short of madness. The country is wholly unprepared at present. The +Whigs are on the alert, and such an attempt would cost the lives of +most of those concerned in it. Besides, we are all sure that Sir +Marmaduke would be the first to object to numbers of persons +risking their lives in an attempt which, even if, for the moment, +successful, must bring ruin upon all concerned in it. Nor do we see +that, were we to remain and to stand in the dock beside him, it +would aid him. Our word would count for no more than would this +protest and denial that we have signed together. A prisoner's plea +of not guilty has but a feather's weight against sworn evidence. + +"At the same time, Charlie, I do not intend to leave the country +until I am sure that nothing can be done. As force is out of the +question, I have advised the others to lose not an hour in trying +to escape and, by this time, they are all on the road. Two are +making for Bristol, one for Southampton, and two for London. It +would be too dangerous to attempt to escape by one of the northern +ports. But, though force cannot succeed, we may be able to effect +your father's escape by other means, and it is for this purpose +that I am determined to stay, and I shall do so until all hope is +gone. Alone you could effect nothing; but I, knowing who are our +secret friends, may be able to use them to advantage. + +"We will stay here tonight, but tomorrow we must change our +quarters, for the search will be a close one. During the day we +will go far up over the hills, but tomorrow night we will make for +Lancaster. I have warned friends there to expect us, and it is the +last place where they would think of searching for us." + +"You will take me with you, too, father?" Harry exclaimed eagerly; +while Charlie expressed his gratitude to Mr. Jervoise, for thus +determining to risk his own life in the endeavour to effect the +escape of Sir Marmaduke. + +"Yes, I intend to take you with me, Harry. They will pretend, of +course, that, in spite of our assertions of innocence, our flight +is a confession of guilt, and you may be sure that we shall be +condemned in our absence, and our estates declared confiscated, and +bestowed upon some of William's minions. There will be no place for +you here. + +"My own plans are laid. As you know, your mother came from the +other side of the border, and a cousin of hers, with whom I am well +acquainted, has gone over to Sweden, and holds a commission in the +army that the young king is raising to withstand Russia and Saxony; +for both are thinking of taking goodly slices of his domains. I +could not sit down quietly in exile, and, being but forty, I am not +too old for service, and shall take a commission if I can obtain +it. There are many Scottish Jacobites who, having fled rather than +acknowledge Dutch William as their king, have taken service in +Sweden, where their fathers fought under the great Gustavus +Adolphus; and, even if I cannot myself take service, it may be that +I shall be able to obtain a commission for you. You are nearly +sixteen, and there are many officers no older. + +"Should evil befall your father, Charlie, which I earnestly hope +will not be the case, I shall regard you as my son, and shall do +the same for you as for Harry. + +"And now, I will to rest, for I have scarce slept the last two +nights, and we must be in the saddle long before daybreak." + +The little bedroom, that Charlie had used the two previous nights, +was given up to Mr. Jervoise; while Harry and Charlie slept on some +sheep skins, in front of the kitchen fire. Two hours before +daybreak they mounted and, guided by the farmer, rode to a +shepherd's hut far up among the hills. Late in the afternoon, a boy +came up from the farm, with the news that the place had been +searched by a party of troopers. They had ridden away without +discovering that the fugitives had been at the farm, but four of +the party had been left, in case Mr. Jervoise should come there. +The farmer, therefore, warned them against coming back that way, as +had been intended, naming another place where he would meet them. + +As soon as the sun was setting they mounted and, accompanied by the +shepherd on a rough pony, started for Lancaster. After riding for +three hours, they stopped at a lonely farm house, at which Mr. +Jervoise and his friends had held their meeting on the previous +day. Here they changed their clothes for others that had been sent +for their use from Lancaster. Mr. Jervoise was attired as a small +trader, and the lads in garb suitable to boys in the same rank of +life. They still, however, retained their swords, and the pistols +in their holsters. + +Three miles farther they met their host, as arranged, at some +crossroads, and rode on until within three miles of Lancaster. They +then dismounted, placed their pistols in their belts, and handed +their horses to the two men, who would take them back to the hut in +the hills, where they would remain until required. + +It was two o'clock in the morning when they entered Lancaster and, +going up to a small house, standing in a garden in the outskirts of +the town, Mr. Jervoise gave three low knocks in quick succession. +The door was opened almost immediately. No light was shown, and +they entered in the dark, but as soon as the door was closed behind +them, a woman came out with a candle from an inner room. + +"I am glad to see you safe, Mr. Jervoise," a man said. "My wife and +I were beginning to be anxious, fearing that you might have fallen +into the hands of your enemies." + +"No, all has gone well, Herries; but it is a long ride from the +hills here, and we walked the last three miles, as we wanted to get +the horses back again before daylight. We are deeply grateful to +you for giving us shelter." + +"I would be ready to do more than that," the man said, "for the +sake of the good cause. My wife's father and mine both fell at +Naseby, and we are as loyal to the Stuarts as they were. You are +heartily welcome, sir, and, as we keep no servant, there will be +none to gossip. You can either remain in the house, in which case +none will know of your presence here; or, if you wish to go abroad +in the town, I will accompany you, and will introduce you to any +acquaintance I may meet as a cousin of my wife who, with his two +sons, has come over from Preston to pay us a visit. I don't think +that anyone would know you, in that attire." + +"I will run no more risks than are necessary, Herries. Those I wish +to see will visit me here, and, if I go out at all, it will not be +until after dark." + +For a fortnight they remained at the house. After dark each day, a +man paid Mr. Jervoise a visit. He was the magistrates' clerk, and +had an apartment in the castle. From him they learned that a +messenger had been despatched to London, with an account of the +evidence taken in Sir Marmaduke's case; and that, at the end of +twelve days, he had returned with orders that all prisoners and +witnesses were to be sent to town, where they would be examined, in +the first place, by his majesty's council; and where Sir +Marmaduke's trial for high treason would take place. They were to +be escorted by a party of twelve troopers, under the command of a +lieutenant. + +The fugitives had, before, learned that the search for Mr. Jervoise +had been given up; it being supposed that he, with his son and +young Carstairs had, with their accomplices, all ridden for the +coast at the first alarm, and had probably taken ship for France +before the orders had arrived that all outgoing vessels should be +searched. + +Harry and Charlie had both been away for two or three days, and had +been occupied in getting together ten young fellows, from the two +estates, who would be willing and ready to attempt to rescue Sir +Marmaduke from his captors' hands. They were able to judge, with +tolerable accuracy, when the messenger would return from London +and, two days previously, the men had been directed to ride, singly +and by different roads, and to put up at various small inns in +Manchester, each giving out that he was a farmer in from the +country, either to purchase supplies, or to meet with a customer +likely to buy some cattle he wished to dispose of. Charlie had paid +a visit to Lynnwood, and had gone by the long passage into the +Priest's Chamber, and had carried off the gold hidden there. + +As soon as it was known that the messenger had returned, Herries +had borrowed a horse, and had ridden with a note to the farmer, +telling him to go up to the hills and bring the horses down, with +one of his own, to the place where he had parted from them, when +they entered Lancaster. There he was met by Mr. Jervoise and the +lads and, mounting, they started with the spare horse for +Blackburn, choosing that line in preference to the road through +Preston, as there were troops stationed at the latter town. + +The next day they rode on to Manchester. They went round, that +evening, to the various inns where the men had put up, and directed +them to discover whether, as was probable, the escort was to arrive +that night. If so, they were to mount at daybreak, and assemble +where the road crossed the moor, three miles north of Chapel le +Frith, where they would find Mr. Jervoise awaiting them. + +At nine o'clock that evening the troop rode in and, at daybreak, +Mr. Jervoise and the boys started. Two of the men were already at +the spot indicated, and, half an hour later, the whole of them had +arrived. + +Mr. Jervoise led them back to a spot that he had selected, where +the road dipped into a deep valley, in which, sheltered from the +winds, was a small wood. Leaving one at the edge, to give warning +directly the escort appeared on the road over the brow, he told the +rest to dismount. Most of them were armed with pistols. All had +swords. + +"Do you," he said, "who are good shots with your pistols, fire at +the men when I give the word--let the rest aim at the horses. The +moment you have opened fire, dash forward and fall on them. We are +already as numerous as they are, and we ought to be able to +dismount or disable four or five of them, with our first fire. I +shall give the order as Sir Marmaduke arrives opposite me. Probably +the officer will be riding. I shall make the officer my special +mark, for it may be that he has orders to shoot the prisoner, if +any rescue is attempted. + +"I don't suppose they will be at all prepared for an attack. They +were vigilant, no doubt, for the first two days but, once out of +Lancashire, they will think that there is no longer any fear of an +attempt at rescue. Pursue those that escape for half a mile or so, +and then draw rein, and, as soon as they are out of sight, strike +due north across the fells. Keep to the east of Glossop, and then +make your way singly to your homes. It will be better for you to +travel up through Yorkshire, till you are north of Ingleborough, so +as to come down from the north to your farms. + +"I know that you have all engaged in this affair for love of Sir +Marmaduke or myself, and because you hate to see a loyal gentleman +made the victim of lying knaves; but when we come back with the +king, you may be sure that Sir Marmaduke and I will well reward the +services you have rendered." + +It was an hour before the man on the lookout warned them that the +troop had just appeared over the hill. They mounted now, and, +pistol in hand, awaited the arrival of the party. Two troopers came +first, trotting carelessly along, laughing and smoking. A hundred +yards behind came the main body, four troopers first, then the +lieutenant and Sir Marmaduke, followed by the other six troopers. + +With outstretched arm, and pistol pointed through the undergrowth, +Mr. Jervoise waited till the officer, who was riding on his side of +the road, came abreast of him. He had already told the boys that he +intended to aim at his shoulder. + +"They are the enemies of the king," he said, "but I cannot, in cold +blood, shoot down a man with whom I have no cause for quarrel. I +can depend upon my aim, and he will not be twelve paces from the +muzzle of my pistol." + +He fired. The officer gave a sudden start, and reeled on his horse, +and, before he could recover himself, the band, who had fired at +the flash of the first pistol, dashed out through the bushes and +fell upon the troopers. Four men had dropped, one horse had fallen, +and two others were plunging wildly as, with a shout, their +assailants dashed upon them. All who could turn their horse's head +rode furiously off, some along the road forward, others back +towards Manchester. The lieutenant's horse had rolled over with +him, as that of Mr. Jervoise struck it on the shoulder, with the +full impetus of its spring. + +"It is all over, Sir Marmaduke, and you are a free man. We have +nothing to do now but to ride for it." + +And, before the knight had fairly recovered from his astonishment, +he found himself riding south across the moor, with his son on one +side of him, and Mr. Jervoise and Harry on the other. + +"You have saved my life, Jervoise," he said, holding out his hand +to his friend. "They had got me so firmly in their clutches, that I +thought my chances were at an end. + +"How are you, Charlie? I am right glad to see you, safe and sound, +for they had managed to include you in their pretended plot, and, +for aught I knew, you had been all this time lying in a cell next +mine in Lancaster Castle. + +"But who are the good fellows who helped you?" + +Mr. Jervoise briefly gave an account of the affair. + +"They are only keeping up a sham pursuit of the soldiers, so as to +send them well on their way. I told them not to overtake them, as +there was no occasion for any further bloodshed, when you were once +out of their hands. By tomorrow morning they will all be at work on +their farms again, and, if they keep their own counsel, need not +fear." + +Suddenly Sir Marmaduke reined in his horse. + +"We are riding south," he said. + +"Certainly we are," Mr. Jervoise said. "Why not? That is our only +chance of safety. They will, in the first place, suspect us of +having doubled back to the hills, and will search every farmhouse +and cottage. Our only hope of escape is to ride either for Bristol, +or one of the southern ports." + +"I must go back," Sir Marmaduke said doggedly. "I must kill that +scoundrel John Dormay, before I do anything else. It is he who has +wound this precious skein, in order to entrap us, expecting, the +scoundrel, to have my estates bestowed on him as a reward." + +"It were madness to ride back now, Sir Marmaduke. It would cost you +your life, and you would leave Charlie here fatherless, and with +but little chance of ever regaining the estate. You have but to +wait for a time, and everything will right itself. As soon as the +king comes to his own, your estates will be restored, and then I +would not seek to stay your hand, if you sought vengeance upon this +cunning knave." + +"Besides, father," Charlie put in, "much as he deserves any +punishment you can give him, you would not kill cousin Celia's +husband and Ciceley's father. When the truth is all made known, his +punishment will be bitter enough, for no honest man would offer him +a hand, or sit down to a meal with him. + +"Ciceley has been as a young sister to me, and her mother has ever +been as kind as if she had been my aunt. I would not see them +grieved, even if that rogue came off scot free from punishment; +but, at any rate, father, I pray you to let it pass at present. +This time we have happily got you out of the clutches of the Whigs, +but, if you fell into them again, you may be sure they would never +give us another chance." + +Sir Marmaduke still sat irresolute, and Charlie went on: + +"Besides, father, Mr. Jervoise has risked his life in lingering in +Lancashire to save you, and the brave fellows who aided us to +rescue you have risked theirs, both in the fray and afterwards, if +their share in it should ever be known; and it would not be fair to +risk failure, after all they have done. I pray you, father, be +guided by the opinion of your good friend, Mr. Jervoise." + +Sir Marmaduke touched his horse's flank with his heel. + +"You have prevailed, Charlie. Your last argument decided me. I have +no right to risk my life, after my good friends have done so much +to save me. John Dormay may enjoy his triumph for a while, but a +day of reckoning will surely come. + +"Now, tell me of the others, Jervoise. Have all escaped in safety?" + +"All. Your boy brought me the news of your arrest, and that we were +charged with plotting William's assassination. I rode that night +with the news, and next day all were on the road to the coast, and +were happily on board and away before the news of their escape +could be sent to the ports." + +"And now, what are your plans, Jervoise--that is, if you have any +plans, beyond reaching a port and taking ship for France?" + +"I am going to Sweden," Mr. Jervoise said, and then repeated the +reasons that he had given Charlie for taking this step. + +"I am too old for the wars," Sir Marmaduke said. "I was sixty last +birthday, and though I am still strong and active, and could strike +a shrewd blow in case of need, I am too old for the fatigues and +hardships of campaigning. I could not hope, at my age, to obtain a +commission in the Swedish service." + +"No, I did not think of your joining the army, Sir Marmaduke, +though I warrant you would do as well as most; but I thought that +you might take up your residence at Stockholm, as well as at Saint +Germains. You will find many Scottish gentlemen there, and not a +few Jacobites who, like yourself, have been forced to fly. Besides, +both the life and air would suit you better than at Saint Germains, +where, by all accounts the life is a gay one, and men come to think +more of pleasure than of duty. Moreover, your money will go much +further in Sweden than in France." + +Sir Marmaduke, checking the horse's speed, said, "I have not so +much as a penny in my pocket, and methinks I am like to have some +trouble in getting at the hoard I have been collecting, ever since +Dutch William came to the throne, for the benefit of His Majesty +when he arrives." + +"You will have no trouble in getting at that, father," Charlie said +laughing, "seeing that you have nothing to do but to lean over, and +put your hand into my holsters, which are so full, as you see, that +I am forced to carry my pistols in my belt." + +"What mean you, lad?" + +"I mean, father, that I have the whole of the hoard, that was +stowed away in the priest's hiding place;" and he then related how +Banks had revealed to him the secret of the hiding place, and how +he had, the night before Sir Marmaduke was removed from Lancaster +Castle, visited the place and carried away the money. + +"I could not see Banks," he said, "but I left a few words on a +scrap of paper, saying that it was I who had taken the money. +Otherwise he would have been in a terrible taking, when he +discovered that it was gone." + +"That is right good news, indeed, lad. For twelve years I have set +aside half my rents, so that in those bags in your holsters there +are six years' income, and the interest of that money, laid out in +good mortgages, will suffice amply for my wants in a country like +Sweden, where life is simple and living cheap. The money itself +shall remain untouched, for your use, should our hopes fail and the +estates be lost for all time. That is indeed a weight off my mind. + +"And you are, I hope, in equally good case, Jervoise, for if not, +you know that I would gladly share with you?" + +"I am in very good case, Sir Marmaduke, though I none the less +thank you for your offer. I too have, as you know, put aside half +my income. My estates are not so large as those of Lynnwood. Their +acreage may be as large, but a good deal of it is mountain land, +worth but little. My fund, therefore, is not as large as yours, but +it amounts to a good round sum; and as I hope, either in the army +or in some other way, to earn an income for myself, it is ample. I +shall be sorry to divert it from the use for which I intended it, +but that cannot now be helped. I have had the pleasure, year by +year, of putting it by for the king's use, and, now that +circumstances have changed, it will be equally useful to myself." + +"Do you know this country well, Jervoise?" + +"Personally I know nothing about it, save that the sun tells me +that, at present, I am travelling south, Sir Marmaduke. But, for +the last few days I have been so closely studying a map, that I +know the name of every town and village on the various routes." + +"And whither think you of going?" + +"To London or Southampton. Strangers are far less noticed in large +towns than in small, and we could hardly hope to find a ship, bound +for Sweden, in any of the Dorset or Devon ports." + + + +Chapter 4: In Sweden. + + +After much discussion, the party agreed that it would be best to +make for Southampton. The road thither was less frequented than +that leading to London, and there were fewer towns to be passed, +and less chance of interruption. Mr. Jervoise had brought with him +a valise and suit of clothes for Sir Marmaduke, of sober cut and +fashion. They avoided all large towns and, at the places where they +put up, represented themselves as traders travelling from the +Midlands to the southern coast, and they arrived at Southampton +without having excited the smallest suspicion. Indeed, throughout +the journey, they had heard no word of the affray near Chapel le +Frith, and knew, therefore, that the news had not travelled as fast +as they had. + +At Southampton, however, they had scarcely put up at an inn when +the landlord said: + +"I suppose, gentlemen, they are talking of nothing else, in London, +but the rescue of a desperate Jacobite by his friends. The news +only reached here yesterday." + +"It has occasioned a good deal of scare," Mr. Jervoise replied. "I +suppose there is no word of the arrest of the man, or his +accomplices? We have travelled but slowly, and the news may have +passed us on the way." + +"Not as yet," the landlord replied. "They say that all the northern +and eastern ports are watched, and they make sure of catching him, +if he presents himself there. The general opinion is that he will, +for a time, go into hiding with his friends, in the hills of +Cumberland or Westmoreland, or perhaps on the Yorkshire moors; but +they are sure to catch him sooner or later." + +"It is a bad business altogether," Mr. Jervoise said, "and we can +only hope that all guilty persons will in time get the punishment +they so well deserve. How can trade be carried on, if the country +is to be disturbed by plots, and conspiracies?" + +"How, indeed?" the landlord repeated heartily. "I do not meddle in +politics, being content to earn my living by my business, and to +receive all who can pay their reckoning, without caring a jot +whether they be Whigs or Tories." + +The next morning Mr. Jervoise and Sir Marmaduke went down to the +port, leaving the lads to wander about the town at their pleasure, +as two persons were likely to attract less attention than four. +They found that there were two vessels in port, loading with +munitions of war for Sweden, and that one of them would sail +shortly. They at once went on board her, and saw the captain. + +"Do you carry any passengers?" + +"None have applied so far," the captain said; "but, if they were to +offer, I should not say no to them." + +"We want to take passage for Sweden," Mr. Jervoise said. "The King +of that country is, as they say, fitting out an army. Clothes are +as necessary for troops as swords and guns, and we think we could +obtain a contract for these goods. There is no hope of doing so, +unless we ourselves go over, and, though sorely loath to do so, for +neither of us have ever before set foot on board a ship, we +determined on making the journey, together with our two clerks, for +whom we will take passage at the same rate as for ourselves, seeing +that they are both related to us." + +"Have you any goods with you?" + +"We shall take over but a bale or two of cloth, as samples of the +goods we can supply; but, beyond that, we have but little luggage, +seeing that our stay may be a very short one." + +There was a little haggling for terms, as the two gentlemen did not +wish to appear eager to go; but the matter was finally settled to +the satisfaction of both parties. + +On their return to the inn, Mr. Jervoise took the host aside. + +"We have business connected with our trade in cloth in Sweden, +where we hope to obtain a large contract. The matter may occupy us +a week, or a month or two for aught we know, and we do not want our +horses to be eating their heads off, here, while we are away. +Besides, we may be able, on our return, to take a passage to one of +the Devonshire ports, which would suit us much better. But we +should not be able to do so, if there were need for returning here +for our horses. Therefore, we would fain dispose of them, and, if +you can find us a purchaser by tomorrow night, we will pay you a +fair commission on the money we receive." + +"I doubt not that I can do that readily enough," the landlord said. +"Three of them are fine animals, fit for any gentleman's riding. +The other is a stout hackney. Trust me, I will get the best price I +can for them." + +The next day he came up to their room. + +"I have had a good offer for the horses," he said. "Two gentlemen, +who arrived yesterday from France, and are staying at the inn of a +friend of mine, are requiring horses for themselves and their +servants, and I have promised my friend a slice of my commission, +if he will bring them round hither. Will you name your price for +them?" + +"No, I would rather not," Mr. Jervoise said cautiously. "If we +asked too high a figure, we might frighten the purchasers away. If +we should ask too little, we should be the losers. I daresay they +have named, to your friend, the price they are willing to give. You +had better ask from them a good bit above that, then you can come +down little by little, and maybe, seeing the horses are really good +ones, they may advance a bit. I am not used to a horse deal, and +will leave it to you to make the bargain. We are sorry to part with +the animals, but they might die on the voyage, or get so injured as +to be worthless; and, moreover, we shall have no use for them +there. Therefore, as we must sell, we are ready to take the best +terms we can get." + +When they returned to the inn, after an absence of two hours, they +found that the landlord had sold the horses, for a sum nearly +approaching their value, the gentlemen being as anxious to purchase +them as they were to sell. The next day, they bought three or four +rolls of west country cloth, and a supply of clothes suitable to +their condition, together with trunks for their carriage. All these +were sent down to the ship, in the course of the afternoon, and +they themselves embarked late in the evening, as she was to set +sail at daybreak. + +The lads, accustomed to spacious and airy rooms, were quite taken +aback at the small and stuffy cabin allotted to their joint use, +and slept but badly, for the loading of the ship continued by +torchlight, until within an hour of the time of their departure. +After tossing about for some hours in their narrow beds, they were +glad to go on deck, and to plunge their heads into a pail of water, +and were then, after combing their long hair, able to take an +interest in what was passing round them. + +The sailors were busy; stowing away the cargo last received, +tidying the decks, and coiling down the ropes. There were but few +persons on the quay, for those who had been engaged in loading the +cargo had gone off to bed, as soon as the last bale was on board. + +In half an hour the sailors began to hoist the sails, the hawsers +were thrown off, and, with a gentle wind blowing aft, the ship +glided along past the shore, being helped by the tide, which had +begun to ebb half an hour before. The lads were greatly interested +in watching the well-wooded slope on the left, with the stately +ruins of Tintern Abbey rising above the trees. Then they passed the +round fort, at the water's edge, on their right, and issued out +from Southampton Water into the broad sheet between the island and +the mainland. + +It was dotted with sails; fishing craft and coasters for the most +part, but with some larger ships bound from the east to +Southampton, and others that had come in through the Solent. This +was very entertaining to the boys, and they were still more pleased +when they saw the fortifications of Portsmouth, with cannon +pointing seaward, and with many vessels riding in the strait by the +side of the town. + +"That fort would give the French or the Dutch a hot reception, were +they at any time to think to capture the dockyard and shipping," +Sir Marmaduke said. + +"The Dutch have already captured the place, and that without +shedding a drop of blood," Mr. Jervoise remarked. + +"'That is true enough," the knight said, stamping his foot angrily +on the deck, "but what has been won so easily may be lost as +quickly. I have seen several changes since I can first remember, +and I hope I may live to see another. However, we need not talk of +that now." + +"No, indeed," Mr. Jervoise agreed. "It may be, Sir Marmaduke, that +it would be better if we had talked and thought less of it, during +the last twelve years; better for ourselves, and for these lads. We +might still have been ready to join His Majesty as soon as he +landed, but as, till then, we could do nothing, it seems to me now +that it would have been wiser had we gone about our business +without worrying our heads, to say nothing of risking them, about a +matter that may not take place during our lives; as we know, well +enough, the King of France uses the Stuarts only for his own +convenience, and at heart cares nothing for them or their cause. It +is convenient to have the means of creating trouble here, and of so +weakening William; and it may be that, some day or other, it may +suit him to send over an army here to fight William, with the aid +of the Stuarts' friends, instead of fighting him in Holland or +elsewhere. But whether he may think fit to do so in one year, or in +twenty years hence, who can say? It is a question solely of +military policy. + +"The Stuarts are simply used, by the French king, to pull English +chestnuts out of the fire. I would that they had established +themselves anywhere rather than in France. It does them harm with +vast numbers who would otherwise be their friends, at any rate in +England. In Scotland it is otherwise, for Scotland has always been +in alliance with France; but in England it is different. France has +always been the national foe; and, had not Charles and James proved +themselves so subservient to Louis, William of Orange would never +have been crowned king. There are vast numbers in England who would +rather see a Stuart than a Dutchman on the throne, but who will +never strike a blow to replace them there, and that because they +will come over backed up by French bayonets. + +"Well, let us talk of something else. If the time ever comes to +act, we shall be ready, but till then we can let the matter sleep, +the more so as we have a new life before us, and plenty of other +things to occupy our thoughts." + +"What is it, father," Harry asked, "that the Swedes and Danes are +going to fight about?" + +"It is a difficult question, Harry; but there can be little doubt +that Denmark is in the wrong. The King of Sweden died in April, +1697. His death was unfortunate, for the powers contending in +Europe had all agreed to refer their quarrels to his mediation. At +his death, Denmark endeavoured to obtain the honour, but failed; +and by the mediation, chiefly, of the Swedish regency, peace was +concluded between France, England, and Holland, in the autumn of +that year; and, shortly afterwards, the struggle between the German +Emperor, France, and Spain was also concluded, but not at all to +the satisfaction of the Swedish mediators. + +"While Sweden was occupied in this matter of the pacification of +Europe, the King of Denmark thought to take advantage of the fact +that Charles of Sweden was but a minor, to press Frederick, Duke of +Holstein, who was in close alliance with him. + +"There had long been serious differences between the rulers of +Denmark and Holstein, both of whom were branches of the Oldenburg +family, and this in reference to the Duchy of Schleswig. The +quarrel had arisen from the act of Christian the Third, of Denmark, +who decreed that the descendants of his brother Adolphus should +govern Holstein, jointly with the King of Denmark, and that +Holstein and Schleswig should belong to them in common, neither +making any change in Holstein without the consent of the other A +more foolish arrangement could not have been conceived, for anyone +might have foreseen that it would lead to disputes and troubles. In +fact, quarrels continually arose, until, at the Peace of Rosahild, +in 1658, the duchy was adjudged to Denmark. + +"Holstein, however, never acquiesced in this, and in 1675 there was +war, when, Holstein being defeated, the Danes imprisoned its duke, +Christian Albertus, until he signed a renunciation of all his +rights. + +"His troops were disarmed, and all his towns and fortresses +garrisoned by Danish troops. On his release, the duke went to +Hamburg, where he remained till, at the Peace of Fontainebleau, +four years later, he was replaced in possession of his estates and +rights of sovereignty. + +"But this did not last long. New troubles arose, but Sweden, +England, and Holland interested themselves in favour of the duke, +and a peace was concluded in 1689, by which he was confirmed in the +rights given him, ten years before, with full liberty to raise a +certain number of troops, and of building fortresses, on the +condition that he should raise none to the prejudice of Denmark. + +"This was another of those stipulations which inevitably lead to +trouble, for it afforded to Denmark a pretext for continual +complaint and interference. When Frederick the Fourth succeeded his +father as Duke of Holstein, in 1694, the quarrel grew so hot that +Denmark would have invaded Holstein, had not the parties to the +Treaty of '89 interfered, and brought about a conference. This +lasted all through the year 1696, but the negotiators appointed to +settle the matter were unable to arrive at any conclusion. + +"The following year, Charles of Sweden, who had just succeeded his +father, furnished the duke with some troops, to help him to build +some forts that were intended to protect the frontier, in case of +invasion by Denmark. Christian of Denmark at once attacked and +captured these forts, and levelled them to the ground. The duke, +being too weak to engage in a war with his powerful neighbour, did +not resent this attack, and the negotiations were continued as +before. In view of the danger of the situation, and the necessity +for a monarch at the head of affairs, the Swedish Diet met, at +Stockholm, to take part in the funeral of the late king, which was +to be performed on the 24th of November, and to deliberate upon the +situation. + +"By the will of the late king, Charles was not to ascend the throne +until he reached the age of eighteen, but the diet passed a vote +overruling this, and, as the regency concurred, he was at once +crowned, and the alliance with Holstein was cemented by the +marriage, that had been previously arranged between Charles's +eldest sister and the Duke of Holstein, being celebrated at +Stockholm. Charles the Twelfth at once concluded treaties with +France, England, and Holland; while Denmark is reported to have +prepared for war by making a secret alliance with Augustus of +Saxony, King of Poland, and the Czar of Russia. Both these monarchs +were doubtless desirous of extending their dominions, at the cost +of Sweden, whose continental possessions are considerable. + +"Augustus is not yet very firmly seated on the throne of Poland. +There are several parties opposed to him, and these united in +obtaining, from the diet, a refusal to pay the Saxon troops +Augustus had brought with him. The king, no doubt, considered that +these could be employed for the conquest of Livonia, and that the +addition of so large a territory to Poland would so add to his +popularity, that he would have no further troubles in his kingdom. + +"Charles the Twelfth, being in ignorance of this secret agreement, +sent an embassy to Russia, to announce his accession to the throne. +The ambassadors were kept a long time waiting for an audience, as +the czar was bringing a war with the Turks to a conclusion, and did +not wish to throw off the mask until he was free to use his whole +force against Sweden. The ambassadors were, at last, received +civilly, but the czar evaded taking the usual oaths of friendship, +and, after long delays, the embassy returned to Sweden, feeling +somewhat disquieted as to the intentions of the czar, but having no +sure knowledge of them. + +"The King of Poland was more successful in disguising his leaning +towards Denmark, sending the warmest assurances to Charles, +requesting him to act as mediator in the quarrel between himself +and the Duke of Brandenburg, and signing a treaty of alliance with +Sweden. But, while Sweden had no idea of the triple alliance that +had been formed against her, the intention of Denmark to make war +was evident enough, for King Christian was gathering a great naval +armament. + +"The Duke of Holstein, becoming much alarmed at these preparations, +hastened on the fortifications of Tonningen, on the Eider, three +leagues from its mouth. The garrison of the place was a weak one, +and a thousand Swedish troops were thrown in to strengthen it. The +King of Denmark complained that this was a breach of the treaty, +but, as his own preparations for war were unmistakable, no one +could blame the Duke of Holstein for taking steps to defend his +territories. + +"As you know, Christian of Denmark died about this time, and was +succeeded by his son Frederick the Fourth. + +"Last August, he commenced the war, by sending a naval squadron to +cover the passage of four regiments into Pomerania. Charles of +Sweden, seeing that Holstein must be crushed by its powerful +neighbour, called upon Holland and the Duke of Lunenburg, who were +with Sweden guarantors of the treaty, to enforce its provisions; +and a joint protest was sent to the King of Denmark, who was +informed that, if he invaded Holstein, they should consider it a +breach of the Treaty of Altena, and treat him as a common enemy. +Frederick replied by sending some troops into the duchy. + +"No active operations took place, until the beginning of this year. +Up to that time, Sweden had not doubted the friendship of the King +of Poland, and Charles, at first, could hardly believe the reports +he received from the governor of Livonia, that the Saxon troops +were approaching the frontier. + +"A few days later, however, came the news that they were advancing +against Riga. The governor prepared for defence, and hastily +mounted cannon on the walls. His powers of resistance, however, +were lessened by the fact that the river Duna was frozen over. +Fleming, who commanded the Saxon troops, arrived before the town, +early in February, with four thousand men. The governor had set +fire to the suburbs on the previous day; and Fleming was surprised +to find that, instead of taking it by surprise, as he had hoped, +the place was in a position to offer a stout resistance. However, +he attacked the fort of Cobrun, on the opposite side of the river, +and carried it by assault. + +"The news was brought to young Charles the Twelfth when he was out +hunting, a sport of which he is passionately fond. By all accounts, +he is an extraordinary young fellow. He is not content with hunting +bears and shooting them, but he and his followers engage them armed +only with forked sticks. With these they attack the bears, pushing +and hustling the great creatures, with the forks of their sticks, +until they are completely exhausted, when they are bound and sent +away. In this hunt Charles took fourteen alive, one of which nearly +killed him before it was captured. He did not break up the hunting +party, but continued his sport to the end, sending off, however, +orders for the concentration of all the troops, in Livonia and +Finland, to act against the Saxons. + +"As soon as the King of Denmark heard of the siege of Riga, he +ordered the Duke of Wurtemberg-Neustadt, his commander-in-chief, to +enter Holstein with his army, sixteen thousand strong. All of that +country was at once overrun, the ducal domains seized, and great +contributions exacted from Schleswig and Holstein. Fleming and the +Saxons, after one severe repulse, forced the garrison of the fort +of Dunamund, commanding the mouth of the Duna, to surrender. +Tonningen is the only fortress that now holds out in Holstein. So +you see, lads, there is every chance of there being brisk fighting, +and I warrant the young King of Sweden will not be backward in the +fray. A man who is fond of engaging with bears, armed with nothing +but a forked stick, is not likely to hang back in the day of +battle. + +"But, at present, we will say no more on the matter. Now that we +have got beyond the shelter of the island, the waves are getting +up, and the vessel is beginning to toss and roll. I see that Sir +Marmaduke has retired to his cabin. I mean to remain here as long +as I can, and I should advise you both to do the same. I have +always heard that it is better to fight with this sickness of the +sea, as long as possible, and that it is easier to do so in fresh +air than in a close cabin." + +The lads quite agreed with this opinion, but were, in spite of +their efforts, presently prostrate. They remained on deck for some +hours, and then crawled to their cabin, where they remained for the +next three days, at the end of which time they came on deck again, +feeling better, but as weak as if they had suffered from a long +illness. + +Mr. Jervoise had been in frequently to see them, having escaped the +malady, from which, as he told them, Sir Marmaduke was suffering to +the full as severely as they were. + +"So you have found your feet again," the captain said, when they +appeared on deck. "You will be all right now." + +"We feel much better," Harry said, "now that the storm is over." + +"Storm! What storm? The weather has been splendid. We cannot wish +for anything better. It has been just as you see it now--a bright +sun, and just enough wind for her to carry whole sail." + +The lads both looked astonished. + +"Then why should we roll and toss about so much?" Harry asked. + +"Roll and toss! Nonsense, lad! There has been a little movement, of +course, as there always must be when there is a brisk wind; but as +for rolling and tossing, you must wait till you see a storm, then +you will begin to have an idea of what the sea is." + +The boys both felt rather crestfallen, for they had flattered +themselves that their sufferings were caused by something quite out +of the ordinary way, and it was mortifying to know that the weather +had been really fine, and there had been nothing even approaching a +storm. + +The rest of the voyage was a pleasant one. They found they had +regained their appetites, and were able to enjoy their meals; still +they were not sorry when they saw the coast of Sweden, and, a few +hours later, entered the port of Gottenburg, where Sir Marmaduke, +for the first time, came on deck--looking a mere shadow of his +former jovial self. + +"Well, lads," he said, "I was glad to hear that you got through +this business quicker than I did. Here we are in Sweden, and here +I, at least, am likely to stay, unless I can pass by land through +Holland, France, and across from Calais, for never again will I +venture upon a long voyage. I have been feeling very ungrateful, +for, over and over again, I wished that you had not rescued me, as +death on Tower Hill would have been nothing to the agonies that I +have been enduring!" + +As soon as the vessel was warped alongside the quay, they landed, +and put up at an hotel, Sir Marmaduke insisting that the ground was +as bad as the sea, as it kept on rising and falling beneath his +feet. Mr. Jervoise agreed to return on board the following day, to +fetch the luggage, which would by that time have been got up from +the hold. + +At the hotel, they met several persons able to speak English, and +from them learnt how matters had been going on since they had last +heard. The town and fortress of Tonningen had fallen, after a +vigorous defence; it had been bombarded for eight days, and had +repulsed one assault, but had been captured at the second attack. +England and Holland had agreed to furnish fleets, and an army of +twelve thousand Swedes were in readiness to march, at once, while +other armies were being formed. The king had, the week before, +reviewed the army gathered at Malmoe; and had, on the previous day, +arrived at Gottenburg, accompanied by the Duke of Holstein. + +Mr. Jervoise went, the same afternoon, to find out some of his +friends who resided at Gottenburg. He was fortunate enough to find +one of them, who was able to inform him that his wife's cousin was +now a major, in one of the newly-raised regiments stationed at +Gottenburg. + +He found him without difficulty. Major Jamieson was delighted at +the coming of his former friend. + +"You are the last person I expected to see here, Jervoise. It is +true that, when we met last, you said that if matters went wrong in +England you should come out here, instead of taking refuge in +France; but, as everything is quiet, I had little hope of seeing +you again, until I paid another visit to Scotland, of which at +present there is but little prospect. Have you grown tired of doing +nothing, and is it a desire to see something of a stirring life +that has brought you over here?" + +Mr. Jervoise related, shortly, the events by which he had been +driven into exile, and expressed his desire to serve in the army of +Sweden, and that his son and young Carstairs should also enter the +army. + +"They are but sixteen yet," he said, "but are stout, active +fellows, and could hold their own in a day's march or in a stout +fight with many men. Of course, if I could obtain commissions for +them, all the better, but if not they are ready to enlist in the +ranks. Roughing it will do them no harm." + +"Their age is no drawback," Major Jamieson said. "There are many no +older, both in the ranks and as officers. Men in Sweden of all ages +and of all ranks are joining, for this unprovoked attack, on the +part of Poland, has raised the national spirit to boiling heat. The +chief difficulty is their and your ignorance of the language. Were +it not for that, I could obtain, from the minister of war, +commissions for you at once." + +He sat thinking for some minutes, in silence. + +"I think I see how it can be managed, Jervoise. I have some twenty +or thirty Scotchmen in my regiment, and I know a colonel who has as +many in his, and these I could manage to get, in exchange for an +equal number of my Swedes. Ships are coming daily from Scotland, +and most of them bring young fellows who have come out to join the +army. + +"You know how the Scots fought, under Gustavus Adolphus, and there +is scarce a glen in Scotland where there are not traditions of +fathers, or grandfathers, who fought in Hepburn's Green Brigade. +Therefore, it is natural that, seeing there is no chance of +military service at home, there should be many young fellows coming +out to join. + +"I can go across this evening to the minister of war, who is a +personal friend of mine, and get him to give you permission to +raise a company of Scotchmen for service. I shall, of course, point +out to him that you will enlist them here. I shall show him the +advantage of these men being gathered together, as their ignorance +of the language makes them, for some time, useless as soldiers if +enrolled in a Swedish regiment. I shall mention that I have twenty +in my own corps, who are at present positively useless, and in fact +a source of great trouble, owing to their understanding nothing +that is said to them, and shall propose that they be at once handed +over to you. As to the exchange, we can manage that quietly between +ourselves. You would have no difficulty with fresh-landed men, as +these will naturally be delighted at joining a company of their own +countrymen." + +"Thank you very heartily, Jamieson. This altogether exceeds my +hopes, but I fear that I know nothing of drilling them." + +"Two of my men are sergeants, and, having been in the army for some +years, speak Swedish well. They will do the drilling at first. The +manoeuvres are not complicated, and, for a pound or two, they will +be glad to teach you all the orders necessary. I don't know how you +are situated as to money, but I can assure you my purse is at your +service." + +"Thank you; I am, in that respect, excellently well provided, as is +my friend Sir Marmaduke. We have both made provision for unexpected +contingencies." + +"Then, if you will call tomorrow after breakfast, I shall probably +have your commission ready. As a matter of course, you will have +the appointment of your own officers, and will only have to send in +their names. Each company is from a hundred and forty to a hundred +and fifty strong, and has a captain, two lieutenants, and two +ensigns." + +Mr. Jervoise's news was, on his return to the inn, received with +delight by the two lads; and Sir Marmaduke said: + +"I wish I could shake off twenty of my years, Jervoise, and join +also. Well, well, I daresay I shall get on comfortably enough. I +know there are a good many English and Scotch Jacobites settled in +the town or neighbourhood, and I shall not be long before I meet +someone I know. + +"As the matter seems settled, I should advise you lads to go down, +the first thing in the morning, to the wharves. There is no saying +when ships may come in. Moreover, it is likely enough that you may +light upon young fellows who have landed within the last few weeks, +and who have been kept so far, by their ignorance of the language, +from enlisting." + +"That is a very good idea," Mr. Jervoise said. "They will be +delighted to hear a friendly voice, and be only too glad to enlist +in a Scottish company. You can say that each man will have a free +outfit given him." + +Accordingly, the next morning early, the two lads went down to the +wharf. Presently they saw three young fellows, who were evidently +Scotch by their dress and caps, talking together. They strolled up +near enough to catch what they were saying. + +"It is hard," one said, "that, now we are here, we can make no one +understand us, and it seems to me we had far better have stayed at +home." + +"We shall find some one who speaks our language presently, Jock," +another said more cheerfully. "The old man, where we lodged last +night, said in his broken tongue, that we had but to go over to +Malmoe, or some such place as that, where there is a big camp, and +walk up to an officer and say we wish to enlist." + +"Oh, that is all very well," the other grumbled; "but, if he did +not understand us, we should be no better off than before." + +"Are you wanting to enlist?" Harry said, going up to them. + +The men gave an exclamation of pleasure, at being addressed in +their own tongue. + +"That we do, sir. If you can put us in the way, we shall be +grateful." + +"That I can do easily," Harry said. "My father is raising a company +of Scotch and Englishmen, for the regiment commanded by Colonel +Jamieson. This will be far better than joining a Swedish company, +where no one will understand your language, and you will not be +able to make out the orders given. My father will give each man who +joins a free outfit." + +"That is the very thing for us, sir. We expected to find Scotch +regiments here, as there were in the old times, and we had hoped to +join them; but whether it is a company or regiment, it makes but +little difference, so that we are with those who speak our tongue." + +"Very well, then. If you come to the Lion Inn, at nine o'clock, you +will see my father there. If you know of any others in the same +mind as yourselves, and willing to join, bring them with you." + +"There are ten or twelve others who came over in the ship with us, +two days since, and I have no doubt they will be fine and glad to +join." + +"Well, see if you can hunt them up, and bring them with you." + +On returning to the inn, they found that Mr. Jervoise had already +received his commission as captain, and, by ten o'clock, fifteen +young Scotchmen had been sworn in. All of them had brought +broadswords and dirks, and Captain Jervoise at once set to work +buying, at various shops, iron head pieces, muskets, and other +accoutrements. + +During the next three days ten other English and Scotchmen had +joined, and then a ship came in, from which they gathered another +four-and-twenty recruits. Arms had already been purchased for them, +and, on the following day, Captain Jervoise marched off to Malmoe +with his forty-nine recruits. Harry accompanied them, Charlie being +left behind, with his father, to gather another fifty men as the +ships arrived. + +A week later this number was obtained, and Charlie started with +them for the camp, Sir Marmaduke accompanying them on horseback, in +order to aid Charlie in maintaining order among his recruits. He +had already fixed upon a small house, just outside the town, and, +having met two or three old friends, who had been obliged to leave +England at William's accession, he already began to feel at home. + +"Don't you fidget about me, Charlie," he said. "Ferrers tells me +that there are at least a score of Jacobites here, and that they +form quite a society among themselves. Living is very cheap, and he +will introduce me to a man of business, who will see that my money +is well invested." + + + +Chapter 5: Narva. + + +For the next fortnight, drilling went on from morning till night, +the officers receiving instructions privately from the sergeants, +and further learning the words of command by standing by while the +men were being drilled. At the end of that time, both officers and +men were sufficiently instructed to carry out the simple movements +which were, alone, in use in those days. + +It was not, however, until two months later that they were called +upon to act. The English and Dutch fleets had arrived, and effected +a junction with that of Sweden, and the Danish fleet had shut +themselves up in the port of Copenhagen, which was closely +blockaded. A large army had crossed to Zeeland, and repulsed the +Danes, who had endeavoured to prevent their landing, and had then +marched up to within sight of the walls of Copenhagen, which they +were preparing to besiege; when the King of Denmark, alarmed at +this unexpected result of his aggression on Holstein, conceded +every point demanded, and peace was signed. + +The negotiations were carried on in Holland, and the Swedes were +extremely angry, when they found that they were baulked of their +expected vengeance on their troublesome neighbours. The peace, +however, left Charles the Twelfth at liberty to turn his attention +to his other foes, and to hurry to the assistance of Riga, which +was beleaguered by the Saxons and Poles; and of Narva, against +which city the Russians had made several unsuccessful assaults. + +Without losing an hour, the king crossed to Malmoe. The troops +there were ordered to embark, immediately, in the vessels in the +harbour. They then sailed to Revel, where the Swedish commander, +Welling, had retired from the neighbourhood of Riga, his force +being too small to meet the enemy in the open field. + +No sooner had the troops landed than the king reviewed them, and +General Welling was ordered, at once, to march so as to place +himself between the enemy and Wesenberg, where a large amount of +provisions and stores for the use of the army had been collected. + +The two lieutenants, in the company of Captain Jervoise, were young +Scotchmen of good family, who had three months before come over and +obtained commissions, and both had, at the colonel's request, been +transferred to his regiment, and promoted to the rank of +lieutenants. Captain Jervoise and his four officers messed +together, and were a very cheerful party; indeed, their commander, +to the surprise both of his son and Charlie, had quite shaken off +his quiet and somewhat gloomy manner, and seemed to have become +quite another man, in the active and bracing life in which he was +now embarked. Cunningham and Forbes were both active young men, +full of life and energy, while the boys thoroughly enjoyed roughing +it, and the excitement and animation of their daily work. + +Sometimes they slept in the open air, sometimes on the floor of a +cottage. Their meals were rough but plentiful. The king's orders +against plundering were very severe, and, even when in Denmark, the +country people, having nothing to complain of, had brought in +supplies regularly. Here in Linovia they were in Swedish dominions, +but there was little to be purchased, for the peasantry had been +brought to ruin by the foraging parties of the Russians and Poles. + +There was some disappointment, that the enemy had fallen back at +the approach of Welling's force, but all felt sure that it would +not be long before they met them, for the king would assuredly lose +no time in advancing against them, as soon as his army could be +brought over. They were not, however, to wait for the arrival of +the main force, although the cavalry only took part in the first +affair. General Welling heard that a force of three thousand +Circassians had taken up their quarters in a village, some fifteen +miles away, and sent six hundred horse, under Majors Patkul and +Tisenbausen, to surprise them. They were, at first, successful and, +attacking the Circassians, set fire to the village, and were +engaged in slaughtering the defenders, when twenty-one squadrons of +Russian cavalry came up and fell upon them, attacking them on all +sides, and posting themselves so as to cut off their retreat. The +Swedes, however, gathered in a body, and charged the Russians so +furiously that they cut a way through their ranks, losing, however, +many of their men, while Major Patkul and another officer were made +prisoners. + +The king was at Revel when this engagement took place, and, +although but few of the troops had arrived, he was too impatient +for action to wait until the coming of the fleet. He therefore +marched to Wesenberg, with his bodyguard and a few troops from +Revel. He at once despatched a thousand men, to cover the frontier, +and issued orders for the rest of the troops to leave the whole of +their baggage behind them, to take three days' provision in their +haversacks, and to prepare to march the next morning. + +Major Jamieson came into the cottage, occupied by Captain Jervoise +and his officers, late in the evening. They had a blazing fire, for +it was now the middle of November, and the nights were very sharp. + +"Well, Jervoise, what do you think of the orders?" he asked, as he +seated himself on a log that had been brought in for the fire. + +"I have not thought much about them, except that we are going to do +a long and quick march somewhere." + +"And where is that somewhere, do you think?" + +"That, I have not the slightest idea." + +"You would not say that it was to Narva?" + +"I certainly should not, considering that we have but five thousand +infantry, and three thousand cavalry, and of these a large number +have been so weakened, by fever, as to be unfit for fighting; while +at Narva, report says there are eighty thousand Russians, in a +strongly intrenched camp." + +"Well, that is where we are going, Jervoise, nevertheless. At +least, that is what the colonel has told me." + +"He must have been surely jesting, major. We may be going to push +forward in that direction, and occupy some strong position until +the army comes up, but it would be the height of madness to attack +an enemy, in a strong position, and just tenfold our force." + +"Well, we shall see," Jamieson said coolly. "It is certain that +Narva cannot hold out much longer, and I know that the king has set +his heart on relieving it; but it does seem somewhat too dangerous +an enterprise to attack the Russians. At any rate, that is the +direction in which we are going, tomorrow. It is a good seventy +miles distant, and, as they say that the whole country has been +devastated, and the villagers have all fled, it is evident that +when the three days' bread and meat we carry are exhausted we shall +have to get some food, out of the Russian camp, if nowhere else." + +Captain Jervoise laughed, as did the others. + +"We can live for a short time on the horses, Jamieson, if we are +hard pushed for it, though most of them are little beyond skin and +bone." + +"That is true. The cavalry are certainly scarcely fit for service. +Welling's troops have had a very hard time of it, and we may thank +our stars, though we did not think so at the time, that we were +kept nearly three months at Malmoe, instead of being here with +Welling." + +"But do you seriously think, major, that the king means to attack +the Russians?" Cunningham asked. + +"My own idea is that he does, Cunningham. I cannot see what else +there is for us to do. At any rate, if he does, you may be sure +that we shall make a tough fight for it. The cavalry showed, the +other day, that they can stand up against many times their number +of the Russians, and if they can do it, I fancy we can. There is +one thing, the very audacity of such an attempt is in its favour." + +"Well, we will all do our best, you may be sure; but since +Thermopylae, I doubt if men have fought against longer odds." + +The next morning the men fell in. Captain Jervoise, who, like all +of his rank, was mounted, took his place at the head of his +company, and the little army marched away from Wesenberg. It was a +dreary march to Purts, but the sight of the ruined villages, and +devastated fields, aroused a feeling of indignation and fury among +the troops, and a fierce longing to attack men who had so +ruthlessly spread ruin through a fertile country. Orders were +issued, that evening, that the men were to husband their provisions +as much as possible, and the order was more strictly obeyed than +such orders usually are, for the men saw, for themselves, that +there was no possibility of obtaining fresh supplies in the wasted +country, and were well aware that there existed no train of waggons +and horses capable of bringing up stores from Wesenberg. + +There were a few aged men and women remaining at Purts, and from +these they learned that their next day's march would take them to a +very difficult pass, which was held by six hundred of the Russian +cavalry, together with a force of infantry and some guns. It was +the intention of the king to encamp that evening near the pass, +and, when within three or four miles of it, General Meidel, who had +with him the quartermaster of the army, and four hundred cavalry, +rode on ahead to choose a site for the camp. He presently saw a +large body of Russian foragers in front of him, and sent back to +the king for permission to attack them. Charles ordered the army to +continue its march, and, hurrying forward with some of his +officers, joined General Meidel and charged the foragers, killing +many, taking others prisoners, and putting the rest to flight. He +followed close upon their heels, and rode right up to the mouth of +the pass, in spite of the heavy fire of artillery and musketry +opened by the Russians. + +He at once determined to take advantage of the alarm produced by +the defeat of the Russian cavalry, and, although darkness was now +drawing on, brought up some of his infantry and artillery, and +attacked with such vigour that the Russians fled, after offering a +very feeble resistance. + +A battalion of foot were ordered to occupy the pass, while the rest +of the army piled their arms, and lay down where they stood. In the +morning, they were astonished at the strength of the position that +had been gained so easily. The defile was deep and narrow, a rapid +stream ran through it, and the ground was soft and marshy. A few +determined men should have been able to bar the advance of an army. + +The troops were in high spirits at the result of this, their first +action against the enemy, and were the more pleased that they +found, in the Russian camp, sufficient provisions to replace those +they had used. After a hearty meal, they again advanced at a brisk +march. The defile was captured on the evening of the 17th November, +and, early in the morning of the 20th, the army reached Lagena, a +league and a half from Narva, and, ordering the troops to follow, +the king rode forward to reconnoitre the Russian position. + +The troops were weary with their long marches, and many of those +who had, but recently, recovered from fever were scarce able to +drag themselves along, while great numbers were unfit to take part +in a battle, until after two or three days of rest. The officers of +the Malmoe Regiment, for it had taken its name from the camp where +it had been formed, were gathered in a group at its head, +discussing the situation. Most of the officers were of opinion +that, to attack at once, with men and horses worn out with fatigue, +was to ensure destruction; but there were others who thought that, +in face of so great an army as that gathered in front of them, the +only hope was in an immediate attack. Major Jamieson was one of +these. + +"The king is right," he said. "If the Russian army have time to +form, and to advance against us in order of battle, we must be +annihilated. At present, their camp is an extensive one, for, as I +hear, it extends in a great semi-circle four or five miles long, +with the ends resting on the river. They cannot believe that we +intend to attack them, and, if we go straight at them, we may +possibly gain a footing in their intrenchments, before the whole +army can gather to aid those at the point of attack. It will be +almost a surprise, and I think the king is right to attempt it, for +it is only by a quick and sudden stroke that we can gain a success +over so great an army." + +The halt was but a short one and, as soon as the regiments had +arrived at the positions assigned to them, they advanced. As soon +as they appeared, on a rise of ground facing the intrenchments, the +enemy opened fire. The king had already reconnoitred a portion of +their position, exposing himself recklessly to their shot, and, as +soon as the troops came up, he issued orders for them to prepare to +attack in two columns. First, however, several of the regiments +were ordered to fall out, and to cut down bushes and make fascines, +to enable the troops to cross the ditches. + +The intrenchment was a formidable one, being provided with parapets +armed with chevaux de frise, and flanked by strong exterior works, +while several batteries had been placed to sweep the ground across +which an enemy must advance. + +The right column, under General Welling, was to march to a point +nearly in the centre of the great semicircle; while the left, under +General Rhenschild, was to assault a point about halfway between +the centre and the river, where one of the largest and most +powerful of the enemy's batteries was placed. The king himself was +with this wing, with his bodyguard, and he hoped that here he might +meet the czar commanding in person. The Russian emperor had, +however, left the camp that morning, to fetch up forty thousand men +who were advancing from Plescow, and the command of the army had +been assumed by the Duke of Croy. + +The Swedish left wing had with it a battery of twenty-one guns, +while sixteen guns covered the attack on the right. It was two +o'clock in the afternoon when two guns gave the signal for the +advance. Hitherto the weather had been fine, but it had become +gradually overcast, and, just as the signal was given, a tremendous +storm of snow and hail began. It set right in the face of the +Russians, and concealed from them the movement of the Swedes, for +which, indeed, they were wholly unprepared, believing that the +small force they saw was but the advance guard of a great Swedish +army, and that no attack need be expected until the main body +arrived. The consequence was, the Swedes were almost at the edge of +the ditch before they were perceived, and both columns attacked +with such vigour and courage that, in a quarter of an hour, they +had gained a footing in the intrenchments, and had so filled up the +ditch with the fascines that the cavalry were able to follow them. + +The Russians were so astounded at this sudden attack that they lost +heart altogether. The Swedish left, as soon as it entered the +intrenchments, swept along them, the Russians abandoning their guns +and batteries, and making for their bridge across the river. +Unfortunately for them, their huts were built close behind the +works, and in rear was another intrenchment, designed to repel +assaults from the town; and the terrified crowd, unable to make +their way rapidly along, over ground encumbered by their huts, +crossed the interior intrenchments, thinking to make their way +faster through the fields to the bridge. + +The Swedish king, however, placed himself at the head of his +bodyguard, and, followed by the rest of his horse, charged right +upon them, cutting down great numbers, and driving the rest before +them towards the river, while the infantry kept up a heavy fire +upon the fugitives in the intrenchments. + +The panic had spread quickly, and the Russian troops nearest to the +bridge were already pouring over, when the mass of the fugitives +arrived. These pressed upon the bridge in such numbers that it +speedily gave way, cutting off the retreat of their comrades +behind. Ignorant of the result, the terrified crowd pushed on, +pressing those in front of them into the river, and the number of +drowned was no less than that of those who fell beneath the +bullets, pikes, and sabres of the Swedes. + +In their despair the Russians, rallied by some of their generals, +now attempted to defend themselves, and, by occupying some houses +and barracks, and barricading the passages between these with +overturned waggons, they fought bravely, and repulsed, for some +time, every effort of the Swedes. + +Darkness was now falling, and the king hastened to the spot where +the battle was fiercely raging. As he ran towards it, he fell into +a morass, from which he was rescued with some difficulty, leaving +his sword and one boot behind him. However, he at once pushed on, +and placed himself at the head of the infantry engaged in the +assault. But even his presence and example did not avail. The +Russians maintained their position with desperate courage, and, +when it became quite dark, the assault ceased. + +The right column had met with equal success. It had penetrated the +intrenchments, defeated all the Russians who opposed it, and now +moved to assist the left wing. + +The king, however, seeing that the Russian defences could not be +carried, by a direct assault, without great loss, gathered the army +in the space between the town and the Russian intrenchments, and +placed them in a position to repel an attack, should the Russians +take the offensive; giving orders that, at daylight, the hill on +which the enemy had their principal battery should be assaulted. +The guns here commanded all the intrenchments, and the capture of +that position would render it impossible for the Russians to +continue their defence, or for the now separated wings of the army +to combine. + +The officers in command of the Russian right wing, finding +themselves unable to cross the river on their broken bridge, and +surrounded by the Swedes, sent in to surrender in the course of the +evening, and two battalions of the Swedish Guards took possession +of the post that had been so gallantly defended. The king granted +them permission to retire with their arms, the colours and +standards being given up, and the superior officers being retained +as prisoners of war. + +The broken bridge was repaired and, early the next morning, the +Russian troops passed over. Their left wing was, after the +surrender of their right, in a hopeless position, for on that side +no bridge had been thrown over the river, and their retreat was +wholly cut off. On learning, before daybreak, that the right wing +had surrendered, they too sent in to ask for terms. The king +granted them freedom to return to their country, but without their +standards or arms. They filed off before him, officers and soldiers +bareheaded, and passed over the bridge, their numbers being so +great that all had not crossed until next morning. + +The Russians lost over 18,000 men killed or drowned, a hundred and +forty-five cannon, and twenty-eight mortars, all of which were new, +besides vast quantities of military stores and provisions. A +hundred and fifty-one colours, and twenty standards, and the +greater proportion of their muskets, together with the military +chest, the Duke of Croy, their commander-in-chief, and the whole of +their generals, colonels, majors, and captains, fell into the hands +of the Swedes, as prisoners of war. The total loss in killed and +wounded of the Swedes was under two thousand, the chief loss being +due to the desperate resistance of the Russians, after the battle +was irretrievably lost. It may be doubted whether so complete and +surprising a victory, between armies so disproportionate in force, +was ever before gained. + +The king had exposed himself, throughout the day, most recklessly, +and was everywhere in the thick of the Russian bullets, and yet he +escaped without so much as a scratch. The Malmoe Regiment had been +with the left wing, but suffered comparatively little loss, as they +were one of the last to enter the intrenchments, and it was only +when darkness was closing in that they were called up to take a +part in the attack on the position held by the Russians. + +"Never was the saying, that fortune favours the brave, more +signally verified, Jervoise," Major Jamieson said, as he sat down +to a rough breakfast with the officers of the Scottish company, on +the morning after the Russian surrender. + +"That's true enough, but Russians are brave, too, as they showed at +the end of the day. I fancy you have a scotch proverb to the effect +that 'fou folk come to no harm.' I think that is more applicable in +the present case." + +The major laughed. + +"The fou folk relates rather to drunkenness than madness, Jervoise. +But, of course, it would do for both. I own that the whole +enterprise did seem, to me, to be absolute madness, but the result +has justified it. That sudden snowstorm was the real cause of our +victory, and, had it not been for that, I still think that we could +not have succeeded. The Russian cannon certainly continued to fire, +but it was wholly at random, and they were taken by surprise when +we suddenly appeared at the side of the ditch, while we were across +before they could gather any force sufficient to defend it. + +"After that, panic did the rest. The commander in chief fell early +into our hands. There was no one to give orders, no one to rally +them, and I expect the Russian soldiers gave us credit for having +brought on that storm, to cover our assault, by the aid of malign +spirits. + +"Well, lads, and how did you feel when the shots were whistling +about?" + +"I did not like it at all, major," Charlie said. "It seemed such a +strange thing, marching along in the thick of that snowstorm, +hearing the rush of cannonballs overhead, and the boom of guns, and +yet be unable to see anything but the rear files of the company in +front." + +"It was an uncanny feeling, Charlie. I felt it myself, and was very +grateful that we were hidden from the enemy, who, of course, were +blazing away in the direction in which they had last seen us. We +only lost three killed and twelve wounded, altogether, and I think +those were, for the most part, hit by random shots. + +"Well, if this is the way the king means to carry on war, we shall +have enough of it before we are done." + +The sick and wounded were sent into the town, the first thing, but +it was not until the Russians had all crossed the river that the +king, himself, rode triumphantly into the place, surrounded by his +staff, amid the wild enthusiasm of the inhabitants, whom his +victory had saved from ruin and massacre. + +The town, although strongly fortified, was not a large one, and its +houses were so dilapidated, from the effects of the Russian +bombardment, that but few of the troops could be accommodated +there. The rest were quartered in the Russian huts. On the 26th, a +solemn service of thanksgiving for the victory was celebrated, with +a salute from all the cannon of the town and camp, and by salvos of +musketry from the troops. + +The question of provisions was the most important now. It was true +that large quantities had been captured in the Russian camp, but, +beyond a magazine of corn, abandoned by the fugitives at Tama and +brought in, there was no prospect of replenishing the store when +exhausted, for the whole country, for a great distance round, had +been completely devastated by the Russians. These had not retreated +far, having been rallied by the czar at Plescow, and quartered in +the towns of the frontier of Livonia, whence they made incursions +into such districts as had not been previously wasted. + +"This is dull work," Archie Cunningham said, one day. "The sooner +we are busy again, the better. There is nothing to do, and very +little to eat. The cold is bitter, and fuel scarce. One wants +something to warm one's blood." + +"You are not likely to have anything of that kind, for some months +to come," Major Jamieson replied dryly. "You don't suppose we are +going to have a battle of Narva once a week, do you? No doubt there +will be a few skirmishes, and outpost encounters, but beyond that +there will be little doing until next spring. You can make up your +mind, for at least five months, of the worst side of a soldier's +life--dull quarters, and probably bad ones, scanty food, cold, and +disease." + +"Not a very bright lookout, major," Forbes laughed. "I hope it +won't be as bad as that." + +"Then I advise you to give up hoping, and to make up your mind to +realities, Forbes. There is a good deal of illness in the camp now, +and there will be more and more as the time goes on. There is +nothing like inaction to tell upon the health of troops. However, +we certainly shall not stay here. It would be impossible to victual +the army, and I expect that, before long, we shall march away and +take up quarters for the winter. + +"As to operations on a great scale, they are out of the question. +After the thrashing they have had, the Russians will be months +before they are in a condition to take the offensive again; while +we are equally unable to move because, in the first place, we are +not strong enough to do so, and in the second we have no baggage +train to carry provisions with us, and no provisions to carry if we +had it." + +On the 13th of December, the king quitted Narva with the army, and +on the 19th arrived at Lais, an old castle six miles from Derpt, +and here established his headquarters. A few of the troops were +stationed in villages, but the greater part in rough huts in the +neighbourhood, and along the frontier. + +It was not long before Major Jamieson's predictions were verified. +A low fever, occasioned by the fatiguing marches and the hardships +they had endured, added to the misery from the cold and wet that +penetrated the wretched huts, spread rapidly through the army. Many +died, and great numbers were absolutely prostrated. + +The king was indefatigable in his efforts to keep up the spirits of +the troops. He constantly rode about from camp to camp, entering +the huts, chatting cheerfully with the soldiers, and encouraging +them by kind words and assurances that, when the spring came, they +would soon gain strength again. + +At Narva the four young officers had all purchased horses. Most of +the Swedish officers were mounted; and the king encouraged this, +as, on occasion, he could thereby collect at once a body of mounted +men ready for any enterprise; but their own colonel preferred that, +on the march, the lieutenants and ensigns should be on foot with +their men, in order to set them an example of cheerful endurance. +Those who wished it, however, were permitted to have horses, which +were, on such occasions, led in the rear of the regiment. + +Captain Jervoise had approved of the purchase of the horses, which +were got very cheaply, as great numbers had been captured. + +"If we can get over the difficulty of the forage," he said, "you +will find them very useful for preserving your health during the +winter. A ride will set your blood in motion, and, wherever we are +quartered, there are sure to be camps within riding distance. The +king approves of officers taking part in dashing expeditions, so +you may be able to take a share in affairs that will break the +monotony of camp life." + +They found great benefit from being able to ride about. Forage was +indeed very scarce. They had no means of spending their pay on +luxuries of any kind, their only outlay being in the purchase of +black bread, and an occasional load of forage from the peasants. +Their regiment was with the force under the command of Colonel +Schlippenbach, which was not very far from Marienburg, a place open +to the incursions of the Russians. Baron Spens was at Signiz, and +Colonel Alvedyhl at Rounenberg, and to both these places they +occasionally paid a visit. + +In order to keep the company in health, Captain Jervoise encouraged +the men to get up games, in which the four young officers took +part. Sometimes it was a snowball match in the open; at other times +a snow fort was built, garrisoned, and attacked. Occasionally there +were matches at hockey, while putting the stone, throwing the +caber, running and wrestling matches, were all tried in turn; and +the company suffered comparatively little from the illness which +rendered so large a proportion of the Swedish army inefficient. + +Colonel Schlippenbach was an energetic officer, and had, several +times, ridden past when the men were engaged in these exercises. He +expressed to Captain Jervoise his approval of the manner in which +he kept his men in strength and vigour. + +"I shall not forget it," he said, one day, "and if there is service +to be done, I see that I can depend upon your company to do it." + +In January, he took a party of horse, and reconnoitred along the +River Aa, to observe the motions of the Saxons on the other side; +and, hearing that a party of them had entered Marienburg, he +determined to take possession of that place, as, were they to +fortify it, they would be able greatly to harass the Swedes. +Sending word to the king of his intention, and asking for an +approval of his plan of fortifying the town, he took three +companies of infantry and four hundred horse, made a rapid march to +Marienburg, and occupied it without opposition. + +He had not forgotten his promise, and the company of Captain +Jervoise was one of those selected for the work. Its officers were +delighted at the prospect of a change, and, when the party started, +Captain Jervoise was proud of the show made by his men, whose +active and vigorous condition contrasted strongly with the debility +and feebleness evident, so generally, among the Swedish soldiers. + +As soon as Marienburg was entered, the men were set to work, to +raise and strengthen the rampart and to erect bastions; and they +were aided, a few days later, by a reinforcement of two hundred +infantry, sent by the king, with some cannon, from the garrison of +Derpt. As the place was surrounded by a morass, it was, ere long, +put into a position to offer a formidable defence against any force +that the Russians or Saxons might bring against it. + +The Swedes engaged on the work gained strength rapidly, and, by the +time the fortifications were finished, they had completely shaken +off the effects of the fever. + + + +Chapter 6: A Prisoner. + + +A fortnight after the fortifications of Marienburg were completed, +Colonel Schlippenbach sent off Lieutenant Colonel Brandt, with four +hundred horse, to capture a magazine at Seffwegen, to which the +Saxons had forced the inhabitants of the country round to bring in +their corn, intending later to convey it to the headquarters of +their army. The expedition was completely successful. The Saxon +guard were overpowered, and a thousand tons of corn were brought, +in triumph, into Marienburg. Some of it was sent on to the army, +abundance being retained for the use of the town and garrison, in +case of siege. + +It was now resolved to surprise and burn Pitschur, a town on the +frontier from which the enemy constantly made incursions. It was +held by a strong body of Russians. + +Baron Spens was in command of the expedition. He had with him both +the regiments of Horse Guards. Much excitement was caused, in +Marienburg, by the issue of an order that the cavalry, and a +portion of the infantry, were to be ready to march at daylight; and +by the arrival of a large number of peasants, brought in by small +parties of the cavalry. Many were the surmises as to the operation +to be undertaken, its object being kept a strict secret. + +Captain Jervoise's company was one of those in orders, and paraded +at daybreak, and, after a march of some distance, the force joined +that of Baron Spens. The troops were halted in a wood, and ordered +to light fires to cook food, and to prepare for a halt of some +hours. Great fires were soon blazing and, after eating their meal, +most of the troops wrapped themselves in the blankets that they +carried, in addition to their greatcoats, and lay down by the +fires. + +They slept until midnight, and were then called to arms again. They +marched all night, and at daybreak the next morning, the 13th of +February, were near Pitschur, and at once attacked the Russian camp +outside the town. Taken completely by surprise, the Russians fought +feebly, and more than five hundred were killed before they entered +the town, hotly pursued by the Swedes. Shutting themselves up in +the houses, and barricading the doors and windows, they defended +themselves desperately, refusing all offers of surrender. + +The Livonian peasants were, however, at work, and set fire to the +town in many places. The flames spread rapidly. Great stores of +hides and leather, and a huge magazine filled with hemp, added to +the fury of the conflagration, and the whole town was burned to the +ground; numbers of the Russians preferring death by fire, in the +houses, to coming out and surrendering themselves. + +Many of the fugitives had succeeded in reaching a strong position +on the hill commanding the town. This consisted of a convent, +surrounded by strong walls mounted with cannon, which played upon +the town while the fight there was going on. As Baron Spens had no +guns with him, he was unable to follow up his advantage by taking +this position, and he therefore gave orders to the force to retire, +the peasants being loaded with booty that they had gathered before +the fire spread. + +The loss of the Swedes was thirty killed and sixty wounded, this +being a small amount of loss compared with what they had inflicted +upon the enemy. + +"I call that a horrible business, Captain Jervoise," Charlie said, +when the troops had returned to Marienburg. "There was no real +fighting in it." + +"It was a surprise, Charlie. But they fought desperately after they +gained the town." + +"Yes, but we did nothing there beyond firing away at the windows. +Of course, I had my sword in my hand; but it might as well have +been in its sheath, for I never struck a blow, and I think it was +the same with most of our men. One could not cut down those poor +wretches, who were scarce awake enough to use their arms. I was +glad you held our company in rear of the others." + +"Yes; I asked the colonel before attacking to put us in reserve, in +case the enemy should rally. I did it on purpose, for I knew that +our men, not having, like the Swedes, any personal animosity +against the Russians, would not like the work. If it had come to +storming the convent, I would have volunteered to lead the assault. +At any rate, I am glad that, although a few of the men are wounded, +no lives are lost in our company." + +Harry cordially agreed with his friend. "I like an expedition, +Charlie, if there is fighting to be done; but I don't want to have +anything more to do with surprises. However, the cavalry had a good +deal more to do with it than we had; but, as you say, it was a +ghastly business. The only comfort is they began it, and have been +robbing the peasants and destroying their homes for months." + +Many small expeditions were sent out with equally favourable +results; but Captain Jervoise's company took no part in these +excursions. + +Charles the Twelfth was passionately fond of hunting and, in spite +of his many occupations, found time occasionally to spend a day or +two in the chase. A few days after the attack upon Pitschur, he +came to Marienburg to learn all particulars of the Russian position +from Colonel Schlippenbach, as he intended, in the spring, to +attack the triangle formed by three fortresses, in order to drive +the Russians farther back from the frontier. + +"I hear that there are many wolves and bears in the forest, five +leagues to the north. I want a party of about fifty footmen to +drive the game, and as many horse, in case we come across one of +the parties of Russians. I want some hearty, active men for the +march. I will send the foot on this afternoon, and ride with the +horse so as to get there by daybreak. Which is your best company of +infantry?" + +"My best company is one composed chiefly of Scotchmen, though there +are some English among them. It belongs to the Malmoe Regiment, and +is commanded by Captain Jervoise, an Englishman. I do not say that +they are braver than our Swedes; they have not been tested in any +desperate service; but they are healthier and more hardy, for their +officers, since the battle of Narva, have kept them engaged in +sports of all kinds--mimic battles, foot races, and other friendly +contests. I have marked them at it several times, and wondered +sometimes at the rough play. But it has had its effect. While the +rest of Suborn's regiment suffered as much from fever as the other +troops, scarce a man in this company was sick, and they have, all +the winter, been fit for arduous service at any moment." + +"That is good indeed, and I will remember it, and will see that, +another winter, similar games are carried on throughout the army. +Let the company be paraded at once. I will, myself, inspect them." + +The company's call was sounded, and, surprised at a summons just as +they were cooking their dinners, the troops fell in, in front of +their quarters, and the officers took their places in front of +them, and waited for orders. + +"I wonder what is up now," Nigel Forbes said to Harry. "You have +not heard anything, from your father, of our being wanted, have +you?" + +"No; he was just as much surprised as I was, when a sergeant ran up +with Schlippenbach's order that the company were to fall in." + +Five minutes after they had formed up, three officers were seen +approaching on foot. + +"It is the colonel himself," Forbes muttered, as Captain Jervoise +gave the word to the men to stand to attention. + +A minute later, Captain Jervoise gave the order for the salute, and +Harry saw that the tall young officer, walking with the colonel, +was the king. Without speaking a word, Charles walked up and down +the line, narrowly inspecting the men, then he returned to the +front. + +"A fine set of fellows, Schlippenbach. I wish that, like my +grandfather, I had some fifteen thousand of such troops under my +orders. Present the captain to me." + +The officers were called up, and Captain Jervoise was presented. + +"Your company does you great credit, Captain Jervoise," the king +said. "I would that all my troops looked in as good health and +condition. Colonel Schlippenbach tells me that you have kept your +men in good health, all through the winter, by means of sports and +games. It is a good plan. I will try to get all my officers to +adopt it another winter. Do the men join in them willingly?" + +Captain Jervoise and his officers had all, during the nine months +that had passed since they landed in Sweden, done their best to +acquire the language, and could now speak and understand it +thoroughly. + +"They like it, your majesty. Our people are fond of games of this +kind. My four officers take part in them with the men." + +The king nodded. + +"That is as it should be. It must create a good feeling on both +sides. Present your officers to me, Captain Jervoise." + +This was done, and the king spoke a few words to each. Charlie had +often seen the king at a distance, but never before so close as to +be able to notice his face particularly. He was a tall young +fellow, thin and bony. His face was long, and his forehead +singularly high and somewhat projecting. This was the most +noticeable feature of his face. His eyes were quick and keen, his +face clean-shaven, and, had it not been for the forehead and eyes, +would have attracted no attention. His movements were quick and +energetic, and, after speaking to the officers, he strode a step or +two forward and, raising his voice, said: + +"I am pleased with you, men. Your appearance does credit to +yourselves and your officers. Scottish troops did grand service +under my grandfather, Gustavus Adolphus, and I would that I had +twenty battalions of such soldiers with me. I am going hunting +tomorrow, and I asked Colonel Schlippenbach for half a company of +men who could stand cold and fatigue. He told me that I could not +do better than take them from among this company, and I see that he +could not have made a better choice. But I will not separate you, +and will therefore take you all. You will march in an hour, and I +will see that there is a good supper ready for you, at the end of +your journey." + +Colonel Schlippenbach gave Captain Jervoise directions as to the +road they were to follow, and the village, at the edge of the +forest, where they were to halt for the night. He then walked away +with the king. Highly pleased with the praise Charles had given +them, the company fell out. + +"Get your dinners as soon as you can, men," Captain Jervoise said. +"The king gave us an hour. We must be in readiness to march by that +time." + +On arriving at the village, which consisted of a few small houses +only, they found two waggons awaiting them, one with tents and the +other with a plentiful supply of provisions, and a barrel of wine. +The tents were erected, and then the men went into the forest, and +soon returned with large quantities of wood, and great fires were +speedily lighted. Meat was cut up and roasted over them, and, +regarding the expedition as a holiday, the men sat down to their +supper in high spirits. + +After it was eaten there were songs round the fires, and, at nine +o'clock, all turned into their tents, as it was known that the king +would arrive at daylight. Sentries were posted, for there was never +any saying when marauding parties of Russians, who were constantly +on the move, might come along. + +Half an hour before daybreak, the men were aroused. Tents were +struck and packed in the waggon, and the men then fell in, and +remained until the king, with three or four of his officers and +fifty cavalry, rode up. Fresh wood had been thrown on the fires, +and some of the men told off as cooks. + +"That looks cheerful for hungry men," the king said, as he leaped +from his horse. + +"I did not know whether your majesty would wish to breakfast at +once," Captain Jervoise said; "but I thought it well to be +prepared." + +"We will breakfast by all means. We are all sharp set already. Have +your own men had food yet?" + +"No, sir. I thought perhaps they would carry it with them." + +"No, no. Let them all have a hearty meal before they move, then +they can hold on as long as may be necessary." + +The company fell out again, and, in a quarter of an hour, they and +the troopers breakfasted. A joint of meat was placed, for the use +of the king and the officers who had come with him, and Captain +Jervoise and those with him prepared to take their meal a short +distance away, but Charles said: + +"Bring that joint here, Captain Jervoise, and we will all take +breakfast together. We are all hunters and comrades." + +In a short time, they were all seated round a fire, with their meat +on wooden platters on their knees, and with mugs of wine beside +them; Captain Jervoise, by the king's orders, taking his seat +beside him. During the meal, he asked him many questions as to his +reasons for leaving England, and taking service with him. + +"So you have meddled in politics, eh?" the king laughed, when he +heard a brief account of Captain Jervoise's reason for leaving +home. "Your quarrels, in England and Scotland, have added many a +thousand good soldiers to the armies of France and Sweden, and, I +may say, of every country in Europe. I believe there are some of +your compatriots, or at any rate Scotchmen, in the czar's camp. I +suppose that, at William's death, these troubles will cease." + +"I do not know, sir. Anne was James' favourite daughter, and it may +be she will resign in favour of her brother, the lawful king. If +she does so, there is an end of trouble; but, should she mount the +throne, she would be a usurper, as Mary was up to her death in '94. +As Anne has been on good terms with William, since her sister's +death, I fear she will act as unnatural a part as Mary did, and, in +that case, assuredly we shall not recognize her as our queen." + +"You have heard the news, I suppose, of the action of the +parliament last month?" + +"No, sir, we have heard nothing for some weeks of what is doing in +England." + +"They have been making an Act of Settlement of the succession. Anne +is to succeed William, and, as she has no children by George of +Denmark, the succession is to pass from her to the Elector of +Hanover, in right of his wife Sophia, as the rest of the children +of the Elector of the Palatinate have abjured Protestantism, and +are therefore excluded. How will that meet the views of the English +and Scotch Jacobites?" + +"It is some distance to look forward to, sire. If Anne comes to the +throne at William's death, it will, I think, postpone our hopes, +for Anne is a Stuart, and is a favourite with the nation, in spite +of her undutiful conduct to her father. Still, it will be felt that +for Stuart to fight against Stuart, brother against sister, would +be contrary to nature. Foreigners are always unpopular, and, as +against William, every Jacobite is ready to take up arms. But I +think that nothing will be done during Anne's reign. The Elector of +Hanover would be as unpopular, among Englishmen in general, as is +William of Orange, and, should he come to the throne, there will +assuredly ere long be a rising to bring back the Stuarts." + +Charles shook his head. + +"I don't want to ruffle your spirit of loyalty to the Stuarts, +Captain Jervoise, but they have showed themselves weak monarchs for +a great country. They want fibre. William of Orange may be, as you +call him, a foreigner and a usurper, but England has greater weight +in the councils of Europe, in his hands, than it has had since the +death of Elizabeth." + +This was rather a sore point with Captain Jervoise, who, thorough +Jacobite as he was, had smarted under the subservience of England +to France during the reigns of the two previous monarchs. + +"You Englishmen and Scotchmen are fighting people," the king went +on, "and should have a military monarch. I do not mean a king like +myself, who likes to fight in the front ranks of his soldiers; but +one like William, who has certainly lofty aims, and is a statesman, +and can join in European combinations." + +"William thinks and plans more for Holland than for England, sire. +He would join a league against France and Spain, not so much for +the benefit of England, which has not much to fear from these +powers, but of Holland, whose existence now, as of old is +threatened by them." + +"England's interest is similar to that of Holland," the king said. +"I began this war, nominally, in the interest of the Duke of +Holstein, but really because it was Sweden's interest that Denmark +should not become too powerful. + +"But we must not waste time in talking politics. I see the men have +finished their breakfast, and we are here to hunt. I shall keep +twenty horse with me; the rest will enter the forest with you. I +have arranged for the peasants here to guide you. You will march +two miles along by the edge of the forest, and then enter it and +make a wide semicircle, leaving men as you go, until you come down +to the edge of the forest again, a mile to our left. + +"As soon as you do so, you will sound a trumpet, and the men will +then move forward, shouting so as to drive the game before them. As +the peasants tell me there are many wolves and bears in the forest, +I hope that you will inclose some of them in your cordon, which +will be about five miles from end to end. With the horse you will +have a hundred and thirty men, so that there will be a man every +sixty or seventy yards. That is too wide a space at first, but, as +you close in, the distances will rapidly lessen, and they must make +up, by noise, for the scantiness of their numbers. If they find the +animals are trying to break through, they can discharge their +pieces; but do not let them do so otherwise, as it would frighten +the animals too soon, and send them flying out all along the open +side of the semicircle." + +It was more than two hours before the whole of the beaters were in +position. Just before they had started, the king had requested +Captain Jervoise to remain with him and the officers who had +accompanied him, five in number. They had been posted, a hundred +yards apart, at the edge of the forest. Charlie was the first +officer left behind as the troop moved through the forest, and it +seemed to him an endless time before he heard a faint shout, +followed by another and another, until, at last, the man stationed +next to him repeated the signal. Then they moved forward, each +trying to obey the orders to march straight ahead. + +For some time, nothing was heard save the shouts of the men, and +then Charlie made out some distant shots, far in the wood, and +guessed that some animals were trying to break through the lines. +Then he heard the sound of firing directly in front of him. This +continued for some time, occasionally single shots being heard, but +more often shots in close succession. Louder and louder grew the +shouting, as the men closed in towards a common point, and, in half +an hour after the signal had been given, all met. + +"What sport have you had, father?" Harry asked, as he came up to +Captain Jervoise. + +"We killed seventeen wolves and four bears, with, what is more +important, six stags. I do not know whether we are going to have +another beat." + +It soon turned out that this was the king's intention, and the +troops marched along the edge of the forest. Charlie was in the +front of his company, the king with the cavalry a few hundred yards +ahead, when, from a dip of ground on the right, a large body of +horsemen suddenly appeared. + +"Russians!" Captain Jervoise exclaimed, and shouted to the men, who +were marching at ease, to close up. + +The king did not hesitate a moment, but, at the head of his fifty +cavalry, charged right down upon the Russians, who were at least +five hundred strong. The little body disappeared in the melee, and +then seemed to be swallowed up. + +"Keep together, shoulder to shoulder, men. Double!" and the company +set off at a run. + +When they came close to the mass of horsemen, they poured in a +volley, and then rushed forward, hastily fitting the short pikes +they carried into their musket barrels; for, as yet, the modern +form of bayonets was not used. The Russians fought obstinately, but +the infantry pressed their way step by step through them, until +they reached the spot where the king, with his little troop of +cavalry, were defending themselves desperately from the attacks of +the Russians. + +The arrival of the infantry decided the contest, and the Russians +began to draw off, the king hastening the movement by plunging into +the midst of them with his horsemen. + +Charlie was on the flank of the company as it advanced, and, after +running through a Russian horseman with the short pike that was +carried by officers, he received a tremendous blow on his steel +cap, that stretched him insensible on the ground. When he +recovered, he felt that he was being carried, and soon awoke to the +fact that he was a prisoner. + +After a long ride, the Russians arrived at Plescow. They had lost +some sixty men in the fight. Charlie was the only prisoner taken. +He was, on dismounting, too weak to stand, but he was half carried +and half dragged to the quarters of the Russian officer in command. +The latter addressed him, but, finding that he was not understood, +sent for an officer who spoke Swedish. + +"What were the party you were with doing in the wood?" + +"We were hunting wolves and bears." + +"Where did you come from?" + +"From Marienburg." + +"How strong were you?" + +"Fifty horse and a hundred and forty foot," Charlie replied, +knowing there could be no harm in stating the truth. + +"But it was a long way to march, merely to hunt, and your officers +must have been mad to come out, with so small a party, to a point +where they were likely to meet with us." + +"It was not too small a party, sir, as they managed to beat off the +attack made upon them." + +The Russian was silent for a moment, then he asked: + +"Who was the officer in command?" + +"The officer in command was the King of Sweden," Charlie replied. + +An exclamation of surprise and anger broke from the Russian +general, when the answer was translated to him. + +"You missed a good chance of distinguishing yourself," he said to +the officer in command of the troops. "Here has this mad King of +Sweden been actually putting himself in your hands, and you have +let him slip through your fingers. It would have got you two steps +in rank, and the favour of the czar, had you captured him, and now +he will be in a rage, indeed, when he hears that five hundred +cavalry could do nothing against a force only a third of their +number." + +"I had no idea that the King of Sweden was there himself," the +officer said humbly. + +"Bah, that is no excuse. There were officers, and you ought to have +captured them, instead of allowing yourself to be put to flight by +a hundred and fifty men." + +"We must have killed half the horsemen before the infantry came +up." + +"All the worse, colonel, that you did not complete the business. +The infantry would not have been formidable, after they discharged +their pieces. However, it is your own affair, and I wash my hands +of it. What the czar will say when he hears of it, I know not, but +I would not be in your shoes for all my estates." + +As Charlie learned afterwards, the colonel was degraded from his +rank by the angry czar, and ordered to serve as a private in the +regiment he commanded. The officer who acted as translator said +something in his own tongue to the general, who then, through him, +said: + +"This officer tells me that by your language you are not a Swede." + +"I am not. I am English, and I am an ensign in the Malmoe +Regiment." + +"All the worse for you," the general said. "The czar has declared +that he will exchange no foreign officers who may be taken +prisoners." + +"Very well, sir," Charlie said, fearlessly. "He will be only +punishing his own officers. There are plenty of them in the King of +Sweden's hands." + +The general, when this reply was translated to him, angrily ordered +Charlie to be taken away, and he was soon lodged in a cell in the +castle. His head was still swimming from the effects of the blow +that had stricken him down, and, without even trying to think over +his position, he threw himself down on the straw pallet, and was +soon asleep. + +It was morning when he woke and, for a short time, he was unable to +imagine where he was, but soon recalled what had happened. He had +been visited by someone after he had lain down, for a platter of +bread and meat stood on the table, and a jug of water. He was also +covered with two thick blankets. These had not been there when he +lay down, for he had wondered vaguely as to how he should pass the +night without some covering. + +He took a long draught of water, then ate some food. His head +throbbed with the pain of the wound. It had been roughly bandaged +by his captors, but needed surgical dressing. + +"I wonder how long I am likely to be, before I am exchanged," he +said to himself. "A long time, I am afraid; for there are scores of +Russian officers prisoners with us, and I don't think there are +half a dozen of ours captured by the Russians. Of course, no +exchange can take place until there are a good batch to send over, +and, it may be, months may pass before they happen to lay hands on +enough Swedish officers to make it worth while to trouble about +exchanging them." + +An hour later the door opened, and an officer entered, followed by +a soldier with a large bowl of broth and some bread. + +"I am a doctor," he said in Swedish. "I came in to see you +yesterday evening, but you were sound asleep, and that was a better +medicine than any I can give; so I told the man to throw those two +barrack rugs over you, and leave your food in case you should wake, +which did not seem to me likely. I see, however, that you did +wake," and he pointed to the plate. + +"That was not till this morning, doctor. It is not an hour since I +ate it." + +"This broth will be better for you, and I daresay you can manage +another breakfast. Sit down and take it, at once, while it is hot. +I am in no hurry." + +He gave an order in Russian to the soldier, who went out, and +returned in a few minutes with a small wooden tub, filled with hot +water. By this time Charlie had finished the broth. The doctor then +bathed his head for some time in hot water, but was obliged to cut +off some of his hair, in order to remove the bandage. As he +examined the wound, Charlie was astounded to hear him mutter to +himself: + +"It is a mighty nate clip you have got, my boy; and, if your skull +had not been a thick one, it is lying out there on the turf you +would be." + +Charlie burst into a fit of laughter. + +"So you are English, too," he exclaimed, as he looked up into the +surgeon's face. + +"At laste Irish, my boy," the doctor said, as surprised as Charlie +had been. "To think we should have been talking Swedish to each +other, instead of our native tongue. And what is your name? And +what is it you are doing here, as a Swede, at all?" + +"My name is Charles Carstairs. I come from Lancashire, just on the +borders of Westmoreland. My father is a Jacobite, and so had to +leave the country. He went over to Sweden, and I, with some friends +of his, got commissions." + +"Then our cases are pretty much alike," the doctor said. "I had +gone through Dublin University, and had just passed as a surgeon, +when King James landed. It didn't much matter to me who was king, +but I thought it was a fine opportunity to study gunshot wounds, so +I joined the royal army, and was at the battle of the Boyne. I had +plenty of work with wounds, early in the day, but when, after the +Irish had fairly beat the Dutchman back all day, they made up their +minds to march away at night, I had to lave my patients and be off +too. Then I was shut up in Limerick; and I was not idle there, as +you may guess. When at last the surrender came, I managed to slip +away, having no fancy for going over with the regiments that were +to enter the service of France. I thought I could have gone back to +Dublin, and that no one would trouble about me; but someone put +them up to it, and I had to go without stopping to ask leave. I +landed at Bristol, and there, for a time, was nearly starving. + +"I was well nigh my wits' end as to what to do for a living, and +had just spent my last shilling, when I met an English captain, who +told me that across at Gottenburg there were a good many Irish and +Scotchmen who had, like myself, been in trouble at home. He gave me +a passage across, and took me to the house of a man he knew. Of +course, it was no use my trying to doctor people, when they could +not tell me what was the matter with them, and I worked at one +thing and another, doing anything I could turn my hands to, for +four or five months. That is how I got to pick up Swedish. Then +some people told me that Russia was a place where a doctor might +get on, for that they had got no doctors for their army who knew +anything of surgery, and the czar was always ready to take on +foreigners who could teach them anything. I had got my diploma with +me, and some of my friends came forward and subscribed enough to +rig me out in clothes and pay my passage. What was better, one of +them happened to have made the acquaintance of Le Ford, who was, as +you may have heard, the czar's most intimate friend. + +"I wished myself back a hundred times before I reached Moscow, but +when I did, everything was easy for me. Le Ford introduced me to +the czar, and I was appointed surgeon of a newly-raised regiment, +of which Le Ford was colonel. That was eight years ago, and I am +now a sort of surgeon general of a division, and am at the head of +the hospitals about here. Till the war began I had not, for five +years, done any military work, but had been at the head of a +college the czar has established for training surgeons for the +army. I was only sent down here after that business at Narva. + +"So, you see, I have fallen on my feet. The czar's is a good +service, and we employ a score or two of Scotchmen, most of them in +good posts. He took to them because a Scotchman, General Gordon, +and other foreign officers, rescued him from his sister Sophia, who +intended to assassinate him, and established him firmly on the +throne of his father. + +"It is a pity you are not on this side. Perhaps it isn't too late +to change, eh?" + +Charlie laughed. + +"My father is in Sweden, and my company is commanded by a man who +is as good as a father to me, and his son is like my brother. If +there were no other reason, I could not change. Why, it was only +yesterday I was sitting round a bivouac fire with King Charles, and +nothing would induce me to fight against him." + +"I am not going to try to persuade you. The czar has treated me +well, and I love him. By the way, I have not given you my name +after all. It's Terence Kelly." + +"Is not the czar very fierce and cruel?" + +"Bedad, I would be much more cruel and fierce if I were in his +place. Just think of one man, with all Russia on his shoulders. +There is he trying to improve the country, working like a horse +himself, knowing that, like every other Russian, he is as ignorant +as a pig, and setting to improve himself--working in the dockyards +of Holland and England, attending lectures, and all kinds of +subjects. Why, man, he learnt anatomy, and can take off a leg as +quickly as I can. He is building a fleet and getting together an +army. It is not much good yet, you will say, but it will be some +day. You can turn a peasant into a soldier in six months, but it +takes a long time to turn out generals and officers who are fit for +their work. + +"Then, while he is trying everywhere to improve his country, every +man jack of them objects to being improved, and wants to go along +in his old ways. Didn't they get up an insurrection, only because +he wanted them to cut off their beards? Any other man would have +lost heart, and given it up years ago. It looks as hopeless a task +as for a mouse to drag a mountain, but he is doing it. + +"I don't say that he is perfect. He gets into passions, and it is +mighty hard for anyone he gets into a passion with. But who would +not get into passions, when there is so much work to be done, and +everyone tries to hinder instead of to help? It would break the +heart of Saint Patrick! Why, that affair at Narva would have broken +down most men. Here, for years, has he been working to make an +army, and the first time they meet an enemy worthy of the name, +what do they do? Why, they are beaten by a tenth of their number of +half-starved men, led by a mad-brained young fellow who had never +heard a shot fired before, and lose all their cannon, guns, +ammunition, and stores. Why, I was heartbroken, myself, when I +heard of it; but Peter, instead of blowing out his brains, or +drowning himself, set to work, an hour after the news reached him, +to bring up fresh troops, to re-arm the men, and to prepare to meet +the Swedes again, as soon as the snow is off the ground. + +"If James of England had been Peter of Russia, he would be ruling +over Ireland now, and England and Scotland, too. + +"But now, I must be off. Don't you worry about your head. I have +seen as bad a clip given by a blackthorn. I have got to go round +now and see the wounded, and watch some operations being done, but +I will come in again this evening. Don't eat any more of their +messes, if they bring them in. You and I will have a snug little +dinner together. I might get you put into a more dacent chamber, +but the general is one of the old pig-headed sort. We don't pull +together, so I would rather not ask any favours from him. + +"The czar may come any day--he is always flying about. I will speak +to him when he comes, and see that you have better entertainment." + + + +Chapter 7: Exchanged. + + +Late in the afternoon, Doctor Kelly came in again to the cell. + +"Come along," he said; "I have got lave for you to have supper with +me, and have given my pledge that you won't try to escape till it +is over, or make any onslaught on the garrison, but will behave +like a quiet and peaceable man." + +"You are quite safe in giving the pledge, doctor," Charlie laughed. + +"Come along then, me boy, for they were just dishing up when I came +to fetch you. It is cold enough outside, and there is no sinse in +putting cold victuals into one in such weather as this." + +They were not long in reaching a snugly-furnished room, where a big +fire was burning. Another gentleman was standing, with his back to +it. He was a man of some seven or eight and twenty, with large +features, dark brown hair falling in natural curls over his ears, +and large and powerful in build. + +"This is my friend, Charlie Carstairs," the doctor said. + +"This, Carstairs, is Peter Michaeloff, a better doctor than most of +those who mangle the czar's soldiers." + +"Things will better in time," the other said, "when your pupils +begin to take their places in the army." + +"I hope so," the doctor said, shrugging his shoulders. "There is +one comfort, they can't be much worse." + +At this moment a servant entered, bearing a bowl of soup and three +basins. They at once seated themselves at the table. + +"So you managed to get yourself captured yesterday," Doctor +Michaeloff said to Charlie. "I have not had the pleasure of seeing +many of you gentlemen here." + +"We don't come if we can help it," Charlie laughed. "But the +Cossacks were so pressing, that I could not resist. In fact, I did +not know anything about it, until I was well on the way." + +"I hope they have made you comfortable," the other said, sharply. + +"I can't say much for the food," Charlie said, "and still less for +the cell, which was bitterly cold. Still, as the doctor gave me two +rugs to wrap myself up in, I need not grumble." + +"That is not right," the other said angrily. "I hear that the King +of Sweden treats our prisoners well. + +"You should have remonstrated, Kelly." + +The Irishman shrugged his shoulders. + +"I ventured to hint to the general that I thought an officer had a +right to better treatment, even if he were a prisoner, but I was +told sharply to mind my own business, which was with the sick and +wounded. I said, as the prisoner was wounded, I thought it was a +matter that did come to some extent under my control." + +"What did the pig say?" + +"He grumbled something between his teeth, that I did not catch, +and, as I thought the prisoner would not be kept there long, and +was not unaccustomed to roughing it, it was not worthwhile pressing +the matter further." + +"Have you heard that an officer has been here this afternoon, with +a flag of truce, to treat for your exchange?" Doctor Michaeloff +said, turning suddenly to Charlie. + +"No, I have not heard anything about it," Charlie said. + +"He offered a captain for you, which you may consider a high +honour." + +"It is, no doubt," Charlie said, with a smile. "I suppose his +majesty thought, as it was in his special service I was caught, he +was bound to get me released, if he could." + +"It was a hunting party, was it not?" + +"Yes. There was only the king with four of his officers there, and +my company of foot, and fifty horse. I don't think I can call it an +escort, for we went principally as beaters." + +"Rustoff missed a grand chance there, Kelly. + +"What regiment do you belong to?" + +And he again turned to Charlie. + +"The Malmoe Regiment. The company is commanded by an English +gentleman, who is a neighbour and great friend of my father. His +son is an ensign, and my greatest friend. The men are all either +Scotch or English, but most of them Scotch." + +"They are good soldiers, the Scotch; none better. There are a good +many in the Russian service, also in that of Austria and France. +They are always faithful, and to be relied upon, even when native +troops prove treacherous. And you like Charles of Sweden?" + +"There is not a soldier in his army but likes him," Charlie said +enthusiastically. "He expects us to do much, but he does more +himself. All through the winter, he did everything in his power for +us, riding long distances from camp to camp, to visit the sick and +to keep up the spirits of the men. If we live roughly, so does he, +and, on the march, he will take his meals among the soldiers, and +wrap himself up in his cloak, and sleep on the bare ground, just as +they do. And as for his bravery, he exposes his life recklessly--too +recklessly, we all think--and it seemed a miracle that, always in the +front as he was, he should have got through Narva without a scratch." + +"Yes, that was a bad bit of business, that Narva," the other said +thoughtfully. "Why do you think we were beaten in the horrible way +we were?--because the Russians are no cowards." + +"No; they made a gallant stand when they recovered from their +surprise," Charlie agreed. "But in the first place, they were taken +by surprise." + +"They ought not to have been," the doctor said angrily. "They had +news, two days before, brought by the cavalry, who ought to have +defended that pass, but didn't." + +"Still, it was a surprise when we attacked," Charlie said, "for +they could not suppose that the small body they saw were going to +assail them. Then, we had the cover of that snowstorm, and they did +not see us, until we reached the edge of the ditch. Of course, your +general ought to have made proper dispositions, and to have +collected the greater part of his troops at the spot facing us, +instead of having them strung out round that big semicircle, so +that, when we made an entry they were separated, and each half was +ignorant of what the other was doing. Still, even then they might +have concentrated between the trenches and the town. But no orders +had been given. The general was one of the first we captured. The +others waited for the orders that never came, until it was too +late. If the general who commanded on the left had massed his +troops, and marched against us as we were attacking the position +they held on their right, we should have been caught between two +fires." + +"It was a badly managed business, altogether," Doctor Michaeloff +growled; "but we shall do better next time. We shall understand +Charles's tactics better. We reckoned on his troops, but we did not +reckon on him. + +"Kelly tells me that you would not care to change service." + +"My friends are in the Swedish army, and I am well satisfied with +the service. I daresay, if Russia had been nearer England than +Sweden is, and we had landed there first, we should have been as +glad to enter the service of the czar as we were to join that of +King Charles. Everyone says that the czar makes strangers welcome, +and that he is a liberal master to those who serve him well. As to +the quarrel between them, I am not old enough to be able to give my +opinion on it, though, as far as I am concerned, it seems to me +that it was not a fair thing for Russia to take advantage of +Sweden's being at war with Denmark and Augustus of Saxony, to fall +upon her without any cause of quarrel." + +"Nations move less by morality than interest," Doctor Michaeloff +said calmly. "Russia wants a way to the sea--the Turks cut her off +to the south, and the Swedes from the Baltic. She is smothered +between them, and when she saw her chance, she took it. That is not +good morality. I admit that it is the excuse of the poor man who +robs the rich, but it is human nature, and nations act, in the long +run, a good deal like individuals." + +"But you have not told me yet, doctor," Charlie said, turning the +conversation, "whether the proposal for an exchange was accepted." + +"The general had no power to accept it, Carstairs. It had to be +referred to the czar himself." + +"I wish his majesty could see me, then," Charlie laughed. "He would +see that I am but a lad, and that my release would not greatly +strengthen the Swedish army." + +"But then the czar may be of opinion that none of his officers, who +allowed themselves to be captured by a handful of men at Narva, +would be of any use to him," Doctor Michaeloff laughed. + +"That may, doubtless, be said of a good many among them," Charlie +said, "but, individually, none of the captains could be blamed for +the mess they made of it." + +"Perhaps not, but if all the men had been panic stricken, there +were officers enough to have gathered together and cut their way +through the Swedes." + +"No doubt there were; but you must remember, Doctor Michaeloff, +that an officer's place is with his company, and that it is his +duty to think of his men, before thinking of himself. Supposing all +the officers of the left wing, as you say, had gathered together +and cut their way out, the czar would have had a right to blame +them for the capture of the whole of the men. How could they tell +that, at daybreak, the general would not have given orders for the +left wing to attack the Swedes? They were strong enough still to +have eaten us up, had they made the effort, and had the czar been +there in person, I will warrant he would have tried it." + +"That he would," Doctor Michaeloff said warmly. "You are right +there, young sir. The czar may not be a soldier, but at least he is +a man, which is more than can be said for the officer who ordered +sixty thousand men to lay down their arms to eight thousand." + +"I am sure of that," Charlie said. "A man who would do as he has +done, leave his kingdom, and work like a common man in dockyards, +to learn how to build ships, and who rules his people as he does, +must be a great man. I don't suppose he would do for us in England, +because a king has no real power with us, and Peter would never put +up with being thwarted in all his plans by parliament, as William +is. But for a country like Russia, he is wonderful. Of course, our +company being composed of Scotchmen and Englishmen, we have no +prejudices against him. We think him wrong for entering upon this +war against Sweden, but we all consider him a wonderful fellow, +just the sort of fellow one would be proud to serve under, if we +did not serve under Charles of Sweden. + +"Well, Doctor Kelly, when do you think the czar will be here?" + +The doctor did not reply, but Michaeloff said quietly: + +"He arrived this afternoon." + +"He did!" Charlie exclaimed excitedly. + +"Why did you not tell me before, Doctor Kelly? Has he been asked +about my exchange, and is the Swedish officer still here?" + +"He is here, and you will be exchanged in the morning. + +"I have other things to see about now, and must say goodnight; and +if you should ever fall into the hands of our people again, and +Doctor Kelly does not happen to be near, ask for Peter Michaeloff, +and he will do all he can for you." + +"Then I am really to be exchanged tomorrow, doctor?" Charlie said, +as Doctor Michaeloff left the room. + +"It seems like it." + +"But did not you know?" + +"No, I had heard nothing for certain. I knew the czar had come, but +I had not heard of his decision. I congratulate you." + +"It is a piece of luck," Charlie said. "I thought it might be +months before there was an exchange. It is very good of the king to +send over so quickly." + +"Yes; and of the czar to let you go." + +"Well, I don't see much in that, doctor, considering that he gets a +captain in exchange for me; still, of course, he might have +refused. It would not have been civil, but he might have done it." + +"What did you think of my friend, Charlie?" + +"I like him. He has a pleasant face, though I should think he has +got a temper of his own. He has a splendid figure, and looks more +like a fighting man than a doctor. I will write down his name, so +as not to forget it, as he says he might be able to help me if I am +ever taken prisoner again, and you did not happen to be with the +army. It is always nice having a friend. Look at the difference it +has made to me, finding a countryman here." + +"Yes, you may find it useful, Carstairs; and he has a good deal of +influence. Still, I think it probable that if you ever should get +into a scrape again, you will be able to get tidings of me, for I +am likely to be with the advanced division of our army, wherever it +is, as I am in charge of its hospitals. + +"You had better turn in now, for I suppose you will be starting +early, and I have two or three patients I must visit again before I +go to bed. This is your room, next to mine. I managed, after all, +to get it changed." + +"That is very good of you, doctor, but it really would not have +mattered a bit for one night. It does look snug and warm, with that +great fire." + +"Yes, the stoves are the one thing I don't like in Russia. I like +to see a blazing fire, and the first thing I do, when I get into +fresh quarters, is to have the stove opened so that I can see one. +This is a second room of mine. There were three together, you see, +and as my rank is that of a colonel, I was able to get them, and it +is handy, if a friend comes to see me, to have a room for him." + +An hour later, just as Charlie was dozing off to sleep, the doctor +put his head in to the door. + +"You are to start at daybreak, Carstairs. My servant will call you +an hour before that. I shall be up. I must put a fresh bandage on +your head before you start." + +"Thank you very much, doctor. I am sorry to get you up so early." + +"That is nothing. I am accustomed to work at all hours. Good +night." + +At eight o'clock, having had a bowl of broth, Charlie descended to +the courtyard in charge of an officer and two soldiers, the doctor +accompanying him. Here he found a Swedish officer belonging to the +king's personal staff. The Russian handed the lad formally over to +his charge, saying: + +"By the orders of the czar, I now exchange Ensign Carstairs for +Captain Potoff, whom you, on your part, engage to send off at +once." + +"I do," the Swede said; "that is, I engage that he shall be sent +off, as soon as he can be fetched from Revel, where he is now +interned, and shall be safely delivered under an escort; and that +if, either by death, illness, or escape, I should not be able to +hand him over, I will return another officer of the same rank." + +"I have the czar's commands," the Russian went on, "to express his +regret that, owing to a mistake on the part of the officer +commanding here, Ensign Carstairs has not received such worthy +treatment as the czar would have desired for him, but he has given +stringent orders that, in future, any Swedish officers who may be +taken prisoners shall receive every comfort and hospitality that +can be shown them." + +"Goodbye, Doctor Kelly," Charlie said, as he mounted his horse, +which had been saddled in readiness for him. "I am greatly obliged +to you for your very great kindness to me, and hope that I may some +day have an opportunity of repaying it." + +"I hope not, Carstairs. I trust that we may meet again, but hope +that I sha'n't be in the position of a prisoner. However, strange +things have happened already in this war, and there is no saying +how fortune may go. Goodbye, and a pleasant journey." + +A Russian officer took his place by the side of the Swede, and an +escort of twenty troopers rode behind them, as they trotted out +through the gate of the convent. + +"It was very kind of the king to send for me," Charlie said to the +Swede, "and I am really sorry that you should have had so long a +ride on my account, Captain Pradovich." + +"As to that, it is a trifle," the officer said. "If I had not been +riding here, I should be riding with the king elsewhere, so that I +am none the worse. But, in truth, I am glad I came, for yesterday +evening I saw the czar himself. I conversed with him for some time. +He expressed himself very courteously with respect to the king, and +to our army, against whom he seems to bear no sort of malice for +the defeat we inflicted on him at Narva. He spoke of it himself, +and said, 'you will see that, some day, we shall turn the tables +upon you.' + +"The king will be pleased when I return with you, for we all feared +that you might be very badly hurt. All that we knew was that some +of your men had seen you cut down. After the battle was over, a +search was made for your body. When it could not be found, +questions were asked of some of our own men, and some wounded +Russians, who were lying near the spot where you had been seen to +fall. + +"Our men had seen nothing, for, as the Russians closed in behind +your company as it advanced, they had shut their eyes and lay as if +dead, fearing that they might be run through, as they lay, by the +Cossack lances. The Russians, however, told us that they had seen +two of the Cossacks dismount, by the orders of one of their +officers, lift you on to a horse, and ride off with you. There was +therefore a certainty that you were still living, for the Russians +would assuredly not have troubled to carry off a dead body. His +majesty interested himself very much in the matter, and yesterday +morning sent me off to inquire if you were alive, and if so, to +propose an exchange. + +"I was much pleased, when I reached Plescow yesterday, to learn +that your wound is not a serious one. I saw the doctor, who, I +found, was a countryman of yours, and he assured me that it was +nothing, and made some joke that I did not understand about the +thickness of North Country skulls. + +"The czar arrived in the afternoon, but I did not see him until +late in the evening, when I was sent for. I found him with the +general in command, and several other officers, among whom was your +friend the doctor. The czar was, at first, in a furious passion. He +abused the general right and left, and I almost thought, at one +time, that he would have struck him. He told him that he had +disgraced the Russian name, by not treating you with proper +hospitality, and especially by placing you in a miserable cell +without a fire. + +"'What will the King of Sweden think?' he said. 'He treats his +prisoners with kindness and courtesy, and after Narva gave them a +banquet, at which he himself was present. The Duke of Croy writes +to me, to say he is treated as an honoured guest rather than as a +prisoner, and here you disgrace us by shutting your prisoner in a +cheerless cell, although he is wounded, and giving him food such as +you might give to a common soldier. The Swedes will think that we +are barbarians. You are released from your command, and will at +once proceed to Moscow and report yourself there, when a post will +be assigned to you where you will have no opportunity of showing +yourself ignorant of the laws of courtesy. + +"'Doctor,' he went on, 'you will remember that all prisoners, +officers and men, will be henceforth under the charge of the +medical department, and that you have full authority to make such +arrangements as you may think necessary for their comfort and +honourable treatment. I will not have Russia made a byword among +civilized peoples.' + +"Then he dismissed the rest of them, and afterwards sat down and +chatted with me, just as if we had been of the same rank, puffing a +pipe furiously, and drinking amazing quantities of wine. Indeed, my +head feels the effects of it this morning, although I was quite +unable to drink cup for cup with him, for, had I done so, I should +have been under the table long before he rose from it, seemingly +quite unmoved by the quantity he had drank. I have no doubt he +summoned me especially to hear his rebuke to the general, so that I +could take word to the king how earnest he was, in his regrets for +your treatment." + +"There was nothing much to complain of," Charlie said; "and, +indeed, the cell was a palace after the miserable huts in which we +have passed the winter. I am glad, however, the czar gave the +general a wigging, for he spoke brutally to me on my arrival. You +may be sure, now, that any prisoners that may be taken will be well +treated; for Doctor Kelly, who has been extremely kind to me, will +certainly take good care of them. As to my wound, it is of little +consequence. It fell on my steel cap, and I think I was stunned by +its force, rather than rendered insensible by the cut itself." + +After three hours' riding they came to a village. As soon as they +were seen approaching, there was a stir there. A man riding ahead +waved the white flag that he carried, and, when they entered the +village, they found a party of fifty Swedish cavalry in the saddle. + +The Russian escort, as soon as the Swedish officer and Charlie had +joined their friends, turned and rode off. A meal was in readiness, +and when Charlie, who was still feeling somewhat weak from the +effects of his wound, had partaken of it, the party proceeded on +their way, and rode into Marienburg before nightfall. + +Two or three miles outside the town, they met Harry Jervoise. Two +soldiers had been sent on at full speed, directly Charlie reached +the village, to report that he had arrived there and was not +seriously wounded, and, knowing about the time they would arrive, +Harry had ridden out to meet his friend. + +"You are looking white," he said, after the first hearty greeting. + +"I am feeling desperately tired, Harry. The wound is of no +consequence, but I lost a good deal of blood, and it is as much as +I can do to keep my saddle, though we have been coming on quietly +on purpose. However, I shall soon be all right again, and I need +hardly say that I am heartily glad to be back." + +"We have all been in a great way about you, Charlie, for we made +sure that you were very badly wounded. I can tell you, it was a +relief when the men rode in three hours ago, with the news that you +had arrived, and were not badly hurt. The men seemed as pleased as +we were, and there was a loud burst of cheering when we told them +the news. Cunningham and Forbes would have ridden out with me; but +Cunningham is on duty, and Forbes thought that we should like to +have a chat together." + +On his arrival, Charlie was heartily welcomed by Captain Jervoise +and the men of the company, who cheered lustily as he rode up. + +"You are to go and see the king at once," Captain Jervoise said as +he dismounted. "I believe he wants to hear, especially, how you +were treated. Make the best of it you can, lad. There is no +occasion for the feeling of Charles against the Russians being +embittered." + +"I understand," Charlie said. "I will make things as smooth as I +can." + +He walked quickly to the little house where the king had taken up +his quarters. There was no sentry at the door, or other sign that +the house contained an occupant of special rank. He knocked at the +door, and hearing a shout of "Enter," opened it and went in. + +"Ah, my young ensign; is it you?" the king said, rising from a low +settle on which he was sitting by the fire, talking with Colonel +Schlippenbach. + +"Hurt somewhat, I see, but not badly, I hope. I was sure that you +would not have been taken prisoner, unless you had been injured." + +"I was cut down by a blow that clove my helmet, your majesty, and +stunned me for some time; but, beyond making a somewhat long gash +on my skull, it did me no great harm." + +"That speaks well for the thickness of your skull, lad, and I am +heartily glad it is no worse. Now, tell me, how did they treat +you?" + +"It was a somewhat rough cell into which I was thrown, sir, but I +was most kindly tended by an Irish doctor high in the czar's +service, and, when the czar himself arrived, and learned that I had +not been lodged as well as he thought necessary, I hear he was so +angered that he disgraced the general, deprived him of his command, +and sent him to take charge of some fortress in the interior of +Russia; and I was, by his orders, allowed to occupy the doctor's +quarters, and a bedroom was assigned to me next to his. I heard +that the czar spoke in terms of the warmest appreciation of your +treatment of your prisoners, and said that any of your officers who +fell into his hands should be treated with equal courtesy." + +Charles looked gratified. + +"I am glad to hear it," he said. "In the field, if necessary, blood +must flow like water, but there is no reason why we should not +behave towards each other with courtesy, when the fighting is over. +You know nothing of the force there, at present?" + +"No, sir, I heard nothing. I did not exchange a word with anyone, +save the doctor and another medical man; and as the former treated +me as a friend, rather than as an enemy, I did not deem it right to +question him, and, had I done so, I am sure that he would have +given me no answer." + +"Well, you can return to your quarters, sir. Your company did me +good service in that fight, and Colonel Schlippenbach did not speak +in any way too warmly in their favour. I would that I had more of +these brave Englishmen and Scotchmen in my service." + +Charlie's head, however, was not as hard as he had believed it to +be; and the long ride brought on inflammation of the wound, so +that, on the following morning, he was in a high state of fever. It +was a fortnight before he was convalescent, and the surgeon then +recommended that he should have rest and quiet for a time, as he +was sorely pulled down, and unfit to bear the hardships of a +campaign; and it was settled that he should go down with the next +convoy to Revel, and thence take ship for Sweden. + +He was so weak, that although very sorry to leave the army just as +spring was commencing, he himself felt that he should be unable to +support the fatigues of the campaign, until he had had entire rest +and change. A few hours after the decision of the surgeon had been +given, Major Jamieson and Captain Jervoise entered the room where +he was sitting, propped up by pillows. + +"I have a bit of news that will please you, Charlie. The king sent +for the major this morning, and told him that he intended to +increase our company to a regiment, if he could do so. He had heard +that a considerable number of Scotchmen and Englishmen had come +over, and were desirous of enlisting, but, from their ignorance of +the language, their services had been declined. He said that he was +so pleased, not only with the conduct of the company in that fight, +but with its discipline, physique, and power of endurance, that he +had decided to convert it into a regiment. He said he was sorry to +lose its services for a time; but, as we lost twenty men in the +fight, and have some fifteen still too disabled to take their +places in the ranks, this was of the less importance. + +"So we are all going to march down to Revel with you. Major +Jamieson is appointed colonel, and I am promoted to be major. The +king himself directed that Cunningham and Forbes shall have +commissions as captains, and you and Harry as lieutenants. The +colonel has authority given him to nominate Scotch and English +gentlemen of good name to make up the quota of officers, while most +of our own men will be appointed non-commissioned officers, to +drill the new recruits. The king has been good enough, at Colonel +Jamieson's request, to say that, as soon as the regiment is raised +and organized, it shall be sent up to the front." + +"That is good news, indeed," Charlie said, with more animation than +he had evinced since his illness. "I have been so accustomed to be +attended to, in every way, that I was quite looking forward with +dread to the journey among strangers. Still, if you are all going, +it will be a different thing altogether. I don't think you will be +long in raising the regiment. We only were a week in getting the +company together, and, if they have been refusing to accept the +services of our people, there must be numbers of them at +Gottenburg." + +Early on the following morning, Charlie and the men unable to march +were placed in waggons, and the company started on its march to +Revel. It was a heavy journey, for the frost had broken up, and the +roads were in a terrible state from the heavy traffic passing. +There was no delay when they reached the port, as they at once +marched on board a ship, which was the next day to start for +Sweden. Orders from the king had already been received that the +company was to be conveyed direct to Gottenburg, and they entered +the port on the fifth day after sailing. + +The change, the sea air, and the prospect of seeing his father +again greatly benefited Charlie, and, while the company was marched +to a large building assigned to their use, he was able to make his +way on foot to his father's, assisted by his soldier servant, Jock +Armstrong. + +"Why, Charlie," Sir Marmaduke Carstairs exclaimed as he entered, +"who would have thought of seeing you? You are looking ill, lad; +ill and weak. What has happened to you?" + +Charlie briefly related the events that had brought about his +return to Gottenburg, of which Sir Marmaduke was entirely ignorant. +Postal communications were rare and uncertain, and Captain Jervoise +had not taken advantage of the one opportunity that offered, after +Charlie had been wounded, thinking it better to delay till the lad +could write and give a good account of himself. + +"So Jervoise, and his son, and that good fellow Jamieson are all +back again? That is good news, Charlie; and you have been promoted? +That is capital too, after only a year in the service. And you have +been wounded, and a prisoner among the Russians? You have had +adventures, indeed! I was terribly uneasy when the first news of +that wonderful victory at Narva came, for we generally have to wait +for the arrival of the despatches giving the lists of the killed +and wounded. I saw that the regiment had not been in the thick of +it, as the lists contained none of your names. I would have given a +limb to have taken part in that wonderful battle. When you get as +old as I am, my boy, you will feel a pride in telling how you +fought at Narva, and helped to destroy an entire Russian army with +the odds ten to one against you. + +"Of course, you will stay here with me. I suppose you have leave at +present?" + +"Yes, father, Colonel Jamieson told me that my first duty was to +get strong and well again, and that I was to think of no other +until I had performed that. And how have you been getting on, +father?" + +"Very well, lad. I don't pretend that it is not a great change from +Lynnwood, but I get along very well, and thank heaven, daily, that +for so many years I had set aside a portion of my rents, little +thinking that the time would come when they would prove my means of +existence. My friends here have invested the money for me, and it +bears good interest, which is punctually paid. With the English and +Scotch exiles, I have as much society as I care for, and as I find +I am able to keep a horse--for living here is not more than half +the cost that it would be in England--I am well enough contented +with my lot. + +"There is but one thing that pricks me. That villain John Dormay +has, as he schemed for, obtained possession of my estates, and has +been knighted for his distinguished services to the king. I heard +of this some time since, by a letter from one of our Jacobite +friends to whom I wrote, asking for news. He says that the new +knight has no great cause for enjoyment in his dignity and +possessions, because, not only do the Jacobite gentry turn their +backs upon him, when they meet him in the town, but the better +class of Whigs hold altogether aloof from him, regarding his +elevation, at the expense of his wife's kinsman, to be disgraceful, +although of course they have no idea of the evil plot by which he +brought about my ruin. There is great pity expressed for his wife, +who has not once stirred beyond the grounds at Lynnwood since he +took her there, and who is, they say, a shadow of her former self. +Ciceley, he hears, is well. That cub of a son is in London, and +there are reports that he is very wild, and puts his father to much +cost. As to the man himself, they say he is surrounded by the +lowest knaves, and it is rumoured that he has taken to drink for +want of better company. It is some comfort to me to think that, +although the villain has my estates, he is getting no enjoyment out +of them. + +"However, I hope some day to have a reckoning with him. The Stuarts +must come to their own, sooner or later. Until then I am content to +rest quietly here in Sweden." + + + +Chapter 8: The Passage of the Dwina. + + +A few hours after Charlie's arrival home, Major Jervoise and Harry +came round to the house. + +"I congratulate you, Jervoise, on your new rank," Sir Marmaduke +said heartily, as he entered; "and you, too, Harry. It has been a +great comfort to me, to know that you and Charlie have been +together always. At present you have the advantage of him in looks. +My lad has no more strength than a girl, not half the strength, +indeed, of many of these sturdy Swedish maidens." + +"Yes, Charlie has had a bad bout of it, Carstairs," Major Jervoise +said cheerfully; "but he has picked up wonderfully in the last ten +days, and, in as many more, I shall look to see him at work again. +I only wish that you could have been with us, old friend." + +"It is of no use wishing, Jervoise. We have heard enough here, of +what the troops have been suffering through the winter, for me to +know that, if I had had my wish and gone with you, my bones would +now be lying somewhere under the soil of Livonia." + +"Yes, it was a hard time," Major Jervoise agreed, "but we all got +through it well, thanks principally to our turning to at sports of +all kinds. These kept the men in health, and prevented them from +moping. The king was struck with the condition of our company, and +he has ordered that, in future, all the Swedish troops shall take +part in such games and amusements when in winter quarters. Of +course, Charlie has told you we are going to have a regiment +entirely composed of Scots and Englishmen. I put the Scots first, +since they will be by far the most numerous. There are always +plenty of active spirits, who find but small opening for their +energy at home, and are ready to take foreign service whenever the +chance opens. Besides, there are always feuds there. In the old +days, it was chief against chief. Now it is religion against +religion; and now, as then, there are numbers of young fellows glad +to exchange the troubles at home for service abroad. There have +been quite a crowd of men round our quarters, for, directly the +news spread that the company was landing, our countrymen flocked +round, each eager to learn how many vacancies there were in the +ranks, and whether we would receive recruits. Their joy was extreme +when it became known that Jamieson had authority to raise a whole +regiment. I doubt not that many of the poor fellows are in great +straits." + +"That I can tell you they are," Sir Marmaduke broke in. "We have +been doing what we can for them, for it was grievous that so many +men should be wandering, without means or employment, in a strange +country. But the number was too great for our money to go far among +them, and I know that many of them are destitute and well-nigh +starving. We had hoped to ship some of them back to Scotland, and +have been treating with the captain of a vessel sailing, in two or +three days, to carry them home." + +"It is unfortunate, but they have none to blame but themselves. +They should have waited until an invitation for foreigners to +enlist was issued by the Swedish government, or until gentlemen of +birth raised companies and regiments for service here. However, we +are the gainers, for I see that we shall not have to wait here many +weeks. Already, as far as I can judge from what I hear, there must +be well-nigh four hundred men here, all eager to serve. + +"We will send the news by the next ship that sails, both to +Scotland and to our own country, that men, active and fit for +service, can be received into a regiment, specially formed of +English-speaking soldiers. I will warrant that, when it is known in +the Fells that I am a major in the regiment, and that your son and +mine are lieutenants, we shall have two or three score of stout +young fellows coming over." + +The next day, indeed, nearly four hundred men were enlisted into +the service, and were divided into eight companies. Each of these, +when complete, was to be two hundred strong. Six Scottish officers +were transferred, from Swedish regiments, to fill up the list of +captains, and commissions were given to several gentlemen of family +as lieutenants and ensigns. Most of these, however, were held over, +as the colonel wrote to many gentlemen of his acquaintance in +Scotland, offering them commissions if they would raise and bring +over men. Major Jervoise did the same to half a dozen young +Jacobite gentlemen in the north of England, and so successful were +the appeals that, within two months of the return of the company to +Gottenburg, the regiment had been raised to its full strength. + +A fortnight was spent in drilling the last batch of recruits, from +morning till night, so that they should be able to take their +places in the ranks; and then, with drums beating and colours +flying, the corps embarked at Gottenburg, and sailed to join the +army. + +They arrived at Revel in the beginning of May. The port was full of +ships, for twelve thousand men had embarked, at Stockholm and other +ports, to reinforce the army and enable the king to take the field +in force; and, by the end of the month, the greater portion of the +force was concentrated at Dorpt. + +Charlie had long since regained his full strength. As soon as he +was fit for duty, he had rejoined, and had been engaged, early and +late, in the work of drilling the recruits, and in the general +organization of the regiment. He and Harry, however, found time to +take part in any amusement that was going on. They were made +welcome in the houses of the principal merchants and other +residents of Gottenburg, and much enjoyed their stay in the town, +in spite of their longing to be back in time to take part in the +early operations of the campaign. + +When they sailed into the port of Revel, they found that the +campaign had but just commenced, and they marched with all haste to +join the force with which the king was advancing against the +Saxons, who were still besieging Riga. Their army was commanded by +Marshal Steinau, and was posted on the other side of the river +Dwina, a broad stream. Charles the Twelfth had ridden up to Colonel +Jamieson's regiment upon its arrival, and expressed warm +gratification at its appearance, when it was paraded for his +inspection. + +"You have done well, indeed, colonel," he said. "I had hardly hoped +you could have collected so fine a body of men in so short a time." + +At his request, the officers were brought up and introduced. He +spoke a few words to those he had known before, saying to Charlie: + +"I am glad to see you back again, lieutenant. You have quite +recovered from that crack on your crown, I hope. But I need not +ask, your looks speak for themselves. You have just got back in +time to pay my enemies back for it." + +The prospect was not a cheerful one, when the Swedes arrived on the +banks of the Dwina. The Saxons were somewhat superior in force, and +it would be a desperate enterprise to cross the river, in the teeth +of their cannon and musketry. Already the king had caused a number +of large flat boats to be constructed. The sides were made very +high, so as to completely cover the troops from musketry, and were +hinged so as to let down and act as gangways, and facilitate a +landing. + +Charlie was standing on the bank, looking at the movements of the +Saxon troops across the river, and wondering how the passage was to +be effected, when a hand was placed on his shoulder. Looking round, +he saw it was the king, who, as was his custom, was moving about on +foot, unattended by any of his officers. + +"Wondering how we are to get across, lieutenant?" + +"That is just what I was thinking over, your majesty." + +"We want another snowstorm, as we had at Narva," the king said. +"The wind is blowing the right way, but there is no chance of such +another stroke of luck, at this time of year." + +"No, sir; but I was thinking that one might make an artificial +fog." + +"How do you mean?" the king asked quickly. + +"Your majesty has great stacks of straw here, collected for forage +for the cattle. No doubt a good deal of it is damp, or if not, it +could be easily wetted. If we were to build great piles of it, all +along on the banks here, and set it alight so as to burn very +slowly, but to give out a great deal of smoke, this light wind +would blow it across the river into the faces of the Saxons, and +completely cover our movements." + +"You are right!" the king exclaimed. "Nothing could be better. We +will make a smoke that will blind and half smother them;" and he +hurried away. + +An hour later, orders were sent out to all the regiments that, as +soon as it became dusk, the men should assemble at the great forage +stores for fatigue duty. As soon as they did so, they were ordered +to pull down the stacks, and to carry the straw to the bank of the +river, and there pile it in heavy masses, twenty yards apart. The +whole was to be damped, with the exception of only a small quantity +on the windward side of the heaps, which was to be used for +starting the fire. + +In two hours, the work was completed. The men were then ordered to +return to their camps, have their suppers, and lie down at once. +Then they were to form up, half an hour before daybreak, in +readiness to take their places in the boats, and were then to lie +down, in order, until the word was given to move forward. + +This was done, and just as the daylight appeared the heaps of straw +were lighted, and dense volumes of smoke rolled across the river, +entirely obscuring the opposite shore from view. The Saxons, +enveloped in the smoke, were unable to understand its meaning. +Those on the watch had seen no sign of troops on the bank, before +the smoke began to roll across the water, and the general was +uncertain whether a great fire had broken out in the forage stores +of the Swedes, or whether the fire had been purposely raised, +either to cover the movements of the army and enable them to march +away and cross at some undefended point, or whether to cover their +passage. + +The Swedish regiments, which were the first to cross, took their +places at once in the boats, the king himself accompanying them. In +a quarter of an hour the opposite bank was gained. Marshal Steinau, +an able general, had called the Saxons under arms, and was marching +towards the river, when the wind, freshening, lifted the thick veil +of smoke, and he saw that the Swedes had already gained the bank of +the river, and at once hurled his cavalry against them. + +The Swedish formation was not complete and, for a moment, they were +driven back in disorder, and forced into the river. The water was +shallow, and the king, going about among them, quickly restored +order and discipline, and, charging in solid formation, they drove +the cavalry back and advanced across the plain. Steinau recalled +his troops and posted them in a strong position, one flank being +covered by a marsh and the other by a wood. He had time to effect +his arrangements, as Charles was compelled to wait until the whole +of his troops were across. As soon as they were so, he led them +against the enemy. + +The battle was a severe one, for the Swedes were unprovided with +artillery, and the Saxons, with the advantages of position and a +powerful artillery, fought steadily. Three times Marshal Steinau +led his cavalry in desperate charges, and each time almost +penetrated to the point where Charles was directing the movements +of his troops; but, at last, he was struck from his horse by a blow +from the butt end of a musket; and his cuirassiers, with +difficulty, carried him from the field. As soon as his fall became +known, disorder spread among the ranks of the Saxons. Some +regiments gave way, and, the Swedes rushing forward with loud +shouts, the whole army was speedily in full flight. + +This victory laid the whole of Courland at the mercy of the Swedes, +all the towns opening their gates at their approach. + +They were now on the confines of Poland, and the king, brave to +rashness as he was, hesitated to attack a nation so powerful. +Poland, at that time, was a country a little larger than France, +though with a somewhat smaller population, but in this respect +exceeding Sweden. With the Poles themselves he had no quarrel, for +they had taken no part in the struggle, which had been carried on +solely by their king, with his Saxon troops. + +The authority of the kings of Poland was much smaller than that of +other European monarchs. The office was not a hereditary one; the +king being elected at a diet, composed of the whole of the nobles +of the country, the nobility embracing practically every free man; +and, as it was necessary, according to the constitution of the +country, that the vote should be unanimous, the difficulties in the +way of election were very great, and civil wars of constant +occurrence. + +Charles was determined that he would drive Augustus, who was the +author of the league against him, from the throne; but he desired +to do this by means of the Poles themselves, rather than to unite +the whole nation against him by invading the country. Poland was +divided into two parts, the larger of which was Poland proper, +which could at once place thirty thousand men in the field. The +other was Lithuania, with an army of twelve thousand. These forces +were entirely independent of each other. The troops were for the +most part cavalry, and the small force, permanently kept up, was +composed almost entirely of horsemen. They rarely drew pay, and +subsisted entirely on plunder, being as formidable to their own +people as to an enemy. + +Lithuania, on whose borders the king had taken post with his army, +was, as usual, harassed by two factions, that of the Prince Sapieha +and the Prince of Oginski, between whom a civil war was going on. + +The King of Sweden took the part of the former, and, furnishing him +with assistance, speedily enabled him to overcome the Oginski +party, who received but slight aid from the Saxons. Oginski's +forces were speedily dispersed, and roamed about the country in +scattered parties, subsisting on pillage, thereby exciting among +the people a lively feeling of hatred against the King of Poland, +who was regarded as the author of the misfortunes that had befallen +the country. + +From the day when Charlie's suggestion, of burning damp straw to +conceal the passage of the river, had been attended with such +success, the king had held him in high favour. There was but a few +years' difference between their ages, and the suggestion, so +promptly made, seemed to show the king that the young Englishman +was a kindred spirit, and he frequently requested him to accompany +him in his rides, and chatted familiarly with him. + +"I hate this inactive life," he said one day, "and would, a +thousand times, rather be fighting the Russians than setting the +Poles by the ears; but I dare not move against them, for, were +Augustus of Saxony left alone, he would ere long set all Poland +against me. At present, the Poles refuse to allow him to bring in +reinforcements from his own country; but if he cannot get men he +can get gold, and with gold he can buy over his chief opponents, +and regain his power. If it costs me a year's delay, I must wait +until he is forced to fly the kingdom, and I can place on the +throne someone who will owe his election entirely to me, and in +whose good faith I can be secure. + +"That done, I can turn my attention to Russia, which, by all +accounts, daily becomes more formidable. Narva is besieged by them, +and will ere long fall; but I can retake Narva when once I can +depend upon the neutrality of the Poles. Would I were king of +Poland as well as of Sweden. With eighty thousand Polish horse, and +my own Swedish infantry, I could conquer Europe if I wished to do +so. + +"I know that you are as fond of adventure as I am, and I am +thinking of sending you with an envoy I am despatching to Warsaw. + +"You know that the Poles are adverse to business of all kinds. The +poorest noble, who can scarcely pay for the cloak he wears, and who +is ready enough to sell his vote and his sword to the highest +bidder, will turn up his nose at honest trade; and the consequence +is, as there is no class between the noble and the peasant, the +trade of the country is wholly in the hands of Jews and foreigners, +among the latter being, I hear, many Scotchmen, who, while they +make excellent soldiers, are also keen traders. This class must +have considerable power, in fact, although it be exercised quietly. +The Jews are, of course, money lenders as well as traders. Large +numbers of these petty nobles must be in their debt, either for +money lent or goods supplied. + +"My agent goes specially charged to deal with the archbishop, who +is quite open to sell his services to me, although he poses as one +of the strongest adherents of the Saxons. With him, it is not a +question so much of money, as of power. Being a wise man, he sees +that Augustus can never retain his position, in the face of the +enmity of the great body of the Poles, and of my hostility. But, +while my agent deals with him and such nobles as he indicates as +being likely to take my part against Augustus, you could ascertain +the feeling of the trading class, and endeavour to induce them, not +only to favour me, but to exert all the influence they possess on +my behalf. As there are many Scotch merchants in the city, you +could begin by making yourself known to them, taking with you +letters of introduction from your colonel, and any other Scotch +gentleman whom you may find to have acquaintanceship, if not with +the men themselves, with their families in Scotland. I do not, of +course, say that the mission will be without danger, but that will, +I know, be an advantage in your eyes. What do you think of the +proposal?" + +"I do not know, sire," Charlie said doubtfully. "I have no +experience whatever in matters of that kind." + +"This will be a good opportunity for you to serve an +apprenticeship," the king said decidedly. "There is no chance of +anything being done here, for months, and as you will have no +opportunity of using your sword, you cannot be better employed than +in polishing up your wits. I will speak to Colonel Jamieson about +it this evening. Count Piper will give you full instructions, and +will obtain for you, from some of our friends, lists of the names +of the men who would be likely to be most useful to us. You will +please to remember that the brain does a great deal more than the +sword, in enabling a man to rise above his fellows. You are a brave +young officer, but I have many a score of brave young officers, and +it was your quick wit, in suggesting the strategy by which we +crossed the Dwina without loss, that has marked you out from among +others, and made me see that you are fit for something better than +getting your throat cut." + +The king then changed the subject with his usual abruptness, and +dismissed Charlie, at the end of his ride, without any further +allusion to the subject. The young fellow, however, knew enough of +the king's headstrong disposition to be aware that the matter was +settled, and that he could not, without incurring the king's +serious displeasure, decline to accept the commission. He walked +back, with a serious face, to the hut that the officers of the +company occupied, and asked Harry Jervoise to come out to him. + +"What is it, Charlie?" his friend said. "Has his gracious majesty +been blowing you up, or has your horse broken its knees?" + +"A much worse thing than either, Harry. The king appears to have +taken into his head that I am cut out for a diplomatist;" and he +then repeated to his friend the conversation the king had had with +him. + +Harry burst into a shout of laughter. + +"Don't be angry, Charlie, but I cannot help it. The idea of your +going, in disguise, I suppose, and trying to talk over the Jewish +clothiers and cannie Scotch traders, is one of the funniest things +I ever heard. And do you think the king was really in earnest?" + +"The king is always in earnest," Charlie said in a vexed tone; +"and, when he once takes a thing into his head, there is no +gainsaying him." + +"That is true enough, Charlie," Harry said, becoming serious. +"Well, I have no doubt you will do it just as well as another, and +after all, there will be some fun in it, and you will be in a big +city, and likely to have a deal more excitement than will fall to +our lot here." + +"I don't think it will be at all the sort of excitement I should +care for, Harry. However, my hope is, that the colonel will be able +to dissuade him from the idea." + +"Well, I don't know that I should wish that if I were in your +place, Charlie. Undoubtedly, it is an honour being chosen for such +a mission, and it is possible you may get a great deal of credit +for it, as the king is always ready to push forward those who do +good service. Look how much he thinks of you, because you made that +suggestion about getting up a smoke to cover our passage." + +"I wish I had never made it," Charlie said heartily. + +"Well, in that case, Charlie, it is likely enough we should not be +talking together here, for our loss in crossing the river under +fire would have been terrible." + +"Well, perhaps it is as well as it is," Charlie agreed. "But I did +not want to attract his attention. I was very happy as I was, with +you all. As for my suggestion about the straw, anyone might have +thought of it. I should never have given the matter another +moment's consideration, and I should be much better pleased if the +king had not done so, either, instead of telling the colonel about +it, and the colonel speaking to the officers, and such a ridiculous +fuss being made about nothing." + +"My dear Charlie," Harry said seriously, "you seem to be forgetting +that we all came out here, together, to make our fortune, or at any +rate to do as well as we could till the Stuarts come to the throne +again, and our fathers regain their estates, a matter concerning +which, let me tell you, I do not feel by any means so certain as I +did in the old days. Then, you know, all our friends were of our +way of thinking, and the faith that the Stuarts would return was +like a matter of religion, which it was heresy to doubt for an +instant. Well, you see, in the year that we have been out here +one's eyes have got opened a bit, and I don't feel by any means +sanguine that the Stuarts will ever come to the throne of England +again, or that our fathers will recover their estates. + +"You have seen here what good soldiers can do, and how powerless +men possessing but little discipline, though perhaps as brave as +themselves, are against them. William of Orange has got good +soldiers. His Dutch troops are probably quite as good as our best +Swedish regiments. They have had plenty of fighting in Ireland and +elsewhere, and I doubt whether the Jacobite gentlemen, however +numerous, but without training or discipline, could any more make +head against them than the masses of Muscovites could against the +Swedish battalions at Narva. All this means that it is necessary +that we should, if possible, carve out a fortune here. So far, I +certainly have no reason to grumble. On the contrary, I have had +great luck. I am a lieutenant at seventeen, and, if I am not shot +or carried off by fever, I may, suppose the war goes on and the +army is not reduced, be a colonel at the age of forty. + +"Now you, on the other hand, have, by that happy suggestion of +yours, attracted the notice of the king, and he is pleased to +nominate you to a mission in which there is a chance of your +distinguishing yourself in another way, and of being employed in +other and more important business. All this will place you much +farther on the road towards making a fortune, than marching and +fighting with your company would be likely to do in the course of +twenty years, and I think it would be foolish in the extreme for +you to exhibit any disinclination to undertake the duty." + +"I suppose you are right, Harry, and I am much obliged to you for +your advice, which certainly puts the matter in a light in which I +had not before seen it. If I thought that I could do it well, I +should not so much mind, for, as you say, there will be some fun to +be got out of it, and some excitement, and there seems little +chance of doing anything here for a long time. But what am I to say +to the fellows? How can I argue with them? Besides, I don't talk +Polish." + +"I don't suppose there are ten men in the army who do so, probably +not five. As to what to say, Count Piper will no doubt give you +full instructions as to the line you are to take, the arguments you +are to use, and the inducements you are to hold out. That is sure +to be all right." + +"Well, do not say anything about it, Harry, when you get back. I +still hope the colonel will dissuade the king." + +"Then you are singularly hopeful, Charlie, that is all I can say. +You might persuade a brick wall to move out of your way, as easily +as induce the King of Sweden to give up a plan he has once formed. +However, I will say nothing about it." + +At nine o'clock, an orderly came to the hut with a message that the +colonel wished to speak to Lieutenant Carstairs. Harry gave his +friend a comical look, as the latter rose and buckled on his sword. + +"What is the joke, Harry?" his father asked, when Charlie had left. +"Do you know what the colonel can want him for, at this time of the +evening? It is not his turn for duty." + +"I know, father; but I must not say." + +"The lad has not been getting into a scrape, I hope?" + +"Nothing serious, I can assure you; but really, I must not say +anything until he comes back." + +Harry's positive assurance, as to the impossibility of changing the +king's decision, had pretty well dispelled any hopes Charlie might +before have entertained, and he entered the colonel's room with a +grave face. + +"You know why I have sent for you, Carstairs?" + +"Yes, sir; I am afraid that I do." + +"Afraid? That is to say, you don't like it." + +"Yes, sir; I own that I don't like it." + +"Nor do I, lad, and I told his majesty so. I said you were too +young for so risky a business. The king scoffed at the idea. He +said, 'He is not much more than two years younger than I am, and if +I am old enough to command an army, he is old enough to carry out +this mission. We know that he is courageous. He is cool, sharp, and +intelligent. Why do I choose him? Has he not saved me from the loss +of about four or five thousand men, and probably a total defeat? A +young fellow who can do that, ought to be able to cope with Jewish +traders, and to throw dust in the eyes of the Poles. + +"I have chosen him for this service for two reasons. In the first +place, because I know he will do it well, and even those who +consider that I am rash and headstrong, admit that I have the knack +of picking out good men. In the next place, I want to reward him +for the service he has done for us. I cannot, at his age, make a +colonel of him, but I can give him a chance of distinguishing +himself in a service in which age does not count for so much, and +Count Piper, knowing my wishes in the matter, will push him +forward. Moreover, in such a mission as this, his youth will be an +advantage, for he is very much less likely to excite suspicion than +if he were an older man.' + +"The king's manner did not admit of argument, and I had only to +wait and ask what were his commands. These were simply that you are +to call upon his minister tomorrow, and that you would then receive +full instructions. + +"The king means well by you, lad, and on turning it over, I think +better of the plan than I did before. I am convinced, at any rate, +that you will do credit to the king's choice." + +"I will do my best, sir," Charlie said. "At present, it all seems +so vague to me that I can form no idea whatever as to what it will +be like. I am sure that the king's intentions are, at any rate, +kind. I am glad to hear you say that, on consideration, you think +better of the plan. Then I may mention the matter to Major +Jervoise?" + +"Certainly, Carstairs, and to his son, but it must go no farther. I +shall put your name in orders, as relieved from duty, and shall +mention that you have been despatched on service, which might mean +anything. Come and see me tomorrow, lad, after you have received +Count Piper's instructions. As the king reminded me, there are many +Scotchmen at Warsaw, and it is likely that some of them passed +through Sweden on the way to establish themselves there, and I may +very well have made their acquaintance at Gottenburg or Stockholm. + +"Once established in the house of one of my countrymen, your +position would be fairly safe and not altogether unpleasant, and +you would be certainly far better off than a Swede would be engaged +on this mission. The Swedes are, of course, regarded by the Poles +as enemies, but, as there is no feeling against Englishmen or +Scotchmen, you might pass about unnoticed as one of the family of a +Scottish trader there, or as his assistant." + +"I don't fear its being unpleasant in the least, colonel. Nor do I +think anything one way or the other about my safety. I only fear +that I shall not be able to carry out properly the mission +intrusted to me." + +"You will do your best, lad, and that is all that can be expected. +You have not solicited the post, and as it is none of your +choosing, your failure would be the fault of those who have sent +you, and not of yourself; but in a matter of this kind there is no +such thing as complete failure. When you have to deal with one man +you may succeed or you may fail in endeavouring to induce him to +act in a certain manner, but when you have to deal with a +considerable number of men, some will be willing to accept your +proposals, some will not, and the question of success will probably +depend upon outside influences and circumstances over which you +have no control whatever. I have no fear that it will be a failure. +If our party in Poland triumph, or if our army here advances, or if +Augustus, finding his position hopeless, leaves the country, the +good people of Warsaw will join their voices to those of the +majority. If matters go the other way, you may be sure that they +will not risk imprisonment, confiscation, and perhaps death, by +getting up a revolt on their own account. The king will be +perfectly aware of this, and will not expect impossibilities, and +there is really no occasion whatever for you to worry yourself on +that ground." + +Upon calling upon Count Piper the next morning, Charlie found that, +as the colonel had told him, his mission was a general one. + +"It will be your duty," the minister said, "to have interviews with +as many of the foreign traders and Jews in Warsaw as you can, only +going to those to whom you have some sort of introduction from the +persons you may first meet, or who are, as far as you can learn +from the report of others, ill disposed towards the Saxon party. +Here is a letter, stating to all whom it may concern, that you are +in the confidence of the King of Sweden, and are authorized to +represent him. + +"In the first place, you can point out to those you see that, +should the present situation continue, it will bring grievous evils +upon Poland. Proclamations have already been spread broadcast over +the country, saying that the king has no quarrel with the people of +Poland, but, as their sovereign has, without the slightest +provocation, embarked on a war, he must fight against him and his +Saxon troops, until they are driven from the country. This you will +repeat, and will urge that it will be infinitely better that Poland +herself should cast out the man who has embroiled her with Sweden, +than that the country should be the scene of a long and sanguinary +struggle, in which large districts will necessarily be laid waste, +all trade be arrested, and grievous suffering inflicted upon the +people at large. + +"You can say that King Charles has already received promises of +support from a large number of nobles, and is most desirous that +the people of the large towns, and especially of the capital, +should use their influence in his favour. That he has himself no +ambition, and no end to serve save to obtain peace and tranquillity +for his country, and that it will be free for the people of Poland +to elect their own monarch, when once Augustus of Saxony has +disappeared from the scene. + +"In this sealed packet you will find a list of influential +citizens. It has been furnished me by one well acquainted with the +place. The Jews are to be assured that, in case of a friendly +monarch being placed on the throne, Charles will make a treaty with +him, insuring freedom of commerce to the two countries, and will +also use his friendly endeavours to obtain, from the king and Diet, +an enlargement of the privileges that the Jews enjoy. To the +foreign merchants you will hold the same language, somewhat +altered, to suit their condition and wants. + +"You are not asking them to organize any public movement, the time +has not yet come for that; but simply to throw the weight of their +example and influence against the party of the Saxons. Of course +our friends in Warsaw have been doing their best to bring round +public opinion in the capital to this direction, but the country is +so torn by perpetual intrigues, that the trading classes hold aloof +altogether from quarrels in which they have no personal interest, +and are slow to believe that they can be seriously affected by any +changes which will take place. + +"Our envoy will start tomorrow morning. His mission is an open one. +He goes to lay certain complaints, to propose an exchange of +prisoners, and to open negotiations for peace. All these are but +pretences. His real object is to enter into personal communication +with two or three powerful personages, well disposed towards us. + +"Come again to me this evening, when you have thought the matter +over. I shall then be glad to hear any suggestion you may like to +make." + +"There is one thing, sir, that I should like to ask you. It will +evidently be of great advantage to me, if I can obtain private +letters of introduction to Scotch traders in the city. This I +cannot do, unless by mentioning the fact that I am bound for +Warsaw. Have I your permission to do so, or is it to be kept a +close secret?" + +"No. I see no objection to your naming it to anyone you can +implicitly trust, and who may, as you think, be able to give you +such introductions, but you must impress upon them that the matter +must be kept a secret. Doubtless the Saxons have in their pay +people in our camp, just as we have in theirs, and were word of +your going sent, you would find yourself watched, and perhaps +arrested. We should, of course wish you to be zealous in your +mission, but I would say, do not be over anxious. We are not trying +to get up a revolution in Warsaw, but seeking to ensure that the +feeling in the city should be in our favour; and this, we think, +may be brought about, to some extent, by such assurances as you can +give of the king's friendship, and by such expressions of a belief +in the justice of our cause, and in the advantages there would be +in getting rid of this foreign prince, as might be said openly by +one trader to another, when men meet in their exchanges or upon the +street. So that the ball is once set rolling, it may be trusted to +keep in motion, and there can be little doubt that such expressions +of feeling, among the mercantile community of the capital, will +have some effect even upon nobles who pretend to despise trade, but +who are not unfrequently in debt to traders, and who hold their +views in a certain respect." + +"Thank you, sir. At what time shall I come this evening?" + +"At eight o'clock. By that time, I may have thought out farther +details for your guidance." + + + +Chapter 9: In Warsaw. + + +Upon leaving the quarters of Count Piper, Charlie returned to the +camp, and, after discussing the matter with Major Jervoise, +proceeded with him to the colonel's hut. + +"Well, you look brighter this morning, Carstairs. Are you better +pleased, now you have thought the matter over?" + +"Yes, sir. What you said last night has been quite confirmed by +Count Piper, and the matter does not really seem so difficult. I am +merely, as a foreigner in the employment of the King of Sweden, to +talk with foreigners in Warsaw, to assure them that the king is +sincere in his desire to avoid war with Poland, and will gladly +make a lasting peace between the two countries, to urge upon them +to show themselves favourable to his project for securing such a +peace, by forcing Augustus to resign the crown, and to use what +influence they can in that direction, both upon their fellow +traders and upon the Poles." + +"There is nothing very difficult about that," Colonel Jamieson said +cheerfully, "as it happens to be quite true; and there can be no +real question as to the true interest of Poland, and especially of +the trading classes in the great towns, from whom heavy +contributions towards the expenses of war are always exacted by +their own rulers, and who have to pay a ruinous ransom in case of +their city being captured by the enemy. The traders of Warsaw will +need no reminder of such well-known facts, and will be only too +glad to be assured that, unless as a last resource, our king has no +intention of making war upon Poland, and they will certainly be +inclined to bestir themselves to avert such a possibility. You +have, I suppose, a list of names of the people with whom you had +best put yourself into communication?" + +"Yes, sir. Here is a list. There are, I see, ten Scotchmen, fifteen +Frenchmen, and about as many Jews." + +"I know nothing of the Frenchmen, and less of the Jews," the +colonel said, taking the list; "but I ought to know some of the +Scotchmen. They will hail from Dundee and Glasgow, and, it may be, +Dumfries." + +He ran his eye down the list. + +"Aha! Here is one, and we need go no further. Allan Ramsay; we were +lads together at the High School of Glasgow, and were classmates at +the College. His father was a member of the city council, and was +one of the leading traders in the city. Allan was a wild lad, as I +was myself, and many a scrape did we get into together, and had +many a skirmish with the watch. Allan had two or three half +brothers, men from ten to twenty years older than himself, and, a +year or two after I came out to Sweden and entered the army as an +ensign, who should I meet in the streets of Gottenburg, but Allan +Ramsay. + +"We were delighted to see each other, and he stopped with me nearly +a week. He had, after leaving the College, gone into his father's +business, but when the old man died he could not get on with his +half brothers, who were dour men, and had little patience with +Allan's restlessness and love of pleasure. So, after a final +quarrel, they had given him so much money for his share of the +business, and a letter of introduction to a trader in Poland, who +had written to them saying that he wanted a partner with some +capital; and Allan was willing enough to try the life in a strange +country, for he was a shrewd fellow, with all his love of fun. + +"Five years afterwards, he came through Gottenburg again. I did not +see him, for my regiment was at Stockholm at the time, but he wrote +me a letter saying that he had been in Scotland to marry and bring +back one Janet Black, the daughter of a mercer, whom I remember +well enough as an old flame of his. + +"He reported that he was doing well, and that the Poles were not +bad fellows to live among, though less punctual in their payments +than might be wished. He said he did not suppose that, as a Swedish +officer, I should ever be in Poland, unless Sweden produced another +Gustavus Adolphus; but if I was, he would be delighted to welcome +me, and that anyone I asked in Warsaw would direct me to his shop. +I wonder that I did not think of him before; but that is ten years +ago, and it had altogether passed out of my mind, till I saw his +name here. Unless he is greatly changed, you may be sure of a +hearty welcome from Allan Ramsay, for my sake. We need not trouble +about the other names. He will know all about them, and will be +able to put you in the way of getting at them." + +This was a great relief to Charlie, who felt that it would be an +immense advantage to have the house of someone, from whom he might +expect a welcome, to go to on his arrival in Warsaw; and he was +able, during the day, to talk over the prospects of the journey, +with Harry Jervoise, with a real sense of interest and excitement +in his mission. + +In the evening, he again went to the house of the minister. The +latter, a close observer of men, saw at once that the young officer +was in much better spirits than he had been in the morning. + +"Have you obtained information respecting any of the persons whose +names I gave you?" he asked. + +"Yes, sir. It seems that, most fortunately, the trader named Allan +Ramsay is an old friend of Colonel Jamieson, and the colonel has +given me a letter to him which will, he assures me, procure me a +hearty welcome." + +"And have you thought anything more of your best plan of action?" + +"Yes, sir. It seems to me that I had better dress myself in an +attire such as might be worn by a young Scotchman, journeying +through the country to place himself with a relation established in +business. I could ride behind the royal envoy, as if I had received +permission to journey under the protection of his escort, and could +drop behind a few miles from the capital, and make my way in alone. +I could not, of course, inquire for Allan Ramsay in Polish, but I +know enough French to ask for him at any shop having a French name +over it, if I did not happen to light upon one kept by a +Scotchman." + +"Yes, that plan will do very well. But you will have no difficulty +in finding the house, as I have arranged that a man shall accompany +you as servant. He is a Lithuanian, and is the grandson of a +soldier of Gustavus Adolphus, who married and settled there. His +grandfather kept up his connection with his native country, and the +young fellow speaks Swedish fairly, and, of course, Polish. For the +last three weeks I have employed him in various matters, and find +him shrewd and, I believe, faithful. Such a fellow would be of +great use to you, and could, if necessary, act as your interpreter +in any interviews you may have with Polish Jews, although you will +find that most of these men speak other languages besides their +own." + +He touched a bell, and on a servant entering, said: + +"Bring Stanislas Bistron here." + +An active, well-built young fellow of some four and twenty years of +age entered the room a minute later. His fair hair and blue eyes +showed that he took after his Swedish ancestors. + +"This is the gentleman, Stanislas, that you are to accompany to +Warsaw, as his servant. You will obey him, in all respects, as if +he had hired you in his service, and, should he arrive at any +situation of danger or difficulty, I trust that you will not be +found wanting." + +The man had looked closely at Charlie. + +"I will do my best, sir, and I doubt not that the gentleman's +service will suit me. He has the look of one who would be kind to +his servants." + +"Wait at the outside door," the count said. "Captain Carstairs will +speak to you as he leaves." + +The man bowed and went out, and the count then said, with a smile +at the look of surprise on Charlie's face: + +"It was not a slip of the tongue. Here is a commission, signed by +his majesty, appointing you to the rank of captain, as he has long +considered that you had well won your promotion, by your suggestion +which enabled him to cross the Dwina without loss; but he thought +there would be a difficulty in placing you over the heads of so +many officers senior to yourself. This inconvenience no longer +exists, now that you have what may be considered a staff +appointment, and the rank may, moreover, add to your weight and +influence in your interviews with persons at Warsaw. + +"You will need money. Here is a purse for your expenses. You may +meet with some of these men, especially among the Jewish traders, +who may need a bribe. Bribery is common, from the highest to the +lowest, in Poland. You will find, in this letter of instructions, +that you are authorized to promise sums of money to men whose +assistance may be valuable. It is impossible to fix the sums. These +must depend upon the position of the men, and the value of their +services; and I can only say do not be lavish, but at the same time +do not hesitate to promise a sum that will secure the services of +useful men. Your best plan will be to find out, if you are able, +what each man expects, and to make what abatement you can. The only +limit placed is that you must not commit the royal treasury to a +total sum exceeding ten thousand crowns. You will, I hope, find a +smaller sum suffice. + +"The envoy will start at six tomorrow morning. I do not know that +there are any further instructions to give you. You will find +details, in these written instructions, as to the manner in which +you are to communicate, from time to time, the result of your +mission, and you will receive orders when to return." + +Outside the house, Charlie saw his new servant waiting him. + +"You have a horse, Stanislas?" + +"Yes, sir, I have been provided with one. I have also a brace of +pistols, and a sword." + +"I hope you will not have to use them, but in these disturbed times +they are necessaries." + +"I have better clothes than these, sir, if you wish me to look +gay." + +"By no means," Charlie replied. "I am going in the character of a +young Scotchman, on my way to join a relative in business in +Warsaw, and you accompany me in the capacity of guide and servant. +As I should not be in a position to pay high wages, the more humble +your appearance, the better. We start at six in the morning. The +envoy will leave the royal quarters at that hour, and we travel +with his escort. Join me a quarter of an hour before that at my +hut. You had better accompany me there now, so that you may know +the spot. I shall not require your services before we start, as my +soldier servant will saddle my horse, and have all in readiness." + +Harry came to the door of the hut, as he saw his friend +approaching. + +"Well, Charlie, is all satisfactorily settled? + +"Yes, quite satisfactorily, I think. That is my new servant. Count +Piper has appointed him. He speaks Swedish and Polish." + +"That will be a great comfort to you, Charlie. Jock Armstrong, who +has not picked up ten words of Swedish since he joined, would have +been worse than useless." + +"I have another piece of news, Harry, that I am in one way very +glad of, and in another sorry for. I had always hoped that we +should keep together, and that, just as we joined together, and +were made lieutenants at the same time, it would always be so." + +"You have got another step?" Harry exclaimed. "I am heartily glad +of it. I thought very likely you might get it. Indeed, I was +surprised that you did not get it, at once, after our fight with +the Saxons. I am sure you deserved it, if ever a fellow did, +considering what it saved us all." + +"Of course it is for that," Charlie replied, "though I think it is +very absurd. Count Piper said the king would have given it to me at +once, only it would have taken me over the heads of so many men +older than myself; but he considered that, now I am going on a sort +of staff work, away from the regiment, I could be promoted, and he +thought, too, that the title of Captain would assist me in my +mission." + +"Of course it will," Harry said, warmly. "That is just what I told +you, you know. This business was not quite to your liking, but it +was a good long step towards making your fortune. Don't you think +that I shall be jealous of your going ahead, for I am not in the +least. I am sorry you are going away, for I shall miss you +terribly; but I am quite content to be with the regiment, and to +work my way up gradually. As it is, I am senior lieutenant in the +regiment, and the first battle may give me my company; though I +don't expect it, for I do not think my father would wish the +colonel to give me the step, if it occurred, for all the other +lieutenants are older than we are, though they are junior to us in +the regiment, and I feel sure that he would prefer me to remain for +another two or three years as lieutenant. In fact, he said as much +to me, a short time ago. Still, when I am fit to command a company, +there is no doubt I shall get it. + +"Of course, I am sorry you are going, very sorry, Charlie; but, +even if you go altogether on to the staff, I shall see a good deal +of you, for, as the king is always with the army, this must be your +headquarters still. + +"I wonder how long you will be away. I like the look of the fellow +who is going with you. It was an honest, open sort of face, as far +as I saw it. At any rate, it is a comfort to think that you won't +be absolutely alone, especially among people whose language you +don't know. Mind, if you are sending letters to Count Piper, be +sure you send a few lines, by the same messenger, to let me know +how you are going on. Not long letters, you know; I expect you will +have your hands pretty well full; but just enough to give me an +idea of how you are, and what you are doing." + +The following morning, Charlie started. He had said goodbye to no +one, except the colonel, Major Jervoise, and Harry, as it was not +considered advisable that his departure with the envoy for Warsaw +should be talked about. He only joined the party, indeed, after +they had ridden out of the camp. He had laid aside his uniform, and +was dressed in clothes which Major Jervoise had procured for him, +from one of the last-joined recruits who had but just received his +uniform. The lieutenant commanding the escort of twenty troopers +rode up to him, as he joined the party. + +"Baron Seckers informs me that he has given permission to a young +Scotchman and his servant, travelling to Warsaw, to ride under his +protection. Are you the person in question, sir?" + +"It is all right, Lieutenant Eberstein," Charlie said, with a +smile. "Don't you recognize me?" + +"Of course--Lieutenant Carstairs. I was at the hunt where you were +taken prisoner; but I did not expect to see you in this garb." + +"I am going on duty," Charlie said, "and am dressed according to +orders. Do not address me by my name. I am at present Sandy +Anderson, going to join a relation in Warsaw." + +"Ah, ah! Is that so? Going to put your head into the den of the +Lion Augustus. Well, I rather envy you, for it is likely, by all +accounts, to be dull work here for some time. It is hard to be +sitting idle, while the Russian guns are thundering round Narva. +Now, I must join the baron again. Where would you rather +ride--after us, or behind the escort?" + +"Behind the escort. I think it will be more natural, and I can chat +more freely with my servant. He is a Lithuanian, but speaks +Swedish, and I hope to get some information from him." + +The lieutenant rode on, and, as he passed the troopers, he told +them that the two men behind had the baron's permission to ride +with them, in order that they might have protection from the bands +of pillagers who were roaming through the country. + +"Now, Stanislas," Charlie said. "We can talk freely together. Do +you know Warsaw?" + +"I have been there several times, sir, but I never stopped there +long. Still, I can find my way about the town." + +"When were you there last?" + +"Some two months ago. It was just before I entered the Swedish +service." + +"And what do the people say about the war?" + +"They are bitterly opposed to it. The king entered upon it without +consulting the diet, which was altogether contrary to the +constitution. It is true that the king may do so, in cases of +emergency, and obtain the sanction of the diet afterwards. There +was no urgency here, and the king made his agreement with the czar +and the king of Denmark without anyone knowing of it. He certainly +obtained a sort of sanction from the diet afterwards, but everyone +knows how these things are worked. He has a strong party, of +course, because it is the interest of a great many people to retain +him in power, as no one can say who would be chosen to succeed him. +But among the people in general, the traders and the peasants, he +is hated, and so are his Saxon soldiers. + +"Suppose he had gained a slice of Swedish territory. It would not +have benefited them; while, as it is, all sorts of misfortunes and +troubles have come upon the country, and none can say how much +greater may ensue. + +"Poland is always split up into parties. They used to unite against +the Turk, and they would unite again against the Swedes, if their +country was invaded; but as long as King Charles keeps his army +beyond the frontier, they are too deeply engaged in their own +quarrels to think of anything else." + +"Then, even if I were known, in the city, to be in the Swedish +service, there would be little danger, Stanislas?" + +"I do not say that, at all," the man said gravely. "In the first +place, Warsaw is held by Saxon soldiers, who would show you but +scant mercy, were you known to be a Swedish officer; and, in the +second place, the lower classes are ever ready to make tumults; +and, if worked upon by the archbishop, or the nobles of the king's +party, they would readily enough tear a stranger to pieces. + +"Going as you do as a Scotchman, there is, I hope, little danger, +especially if you are received into a Scottish household." + +The journey passed without incident, until they were within a few +miles of Warsaw, when Charlie, after formally thanking Baron +Seckers for the protection his escort had afforded him, fell behind +with his servant. Several parties of armed men had been met with, +but they knew better than to interfere with the little body of +Swedish cavalry; while, in the towns through which they passed, the +baron was respectfully received as the envoy of the dreaded King of +Sweden. + +"Is there another gate to the city, on this side of the town, +beside that by which the Swedes will enter? If so, it would be as +well to use it, so that there should seem to be no connection +between us and them," said Charlie. + +There was another gate, and by this they rode into Warsaw, at that +time a city of far greater importance than it is at present. The +gate was unguarded, and they passed through without question. The +citizens were talking excitedly in groups, evidently discussing the +question of the arrival of the Swedish envoy, and the chances of +peace; and no attention was paid to the travellers, whose +appearance denoted them to be persons of no importance. +Richly-attired nobles, in costumes of almost oriental magnificence, +galloped through the streets on splendid horses, scattering the +groups of citizens, and paying no attention whatever to the angry +murmurs that followed them. + +Charlie stopped at a small inn, and there the horses were put up. +Stanislas made inquiries for the shop of Allan Ramsay, mentioning +that his employer was a relation of the Scottish merchant, and had +come out to be with him, until he had learned the language. + +"The Scots know their business," the landlord grumbled. "They and +the French and the Jews, together, have their hand in everyone's +pocket. They buy the cattle and grain of the peasants, for what +they choose to give for them, and send them out of the country, +getting all the profits of the transaction; while, as to the +nobles, there is scarce one who is not deep in their books." + +"Still, you could not do without them," Stanislas said. "There must +be somebody to buy and to sell, and as the nobles won't do it, and +the peasants can't, I don't see that the foreigners are to be +blamed for coming in and taking the trade." + +"That is true enough," the landlord admitted reluctantly. "Still, +there is no doubt the country is kept poor, while, between them, +these men gather up the harvest." + +"Better that than let it rot upon the ground," Stanislas said +unconcernedly; and then, having obtained the name of the street +where several of the Scottish traders had places of business, he +and Charlie started on foot. They were not long in finding the shop +with the sign of the merchant swinging over the door. + +"You had better wait outside, Stanislas, while I go in and see the +master. No; if he is not in the shop, his men will not understand +me, so come in with me till you see that I have met him, and then +go back to the inn for the night. Whether I join you there will +depend upon the warmth of my welcome." + +Two or three young Poles were in the shop. Stanislas asked them for +Allan Ramsay, and they replied that he was taking his evening meal +upstairs, whereupon Charlie produced the letter from Colonel +Jamieson, and Stanislas requested one of them to take it up to the +merchant. Three minutes later the inner door opened, and a tall man +with a ruddy face and blue eyes entered, holding the open letter in +his hand. Charlie took a step forward to meet him. + +"So you are Sandy Anderson," he said heartily, with a merry twinkle +in his eye, "my connection, it seems, and the friend of my dear +classmate Jamieson? Come upstairs. Who is this Scotch-looking lad +with you?" + +"He is my servant and interpreter. His grandfather was a Swede, and +to him he owes his fair hair and complexion. He is a Lithuanian. He +is to be trusted, I hope, thoroughly. He was sent with me by--" + +"Never mind names," the Scotchman said hastily. "We will talk about +him afterwards. Now come upstairs. Your letter has thrown me quite +into a flutter. + +"Never say anything in English before those Poles," he said, as he +left the shop; "the fellows pick up languages as easily as I can +drink whisky, when I get the chance. One of them has been with me +two years, and it is quite likely he understands, at any rate, +something of what is said. + +"Here we are." + +He opened a door, and ushered Charlie into a large room, +comfortably furnished. His wife, a boy eight years of age, and a +girl a year older, were seated at the table. + +"Janet," the merchant said, "this is Captain Carstairs, alias Sandy +Anderson, a connection of ours, though I cannot say, for certain, +of what degree." + +"What are you talking of, Allan?" she asked in surprise; for her +husband, after opening and partly reading the letter, had jumped up +and run off without saying a word. + +"What I say, wife. This gentleman is, for the present, Sandy +Anderson, who has come out to learn the business and language, with +the intent of some day entering into partnership with me; also, +which is more to the point, he is a friend of my good friend Jock +Jamieson, whom you remember well in the old days." + +"I am very glad, indeed, to see any friend of Jock Jamieson," Janet +Ramsay said warmly, holding out her hand to Charlie, "though I do +not in the least understand what my husband is talking about, or +what your name really is." + +"My name is Carstairs, madam. I am a captain in the Swedish +service, and am here on a mission for King Charles. Colonel +Jamieson, for he is now colonel of the regiment to which I +belong--" + +"What!" the merchant exclaimed. "Do you mean to say that our Jock +Jamieson is a colonel? Well, well, who would have thought he would +have climbed the tree so quickly?" + +"It is a regiment entirely of Scotch and Englishmen," Charlie said; +"and he was promoted, to take its command, only a short time +since." + +"Well, please to sit down and join us," Mrs. Ramsay said. "It is +bad manners, indeed, to keep you talking while the meat is getting +cold on the table. When you have finished, it will be time enough +to question you." + +While the meal was going on, however, many questions were asked as +to Colonel Jamieson, the regiment, and its officers. + +"As soon as matters are more settled," the merchant said, "I will +give myself a holiday, and Janet and I will go and spend a few days +with Jock. Many of the names of the officers are well known to me, +and two or three of the captains were at Glasgow College with Jock +and myself. It will be like old times, to have four or five of us +talking over the wild doings we had together." + +The supper over, the children were sent off to bed. Allan Ramsay +lit a long pipe. A bottle of wine and two glasses were placed on +the table, and Mrs. Ramsay withdrew, to see after domestic matters, +and prepare a room for Charlie. + +"Now, lad, tell me all about it," Allan Ramsay said. "Jock tells me +you are here on a mission, which he would leave it to yourself to +explain; but it is no business of mine, and, if you would rather +keep it to yourself, I will ask no questions." + +"There is no secret about it, as far as you are concerned, Mr. +Ramsay, for it is to you and to other merchants here that I have +come to talk it over;" and he then went fully into the subject. + +The Scotchman sat, smoking his pipe in silence, for some minutes +after he had concluded. + +"We do not much meddle with politics here. We have neither voice +nor part in the making of kings or of laws, and, beyond that we +like to have a peace-loving king, it matters little to us whom the +diet may set up over us. If we were once to put the tips of our +fingers into Polish affairs, we might give up all thought of trade. +They are forever intriguing and plotting, except when they are +fighting; and it would be weary work to keep touch with it all, +much less to take part in it. It is our business to buy and to +sell, and so that both parties come to us, it matters little; one's +money is as good as the other. If I had one set of creditors deeper +in my books than another, I might wish their party to gain the day, +for it would, maybe, set them up in funds, and I might get my +money; but, as it is, it matters little. There is not a customer I +have but is in my debt. Money is always scarce with them; for they +are reckless and extravagant, keeping a horde of idle loons about +them, spending as much money on their own attire and that of their +wives as would keep a whole Scotch clan in victuals. But, if they +cannot pay in money, they can pay in corn or in cattle, in wine or +in hides. + +"I do not know which they are fondest of--plotting, or fighting, or +feasting; and yet, reckless as they are, they are people to like. +If they do sell their votes for money, it is not a Scotchman that +should throw it in their teeth; for there is scarce a Scotch noble, +since the days of Bruce, who has not been ready to sell himself for +English gold. Our own Highlanders are as fond of fighting as the +Poles, and their chiefs are as profuse in hospitality, and as +reckless and spendthrift. + +"But the Poles have their virtues. They love their country, and are +ready to die for her. They are courteous, and even chivalrous, they +are hospitable to an excess, they are good husbands and kindly +masters, they are recklessly brave; and, if they are unduly fond of +finery, I, who supply so many of them, should be the last to find +fault with them on that score. They are proud, and look down upon +us traders, but that does not hurt us; and, if they were to take to +trading themselves, there would be no place for us here. But this +has nothing to do with our present purpose. + +"Certainly, if it was a question of Polish affairs, neither the +foreign nor the Jewish merchants here would move a finger one way +or the other. We have everything to lose, and nothing to gain. +Suppose we took sides with one of the parties, and the other got +the upper hand. Why, they might make ordinances hampering us in +every way, laying heavy taxes on us, forbidding the export of +cattle or horses, and making our lives burdensome. True, if they +drove us out they would soon have to repeal the law, for all trade +would be at an end. But that would be too late for many of us. + +"However, I do not say that, at the present time, many would not be +disposed to do what they could against Augustus of Saxony. We are +accustomed to civil wars; and, though these may cause misery and +ruin, in the districts where they take place, they do not touch us +here in the capital. But this is a different affair. Augustus has, +without reason or provocation, brought down your fiery King of +Sweden upon us; and, if he continues on the throne, we may hear the +Swedish cannon thundering outside our walls, and may have the city +taken and sacked. Therefore, for once, politics become our natural +business. + +"But, though you may find many well wishers, I doubt if you can +obtain any substantial aid. With Saxon troops in the town, and the +nobles divided, there is no hope of a successful rising in Warsaw." + +"The king did not think of that," Charlie said. "His opinion was, +that were it evident that the citizens of Warsaw were strongly +opposed to Augustus of Saxony, it would have a great moral effect, +and that, perhaps, they might influence some of the nobles who, as +you say, are deeply in their books, or upon whose estates they may +hold mortgages, to join the party against the king." + +"They might do something that way," Allan Ramsay agreed. "Of +course, I have no money out on mortgages. I want badly enough all +the money I can lay hands on in my own business. Giving credit, as +we have to, and often very long credit, it requires a large capital +to carry on trade. But the Jews, who no doubt do hold large +mortgages on the land, cannot exert much power. They cannot hold +land themselves, and, were one of them to venture to sell the +property of any noble of influence, he would be ruined. The whole +class would shrink from him, and, like enough, there would be a +tumult got up, his house would be burned over his head, and he and +his family murdered. + +"Still, as far as popular opinion goes, something might be done. At +any rate, I will get some of my friends here tomorrow, and +introduce you to them and talk it over. But we must be careful, for +Augustus has a strong party here, and, were it suspected that you +are a Swedish officer, it would go very hard with you. + +"Tomorrow you must fetch your servant here. I have already sent +round to the inn, and you will find your valises in your room. You +said you could rely thoroughly upon him?" + +"Yes, he was handed over to me by Count Piper himself; and +moreover, from what I have seen of him, I am myself confident that +he can be trusted. He is of Swedish descent, and is, I think, a +very honest fellow." + +For a fortnight, Charlie remained at Allan Ramsay's, and then, in +spite of the pressing entreaties of his host and hostess, took a +lodging near them. He had, by this time, seen a good many of the +leading traders of the town. The Scotch and Frenchmen had all +heartily agreed with his argument, that it was for the benefit of +Poland, and especially for that of Warsaw, that Augustus of Saxony +should be replaced by another king, who would be acceptable to +Charles of Sweden; but all were of opinion that but little could be +done, by them, towards bringing about this result. + +With the Jewish traders his success was less decided. They admitted +that it would be a great misfortune, were Warsaw taken by the +Swedes, but, as Poles, they retained their confidence in the +national army, and were altogether sceptical that a few thousand +Swedes could withstand the host that could be put in the field +against them. + +Several of them pointedly asked what interest they had in the +matter, and, to some of these, Charlie was obliged to use his power +of promising sums of money, in case of success. + +There were one or two, however, of whom he felt doubtful. Chief +among these was Ben Soloman Muller, a man of great influence in the +Jewish community. This man had placed so large a value upon his +services, that Charlie did not feel justified in promising him such +a sum. He did not like the man's face, and did not rely upon the +promises of silence he had given, before the mission was revealed +to him. It was for this reason, principally, that he determined to +go into lodgings. Should he be denounced, serious trouble might +fall upon Allan Ramsay, and it would at least minimize this risk, +were he not living at his house when he was arrested. Ramsay +himself was disposed to make light of the danger. + +"I believe myself that Ben Soloman is an old rogue, but he is not a +fool. He cannot help seeing that the position of the king is +precarious, and, were he to cause your arrest, he might get little +thanks and no profit, while he would be incurring the risk of the +vengeance of Charles, should he ever become master of the town. Did +he have you arrested, he himself would be forced to appear as a +witness against you, and this he could hardly do without the matter +becoming publicly known. + +"I do not say, however, that, if he could curry favour with the +king's party by doing you harm, without appearing in the matter, he +would hesitate for a moment. + +"Even if you were arrested here, I doubt whether any great harm +would befall me, for all the Scotch merchants would make common +cause with me, and, although we have no political power, we have a +good deal of influence one way or another, and Augustus, at this +time, would not care to make fresh enemies. However, lad, I will +not further dispute your decision. Were I quite alone, I would not +let you leave me, so long as you stop in this city, without taking +great offence; but, with a wife and two children, a man is more +timid than if he had but himself to think of." + +Charlie therefore moved into the lodging, but every day he went for +three or four hours to the shop, where he kept up his assumed +character by aiding to keep the ledgers, and in learning from the +Polish assistants the value of the various goods in the shop. + +One evening, he was returning after supper to his lodging, when +Stanislas met him. + +"I observed three or four evil-looking rascals casting glances at +the house today, and there are several rough-looking fellows +hanging about the house this evening. I do not know if it means +anything, but I thought I would let you know." + +"I think it must be only your fancy, Stanislas. I might be arrested +by the troops, were I denounced, but I apprehend no danger from men +of the class you speak of. However, if we should be interfered +with, I fancy we could deal with several rascals of that sort." + +At the corner of his street, three or four men were standing. One +of them moved, as he passed, and pushed rudely against him, sending +his hat into the gutter. Then, as his face was exposed, the fellow +exclaimed: + +"It is he, death to the Swedish spy!" + +They were the last words he uttered. Charlie's sword flew from its +scabbard, and, with a rapid pass, he ran the man through the body. +The others drew instantly, and fell upon Charlie with fury, keeping +up the shout of, "Death to the Swedish spy!" It was evidently a +signal--for men darted out of doorways, and came running down the +street, repeating the cry. + +"Go, Stanislas!" Charlie shouted, as he defended himself against a +dozen assailants. "Tell Ramsay what has happened; you can do no +good here." + +A moment later, he received a tremendous blow on the back of the +head, from an iron-bound cudgel, and fell senseless to the ground. + + + +Chapter 10: In Evil Plight. + + +When Charlie recovered his senses, he found himself lying bound in +a room lighted by a dim lamp, which sufficed only to show that the +beams were blackened by smoke and age, and the walls constructed of +rough stone work. There was, so far as he could see, no furniture +whatever in it, and he imagined that it was an underground cellar, +used perhaps, at some time or other, as a storeroom. It was some +time before his brain was clear enough to understand what had +happened, or how he had got into his present position. Gradually +the facts came back to him, and he was able to think coherently, in +spite of a splitting headache, and a dull, throbbing pain at the +back of his head. + +"I was knocked down and stunned," he said to himself, at last. "I +wonder what became of Stanislas. I hope he got away. + +"This does not look like a prison. I should say that it was a +cellar, in the house of one of the gang that set upon me. It is +evident that someone has betrayed me, probably that Jew, Ben +Soloman. What have they brought me here for? I wonder what are they +going to do with me." + +His head, however, hurt him too much for him to continue the strain +of thought, and, after a while, he dozed off to sleep. When he +awoke, a faint light was streaming in through a slit, two or three +inches wide, high up on the wall. He still felt faint and dizzy, +from the effects of the blow. Parched with thirst, he tried to call +out for water, but scarce a sound came from his lips. + +Gradually, the room seemed to darken and become indistinct, and he +again lapsed into insensibility. When he again became conscious, +someone was pouring water between his lips, and he heard a voice +speaking loudly and angrily. He had picked up a few words of Polish +from Stanislas--the names of common things, the words to use in +case he lost his way, how to ask for food and for stabling for a +horse, but he was unable to understand what was said. He judged, +however, that someone was furiously upbraiding the man who was +giving him water, for the latter now and then muttered excuses. + +"He is blowing the fellow up, for having so nearly let me slip +through their fingers," he said to himself. "Probably they want to +question me, and find out who I have been in communication with. +They shall get nothing, at present, anyhow." + +He kept his eyes resolutely closed. Presently, he heard a door +open, and another man come in. A few words were exchanged, and, +this time, wine instead of water was poured down his throat. Then +he was partly lifted up, and felt a cooling sensation at the back +of his head. Some bandages were passed round it, and he was laid +down again. There was some more conversation, then a door opened +and two of the men went out; the third walked back to him, +muttering angrily to himself. + +Charlie felt sure that he had been moved from the place in which he +had been the evening before. His bonds had been loosed, and he was +lying on straw, and not on the bare ground. Opening his eyelids the +slightest possible degree, he was confirmed in his belief, by +seeing that there was much more light than could have entered the +cellar. He dared not look farther, and, in a short time, fell into +a far more refreshing sleep than that he before had. + +The next time he woke his brain was clearer, though there was still +a dull sense of pain where he had been struck. Without opening his +eyes, he listened attentively. There was some sound of movement in +the room, and, presently, he heard a faint regular breathing. This +continued for some time, and he then heard a sort of grunt. + +"He is asleep," he said to himself, and, opening his eyes slightly +looked round. He was in another chamber. It was grimy with dirt, +and almost as unfurnished as the cellar, but there was a window +through which the sun was streaming brightly. He, himself, lay upon +a heap of straw. At the opposite side of the room was a similar +heap, and upon this a man was sitting, leaning against the wall, +with his chin dropped on his chest. + +The thought of escape at once occurred to Charlie. Could he reach +the window, which was without glass and a mere opening in the wall, +without awakening his guard, he could drop out and make for Allan +Ramsay's. As soon as he tried to move, however, he found that this +idea was for the present impracticable. He felt too weak to lift +his head, and, at the slight rustle of straw caused by the attempt, +the man opposite roused himself with a start. + +He gave another slight movement, and then again lay quiet with his +eyes closed. The man came across and spoke, but he made no sign. +Some more wine was poured between his lips, then the man returned +to his former position, and all was quiet. + +As he lay thinking his position over, Charlie thought that those +who had set his assailants to their work must have had two +objects--the one to put a stop to his efforts to organize an +agitation against the king, the second to find out, by questioning +him, who were those with whom he had been in communication, in +order that they might be arrested, and their property confiscated. +He could see no other reason why his life should be spared by his +assailants, for it would have been easier, and far less +troublesome, to run him through as he lay senseless on the ground, +than to carry him off and keep him a prisoner. + +This idea confirmed the suspicion he had first entertained, that +the assault had been organized by Ben Soloman. He could have no +real interest in the king, for he was ready to join in the +organization against him, could he have obtained his own terms. He +might intend to gain credit with the royal party, by claiming to +have stopped a dangerous plot, and at the same time to benefit +himself, by bringing about the expulsion or death of many of his +foreign trade rivals. For this end, the Jew would desire that he +should be taken alive, in order to serve as a witness against the +others. + +"He will not get any names from me," he said. "Besides, none of +them have promised to take any active measures against Augustus. I +did not ask them to do so. There is no high treason in trying to +influence public opinion. Still, it is likely enough that the Jew +wants to get me to acknowledge that an insurrection was intended, +and will offer me my freedom, if I will give such testimony. As I +am altogether in his power, the only thing to do is to pretend to +be a great deal worse than I am, and so to gain time, till I am +strong enough to try to get away from this place." + +All this was not arrived at, at once, but was the result of +half-dreamy cogitation extending over hours, and interrupted by +short snatches of sleep. He was conscious that, from time to time, +someone came into the room and spoke to his guard; and that, three +or four times, wine was poured between his lips. Once he was raised +up, and fresh cloths, dipped in water, and bandages applied to his +head. + +In the evening, two or three men came in, and he believed that he +recognized the voice of one of them as that of Ben Soloman. One of +the men addressed him suddenly and sharply in Swedish. + +"How are you feeling? Are you in pain? We have come here to give +you your freedom." + +Charlie was on his guard, and remained silent, with his eyes +closed. + +"It is of no use," Ben Soloman said in his own language. "The +fellow is still insensible. The clumsy fool who hit him would fare +badly, if I knew who he was. I said that he was to be knocked down, +silenced, and brought here; and here he is, of no more use than if +he were dead." + +"He will doubtless come round, in time," another said in an +apologetic tone. "We will bring him round, if you will have +patience, Ben Soloman." + +"Well, well," the other replied, "a few days will make no +difference; but mind that he is well guarded, directly he begins to +gain strength. I will get him out of the town, as soon as I can. +Allan Ramsay has laid a complaint, before the mayor, that his +countryman has been attacked by a band of ruffians, and has been +either killed or carried off by them. It is a pity that servant of +his was not killed." + +"We thought he was dead. Two or three of us looked at him, and I +could have sworn that life was out of him." + +"Well, then, you would have sworn what was not true, for he managed +to crawl to Ramsay's, where he lies, I am told, dangerously ill, +and an official has been to him, to obtain his account of the fray. +It was a bungled business, from beginning to end." + +"We could not have calculated on the fellows making such a +resistance," the other grumbled. "This one seemed but a lad, and +yet he killed three of our party, and the other killed one. A nice +business that; and you will have to pay their friends well, Ben +Soloman, for I can tell you there is grumbling at the price, which +they say was not enough for the work, which you told them would be +easy." + +"It ought to have been," the Jew said sullenly. "Fifteen or twenty +men to overpower a lad. What could have been more easy? However, I +will do something for the friends of the men who were fools enough +to get themselves killed, but if I hear any grumbling from the +others, it will be worse for them; there is not one I could not lay +by the heels in jail. + +"Well, as to this young fellow, I shall not come again. I do not +want to be noticed coming here. Keep a shrewd lookout after him." + +"There is no fear about that," the man said. "It will be long ere +he is strong enough to walk." + +"When he gets better, we will have him taken away to a safe place +outside the town. Once there, I can make him say what I like." + +"And if he does not get well?" + +"In that case, we will take away his body and bury it outside. I +will see to that myself." + +"I understand," the other sneered. "You don't want anyone to know +where it is buried, so as to be able to bring it up against you." + +"You attend to your own business," the Jew said angrily. "Why +should I care about what they say? At any rate, there are some +matters between you and me, and there is no fear of your speaking." + +"Not until the time comes when I may think it worth my while to +throw away my life, in order to secure your death, Ben Soloman." + +"It is of no use talking like that," the Jew said quietly. "We are +useful to each other. I have saved your life from the gibbet, you +have done the work I required. Between us, it is worse than +childish to threaten in the present matter. I do not doubt that you +will do your business well, and you know that you will be well paid +for it; what can either of us require more?" + +Charlie would have given a good deal to understand the +conversation, and he would have been specially glad to learn that +Stanislas had escaped with his life; for he had taken a great fancy +to the young Lithuanian, and was grieved by the thought that he had +probably lost his life in his defence. + +Three days passed. His head was now clear, and his appetite +returning, and he found, by quietly moving at night, when his guard +was asleep, that he was gaining strength. The third day, there was +some talking among several men who entered the room; then he was +lifted, wrapt up in some cloths, and put into a large box. He felt +this being hoisted up, it was carried downstairs, and then placed +on something. A minute afterwards he felt a vibration, followed by +a swaying and bumping, and guessed at once that he was on a cart, +and was being removed, either to prison or to some other place of +confinement. The latter he considered more probable. + +The journey was a long one. He had no means of judging time, but he +thought that it must have lasted two or three hours. Then the +rumbling ceased, the box was lifted down, and carried a short +distance, then the lid was opened and he was again laid down on +some straw. He heard the sound of cart wheels, and knew that the +vehicle on which he had been brought was being driven away. + +He was now so hungry that he felt he could no longer maintain the +appearance of insensibility. Two men were talking in the room, and +when, for a moment, their conversation ceased, he gave a low groan, +and then opened his eyes. They came at once to his bedside, with +exclamations of satisfaction. + +"How do you feel?" one asked in Swedish. + +"I do not know," he said in a low tone. "Where am I, how did I get +here?" + +"You are with friends. Never mind how you got here. You have been +ill, but you will soon get well again. Someone hit you on the head, +and we picked you up and brought you here." + +"I am weak and faint," Charlie murmured. "Have you any food?" + +"You shall have some food, directly it is prepared. Take a drink of +wine, and see if you can eat a bit of bread while the broth is +preparing." + +Charlie drank a little of the wine that was put to his lips, and +then broke up the bread, and ate it crumb by crumb, as if it were a +great effort to do so, although he had difficulty in restraining +himself from eating it voraciously. When he had finished it, he +closed his eyes again, as if sleep had overpowered him. An hour +later, there was a touch on his shoulder. + +"Here is some broth, young fellow. Wake up and drink that, it will +do you good." + +Charlie, as before, slowly sipped down the broth, and then really +fell asleep, for the jolting had fatigued him terribly. + +It was evening when he awoke. Two men were sitting at a blazing +fire. When he moved, one of them brought him another basin of +broth, and fed him with a spoon. + +Charlie had been long enough in the country to know, by the +appearance of the room, that he was in a peasant's hut. He wondered +why he had been brought there, and concluded that it must be +because Allan Ramsay had set so stringent a search on foot in the +city, that they considered it necessary to take him away. + +"They will not keep me here long," he said to himself. "I am sure +that I could walk now, and, in another two or three days, I shall +be strong enough to go some distance. That soup has done me a deal +of good. I believe half my weakness is from hunger." + +He no longer kept up the appearance of unconsciousness, and, in the +morning, put various questions, to the man who spoke Swedish, as to +what had happened and how he came to be there. This man was +evidently, from his dress and appearance, a Jew, while the other +was as unmistakably a peasant, a rough powerfully-built man with an +evil face. The Jew gave him but little information, but told him +that in a day or two, when he was strong enough to listen, a friend +would come who would tell him all about it. + +On the third day, he heard the sound of an approaching horse, and +was not surprised when, after a conversation in a low tone outside, +Ben Soloman entered. Charlie was now much stronger, but he had +carefully abstained from showing any marked improvement, speaking +always in a voice a little above a whisper, and allowing the men to +feed him, after making one or two pretended attempts to convey the +spoon to his mouth. + +"Well, Master Englishman," Ben Soloman said, as he came up to his +bedside, "what do you think of things?" + +"I do not know what to think," Charlie said feebly. "I do not know +where I am, or why I am here. I remember that there was a fray in +the street, and I suppose I was hurt. But why was I brought here, +instead of being taken to my lodgings?" + +"Because you would be no use to me in your lodging, and you may be +a great deal of use to me here," Ben Soloman said. "You know you +endeavoured to entrap me into a plot against the king's life." + +Charlie shook his head, and looked wonderingly at the speaker. + +"No, no," he said, "there was no plot against the king's life. I +only asked if you would use your influence among your friends to +turn popular feeling against Augustus." + +"Nothing of the kind," the Jew said harshly. "You wanted him +removed by poison or the knife. There is no mistake about that, and +that is what I am going to swear, and what, if you want to save +your life, you will have to swear too; and you will have to give +the names of all concerned in the plot, and to swear that they were +all agreed to bring about the death of the king. Now you understand +why you were brought here. You are miles away from another house, +and you may shout and scream as loud as you like. You are in my +power." + +"I would die rather than make a false accusation." + +"Listen to me," the Jew said sternly. "You are weak now, too weak +to suffer much. This day week I will return, and then you had best +change your mind, and sign a document I shall bring with me, with +the full particulars of the plot to murder the king, and the names +of those concerned in it. This you will sign. I shall take it to +the proper authorities, and obtain a promise that your life shall +be spared, on condition of your giving evidence against these +persons." + +"I would never sign such a villainous document," Charlie said. + +"You will sign it," Ben Soloman said calmly. "When you find +yourself roasting over a slow charcoal fire, you will be ready to +sign anything I wish you to." + +So saying, he turned and left the room. He talked for some time to +the men outside, then Charlie heard him ride off. + +"You villain," he said to himself. "When you come, at the end of a +week, you will not find me here; but, if I get a chance of having a +reckoning with you, it will be bad for you." + +Charlie's progress was apparently slow. The next day he was able to +sit up and feed himself. Two days later he could totter across the +room, and lie down before the fire. The men were completely +deceived by his acting, and, considering any attempt to escape, in +his present weak state, altogether impossible, paid but little heed +to him, the peasant frequently absenting himself for hours +together. + +Looking from his window, Charlie saw that the hut was situated in a +thick wood, and, from the blackened appearance of the peasant's +face and garments, he guessed him to be a charcoal burner, and +therefore judged that the trees he saw must form part of a forest +of considerable extent. + +The weather was warm, and his other guard often sat, for a while, +outside the door. During his absence, Charlie lifted the logs of +wood piled beside the hearth, and was able to test his returning +strength, assuring himself that, although not yet fully recovered, +he was gaining ground daily. He resolved not to wait until the +seventh day; for Ben Soloman might change his mind, and return +before the day he had named. He determined, therefore, that on the +sixth day he would make the attempt. + +He had no fear of being unable to overcome his Jewish guard, as he +would have the advantage of a surprise. He only delayed as long as +possible, because he doubted his powers of walking any great +distance, and of evading the charcoal burner, who would, on his +return, certainly set out in pursuit of him. Moreover, he wished to +remain in the hut nearly up to the time of the Jew's return, as he +was determined to wait in the forest, and revenge himself for the +suffering he had caused him, and for the torture to which he +intended to put him. + +The evening before the day on which he decided to make the attempt, +the charcoal burner and the Jew were in earnest conversation. The +word signifying brigand was frequently repeated, and, although he +could not understand much more than this, he concluded, from the +peasant's talk and gestures, that he had either come across some of +these men in the forest, or had gathered from signs he had +observed, perhaps from their fires, that they were there. + +The Jew shrugged his shoulders when the narration was finished. The +presence of brigands was a matter of indifference to him. The next +day, the charcoal burner went off at noon. + +"Where does he go to?" Charlie asked his guard. + +"He has got some charcoal fires alight, and is obliged to go and +see to them. They have to be kept covered up with wet leaves and +earth, so that the wood shall only smoulder," the man said, as he +lounged out of the hut to his usual seat. + +Charlie waited a short time, then went to the pile of logs, and +picked out a straight stick about a yard long and two inches in +diameter. With one of the heavier ones he could have killed the +man, but the fellow was only acting under the orders of his +employer, and, although he would doubtless, at Ben Soloman's +commands, have roasted him alive without compunction, he had not +behaved with any unkindness, and had, indeed, seemed to do his best +for him. + +Taking the stick, he went to the door. He trod lightly, but in the +stillness of the forest the man heard him, and glanced round as he +came out. + +Seeing the stick in his hand he leaped up, exclaiming, "You young +fool!" and sprang towards him. + +He had scarce time to feel surprise, as Charlie quickly raised the +club. It described a swift sweep, fell full on his head, and he +dropped to the ground as if shot. + +Charlie ran in again, seized a coil of rope, bound his hands and +feet securely, and dragged him into the hut. Then he dashed some +cold water on his face. The man opened his eyes, and tried to move. + +"You are too tightly bound to move, Pauloff," he said. "I could +have killed you if I had chosen, but I did not wish to. You have +not been unkind to me, and I owe you no grudge; but tell your +rascally employer that I will be even with him, someday, for the +evil he has done me." + +"You might as well have killed me," the man said, "for he will do +so when he finds I let you escape." + +"Then my advice to you is, be beforehand with him. You are as +strong a man as he is, and if I were in your place, and a man who +meant to kill me came into a lonely hut like this, I would take +precious good care that he had no chance of carrying out his +intentions." + +Charlie then took two loaves of black bread and a portion of goat's +flesh from the cupboard; found a bottle about a quarter full of +coarse spirits, filled it up with water and put it in his pocket, +and then, after taking possession of the long knife his captive +wore in his belt, went out of the hut and closed the door behind +him. + +He had purposely moved slowly about the hut, as he made these +preparations, in order that the Jew should believe that he was +still weak; but, indeed, the effort of dragging the man into the +hut had severely taxed his strength, and he found that he was much +weaker than he had supposed. + +The hut stood in a very small clearing, and Charlie had no +difficulty in seeing the track by which the cart had come, for the +marks of the wheels were still visible in the soft soil. He +followed this until, after about two miles' walking, he came to the +edge of the wood. Then he retraced his steps for a quarter of a +mile, turned off, and with some difficulty made his way into a +patch of thick undergrowth, where, after first cutting a formidable +cudgel, he lay down, completely exhausted. + +Late in the afternoon he was aroused from a doze by the sound of +footsteps, and, looking through the screen of leaves, he saw his +late jailers hurrying along the path. The charcoal burner carried a +heavy axe, while the Jew, whose head was bound up with a cloth, had +a long knife in his girdle. They went as far as the end of the +forest, and then retraced their steps slowly. They were talking +loudly, and Charlie could gather, from the few words he understood, +and by their gestures, something of the purport of their +conversation. + +"I told you it was of no use your coming on as far as this," the +Jew said. "Why, he was hardly strong enough to walk." + +"He managed to knock you down, and afterwards to drag you into the +house," the other said. + +"It does not require much strength to knock a man down with a heavy +club, when he is not expecting it, Conrad. He certainly did drag me +in, but he was obliged to sit down afterwards, and I watched him +out of one eye as he was making his preparations, and he could only +just totter about. I would wager you anything he cannot have gone +two hundred yards from the house. That is where we must search for +him. I warrant we shall find him hidden in a thicket thereabouts." + +"We shall have to take a lantern then, for it will be dark before +we get back." + +"Our best plan will be to leave it alone till morning. If we sit +outside the hut, and take it in turns to watch, we shall hear him +when he moves, which he is sure to do when it gets dark. It will be +a still night, and we should hear a stick break half a mile away. +We shall catch him, safe enough, before he has gone far." + +"Well, I hope we shall have him back before Ben Soloman comes," the +charcoal burner said, "or it will be worse for both of us. You know +as well as I do he has got my neck in a noose, and he has got his +thumb on you." + +"If we can't find this Swede, I would not wait here for any money. +I would fly at once." + +"You would need to fly, in truth, to get beyond Ben Soloman's +clutches," the charcoal burner said gruffly. "He has got agents all +over the country." + +"Then what would you do?" + +"There is only one thing to do. It is our lives or his. When he +rides up tomorrow, we will meet him at the door as if nothing had +happened, and, with my axe, I will cleave his head asunder as he +comes in. If he sees me in time to retreat, you shall stab him in +the back. Then we will dig a big hole in the wood, and throw him +in, and we will kill his horse and bury it with him. + +"Who would ever be the wiser? I was going to propose it last time, +only I was not sure of you then; but, now that you are in it as +deep as I am--deeper, indeed, for he put you here specially to look +after this youngster--your interest in the matter is as great as +mine." + +The Jew was silent for some time, then he said: + +"He has got papers at home which would bring me to the gallows." + +"Pooh!" the other said. "You do not suppose that, when it is found +that he does not return, and his heirs open his coffers, they will +take any trouble about what there may be in the papers there, +except such as relate to his money. I will warrant there are papers +there which concern scores of men besides you, for I know that Ben +Soloman likes to work with agents he has got under his thumb. But, +even if all the papers should be put into the hands of the +authorities, what would come of it? They have got their hands full +of other matters, for the present, and with the Swedes on their +frontier, and the whole country divided into factions, who do you +think is going to trouble to hunt up men for affairs that occurred +years ago? Even if they did, they would not catch you. They have +not got the means of running you down that Ben Soloman has. + +"I tell you, man, it must be done. There is no other way out of +it." + +"Well, Conrad, if we cannot find this fellow before Ben Soloman +comes, I am with you in the business. I have been working for him +on starvation pay for the last three years, and hate him as much as +you can." + +When they reached the hut they cooked a meal, and then prepared to +keep alternate watch. + +Charlie slept quietly all night, and, in the morning, remained in +his hiding place until he heard, in the distance, the sound of a +horse's tread. Then he went out and sat down, leaning against a +tree by the side of the path, in an attitude of exhaustion. + +Presently he saw Ben Soloman approaching. He got up feebly, and +staggered a few paces to another tree, farther from the path. He +heard an angry shout, and then Ben Soloman rode up, and, with a +torrent of execrations at the carelessness of the watchers, leapt +from his horse and sprang to seize the fugitive, whom he regarded +as incapable of offering the slightest resistance. + +Charlie straightened himself up, as if with an effort, and raised +his cudgel. + +"I will not be taken alive," he said. + +Ben Soloman drew his long knife from his girdle. "Drop that stick," +he said, "or it will be worse for you." + +"It cannot be worse than being tortured to death, as you said." + +The Jew, with an angry snarl, sprang forward so suddenly and +unexpectedly that he was within the swing of Charlie's cudgel +before the latter could strike. He dropped the weapon at once, and +caught the wrist of the uplifted hand that held the knife. + +The Jew gave a cry of astonishment and rage, as they clasped each +other, and he found that, instead of an unresisting victim, he was +in a powerful grasp. For a moment there was a desperate struggle. + +The Jew would, at ordinary times, have been no match for Charlie, +but the latter was far from having regained his normal strength. +His fury at the treatment he had received at the man's hands, +however, enabled him, for the moment, to exert himself to the +utmost, and, after swaying backwards and forwards in desperate +strife for a minute, they went to the ground with a crash, Ben +Soloman being undermost. + +The Jew's grasp instantly relaxed, and Charlie, springing to his +feet and seizing his cudgel, stood over his fallen antagonist. The +latter, however, did not move. His eyes were open in a fixed stare. +Charlie looked at him in surprise for a moment, thinking he was +stunned, then he saw that his right arm was twisted under him in +the fall, and at once understanding what had happened, turned him +half over. He had fallen on the knife, which had penetrated to the +haft, killing him instantly. + +"I didn't mean to kill you," Charlie said aloud, "much as you +deserve it, and surely as you would have killed me, if I had +refused to act as a traitor. I would have broken your head for you, +but that was all. However, it is as well as it is. It adds to my +chance of getting away, and I have no doubt there will be many who +will rejoice when you are found to be missing. + +"Now," he went on, "as your agents emptied my pockets, it is no +robbery to empty yours. Money will be useful, and so will your +horse." + +He stooped over the dead man, and took the purse from his girdle, +when suddenly there was a rush of feet, and in a moment he was +seized. The thought flashed through his mind that he had fallen +into the power of his late guardians, but a glance showed that the +men standing round were strangers. + +"Well, comrade, and who are you?" the man who was evidently the +leader asked. "You have saved us some trouble. We were sleeping a +hundred yards or two away, when we heard the horseman, and saw, as +he passed, he was the Jew of Warsaw, to whom two or three of us owe +our ruin, and it did not need more than a word for us to agree to +wait for him till he came back. We were surprised when we saw you, +still more so when the Jew jumped from his horse and attacked you. +We did not interfere, because, if he had got the best of you, he +might have jumped on his horse and ridden off, but directly he fell +we ran out, but you were so busy in taking the spoil that you did +not hear us. + +"I see the Jew is dead; fell on his own knife. It is just as well +for him, for we should have tied him to a tree, and made a bonfire +of him, if we had caught him." + +Charlie understood but little of this, but said when the other +finished: + +"I understand but little Polish." + +"What are you then--a Russian? You do not look like one." + +"I am an Englishman, and am working in the house of Allan Ramsay, a +Scotch trader in Warsaw." + +"Well, you are a bold fellow anyhow, and after the smart way in +which you disposed of this Jew, and possessed yourself of his +purse, you will do honour to our trade." + +"I hope you will let me go," Charlie said. "My friends in Warsaw +will pay a ransom for me, if you will let me return there." + +"No, no, young fellow. You would of course put down this Jew's +death to our doing, and we have weight enough on our backs already. +He is a man of great influence, and all his tribe would be pressing +on the government to hunt us down. You shall go with us, and the +purse you took from Ben Soloman will pay your footing." + +Charlie saw that it would be useless to try and alter the man's +decision, especially as he knew so little of the language. He +therefore shrugged his shoulders, and said that he was ready to go +with them, if it must be so. + +The Jew's body was now thoroughly searched. Various papers were +found upon him, but, as these proved useless to the brigands, they +were torn up. + +"Shall we take the horse with us?" one of the men asked the leader. + +"No, it would be worse than useless in the forest. Leave it +standing here. It will find its way back in time. Then there will +be a search, and there will be rejoicing in many a mansion +throughout the country, when it is known that Ben Soloman is dead. +They say he has mortgages on a score of estates, and, though I +suppose these will pass to others of his tribe, they can hardly be +as hard and mercenary as this man was. + +"I wonder what he was doing in this forest alone? Let us follow the +path, and see where he is going. + +"Honred, you have a smattering of several languages, try then if +you can make our new comrade understand." + +The man tried in Russian without success, then he spoke in Swedish, +in which language Charlie at once replied. + +"Where does this pathway lead to?" + +"To a hut where a charcoal burner lives. I have been imprisoned +there for the last fortnight. It was all the Jew's doing. It was +through him that I got this knock here;" and he pointed to the +unhealed wound at the back of his head. + +"Well, we may as well pay them a visit," the chief said, when this +was translated to him. "We are short of flour, and they may have +some there, and maybe something else that will be useful." + + + +Chapter 11: With Brigands. + + +The man who had spoken to Charlie drew the long knife from the back +of the Jew, wiped it on the grass, and handed it to him. + +"That ought to be your property," he said. "It has done you good +service." + +Not sorry to have a weapon in addition to his cudgel, Charlie +placed it in his belt, and then started with the bandits. He would +not have cared to face the charcoal burner alone; but now that the +band regarded him as enrolled among their number, he felt no +uneasiness respecting him. + +When they issued from the trees, the Jew was seen standing at the +door of the hut. He at once ran in on seeing them, and came out +again, accompanied by the charcoal burner, who carried his axe on +his shoulder. The Jew started, on catching sight of Charlie among +the ranks of the brigands, and said a word or two to his companion. + +"Well, Master Charcoal Burner," the leader of the party said, "how +is it that honest woodmen consort with rogues of the town?" + +"I don't know that they do so, willingly," the man said gruffly. +"But some of us, to our cost, have put our heads into nooses, and +the rogues of the town have got hold of the other end of the ropes, +and we must just walk as we are told to." + +"Well, that is true enough," the brigand said. + +"And you, Jew, what are you doing here?" + +"I am like Conrad," he replied, sulkily. "It is not only countrymen +who have their necks in a noose, and I have to do what I am +ordered." + +"By a bigger rogue than yourself?" + +"That is so; bigger and cleverer." + +"You are expecting him here now, our new comrade tells us. Well, +you need expect him no longer. He will not come. If you will go +along the path, you will come upon his body, and may bury him if +you like to take the trouble." + +An exclamation of satisfaction broke from the two men. + +"You have done us a service, indeed," the charcoal burner said. "We +had thought to do it for ourselves, this morning, for after the +escape of him you call your new comrade, he would have shown us no +mercy." + +"You may thank our new comrade, and not us," the brigand said. "We +only arrived on the spot when it was all over." + +The Jew looked at Charlie in astonishment. + +"What! Did he kill Ben Soloman?" + +"That did he; or rather, the Jew killed himself. There was a +grapple hand to hand, and a wrestle. The Jew fell undermost, and +was pierced with his own knife." + +"But the lad is but just out of a sickbed, and has no strength for +a struggle, and Ben Soloman, though past middle life, was strong +and active." + +"Neither strong enough nor active enough," the man laughed. "You +have been nicely taken in. Who would have thought that two Jews and +a Pole would have been cheated by an English lad? His face shows +that he has been ill, and doubtless he has not yet recovered his +full strength, but he was strong enough, anyhow, to overthrow Ben +Soloman. + +"Now, what have you in the hut? We are in need of provisions." + +The hut was ransacked; the flour, two bottles of spirits, and a +skin of wine seized, and the meat cut up and roasted over the fire. +After the meal was eaten, the captain called upon Charlie to tell +his story more fully, and this he did, with the aid of the man who +spoke Swedish; starting, however, only at the point when he was +attacked in the street, as he felt it better to remain silent as to +his connection with the Swedish army. + +"But what was the cause of Ben Soloman's hostility to you?" + +"There are some in Warsaw who are of opinion that Augustus of +Saxony has done much harm to Poland, in engaging without cause in +the war against Charles of Sweden, and who think that it would be +well that he should be dethroned, and some other prince made king +in his place. To this party many of the traders belong, and the Jew +had reason to think that I was acquainted with the design, and +could give the names of those concerned in it. There was really no +plot against Augustus, but it was only intended that a popular +demonstration against his rule should be made. But Soloman wanted +me to give evidence that there was a conspiracy against the king's +life, so that he might gain great credit by exposing it, and might +at the same time rid himself of many of his rivals in the trade." + +"He was an artful fox," the leader of the brigands said, when this +had been translated to him. "But where is the Jew he put over you?" + +Three or four of the men sprang to their feet and ran out, but the +Jew was nowhere to be seen. The captain was furious, and abused his +men right and left, while his anger was in no way mitigated when +one of them told him that, if he had wanted the Jew kept, he should +have given one of them orders to look after him. This was so +evident that the chief was silenced for a moment. + +"How long is it since any of you saw him last?" + +"He went round with the wineskin, and filled our cups just as we +sat down to breakfast," one of the men said. "I have not noticed +him since." + +Nor had any of the others. + +"Then it will be no use to pursue. He has had more than half an +hour's start, and long before this he will have mounted Ben +Soloman's horse, and have ridden off. + +"Well, comrade," he said, turning to Charlie, "this settles your +movements. I was but half in earnest before as to your joining us; +but it is clear now that there's nothing else for you to do, for +the present. This fellow will, directly he gets to Warsaw, denounce +you as the murderer of his master. That he is sure to do to avert +suspicion from himself, and, if you were to return there, it would +go hard with you. So, for a time, you must throw in your lot with +us." + +When this was translated to Charlie, he saw at once the force of +the argument. He could not have denied that the Jew had fallen in a +hand-to-hand struggle with himself, and, were he to appear in +Warsaw, he might be killed by the co-religionists of Ben Soloman; +or, if he escaped this, might lie in a dungeon for months awaiting +his trial, and perhaps be finally executed. There was nothing for +him now but to rejoin the Swedes, and it would be some time, yet, +before he would be sufficiently recovered to undertake such a +journey. + +"I should not mind, if I could send a letter to Allan Ramsay, to +tell him what has befallen me. He will be thinking I am dead, and +will, at any rate, be in great anxiety about me." + +"I have taken a liking to you, young fellow," the leader said, "and +will send in one of my men to Warsaw with a letter; that is, if you +can write one." + +"Yes, I can write. Fortunately there are paper, pen, and an ink +horn on that shelf. Ben Soloman brought them the last time he came, +to write down the lies he wanted me to testify to. I am greatly +obliged to you, and will do it at once." + +As he had, only the day before he was attacked, sent off a +messenger to Count Piper, telling him all he had done the previous +week, there was no occasion to repeat this, and he had only to give +an account of his capture, and the events that had since occurred. + +"You see," he said, "I cannot return to Warsaw. The Jew who was +here unfortunately heard that it was in a struggle with me Ben +Soloman was killed, and he will, of course, denounce me as his +murderer, though the deed was done in fair fight. I should have all +his tribe against me, and might be imprisoned for months awaiting +trial. I am still very weak, and could not attempt the journey to +the frontier. I am, however, gaining strength, and, as soon as I am +quite recovered, I shall take the first opportunity of leaving the +men I am with, and making for the Swedish camp. Please forward this +news by a sure hand to Count Piper, and express my sorrow that my +mission has not been completed, although, indeed, I do not think +that my further stay at Warsaw would have been any great service, +for it is clear that the great majority of the traders will not +move in the matter until the Swedes advance, and, from their point +of view, it is not to their interest to do so. + +"I know but little of the men I am with at present, beyond the fact +that they are bandits, nor can I say whether they are disbanded +soldiers, or criminals who have escaped from justice; but at any +rate they show me no ill will. I have no doubt I shall be able to +get on fairly with them, until I am able to make my escape. I wish +I had poor Stanislas with me. Only one of the men here speaks +Swedish, and he does not know very much of the language. I cannot +say, at present, whether the twenty men here are the whole of the +band, or whether they are only a portion of it. Nor do I know +whether the men subsist by plundering the peasants, or venture on +more serious crimes. Thanking you for your great kindness during my +stay at Warsaw, I remain, yours gratefully-- + +"Charlie Carstairs." + +While he was occupied in writing this letter, an animated +conversation was going on between the bandits. Charlie gathered +that this related to their future operations, but more than this he +could not learn. In a postscript to the letter, he requested Allan +Ramsay to hand over to the bearer some of the clothes left in his +lodgings, and to pay him for his trouble. + +"As to the money I left in your hands, I do not think it worth +while for you to send it. However much these men may consider me a +comrade, I have not sufficient faith in their honesty to believe +that money would reach me safely; but, if you send me a suit of +clothes, two or three gold pieces might be wrapped up in a piece of +cloth and shoved into the toe of a shoe. The parcel must be a small +one, or there would be little chance of the man carrying it far. I +will ask him, however, to bring me a sword, if you will buy one for +me, and my pistols." + +He folded up the letter and gave it to the captain. There was no +means of fastening it, but this mattered little, because, being +written in English, there was no chance of its being read. The +captain handed it to one of the men, with instructions for its +delivery. The messenger started at once. The others, after +remaining a short time in the hut, set out through the forest. + +After an hour's walking, Charlie was unable to go further. The +captain, seeing this, ordered four of the men to stop with him, and +to follow the next morning. As soon as he had gone on with the rest +of the band, the men set about collecting sticks and making a fire. +Charlie, who was utterly exhausted, threw himself on the ground, +and was not long before he fell sound asleep. + +When he awoke, the shades of evening were already falling, and the +men were sitting over the fire, roasting a portion of a goat, one +of a flock they had fallen in with in the wood, where large numbers +roamed about in a semi-wild state. + +The man who could speak Swedish was one of those who had remained +with him, and, from him, he learnt that the present headquarters of +the band were some six miles farther away. This distance was +performed next morning, frequent halts being made to enable him to +sit down and rest; and it was not till five hours after the start +that they arrived. + +Overgrown as it now was, with trees and undergrowth, he could see +that a village once stood there. It must, however, have been +abandoned a very long time, as trees of considerable size grew +among the low walls and piles of stones that marked where cottages +had stood. The place occupied by the brigands had, in former times, +been a castellated building of some strength, standing on a knoll +in the middle of the village, which had probably been inhabited by +the retainers of its owner. Part of the wall had fallen, but a +large arched room, that had doubtless been the banqueting hall of +the castle, remained almost intact, and here the brigands had +established themselves. Several fires burned on the flagged floors, +the smoke finding its way out through holes and crevices in the +roof. Some fifty men were gathered round these, and were occupied +in cooking their midday meal. + +"I am glad to see that you have arrived," the captain said, coming +across to Charlie. "I expected you two hours ago, and intended, as +soon as we had finished our meal, to send out another four men to +meet you and help to carry you in." + +"Thank you," Charlie said. "It is not the men's fault we are late, +but the last part of the way we came on very slowly. I was getting +so exhausted that I had to stop every few hundred yards." + +"Well, you had better eat something, and then lie down for a sleep. +Meat is plentiful with us, for there are thousands of goats in the +forest, and occasionally we get a deer or wild boar. If we had but +bread and wine we should live like nobles. Our supplies, however, +are low at present, and we shall have to make an expedition, +tomorrow or next day, to replenish them." + +Charlie ate a few mouthfuls of meat, and then lay down and slept, +for some hours, on a bed of leaves. He was awoke by loud and +excited talking among the men, and learnt from Honred that one of +the men, who had been left on watch at the mouth of the path by +which he had entered the forest, had just brought in the news that +a party of a hundred infantry, led by the Jew, had arrived with a +cart. In this the body of Ben Soloman had been sent off, while the +troops had established themselves in the little clearing round the +hut. + +"This comes of letting that Jew escape," the captain said. "No +doubt he told the story his own way, and the Jewish traders went to +the governor and asked that troops should be sent to root us out. +Well, they are far enough away at present, and I have sent off to +have their movements watched. It is a good nine miles, from here to +the hut, and they may look for a week before they find this place, +unless that rascally Jew has heard of it from the woodman, or they +get hold of the fellow himself, though I should think they will +hardly do that. I fancy he has some cause of quarrel with the +authorities, and will not put himself in the way of being +questioned closely, if he can help it." + +The next morning when Charlie awoke, two men were standing beside +him. His eyes first fell on the one who had been to the town, and +who held a large bundle in his hand. Then he turned his eyes to the +other, and gave an exclamation of pleasure, as he saw that it was +Stanislas. He looked pale and weak, and was evidently just +recovering from a severe illness. + +"Why, Stanislas!" he exclaimed. "This is a pleasure, indeed. I +never for a moment dreamt of seeing you. I heard from the Jew who +guarded me that you got away, but I was afraid that you had been +badly wounded. Why, my brave fellow, what brings you here?" + +"I have come to be with your honour," the man said. "It was, of +course, my duty to be by your side. I was very ill for a week, for +I had half a dozen wounds, but I managed, after the assailants left +me, to crawl back to Mr. Ramsay's to tell him what had happened. I +don't remember much about the next few days. Since then I have been +mending rapidly. None of the wounds were very serious, and it was +more loss of blood, than anything else, that ailed me. Mr. Ramsay +searched high and low for you, and we had all given you up for +dead, till a few hours before this man arrived with your letter. + +"We heard you had killed Ben Soloman. I had a long talk with your +messenger, who received a handsome present from Mr. Ramsay, and he +agreed to conduct me here, upon my solemn promise that, if the +captain would not receive me, I would not give any information, on +my return, as to the whereabouts of the band. Mr. Ramsay hired a +light cart, and that brought us yesterday far into the forest. We +camped there, and I had not more than a couple of miles to walk to +get here this morning." + +"Have you seen the captain?" Charlie asked eagerly. + +"Yes. I was stopped by some sentries, a quarter of a mile away, and +was kept there while my guide came on and got permission of the +captain for me to be brought in. When I met him, I had no great +difficulty in persuading him to let me stop, for Mr. Ramsay had +given me fifty rix-dollars to give him; and so, your honour, here I +am, and here is a letter from Mr. Ramsay himself." + +"I cannot tell you how glad I am to have you, Stanislas. I am +getting better, but I am so weak that I took five hours, yesterday, +to get six miles. Now I have got you to talk to, I shall pick up +strength faster than I have been doing, for it has been very dull +work having no one who could understand me. There is only one man +here who understands a word of Swedish." + +"We will soon get you round, sir, never fear. I have brought with +me four casks of wine. They were left at the place where the cart +stopped last night, but the captain has sent off men already to +bring them in. You will be all the better for a suit of clean +clothes." + +"That I shall. It is a month now since I had a change, and my +jerkin is all stained with blood. I want a wash more than anything; +for there was no water near the hut, and the charcoal burner used +to bring in a small keg from a spring he passed on his way to his +work. That was enough for drinking, but not enough for washing--a +matter which never seemed to have entered into his head, or that of +the Jew, as being in the slightest degree necessary." + +"There is a well just outside," Stanislas said. "I saw them drawing +water in buckets as we came in. I suppose it was the well of this +castle, in the old time." + +"I will go and have a wash, and change my clothes the first thing," +Charlie said. "Mr. Ramsay's letter will keep till after that." + +They went out to the well together. + +"So you heard the story, that I had killed Ben Soloman, before you +left?" + +"Yes; before your letter arrived, Mr. Ramsay sent for me, and told +me a Jewish trader had just informed him that news had come that +Ben Soloman had been murdered, and the deed had been done by the +young Scotchman who had been with him. Mr. Ramsay did not believe +the story in the slightest. He admitted that Ben Soloman might have +been murdered, and even said frankly that, hated as he was, it was +the most natural end for him to come to; but that you should have +done so was, he said, absurd. In the first place, he did not think +that you were alive; and in the second, it was far more probable +that you had been murdered by Ben Soloman, than that he should have +been murdered by you. + +"However, even before your letter came, three or four hours later, +there seemed no longer any doubt that you had killed the Jew. By +that time, there was quite an uproar among his people. He was the +leader of their community, and had dealings with so many nobles +that his influence was great; and, although he was little liked, he +was regarded as an important person, and his loss was a very heavy +one to the Jewish community. A deputation went to the governor, and +we heard that troops would be at once sent out to capture you, and +the band of brigands you had joined. Mr. Ramsay told me that it was +fortunate, indeed, that you had not returned to the city. But, no +doubt, he has told you all that in the letter." + +"I feel quite another man, Stanislas," Charlie said, when he had +changed his garments. "Now I can read the letter you brought me." + +After expressing the great satisfaction he felt, at the news that +Charlie was alive, Mr. Ramsay went on to say that, even were he +well, he could not return to Warsaw in the present state of public +feeling. + +"Your story that you were attacked, grievously wounded, and, after +being confined here for some days, carried away and confined in the +wood, by order of Ben Soloman, and that he visited you there, would +be treated with derision. The version given by the man who brought +in the story of the Jew's death was that he himself was staying in +the cottage of a charcoal burner, an acquaintance of his, and that +a party of brigands, of whom you were one, arrived there, and that +they were boasting of having caused the death of Ben Soloman, who +had fallen by your hand. He managed to escape from the brigands, +and on the road found the dead body of his employer, who was, he +knew, that morning coming out to give him some instructions. My +opinion, and that of my friends who knew you, was that the fellow +had himself killed and robbed his master; but your letter, of +course, showed that his account was true to some extent--that Ben +Soloman had fallen in a struggle with you, and that you yourself +were a prisoner in the hands of these bandits. Still, as it would +be next to impossible for you to prove the truth of your story, and +as the Jews of the place, who are numerous and influential, are +dead against you, your life would certainly be forfeited were you +to be captured. + +"I know your story to be true, but it would appear wildly +improbable, to others, that this wealthy Jew should have conspired, +in the first place, to cause an attack to be made upon an unknown +young stranger, still less that he should have had him carried off +to the forest, and should have gone to visit him there. The +explanation that you were a Swedish officer in disguise would not +benefit you in any way, while it would involve us who knew you in +your danger, and would cause the Jew to be regarded as a man who +had lost his life in endeavouring to unmask a plot against Poland. +Therefore, I think it is extremely fortunate that you are, for the +present, safe in the hands of these brigands, and should certainly +advise you to make no attempt to leave them, until you are +perfectly well and strong. + +"I have, as you directed me, hidden a few pieces of gold in your +shoe, and have handed the rest of your money to your man, who is +starting to join you. He will conceal it about him. I have just +heard that a body of troops are starting at once for the forest, +and that orders have been sent to other towns, to send detachments +into it at different points, so it is evident the authorities are +determined to catch you, if possible. If you had killed half a +dozen traders in a smaller way, they would have cared little about +it; but just at present, pressed as the king is by want of money, +he is bound to do everything he can to please the Jewish traders, +as it is upon them that he must rely for loans for the payment of +his troops. + +"In this matter, then, he will leave no stone unturned to gratify +them, and I should strongly advise your band to move away from the +neighbourhood, at any rate for a time. They may plunder whole +villages with impunity, but what is regarded as the murder of the +richest citizen of Warsaw, a man mixed up in business and politics +with half the principal nobles of the land, is a different matter +altogether. Do not think of trying to traverse the country until +you are perfectly strong. It will be a dangerous business at the +best, but with your man with you, to bear the brunt of replying to +questions, I have every confidence that you will succeed in making +your way through. As to this, I can give no advice, as there is no +saying as to the point from which you may start, or the directions +in which you may travel. + +"Should you, at any time, find yourself in a town in which there +are any of my countrymen established in trade, and you will find +them nearly everywhere, use my name. I think it is pretty generally +known to Scotchmen in Poland. You will see I have inclosed a note +that will be useful to you." + +The inclosure contained only a few words: + +"I, Allan Ramsay, merchant of Warsaw, do declare the bearer of this +note to be my friend, and beg any countrymen of mine, to whom he +may present himself, to assist him in every way, and, should he +require money, to furnish him with it, I undertaking to make myself +responsible for the same, and to pay all monies and other charges +that he may incur." + +"The first thing to do," Charlie said, as he placed the letters in +his doublet, "is to let the leader of our band know that other +bodies of troops, besides that at the hut, are about to enter the +forest. He may decide that it is necessary to march away at once." + +As soon, indeed, as the outlaw received the tidings, he issued +orders for the band to prepare for instant departure. + +"A party of five or six men together," he said to Charlie, "might +hide in this forest for years. But a band of fifty is too large to +be long concealed. To begin with, they must get food, and must +either buy it or hunt for it; and in the second, there are a +considerable number of men living in the forest, charcoal burners +and herders of goats and swine, and any of these, if questioned by +the troops, might mention that they had seen a considerable number +of men passing. As it is, we will break up into parties of seven or +eight, and appoint a rendezvous where we may meet again." + +The band was speedily mustered, for, with the exception of those +who were watching the forest through which the troops at the hut +must march to reach them, the whole were close at hand. A messenger +was sent off to call in the scouts. Then the booty that had been +taken during their late excursions was brought out, and emptied on +the ground. It consisted of money and jewellery. It was divided +into equal portions, of which each member took one, the lieutenants +of the band two, and the captain three. + +"You don't share this time," the latter said to Charlie; "but next +time, of course, you and your comrade will each have your portion." + +When this was done, the men were told off in parties of six or +seven, and instructions given as to the point of rendezvous. Each +band chose its own leader, and, in an hour from the reception of +the news, the place was deserted, and the parties were making their +way in different directions through the forest. + +Charlie and Stanislas formed part of the captain's own force, which +numbered ten in all. + +"Do you think they will all turn up at the meeting place?" Charlie +asked the leader, whose name he now ascertained was Ladislas +Koffski. + +"They may," he said. "But it is seldom that bands, when they once +disperse like this, ever come together again. It is impossible to +content everyone, and any man who is chosen leader of a party may, +if he is dissatisfied, persuade those with him to join some other +band. Even if they do not go in a body, many are sure to break off +and make for their homes, to enjoy the booty they have gathered. + +"But, upon the other hand, as we go we shall gather up fresh +recruits. With so many disbanded soldiers and discontented men +roaming the country, there is no difficulty in getting as many men +as one cares to keep together. + +"Fifty is the outside that is advisable, for with more, even if one +makes a good haul, it comes to so little, a head, that the men are +dissatisfied. Of course they work in small parties, but this does +not succeed so well as when a small band are under a single +leader." + +"How long have you been at this work?" + +"Since last autumn." + +"And you find it pay?" + +"We do not get much in money. As you saw, there were but four rix +dollars a head, and that is the result of a month's work. Still, +that is not bad for men who might otherwise starve. Sometimes we do +worse and sometimes better, but that is about the average. Still, +the life is a pleasant one, and unless we disbanded soldiers took +to it, what would there be for us to do? If government would keep +us on regular pay, there would soon be no brigands left, except the +men who have escaped from justice. But the treasury is empty, and, +even at the best of times, the troops are badly and irregularly +paid, and are forced to plunder to keep life together. They are +almost in rags, and though we Poles do not mind fighting, there is +generally a difficulty in getting sufficient infantry. As for the +cavalry, they are nobles, and draw no pay. + +"How do you feel today?" + +"Better. The night's rest, and a wash and change of clothes this +morning, have made me feel another man. How far do you intend to +march?" + +"We shall go slowly for a day or two. The other parties have all +pushed on ahead fast, but by taking matters quietly, and by keeping +a sharp lookout, we need have no great fear of being surprised. I +know the forest well, and its thickest hiding places, so we can +afford to travel slowly, and as you become accustomed to it you +will be able to make longer journeys." + +For ten days they travelled through the forest, increasing their +distance daily, as Charlie regained his strength. The last day or +two they did not make less than twenty miles a day. Their faces +were turned steadily east. Occasionally they passed large tracts of +cleared land, villages, and cultivated fields. At some of these +they stopped and replenished their stock of flour, which they took +without paying for it, but did no farther damage. + +Of meat they had abundance. Two or three men started each day as +soon as they halted, and, in a short time, returned with a goat or +young pig. + +"We are now close to the Bug River," Ladislas said at their last +halting place. "Tomorrow we shall meet some, at least, of our +comrades. I do not expect a great many, for we were pretty equally +divided as to the direction we should travel in. Practically, we +were safe from pursuit when we had gone fifteen miles, for the +forest there spreads out greatly, and those in search of us would +know that further pursuit would be useless. Many of my men did not +care about going farther, but all this part of the country has been +so harried, for the last two or three years, that we thought it +best to try altogether new ground. When we have crossed the Bug we +shall be beyond the forest, but there are great swamps and +morasses, and hills with patches of wood. Many streams take their +rise there, all meeting farther on, and forming the Dnieper. We +must keep north of that river, for to the south the country is +thinly populated, and we should have difficulty in maintaining +ourselves." + +Charlie made no comment, but he was glad to hear that the band +intended to keep to the north of the Dnieper, for that river would +have formed a serious obstacle to his making his way to rejoin the +Swedes. The next day, they reached the bank of the Bug, and, +following the river down, came after an hour's walking upon a great +fire, round which fifteen men were stretched. These, as the +captain's party approached, rose to their feet with a shout of +welcome. + +"That is better than I expected," Ladislas said, as they came up to +them. "Five and twenty is quite enough for work here. In the +forests one can do with more, but, moving steadily on, as we mean +to do, till we get pretty near the eastern frontier, five and +twenty is ample. It is enough, when together, to surprise a +village; and it is not too many, travelling in twos and threes, to +attract attention. Things always go on better, too, after a +dispersal. Many who are discontented, or who want to command a band +of their own, break off, and one starts fresh, with just the men +one likes best to keep." + +"We had begun to give you up, captain," one of the men said, as he +joined the other party. "We have been here six days." + +"We travelled but slowly, at first, and it is only the last two +days we have really made fair journeys; but there was no reason for +any great haste. The world is all our own, and, at any rate, as +long as we were in the forest, there was no fear of wanting food. + +"So I see some of our comrades have left us." + +"We can do very well without them, captain. There were thirty of us +here two days ago. Essos and Polinski quarrelled, and Essos was +killed. Then Polinski wanted us to elect him captain, and to move +away at once. Four or five, who have always been grumblers, joined +him at once, and persuaded some of the others, till we were about +equally divided. It came pretty nearly to a fight; but neither +liked to begin, and they moved away." + +"There are quite enough of us left," Ladislas said. "As to Essos +and Polinski, I am heartily glad that they have gone. I know they +have both been scheming for the leadership for some time. Most of +the others can be very well spared, too. There are plenty of us +here for travel. There is no doubt, as we agreed before starting, +that there is not much more to be done in this part of the country. +What with the civil wars, and the bands of soldiers without a +leader, and others like ourselves who do not mean to starve, the +peasants have been wrought up into a state of desperation. They +have little left to lose, but what they have got they are ready to +fight to the death for, and, lately, at the first alarm they have +sounded the bells and assembled for miles round, and, equipped with +scythes and flails, routed those who meddled with them. We had more +than one hot fight, and lost many good men. Besides, many of the +nobles who have suffered have turned out, with their followers, and +struck heavy blows at some of the bands; so that the sooner we get +out of this country, which is becoming a nest of hornets, the +better, for there is little booty and plenty of hard blows to be +got. + +"We will go on, as we agreed, till near the eastern frontier. The +country is well covered with forest there, and we can sally out on +which side we like, for, if there is not much gold to be had in the +Russian villages, there is plenty of vodka, and sometimes things +worth taking in their churches. The priests and headmen, too, have +generally got a little store, which can be got at with the aid of a +few hot coals, or a string twisted tight enough round a thumb. At +any rate we sha'n't starve; but we must move on pretty fast, for we +shall have to get up a warm hut in the forest, and to lay in a +stock of provisions before the winter sets in. So we must only stop +to gather a little plunder when a good opportunity offers." + + + +Chapter 12: Treed By Wolves. + + +Charlie and Stanislas were, that evening, sitting apart from the +rest, at a short distance from the fire, talking over the future. +They agreed that it would be comparatively easy to withdraw from +the band as they journeyed forward, if, as seemed likely, they +travelled in very small parties. If, indeed, they found themselves +with two others, they could leave openly, for these would scarcely +care to enter upon a desperate struggle, merely for the sake of +retaining two unwilling companions in the band. + +The difficulties would only begin when they started alone. As they +were talking, the captain came across to them. + +"I can guess," he said, "that you are talking together as to the +future. I like you, young Englishman, and I like your companion, +who seems an honest fellow, but I would not keep you with me by +force. I understand that you are not placed as we are. We have to +live. Most of us would live honestly if we could, but at present it +is the choice of doing as we do, or starving. We occasionally take +a few crowns, if we come across a fat trader, or may ease a rich +farmer of his hoard, but it is but seldom such a chance comes in +our way. As a rule, we simply plunder because we must live. It is +different with you. Your friends may be far away, but if you can +get to them you would have all that you need. Therefore, this life, +which is hard and rough, to say nothing of its danger, does not +suit you; but for all that, you must stay with us, for it would be +madness for you to attempt to escape. + +"As I told you, the peasants are maddened, and would kill any +passing stranger as they would a wild beast. They would regard him +as a spy of some band like ours, or of a company of disbanded +soldiers, sent forward to discover which houses and villages are +best worth plundering. In your case, you have other dangers to +fear. You may be sure that news has been sent from Warsaw to all +the different governors, with orders for your arrest for killing +Ben Soloman, and these orders will be transmitted to every town and +village. Your hair and eyes would at once betray you as strangers, +and your ignorance of the language would be fatal to you. If, +therefore, you escaped being killed as a robber by the peasants, +you would run the risk of arrest at the first town or village you +entered. + +"Translate that to him, Stanislas. He is learning our language +fast, but he cannot understand all that." + +"That is just what we were talking about," Charlie said, when +Stanislas had repeated the captain's speech, "and the danger seems +too great to be risked. Think you, that when we get farther to the +east, we shall be able to make our way more easily up into +Livonia?" + +"Much more easily, because the forest is more extensive there; but +not until the winter is over. The cold will be terrible, and it +would be death to sleep without shelter. Besides, the forests are +infested with wolves, who roam about in packs, and would scent and +follow and devour you. But when spring comes, you can turn your +faces to the north, and leave us if you think fit, and I promise +you that no hindrance shall be thrown in your way. I only ask you +not to risk your lives by trying now to pass through Poland alone." + +"I think you are right, Ladislas, and I promise you that we will +not attempt to leave you during our journey east. As you say, it +would be impossible for us to travel after winter had once set in. +It is now the end of September." + +"And it will be November before we reach our destination. We shall +not travel fast. We have no motive for doing so. We have to live by +the way, and to gather a little money to help us through the +winter. We may shoot a bear or an elk sometimes, a few deer, and +hares, but we shall want two or three sacks of flour, and some +spirits. For these we must either get money, or take the goods. The +first is the best, for we have no means of dragging heavy weights +with us, and it would not do to infuriate the peasants by +plundering any of them within twenty miles of the place where we +mean to winter. That would set them all against us." + +"I tell you frankly, Ladislas, that we shall not be willing to aid +in any acts of robbery. Of course, when one is with an army one has +to plunder on a large scale, and it has often gone terribly against +the grain, when I have had to join parties sent out to forage. But +it has to be done. I would rather not join men in taking food, yet +I understand that it may be necessary. But as to taking money, I +will have nothing to do with it. At the same time, I understand +that we cannot share your food, and be with you, without doing +something. Stanislas has brought me a little money from Warsaw, and +I shall be ready to pay into the common treasury a sum sufficient +to pay for our share of the food. As to money taken, we shall not +expect any share of it. If you are attacked, we shall of course +fight, and shall be ready to do our full share in all work. So, at +any rate, you will not be losers by taking us with you." + +"That is fair enough," the captain said, when Stanislas had +translated what Charlie said, suppressing, however, his remarks +about foraging with the army, as the brigands were ignorant that +Charlie and he had any connection with the Swedes, or that he was +not, as he had given out, a young Englishman come out to set up as +a trader. + +The band now journeyed slowly on, keeping near the north bank of +the Dnieper. They went by twos and threes, uniting sometimes and +entering a village or surrounding a farmhouse at night, and taking +what they wanted. The people were, however, terribly poor, and they +were able to obtain but little beyond scanty supplies of flour, and +occasionally a few gold or silver trinkets. Many other bands of +plunderers had passed along, in the course of the summer, and the +robbers themselves were often moved to pity by the misery that they +everywhere met with. + +When in small parties they were obliged to avoid entering any +villages, for once or twice furious attacks were made upon those +who did so, the women joining the men in arming themselves with any +weapon that came to hand, and in falling upon the strangers. + +Only once did they succeed in obtaining plunder of value. They had +visited a village, but found it contained nothing worth taking. One +of the women said: + +"Why do you trouble poor people like us? There is the count's +chateau three miles away. They have every luxury there, while we +are starving." + +After leaving the village, the man to whom she had spoken repeated +what she had said, and it was agreed to make the attempt. At the +first cottage they came to they made further inquiries, and found +that the lord of the soil was very unpopular; for, in spite of the +badness of the times, he insisted on receiving his rents without +abatement, and where money was not forthcoming, had seized cattle +and horses, assessing them at a price far below what they would +have fetched at the nearest market. + +They therefore marched to the house. It was a very large one. The +captain thoughtfully placed Charlie and Stanislas among the six men +who were to remain without, to prevent any of the inmates leaving +the chateau. With the rest, he made a sudden attack on the great +door of the house, and beat it down with a heavy sledge hammer. +Just as it gave way, some shots were fired from the inside, but +they rushed in, overpowered the servants, and were soon masters of +the place. + +In half an hour they came out again, laden with booty. Each man +carried half a dozen bottles of choice wine, from the count's +cellar, slung at his belt. On their shoulders they carried bundles +containing silver cups and other valuables; while six of them had +bags of silver money, that had been extracted from the count by +threats of setting fire to the chateau, and burning him and his +family. + +A halt was made two or three miles away, when the silver was +divided into shares as usual, the men being well satisfied when +they learned that Charlie and his companion claimed no part of it. +Some of the provisions they had also taken were eaten. Each man had +a flask of wine, with which the count's health was derisively +drunk. + +"This has been a good night's work," the leader said, "and you have +each sixty rix dollars in your pockets, which is more than you have +had for months past. That will keep us in provisions and spirits +all through the winter; but mind, although we took it without much +trouble, we have not heard the last of the business. No doubt, by +this time, the count has sent off a messenger to the nearest town +where there are troops, and, for a day or two, we shall have to +march fast and far. It is one thing to plunder villages, and +another to meddle with a rich nobleman." + +For the next forty-eight hours they marched by night instead of by +day, keeping always together, and prepared to resist an attack. One +morning they saw, from their hiding place among some high reeds +near the river, a body of about sixty horsemen ride past at a +distance. They were evidently searching for something, for parties +could be seen to break off several times, and to enter woods and +copses, the rest halting till they came out again. + +As the band had with them enough food for another three days, they +remained for thirty-six hours in their hiding place, and then, +thinking the search would by that time be discontinued, went on +again. The next day they killed two or three goats from a herd, the +boy in charge of them making off with such speed that, though hotly +pursued and fired at several times, he made his escape. They +carried the carcasses to a wood, lit a fire, and feasted upon them. +Then, having cooked the rest of the flesh, they divided it among +the band. + +By this time the wine was finished. The next day they again saw +horsemen in the distance, but remained in hiding till they had +disappeared in the afternoon. They then went into a village, but +scarcely had they proceeded up the street when the doors were +opened, and from every house men rushed out armed with flails, +clubs, and axes, and fell upon them furiously, shouting "Death to +the robbers!" + +They had evidently received warning that a band of plunderers were +approaching, and everything had been prepared for them. The band +fought stoutly, but they were greatly outnumbered, and, as but few +of them carried firearms, they had no great advantage in weapons. +Charlie and Stanislas, finding that their lives were at stake, were +forced to take part in the fray, and both were with the survivors +of the band, who at last succeeded in fighting their way out of the +village, leaving half their number behind them, while some twenty +of the peasants had fallen. + +Reduced now to twelve men and the captain, they thought only of +pushing forward, avoiding all villages, and only occasionally +visiting detached houses for the sake of obtaining flour. The +country became more thinly populated as they went on, and there was +a deep feeling of satisfaction when, at length, their leader +pointed to a belt of trees in the distance, and said: + +"That is the beginning of the forest. A few miles farther, and we +shall be well within it." + +By nightfall they felt, for the first time since they had set out +on their journey, that they could sleep in safety. A huge fire was +lit, for the nights were now becoming very cold, and snow had +fallen occasionally for the last four or five days, and in the open +country was lying some inches deep. The next day they journeyed a +few miles farther, and then chose a spot for the erection of a hut. +It was close to a stream, and the men at once set to work, with +axes, to fell trees and clear a space. + +It was agreed that the captain and two of the men, of the most +pacific demeanour, should go to the nearest town, some forty miles +away, to lay in stores. They were away five days, and then returned +with the welcome news that a cart, laden with flour and a couple of +barrels of spirits, was on a country track through the forest a +mile and a half away. + +"How did you manage, captain?" Charlie asked. + +"We went to the house of a well-to-do peasant, about a mile from +the borders of the wood. I told him frankly that we belonged to a +band who were going to winter in the forest, that we would do him +no harm if he would give us his aid, but that if he refused he +would soon have his place burnt over his head. As we said we were +ready to pay a fair sum for the hire of his cart, he did not +hesitate a moment about making the choice. The other two remained +at his cottage, so as to keep his family as hostages for his good +faith, and I went with him to the town, where we bought six sacks +of good flour and the two barrels of spirits. We got a few other +things--cooking pots and horns, and a lot of coarse blankets, and a +thick sheepskin coat for each man. They are all in the car. I see +that you have got the hut pretty nearly roofed in, so, in a day or +two, we shall be comfortable." + +They went in a body to the place where the cart had been left, but +it required two journeys before its contents were all transported +to the hut. Another three days and this was completed. It was +roughly built of logs, the interstices being filled in with moss. +There was no attempt at a door, an opening being left four feet +high and eighteen inches wide for the purpose of an entry. The skin +of a deer they had shot, since they arrived, was hung up outside; +and a folded rug inside. There was no occasion for windows. A +certain amount of light made its way in by an orifice, a foot +square, that had been left in the roof for the escape of smoke. The +hut itself consisted of one room only, about eighteen feet square. + +When this was finished, all hands set to work to pile up a great +stack of firewood, close to the door, so as to save them from the +necessity of going far, until snow had ceased falling, and winter +had set in in earnest. + +The cart had brought six carcasses of sheep, that had been +purchased from a peasant; these were hung up outside the hut to +freeze hard, and the meat was eaten only once a day, as it would be +impossible to obtain a fresh supply, until the weather became +settled enough to admit of their hunting. + +The preparations were but just finished when the snow began to fall +heavily. For a week it came down without intermission, the wind +howled among the trees, and even Charlie, half stifled as he was by +the smoke, felt no inclination to stir out, except for half an +hour's work to clear away the snow from the entrance, and to carry +in wood from the pile. + +The time passed more cheerfully than might have been expected. He +had by this time begun to talk Polish with some facility, and was +able to understand the stories that the men told, as they sat round +the fire; sometimes tales of adventures they themselves had gone +through, sometimes stories of the history of Poland, its frequent +internal wars, and its struggles with the Turks. + +Making bread and cooking occupied some portion of the time, and +much was spent in sleep. At the end of a week the snow ceased +falling and the sun came out, and all were glad to leave the hut +and enjoy the clear sky and the keen air. + +While they had been confined to the hut, two of the men had made a +large number of snares for hares, and they at once started into the +forest, to set these in spots where they saw traces of the animals' +passage over the snow. The rest went off in parties of twos and +threes in search of other game. + +With the exception of Charlie, all were accustomed to the woods; +but, as Stanislas had much less experience than the others, the +captain decided to go with them. + +"It is easy for anyone to lose his way here," he said. "In fact, +except to one accustomed to the woods, it would be dangerous to go +far away from the hut. As long as it is fine, you will find your +way back by following your own tracks, but if the weather changed +suddenly, and it came on to snow, your case would be hopeless. One +of the advantages of placing our hut on a stream is that it forms a +great aid to finding one's way back. If you strike it above, you +follow it down; if below, upwards, until you reach the hut. Of +course you might wander for days and never hit it, still it is much +more easy to find than a small object like the hut, though even +when found, it would be difficult to decide whether it had been +struck above or below the hut. + +"Now, there is one rule if, at any time, you get lost. Don't begin +to wander wildly about, for, if you did, you would certainly walk +in a circle, and might never be found again. Sit down quietly and +think matters over, eat if you have got any food with you; then +examine the sky, and try to find out from the position of the sun, +or the direction in which the clouds are going, which way the hut +ought to lie. Always take with you one of your pistols; if you fire +it three times, at regular intervals, it will be a signal that you +want help, and any of us who are within hearing will come to aid +you." + +With the exception of hares, of which a good many were snared, the +hunting was not productive. Tracks of deer were seen not +unfrequently, but it was extremely difficult, even when the animals +were sighted, to get across the surface of the snow to within range +of the clumsy arquebuses that two or three of the men carried. They +did, however, manage to shoot a few by erecting a shelter, just +high enough for one man to lie down under, and leaving it until the +next snowstorm so covered it that it seemed but a knoll in the +ground, or a low shrub bent down and buried under the weight of the +snow. These shelters were erected close to paths taken by the deer, +and, by lying patiently all day in them, the men occasionally +managed to get a close shot. + +Several bears were killed, and two elks. These afforded food for a +long time, as the frozen flesh would keep until the return of +spring. Holes were made in the ice on the stream, and baited hooks +being set every night, it was seldom that two or three fish were +not found fast on them in the morning. + +Altogether, therefore, there was no lack of food; and as, under the +teaching of the captain, Charlie in time learnt to be able to keep +his direction through the woods, he was often able to go out, +either with Stanislas or alone, thus keeping clear of the close +smoky hut during the hours of daylight. Upon the whole he found the +life by no means an unpleasant one. + +Among the articles purchased by the captain were high boots, lined +with sheepskin, coming up to the thigh. With these and the coats, +which had hoods to pull over the head, Charlie felt the cold but +little during the day; while at night he found the hut often +uncomfortably warm, sleeping, as they all did, in the same attire +in which they went out. + +In February the weather became excessively severe, more so, the +peasants and charcoal burners they occasionally met with declared, +than they ever remembered. The wild animals became tamer, and in +the morning when they went out, they frequently found tracks of +bears that had been prowling round the hut in search of offal, or +bones thrown out. They were now obliged to hang their supply of +meat, by ropes, from boughs at some distance from the ground, by +which means they were enabled to prevent the bears getting at it. + +They no longer dared to venture far from the hut, for large packs +of wolves ranged through the forest, and, driven by hunger, even +entered villages, where they attacked and killed many women and +children, made their entrance into sheds, and tore dogs, horses, +and cattle to pieces, and became at last so dangerous that the +villagers were obliged to keep great fires burning in the streets +at night, to frighten them away. Several times the occupants of the +hut were awakened by the whining and snarling of wolves outside. +But the walls and roof were alike built of solid timber, and a +roughly-made door of thick wood was now fastened, every night, +against the opening, and so stoutly supported by beams behind it as +to defy assault. Beyond, therefore, a passing grumble at being +awakened by the noise, the men gave themselves no trouble as to the +savage animals outside. + +"If these brutes grow much bolder," the captain said one day, "we +shall be prisoners here altogether. They must have come down from +the great forest that extends over a large part of Russia. The +villages are scarce there, and the peasants take good care to keep +all their beasts in shelter, so no doubt they are able to pick up +more at the edge of the forest here." + +"How far are we from the Russian frontier?" + +"I do not think anyone could tell you. For aught I know, we may be +in Russia now. These forests are a sort of no man's land, and I +don't suppose any line of frontier has ever been marked. It is +Russia to the east of this forest, some thirty miles away, and it +is Poland to the west of it. The forest is no good to anyone except +the charcoal burners. I have met both Russians and Poles in the +wood, and, as there is plenty of room for all--ay, and would be +were there a thousand to every one now working in it--they are on +friendly terms with each other, especially as the two nations are, +at present, allied against Sweden." + +In spite of the wolves, Charlie continued his walks in the forest, +accompanied always by Stanislas. Both carried axes and pistols, +and, although Charlie had heard many tales of solitary men, and +even of vehicles, being attacked by the wolves in broad daylight, +he believed that most of the stories were exaggerations, and that +the chances of two men being attacked in daylight were small, +indeed. + +He had found that the track, by which the cart had brought the +stores, was a good deal used, the snow being swept away or levelled +by the runners of sledges, either those of peasants who came into +the forest for wood or charcoal, or of travellers journeying +between Russia and Poland. He generally selected this road for his +walk, both because it was less laborious than wading through the +untrodden snow, and because there was here no fear of losing his +way, and he was spared the incessant watchfulness for signs that +was necessary among the trees. At first he had frequently met +peasants' carts on the road, but, since the cold became more severe +and the wolves more numerous and daring, he no longer encountered +them. He had indeed heard, from some of the last he saw, that they +should come no more, for that the charcoal burners were all +abandoning their huts, and going into the villages. + +One afternoon, when they had, on their return, nearly reached the +spot where they left the road to strike across the forest to the +hut, they heard a noise behind them. + +"That is a pack of wolves, in full cry!" Stanislas exclaimed. "You +had better get up into a tree. They are after something." + +They hastily clambered into a tree, whose lower branches were but +six or seven feet from the ground. A moment later two horses, wild +with fright, dashed past, while some twenty yards behind them came +a pack of fifty or sixty wolves. They were almost silent now, with +their red tongues hanging out. + +"The brutes have been attacking a sledge," Stanislas said in a low +tone. "You saw the horses were harnessed, and their broken traces +were hanging by their side. It is easy to read the story. The +sledge was attacked; the horses, mad with fear, broke their traces +and rushed off, or perhaps the driver, seeing at the last moment +that escape was impossible, slashed the ropes with his knife, so as +to give the horses a chance. I expect they got a start, for the +wolves would be detained a little at the sledge." + +"Do you think the poor beasts will get safe out of the forest, +Stanislas?" + +"I don't think so, but they may. The chase has evidently been a +long one, and the wolves have tired themselves with their first +efforts to come up to them. It did not seem to me that they were +gaining when they passed us. It is simply a question of endurance, +but I fancy the wolves will last longest. + +"See, here is a party of stragglers. I suppose they stopped longer +at the sledge." + +"It seems to me they are on our scent, Stanislas. Do you see, they +are coming along at the side of the road where we walked, with +their heads down." + +"I am afraid they are. Well, we shall soon see. Yes, they are +leaving the road where we did." + +A moment later a dozen wolves ran up to the trunk of the tree, and +there gathered snuffing and whining. Presently one caught sight of +the two figures above them, and with an angry yelp sprang up in the +air, and immediately all were growling, snarling, and leaping. +Charlie laughed out loud at their impotent efforts. + +"It is no laughing matter, sir," Stanislas said gravely. + +"They cannot climb up here, Stanislas." + +"No, but they can keep us here. It will be dark in an hour, and +likely enough they will watch us all night." + +"Then we had better shoot two of them, and jump down with our +hatchets. Keeping back to back, we ought to be able to face ten +wolves." + +"Yes, if that were all; but see, here come three or four more, and +the dozen will soon swell to a score. No, we shall have to wait +here all night, and probably for some time tomorrow, for the men +are not likely to find us very early, and they will hardly hear our +pistols unless some of them happen to come in this direction." + +"Do you think, if we shoot two or three of them, the rest will go?" + +"Certainly not. It will be all the worse. Their comrades would at +once tear them to pieces and devour them, and the scent of blood +would very soon bring others to the spot." + +"Well, if we have got to wait here all night, Stanislas, we had +better choose the most comfortable place we can, at once, before it +gets dark. We must mind we don't go to sleep and tumble off." + +"There will be no fear of our sleeping," Stanislas said. "The cold +will be too great for that. We shall have to keep on swinging our +hands and feet, and rubbing our noses, to prevent ourselves from +getting frostbitten." + +"Well, I have never felt the cold in these clothes," Charlie said. + +"No, sir, but you have never been out at night, sitting cramped on +a tree." + +Hour after hour passed. Even in the darkness they could see the +wolves lying in the snow below them, occasionally changing their +position, keeping close together for warmth, and often snarling or +growling angrily, as one or two shifted their position, and tried +to squeeze in so as to get into a warm spot. + +The cold was intense and, in spite of swinging his legs and arms, +Charlie felt that his vital heat was decreasing. + +"This is awful, Stanislas. I do not think we can last on till +morning." + +"I begin to have doubts myself, sir. Perhaps it would be better to +leap down and make a fight of it." + +"We might shoot some of them first," Charlie said. "How many +charges have you?" + +"I have only two, besides one in the barrel." + +"And I have only three," Charlie said. "Powder has run very short. +The captain was saying, yesterday, that we must send to the village +and try to get some more. Still, six shots will help us." + +"Not much, sir. There must be thirty or forty of them now. I have +seen some come from the other way. I suppose they were part of the +pack that followed the horses." + +Charlie sat for some time thinking. Then he exclaimed: + +"I think this is a dead tree." + +"It is, sir. I noticed it when we climbed up. The head has gone, +and I think it must have been struck with lightning last summer." + +"Then I think we can manage." + +"Manage what, sir?" the man asked in surprise. + +"Manage to make a fire, Stanislas. First of all, we will crawl out +towards the ends of the branches as far as we can get, and break +off twigs and small boughs. If we can't get enough, we can cut +chips off, and we will pile them all where these three big boughs +branch off from the trunk. We have both our tinderboxes with us, +and I see no reason why we should not be able to light a fire up +here." + +"So we might," Stanislas said eagerly. "But if we did, we might set +the whole tree on fire." + +"No bad thing, either," Charlie rejoined. "You may be sure the fire +will keep the wolves at a respectful distance, and we could get +down and enjoy the heat without fear." + +"I believe your idea will save our lives, sir. Ten minutes ago I +would not have given a crown for our chances." + +They at once crawled out upon two of the great branches, and a +renewed chorus of snarls from below showed that their foes were +watchful. The snapping of the small branches excited a certain +amount of uneasiness among them, and they drew off a short +distance. In ten minutes Charlie and his companion worked +themselves back to the main trunk, each carrying an armful of +twigs. They first cut off a number of small dry chips, and made a +pile of these at the junction of one of the branches with the +trunk. They then got out their tinderboxes and bunches of rags, +shook a few grains of powder from one of the horns among the chips, +and then got the tinder alight. A shred of rag, that had been +rubbed with damp powder, was applied to the spark and then placed +among the shavings. A flash of light sprang up, followed by a +steady blaze, as the dried chips caught. One by one at first, and +then, as the fire gained strength, several sticks at a time were +laid over the burning splinters, and in five minutes a large fire +was blazing. + +Charlie and his companion took their seats where the other two big +branches shot out from the trunk. These were two or three feet +higher than that on which the fire had been lighted, and, ere long, +a sensation of genial warmth began to steal over them. Fresh sticks +were lighted as the first were consumed, and before long the trunk, +where the flames played on it, began to glow. Light tongues of +flame rose higher and higher, until the trunk was alight ten or +twelve feet up. + +"The wolves are all gone," Charlie said, looking down. + +"I don't suppose they have gone very far, sir. But when the tree +once gets fairly alight, you may be sure they won't venture +anywhere near it." + +They had already been forced to move some little distance away from +the trunk, by the heat, and as the flames rose higher and higher, +embracing in the course of half an hour the whole of the trunk and +upper branches, they felt that it was perfectly safe to drop off +into the snow beneath them. + +Blazing brands soon began to fall. They stood a short distance +away, so as to be beyond the risk of accident, but, at Charlie's +suggestion, they ran in from time to time, gathered up the brands +and laid them at the foot of the trunk, and in a short time a +second fire was kindled here. + +The tree was now a pyramid of fire, lighting up the snow for a long +distance round. Outside this circle the wolves could be heard +whining and whimpering, occasionally uttering a long-drawn howl. + +"They know that they are baulked of their prey," Stanislas said. +"We shall have some of the big branches falling soon, and shall be +able to keep up a roaring fire, that will last until daylight. I +should think by that time the wolves will be tired of it, and will +make off; but if not, the captain will be sure to send men out to +search for us. He will guess we have been treed by wolves, and we +have only to get into another tree, and fire our pistols, to bring +them in this direction." + +"But they may be attacked, too," Charlie remarked. + +"There are ten of them, and they are sure to come armed with axes +and swords. They ought to be able to fight their way through a +good-sized pack. Besides, the wolves will be so cowed by this great +fire, that I don't think they will have the courage to meddle with +so strong a party." + +One by one the arms of the tree fell, burnt through at the point +where they touched the trunk. They would have been far too heavy to +be dragged, but three or four of them fell across the lower fire, +and there lay blazing. Not knowing which way the tree itself would +fall, Charlie and his companion were obliged to remain at some +distance off, but the heat there was amply sufficient for them. At +last the trunk fell with a crash, and they at once established +themselves as near the fire as they could sit, without being +scorched, and there chatted until morning began to break. + +They felt sure that some, at least, of the wolves were around them, +as they occasionally caught sight of what looked like two sparks +among the undergrowth; these being, as they knew, the reflection of +the fire in the eyes of a wolf. There was a tree hard by in which +they could, if necessary, take refuge, and they therefore resolved +to stay near the fire. + +Fortunately the night had been perfectly still, and, as the tree +they had fired was a detached one, the flames had not spread, as +Charlie had at one time been afraid they would do. + +Half an hour after daylight had fairly broken, they discharged +three shots at regular intervals with their pistols, then they +waited half an hour. + +"Shall we fire again?" + +"No. Not until we hear shots from them," Charlie replied. "We have +but four charges left, and if the wolves made a sudden rush, we +might want to use them." + +After a time, both thought they heard the distant report of a +musket. Stanislas looked at Charlie inquiringly. The latter shook +his head. + +"No, no! Stanislas. That gun would be heard twice as far as one of +these pistols. Let us wait until we are pretty sure that they are +near. I don't like leaving ourselves without other protection than +our axes." + + + +Chapter 13: A Rescued Party. + + +After a considerable pause, a gun was again fired, this time much +nearer to them. Charlie drew out his pistol and was about to reply, +when his companion touched his arm. + +"Look!" he said. + +Charlie turned in time to see several gray forms flit rapidly +between the bushes. He stepped to the edge of the road, and saw +some wolves spring out through the bushes, and go straight along +the road. + +"What can have scared them?" he asked, in surprise. "The gun was +not near enough for that." + +"No, besides they would have fled deeper into the forest, instead +of taking to the road. Perhaps they hear something coming." + +Almost at the same moment, two shots were heard in the direction +towards which the wolves were making. + +"That is it!" Charlie excitedly exclaimed. "Another body of wolves +have attacked a passing traveller. Heap the wood on, Stanislas. If +we make a great fire, and they get as far as this, possibly they +could spring off and take refuge here. At any rate, the brands will +be better weapons even than our axes." + +The ends of such branches as they were able to move were brought +together, and a few blows with their axes speedily broke off +several of the outer ends of charred wood. These were thrown on, +and the fire soon blazed up high again. + +Two more shots were heard, this time close at hand. + +They ran into the road. A sledge, with several figures in it, was +coming along at full speed. It was almost surrounded by wolves, +and, as they looked, two of them sprang at the horses' heads; but +two shots again rung out, and they dropped backwards among their +companions, many of whom threw themselves at once upon their +bodies, while the sledge continued on its headlong course. + +"Here! here!" Charlie shouted at the top of his voice, waving his +hands to show the direction which they were to take. + +A moment later the sledge dashed past them, and swept up to the +fire. + +"Seize the blazing brands!" Charlie shouted, as those in the sledge +threw themselves out. + +He and Stanislas rolled the two first wolves over with their +pistols, and then joined the others. + +The driver had run at once to the horses, and had muffled them, by +throwing his coat over the head of one, and a rug over the head of +the other, and, though snorting and trembling in every limb, they +stood quiet until he had thrown a head rope round each of their +necks, and fastened them to the heaviest of the branches. Then he +seized a handful of fallen leaves, which were exposed by the +melting of the snow above them, and threw them into the fire, +whence a dense smoke poured out. + +The wolves had again stopped to devour the two animals that had +been shot, and this gave time to the men, by their united efforts, +to move a heavy branch and place it across two others, whose ends +lay in the fire, so as to form with them a sort of triangular +breastwork, the face of which, next to them, was manned by the two +travellers, their servants, Charlie, and Stanislas, with blazing +brands. + +Charlie and his companion hastily loaded their pistols again. The +two gentlemen had each rifles and a brace of pistols, as had their +servants. A lady and child had been lifted from the sledge, and +these crouched down at the angle by the fire. The sledge and the +two horses protected one of the faces of the position, and the +driver, at his master's orders, took his position on the front seat +again, so as to shoot down any wolf that might try to attack the +flank of the outside horse. + +The wolves looked doubtful at the appearance of the dense smoke +rising up, but, after a little hesitation, they rushed to the +attack. Four were rolled over by bullets from the rifles, and, as +they came within a few yards, the pistols cracked out in rapid +succession. As soon as these were all emptied, the six men caught +up the blazing brands, and struck full in the faces of the wolves, +shouting loudly as they did so. + +Seized with a momentary panic, the animals turned and fled, and +then a fierce fight took place between the injured wolves and their +companions. There was but just time to recharge the rifles and +pistols, when they came on again. Although the fire of the +defenders was as deadly as before, the wolves seemed this time +determined to get at their victims. In vain were blows showered on +their heads, while those who first sprang on the tree were stabbed +with the knives the defenders held in their left hands. + +The contest could have had but one termination, when suddenly two +shots were heard, and then, with loud shouts, a party of men burst +through the forest, and with pistol and axe fell on the wolves. +This unexpected onslaught had a decisive effect, and, with loud +howls and yelps, the wolves turned and fled. + +Up to this time, not a word had been exchanged by the defenders, +beyond Charlie's first shout of "Lay this branch across those two," +and the order of one of the gentlemen to the coachman to take his +place in the sledge--where he had done his work well, for four +wolves lay dead by the flank of the outside horse. Several of those +that had sprung at the heads of the horses had been shot or cut +down by the master, who had placed himself close to them, and the +horses' thick mufflings had saved them from any serious injury. + +As soon as the wolves fled, the gentleman turned to Charlie, and, +flinging down his weapons, threw his arms round his neck. + +"You have preserved us from death, sir. You have saved my wife and +child from being torn to pieces. How can I express my thanks to +you?" + +"It was fortunate that we happened to be here," Charlie said, "and +that we had this fire handy." + +A cry from the child called off the gentleman's attention, and he +ran to his wife, who had sunk fainting on the ground; and Charlie, +not a little pleased at this diversion, turned to Ladislas and his +men, who were looking on with the most intense astonishment at the +scene. Charlie leapt over the branch, and grasped Ladislas by the +hand. + +"You have arrived at the nick of time, Ladislas. Another three +minutes, and it would have been all over with us." + +"Yes, I could see it was a close thing as soon as I caught sight of +you. We have been wondering all night what became of you, and set +out as soon as it was light. We fired a shot occasionally, but we +listened in vain for your three shots." + +"We fired them half an hour after daylight," Charlie said; "but, as +we had then only five charges left between us, and there were +wolves all round, we dared not waste them." + +"We heard firing at last," the captain went on. "First two shots +faintly, then two nearer, and a minute later two others. We knew +then that you must be engaged with wolves, and we were running as +hard as we could in the direction of the shots, when we heard a +number fired close together. Of course we could make nothing of it, +but on we ran. Then there was another outbreak of firing, this time +quite close. A moment later we caught sight of a confused mass. +There was a fire, and a sledge with two horses, and a man standing +up in it shooting; and we could see a desperate fight going on with +the wolves in front, so Alexander and Hugo fired their pieces into +the thick of them. We set up a yell, and went at them with our +axes, yet I did not feel by any means sure that they would not be +too many for us. + +"But what on earth does it all mean? And how is it that you have +lived through the night? We had no expectation of finding you +alive. However, that fire tells its own tale, as though nothing +less than burning up a big tree would content you." + +"I will tell you all, presently. It is too long a story now. Let us +help these travellers to go their way, before the wolves rally +again." + +"They will not do that," the captain said confidently. "If it was +night, they might hang about the neighbourhood, but they are +cowardly beasts in the daytime, and easily scared. They are still +going away at their best pace, I will be bound." + +While Charlie was speaking to Ladislas, one of the travellers had +been talking to Stanislas, who, in answer to his question, had +informed him that he was in Charlie's service, and that the latter +was an English gentleman, who had, from a variety of circumstances, +especially the suspicion with which all strangers were regarded, +been unable to travel through the country, and had therefore been +passing the winter hunting, with this company of disbanded soldiers +who had so opportunely arrived to their assistance. + +The other traveller had, by this time, carried his wife beyond the +heat of the fire, and had applied some snow to her forehead, +pouring a little brandy from the flask between her lips. She had +now begun to revive, and, leaving her, he approached the party. His +brother met him, and in a few words told him what he had learned +from Stanislas. + +"My friends," he said, "my brother tells me that you are a party of +discharged soldiers, who are passing the winter in a hut here in +the forest, supporting yourselves by shooting and fishing. I have +to thank Providence for the thought that sent you here. I have to +thank you for your prompt assistance, to which we are indebted for +our lives. + +"I am Count Nicholas Staroski, and can at least make a substantial +return for the service you have done me. My estates lie some sixty +miles to the north. You will have no difficulty in finding me. +Present yourselves there at Easter. I shall certainly be at my +chateau then. I will then talk over what can be done for you. Those +who like to settle down on land shall have land, those who would +like employment in my household shall have it, those who would +prefer money to go their own way and settle in their own villages +shall each have a heavy purse." + +Then he turned to Charlie. + +"You, sir, as my brother has learned from your brave follower here, +are an English gentleman. To you I owe far heavier obligation than +to these soldiers, for you and your man incurred a terrible risk, +and well-nigh sacrificed your lives for ours. I pray you come with +us, and stay with us for a time. I shall then hear your plans, and +your object in visiting this country, and if I can in any way +further them, you may be sure I will do so to the utmost; for the +present, I can promise you at least excellent hunting, and the +heartiest welcome." + +"I thank you very heartily, Count Staroski, and accept gladly your +invitation; but I must first speak to the captain of these men, to +whom I am much beholden for the kindness he has shown me." + +He went across to Ladislas, who had heard what was said. + +"You will not think it ungrateful for me to quit you so suddenly, +Ladislas," he said in a low voice. + +"Assuredly not. You have done us a service, indeed, in thus +enabling us to obtain favour with the count. He is one of our +richest and most powerful nobles, and our fortunes are as good as +made." + +"I will introduce you to him personally," Charlie said. + +"This, count, is the leader of the party. He has shown me very +great kindness, and has proved a true friend. From what I have seen +of him, I have no doubt whatever that, in spite of certain acts of +lawlessness to which he and his friends have been driven of late, +you will find him, in any position you may be good enough to give +him, an honest and thoroughly trustworthy man." + +"I will bear it in mind," the count said. "Now, the sooner we are +off, the better. How far is it to the next village?" + +"About seven miles, count." + +The count gave orders for the sledge to be taken on to the road +again. + +"One moment," the captain said, taking Charlie aside. "Pray tell +us, in a few words, what has happened. The burning of the tree is a +mystery to us, and we shall die of curiosity if we have to remain +here for another two months with the matter unexplained." + +In as few words as possible, Charlie related to the men the story +of the preceding night, which was greeted with exclamations of +surprise and admiration. + +"Truly, you have your wits about you," the captain said. "I should +have been frozen to death, if I had been in your position, for I +should certainly never have thought of lighting a fire up in a +tree. + +"Well, goodbye, if we do not see you again, may all good fortune +attend you, and may the saints protect you from all danger." + +Charlie shook hands with the men all round, and then hurried down +to the sledge. The coachman was already in the front seat, the +countess and her child had taken their places, and the two armed +servants and Stanislas were standing behind, in readiness to jump +on to a board fastened above the runners. + +"I must apologize for keeping you waiting, countess," Charlie said +as he ran up. "I had to explain to my friends, in a few words, how +this had all come about." + +"We are also longing to know," the count said. "But I have not yet +introduced you to my wife, nor have I learned the name of the +gentleman to whom I owe so much." + +"Ah, sir," the young countess said, holding out her hand after +Charlie had given his name, "what do we not owe you? I shall never +forget it all, never." + +"We will talk when we have started, Feodora. Let us get out of this +forest as soon as we can." + +He took his place beside his wife, and set the child on his knees; +his brother and Charlie sitting opposite to him. The servants +spread a bearskin rug over their knees, and then jumped into their +places, as the driver cracked his whip, and the horses started. + +"You must think us almost mad to be driving through the forest, at +this time of the year," the count said to Charlie. "But the +countess is a Russian. We have been staying two months at her +father's place, a hundred miles to the east. My two youngest +children are at home, and two days since a message arrived, saying +that one of them was dangerously ill. We had heard, of course, many +tales of the numbers and fierceness of the wolves, but we hoped +that, by travelling only by day and with excellent horses, there +was not much to fear, especially as we were five armed men. + +"We fell in with a few wolves yesterday, but beat them off easily +enough. Last night, we stopped at a little village in the forest. +They certainly made me feel uneasy there, with their tales about +the wolves, but there was no help for it. We started as soon as day +broke, and had driven some fifteen miles, before we came up to you. +We had not gone five when the wolves began to show themselves. + +"At first, they kept well behind us, but presently we came upon a +large number, who joined in near where we saw an overturned sledge, +with the snow stained with blood all round it. From there we kept +up a running fight, and must have killed a score; but their numbers +increased, rather than diminished, and when a fresh pack came up +from ahead, a quarter of a mile before we saw you, it looked as if +our case was hopeless; for the horses, which had been going at the +top of their speed from the time we started, were beginning to +flag, while the wolves were fast closing in upon us, and were just +beginning to attack the horses, when I saw you in the road. + +"And now, pray tell us how you came to be there so opportunely, and +how it was that you had that great fire blazing." + +Charlie gave the full history of the previous night's adventure. + +"Wonderful!" the count and his brother exclaimed; and the former +went on: "I have heard many stories of escapes from wolves, but +never one like yours. It was an admirable thought, indeed, that of +at once obtaining heat and frightening the wolves away, by setting +the tree on fire. That thought saved our lives as well as your own, +for our fate would have been the same as those unfortunate +travellers, whose horses you saw, and who brought the wolves upon +you. + +"And now, sir, would it be impertinent to ask for what purpose you +have come to Poland? Believe me, I only put the question in order +to see if I can in any way be of assistance to you." + +"I do not know, count, whether my avowal will affect you +unfavourably, but I know that it will make no difference in your +conduct towards me. I am, as my servant told you, an Englishman by +birth; but I and my father were obliged, in consequence of +political opinions, to leave the country, and I am now a captain in +the service of Charles of Sweden." + +Exclamations of surprise broke from his hearers. + +"Well, sir," the count said, smiling, "as his majesty King Charles, +although not yet one-and-twenty, is one of the greatest generals in +Europe, I cannot consider it strange that you, who appear to me to +be no older, should be a captain in his service. But I own that I +pictured, to myself, that the officers of these wonderful soldiers +were fierce-looking men, regular iron veterans." + +"I am but eighteen," Charlie said, "and I myself feel it absurd +that I should be a captain. It is but two years since I was +appointed an ensign, and the king happening to be with my company, +when we had a sharp fight with the Russians, he rewarded us by +having us made into a regiment; so each of us got promotion. I was +appointed captain last May, as a reward for a suggestion that +turned out useful." + +"May I ask what it was, Captain Carstairs, for it seems to me that +you are full of happy ideas?" + +"King Charles, as you may have heard, speaks freely to officers and +soldiers as he moves about the camp. I was standing on the edge of +the river, looking across at the Saxons, on the day before we made +the passage, when the king came up and spoke to me. He said there +was no hope of our passage being covered--as our advance against +the Russians at Narva had been--by a snowstorm; and I said that, as +the wind was at our backs, if we were to set fire to the great +straw stacks the smoke would hide our movements from the Saxons. +The idea was a very simple one, and would no doubt have occurred to +the king himself; however, he put it into execution with success, +and was good enough, afterwards, to promote me to the rank of +captain." + +"So it was owing to you that our army--or rather the Saxon army, +for but few Poles were engaged in the battle--was defeated," the +count said, smiling. "Well, sir, it will do you no harm with us, +for personally we are entirely opposed to Augustus of Saxony. But +you have not yet explained how you, an officer in the Swedish +service, came to be here." + +"I was sent by King Charles to Warsaw, to ascertain the feeling of +the trading classes there. I had an introduction to a Scottish +merchant, and I passed as a countryman of his, who had come out to +enter his business. One of the objects of my mission was to +endeavour to induce the foreign merchants in Warsaw to do what they +could to promote a feeling in favour of peace with the Swedes, and +the substitution of another king in place of Augustus." + +"It is not very clear, Captain Carstairs, how you can be fulfilling +that object by passing your winter with a party of robbers--for I +suppose your disbanded soldiers were little better--in a forest on +the confines of Russia." + +Charlie laughed. + +"It is rather a long story, count. Perhaps you will kindly tell me +the news about public affairs, first." + +"By no means," the count said. "That is a long story, too, and my +wife would much rather hear yours than listen to it. She has not +yet recovered from the events of this morning. But we will wait +until we are at the village. We have left the forest behind us, and +another half hour will take us to Stromoff, where we can get pretty +good accommodation." + +The horses, a splendid pair of animals, had, during their passage +through the forest, shown every sign of fear; starting nervously, +swerving, and going in sharp, sudden rushes, and always needing a +constant strain on the reins to keep them from bolting. Once away +from the trees, however, they settled down into a fast trot, and +the seven miles to Stromoff were done in less than half an hour. + +No sooner did the landlord of the inn learn the name of his guest, +than he, his wife, and sons bustled about in the greatest haste to +make things comfortable for them. Huge fires were lighted in the +guest rooms, and the common room was cleared of the other +customers, until the chamber should be sufficiently warmed for +occupation; while in the kitchen preparations were made for a meal, +to which, in half an hour from their arrival, the party in the +sledge sat down. When this was over, settles were placed round the +fire, and Charlie then gave a full account of his adventures, from +the time he was attacked in the streets of Warsaw. + +"So it was you, Captain Carstairs, after whom there was so keen a +search in September. The death of Ben Soloman made a great stir, +and I can assure you that there are a great many people who owe you +a debt of gratitude. The man had no sons, and all his property +passed to his widow, whom he had, it seems, treated harshly during +his lifetime. She was from Holland, and wished to return to her +people, so, as his means were very large, she made the easiest +terms with all those on whose estates her husband had held +mortgages, in order to wind up her affairs as soon as possible. +Thus, his death was the subject of wide rejoicings. However, if you +had been caught at the time, I fear it would have gone hard with +you; for the Jews were all very keen about it--as the man, rascal +though he was, was one of the chief heads of their religion--and +were you to fall into their hands in any of the towns, they would +either kill you or send you to Warsaw." + +"And now, sir, will you tell me what has taken place since +September?" + +"Things have moved slowly. Augustus endeavoured, after his defeat +on the Dwina, to make peace with Charles on his own account, and +without the knowledge of the diet, but Charles refused to give +audience to any of his agents, and would not even see the beautiful +Countess of Konigsmark, who is, you know, herself a Swede, and whom +Augustus sent, thinking that her blandishments might win over the +young king. It was useless. Charles maintained the ground that he +took up from the first--namely, that he would treat with the diet, +but would have nothing whatever to say to Augustus. So the diet +sent an embassy of four senators. + +"Instead of receiving them with every pomp and ceremony, as they +expected, the king met them on horseback. He demanded that, as a +first condition, they should dethrone Augustus. Parties in the diet +were pretty equally divided; but the proposal was rejected, for +even those most hostile to Augustus resented the proposal that we, +a free and unconquered people, should be ordered by a foreign +prince to change our king. So nothing came of it. + +"The Swedish army advanced a certain distance into Poland, and +there were a great number of skirmishes, but there has been no +serious fighting, nor is there much chance of any, until the snow +has gone and the country dried up in the spring. At present, +Augustus is quarrelling with the diet, who still set themselves +against the importation of more Saxon troops. But doubtless, before +the campaign begins in earnest, he will have settled matters with +the senators, and will have his own way in that respect. There is, +however, little chance of the diet agreeing to call out the whole +forces of the country, and the next battle will, like the last, be +between the Swedes and the Saxons, who may have with them perhaps a +few thousand Poles, belonging to the king's party." + +"You don't belong to the king's party, count?" + +"No. I, like the majority of our nobles, have no interest whatever +in the war, for we were never consulted before it began. It is an +affair between Saxony and the Swedes. Let them fight it out. It +would be a bad day for Poland, if Augustus and the Russians were to +overcome and despoil Sweden. We want no addition of territory, for +that would be to strengthen our kings against us. We see the +trouble caused by Augustus having Saxony at his command, and if he +had other territory, the country would be divided into two parts, +one of which would have nothing in common with the other. + +"Still less do we wish to see Russia gain territory to the north of +us. Hitherto we have thought but little of the Muscovites, but this +war has shown that they can put great armies into the field, and +the czar is making them into a nation which may some day be +formidable to us. + +"Charles has sent every assurance that he has no ill will towards +Poland, and is an enemy not of the country but of its king--who had +formed a coalition against him in a time of profound peace--and +that his hostility will altogether cease with the overthrow and +expulsion of Augustus. So you see, we who live at a distance from +the capital, and hold ourselves altogether aloof from the intrigues +of court, look on at the fray as if it were one in which we have no +part or lot. If Augustus drives out the Swedes, we shall probably +have trouble with him afterwards. If Charles drives out Augustus, +we shall have a fresh king, and shall no doubt choose one upon the +recommendation of Charles, who will then march away again, leaving +us to manage our own affairs. Therefore, we have no animosity +whatever against you as a Swedish officer, but for comfort's sake +it is better that nothing should be said of this, and that I should +introduce you to my friends simply as an English gentleman, who has +rendered me the greatest possible service." + +The countess retired to bed, a short time after they had finished +their meal, and the others sat up talking until late in the +evening. Charlie learnt that the country was still in a greatly +disturbed state. Parties of disbanded soldiers and others, rendered +desperate by cold and hardship, were everywhere plundering the +peasantry, and many encounters had taken place between them and the +nobles, who, with their retainers, had marched against them. Travel +would be dangerous for a long time to come. + +"Therefore, until the spring, you must not think of moving," the +count said. "Indeed, I think that your best plan, when you start, +will be to work due north, and join the Swedish forces near Narva. +It will be shorter as well as less dangerous. Still, we can talk of +that later on." + +The next morning they started early, and arrived in the afternoon +at the chateau of the count. It was not a fortified building, for +the Poles differed from the western nations, abstaining from +fortifying their towns and residences, upon the ground that they +were a free people, capable of defending their country from foreign +invasion, and therefore requiring no fortified towns, and that such +places added to the risks of civil war, and enabled factions to set +the will of the nation at defiance. + +The building was a large one, but it struck Charlie as being +singularly plain and barn-like in comparison with the residences of +country gentlemen in England. A number of retainers ran out as they +drove up into the courtyard, and exclamations of surprise and +dismay rose, as the wounds on the horses' flanks and legs were +visible; and when, in a few words, the count told them that they +had been attacked by wolves, and had been saved principally by the +English gentleman and his follower, the men crowded round Charlie, +kissed his hands, and in other ways tried to show their gratitude +for his rescue of their master and mistress. + +"Come along," the count said, taking his arm and leading him into +the house. "The poor fellows mean well, and you must not be vexed +with them." + +The countess's first question had been for her child, and with an +exclamation of thankfulness, when she heard that it was better, she +had at once hurried into the house. As soon as they had entered, +the count left Charlie in charge of his brother, and also hurried +away. He was not long before he returned. + +"The child is doing well," he said, "and now that it has got its +mother again, it will, I think, improve rapidly. The doctor said +this morning that he considered it out of danger, but that it +needed its mother sorely, to cheer and pet it." + +In a very short time the tables were laid. The count, his brother, +and Charlie sat at an upper table, and the hall was filled with the +various officers and retainers. The count's arrival was expected, +for a horseman had been sent forward on their arrival at the inn +the evening before. The dinner had therefore been cooked in +readiness, and Charlie was astonished at the profusion with which +it was served. Fish, joints, great pies, and game of many kinds +were placed on the table in unlimited quantities; the drink being a +species of beer, although excellent wine was served at the high +table. He could now understand how often the Polish nobles +impoverished themselves by their unbounded hospitality and love of +display. + +"I suppose, for tomorrow, you will like to remain quiet," the count +said, "but after that we will try to amuse you. There is game of +all sorts to be shot, or if you have had enough sport, lately, +there will be a sledge and horses at your disposal, whenever you +choose to ride or drive, and in a few days we will give an +entertainment, in honour at once of our return, your visit, and the +child's restoration to health. Then you will have an opportunity of +seeing our national dances." + +Charlie had had enough shooting, but he greatly enjoyed the drives +in the sledges, behind the spirited horses. The entertainment came +off a fortnight after his arrival at the chateau. The guests, for +the most part, arrived early in the afternoon, many having driven +in from great distances. The preparations had been on an immense +scale, and the scene at night was a brilliant one. + +Never had Charlie seen anything like the magnificence of the +dresses, not of the ladies only, but also of the gentlemen; the +Poles having the true oriental love for rich costumes, a taste that +their national dress permitted them to gratify to the utmost. Next +to the splendour of the dresses, Charlie was surprised at the grace +and spirit of the dancing, which was far more vivacious than that +of western nations. The Poles were long considered to be the best +dancers in the world. It was their great national amusement; and +all danced, from noble to peasant, entering into it with spirit and +enthusiasm, and uniting the perfection of rhythmical motion with +the grace and ease peculiar to them, and to their kinsmen the +Hungarians. + +The dancing was kept up, with unflagging energy, during the whole +night; and then, after a substantial breakfast, the men and women +were muffled up in furs, and took their places in the sledges. + +The count would gladly have had Charlie remain with him until +spring began, but he was anxious to rejoin the army; and, seeing +that this was so, the count did everything in his power to +facilitate his journey, which, after talking it over, had been +decided should be direct towards the royal camp. The count's +brother insisted upon accompanying him on the journey, as in this +way many of the difficulties would be avoided. Two sledges were +prepared, the one for the use of Charlie and Count John, and the +other for the two servants and baggage. Both were horsed by the +fastest animals in the count's stables. + +Charlie himself had been loaded with presents, which he had been +obliged somewhat reluctantly to accept, as he saw that a refusal +would hurt and mortify his kind hosts. He had, on his arrival, been +provided with an ample wardrobe of clothes of all kinds, and to +these were now added dolmans, cloaks, rugs, and most costly furs. A +splendid gun, pistols, and a sword, with the hilt studded with +gems, completed his outfit; while Stanislas had been presented with +a heavy purse of money. + +The whole of the retainers of the castle were assembled to see them +start, and the count and countess, at parting, made him promise to +come and pay them another visit, if the fortune of war should bring +him within the possibility of reaching them. + +The journey was a delightful one. Each night they put up at the +chateau of some nobleman. To many of these Count John Staroski was +personally known; at the others, his name secured at once a hearty +welcome for himself and his companion. Travelling only by day, and +at the full speed of the horses, they escaped interruption by the +marauding bands, and in fourteen days after starting they drove +into the town where Charles of Sweden had his headquarters, after +being twice stopped and questioned by bodies of Swedish horse. + +The town was crowded with troops, and they had some difficulty in +finding a lodging for themselves, and stabling for the horses. As +soon as this was done, Charlie proceeded alone to the quarters of +Count Piper. + + + +Chapter 14: The Battle Of Clissow. + + +Charlie sent in his name, and was shown in at once. + +"I am glad, indeed, to see you, Captain Carstairs," the minister said, +as he entered. "We had given you up for lost. We heard first that +you had been murdered in the streets of Warsaw. A month later, a +man brought a letter to me from your Scotch friend Ramsay, to say +that you were accused of the murder of a Jew trader, a man, it +seems, of some importance in Warsaw. Ramsay said that you were in +the company of a band of brigands, and that the man who went with +you as your servant had joined you, and had taken you some money. +He forwarded the letter you had sent him explaining your position, +and said he thought that, upon the whole, it was the best thing you +could have done, as a vigorous search had been set on foot, at the +instance of the Jews, and there would have been but little chance +of your making your way through the country alone. He added that he +felt confident that, if alive, you would manage somehow to rejoin +us before the campaign opened in the spring. + +"I am glad that you have been able to do so, but your appearance, +at present, is rather that of a wealthy Polish noble, than of a +companion of brigands." + +"I was able to do some service to Count Staroski, as, when +travelling with his wife and child, and his brother, Count John, he +was attacked by a pack of wolves. I have been staying with him for +some weeks, and his brother has now had the kindness to accompany +me here. He has thereby made my passage through the country easy, +as we have travelled with fast horses in his sledge, and have +always put up at the chateaux of nobles of his acquaintance. I +have, therefore, avoided all risk of arrest at towns. In the letter +forwarded to you I explained the real circumstances of the death of +the Jew." + +"Yes, we quite understood that, Captain Carstairs. You had a very +narrow escape from death at his hands, and, as the danger was +incurred purely in the king's service, it will not be forgotten. Up +to the time when the Jew organized the attack upon you in Warsaw, I +was well satisfied with your reports of your work. So far nothing +has come of it, as Augustus has been too strong for any movement +against him, but we hope, ere long, to defeat him so decisively +that our friends will be able to declare against him. I will inform +the king of your return, and I have no doubt he will be glad to +hear your story from your own lips. He loves tales of adventure, +and time hangs somewhat heavily on hand, as, until the frost +breaks, nothing can be done in the field." + +On the following day, indeed, Charlie was sent for to the royal +quarters, and had to recount the story of his adventures in full to +the king, who was highly interested in them, and at the conclusion +requested him to introduce Count John Staroski, in order that he +might express to him his obligation for the service he had rendered +to one of his officers. This done, Charlie drove out with the count +to the village where Colonel Jamieson's regiment was quartered, and +where his return was received with delight by Harry, and with great +pleasure by Major Jervoise and his fellow officers. He was obliged +to give a short outline of what he had been doing since he left, +but put off going into details for a future occasion. + +"And are you coming back to us now, Charlie?" Harry asked. + +"Certainly. My success in the diplomatic way was not sufficiently +marked for them to be likely to employ me in that line again. We +must return this afternoon, as the king has invited us both to sup +with him tonight." + +Two days later, Count John Staroski started upon his return +journey, much pleased with the reception he had met with from the +King of Sweden, and determined to work vigorously, among the nobles +of his acquaintance, to bring about the dethronement of Augustus of +Saxony. Charlie had already seen Count Piper, who had told him +that, although the king and himself were both well satisfied with +the work he had done, there was not at present any mission of the +same sort on which he could be employed. Indeed, it was evident +that, until the Saxons had been decisively defeated, political +action would be useless, and that, therefore, for the present he +could either remain at headquarters, or rejoin his regiment. +Charlie at once chose the latter alternative. + +"Very well, Captain Carstairs, you can rejoin when you like, but +remember I may claim your services again. You see, now that you +have acquired a knowledge of Polish, your value for this sort of +work is largely increased." + +As soon as the frost had broken, the Swedish army commenced its +advance. Skirmishes frequently took place, but Augustus had, as +yet, no army with which he could meet them in the field, and he +summoned a diet at Warsaw, in hopes of persuading the Poles to +decide upon calling out the whole national force. + +In this he failed altogether. The citizens, led by the foreign +traders, were already openly opposed to him, and their attitude so +encouraged his opponents in the diet, that many of these rose and +openly denounced the government, and the conduct of the king, that +had brought the country into its present difficulties. + +As the Swedish army advanced, they were joined by the Duke of +Holstein, and, in spite of the efforts of a considerable body of +the enemy, under Prince Wisniowiski, progressed steadily, crossed +the river Memel, and, when near Grodno, were met by an embassy sent +by the diet, to endeavour to persuade Charles not to advance +further. + +An interview took place between the king, the Poles, and his +ministers, the conversation on both sides being in Latin. But as +the ambassadors had no definite plans to propose, and their leaders +were wholly devoted to Augustus, the king refused to allow his +advance to be arrested, and continued his march. When near Praga +they crossed the plain where Charles Gustavus, King of Sweden, had +defeated the Polish army in a great battle, that had lasted for +three days. The city was occupied, and a contribution of 20,000 +crowns imposed upon it, in addition to food for the army while it +remained there. Plundering, however, was strictly forbidden, and, +as the king issued a proclamation declaring that he was no enemy of +the Polish Republic, but simply of their king, the inhabitants +were, on the whole, well satisfied with the conduct of the +invaders. + +A halt was made here for some time, and a bridge was thrown across +the Vistula, while the army rested after the long and fatiguing +marches it had made. A fresh attempt was made to arrest the advance +of the Swedes, and the Cardinal Primate, himself, met the king; but +nothing came of the negotiations, and the army entered Warsaw. Here +they were warmly received, and great entertainments were given to +the king. + +Towards the end of June, they again advanced to meet the force that +Augustus had gathered, and on the 6th of July the Swedes arrived +within a few miles of Clissow. The next day some reinforcements +arrived, and the king decided to give battle on the following day, +which was the anniversary of the victory on the Dwina, the previous +year. + +His army was twelve thousand strong, while that of Augustus was +nearly double that strength, and was very strongly posted, his camp +being surrounded by morasses, although situated on rising ground +which commanded the whole of the country round it. The bogs in the +front were found to be so impassable, that the Swedes were forced +to make a circuit to the left, where the ground was firmer. This +movement obliged the enemy also to change front, a movement that +caused considerable confusion, as they themselves were forced to +traverse boggy ground, to take up a new position facing that by +which the Swedes would now advance. + +The attack was commenced by the division commanded by the Duke of +Holstein, but, scarcely had he set his troops in motion than he was +mortally wounded, by a ball from a falconet. His troops, however, +pushed forward vigorously. The Polish division opposed to them +resisted the two first assaults bravely, but gave way at the third +attack, and were driven from the ground, in such confusion that +they took no further part in the engagement. + +While this was going on, the Saxon cavalry had been repulsed by +that of Charles, and, passing in their retreat under the fire of +three infantry regiments, suffered so heavily that they left the +field. The Swedish foot now advanced all along the line, and in the +centre destroyed several battalions of Saxons. + +But the Swedish right was attacked so vigorously by the Saxon left, +under Field Marshal Steinau, that for a time the conflict was +doubtful. The Swedish horse guards and other cavalry, however, +charged with such determination that the Saxon horse on this flank +were also defeated, and driven off the field, while the Swedish +infantry, advancing without firing, drove several battalions of +Saxon foot into a village, where, being surrounded, almost all were +killed or taken prisoners. + +The Saxon horse, gathering once more, attempted bravely to retrieve +the fate of the day, and engaged the Swedish horse with such +desperate valour, that a considerable portion of the Saxon infantry +were enabled, under cover of the conflict, to draw off, cross the +morasses, and make their escape. + +The battle lasted four hours, and had been, throughout, severely +contested. The Saxons lost four thousand killed and wounded, and +three thousand taken prisoners, while the Swedes had eleven hundred +killed and wounded. Forty-eight cannon were captured by the +victors, together with all the baggage and waggons. The death of +the Duke of Holstein, a gallant prince who was exceedingly popular +with the army, and beloved by the king, cast a gloom over this +great victory, which virtually laid Poland at the feet of the +victors, and insured the fulfilment of the object for which Charles +had persisted in the war. + +Jamieson's regiment had been on the left wing, but, as it had been +held in reserve, to strengthen the line at any point at which it +might give way, the Scotch had taken but a small share in the +fighting, and had but thirty men killed and wounded by the shot and +bullets that passed over the heads of the fighting line. + +The captain of one of the companies was among those killed, and +Charlie, who had, since he rejoined the regiment, been doing duty +as lieutenant, now took the vacant place. + +The army still advanced. Augustus sent in several proposals for +peace, but these were all rejected. The Saxons had speedily rallied +after the battle, but were not in a position to oppose the advance +of the victorious Swedes, who occupied Cracow without meeting with +any resistance. Seeing that Augustus would not be strong enough to +hazard another pitched battle, Charles had, on the morning after +the victory, ordered three of his regiments, of which Jamieson's +was one, to march with all speed to reinforce Major General +Schlippenbach, who had sent an urgent request for aid, as he heard +that the Russian army, fifty thousand strong, was preparing to +cross the frontier; and as he had but six thousand, he could not +hope to oppose their advance successfully. + +As the king's orders enjoined the troops to march with the greatest +possible speed, they performed the journey back to Warsaw in four +days, although the distance exceeded a hundred miles. Mounted +messengers had been sent on before them, and, on reaching the town, +they found boats already prepared to take them down the river to +Danzic, where orders had already been sent for ships to be in +readiness to convey them to Revel. The fatigues since the campaign +opened had been severe, and the troops all enjoyed the long days of +rest, while the craft that conveyed them dropped quietly down the +Vistula. Then came the short sea passage. + +On their arrival at Revel, bad news met them. They had come too +late. On the 16th of July the Russian army had passed the frontier, +and the Swedes had tried to oppose them at the passage of the river +Embach; but the water was low, from the effects of a long drought, +and the Russians were enabled to ford it at several points. The +Swedes fell upon those who first crossed, and for two hours +repulsed their attacks, obtaining at some points considerable +advantage, and capturing some guns, but, as fresh reinforcements +poured across the river, the tide of battle turned. The Russian +cavalry drove back the Swedish horse, who, as they retreated, rode +through the infantry and threw them into disorder. These were +attacked by the Russians before they could recover from their +confusion, and were almost entirely destroyed or taken prisoners. + +The general, and many of the mounted officers, effected their +escape, rallied the broken cavalry, and fell back towards Revel. +The Russians spread over the country and plundered it, burning the +little town of Valk, murdering its inhabitants, and carrying off +into slavery the whole of the population who fell into their hands. + +The arrival of the three regiments was hailed with much +satisfaction by the people of Revel, who feared that the Russians +might besiege the town. They did not, however, approach within many +miles, but, after completely wasting the country, retired across +the frontier. + +The victory that had been gained over the Swedes at Embach, and the +destruction of the greater part of General Schlippenbach's force, +enabled the czar to turn his arms against Ingria, the extreme +eastern province of Sweden, which included the shores of Lake +Ladoga and the whole of the coast of the Baltic between Narva and +Finland. Urgent messages were sent by the governor of that province +to General Schlippenbach, requesting him to send him aid, as he had +not even sufficient men to garrison the walled towns. The general +was, however, afraid that Narva would be again besieged, and he +therefore dared not reduce his small force to any considerable +degree, but drew one company from each of the three regiments, and +embarked them on board a ship for the mouth of the Neva. + +As there seemed little prospect of service, for a time, near Revel, +all the officers were eager that their company should be chosen for +the service in Ingria. Colonel Jamieson therefore said: + +"I do not wish to choose one company more than another; all can +equally be depended upon. Therefore, I think the fairest way will +be to draw lots as to which shall go." + +The lot fell upon Charlie's company, which therefore formed part of +the expedition. On reaching the mouth of the Neva, they heard that +the town of Notteburg, situated at the point where the Neva issues +from the lake, was already besieged by the Russians, and that the +Swedish vessels on the lake had been obliged to come down the +river. A fort had been raised by the Russians on the bank, to +prevent succour being conveyed into the town, and two thousand men +had crossed the river and occupied a small redoubt on the northern +side, so that the town was completely invested. + +The newly-arrived force was ordered to march, at once, with a +hundred horse and four field pieces, the whole under the command of +Major Sion, who was well acquainted with the country. + +"What do you think of this expedition, Captain Carstairs?" his +lieutenant, John Bowyer, asked him. + +"I would rather be back with King Charles," Charlie replied. "Of +course, I don't know the geography of the place, but if the +Russians keep their eyes at all open, I don't see how a force like +ours, with cavalry and guns, can hope to enter the town unnoticed. +The addition of the horsemen seems to me altogether ridiculous, as +they could be no good whatever, if they did enter the town. As for +those four field pieces, they will hamper our march; and as they +say the Russians have already some forty cannon in position about +the town, those little pieces would be useless. + +"Four hundred infantry, making the attempt at night under good +guidance, might manage to slip into the place, but this procession +of ours is, to my mind, tempting destruction, for we certainly +cannot hope to cut our way, by force, through the whole Russian +army. + +"But even if we do get inside the town, our plight can be no +better. The Russians' cannon are bombarding it, night and day, and +more batteries are in course of erection, and Schlippenbach the +governor, who is, I believe, a brother of the general, has but a +few pieces to reply to them. + +"Were there an army advancing to the relief of the place, it would +be different altogether, for our reinforcement might be of vital +importance in repelling assaults, until aid arrived. But there is +no hope of aid. The king's army is some nine hundred miles away, +and his hands are full. General Schlippenbach has sent as many men +as he could spare. They say there are at least twenty thousand +Russians round the town, and where is an army to come from that can +compel them to raise the siege? To my mind, we shall either be +destroyed making our way into the town, or, if we do get in, shall +be made prisoners of war, if not massacred--for the Russians have +but vague ideas as to giving quarter--when the town falls, which +may be a fortnight hence." + +"It seems a bad lookout, altogether," the lieutenant remarked. + +"Very much so. The best possible thing that could befall us would +be for the Russians to make us out, before we get too far into +their lines, in which case we may be able to fall back before they +can gather in overwhelming strength, and may thus draw off without +any very great loss." + +Major Sion called the captains of the infantry companies, and the +troop of horse, to a sort of council of war, when the little force +halted for an hour at three o'clock in the afternoon. + +"We have another ten miles to march, gentlemen, and I should like +to ask your opinion as to whether it would be best to try to force +our way in as soon as we get there, or to halt at a distance of +three or four miles from the Russians, and make our effort at +daybreak before they are fairly afoot." + +The other three officers gave their opinion in order of seniority, +and all advocated the plan of falling upon the Muscovites at +daybreak. + +"And what do you think, Captain Carstairs?" Major Sion asked +Charlie. + +"I regret to say, major, that my opinion differs from that of the +other gentlemen, and this for several reasons. In the first place, if +we halt so near the Russians, our presence in their neighbourhood +may be betrayed by a peasant, and we may be surprised in the night. +If no such mishap should take place, we should have to be on foot two +hours before sunrise. I in no way doubt your knowledge of the road, +but it is at all times difficult to make out a mere track, like that +we are following, at night, and in the morning we might well find +ourselves involved in the Russian intrenchments, from which we could +not extricate ourselves before a large force had gathered round us, +in which case we must be all either killed or taken prisoners. My +own suggestion would be that we should remain here another two hours, +and then continue our march so as to reach the spot, where we are to +endeavour to break through their line, about sunset. Should we be +observed, as we most likely should be, we might at that hour be taken +for a freshly-arrived body of Russian troops. There would be no risk +of losing our way, and we might hope to be close upon them before we +were discovered to be enemies. If we succeed, as I trust we shall, in +breaking our way through and reaching the town, well and good. If, +on the other hand, we find greater obstacles than we expect, and are +forced to fall back fighting, we shall have the advantage that +darkness will be setting in. The Russians, the greater part of whom +will be ignorant of our strength, will lose time before they move, +fearing they may be assaulted in other quarters, and in the darkness +we might be able to make good our escape, which it is certain none of +us would do, should we meet with a repulse at daybreak." + +"Your reasons are very just, Captain Carstairs. Though certainly my +opinion was in accordance with that given by your fellow officers, +I am bound to say that your argument seems unanswerable. + +"What say you, gentlemen? I have two objects in view--the first to +reinforce the garrison of Notteburg, the second to save the troops +under my command, if I should fail in doing so. I know the country +well, but its features will be considerably altered. Trees will +have been cut down, houses levelled, intrenchments thrown up, camps +scattered here and there, and I own that in the dark, I might, as +Captain Carstairs says, very easily miss my way. I think his +proposal therefore unites the greatest chances of getting through +their line and entering the town, with a possibility of drawing off +the troops without great loss, in case of failure." + +The other three officers at once agreed, and orders were issued for +the men to lie down until five o'clock and rest themselves before +pursuing their march. + +It was past that hour before they were in motion again. Major Sion, +with a peasant from the neighbourhood of Notteburg, rode ahead. +Then came the troop of cavalry, with the guns close behind them, +followed by the infantry. As they approached the Russian lines, the +peasant several times went on in advance, and presently a trooper +rode down the line, with the order that the troops with firearms +were to light their matches, and the spearmen to keep in a compact +body. + +They were now not far from the Russian lines, and the destruction +that had been wrought during the last ten days was visible to them. +Every tree and bush had been felled, for use in the intrenchments +or for the erection of shelters. A few blackened walls alone showed +where houses had stood. Gardens had been destroyed, and orchards +levelled. + +Light smoke could be seen rising at many points from the Russian +fires, and, when the troops were halted, they were but half a mile +from the intrenchments. + +Word was passed down that the rapid Swedish march was to be +moderated, and that they were to move carelessly and at a slow +rate, as if fatigued by a long march, and that the spears were to +be carried at the trail, as they were so much longer than those +used by the Russians that their length would, if carried erect, at +once betray the nationality of the troops. There was no attempt at +concealment, for the cavalry would be visible for a considerable +distance across the flat country. Considerable bodies of men could +be seen, gathered round fires at a distance of not more than a +quarter of a mile on either hand, but, as the column passed between +them, there was no sign of any stir. + +In a short time, the order was passed for the troops to form from +column into line, and the cavalry officer who brought it said that +there was a Russian battery erected right across the road, a little +more than a quarter of a mile ahead. + +"Things look better, Captain Carstairs," the lieutenant said, as +the company, which happened to be leading, fell into line. + +"Yes, I have no doubt we shall take their battery, coming down, as +we do, upon its rear. The question is, are there any intrenchments +ahead? Major Sion told us, when we halted, that the peasant assured +him that there were no works beyond it, and that it was the weakest +point of the line; but it is three days since he came out from +Notteburg, and, working hard as the Russians evidently do, they may +have pushed on their intrenchments far in advance of the battery by +this time." + +The force halted for a moment. The guns were unlimbered, turned +round, and loaded. Then the line of cavalry opened right and left, +the four pieces poured a discharge of grape into the Russians, +clustered thickly in the battery four hundred yards away, and then, +with a shout, the Swedish cavalry charged, the infantry coming on +at a run behind them. + +The surprise was complete. With cries of terror, the Russians for +the most part leapt from the battery and fled, and the few who +attempted to defend their guns were sabred by the cavalry. + +"There are other works ahead!" Major Sion exclaimed, as, sitting on +his horse, he looked over the parapet, "and bodies of troops +scattered all about. Push forward, men, at a double, and do you, +Captain Sherlbach, cut a way for us with your cavalry." + +The sun had set a few minutes before the guns were fired, and +Charlie, as he led his men over the earthwork, and saw the Russian +lines in front, congratulated himself upon the fact that, in +another half hour, it would be quite dark. As they approached the +next line of works, a scattering fire of musketry opened upon them, +but the aim was wide, and without loss they reached the work. The +Russians, though inferior in numbers, defended themselves +obstinately, and continually received reinforcements of bodies of +men, running up from all sides. In five minutes the Swedes cleared +the works of them, but, as they prepared to advance again, they saw +a large body of horse riding down to bar their advance, while +numbers of footmen were running to occupy some intrenchments ahead +of them. Trumpets were sounding to the right, left, and rear. + +"We cannot force our way farther," the major said to Charlie. "We +knew nothing of these works, and they are fatal to our enterprise. +We must retreat while we can. Do you not think so?" + +"Yes, sir, I think the enterprise is quite hopeless." + +The order was given. The troops faced about, formed into closer +order, and at the double retraced their steps, the spearmen of each +company forming its front line, and the musketeers the second. + +Already it was growing dusk. The cavalry, riding ahead, scattered +the small bodies of men who threw themselves in their way, and the +battery they had first taken was entered without loss. There was a +momentary halt here, for the men to recover their wind. Then the +musketeers poured a volley into a dark line advancing upon them, +the horsemen charged in among them, the long pikes of the front +line cleared the way, and, with a shout, the Swedes passed through +their foes and pressed forward. + +But more troops were gathering to bar their way, and the major +changed the line of march sharply to the right, sweeping along by +the side of the force through which they had just cut their way, +the musketeers on the flank firing into them as they passed. The +movement was an adroit one, for in the gathering darkness the enemy +in front would not be able to distinguish friends from foes, or to +perceive the nature of the movement. For a few minutes they were +unmolested, then the course was again changed, and Charlie was +beginning to think that, in the darkness, they would yet make their +escape, when a dull heavy sound was heard in their rear. + +"That's the Russian cavalry, Bowyer. Take the musketeers on with +you, and keep close to the company ahead. I will break them up with +the pikemen. If they do come up to you, give them a volley and then +continue your retreat with the rest." + +While the captains of the other two companies had placed their +pikemen in the front line, Charlie had placed his in the rear, in +order to repel any attack of cavalry from that direction. He now +formed them in a close clump, taking his place among them. The +Russian squadrons came along with a deep roll like that of thunder. +They were but thirty yards away when they perceived the little +cluster of men with levelled lances. A few, unable to check their +horses, rushed upon the points, but most of them reined in their +little steeds in time. In a moment, the Swedes were surrounded by a +wall of yelling horsemen, some of whom tried to break through the +hedge of spears, while others discharged their pistols. + +Charlie listened anxiously for the roll of a volley of musketry, +but no sound came, and he felt sure that the whole body of cavalry +had halted round him, and that his movement had saved the rest, who +would now, if fortunate, be able to make their way off in the +darkness. But the men were falling now from the pistol fire of the +Cossacks, and, feeling that the work had been done, he determined +to make one effort to save the men with him. + +"Level your spears, and charge through them shoulder to shoulder," +he said. "It is your only chance. Once through, throw away your +spears, and break up in the darkness. Most of you may escape. + +"Now!" + +With a shout, the Swedes rushed forward in a body. Horses and +riders went down before them. There was a rush from behind. Charlie +shouted to the rear rank, to face about, but in the confusion and +din his words were unheard. There was a brief struggle in the +darkness. Charlie emptied his pistols, and cut down more than one +of his opponents, then a sword fell on his shoulder, while at the +same moment he was ridden over by a Cossack, and was stunned by the +force of his fall. + +When he recovered consciousness, several men with torches were +moving about him, and, at the orders of an officer, were examining +the bodies of the fallen. He saw them pass their swords through the +bodies of three of his own men, who were lying near him, and as +they came up to him he closed his eyes, expecting a similar fate. + +"This is an officer, captain," one of the torch bearers said in +Russian. + +"Very well. Carry him to the camp, then. If he is alive, the +general may want to question him." + +Seeing that he breathed, four of the Russian soldiers took him upon +their shoulders, and carried him away. The pain of his wound, +caused by the movement, was acute, but he retained consciousness +until, after what seemed to him a journey of immense length, he was +again laid down on the ground, close to a large fire. Several +officers stood round him, and he asked, first in Polish and then in +Swedish, for water, and at the orders of one who seemed of superior +rank to the others, some was at once brought to him. + +"Your king treats his prisoners well," the officer said. "We will +do everything we can for you." + +Half an hour later, a doctor came to his side, and cutting open his +coat, applied a bandage to his shoulder. + +"Is it a serious wound?" Charlie asked in Swedish. + +"It might be worse, but it will be a troublesome one; it is a sabre +cut, and has cleft right through your shoulder bone. Are you hurt +anywhere else?" + +"No, I do not think so. I was knocked down in the dark, and I +believe stunned, though I have a sort of recollection of being +trampled on, and I feel sore all over." + +The surgeon felt his ribs and limbs, repeatedly asking him if it +hurt him. When he finished the examination, he said: + +"You are doubtless badly bruised, but I don't think anything is +broken. Our Cossack horses are little more than ponies. Had they +been heavy horse, they would have trod your life out." + +A few moments later there was a sound of trampling horses. They +halted close by. The officers drew back, and a moment later Marshal +Scheremetof, the commander of the Russian army, came up to +Charlie's side. + +"Which of you speaks Swedish?" he asked the officers, and one of +them stepped forward. + +"Ask him what force was this that attacked us, and with what +object." + +As Charlie saw no reason for concealment, he replied that it was a +body of four hundred Swedish infantry, and a troop of horse, with +four guns, and that their object was to enter the town. + +"They must have been mad to attempt to cut their way through our +whole army," the general said, when the answer was translated to +him; "but, by Saint Paul, they nearly succeeded. The Swedes are +mad, but this was too much even for madmen. Ask him whence the +force came. It may be that a large reinforcement has reached +Vyburg, without our knowing it." + +"We arrived two days since," Charlie replied, when the question was +put to him. "We came in a ship together from Revel." + +"Did others come with you?" was next asked, at the general's +dictation. + +"No other ship but ours has arrived." + +"But others are coming?" + +As Charlie had no doubt that great efforts would be made to send +further reinforcements, he replied: + +"Many more troops are coming, but I cannot say when they will +arrive." + +"Will it be soon?" + +"That I cannot say, but I don't think they will come from Revel. +There was a talk of large reinforcements, but whether from Sweden +or from the king's army, I cannot say." + +"Are you a Swede?" the general asked. + +"I am an Englishman in the Swedish service, general." + +"We have many of your countrymen with us," the general said. "It +would have been better for you, had you come to the czar. + +"See that he is well treated," he said to the officers, and then +mounted and rode away. + + + +Chapter 15: An Old Acquaintance. + + +The next morning Charlie was placed in a tent, in which lay several +officers who had been wounded, either the night before or by shots +from the town. He learned with great pleasure, upon questioning the +doctor, that the Swedes had got off safely in the darkness. Some +eight or ten men only had straggled and been made prisoners, and +not more than twenty had been left dead on the field. He had the +satisfaction, therefore, of knowing that the defence made by his +own pikemen had been the means of saving the whole force. In other +respects he had nothing to complain of, for he was well attended +to, and received the same treatment as the Russians. + +For another ten days the roar of the cannon continued, some seventy +guns keeping up an incessant fire on the town. At the end of that +time the governor capitulated, and was allowed to march out with +the honours of war. + +Only forty out of the brave garrison remained unwounded at the end +of the siege. They, as well as such of their comrades as were +strong enough to travel, passed through the lines of the Russians, +and marched to Vyburg. + +Three weeks after being made a prisoner, Charlie's wound was so far +healed that the surgeon pronounced him able to sit a horse, and, +under the escort of an officer and four Cossacks, he was taken by +easy stages to Bercov, a prison fortress a short distance from +Moscow. He had inquired from the surgeon who attended him for +Doctor Kelly. The doctor knew him, but said that he was not with +the army, but was, he believed, away visiting some towns on the +Volga, where a serious pestilence was raging. + +Charlie remained but a short time at Bercov. His wound was healing +rapidly, and the surgeon who attended him assured him that there +was every prospect of his making a complete cure, if he would but +keep his arm, for some weeks, in a sling. + +He had nothing to complain of, either as to his comfort or food. +The governor, who spoke a little Polish, visited him every day, and +asked many questions as to his native country. On one of these +visits he said to him: + +"You asked me yesterday if I knew Doctor Kelly, one of the chief +surgeons of the army, who, as you had heard, was at present on the +Volga. You mentioned that he was a friend of yours, and that you +had made his acquaintance, when you were unlucky enough before to +be a prisoner in our hands. I am sorry to say that I have today +seen an official report, in which his name appears among the list +of those who have fallen victims to the pestilence." + +"I am sorry to hear that," Charlie exclaimed; "both because he was +very kind to me, and I liked him much, and because, in the second +place, I was sure that he would have used his influence, with the +czar, to obtain my exchange as soon as possible." + +"It is very unfortunate," the governor said, "especially as these +exchanges are of rare occurrence. A few officers may be taken +prisoners on each side in the skirmishes, but the numbers are too +small to make the loss of any importance, either to Russia or +Sweden, and it is months since either have taken any steps to bring +about exchanges. I myself have no influence. My appointment here is +a sort of punishment, for having offended the czar by not having +brought up my regiment in time to take part in the fight, when you +attacked us at Narva. I saved the regiment, but that was not +regarded as any excuse for having been three days longer on the +march than the czar expected; so I was sent here, as a sort of +dismissal from active service. + +"You know no one else who could move in your matter?" + +"No one. The governor of the castle at Plescow was a surly fellow, +and was reprimanded by the czar, at least so I heard, for not +having treated me sufficiently well. I was only three or four days +there, and the only officer I saw besides Doctor Kelly was a friend +of his, another doctor. He was at the table when I dined with +Kelly. He seemed to me to be a fine fellow, and, by the by, he did +say jokingly that, if I was ever made prisoner again, I was to ask +for him, and that he would do anything he could for me." + +"What was his name?" the governor asked. + +"Peter Michaeloff. + +"Do you know him?" he added, as he saw a look of surprise in the +governor's face. + +"I know one of that name," the governor said doubtfully, "I don't +know that he is a doctor; though he may be, for he knows something +of many things." + +"Oh, he was a doctor," Charlie said confidently. "I know Kelly said +he could take off a limb as well as he could do it, himself." + +"What sort of man was he?" + +"He was a tall, strong man, with black hair and gray eyes. He has +rather a positive way of talking, and seemed to have very strong +opinions about things. He looked good tempered, but I should say +that he could be passionate enough, if he were put out." + +"That might be the Peter Michaeloff I know," the governor said. +"You are sure he said that you were to ask for him, if you were a +second time taken prisoner?" + +"I am quite certain he said so, though I don't know whether the +promise meant much. But he certainly spoke as if he thought he +might be able to help me, and, though it did not seem likely that I +could have such bad luck twice, I think he meant at the time what +he said, and I should think he was the sort of man who would keep +his word." + +"I will make some inquiries," the governor said, "and find out, if +I can, where he is at present. Yes, I should think that he would be +able to assist you, if he chose to interest himself in the matter." + +Ten days later, the governor came into Charlie's room. + +"An officer has arrived, with an order for your removal," he said. +"You are to be taken up again to Notteburg." + +"I am very sorry," Charlie said. "I have been very comfortable +here. You have been very kind to me, and I feel sure the change +will not be for the better. Besides, we are nearly into September +now, and in that marshy country round the lake and river, the +winter will be even more severe than it is here. The only thing I +can think of is that the Swedes at Vyburg may have taken a Russian +captain prisoner, and that they are going to exchange us." + +The governor shook his head. + +"There are no longer any Swedes at Vyburg. All Ingria is in our +hands and the Swedes have retired into Finland. It may be that it +is the work of your friend. I sent a message to Peter Michaeloff, +should he be found in that neighbourhood, by an officer who was +going there, telling him that you were here, and that, having met +him when a prisoner at Plescow, you relied on his good offices. +Should the officer have found him there, and have given him my +message, he may probably have begged the field marshal to order you +to be taken to the prison there, where he could be near you, and +visit you sometimes." + +"Your doctors must have a good deal more influence in your army +than they have among the Swedes," Charlie remarked, "if that is how +it has come about." + +"It would be a matter of favour," the governor said. "If Michaeloff +is acquainted with the field marshal, or had attended him when +unwell, he could ask a little favour of that sort. If the field +marshal sent you here, he could send for you again without more +trouble than signing his name to the order." + +"Well, if it is Michaeloff who has done this," Charlie grumbled; +"no doubt he meant it kindly, but I would much rather that he left +me here. A ride of two hundred and fifty miles, in August, is not +pleasant to begin with, and the thought of winter in those swamps +is enough to make one shiver." + +"With a comfortable room and a warm stove, you will not find much +to complain of, Captain Carstairs," the governor said with a smile; +"and, no doubt, Michaeloff may be enabled to obtain leave for you +to go out with him on parole. I was about myself to ask you, now +that you are strong and well again, whether you would like to give +your parole, and offer you the use of my horse for a ride, when +inclined for it." + +"Thank you, governor. If Michaeloff can do that, it will certainly +be a boon, but I am not disposed to agree that the change can be +his work. In the first place, we don't know that he is there. In +the second, I can hardly think that he could have managed it; and, +most of all, I do not see he could possibly have had a hand in the +matter, for, even supposing the officer had found him directly he +arrived, and then given him the message, and he had acted upon it +at once, there would have been no time for the order to get here. +It would have needed a messenger riding night and day, with +frequent relays of horses, to have got to Notteburg and back since +the day I spoke to you about the matter. + +"When am I to start?" + +"As soon as you have eaten your breakfast. The order says 'send at +once,' and field marshals expect their orders to be attended to +promptly." + +On descending to the courtyard after breakfast, Charlie was +surprised to see that, instead of a horse as he had expected, a +well-appointed carriage, with an ample supply of rugs, was standing +there. The governor was there to see him off. + +"Well, sir," Charlie said. "If this is the way in which you convey +prisoners from one place to another in Russia, I shall certainly be +able, when I meet King Charles, to report to him most favourably as +to the treatment of his officers who have fallen into the czar's +hands. This will make the journey a very much more pleasant one +than I had expected." + +"I am glad you are pleased," the governor said, "and that you have +no unpleasant recollection of your stay here." + +A minute later, the carriage dashed out through the gate of the +prison. An officer was seated by Charlie's side, two Cossacks +galloping in front, while two others rode behind. + +"It was worth making the change, if only for this drive," Charlie +thought cheerfully, as the dust flew up in a cloud before the +horses' hoofs, and he felt a sense of exhilaration from the keen +air that blew in his face. + +The journey was performed with great rapidity. One of the Cossacks +galloped ahead, as soon as they arrived at the station where they +changed horses, and had fresh ones in readiness at the next post +house. The Cossacks themselves were changed at every other station, +fresh relays from the men stationed there taking their place. +Excellent meals were served three times a day, and each night a +comfortable bed was provided, at the last post house where they +stopped. + +The officer was a pleasant fellow, but he spoke nothing except +Russian, and, although Charlie fancied he understood him to some +extent when he spoke to him in Polish, he shook his head and gave +no answers in that language. + +Late in the evening of the third day, they arrived at Notteburg. +The building at which the carriage stopped was of considerable +size. It stood in the heart of the town, and had no outward +appearance of a prison. It was apparently at a side entrance at +which they stopped. On the officer knocking at the door, it was +opened by two Cossacks, who, after exchanging a few words in +Russian with the officer, led Charlie along a passage and up a +narrow staircase, which led into a somewhat spacious corridor. They +opened a door, and he found himself in a comfortable room. A table +laid for dinner with handsome silver and appointments stood in the +middle of the room, which was carpeted with tartar rugs. One of the +Cossacks opened an inner door, which led into a bedroom, snugly +furnished. + +"It must be the doctor, after all," Charlie murmured to himself, in +great surprise. "I see now that there was plenty of time for a +letter to come up here and have gone back again, and I suppose the +good fellow has got leave for me to stay for a night in his +quarters, before I am handed over to the prison. Well, for the last +three days I have travelled like a prince, and this is the closing +act of it." + +He enjoyed a good wash, then returned to the other room, and sat +down in a comfortable chair to wait for his host. He was on the +point of dozing off, when the door opened, and Peter Michaeloff +entered. Charlie sprang to his feet. + +"Well, Captain Carstairs," the Russian said, holding out his hand, +"so it seems you had bad luck again. You must have quite an +affection for our prisons." + +"I shall have, at least, a pleasant remembrance of the kindness +shown to me as a prisoner," Charlie said; "and I am sure it is you +that I have to thank for my transfer here, and for the pleasant +journey I have had. I could not have travelled more comfortably, if +I had been a Russian grandee." + +"Well, I am glad to meet you again," the doctor said heartily. "Let +me see, it is some twenty months since we supped together last at +Kelly's quarters. Poor fellow! I shall miss him greatly. You have +heard of his death?" + +"The governor of Bercov told me of it, a fortnight ago. I was +indeed sorry to hear it. I shall never forget his kindness to me." + +"Yes, he was a good man, skilful in his profession, and full of +zeal and energy. The blood runs faster somehow, in the veins of you +islanders, than of us sluggish Muscovites. If we could but at one +sweep banish every Russian official, from the highest to the +lowest, and fill their places with men from your islands, what +progress we should make, what work could we get done, what reforms +could be carried out! + +"However, at present," he went on, changing the subject abruptly, +"the point is supper. I am as hungry as a bear, for I have been at +work since daylight, and have eaten nothing since I broke my fast." + +He rang a handbell placed on the table. Two Cossacks entered +bearing dishes, and the doctor and his guest at once fell to on the +supper, which was excellent. + +"Hard work deserves good food," the Russian said, in reply to a +remark of Charlie's as to the excellence both of the food and wine. +"Your Charles does not think so, I hear, and lives on the roughest +of food. What will be the consequence? He will wear himself out. +His restless activity will exhaust his powers, and weaken his +judgment. I can eat rough food if I can get no better, but I take +the best, when opportunity offers. + +"What have you been doing ever since you left Plescow? I inquired +after you the other day, when our troops broke up Schlippenbach's +force on the Embach. I found you were not among the prisoners, and +I wondered if you were among the killed." + +"I was not in Livonia at the time. I was with the king's army at +Warsaw. Three regiments were sent off, the day after the battle of +Clissow, by boats down the Vistula, and then by ship to Revel. Mine +was one of them, but we arrived a fortnight too late." + +"Then you were present at Charles' third victory? How that young +fellow handles his troops, and what wonderful troops they are! Now +we will get into our easy chairs again, and you shall tell me +something about what you have been doing, since we last met." + +Charlie gave a sketch of his adventures. + +"So you fought at the Dwina, too? You have had luck in going +through three battles without a wound." + +When Charlie stated that he had gone to Warsaw on a private +mission, whose nature was immaterial to the story, the doctor broke +in: + +"You need not tell me what it was, it was of course something to do +with Augustus. The way Charles is hunting down that unfortunate +king is shocking, it is downright malignity. Why, he has wasted +fifteen months over it already, and it has cost him Ingria. He +could have made any terms with Poland he liked, after his victory +on the Dwina, and would then have been free to use all his forces +against us. As it is, he has wasted two summers, and is likely to +waste another, and that not for any material advantage, but simply +to gratify his hatred against Augustus; and he has left us to take +Ingria almost without a blow, and to gain what Russia has wanted +for the last hundred years, a foothold on the Baltic. He may be a +great general, but he is no politician. No real statesman would +throw away solid advantages in order to gratify personal pique." + +"He considers Augustus the author of this league against him," +Charlie said. "He and the czar had no grounds at all of quarrel +against him." + +"We talked over that, the last time we met," the doctor said with a +laugh, "and I told you then that a foothold on the Baltic was so +necessary to Russia, that she would have accepted the alliance of +the Prince of Darkness himself to get it. As to Augustus, I don't +defend him. He was ambitious, as I suppose most of us are. He +thought he saw an opportunity of gaining territory. He has found +that he has made a mistake, and will of course lose a province. But +Charles' persecution of him goes beyond all bounds. Never before +did a sovereign insist upon a nation consenting to dethrone its +king at his dictation. + +"But go on with your story." + +He listened without remark, until Charlie concluded. + +"I wish you had been in our service," he said, "instead of that of +Sweden. You would have mounted fast. You have all the requisites +for success, above all, promptitude of decision and quickness of +invention. You did well in getting away from that Jewish scoundrel +in the hut, and in killing his master, but it was your adventure +with the wolves that showed your quality. That idea of setting fire +to the tree in which you were sitting, in order at once to warm +yourself and to frighten away the wolves, would never have occurred +to a Russian, and the quickness with which you formed, with three +logs, a redoubt against the wolves, showed a quick military eye, +and the ability to think and act in a moment of danger. + +"Now tell me how it was that you were the only officer captured the +other day." + +Charlie briefly related how he, with the pikemen of his company, +had stayed behind to check the pursuit of the Russian horse, and to +gain time for the main body to lose themselves in the darkness. The +Russian struck his fist on the arm of his chair. + +"It was well done," he said. "There is the difference. A Russian +captain would have done it, if he had been ordered, and he and his +men would, without a question, have sacrificed themselves to cover +the retreat of the rest, but he would never have done it on his own +initiative. The idea would never have struck him. He would have +plodded along until the enemy's cavalry came up and annihilated +them all. By the way, why did you not ask for me at once?" + +"I had asked for Doctor Kelly the day after I was taken prisoner, +and was told that he had gone to the Volga. I thought that he would +be back before long, and it was only when I heard of his death that +it occurred to me to endeavour to find one who had kindly promised, +after a few hours' acquaintance only, to befriend me should I ever +find myself in a similar scrape." + +"It would have saved you the journey down to Moscow. I heard, of +course, that a Swedish captain had been made prisoner that night, +but I was myself at Moscow at the time, and did not happen to +notice the name of the officer taken. Were you well treated at +Bercov?" + +"The governor there was most kind, and all the arrangements of the +prison seem excellent. I had no reason whatever to complain. The +governor was good enough to come frequently himself to talk to me. +He is a fine soldierly man, and though he did not say much, I think +he is eating his heart out at being laid on the shelf there, +instead of aiding to fight the battles of his country." + +The Russian took out a pocketbook and made a note, then he rose. + +"It is time for bed," he said. "I am up at daybreak." + +"I hope I shall see you often in the prison," Charlie said. "I +suppose I shall go in there tomorrow morning. I am indebted to you, +indeed, for the very great kindness you have shown me." + +"No, you will not go in early. I have got leave for you for another +day, and I am going to take you for a drive in the morning. You +will be called an hour before sunrise. Take your breakfast as soon +as you are dressed. Do not wait for me. I have work to do before I +start, and shall breakfast elsewhere." + +As soon as Charlie had breakfasted the next morning, a Cossack told +him that the carriage was below, and he followed him to the door +where he had entered on the previous evening. The carriage was a +simple one, but the three horses harnessed abreast to it were +magnificent animals. Charlie stood admiring them for some little +time. + +"I should think," he said to himself, "the doctor must be a man of +large property, and most likely of noble family, who has taken up +his profession from pure love of it. He is evidently full of +energy, and has an intense desire to see Russia greater and higher +in the rank of nations. I suppose that, like Kelly, he is one of +the principal medical officers in the army. Certainly he must be a +man of considerable influence to obtain my transfer here so easily, +and to see that I travelled so comfortably. I wonder where he is +going to take me this morning." + +Four or five minutes later Charlie's friend appeared at the door. +He was evidently out of temper. He sprung hastily into the vehicle, +as if he had altogether forgotten that he had asked Charlie to +accompany him. + +Then, as his eye fell on him, he nodded and said briefly, "Jump +in." + +A little surprised at the unceremonious address, Charlie sprang +into the seat beside him without hesitation, seeing that his +companion was evidently so much out of temper that he was not +thinking of what he was doing at the moment. The coachman cracked +his whip, and the spirited horses went off, at a rate of speed that +threatened danger to persons traversing the narrow streets of the +town. The cracking of the coachman's whip, and an occasional loud +shout and the jangling of the bells, gave, however, sufficient +warning of their approach. + +Charlie smiled at the alacrity with which every one sprang out of +the way, and either leapt into doorways or squeezed themselves +against the wall. He was surprised, however, to see that not only +did the townspeople show no resentment, at the reckless pace at +which the carriage was driven, but that the soldiers, officers as +well as men, cleared out as quickly, and without any expression of +indignation or anger. + +Indeed, most of them, as soon as they gained a place of safety, +saluted his companion. + +"These Russians have evidently a higher respect for their doctors +than have the Swedes," he said to himself. "I am sure that not even +the chief surgeon of the army would be treated with anything like +the same respect, and, indeed, no one would recognize him at all, +if he were not in uniform." + +The doctor seemed to pay no attention to what was passing round +him, but was muttering angrily to himself. It was not until they +dashed out into the open country that he seemed to remember +Charlie's presence at his side. + +"These people are enough to vex one of the saints, by their +stupidity," he said. "Unless they have some one standing behind +them with a whip, they cannot be trusted to do what they are told. +It is not that they are not willing, but that they are stupid. No +one would believe that people could be so stupid. They drive me +well nigh to madness sometimes, and it is the more irritating +because, against stupidity, one is powerless. Beating a man or +knocking him down may do him good if he is obstinate, or if he is +careless, but when he is simply stupid it only makes him more +stupid than before. You might as well batter a stone wall. + +"You slept well and breakfasted well, Captain Carstairs?" + +"Excellently well, thank you. What superb horses you have, doctor." + +"Yes. I like travelling fast. Life is too short to throw away time +in travelling. A busy man should always keep good horses." + +"If he can afford to do so," Charlie said with a laugh. "I should +say that every one, busy or not, would like to sit behind such +horses as these, and, as you say, it would save a good deal of time +to one who travelled much. But three such horses as these would +only be in the reach of one with a very long purse." + +"They were bred here. Their sire was one of three given by the king +of England to the czar. The dams were from the imperial stables at +Vienna. So they ought to be good." + +Charlie guessed that the team must have been a present from the +czar, and, remembering what Doctor Kelly had said of the czar's +personal communications with him, he thought that the ruler of +Russia must have a particular liking for doctors, and that the +medical profession must be a more honoured and profitable one in +Russia than elsewhere. + +After driving with great rapidity for upwards of an hour along the +banks of the Neva, Charlie saw a great number of people at work on +an island in the middle of the river, some distance ahead, and soon +afterwards, to his surprise, observed a multitude on the flat, low +ground ahead. + +"This is what I have brought you to see," his companion said. "Do +you know what they are doing?" + +"It seems to me that they are building a fortress on that island." + +"You are right. We have got a footing on the sea, and we are going +to keep it. While Charles of Sweden is fooling away his time in +Poland, in order to gratify his spite against Augustus, we are +strengthening ourselves here, and never again will Sweden wrest +Ingria from our hands." + +"It is marvellous how much has been done already," Charlie said, as +he looked at the crowd of workmen. + +"Everything was prepared," his companion said. "While the army was +invading Livonia, and driving the remnant of the Swedes into Revel, +thousands of carts laden with piles of wood, stone, and cement were +moving towards Ingria. Tens of thousands of workmen and peasants +were in motion from every part of Russia towards this point, and, +the day after Notteburg surrendered, they began their work here. It +was the opportunity in the lifetime of a nation, and we have seized +it. The engineers who had, in disguise, examined it months ago, had +reported that the island was covered at high tides, and was unfit +to bear the foundations of even the slightest buildings. Piles are +being driven in, as close as they will stand, over every foot of +ground in it. Over this a coating of concrete many feet thick will +be laid, and on this the fortress, which is to be the centre and +heart of Russia, will rise. In the fort will stand a pile, which +will be the tomb of the future czars of Russia, and there in front +of us, where you see fifty thousand peasants at work, shall be the +future capital of the empire." + +"But it is a swamp," Charlie said in astonishment, alike at the +vastness of the scheme, and the energy with which it was being +prosecuted. + +"Nature has made it a swamp," his companion said calmly, "but man +is stronger than nature. The river will be embanked, the morass +drained, and piles driven everywhere, as has been done in the +island, and the capital will rise here. The fort has already been +named the Fortress of Saint Peter and Saint Paul. The capital will +be named alike after the patron saint and its founder--Petersburg." + +They had now reached the spot. The carriage stopped and they +alighted. Charlie saw, with astonishment, that a wide deep cut had +been driven, between the road and the river, in a straight line. +Looking down into it, he saw that it was paved with the heads of +piles, and that carts were already emptying loads of concrete down +upon it. + +"Every bag of cement, every stone that you see, has been brought +from a great distance," his companion said. "There is not a stone +to be had within fifty miles of this spot. The work would seem +well-nigh impossible, but it is the work of a nation. In another +month, there will be a hundred and fifty thousand peasants at work +here, and well nigh as many carts, bringing materials for the work +and provisions for the workers." + +"It is stupendous! But it will take years to complete, and it will +surely be terribly unhealthy here?" + +"I calculate the work will occupy ten years, and will cost a +hundred thousand, maybe two hundred thousand lives," the other said +calmly; "but what is that to the making of a nation? Before, Russia +was stifled, she could not grow. Now we have a communication with +the world. The island that lies at the mouth of the Neva will be +fortified, and become a great naval arsenal and fort. Along the +walls which will rise here will be unloaded the merchandise of +Europe, and in exchange the ships will carry away our products. +Some day we shall have another port on the south, but for the +present this must suffice. You will say that this is dangerously +near our frontier, but that will soon be remedied. As we have +pushed the Swedes out of Ingria, so in time shall we drive them +from Livonia on the west, and from Finland on the north. + +"But I must to work." + +And he motioned to a group of five or six officers, who had been +standing a short distance away, to approach him. + +Charlie was struck with the air of humility with which they saluted +his companion, who at once asked a number of questions as to the +supplies that had arrived, the progress that had been made, at a +point where they had met with a deep slough into which the piles +had penetrated without meeting with any firm ground, the number of +huts that had been erected during the past three days for the +reception of labourers, the state of stocks of meat and flour, and +other particulars. To each he gave short, sharp orders. When they +had left, he turned to Charlie. + +"You guess who I am, I suppose?" + +"I guess now, your majesty," Charlie said respectfully, "but until +now the idea that my kind friend was the czar himself never entered +my mind. I understood, from Doctor Kelly, that you were a surgeon." + +"I don't think he said so," the czar replied. "He simply said that +I could perform an amputation as well as he could, which was not +quite true. But I studied surgery for a time in Holland, and +performed several operations under the eyes of the surgeons there. + +"I saw that you did not recognize my name. It is known to every +Russian, but doubtless you never heard of me save as Peter the +Czar. Directly you mentioned it to the commandant at Bercov, and +described my appearance, he knew who it was you were speaking of, +and despatched a messenger at once to me. He will be here in the +course of a week or so. Upon your report of the state of the +prison, I at once despatched an order for him to hand over his +command to the officer next in rank, and to proceed hither at once. +He is evidently a good administrator, and heaven knows I have need +of such men here. + +"I was pleased with you, when I saw you with my friend Doctor +Kelly. It was pleasant not to be known, and hear a frank opinion +such as you gave me, and as you know, I sent you back on the +following morning. I certainly told Kelly, at the time, not to +mention who I was, but I did not intend that he should keep you in +ignorance of it after I had left, and it was not until I heard, +from your jailer at Bercov, that you were ignorant that Peter +Michaeloff was the czar, that I knew that he had kept you in +ignorance of it until the end. + +"I should have liked to have kept you as my guest for a time, but +winter comes on early and suddenly, and if you did not go now you +might be detained here until the spring. I have therefore given +orders that one of the Swedish vessels we captured on the lake +should be got in readiness, and its crew placed on board again. You +shall embark in an hour, and it shall carry you to any port in +Sweden you may choose. The wind is from the east, and you have +every chance of a quick run thither." + +Charlie expressed his warm thanks to the czar for his thoughtful +kindness. + +"I have much to do now," the czar said, "and must hand you over to +the care of one of my officers. He will accompany you, in my +carriage, to the spot where the vessel is lying, near the mouth of +the river, and will there see you on board. Should the fortune of +war again throw you into our hands, do not lose an hour in sending +a message to Peter Michaeloff." + +So saying, the czar shook hands with Charlie, beckoned an officer +to him and gave him instructions, and then moved away among the +workmen, while Charlie, with his conductor, took their places in +the vehicle and drove rapidly off. + +An hour later, he was on board the Swedish vessel, whose master and +crew were delighted at their sudden and unlooked for release. The +former was overjoyed, for the vessel was his own property. + +"You will find your things in your cabin, sir," he said. "They were +sent on board this morning, together with food and wine sufficient +for a month's voyage, whereas, with this wind, we ought not to be +more than four days. At which port will you land?" + +"I would rather go to Gottenburg, captain, though it is farther for +you than Stockholm." + +"It shall be Gottenburg, sir. It is thanks to you that I have got +my liberty and my ship, and a day or two can make no difference to +me." + +Charlie, indeed, had thought the matter over as he drove along. He +would not be able to rejoin the army until it had gone into winter +quarters, and therefore decided that he would go to Gottenburg, +apply for six months' leave, and spend the winter with his father. +Somewhat puzzled at the mention of his things having gone on board, +he went into the cabin, and found there a handsome pelisse trimmed +with costly furs, two robes composed of valuable skins, and a +change of clothes. + +The wind held fair, blowing strongly, and four days later he +arrived at Gottenburg. + + + +Chapter 16: In England Again. + + +Charlie was received with delight by his father, whom he had not +seen since the spring of the previous year. + +"Then you got my letter, Charlie?" Sir Marmaduke asked, when the +first greetings were over. "And yet, I do not see how you could +have done so. It is little over a fortnight since I wrote, and I +had not looked for you for another month yet." + +"I have certainly received no letter, father. A fortnight ago I was +in a Russian prison, and my arrival here, in so short a time, seems +to me almost miraculous;" and he then briefly related his singular +experiences. + +"Now about the letter, father," he said, as he concluded. "I +suppose you must have written to ask me to get leave for a time, as +it seems that you were expecting me shortly. I suppose you felt +that you would like me with you, for a time." + +"So I should, lad, of that you may be sure, but I should not have +called you away for that. No, I had this letter the other day from +old Banks. You know he writes to me once a year. His letters have +been only gossip so far, for you know my precious cousin kicked him +out of the house, as soon as he took possession; but this is a +different matter. Read it for yourself." + +Charlie took the letter, and with some trouble spelt through the +crabbed handwriting. + +It began: + +"Honoured sir and master, I hope that this finds you and Captain +Charles both well in health. I have been laid up with rhematis in +the bones, having less comfort in my lodgings than I used to have +at Lynnwood. Your honour will have heard that King William has +fallen from his horse, and broken his collarbone, and died. May the +Lord forgive him for taking the place of better men. Anne has come +to the throne, and there were some hopes that she would, of +herself, step aside and let him to whom the throne rightly belongs +come to it. Such, however, has not been the case, and those who +know best think that things are no forwarder for William's death, +rather indeed the reverse, since the Princess Anne is better liked +by the people than was her sister's husband. + +"There is no sure news from Lynnwood. None of the old servants are +there; and I have no one from whom I can learn anything for +certain. Things however are, I hear, much worse since young Mr. +Dormay was killed in the duel in London, of which I told you in my +last letter. + +"Dame Celia and Mistress Ciceley go but seldom abroad, and when +seen they smile but little, but seem sad and downcast. The usurper +has but small dealing with any of the gentry. There are always men +staying there, fellows of a kind with whom no gentleman would +consort, and they say there is much drinking and wild going on. As +Captain Charles specially bade me, I have done all that I could to +gather news of Nicholson. Till of late I have heard nothing of him. +He disappeared altogether from these parts, just after your honour +went away. News once came here from one who knew him, and who had +gone up to London on a visit to a kinsman, that he had met him +there, dressed up in a garb in no way according with his former +position, but ruffling it at a tavern frequented by loose blades, +spending his money freely, and drinking and dicing with the best of +them. + +"A week since he was seen down here, in a very sorry state, looking +as if luck had gone altogether against him. Benjamin Haddock, who +lives, as you know, close to the gate of Lynnwood, told me that he +saw one pass along the road, just as it was dusk, whom he could +swear was that varlet Nicholson. He went to the door and looked +after him to make sure, and saw him enter the gate. Next day +Nicholson was in Lancaster. He was spending money freely there, and +rode off on a good horse, which looked ill assorted with his +garments, though he purchased some of better fashion in the town. +It seemed to me likely that he must have got money from the +usurper. I do not know whether your honour will deem this news of +importance, but I thought it well to write to you at once. Any +further news I may gather, I will send without fail. + +"Your humble servant, + +"John Banks." + +"There is no doubt that this is of importance," Charlie said, when +he had read the letter through. "It is only by getting hold of this +villain that there is any chance of our obtaining proof of the foul +treachery of which you were the victim. Hitherto, we have had no +clue whatever as to where he was to be looked for. Now, there can +be little doubt that he has returned to his haunts in London. I +understand now, father, why you wanted me to get leave. You mean +that I shall undertake this business." + +"That was my thought, Charlie. You are now well-nigh twenty, and +would scarce be recognized as the boy who left four years ago. The +fellow would know me at once, and I might be laid by the heels +again under the old warrant; besides being charged with breaking +away from the custody of the soldiers. Besides, in this business +youth and strength and vigour are requisite. I would gladly take +the matter in my own hands, but methinks you would have a better +chance of bringing it to a favourable issue. Now that Anne is on +the throne, she and her advisers will look leniently upon the men +whose only fault was devotion to her father; and if we can once get +this foul charge of assassination lifted from our shoulders, I and +Jervoise and the others who had to fly at the same time, may all be +permitted to return, and obtain a reversal of the decree of the Act +of Confiscation of our estates. + +"I have no friends at court, but I know that Jervoise was a close +acquaintance, years ago, of John Churchill, who is now Duke of +Marlborough, and they say high in favour with Anne. I did not think +of it when I wrote to you, but a week later it came to my mind that +his intervention might be very useful, and I took advantage of an +officer, leaving here for the army, to send by him a letter to +Jervoise, telling him that there was now some hope of getting at +the traitor who served as John Dormay's instrument in his plot +against us. I said that I had sent for you, and thought it probable +you would take the matter in hand; and I prayed him to send me a +letter of introduction for you to the duke, so that, if you could +by any means obtain the proof of our innocence of this pretended +plot, he might help you to obtain a reversal of the Act of +Confiscation against us all. I have asked him to write at once, and +I will send the letter after you, as soon as I get it. + +"I know nothing of London, but I have heard of the Bull's Head, in +Fenchurch Street, as being one frequented by travellers from the +country. You had best put up there, and thither I will forward the +note from Jervoise." + +"The letter will be a useful one, indeed, father, when I have once +wrung the truth from that villain Nicholson. It will be an +expedition after my own heart. There is first the chance of +punishing the villain, and then the hope of restoring you to your +place at dear old Lynnwood." + +"You must be careful, Charlie. Remember it would never do to kill +the rascal. That would be the greatest of misfortunes; for, with +his death, any chance of unmasking the greater villain would +disappear." + +"I will be careful, father. I cannot say how I shall set about the +matter, yet. That must depend upon circumstances; but, as you say, +above all things I must be careful of the fellow's life. When is +there a ship sailing, father?" + +"The day after tomorrow, Charlie. You will want that time for +getting clothes, suitable to a young gentleman of moderate +condition, up from the country on a visit to London. You must make +up your mind that it will be a long search before you light on the +fellow, for we have no clue as to the tavern he frequents. As a +roistering young squire, wanting to see London life, you could go +into taverns frequented by doubtful characters, for it is probably +in such a place that you will find him. + +"However, all this I must leave to you. You showed yourself, in +that Polish business, well able to help yourself out of a scrape, +and if you could do that among people of whose tongues you were +ignorant, you ought to be able to manage on English soil." + +"At any rate, I will do my best, father, of that you may be sure. I +have the advantage of knowing the fellow, and am pretty certain +that he will not know me." + +"Not he, Charlie," his father said confidently. "Even in the last +two years, since you were here with Jervoise and the others, you +have changed so much that I, myself, might have passed you in the +street without knowing you. + +"Now, you had better go off and see about your things. There is no +time to be lost. I have drawn out a hundred guineas of my money, +which will, I should say, serve you while you are away; but don't +stint it, lad. Let me know if it runs short, and I will send you +more." + +"I have money, too, father. I have four months' pay due, besides +money I have in hand, for there was but little need for us to put +our hands in our pockets." + +Ten days later, Charlie arrived in the Port of London, and took up +his abode at the Bull's Head, where he found the quarters +comfortable, indeed, after the rough work of campaigning. The next +morning he took a waiter into his confidence. + +"I have come to London to see a little life," he said, "and I want +to be put into the way of doing it. I don't want to go to places +where young gallants assemble. My purse is not deep enough to stand +such society. I should like to go to places where I shall meet +hearty young fellows, and could have a throw of the dice, or see a +main fought by good cocks, or even sally out and have a little fun +with the watch. My purse is fairly lined, and I want some +amusement--something to look back upon when I go home again. What +is the best way to set about it?" + +"Well, sir, if that is your humour, I have a brother who is one of +the mayor's tipstaffs. He knows the city well, ay, and Westminster, +too, and the purlieus of Saint James's, and whether you want to +meet young gallants or roistering blades, or to have a look in at +places where you can hire a man to cut another's throat for a few +crowns, he can show you them. He will be on duty now, but I will +send him a message to come round this evening, and I warrant me he +will be here. He has showed young squires from the country over the +town before this, and will guess what is on hand when he gets my +message." + +Having nothing to do, Charlie sauntered about the town during the +day, looking into the shops, and keeping a keen eye on passers by, +with the vague hope that he might be lucky enough to come across +his man. + +After he had finished his supper, the waiter came up and told him +that his brother was outside. + +"I have spoken to him, sir, and he warrants that he can take you +into the sort of society you want to meet, whatever it may be." + +Charlie followed him out. A man was standing under the lamp that +swung before the door. + +"This is the gentleman I was speaking to you of, Tony." + +As the man took off his cap, Charlie had a good view of his face. +It was shrewd and intelligent. + +"You understand what I want?" he asked, as the waiter ran into the +house again, to attend to his duties. + +"Yes, sir. So far as I understood him, you wish to go to taverns of +somewhat inferior reputations, and to see something of that side of +London life. If you will pardon my boldness, it is somewhat of a +dangerous venture. In such places brawls are frequent, and rapiers +soon out. + +"You look to me like one who could hold his own in a fray," he +added, as his eye ran over the athletic figure before him, "but it +is not always fair fighting. These fellows hang together, and while +engaged with one, half a dozen might fall upon you. As to your +purse, sir, it is your own affair. You will assuredly lose your +money, if you play or wager with them. But that is no concern of +mine. Neither, you may say, is your life; but it seems to me that +it is. One young gentleman from the country, who wanted, like you, +to see life, was killed in a brawl, and I have never forgiven +myself for having taken him to the tavern where he lost his life. +Thus, I say that, though willing enough to earn a crown or two +outside my own work, I must decline to take you to places where, as +it seems to me, you are likely to get into trouble." + +"You are an honest fellow, and I like you all the more, for +speaking out frankly to me," Charlie said, "and were I, as I told +your brother, thinking of going to such places solely for +amusement, what you say would have weight with me. But, as I see +that you are to be trusted, I will tell you more. I want to find a +man who did me and mine a grievous ill turn. I have no intention of +killing him, or anything of that sort, but it is a matter of great +importance to lay hand on him. All I know of him is that he is a +frequenter of taverns here, and those not of the first character. +Just at present he is, I have reason to believe, provided with +funds, and may push himself into places where he would not show +himself when he is out of luck. Still, it is more likely he is to +be found in the lowest dens, among rascals of his own kidney. I may +lose a little money, but I shall do so with my eyes open, and +solely to obtain a footing at the places where I am most likely to +meet him." + +"That alters the affair," the man said gravely. "It will add to +your danger; for as you know him, I suppose he knows you, also." + +"No. It is four years since we met, and I have so greatly changed, +in that time, that I have no fear he would recognize me. At any +rate, not here in London, which is the last place he would suspect +me of being in." + +"That is better. Well, sir, if that be your object, I will do my +best to help you. What is the fellow's name and description?" + +"He called himself Nicholson, when we last met; but like enough +that is not his real name, and if it is, he may be known by another +here. He is a lanky knave, of middle height; but more than that, +except that he has a shifty look about his eyes, I cannot tell +you." + +"And his condition, you say, is changeable?" + +"Very much so, I should say. I should fancy that, when in funds, he +would frequent places where he could prey on careless young fellows +from the country, like myself. When his pockets are empty, I should +say he would herd with the lowest rascals." + +"Well, sir, as you say he is in funds at present, we will this +evening visit a tavern or two, frequented by young blades, some of +whom have more money than wit; and by men who live by their wits +and nothing else. But you must not be disappointed, if the search +prove a long one before you run your hare down, for the indications +you have given me are very doubtful. He may be living in Alsatia, +hard by the Temple, which, though not so bad as it used to be, is +still an abode of dangerous rogues. But more likely you may meet +him at the taverns in Westminster, or near Whitehall; for, if he +has means to dress himself bravely, it is there he will most +readily pick up gulls. + +"I will, with your permission, take you to the better sort to begin +with, and then, when you have got more accustomed to the ways of +these places, you can go to those a step lower, where, I should +think, he is more likely to be found; for such fellows spend their +money freely, when they get it, and unless they manage to fleece +some young lamb from the country, they soon find themselves unable +to keep pace with the society of places where play runs high, and +men call for their bottles freely. Besides, in such places, when +they become unable to spend money freely, they soon get the cold +shoulder from the host, who cares not to see the money that should +be spent on feasting and wine diverted into the pockets of others. + +"I shall leave you at the door of these places. I am too well known +to enter. I put my hand on the shoulder of too many men, during the +year, for me to go into any society without the risk of someone +knowing me again." + +They accordingly made their way down to Westminster, and Charlie +visited several taverns. At each he called for wine, and was +speedily accosted by one or more men, who perceived that he was a +stranger, and scented booty. He stated freely that he had just come +up to town, and intended to stay some short time there. He allowed +himself to be persuaded to enter the room where play was going on, +but declined to join, saying that, as yet, he was ignorant of the +ways of town, and must see a little more of them before he ventured +his money, but that, when he felt more at home, he should be ready +enough to join in a game of dice or cards, being considered a good +hand at both. + +After staying at each place about half an hour, he made his way +out, getting rid of his would-be friends with some little +difficulty, and with a promise that he would come again, ere long. + +For six days he continued his inquiries, going out every evening +with his guide, and taking his meals, for the most part, at one or +other of the taverns, in hopes that he might happen upon the man of +whom he was in search. At the end of that time, he had a great +surprise. As he entered the hotel to take supper, the waiter said +to him: + +"There is a gentleman who has been asking for you, in the public +room. He arrived an hour ago, and has hired a chamber." + +"Asking for me?" Charlie repeated in astonishment. "You must be +mistaken." + +"Not at all, sir. He asked for Mr. Charles Conway, and that is the +name you wrote down in the hotel book, when you came." + +"That must be me, sure enough, but who can be asking for me I +cannot imagine. However, I shall soon know." + +And, in a state of utter bewilderment as to who could have learnt +his name and address, he went into the coffee room. There happened, +at the moment, to be but one person there, and as he rose and +turned towards him, Charlie exclaimed in astonishment and delight: + +"Why, Harry, what on earth brings you here? I am glad to see you, +indeed, but you are the last person in the world I should have +thought of meeting here in London." + +"You thought I was in a hut, made as wind tight as possible, before +the cold set in, in earnest. So I should have been, with six months +of a dull life before me, if it had not been for Sir Marmaduke's +letter. Directly my father read it through to me he said: + +"'Get your valises packed at once, Harry. I will go to the colonel +and get your leave granted. Charlie may have to go into all sorts +of dens, in search of this scoundrel, and it is better to have two +swords than one in such places. Besides, as you know the fellow's +face you can aid in the search, and are as likely to run against +him as he is. His discovery is as important to us as it is to him, +and it may be the duke will be more disposed to interest himself, +when he sees the son of his old friend, than upon the strength of a +letter only.' + +"You may imagine I did not lose much time. But I did not start, +after all, until the next morning, for when the colonel talked it +over with my father, he said: + +"'Let Harry wait till tomorrow. I shall be seeing the king this +evening. He is always interested in adventure, and I will tell him +the whole story, and ask him to write a few lines, saying that +Harry and Carstairs are young officers who have borne themselves +bravely, and to his satisfaction. It may help with the duke, and +will show, at any rate, that you have both been out here, and not +intriguing at Saint Germains.' + +"The colonel came in, late in the evening, with a paper, which the +king had told Count Piper to write and sign, and had himself put +his signature to it. I have got it sewn up in my doublet, with my +father's letter to Marlborough. They are too precious to lose, but +I can tell you what it is, word for word: + +"'By order of King Charles the Twelfth of Sweden. This is to +testify, to all whom it may concern, that Captain Charles +Carstairs, and Captain Harry Jervoise--'" + +"Oh, I am glad, Harry!" Charlie interrupted. "It was horrid that I +should have been a captain, for the last year, and you a +lieutenant. I am glad, indeed." + +"Yes, it is grand, isn't it, and very good of the king to do it +like that. Now, I will go on-- + +"'Have both served me well and faithfully during the war, showing +great valour, and proving themselves to be brave and honourable +gentlemen, as may be seen, indeed, from the rank that they, though +young in years, have both attained, and which is due solely to +their deserts.' + +"What do you think of that?" + +"Nothing could be better, Harry. Did you see my father at +Gottenburg?" + +"Yes. The ship I sailed by went to Stockholm, and I was lucky +enough to find there another, starting for England in a few hours. +She touched at Gottenburg to take in some cargo, and I had time to +see Sir Marmaduke, who was good enough to express himself as +greatly pleased that I was coming over to join you." + +"Well, Harry, I am glad, indeed. Before we talk, let us go in and +have supper, that is, if you have not already had yours. If you +have, I can wait a bit." + +"No; they told me you had ordered your supper at six, so I told +them I would take mine at the same time; and, indeed, I can tell +you that I am ready for it." + +After the meal, Charlie told his friend the steps he was taking to +discover Nicholson. + +"Do you feel sure that you would know him again, Harry?" + +"Quite sure. Why, I saw him dozens of times at Lynnwood." + +"Then we shall now be able to hunt for him separately, Harry. Going +to two or three places, of an evening, I always fear that he may +come in after I have gone away. Now one of us can wait till the +hour for closing, while the other goes elsewhere." + +For another fortnight, they frequented all the places where they +thought Nicholson would be most likely to show himself; then, after +a consultation with their guide, they agreed that they must look +for him at lower places. + +"Like enough," the tipstaff said, "he may have run through his +money the first night or two after coming up to town. That is the +way with these fellows. As long as they have money they gamble. +When they have none, they cheat or turn to other evil courses. Now +that there are two of you together, there is less danger in going +to such places; for, though these rascals may be ready to pick a +quarrel with a single man, they know that it is a dangerous game to +play with two, who look perfectly capable of defending themselves." + +For a month, they frequented low taverns. They dressed themselves +plainly now, and assumed the character of young fellows who had +come up to town, and had fallen into bad company, and lost what +little money they had brought with them, and were now ready for any +desperate enterprise. Still, no success attended their search. + +"I can do no more for you," their guide said. "I have taken you to +every house that such a man would be likely to use. Of course, +there are many houses near the river frequented by bad characters. +But here you would chiefly meet men connected, in some way, with +the sea, and you would be hardly likely to find your man there." + +"We shall keep on searching," Charlie said. "He may have gone out +of town for some reason, and may return any day. We shall not give +it up till spring." + +"Well, at any rate, sirs, I will take your money no longer. You +know your way thoroughly about now, and, if at any time you should +want me, you know where to find me. It might be worth your while to +pay a visit to Islington, or even to go as far as Barnet. The +fellow may have done something, and may think it safer to keep in +hiding, and in that case Islington and Barnet are as likely to suit +him as anywhere." + +The young men had, some time before, left the inn and taken a +lodging. This they found much cheaper, and, as they were away from +breakfast until midnight, it mattered little where they slept. They +took the advice of their guide, stayed a couple of nights at +Islington, and then went to Barnet. In these places there was no +occasion to visit the taverns, as, being comparatively small, they +would, either in the daytime or after dark, have an opportunity of +meeting most of those living there. + +Finding the search ineffectual, Charlie proposed that they should +go for a long walk along the north road. + +"I am tired of staring every man I meet in the face, Harry. And I +should like, for once, to be able to throw it all off and take a +good walk together, as we used to do in the old days. We will go +eight or ten miles out, stop at some wayside inn for refreshments, +and then come back here for the night, and start back again for +town tomorrow." + +Harry at once agreed, and, taking their hats, they started. + +They did not hurry themselves, and, carefully avoiding all mention +of the subject that had occupied their thoughts for weeks, they +chatted over their last campaign, their friends in the Swedish +camp, and the course that affairs were likely to take. After four +hours' walking they came to a small wayside inn, standing back +twenty or thirty yards from the road. + +"It is a quiet-looking little place," Charlie said, "and does but a +small trade, I should say. However, no doubt they can give us some +bread and cheese, and a mug of ale, which will last us well enough +till we get back to Barnet." + +The landlord placed what they demanded before them, and then left +the room again, replying by a short word or two to their remarks on +the weather. + +"A surly ill-conditioned sort of fellow," Harry said. + +"It may be, Harry, that badness of trade has spoiled his temper. +However, so long as his beer is good, it matters little about his +mood." + +They had finished their bread and cheese, and were sitting idly, +being in no hurry to start on their way back, when a man on +horseback turned off from the road and came up the narrow lane in +which the house stood. As Charlie, who was facing that way, looked +at him he started, and grasped Harry's arm. + +"It is our man," he said. "It is Nicholson himself! To think of our +searching all London, these weeks past, and stumbling upon him +here." + +The man stopped at the door, which was at once opened by the +landlord. + +"All right, I suppose, landlord?" the man said, as he swung himself +from his horse. + +"There is no one here except two young fellows, who look to me as +if they had spent their last penny in London, and were travelling +down home again." + +He spoke in a lowered voice, but the words came plainly enough to +the ears of the listeners within. Another word or two was spoken, +and then the landlord took the horse and led it round to a stable +behind, while its rider entered the room. He stopped for a moment +at the open door of the taproom, and stared at the two young men, +who had just put on their hats again. They looked up carelessly, +and Harry said: + +"Fine weather for this time of year." + +The man replied by a grunt, and then passed on into the landlord's +private room. + +"That is the fellow, sure enough, Charlie," Harry said, in a low +tone. "I thought your eyes might have deceived you, but I remember +his face well. Now what is to be done?" + +"We won't lose sight of him again," Charlie said. "Though, if we +do, we shall know where to pick up his traces, for he evidently +frequents this place. I should say he has taken to the road. There +were a brace of pistols in the holsters. That is how it is that we +have not found him before. Well, at any rate, there is no use +trying to make his acquaintance here. The first question is, will +he stay here for the night or not--and if he does not, which way +will he go?" + +"He came from the north," Harry said. "So if he goes, it will be +towards town." + +"That is so. Our best plan will be to pay our reckoning and start. +We will go a hundred yards or so down the road, and then lie down +behind a hedge, so as to see if he passes. If he does not leave +before nightfall, we will come up to the house and reconnoitre. If +he does not leave by ten, he is here for the night, and we must +make ourselves as snug as we can under a stack. The nights are +getting cold, but we have slept out in a deal colder weather than +this. However, I fancy he will go on. It is early for a man to +finish a journey. If he does, we must follow him, and keep him in +sight, if possible." + +Two hours later they saw, from their hiding place, Nicholson ride +out from the lane. He turned his horse's head in their direction. + +"That is good," Charlie said. "If he is bound for London, we shall +be able to get into his company somehow; but if he had gone up to +some quiet place north, we might have had a lot of difficulty in +getting acquainted with him." + +As soon as the man had ridden past they leapt to their feet, and, +at a run, kept along the hedge. He had started at a brisk trot, but +when, a quarter of a mile on, they reached a gate, and looked up +the road after him, they saw to their satisfaction that the horse +had already fallen into a walk. + +"He does not mean to go far from Barnet," Charlie exclaimed. "If he +had been bound farther, he would have kept on at a trot. We will +keep on behind the hedges as long as we can. If he were to look +back and see us always behind him, he might become suspicious." + +They had no difficulty in keeping up with the horseman. Sometimes, +when they looked out, he was a considerable distance ahead, having +quickened his pace; but he never kept that up long, and by brisk +running, and dashing recklessly through the hedges running at right +angles to that they were following, they soon came up to him again. + +Once, he had gone so far ahead that they took to the road, and +followed it until he again slackened his speed. They thus kept him +in sight till they neared Barnet. + +"We can take to the road now," Harry said. "Even if he should look +round, he will think nothing of seeing two men behind him. We might +have turned into it from some by-lane. At any rate, we must chance +it. We must find where he puts up for the night." + + + +Chapter 17: The North Coach. + + +Barnet was then, as now, a somewhat straggling place. Soon after +entering it, the horseman turned off from the main road. His +pursuers were but fifty yards behind him, and they kept him in +sight until, after proceeding a quarter of a mile, he stopped at a +small tavern, where he dismounted, and a boy took his horse and led +it round by the side of the house. + +"Run to earth!" Harry said exultantly. "He is not likely to move +from there tonight." + +"At any rate, he is safe for a couple of hours," Charlie said. "So +we will go to our inn, and have a good meal. By that time it will +be quite dark, and we will have a look at the place he has gone +into; and if we can't learn anything, we must watch it by turns +till midnight. We will arrange, at the inn, to hire a horse. One +will be enough. He only caught a glimpse of us at that inn, and +certainly would not recognize one of us, if he saw him alone. The +other can walk." + +"But which way, Charlie? He may go back again." "It is hardly +likely he came here merely for the pleasure of stopping the night +at that little tavern. I have no doubt he is bound for London. You +shall take the horse, Harry, and watch until he starts, and then +follow him, just managing to come up close to him as he gets into +town. I will start early, and wait at the beginning of the houses, +and it is hard if one or other of us does not manage to find out +where he hides." + +They had no difficulty in arranging with the landlord for a horse, +which was to be left in a stable he named in town. They gave him a +deposit, for which he handed them a note, by which the money was to +be returned to them by the stable keeper, on their handing over the +horse in good condition. + +After the meal they sallied out again, and walked to the tavern, +which was a small place standing apart from other houses. There was +a light in the taproom, but they guessed that here, as at the other +stopping place, the man they wanted would be in a private +apartment. Passing the house, they saw a light in a side window, +and, noiselessly opening a little wicket gate, they stole into the +garden. Going a short distance back from the window, so that the +light should not show their faces, they looked in, and saw the man +they sought sitting by the fire, with a table on which stood a +bottle and two glasses beside him, and another man facing him. + +"Stay where you are, Harry. I will steal up to the window, and find +out whether I can hear what they are saying." + +Stooping close under the window, he could hear the murmur of +voices, but could distinguish no words. He rejoined his companion. + +"I am going to make a trial to overhear them, Harry, and it is +better that only one of us should be here. You go back to the inn, +and wait for me there." + +"What are you going to do, Charlie?" + +"I am going to throw a stone through the lower part of the window. +Then I shall hide. They will rush out, and when they can find no +one, they will conclude that the stone was thrown by some +mischievous boy going along the road. When all is quiet again I +will creep up to the window, and it will be hard if I don't manage +to learn something of what they are saying." + +The plan was carried out, and Charlie, getting close up to the +window, threw a stone through one of the lowest of the little +diamond-shaped panes. He heard a loud exclamation of anger inside, +and then sprang away and hid himself at the other end of the +garden. A moment later he heard loud talking in the road, and a man +with a lantern came round to the window; but in a few minutes all +was quiet again, and Charlie cautiously made his way back to the +window, and crouched beneath it. He could hear plainly enough, now, +the talk going on within. + +"What was I saying when that confounded stone interrupted us?" + +"You were saying, captain, that you intended to have a week in +London, and then to stop the North coach." + +"Yes, I have done well lately, and can afford a week's pleasure. +Besides, Jerry Skinlow got a bullet in his shoulder, last week, in +trying to stop a carriage on his own account, and Jack Mercer's +mare is laid up lame, and it wants four to stop a coach neatly. +Jack Ponsford is in town. I shall bring him out with me." + +"I heard that you were out of luck a short time ago." + +"Yes, everything seemed against me. My horse was shot, and, just at +the time, I had been having a bad run at the tables and had lost my +last stiver. I was in hiding for a fortnight at one of the cribs; +for they had got a description of me from an old gentleman, who, +with his wife and daughter, I had eased of their money and watches. +It was a stupid business. I dropped a valuable diamond ring on the +ground, and in groping about for it my mask came off, and, like a +fool, I stood up in the full light of the carriage lamp. So I +thought it better, for all reasons, to get away for a month or so, +until things quieted down. I wanted to visit my banker, and it was +a good many miles to tramp." + +"Oh, you have got a banker, captain?" + +"I have one who is just as good, though I cannot say he shells out +his money willingly--in fact he was rude enough to say, when I +called this time, that if I ever showed my face to him again he +would shoot me, even if he were hung for it. Bad taste, wasn't it? +At any rate, I mustn't call on him again too soon." + +"You haven't settled on the night yet, I suppose, captain?" + +"About the end of next week. Friday will be a full moon, I think, +and I like a moon for the work. It gives light enough to see what +you are doing, and not light enough for them to see much of you. So +I suppose I may as well fix Friday. I will send up a message for +Jack Mercer and Jerry Skinlow to be here on Thursday evening. I +will be here that afternoon, and settle matters with them as to +where they shall meet me, and what each man shall do. Then I will +ride back to town, and come out again just as it gets dark, with +Jack Ponsford." + +"I suppose you will do it north of here?" + +"No, I will do it a mile or two out of town. The road north of this +is getting rather a bad reputation, and in going out of Barnet the +guard now looks to his blunderbuss, and the passengers get their +pistols ready. It isn't once in a hundred times they have pluck +enough to use them, but they always think they will, until the time +comes. Near town we shall take them by surprise, and stop them +before they have time to think of getting out their arms. + +"Confound that window. Shove something into the hole, Johnson. I +can feel the cold right down my back." + +A cloth was pushed into the broken pane, and Charlie could hear no +more of what was said inside. He had heard, indeed, enough for his +purpose, but he had hoped to gather the name of the place at which +the man would put up in London. However, he was well satisfied with +his success, and at once made his way back to the inn. + +"Well, Charlie, how have you succeeded?" Harry asked, as he sat +down at the table. + +"Could not be better, Harry, though I did not find out where he +puts up in London. However, that is of small consequence. In the +first place, I found out that our suspicions were right, and that +the fellow is a highwayman, and seems to be captain of a gang +consisting anyhow of three, and perhaps of more, fellows like +himself. In the second place, he intends, with his three comrades, +to attack the coach on Friday week, two or three miles out of town. +Nothing could better suit our purpose, even if we had planned the +affair ourselves. Of course, we will be there. If we can capture +him while engaged in that work, we can get anything out of him. He +has either got to confess or be hanged." + +"That is a stroke of good luck, indeed," Harry exclaimed. "It will +be rather difficult to manage, though. The fellows will be sure to +be masked; and, if we were to shoot him instead of one of the +others, it would be fatal." + +"Yes, that would be awkward. Besides," Charlie said, "even if we +did recognize him and shot his horse, he might jump up behind one +of the other men, or might make off across the country, and we +might lose sight of him before we could get down from the top of +the coach to pursue." + +"It might be better if we were mounted, instead of being on the +coach." + +"Better in some ways, Harry; but if they heard two mounted men +coming along beside the coach, they would probably take the alarm +and not attack at all; while, if we were to keep a bit behind, and +ride up as soon as we heard the firing--for they generally shoot +one of the horses to bring the coach to a standstill--they might +ride off as soon as they heard the sound of the horses on the road. +Those fellows are splendidly mounted. Their lives depend upon it, +and nothing we should be able to hire would be likely to have a +chance with them." + +"Well, we shall have plenty of time to think this over, Charlie. I +suppose we shall carry out our plan tomorrow, as we arranged." + +"Certainly. It is as important to find out where he lives in London +as it was before, for if he gets away, we can then look him up +there. We may as well go to bed at once, for I shall start at four, +so as to get to town before him, however early he may be off. But +as we know, now, he is going up on pleasure and not on business, I +don't suppose he will be in any hurry in the morning." + +Charlie arrived in town about eight o'clock, and, having +breakfasted at the first tavern he came to, walked along for some +distance, to decide upon the spot where he should take up his +position. As Nicholson was going up, as he said, to enjoy himself, +it was not likely that he would put up at Islington, but would take +up his quarters in the centre of the town. He therefore decided to +walk on, until he came to some junction of important roads; and +there wait, as the man might make either for the city or +Westminster, though the latter appeared the more probable +direction. + +Here he walked up and down for an hour, and then, entering a +tavern, took his place at the window, where he could see up the +street, called for a stoup of wine, and prepared for a long wait. + +It was not, indeed, until three o'clock that he saw Nicholson +coming along. He was more gaily dressed than he had been on the +previous day. He had on a green cloth coat with gold braid round +the cuffs, an embroidered waistcoat, yellow breeches, top boots, +and three-cornered hat. He was riding at foot pace. + +Charlie went to the door as soon as he passed, and saw that, as he +expected, he took the road to Westminster. Looking round, he saw +Harry riding about a hundred yards behind. Charlie had no +difficulty in keeping up with Nicholson, and traced him to a house +in a quiet street lying behind the Abbey. A boy came out and held +the horse, while its rider dismounted, and then led it away to the +stable of an inn a short distance away. Charlie turned at once, and +joined Harry. + +"I need not have taken all the trouble I have, Harry, still there +was no knowing. Evidently the fellow has no fear of being detected, +and is going to pass, for a week, as a gentleman from the country. +I suppose he is in the habit of stopping at that house whenever he +comes up with his pockets lined, and is regarded there as a +respectable gentleman by the landlord. Now you had better take your +horse to the stable, where you agreed to hand it over, and we will +meet at our lodgings and plan what to do next." + +The discussion did not lead to much. There did not seem, to them, +anything to do until the day when the coach was to be attacked, but +they agreed it would be well to take the advice of their friend the +tipstaff. Hitherto, they had not told him more of their motive for +desiring to find Nicholson, than Charlie had said at his first +interview with him. They thought it would be better, now, to make +him more fully acquainted with the facts, for they had found him +shrewd, and eager to assist them to the best of his power. They +therefore sent a boy with a note to him, at the court, and at seven +o'clock he came to their lodgings. + +"We have found our man," Charlie said as he entered. + +"I am very glad to hear it, gentlemen. I had quite given up all +hopes that you would be able to do so, and thought he must have +left town altogether for a time." + +"Sit down and take a glass of wine. We want your advice in this +matter, and unless you know how much there is at stake, you will +not be able to enter fully into the affair. + +"Some four years ago, this fellow was concerned in a plot by which +six gentlemen, among whom were our friends, were brought to ruin. +They were in the habit of meeting together, being all of similar +political opinions, and advantage was taken of this by a man, who +hoped to profit largely by their ruin, especially by that of my +father. In order to bring this about, he recommended this fellow we +are in search of to my father, who happened, at the time, to be in +want of a servant. + +"The fellow undoubtedly acted as a spy, for I once caught him at +it. But spying alone would have been of no use, for there was +nothing at any time said that would have brought harm upon them. +They simply discussed what thousands of other people have +discussed, the measures that should be taken on behalf of the +Stuarts, if one of them came over from France supported by a French +force. The fellow, however, swore that the object of these meetings +was to arrange for an assassination of William. He gave full +details of the supposed plot, and in order to give substance to his +statements, he hid, in a cabinet of my father's, a number of +compromising papers, professing to be letters from abroad. + +"These were found by the officers sent to arrest my father. He and +his five friends managed to escape, but their estates were +forfeited. Of course, what we want to prove is the connection +between this spy and his employer, who, for his services in +bringing this supposed plot to light, received as a reward my +father's estates. There is no way of doing this, unless this man +can be brought to confess his own villainy in the matter of the +letters, and to denounce the scoundrel whose agent he was. +Probably, by this time, he has got nearly all he can expect from +his employer, and will at least feel no scruples in exposing him, +if by so doing he can save his own neck. + +"Now, we have not only discovered the man, but have found out that +he is a notorious highwayman, and the leader of a gang; but more, I +have found out the day and hour on which he proposes to stop and +rob the North coach." + +"Well, Mr. Carstairs, if you have done that," the man said, "you +have done marvels. That you should find the man might be a piece of +good luck, but that you should have learned all this about him +seems to me wonderful." + +"It was a lucky accident, altogether. We saw him, watched him, and +managed to overhear a conversation from which we gathered these +facts. It was all simple enough. Of course, our idea is that we +should, if possible, catch him in the act of robbing the coach, +bind and take charge of him, saying that we should hand him over to +justice, when the coachman and passengers would, of course, appear +to testify against him. Instead of doing this, we should take him +somewhere, and then give him the option of either making a clean +breast of the whole story, and remaining in our custody until +called upon to testify to his statement in a court of justice, +whenever required; or of being handed over to the authorities, to +be tried and hung as a highwayman. + +"One of our greatest difficulties is how to effect his capture. The +attack will be made at night on the coach, and in the darkness we +might shoot him, or he might get away. He is at present in London, +at a lodging in a street behind the Abbey, where, doubtless, his +real profession is altogether unsuspected by the people of the +house. + +"Now you know the whole affair. Let us have your opinion as to the +manner in which we had best set about the business." + +The man sat for some time, in silence. + +"I can think of no better plan than yours, sir, and yet it seems to +me that there is scarcely any chance of your catching him at the +coach. Of course, it would be easy enough if you did not care +whether you killed or caught him. All you would have to do would be +to get half a dozen stout fellows, armed with pistols, on the coach +with you instead of passengers, and then you would be pretty +certain to kill some of them, perhaps all; but, as you can't do +that, and are afraid to shoot lest you should kill him, it seems to +me that you have a very small chance of catching him that way." + +Charlie and his friend so thoroughly saw this, that they sat silent +when he ceased speaking. + +"We could not arrest him now, I suppose?" Harry said at last. + +"Well, you see, you have got nothing against him. He may have been +a Knight of the Road for the last five years, but you have no +witnesses to prove it, and it is not much use to accuse him of +intending to rob the North mail. You have no proofs, even of that. +It is only your word against his. + +"There is no doubt that, after they have robbed the coach, they +will separate. They may go away in twos, or singly. Now, you see, +we know three of this fellow's hiding places. He would hardly +choose the one at Barnet. It is too close. It is more likely he +would choose the next place, the little inn in which you saw him +first; but I think it more likely still that he and his mates will +divide the plunder, half a mile or so from the place where they +stopped the coach, and will then separate, and I am inclined to +think his most likely course is to strike off from the main road, +make a long round, and come down before morning to where he is now. +He may take his horse into its stable, or, more likely, he may +leave it at some place he may know of on the road leading out +through Putney, and then arrive at his lodgings just about +daybreak. He would explain he had been at a supper, and had kept it +up all night, and no one would even have a suspicion he had been +engaged in the affair with the coach. I am sure that is his most +likely plan." + +"Then, what would you do?" Harry asked. + +"What I should do is this. I will get two sharp active boys. I know +of two who would just do, they have done jobs for us before now. I +will give them the exact description of those two taverns, and send +them down the day before the coach is to be attacked, and tell them +that, that night, they are each to keep watch over one of them, see +who goes in, watch till they come out, and then follow them, for +days if necessary, and track them down. Then they can send word up +by the guard of the coach, each day; so that, if we find our man +does not come back here by Saturday morning, we shall have news +that will put us on his track again, before long. + +"However, I think he is sure to come back here. You had better +point out to me, this evening, where he lodges, and I shall be able +to find out, before long, whether they are respectable people, or +whether they are likely to be pals of his. + +"If they are respectable, I will see them on Friday evening, show +them my badge, and tell them that the man who has been lodging here +is a notorious highwayman, and that I am going to arrest him. To +prevent any chance of a mistake, I will put three or four of my +mates round the house, to see that no one goes out to give him the +alarm. I will come down and open the door for you, at two o'clock +in the morning. You can then come up with me into his bedroom, and +as he comes in, I will nab him. + +"If, on the other hand, I find the people of the house have a +doubtful reputation in the neighbourhood, we must simply hide in +doorways, make a rush upon him as he goes up to the house, and +overpower him there. If one stands in his doorway, and leaps out on +him as he comes up, he won't have much chance of using a pistol. I +will have a cart ready, close by. We will truss him up tightly, gag +him and put him into it, and I will have some place ready for us to +drive him to, if you think that plan is as good as any other." + +"I think it is an excellent plan, and could not be better," Charlie +exclaimed, and his friend heartily agreed with him. + +"I think you will be able to get anything out of him, when you get +him there," said the tipstaff. "He is sure to have some of the swag +about him, and, even if none of the passengers of the coach are +able to swear to him, that and the talk you overheard would be +sufficient to hang him." + +"Can those boys you speak of write?" + +"Not they, sir." + +"There might be a difficulty about a verbal message." + +"The guard will give it, all right, if he gets half a crown with +it. You need not trouble about that, sir. I will have a man to meet +each coach, as it comes in. + +"And now we have arranged matters, sir, I will go with you to see +the house, and will send a sharp fellow down tomorrow, to make +inquiries about the people of the place." + +When they returned, the friends sat for a long time, talking +together. The suggested plan looked so hopeful that they felt +confident of its success. + +"I think, Charlie," Harry said, "it would be a good thing for us to +present ourselves to the Duke of Marlborough. Then we shall see if +he is disposed to take an interest in us, and help us. If he is, he +will tell us what had best be done towards getting Nicholson's +statement made in the presence of some sort of official who will +act on it. If he gives us the cold shoulder, we shall have to do as +best we can in some other direction, and it will be well to have +the matter settled, if possible, before we catch the fellow." + +"I think that will be a very good plan, Harry. I know where he +lives. I inquired directly I came over. Tomorrow morning we can go +there and inquire, at the door, at what hour he receives callers." + +The next day at eleven o'clock the young men, dressed in their best +attire, called at the duke's. They were informed that the great man +was at home, and would be as likely to see them then as at any +other hour. Accordingly they entered, and were shown into an +anteroom, and sent their names in by a footman. He returned with a +request that they would follow him, and were shown into a library, +where a singularly handsome man, in the prime of life, was sitting +at a desk. He looked at them in some surprise. + +"Is there not some mistake, young gentlemen?" he asked. "My servant +gave the names as Captain Jervoise, and Captain Carstairs. I do not +recall the names as those of officers in her majesty's service." + +"No, my lord, we have the honour to be captains in the service of +King Charles of Sweden, as this document, signed both by his +minister, Count Piper, and by the king himself, will testify." + +The duke took the paper, and read it. + +"The king of Sweden speaks very highly of you both, gentlemen," he +said cordially. "It is no mean credit to have gained such warm +praise from the greatest general of his time. What can I do for +you? Do you wish to be transferred from the service of Sweden to +that of her majesty? We have need of good officers, and I can +promise that you shall receive the same rank that you now hold, and +it is likely that, before long, you will have an opportunity of +seeing some service under your national flag." + +"I thank you warmly for your kindness, my lord, but it is not with +that view that we have now come to you, though I am sure that we +both should prefer to fight under our own flag, rather than under +that of a foreign king, however kindly he may be disposed to us, +personally. We have called upon a private matter, and I am the +bearer of this letter from my father, who had once the honour of +your lordship's friendship." + +"Jervoise," the duke repeated, as he took the letter. "Not Mat +Jervoise, surely?" + +"That is my father's name, sir." + +"Do I remember him? Why, he was one of my closest friends when I +was a lad, and I once stayed with him at his father's place, for a +fortnight, on a journey I took to the north. But I will read his +letter-- + +"What changes happen," he said, as he laid it down. "To think that +Mat Jervoise should be an exile, his old home in the hands of +strangers, and he a major in the Swedish service; and that I should +never have heard a word about it! + +"Well, young sir," and he held out his hand to Harry, "I can +promise you my aid and protection, to the utmost, in whatever +matter you may be concerned. I seem to remember the name of your +companion, too." + +"His father, Sir Marmaduke, was a neighbour of ours. There has +always been great friendship between the two families." + +"Of course, I remember him now. He was some fifteen or twenty years +older than your father. I remember that I went over with your +father and grandfather, and dined at his place. He is still alive +and well, I hope?" + +"He is both, sir," Charlie said; "but, like Major Jervoise, an +exile." + +"You amaze me, but I will not ask you to tell me more, now. I have +to be at Saint James's at twelve. + +"Let me see, this evening I shall be engaged. Come tomorrow +morning, at half past eight, and I shall then be able to give you +an hour, or maybe two, if necessary, and will then hear the whole +story fully." + +The young men, on presenting themselves the next morning, at the +hour named, were at once ushered in. + +"Now, let us lose no time," the duke said, after shaking hands +heartily. "Which of you will tell the story?" + +"Carstairs will do so, my lord," Harry replied. "The mischief was +hatched in his house, and my father, and six other gentlemen, were +the victims of the treachery of a kinsman of his." + +Charlie told the story of the events that had brought about the +ruin of his father and friends. + +"It is monstrous!" the duke exclaimed indignantly, when he had +brought this part of his story to a conclusion. "That my old +friend, Mat Jervoise, should be concerned in a plot for +assassination, is, I would pledge my life, untrue; and Sir +Marmaduke Carstairs was, I know, an honourable gentleman, who would +be equally incapable of such an act. That they were both Jacobites, +I can well believe, for the Jacobites are strong everywhere in the +north, but, as half of us are or have been Jacobites, that can +scarcely be counted as an offence. At any rate, a Stuart is upon +the throne now, and, as long as she reigns, there is no fear that a +civil war will be set up by another of the race. The story, as you +have told it, sir, is, I doubt not for a moment, true, but at +present it is unsupported; and though, on my assurance of their +loyalty, I think I can promise that her majesty would extend a +pardon to the gentlemen who have been so unjustly accused, I fear +that she could not, by her own act, restore the estates that have +been confiscated, unless you can bring some proof that this fellow +you speak of was suborned to get up false evidence against them." + +"That, sir, is what I shall have the honour to inform you now." + +And Charlie then related the story of their quest for the man +Nicholson, and its result. + +"Rarely devised and carried out," the duke said warmly. "Do you lay +the knave by the heels, and frighten him into confessing the truth, +and I will see to the rest of the matter. I do not know that I +ought to let the North coach be robbed, after the information you +have given me, but, as we will hunt down all the other fellows, and +shall probably recover the booty they carry off, the passengers +will have no reason to grumble. + +"Well, young sirs, the king of Sweden has given you a testimonial +as to your bravery and conduct. If necessary, I will give you one +for your ingenuity in planning and carrying out a difficult scheme. + +"So you have both been with the Swedes through their campaign +against the Russians and Poles. I envy you. King Charles' service +is a grand school for soldiers, and that victory of Narva is the +most extraordinary one ever seen. Had you the honour of any +personal intercourse with the king?" + +"Only during three days, when our company formed part of his escort +at a hunting expedition," Harry, whom he addressed, replied. "But +Carstairs spoke to him more frequently. He has been a captain +nearly two years, while I only had my promotion two months ago. We +were in the same regiment, and of the same rank, but Carstairs was +promoted by the king, after the battle at the passage of the Dwina, +as a reward for the suggestion he made in conversation with him, +that the passage might be made under the screen of smoke caused by +the lighting of the forage stacks." + +"I must have a long talk with you both. It is certain that, next +spring, the campaign with France will re-open, and your experience +in the field will be very useful to me. The Swedes are wonderful +soldiers. The Muscovites, at present, are little better than +barbarians carrying European arms, but the Saxons are good troops, +and the Swedes have twice beaten them heavily, and they evidently +retain the fighting qualities that, under Gustavus Adolphus, shook +the imperial power to its centre. + +"The trouble is to find time. I am pestered with men desirous of +employment in the army, with persons who want favours at court, +with politicians of both parties, with people with schemes and +intrigues of all kinds. I have to be in attendance at the palace, +and to see into the whole details of the organization of the army. +I have no doubt that, at present, my antechamber is crowded with +people who want to see me." + +He looked at his tablets. + +"Next Wednesday evening I am free, except for a reception at Lord +Godolphin's, but I can look in there late. I will not ask you here, +because I want you to myself. I will have a private room at +Parker's coffee house in Covent Garden. We will sup at seven. When +you go there, ask for Mr. Church's room, and make yourself +comfortable there until I come, for I can never answer for my own +hours. In that way, we shall be free from all chance of +interruption, and I can pick your brains undisturbed. You will +remember the day and hour. Should there be any change in this +private matter of yours, do not hesitate to come to me here." + +Tony Peters, their guide and adviser, reported favourably as to the +people with whom the highwayman was lodging. + +"The house is kept by the widow of an usher at the palace. She +entertains gentlemen from the country, who come up on business at +the courts of justice, or with people of influence at court. I have +ascertained that our man passes as a well-to-do trader of +Salisbury, who comes up, two or three times a year, to transact +business, and to enjoy for a short time the pleasures of town. He +is liberal in his payments, and is held in high respect by the +woman, whose only objection to him, as a lodger, is the late hours +he keeps. He is a crafty fellow this, for by always going to the +same house, and comporting himself with moderation, he secures a +place of retirement, where, however close the quest after him, +there will be no suspicion whatever, as to his profession, on the +part of the people he is with. + +"My man found out all these matters from the servant wench. We +shall have no difficulty in taking him quietly. The woman will be +so terrified, when I tell her what he is wanted for, that she will +do anything rather than have a scandal that would damage the +reputation of the house." + +He assured Charlie that he need give the matter no further thought. +All the arrangements would be made, and, unless he heard farther +from him, he and Harry would only have to present themselves, at +the door of the house in question, at two o'clock on the morning of +Saturday. + +The evening with the duke passed off pleasantly. The general's +questions turned, not so much upon the actual fighting, as upon the +organization of the Swedes, their methods of campaigning, of +victualling the army, of hutting themselves in winter, the +maintenance of discipline in camp, and other military points that +would be of service to him in his next campaign. + +"Your king is very wise, in so strictly repressing all plundering +and violence," he said. "Only so can a general maintain an army in +an enemy's country. If the peasantry have confidence in him, and +know that they will get a fair price for their produce, they will +bring it into the market gladly, in spite of any orders their own +government may issue to the contrary. I am determined that, if I +again lead an English army in the field, I will follow King +Charles' example; though I shall find it more difficult to enforce +my orders than he does, for he is king as well as general, and his +Swedes are quiet, honest fellows, while my army will be composed of +ne'er-do-wells--of men who prefer to wear the queen's uniform to a +prison garment, of debtors who wish to escape their creditors, and +of men who find village life too quiet for them, and prefer to see +the world, even at the risk of being shot, to honest labour on the +farms. It requires a stern hand to make a disciplined army out of +such materials, but when the time of fighting comes, one need wish +for no better." + +Before parting with them, the duke inquired farther into their +arrangements for the arrest of the highwayman, and said he should +expect to see them on Saturday, and that, if he heard that all had +gone well, he would at once take steps for bringing the matter +before a court that would deal with it. + +The young men felt restless, as the day approached. They had seen +no more of Tony, but they felt complete confidence in him, and were +sure that they would hear if any difficulties arose; but though, +throughout Friday, they did not quit their lodging, no message +reached them. + + + +Chapter 18: A Confession. + + +At the appointed hour, as the clock of the Abbey was striking, they +gave three gentle knocks at the door of the house. It was +immediately opened by Tony, who held a candle in his hand, closed +the door quietly behind them, and then led them into a parlour. + +"Well, Tony, I suppose all has gone well, as we have not heard from +you." + +"There was nothing to tell you, sir, and, indeed, I have been +mightily busy. In the first place, I got two days' leave from the +courts, and went down myself, in a light cart, with the boys and +two men. That way I made sure that there should be no mistake as to +the houses the boys were to watch. The two men I sent on, ten miles +beyond the farthest tavern there to watch the road, and if any +horseman goes by tonight, to track him down. + +"This evening I came here. I brought with me one of my comrades +from the courts, and we told the good woman the character of the +lodger we had seen leave the house a quarter of an hour before. She +almost fainted when we showed her our badges, and said we must +arrest him, on his return, as a notorious highwayman and breaker of +the laws. She exclaimed that her house would be ruined, and it took +some time to pacify her, by saying that we would manage the job so +quietly that no one in the house need know of it, and that we +would, if possible, arrange it so that the place of his arrest +should not be made public. + +"At that, she at once consented to do all that we wished her. We +searched his room carefully, and found some watches, rings, and +other matters, that answered to the description of those stolen +from a coach that was stopped near Dorking, three weeks ago. My +mate has taken them away. As she was afraid that a scuffle in the +bedroom might attract the attention of the four other gentlemen who +are lodging here, I arranged that it should be done at the door. In +that case, if there was any inquiry in the morning, she could say +that it was some drunken fellow, who had come to the house by +mistake, and had tried to force his way in. + +"So she put this parlour at our disposal, and, as I have got the +shutters up and the curtains drawn, there is no fear of his +noticing the light, for, as we may have some hours to wait, it is +more pleasant to have a candle, than to sit in the dark." + +"Does she come down to let him in?" Harry asked. + +"No, sir, the door is left on the latch. She says he finds his way +up to his room, in the dark, and the candle and a tinderbox are +always placed handy for him there. We will take our shoes off +presently, and, when we hear footsteps come up to the door and +stop, we will blow out the candle and steal out into the passage, +so as to catch him directly he closes the door. I have got +handcuffs here, some rope, and a gag." + +"Very well, then. I will undertake the actual seizing of him," +Charlie said. "You slip on the handcuffs, and you, Harry, if you +can find his throat in the dark, grip it pretty tightly, till Tony +can slip the gag into his mouth. Then he can light the candle +again, and we can then disarm and search him, fasten his legs, and +get him ready to put in the cart." + +The hours passed slowly, although Tony did his best to divert them, +by telling stories of various arrests and captures in which he had +been concerned. The clock had just struck five, when they heard a +step coming up the quiet street. + +"That is likely to be the man," Tony said. "It is about the hour we +expected him." + +He blew out the candle and opened the door quietly, and they went +out into the passage. A moment later the step stopped at the door, +the latch clicked, and it was opened. A man entered, and closed the +door behind him. As he did so Charlie, who had marked his exact +position, made a step forward and threw his arms round him. + +The man gave an exclamation of surprise and alarm, and then +struggled fiercely, but he was in the hands of one far stronger +than himself. A moment later, he felt that his assailant was not +alone, for he was grasped by the throat, and at the same time he +felt something cold close round his wrists. There was a sharp +click, and he knew that he was handcuffed. + +Then a low voice said, "I arrest you, in the name of the queen, for +being concerned in the robbery of the Portsmouth coach at Dorking." + +Then a gag was forced between his teeth. Bewildered at the +suddenness of the attack, he ceased to struggle, and remained +quiet, in the grasp of his captors, till there was the sound of the +striking of flint and steel hard by. Then Tony came out of the +parlour with a lighted candle, the highwayman was lifted into the +room, and the door was shut. + +He then saw that his captors were three in number. There were two +young gentlemen, and a smaller man, who, as he looked at him, held +out a badge, and showed that he was an officer of the law. His +pistols and sword were removed, then his pockets were searched, and +two watches and three purses, with some rings and bracelets, were +taken out and laid on the table. + +"It came off, you see," Tony said to Charlie. + +"Well, Master Nicholson, to use one of your aliases, of which you +have, no doubt, a score or more, you may consider yourself under +arrest, not only for the robbery of the Portsmouth coach three +weeks ago, but of the North coach last evening." + +The prisoner started. It seemed impossible to him that that affair +should be known yet, still less his connection with it. + +"You know what that means?" Tony went on grimly. "Tyburn. Now I am +going to make you a little safer still. You have been a hard bird +to catch, and we don't mean to let you slip through our fingers +again." + +So saying, he bound his arms closely to his side with a rope, and +then, with a shorter piece, fastened his ankles securely together. + +"Now I will fetch the cart." + +He had been gone but five minutes, when they heard a vehicle stop +at the door. The others lifted the highwayman by his shoulders and +feet, carried him out, and laid him in the cart. Tony closed the +door quietly behind them, and then jumped up by the side of the +driver, who at once started the horse at a brisk trot. They crossed +Westminster Bridge, and, after another ten minutes' drive, stopped +at a small house standing back from the road, in a garden of its +own. + +"We will carry him in, Tony," Charlie said, "if you will get the +door open." + +They carried him in through the door, at which a woman was +standing, into a room, where they saw, to their satisfaction, a +blazing fire. The prisoner was laid down on the ground. Leaving him +to himself, Charlie and his friends sat down to the table, which +was laid in readiness. Two cold chickens, and ham, and bread had +been placed on it. + +"Now, Tony, sit down. You must be as hungry as we are." + +"Thank you, gentlemen. I am going to have my breakfast in the +kitchen, with my wife." + +As he spoke, the woman came in with two large tankards full of +steaming liquid, whose odour at once proclaimed it to be spiced +ale. + +"Well, wife, we have done a good night's work," Tony said. + +"A good night's work for all of us," Charlie put in. "Your husband +has done us an immense service, Mrs. Peters, and, when our fathers +come to their own again, they will not forget the service he has +rendered us." + +When they had made a hearty meal, Tony was called in again. + +"Now, Tony, we will proceed to business. You have got pen and ink +and paper, I suppose?" + +"I have everything ready, sir. I will clear away this table, so as +to have all in order." + +When this was done, the highwayman was lifted up and placed in a +chair, and the gag removed from his mouth. + +"You don't remember us, I suppose, my man?" Charlie began. "The +last time I saw you was when I brought my stick down on your head, +when you were listening outside a window at Lynnwood." + +An exclamation of surprise broke from the prisoner. + +"Yes, I am Charlie Carstairs, and this gentleman is Harry Jervoise. +By the way, I have made a mistake. I have seen you twice since +then. The first time was in a wayside tavern, some twelve miles +beyond Barnet, nine days ago. The second time was at another tavern +in Barnet. You will remember that a mischievous boy threw a stone, +and broke one of the lattice panes of the window, where you were +sitting talking over this little affair of the North coach." + +A deep execration broke from the lips of the highwayman. + +"Now you see how we know all about it," Charlie went on. "Now, it +entirely depends on yourself whether, in the course of another +hour, we shall hand you over to a magistrate, as the leader of the +gang who robbed the North coach, and took part in the robbery near +Dorking--we have found some of the watches and other plunder in +your bedroom--or whether you escape trial for these offences. You +may be wanted for other, similar affairs." + +"Yes, sir," Tony put in. "Now I see him, he answers exactly to the +description of a man the officers have been in search of, for a +long time. He goes by the name of Dick Cureton, and has been +engaged in at least a dozen highway robberies, to my knowledge." + +"You see," Charlie went on, "there is no doubt whatever what will +happen, if we hand you over to the officers. You will be hung at +Tyburn, to a moral certainty. There is no getting out of that. + +"Now, on the other hand, you have the alternative of making a clean +breast of your dealings with John Dormay, of how he put you at +Lynnwood to act as a spy, how you hid those two letters he gave you +in my father's cabinet, and how he taught you the lying story you +afterwards told before the magistrates at Lancaster. After having +this story written down, you will sign it in the presence of this +officer and his wife, and you will also repeat that story before +any tribunal before which you may be brought. + +"I don't know whether this is a hanging matter, but, at any rate, I +can promise that you shall not be hung for it. The Duke of +Marlborough has taken the matter in hand, and will, I have no +doubt, be able to obtain for you some lesser punishment, if you +make a clean breast of it. I don't say that you will be let free. +You are too dangerous a man for that. But, at any rate, your +punishment will not be a heavy one--perhaps nothing worse than +agreeing to serve in the army. You understand that, in that case, +nothing whatever will be said as to your being Dick Cureton, or of +your connection with these last coach robberies. You will appear +before the court simply as Robert Nicholson, who, having met +Captain Jervoise and myself, felt constrained to confess the +grievous wrong he did to our fathers, and other gentlemen, at the +bidding of, and for money received from, John Dormay." + +"I do not need any time to make up my mind," the highwayman said. +"I am certainly not going to be hung for the advantage of John +Dormay, who has paid me poorly enough, considering that it was +through me that he came into a fine estate. I take it that you give +me your word of honour, that if I make a clean breast of it, and +stick to my story afterwards, this other business shall not be +brought up against me." + +"Yes, we both promise that on our word of honour." + +"Very well then; here goes." + +The story he told was in precise accordance with the suspicions +that his hearers had entertained. He had been tramping through the +country, sometimes pilfering, sometimes taking money as a footpad. +He had, one day, met John Dormay and demanded his money. He was +armed only with a heavy cudgel, and thought Dormay was defenceless. + +The latter, however, produced a pistol from his pocket, and +compelled him to drop his stick; and then, taking him by the +collar, made him walk to his house. He had asked him questions as +to his previous life, and had then given him the choice of going to +jail, or of acting under his instructions, in which case he would +be well rewarded. Naturally, he had chosen the second alternative. +And, having him completely under his thumb, John Dormay had made +him sign a paper, acknowledging his attempt at highway robbery upon +him. + +The rest of the story was already known to his hearers. He had, +several times, overheard the conversations in the dining room, but +had gathered nothing beyond talk of what would be done, if the +Pretender came over. John Dormay had taught him the story of the +assassination plot, and had given him the letters to hide. He now +swore that the whole story was false, and had been told entirely at +the dictation of John Dormay, and from fear of the consequence to +himself, if he refused to obey his orders. + +When he had finished, Tony's wife was called in, and she made her +mark, and her husband signed his name, as witnesses to the +signature of Robert Nicholson. + +"Now, I hope I may have something to eat," the man said, +recklessly. "I am ready to tell my story to whomsoever you like, +but am not ready to be starved." + +"Give him food, Tony," Charlie said, "and keep a sharp lookout +after him. We will go across, and show this paper to the duke." + +"I will bring the matter, at once, before the council," the general +said, when Charlie gave him the document, and briefly stated its +contents. "There is a meeting at three o'clock today. I shall see +the queen previously, and will get her to interest herself in the +matter, and to urge that justice shall be done without any delay. I +will arrange that the man shall be brought before the council, at +the earliest date possible. If you will come here this evening, I +may be able to tell you more. Come at eight. I shall be in then to +dress, as I take supper at the palace, at nine." + +"I have ventured to promise the man that he shall not be hung, my +lord." + +"You were safe in doing so. The rogue deserves the pillory or +branding, but, as he was almost forced into it, and was the mere +instrument in the hands of another, it is not a case for hanging +him. He might be shipped off to the plantations as a rogue and a +vagabond. + +"What are you smiling at?" + +"I was thinking, sir, that, as you said there were a good many of +that class in the army, the man might have the option of enlisting +given him." + +"And so of getting shot in the Netherlands, instead of getting hung +at Tyburn, eh? Well, I will see what I can do." + +At eight o'clock, they again presented themselves. The duke looked +at them critically. + +"You will do," he said. "Put your cloaks on again, and come with +me. Where do you suppose that you are going?" + +"Before the council, sir," Harry suggested. + +"Bless me, you don't suppose that your business is so pressing, +that ministers have been summoned in haste to sit upon it. No, you +are going to sup with the queen. I told her your story this +afternoon. She was much interested in it, and when I informed her +that, young as you both were, you had fought behind Charles of +Sweden, in all his desperate battles, and that he had not only +promoted you to the rank of captain, but that he had, under his own +hand, given you a document expressing his satisfaction at your +conduct and bravery, she said that I must bring you to supper at +the palace. I told her that, being soldiers, you had brought with +you no clothes fit for appearance at court; but, as at little +gatherings there is no ceremony, she insisted that I should bring +you as you are. + +"My wife Sarah went on half an hour ago, in her chair. There will +probably be two others, possibly Godolphin and Harley, but more +likely some courtier and his wife. + +"You do not feel nervous, I hope? After being accustomed to chat +with Charles of Sweden, to say nothing of the Czar of Russia, +Carstairs, you need not feel afraid of Queen Anne, who is good +nature itself." + +Nevertheless, both the young men felt nervous. After being +conducted up some private stairs, the duke led them into an +oak-panelled room, of comparatively small size, lighted by numerous +tapers, which displayed the rich hangings and furniture. A lady was +sitting by the fire. A tall, handsome woman, with a somewhat +imperious face, stood on the rug before her, talking to her, while +a pleasant-looking man, who by his appearance and manner might have +been taken for a country squire, was sitting opposite, playing with +the ears of a spaniel lying on his knee. + +The tall lady moved aside, as they entered, and Charlie noticed a +little glance of affectionate welcome pass between her and the +duke--for the pair were devotedly attached to each other--then he +bowed to the seated lady. + +"Madam," he said, "allow me to present to you the two young +officers, of whose bravery Charles of Sweden has written so +strongly, and whose parents have, with other gentlemen, been driven +from the land by villainy." + +The young men bowed deeply. Anne held out her hand, and each in +turn, bending on one knee, raised it to his lips. + +"There," she said, "let that be the beginning and end of ceremony. +This is not a court gathering, but a family meeting. I want to hear +your stories, and I want you, for the time, to forget that I am +Anne of England. I know that your fathers have always been faithful +to our house, and I hope that their sons will, ere long, do as good +service for me as they have done for a foreign prince. + +"You have not seen these gentlemen yet, Sarah?" + +"No, my husband has kept them to himself." + +"I have had but little time to give them, Sarah, and wanted it all, +to question them on the Swedish modes of warfare." + +"And you thought I should be an interruption? + +"I am glad to meet you both, nevertheless. Since my husband likes +you, I am sure to do so;" and she smiled pleasantly, as she gave a +hand to each. + +They were then introduced to the Prince Consort, George of Denmark. + +At this moment, supper was announced. The queen and the duchess +went in together, followed by the four gentlemen. + +"Lord Godolphin and Mr. Harley were to have been of the party +tonight," the queen said, as she took her seat at table, "but I put +them off till tomorrow, as I wanted to hear these gentlemen's +story." + +During the meal, the conversation was gay. As soon as the last dish +was removed, the party returned to the other room. Then the queen +called upon the young men to tell their story. + +Charlie began, and related up to the time when he had aided in the +rescue of his father from the hands of his escort. Harry told the +story of their military experiences, and then Charlie related his +narrow escape at Warsaw, his adventure with the brigands, and the +fight with the wolves. + +"That is the most exciting of all," the queen said. + +"I think that even you, general, would rather have gone through the +battle of Narva, than have spent that night among the wolves." + +"That would I, indeed, madam, and I doubt if I should have got as +well through it as Captain Carstairs did. I am sure, madam, you +will agree with me, that these young gentlemen ought to be fighting +under our flag, rather than that of Sweden. There is no blame to +them, for they were most unjustly driven from the country; but I +hope that, by Monday at this time, I shall have the pleasure of +presenting a document for your majesty's signature, stating that, +in the opinion of the council, a very grave miscarriage of justice +has taken place; and that the gentlemen, whose estates were four +years ago confiscated, are proved to be innocent of the crime of +which they were accused, and are true and faithful subjects of your +majesty; and that the proceedings against them are hereby quashed, +and their estates restored to them. + +"I had the honour of relating to you, this afternoon, the manner in +which these gentlemen have succeeded in bringing the truth to +light." + +Shortly afterwards, the party broke up, the queen speaking most +graciously to each of the young men. + +On Monday morning, they received a summons to appear before the +council, at two o'clock in the afternoon, and to produce one Robert +Nicholson, whose evidence was required in a matter of moment. They +hired a carriage, and took the highwayman with them to Saint +James's, and were conducted to the council chamber; where they +found Lord Godolphin, the Marquis of Normanby, Mr. Harley, and the +Duke of Marlborough, together with two judges, before whom the +depositions, in the case of Sir Marmaduke Carstairs and his +friends, had been laid. + +Lord Normanby, as privy seal, took the chair, and briefly said +that, having heard there had been a grievous miscarriage of +justice, he had summoned them to hear important evidence which was +produced by Captains Carstairs and Jervoise, officers in the +service of the king of Sweden. + +"What have you to say, Captain Carstairs?" + +"I have, sir, only to testify that this man, who stands beside me, +is Robert Nicholson, who was in my father's employment for two +years, and was, I believe, the principal witness against him. +Captain Jervoise can also testify to his identity. I now produce +the confession, voluntarily made by this man, and signed in the +presence of witnesses." + +He handed in the confession, which was read aloud by a clerk +standing at the lower end of the table. A murmur of indignation +arose from the council, as he concluded. + +"You have acted the part of a base villain," Lord Normanby said to +Nicholson. "Hanging would be too good for such a caitiff. What +induced you to make this confession?" + +"I have long repented my conduct," the man said. "I was forced into +acting as I did, by John Dormay, who might have had me hung for +highway robbery. I would long ago have told the truth, had I known +where to find the gentlemen I have injured; and, meeting them by +chance the other day, I resolved upon making a clean breast of it, +and to take what punishment your lordships may think proper; +hoping, however, for your clemency, on account of the fact that I +was driven to act in the way I did." + +One of the judges, who had the former depositions before him, asked +him several questions as to the manner in which he had put the +papers into Sir Marmaduke's cabinet. + +He replied that he found the key in a vase on the mantel, and after +trying several locks with it, found that it fitted the cabinet. + +"His statement agrees, my lords," the judge said, "with that made +by Sir Marmaduke Carstairs in his examinations. He then said that +he could not account for the papers being in his cabinet, for it +was never unlocked, and that he kept the key in a vase on the +mantel, where none would be likely to look for it." + +In a short time, all present were requested to withdraw, but in +less than five minutes they were again called in. + +"Gentlemen," Lord Normanby said to the young officers, "I have +pleasure in informing you, that the council are of opinion that the +innocence of your fathers and friends, of the foul offence of which +they were charged, is clearly proven; and that they have decided +that the sentence passed against them, in their absence, shall be +quashed. They will also recommend, to her majesty, that the +sentence of confiscation against them all shall be reversed. + +"As to you, sir, seeing that you have, however tardily, endeavoured +to undo the evil you have caused, we are disposed to deal +leniently, and, at the request of the Duke of Marlborough, we have +agreed, if you are ready to leave the country and enlist at once, +as a soldier in the army of Flanders, and there to expiate your +fault by fighting in the service of your country, we will not +recommend that any proceedings shall be taken against you. But if, +at any time, you return hither, save as a soldier with a report of +good conduct, this affair will be revived, and you will receive the +full punishment you deserve. + +"For the present you will be lodged in prison, as you will be +needed to give evidence, when the matter of John Dormay comes up +for hearing." + +Nicholson was at once removed in custody. The two young officers +retired, an usher bringing them a whispered message, from +Marlborough, that they had better not wait to see him, as the +council might sit for some time longer; but that, if they would +call at his house at five o'clock, after his official reception, he +would see them. + +"This is more than we could have hoped for," Harry said, as they +left Saint James's. "A fortnight ago, although I had no intention +of giving up the search, I began to think that our chances of ever +setting eyes on that rascal were of the slightest; and now +everything has come right. The man has been found. He has been made +to confess the whole matter. The case has been heard by the +council. Our fathers are free to return to England, and their +estates are restored to them; at least, the council recommends the +queen, and we know the queen is ready to sign. So that it is as +good as done." + +"It seems too good to be true." + +"It does, indeed, Charlie. They will be delighted across the water. +I don't think my father counted, at all, upon our finding +Nicholson, or of our getting him to confess; but I think he had +hoped that the duke would interest himself to get an order, that no +further proceedings should be taken in the matter of the alleged +plot. That would have permitted them to return to England. He spoke +to me, several times, of his knowledge of the duke when he was a +young man; but Churchill, he said, was a time server, and has +certainly changed his politics several times; and, if a man is +fickle in politics, he may be so in his friendships. It was a great +many years since they had met, and Marlborough might not have been +inclined to acknowledge one charged with so serious a crime. + +"But, as he said to me before I started, matters have changed since +the death of William. Marlborough stands far higher, with Anne, +than he did with William. His leanings have certainly been, all +along, Jacobite, and, now that he and the Tories are in power, and +the Whigs are out of favour, Marlborough could, if he chose, do +very much for us. It is no longer a crime to be a Jacobite, and +indeed, they say that the Tories are intending to upset the act of +succession, and bring in a fresh one, making James Stuart the +successor to Anne. + +"Still, even if we had succeeded so far, by Marlborough's +influence, that our fathers could have returned to England without +fear of being tried for their lives, I do not think that either of +them would have come, so long as the charge of having been +concerned in an assassination plot was hanging over them. + +"Now that they are cleared, and can come back with honour, it will +be different, altogether. It will be glorious news for them. Of +course, we shall start as soon as we get the official communication +that the estates are restored. We shall only have to go back to +them, for, as you know, yours is the only estate that has been +granted to anyone else. The others were put up for sale, but no one +would bid for them, as the title deeds would have been worth +nothing if King James came over. So they have only been let to +farmers, and we can walk straight in again, without dispossessing +anyone." + +"I don't know what to do about John Dormay," Charlie said. "There +is no doubt that, from what the judge said, they will prosecute +him." + +"So they ought to," Harry broke in. "He has striven, by false +swearing, to bring innocent men to the scaffold. Why, it is worse +than murder." + +"I quite agree with you, Harry, and, if I were in your place, I +would say just as strongly as you do that he ought to be hung. But +you see, I am differently situated. The man is a kinsman of ours by +marriage. My cousin Celia has been always most kind to me, and is +my nearest relative after my father. She has been like an aunt, +and, indeed, did all she could to supply the place of a mother to +me; and I am sure my little sweetheart Ciceley has been like a +sister. This must have been a most terrible trial to them. It was a +bad day for cousin Celia when she married that scoundrel, and I am +sure that he has made her life a most unhappy one. Still, for their +sake, I would not see his villainy punished as it deserves, nor +indeed for our own, since the man is, to a certain extent, our +kinsman. + +"Besides, Harry, as you must remember well enough, Ciceley and I, +in boy and girl fashion, used to say we should be some day husband +and wife, and I have never since seen anyone whom I would so soon +marry as my bonny little cousin; and if Ciceley is of the same +mind, maybe some day or other she may come to Lynnwood as its +mistress; but that could hardly be, if her father were hung for +attempting to swear away the life of mine." + +"No, indeed, Charlie. I know how fond you were of your cousin." + +"Indeed, Harry, there was a talk between my father and cousin +Celia, a few months before the troubles came, of a formal betrothal +between us, and, had it not been for the coolness between our +fathers, it would have taken place." + +"Yes, I remember now your telling me about it, Charlie. + +"Well, what is to be done? for I agree with you that, if possible, +John Dormay must escape from the punishment he deserves. But how is +it to be done?" + +"Well, Harry, a week or two will make no difference to our fathers. +They will have no expectation of hearing from us, for a long time +to come. I should say it were best that I should go down and warn +him, and I shall be glad if you will go with me." + +"Of course I will go," Harry said. "Indeed, it were best that the warning +came from me. The man is a villain, and a reckless one; and in his +passion, when he hears that his rascality is known, the prize for which +he schemed snatched from him, and his very life in danger, might even +seek to vent his rage and spite upon you. Now it is clear, Charlie, that +you could not very well kill a man, and afterwards marry his daughter. +The thing would be scarce seemly. But the fellow is no kinsman of mine. +He has grievously injured us, and I could kill him without the smallest +compunction, and thereby rid the world of a scoundrel, and you of a +prospective father-in-law of the most objectionable kind." + +Charlie laughed. + +"No, Harry; we will have no killing. We will go down and see him +together. We will let him know that the orders are probably already +on the road for his arrest, and that he had best lose not an hour, +but at once cross the water. I should not think that he would wish +to encumber himself with women, for I never thought he showed the +least affection to either his wife or daughter. At any rate, we +will see that he does not take them with him. I will tell him that, +if he goes, and goes alone, I will do my best to hush up the +matter; and that, so long as he remains abroad, the tale of his +villainy shall never be told; but that, if he returns, the +confession of Nicholson shall be published throughout the country, +even if no prosecution is brought against him." + +When they called upon the duke, he shook them warmly by the hand. + +"This parchment is the royal assent to the decision of the council, +that the estates of those inculpated in the alleged plot for the +assassination of the late king should be forthwith restored to +them, it having been clearly proved that they have been falsely +accused of the said crime, and that her majesty is satisfied that +these gentlemen are her true and loyal subjects. + +"I think I may say," the duke continued with a smile, "that no +affair of state has ever been so promptly conducted and carried +through." + +"We feel how deeply indebted we are, for our good fortune, to your +kindness, your grace," Charlie said. "We know that, but for you, +months might have elapsed, even years, before we could have +obtained such a result, even after we had the confession of +Nicholson in our hands." + +"I am glad, in every way, to have been able to bring this about," +the duke said. "In the first place, because I have been able to +right a villainous piece of injustice; in the second, because those +injured were loyal gentlemen, with no fault save their steadfast +adherence to the cause of the Stuarts; and lastly, because one of +these gentlemen was my own good friend, Mat Jervoise, of whose +company I have so many pleasant recollections. + +"I hope that, as soon as you have informed your fathers that their +names are cleared, and their property restored, you will think of +what I said, and will decide to quit the service of Sweden, and +enter that of your queen. + +"An officer fighting for a foreign monarch is, after all, but a +soldier of fortune, however valiantly he fights. He is fighting for +a cause that is not his own, and, though he may win rewards and +honours, he has not the satisfaction that all must feel who have +risked their lives, not for gold, but in the service of their +country. But I do not want any answer from you on that head now. It +is a matter for you to decide upon after due thought. I only say +that I shall go out, early in the spring, to take command of the +army; and that, if you present yourselves to me before I leave, I +shall be glad to appoint you on my personal staff, with the same +rank you now hold. + +"You can now leave the country without any farther trouble. As to +the affair of the man Dormay, a messenger has been sent off, this +afternoon, with an order to the magistrates at Lancaster, to arrest +him on the charge of suborning false evidence, by which the lives +of some of her majesty's subjects were endangered; and of forging +letters whereby such evil designs might be furthered. I do not +suppose I shall see you again before you sail, for tomorrow we go +down to our country place, and may remain there some weeks. I may +say that it was the desire to get your affair finished, before we +left town, that conduced somewhat to the speed with which it has +been carried through." + +After again thanking the duke most warmly for his kindness, and +saying that they would lay his offer before their fathers, and that +their own inclinations were altogether in favour of accepting it, +the young men took their leave. + +"It is unfortunate about Dormay." + +"Most unfortunate," Harry said. + +"I think, if we start tomorrow morning, Harry, we shall be in time. +There is no reason why the messenger should travel at any +extraordinary speed, and, as he may be detained at Lancaster, and +some delay may arise before officers are sent up to Lynnwood to +make the arrest, we may be in time. + +"We must take a note of the date. It is one we shall remember all +our lives. It is the 25th of November, and we will keep it up as a +day of festivity and rejoicing, as long as we live." + +"That will we," Harry agreed. "It shall be the occasion of an +annual gathering of those who got into trouble from those suppers +at Sir Marmaduke's. I fancy the others are all in France, but their +friends will surely be able to let them know, as soon as they hear +the good news. + +"I think we shall have a stormy ride tomorrow. The sky looks very +wild and threatening." + +"It does, indeed; and the wind has got up very much, in the last +hour.'' + +"Yes, we are going to have a storm, beyond all doubt." + +The wind got up hourly, and when, before going to bed, they went to +pass an hour at a tavern, they had difficulty in making their way +against it. Several times in the night they were awoke by the +gusts, which shook the whole house, and they heard the crashing of +falling chimney pots above the din of the gale. + +They had arranged to start as soon as it was light, and had, the +evening before, been to a posting inn, and engaged a carriage with +four horses for the journey down to Lancashire. + +"There is no starting today, gentlemen," the landlord said, as they +went down to breakfast by candlelight. "I have looked out, and the +street is strewn with chimney pots and tiles. Never do I remember +such a gale, and hour by hour it seems to get worse. Why, it is +dangerous to go across the street." + +"Well, we must try," Charlie said, "whatever the weather. It is a +matter of almost life and death." + +"Well, gentlemen, you must please yourselves, but I am mistaken if +any horse keeper will let his animals out, on such a day as this." + +As soon as they had eaten their breakfasts, they wrapped themselves +up in their cloaks, pressed their hats over their heads, and +sallied out. It was not until they were in the streets that they +realized how great was the force of the gale. Not only were the +streets strewn with tiles and fragments of chimney pots, but there +was light enough for them to see that many of the upper windows of +the houses had been blown in by the force of the wind. Tiles flew +about like leaves in autumn, and occasionally gutters and sheets of +lead, stripped from the roofs, flew along with prodigious +swiftness. + +"This is as bad as a pitched battle, Charlie. I would as lief be +struck by a cannonball as by one of those strips of lead." + +"Well, we must risk it, Harry. We must make the attempt, anyhow." + +It was with the greatest difficulty that they made their way along. +Although powerful young fellows, they were frequently obliged to +cling to the railings, to prevent themselves from being swept away +by the gusts, and they had more than one narrow escape from falling +chimneys. Although the distance they had to traverse was not more +than a quarter of a mile, it took them half an hour to accomplish +it. + +The post master looked at them in surprise, as they entered his +office flushed and disordered. + +"Why, gentlemen, you are not thinking of going on such a day as +this? It would be a sheer impossibility. Why, the carriage would be +blown over, and if it wasn't, no horses would face this wind." + +"We would be willing to pay anything you may like to ask," Charlie +said. + +"It ain't a question of money, sir. If you were to buy the four +horses and the carriage, you would be no nearer, for no post boy +would be mad enough to ride them; and, even supposing you got one +stage, which you never would do, you would have to buy horses +again, for no one would be fool enough to send his animals out. You +could not do it, sir. Why, I hear there are half a dozen houses, +within a dozen yards of this, that have been altogether unroofed, +and it is getting worse instead of better. If it goes on like this, +I doubt if there will be a steeple standing in London tomorrow. + +"Listen to that!" + +There was a tremendous crash, and, running out into the street, +they saw a mass of beams and tiles lying in the roadway--a house +two doors away had been completely unroofed. They felt that, in +such a storm, it was really impossible to proceed, and accordingly +returned to their lodgings, performing the distance in a fraction +of the time it had before taken them. + +For some hours the gale continued to increase in fury. Not a soul +was to be seen in the streets. Occasional heavy crashes told of the +damage that was being wrought, and, at times, the house shook so +that it seemed as if it would fall. + +Never was such a storm known in England. The damage done was +enormous. The shores were strewn with wrecks. Twelve ships of the +royal navy, with fifteen hundred men, were lost; and an enormous +number of merchant vessels. Many steeples, houses, and buildings of +all kinds were overthrown, and the damage, in London alone, was +estimated at a million pounds. + +There were few who went to bed that night. Many thought that the +whole city would be destroyed. Towards morning, however, the fury +of the gale somewhat abated, and by nightfall the danger had +passed. + +The next morning the two friends started, and posted down to +Lancashire. The journey was a long one. In many places the road was +completely blocked by fallen trees, and sometimes by the ruins of +houses and barns. In the former case, long detours had often to be +made through villainous roads, where the wheels sank almost to +their axles, and, in spite of the most liberal bribes to post boys +and post masters, the journey occupied four days longer than the +usual time. + +At last, they reached the lodge gate of Lynnwood. A man came out +from the cottage. He was the same who had been there in Sir +Marmaduke's time. + +Charlie jumped out of the post chaise. + +"Why, Norman, don't you know me?" + +The man looked hard at him. + +"No, sir, I can't say as I do." + +"What, not Charlie Carstairs?" + +"Bless me, it is the young master!" the man said. "To think of my +not knowing you. But you have changed wonderful. Why, sir, I have +been thinking of you often and often, and most of all the last +three days, but I never thought of you like this." + +"Why the last three days, Norman?" + +"Haven't you heard the news, sir?" + +"No, I have heard nothing. Captain Jervoise and I--my old friend, +you know, Norman--have posted all the way from London, and should +have been here six days ago, if it had not been for the storm." + +"Well, sir, there is bad news; at least, I don't know whether you +will consider it bad. Most of the folk about here looks at it the +other way. But the man in there shot hisself, three days ago. A +magistrate, with some men from Lancaster, came over here. They say +it was to arrest him, but I don't know the rights of the case. +Anyhow, it is said they read some paper over to him, and then he +opened a drawer at the table where he was sitting, and pulled out a +pistol, and shot hisself before anyone could stop him. + +"There have been bad goings here of late, Mr. Charles, very bad, +especially for the last year. He was not friends with his son, they +say, but the news of his death drove him to drink, worse than +before; and besides, there have been dicing, and all sorts of +goings on, and I doubt not but that the ladies have had a terrible +time of it. There were several men staying in the house, but they +all took themselves off, as soon as it was over, and there are only +the ladies there now. They will be glad enough to see you, I will +be bound." + +Charlie was shocked; but at the same time, he could not but feel +that it was the best thing that could happen, and Harry freely +expressed himself to that effect. + +"We won't take the carriage up to the house," Charlie said, after a +long pause. "Take the valises out, and bring them up to the house +presently, Norman." + +He paid the postilion who had brought them from Lancaster, and +stood quiet until the carriage had driven off. + +"I hope Sir Marmaduke is well, sir. We have missed him sorely +here." + +"He was quite well when I saw him, ten weeks ago. I hope he will be +here before long. I am happy to say that his innocence of the +charge brought against him has been proved, and his estates, and +those of Mr. Jervoise and the other gentlemen, have been restored +by the queen." + +"That is good news, indeed, sir," the man exclaimed. "The best I +have heard for many a long year. Everyone about here will go wild +with joy." + +"Then don't mention it at present, Norman. Any rejoicings would be +unseemly, while John Dormay is lying dead there." + +"Shall I go up with you, Charlie, or will you go alone?" Harry +asked. "Of course, there are some horses here, and you could lend +me one to drive over to our own place." + +"You shall do that presently, Harry, and tell them the news. But +come in now. You know my cousin and Ciceley. It will be all the +better that you should go in with me." + +His cousin received Charlie with a quiet pleasure. She was greatly +changed since he had seen her last, and her face showed that she +had suffered greatly. Ciceley had grown into a young woman, and met +him with delight. Both were pleased to see Harry. + +"We were talking of you but now, Charlie," Mrs. Dormay said. +"Ciceley and I agreed that we would remove at once to our old +place, and that this should be kept up for you, should you at any +time be able to return. Now that Queen Anne is on the throne, and +the Tories are in power, we hoped that you, at least, would ere +long be permitted to return. How is your dear father?" + +"He is well, cousin, and will, I trust, be here ere long. Our +innocence of the charge has been proved, the proceedings against us +quashed, and the Act of Confiscation against my father, Mr. +Jervoise, and the others reversed." + +"Thank God for that," Mrs. Dormay said earnestly, and Ciceley gave +an exclamation of pleasure. "That accounts, then, for what has +happened here. + +"I do not want to talk about it, Charlie. You may imagine how +Ciceley and I have suffered. But he was my husband, spare him for +my sake." + +"I will never allude to the subject again, cousin," Charlie said. +"But I must tell you that Harry and I have posted down from London, +in hopes of being in time to warn him, and enable him to escape. I +need not say we did so because he was your husband, and Ciceley's +father." + +Harry then turned the subject, by a remark as to the effects of the +storm. Then Ciceley asked questions as to their life abroad, and +there was so much to tell, and to listen to, that even Mrs. +Dormay's face brightened. Harry willingly allowed himself to be +persuaded to remain for the night, and to ride over to his place in +the morning. + +The funeral took place two days later. Charlie went as sole +mourner. + +"He was my kinsman," he said to Harry, "and, though I can pretend +no sorrow at his death, my attendance at the funeral will do +something towards stopping talk, and will make it easier for my +cousin." + +The next day, Mrs. Dormay and Ciceley returned to Rockley, whose +tenant had fortunately left a few weeks before. Charlie and Harry +both went over with them, and stayed for three or four days, and +they were glad to see that Mrs. Dormay seemed to be shaking off the +weight of her trouble, and was looking more like her old self. + +They then rode to Lancaster, and returned to London by coach. They +crossed to Gottenburg by the first vessel that was sailing, and Sir +Marmaduke was delighted to hear the success of their mission, and +that he was at liberty to return at once, as master of Lynnwood. + +"Luck favoured you somewhat, Charlie, in throwing that vagabond in +your way, but for all else we have to thank you both, for the +manner in which you have carried the affair out, and captured your +fox. As for John Dormay, 'tis the best thing that could have +happened. I have often thought it over, while you have been away, +and have said to myself that the best settlement of the business +would be that you, Harry, when you obtained proofs, should go down, +confront him publicly, and charge him with his treachery, force him +to draw, and then run him through the body. Charlie would, of +course, have been the proper person, in my absence, so to settle +the matter, but he could not well have killed my cousin's husband, +and it would have added to the scandal. + +"However, the way it has turned out is better altogether. It will +be only a nine days' wonder. The man has been cut by all the +gentry, and when it is known that he shot himself to escape arrest, +many will say that it was a fit ending, and will trouble themselves +no more concerning him. + +"You are coming back with me, I hope, Charlie. I have seen but +little of you for the last four years, and if you are, as you say, +going with the Duke of Marlborough to the war in the spring, I +don't want to lose sight of you again till then. You can surely +resign your commission here without going back to the army, +especially as you have leave of absence until the end of March." + +Charlie hesitated. + +"I think so, too," Harry said. "I know that the colonel told the +king the whole story, when he asked for leave for me and obtained +that paper. He told my father that the king was greatly interested, +and said: 'I hope the young fellows will succeed, though I suppose, +if they do, I shall lose two promising young officers.' So he will +not be surprised when he hears that we have resigned. + +"As for me, I shall, of course, go on at once. My father will, I am +sure, be delighted to return home. The hardships have told upon him +a good deal, and he has said several times, of late, how much he +wished he could see his way to retiring. I think, too, he will +gladly consent to my entering our own service, instead of that of +Sweden. He would not have done so, I am sure, had William been +still on the throne. Now it is altogether different." + +"Well, Harry, if you do see the king, as it is possible you may do, +or if you do not, you might speak to the colonel, and ask him, in +my name, to express to Charles my regret at leaving his service, in +which I have been so well treated, and say how much I feel the +kindly interest that his majesty has been pleased to take in me. If +there had been any chance of the war coming to an end shortly, I +should have remained to see it out; but, now that the Polish +business may be considered finished, it will be continued with +Russia, and may go on for years, for the czar is just as obstinate +and determined as Charles himself." + +Accordingly, the next morning, Charlie sent in the formal +resignation of his commission to the war minister at Stockholm, and +Harry left by ship for Revel. Sir Marmaduke placed his business +affairs in the hands of a Scotch merchant at Gottenburg, with +instructions to call in the money he had lent on mortgage, and, two +days later, took passage with Charlie for Hull, whence they posted +across the country to Lancaster, and then drove to Lynnwood. + +As soon as the news spread that Sir Marmaduke had returned, the +church bells rang a joyous peal, bonfires were lighted, the tenants +flocked in to greet him, and the gentry for miles round rode over +to welcome and congratulate him. + +The next morning he and Charlie rode over to Rockley. + +"Oh, Marmaduke," cried Celia, "I am happy indeed to know that you +are back again. I have never known a day's happiness since you +went." + +"Well, don't let us think any more about it, Celia," Sir Marmaduke +said, as he kissed her tenderly. "Let us look on it all as an ugly +dream. It has not been without its advantages, as far as we are +concerned. It has taken me out of myself, and broadened my view of +things. I have not had at all an unpleasant time of it in Sweden, +and shall enjoy my home all the more, now that I have been away +from it for a while. As to Charlie, it has made a man of him. He +has gained a great deal of credit, and had opportunities of showing +that he is made of good stuff; and now he enters upon life with +every advantage, and has a start, indeed, such as very few young +fellows can have. He enters our army as a captain, under the eye of +Marlborough himself, with a reputation gained under that of the +greatest soldier in Europe. + +"So we have no reason to regret the past, cousin, and on that score +you have no cause for grief. As to the future, I trust that it will +be bright for both of us, and I think," he added meaningly, "our +former plans for our children are likely to be some day realized." + +Four years later, indeed, the union that both parents had at heart +took place, during one of the pauses of the fierce struggle between +the British forces under Marlborough, and the French. At Blenheim, +Ramillies, and Oudenarde, and in several long and toilsome sieges, +Charlie had distinguished himself greatly, and was regarded by +Marlborough as one of the most energetic and trustworthy of his +officers. He had been twice severely wounded, and had gained the +rank of colonel. Harry Jervoise--who had had a leg shot away, below +the knee, by a cannonball at Ramillies, and had then left the army +with the rank of major--was, on the same day as his friend, married +to the daughter of one of the gentlemen who had been driven into +exile with his father. + +In the spring Charlie again joined the army, and commanded a +brigade in the desperate struggle on the hill of Malplaquet, one of +the hardest fought battles in the history of war. Peace was made +shortly afterwards, and, at the reduction of the army that +followed, he went on half pay, and settled down for life at +Lynnwood, where Tony Peters and his wife had, at the death of the +former occupant of the lodge, been established. + +When Harry Jervoise returned to the Swedish headquarters, with the +news that his father was cleared, he was the bearer of a very +handsome present from Charlie to his faithful servant Stanislas, +who had, on their return from Poland, been at once employed by +Count Piper on other service. + +When, years afterwards, the young Pretender marched south with the +Highland clans, neither Charlie nor Harry were among the gentlemen +who joined him. He had their good wishes, but, having served in the +British army, they felt that they could not join the movement in +arms against the British crown; and indeed, the strong Jacobite +feelings of their youth had been greatly softened down by their +contact with the world, and they had learned to doubt much whether +the restoration of the Stuarts would tend, in any way, to the +benefit or prosperity of Britain. + +They felt all the more obliged to stand aloof from the struggle, +inasmuch as both had sons, in the army, that had fought valiantly +against the French at Dettingen and Fontenoy. The families always +remained united in the closest friendship, and more than one +marriage took place between the children of Charlie Carstairs and +Harry Jervoise. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A JACOBITE EXILE*** + + +******* This file should be named 18357.txt or 18357.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/8/3/5/18357 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/18357.zip b/18357.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..60204e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/18357.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f27b4db --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #18357 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/18357) |